JP6628456B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine having a display for displaying a symbol in a variable manner, for example, in a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on a game ball winning a winning winning opening, and a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on a display based on the result of the lottery. After a predetermined period has elapsed, a game in which symbols are stopped and displayed is performed. In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol stopped and displayed on the display device has a specific display mode, a jackpot game for controlling opening and closing of the special winning opening is executed, and based on a game ball entering the special winning opening. By paying out a predetermined number of prize balls, the player can acquire a large amount of prize balls (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-54334A

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, if a big hit game is not performed, since a monotonous game in which symbols are displayed on a display is repeated is repeated, freshness is lost, and there is a possibility that gaming interest may be reduced. .

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest by solving the above-described problems.

In order to solve the above object, a gaming machine of the present invention, after a start condition is satisfied, a lottery means for performing a lottery based on the start condition is satisfied,
Display control means for starting variation control of the display means based on establishment of the start condition and deriving and displaying a display result according to the lottery result;
Advantageous giving means which can give a special advantageous state advantageous to a player in response to the start of the fluctuation control executed when the start condition is satisfied and the special result is won in the lottery by the lottery means. And
The advantage giving means for giving the special advantageous state advantageous to the player in response to the start of the fluctuation control, the lottery means for executing the lottery, a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and Of the sub-control means for controlling the effect based on the command transmitted from the main control means, is controlled by the main control means,
The game value that is allowed to be enjoyed by the player during the period in which the special advantage state can be provided by the advantage providing means is greater than the game value that is enabled when a big hit occurs. .

According to the inventions of this, in order to be granted a favorable special advantageous state to the player at the start of the change control was elected to the lottery, the game by becoming an advantageous particularly advantageous state to suddenly player at the start of the change control It is possible to give surprise and surprise to the player, and to pay attention to the start of the fluctuation control while expecting the occurrence of the special advantageous state, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment.

It is a perspective view showing the state where the main part frame was opened to the outer frame of the pachinko machine concerning an embodiment, and the door frame was opened to the main part frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the back of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which constitute the pachinko machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which constitute the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support bracket of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the figure of (A) viewed from below. It is a rear view of the upper support metal part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a lock member. It is a rear view of the upper support metal part for demonstrating the effect | action of a lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from right rear of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the disassembly. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from back and disassembled. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit from the back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and looked at from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit after disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the left side decoration unit after disassembly. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of a left side decoration unit with a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear surface perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the plate unit. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected in the part of the ball rental unit of the plate unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as viewed from the upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the operation unit from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a state where a pressing operation unit in the operation unit is pressed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as exploded and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as exploded and viewed from the rear. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit in the door frame and was disassembled from the front, and (B) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit and looked after. It is a front view showing the state where the front cover of the foul cover unit was removed. It is a front view of a static electricity prevention mechanism. It is a perspective view when the door frame which shows the state provided with the static electricity prevention mechanism is seen from the back. It is a principal part rear view of the door frame which shows the state provided with the static electricity prevention mechanism. FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 56. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball feed unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the rear with the rear case removed. (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member viewed from the front, and (D). FIG. 4 is an explanatory view showing the operation of a fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnects and shows a door frame in the substantially center of an up-down direction. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system | system of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main-body frame. It is a back perspective view of a main part frame. It is a left view of a main body frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front by exploding. It is the perspective view which looked at after disassembling a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main part frame base in a main part frame. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of a main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a hit ball launching device in a main part frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hit ball launching device in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is a back perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the prize ball unit from the disassembly. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the prize ball unit after disassembly. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between a prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in the prize ball unit in a disassembled manner and viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the prize ball apparatus in the prize ball unit later and disassembled. It is a rear view showing the relation between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the rolling path of the ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is a rear surface perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball exit opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the board unit in a main part frame. FIG. 5 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the board unit from the disassembly before. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the board unit. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the terminal board box in a board unit, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the terminal board box in the board unit and looked from the front. (A) is a front view of the firing power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the fastening mechanism in the back cover and was seen from the rear side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a slide rod for a glass door and a slide rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the lock device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the sliding rod for glass doors and the sliding rod for main-body frames in a lock device. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a fraud prevention member in a lock device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main-body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the game board. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in a game board attached to a pachinko machine, and (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming board using a gaming panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 104 and the like, as viewed from the front. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear of FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel of FIG. 107, cut in a vertical direction. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming board using a front component according to an embodiment different from that of the example of FIG. 107 and the like, as viewed from the front. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from behind in FIG. 110. It is a fragmentary sectional view showing the crime prevention structure in the shaft support side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state where a game board was stored in a main part frame. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a front view when the special winning opening of the game board in the pachinko machine is opened. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally back. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematically. It is a block diagram of a door frame base board, a peripheral side relay terminal board, an abnormal sound signal cutoff board, and a lower speaker. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of an abnormal sound signal cutoff board. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main process of the present embodiment executed by a main control MPU. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process at the time of power failure occurrence according to the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interruption processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the special control processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening winning processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st special symbol control processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st change start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st change pattern setting processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during the 1st change of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st big hit game start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st big hit game processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving function setting process of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st interlocking setting processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol control processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd change start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd change pattern setting processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during 2nd fluctuation | variation of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd big hit game start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd big hit game processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd small hitting game start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd small hitting game processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd interlocking setting processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about an example of the normal control process of this embodiment performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the gate passage processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal symbol normal process of this embodiment. It is an example of various tables showing game specifications of a first special symbol and a second special symbol of the present embodiment. It is a figure showing transition of a game state (game mode) of this embodiment. It is an example of a timing chart explaining simultaneous fluctuation control of the present embodiment. It is an example of a timing chart showing an ideal game mode transition in the present embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure about an example of the sub main process of this embodiment performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 16ms steady process performed every 16ms in a sub main process. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a simplified structural diagram of the attacker device, (B) is a front view showing the function display unit in an enlarged manner, and (C) is a front view showing the 7-segment display in an enlarged manner. It is an example of various tables showing game specifications of a first special symbol and a second special symbol of the second embodiment. It is a figure showing transition of a game state (game mode) of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of the control pattern of the simultaneous variation control structure of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st change start processing in a basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st big hit game processing in the basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking setting processing in the basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd change start processing in the basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd big hit game processing in the basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd small hitting game processing in the basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlock setting process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the right strike penalty setting process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the liquid crystal display processing in the basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the right strike penalty alerting | reporting process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st change start processing in the priority control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st priority determination process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during the 1st change in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking setting process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd change start processing in the priority control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd priority determination process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during 2nd change in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlock setting process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a procedure of a forced off effect addition process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment, and (B) shows a special symbol change when an additional off notification effect is set in the forced off effect addition process. 9 is a timing chart of effect display on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st special design control processing in the interruption control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd special symbol control processing in the interruption control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the restart effect change process in the interruption control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of the effect after the restart in the restart effect change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking setting process in the modification of the interruption control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking setting process in the modification of the interruption control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during the 1st change in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking setting process in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during the 2nd change in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlock setting process in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. 9 is a timing chart illustrating reset setting in a reset control pattern according to the second embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing roughly the control composition in the pachinko machine of a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st special symbol control processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd special symbol control processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st change pattern setting processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is an example of various tables showing game specifications of a first special symbol and a second different symbol of the third embodiment. It is a figure showing transition of a game state (game mode) of a 3rd embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart shown about ideal game mode transition in a 3rd embodiment. It is an example of a fluctuation pattern table selected in a rush preparation mode. It is an example of the timing chart which showed the effect content performed when the start timing of the rush mode was changed. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st change pattern setting processing in a 4th embodiment. It is an example of various tables showing game specifications of a first special symbol and a second different symbol of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure showing transition of a game state (game mode) of a 4th embodiment. It is an example of the fluctuation pattern table selected in the rush mode of the fifth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a 6th embodiment. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of 6th Embodiment from right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of 6th Embodiment from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of a 6th embodiment from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board of 6th Embodiment for every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board of 6th Embodiment for every main structure, and was seen from behind. It is the front view which cut the front component and the front unit in the game board of a 6th embodiment in the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game field. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the starting port unit in the front unit of 6th Embodiment from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the starting port unit of 6th Embodiment from back. (A) is a perspective view of the lower side unit and the upper side of the side unit in the front unit of the sixth embodiment viewed from the front, and (b) is a lower side unit and the upper side of the side unit of the sixth embodiment viewed from the rear. It is a perspective view. It is the perspective view which looked at the center thing of the front unit of a 6th embodiment from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center thing of the front unit of a 6th embodiment from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the right flow path in the center role of 6th Embodiment in a cross section. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the second attacker unit in the center accessory of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in (a). It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of a 6th embodiment from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of a 6th embodiment from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit of 6th Embodiment for every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit of a 6th embodiment for every main composition, and was seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the back box and the like in the gaming board of the sixth embodiment viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back box and the like of the sixth embodiment viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the back rear movable effect unit of the rear unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rear lower movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from the rear. It is. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the rear underside movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is a rear underside movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled every main structure and looked at after. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the rotation drive unit of the lower back rear movable production unit of 6th Embodiment together with the back lower first decoration body and the back lower rear second decoration body from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit of 6th Embodiment, and looked from the back with the 1st decoration body after back and the 2nd decoration body after back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of the back lower movable effect unit of 6th Embodiment from the front. (A) is a front view of the back lower movable effect unit in the normal state of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is the lower back first decorative body and the lower back lower from the normal state of the sixth embodiment. It is a front view in the state where the two decorations were rotated together and the second decoration surface of the second decoration after the back was turned to the front, and (c) is the first decoration after the bottom in the state of (b). It is the front view of the state where the 2nd decoration body after back and back was moved to the movement end of the left side in front view. FIG. 224 (d) shows the state in FIG. 224 (c), in which the back lower first decorative body and the lower back lower decorative body are rotated together so that the lower decorative back first decorative body faces the front. It is a front view of a state, (e) rotates a 1st decoration body after backing from the state of (d), opens a 1st decoration body after backing and a 2nd decoration body after backing, and shows a back decoration. It is a front view in the state where the 2nd decoration surface of the 1st decoration object and the 2nd decoration surface of the 2nd decoration object after back back turned to the front. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit of the back unit of the sixth embodiment viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment viewed from the back. It is. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the back upper left movable production unit of a 6th embodiment from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper left movable effect unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from behind. (A) is a front view showing the back upper left movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment in a normal state, (b) is a back upper left first decorative body and a back upper left movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment; It is a front view which shows the state which moved the back upper left second decorative body to the position of the right end in front view, (c) is the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second from the state of (b). It is a front view shown in the state where a decoration was developed. (A) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from the back. . (A) is a front view showing the back left movable production unit of the sixth embodiment in a normal state, and (b) is a state in which the back left movable decorative body in the back left movable production unit of the sixth embodiment is projected. FIG. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper middle movable effect unit of the back unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper middle movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from the back. It is. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is a rear upper middle movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled every main structure and was seen from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper middle decoration body unit of the back upper middle movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment viewed from the front, and (b) is a back upper middle decoration body unit of the sixth embodiment viewed from the back. It is the perspective view seen. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper middle decoration body unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper middle decoration body unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from behind. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the drive structure of the back upper middle decoration body unit of 6th Embodiment from the front, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line in (a). (A) is a front view of the back upper middle decorative body unit in the normal state of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a pair of back upper middle decorative bodies of the back upper middle decorative body unit of the sixth embodiment. It is a front view which shows in the state which opened half outside to the outside, (c) is a state in which the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies of the back upper middle decorative body unit of the sixth embodiment are completely opened outward. FIG. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper middle drive unit of the back upper middle movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper middle drive unit of the rear upper middle movable effect unit as viewed from the back. is there. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle drive unit of the sixth embodiment, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is a main rear upper drive unit of the sixth embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled every structure and was seen from behind. FIG. 17A is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle drive unit of the sixth embodiment viewed from the front, with the rear middle drive unit thereof being disassembled, and FIG. 16B is a rear view of the rear upper middle drive unit of the sixth embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the rear from the upper middle rotation unit when it was disassembled. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of the back upper middle movable production unit of 6th Embodiment roughly from the front. (A) is a front view of a middle back-to-center movable effect unit in the normal state of the sixth embodiment, and (b) lowers a middle-back upper decorative body unit in the middle-back-to-center movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from the rear. It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower front movable effect unit of 6th Embodiment except the back lower front decoration body unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower front movable effect unit of 6th Embodiment except the back lower front decoration body unit, and was seen from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower back front decoration body unit of the lower back front movable effect unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower front decoration body unit of the back lower front movable effect unit of 6th Embodiment, and was seen from behind. It is a front view which shows roughly the raising / lowering mechanism in the back lower front movable effect unit of 6th Embodiment. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the state of the decoration body unit raising / lowering mechanism when the back lower front decoration body unit of 6th Embodiment is raised, (b) is a part of the unit raising / lowering pin in (a). (C) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the unit elevating pin and the elevating slit by further enlarging (b). (A) It is a front view which shows the lower back front movable effect unit of 6th Embodiment in a normal state, (b) is a front view which shows the state which raised the back lower front decoration body unit from the state of (a). (C) is a front view showing a state in which the lower back front first decorative body of the lower back front decorative body unit is raised from the state of (b). A state in which the second back decoration unit and the second back decoration unit are rotated together in a normal position in the back rear movable effect unit of the back unit according to the sixth embodiment so that the second decoration surface faces the front. It is a front view of the game board shown by. In the sixth embodiment, the first decorative body and the second back decorative body are closed, and the first decorative surface of the first decorative body is directed toward the front. In the game area in the left-right direction substantially in the horizontal direction, and at the same time, the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second decorative body of the back upper left movable effect unit are positioned substantially in the horizontal direction center in the game area. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where it was slid. From the state of FIG. 253, the first decorative body after the back of the movable effect unit after the back is opened by rotating the hinge, and the second decorative surfaces of the first decorative body after the back and the second decorative body after the back are fronted. While turning the hinge on the back upper left second decorative body of the back upper left movable production unit to open the fixed decorative member of the back upper left first decorative body and the second decorative member of the back upper left second decorative body. It is a front view of the game board shown toward the front. From the state of FIG. 253, the first decorative body after the back of the movable effect unit after the back is opened by rotating the hinge, and the second decorative surfaces of the first decorative body after the back and the second decorative body after the back are fronted. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state facing. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back left movable decoration object of the back left movable production unit of the back unit of a 6th embodiment in the state where it slid to the appearance position of the right end in front view. In the back unit of the sixth embodiment, the back upper middle decoration unit of the back upper middle movable effecting unit is moved to the position of the descending end, and the back upper middle decoration unit extends obliquely downward and to the left in front view. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state rotated in the clockwise direction. 257 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the pair of back upper middle decorations is separated from the state of FIG. 257 and is slid to a position of a half-open intermediate opening state. FIG. 262 is a front view of the game board in a state where the pair of back upper middle decorations is further separated from the state of FIG. 258 and is slid to a fully opened position. It is a front view of the game board in which the back lower front decoration body unit of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit of the sixth embodiment is located at the rising end. 260 is a front view of the game board in a state in which the back lower front first decorative body is hinge-rotated from the state of FIG. 260 to ascend above the back lower front second decorative body. It is a block diagram showing roughly the control composition of the pachinko machine of a 6th embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a procedure of a main process executed by the main control MPU of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is an interrupt process periodically executed by the main control MPU of the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by the main control MPU of a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the production preliminary judgment processing performed by the main control MPU of a 6th embodiment. (A) is a pre-judgment table used for effect pre-judgment processing, and (B) is a table for details of types of pre-judgment information determined by the pre-judgment table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination processing performed by the main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used in the lottery process for the big hit in the sixth embodiment, (B) is a reach determination table used in the lottery process for the reach in the sixth embodiment, (C) ) Is a symbol determination table used in the lottery process for the type of big hit according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st change pattern setting processing performed by the main control MPU of a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design change processing performed by the main control MPU of a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop processing performed by the main control MPU of a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the peripheral control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about 16ms regular processing performed by peripheral control MPU of a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about notice judgment processing performed by peripheral control MPU of a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect control processing performed by the peripheral control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the change production start processing performed by peripheral control MPU of a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the change production end processing performed by peripheral control MPU of a 6th embodiment. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the effect content of the specific notice effect of 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about monochrome notice execution processing performed by peripheral control MPU of a 7th embodiment. It is an area occupation pattern determination table used to determine an area occupation pattern in the execution of the monochrome notice effect of the seventh embodiment. It is an example which shows the area | region where a notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device in execution of the monochrome notice effect of the seventh embodiment. It is an effect example when the monochrome notice effect of the seventh embodiment is executed. It is an effect example when the monochrome notice effect of the seventh embodiment is executed.

[Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, an entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment, and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame constituting the pachinko machine as viewed from behind, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, a main body frame, and a game board constituting the pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front.

  1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and a front side opened by being pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 to be freely openable and closable. A game frame 4 having a box frame-shaped main frame 3, a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball as a game medium is driven, and a front face of the main frame 3 and the game panel 4 A door frame 5 pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable so as to be closed from the side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball arranged below the game window 101 to store game balls. The game machine includes a plate-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by a player to drive game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, and a door frame 5 each formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape extending vertically in a front view. Of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2. At a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, a decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged such that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatable at a position on the front left side of the outer frame 2. The main frame 3 and the right end of the door frame 5 move forward with respect to the outer frame 2 to be in an open state.

  The pachinko machine 1 has a game area 1100 where a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 as viewed from the front, and projects forwardly below the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged vertically. In addition, a handle device 500 for a player to operate is disposed at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player operates the handle device 500 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the player rotates the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting ball strength corresponding to the rotation angle, so that the player can play a game.

  Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and although the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, the player cannot view the inside of the game area 1100. It is configured such that a hand or the like cannot be inserted to touch a game ball, an obstacle nail, various prize holes, an accessory, or the like in the game area 1100. In addition, various control boards are provided on the rear side of the main body frame 3, and a cover 1250 that closes so as to cover the rear of the game board 4 is provided.

[Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure of the upper support of the main frame and the upper support of the outer frame. FIG. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support member of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction and left and right sides extending in the vertical (up and down) direction. It has frame plates 12, 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting ends of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13, and the connecting members 14 use the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13. By connecting them, they are assembled in a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of this example are formed of a solid material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, or the like). And an engagement notch 15 which is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In addition, on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, a mounting step 10a recessed from other general surfaces is formed, and an upper support fitting 20 described later is mounted on the mounting step 10a. It has become.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material (for example, aluminum alloy) having a fixed cross section, the outer side surface is substantially flat, and the inner side surface projects inward at the rear end. The protruding portion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the up-down direction (extrusion direction) is provided to enhance the strength and rigidity (see FIGS. 9 and 112). A plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facilities of the game hall, etc. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held as a finger hook, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there are some drawings in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 and is fixed in the left-right direction. The plate-shaped horizontal piece 17 extends from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the up-down direction and is fixed to the side frame plates 12, 13, and the vertical piece 18 is opposite to the plate-shaped vertical piece 18. And a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 that can be inserted into and engaged with the engaging notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively left-right asymmetric. And the vertical piece 18 is divided into front and rear portions. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes. Have been.

  The connecting member 14 has an upper surface and a lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 has an engagement notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. A predetermined screw is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19 in a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame It is adapted to be fixed to the plate 11. The connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates through the side frame plates 12, 13 in a state where the vertical pieces 18 are in contact with the upper inner side surfaces of the side frame plates 12, 13, and a predetermined screw is formed. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12, 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It has become. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates through the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state where the vertical piece 18 abuts against the lower inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13 and a predetermined screw. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The four connecting members 14 allow the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 to be connected. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of the present example is fixed to an upper support bracket 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10, and is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower side of the left side frame plate 12 so as to face the upper support bracket 20. A lower supporting metal member 21, a reinforcing metal member 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower supporting metal member 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and fixed to a front surface of the reinforcing metal member 22. Decorative cover 23. The upper support 20 and the lower support 21 support the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so that they can be opened and closed.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20 a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projecting piece 20 b projecting forward from the front end of the fixing piece 20 a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, A support hook hole 20c formed by notching so as to bend from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a left side frame hanging down from the left ends of the fixing piece 20a and the support projecting piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts on the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e (see FIG. 14A) that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the supporting projecting piece 20b. 14), and a stop hanging part 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the entrance end of the support hook hole 20c. A support pin 633 (see FIG. 67) of an upper support 630 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support 20. Further, the upper support member 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by the fixing pieces 20a and the hanging fixing pieces 20d.

  In the upper support fitting 20, the strength of the support projecting piece 20b is increased by a hanging wall 20e hanging down from the outer edge of the support projecting piece 20b. Can be concealed so that the lock member 27 disposed on the back surface of the player cannot be seen from the player side, so that the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a V-shape so as to be inclined from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. The width of the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12 rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a. 21b, a plate-shaped support protrusion 21c protruding forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a beyond the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin-shaped protrusion protruding upward from near the front end of the support protrusion 21c. And a support projection 21d. A main frame support formed on a main frame support 644 (see FIG. 70 and the like) of the main frame 3 described below is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support 21. After the support projection 21d of the support fitting 21 is inserted into the support hole of the main frame support 644 in the main body frame 3, the support pin 633 of the upper support 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked in the support hook hole 20c. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be easily pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 at a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24, 25 are formed in a substantially L-shape in plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (FIG. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are connected to the hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 97) of the lock device 1000 attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described later in detail, the hooks 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing plates 24 and 25 by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating one side. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2.

  Further, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing bracket 22. The guide plate 26 is provided for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is exchangeably mounted and fixed.

  In addition, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support protrusion 20b of the upper support fitting 20, as shown in FIG. It is rotatably supported with respect to it. The lock member 27 is formed of a synthetic resin, and has a stopper 27a protruding forward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and is shorter than the stopper 27a rightward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28. An operating portion 27b protruding, an elastic piece 27c protruding from a side opposite to a position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and a distal end of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. And an arc-shaped tip surface 27d. As shown, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L-shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operation portion 27b. The elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a width smaller than that of the stopper 27a or the operation unit 27b, and to extend forward as the distance from the stopper 27a to the left increases.

  As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support projecting piece 20 b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the distal end contact portion of the elastic piece 27 c has a hanging wall. The stopper 27a is in contact with the inner side surface of the support hook hole 20c so that the stopper 27a closes the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c. Is not closed, and a space in which the pivot pin 633 of the upper pivot bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the leading space of the support hook hole 20c. .

  The support mechanism of the pivot pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example is such that the pivot pin 633 is inserted into the distal end space of the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c, and the stopper 27a A state in which the front end side faces the stop hanging part 20f at the entrance end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the front end side of the stopper part 27a and the stop hanging part 20f, and the state is in contact. In the normal pivoted state (not shown), each of the pivot pin 633 located in the distal end space of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c formed by bending and the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a. The center is shifted obliquely and faces each other. In this normal pivoting state, the pivoting pin 633 that pivotally supports the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip of the support hook hole 20c. Since the load is hardly applied to the distal end surface 27d of the stopper 27a from the above, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. In addition, since the tip of the stopper 27a is provided with an arc-shaped tip surface 27d, when the operating part 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27, the lock member 27 rotates smoothly. Has become. Further, in the figure, the center of the arc of the tip end surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the pivot pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c and comes into contact with the arc-shaped distal end surface 27d, the acting force F is applied to the pivot. A component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the distal end surface 27d) acting on a contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped distal end surface 27d, and one side of the inclined pin portion of the pivot pin 633 and the support hook hole 20c. When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). There is no moment for rotating the tip in the direction (clockwise direction in the figure) in which the tip departs from the support projecting piece 20b, and the pivot pin 633 moves between the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c. Maintain the state of being sandwiched between To. For this reason, even in the normal support state or the state in which the acting force of the support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded, and the elastic piece integrally formed of the synthetic resin is used. The plastic deformation of the piece 27c due to creep can be prevented, and the pivot pin 633 can be prevented from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied to rotate the distal end of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 in a direction (clockwise direction in the drawing) to be disengaged from the support projecting piece 20b, one side of the distal end of the stopper 27a may be rotated. The lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b because the lock member 27 does not rotate in the direction in which it comes into contact with the stop hanging portion 20f and further comes off.

  Even if the shape of the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arc-shaped, the distal end portion of the stopper member 27a faces the outside of the support projecting piece 20b at a position where no rotational moment is generated by the action of the component force F1. By positioning the rotation center (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) of the lock member 27 at a position where a rotational moment for rotating the lock member 27 is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times. Even if the member 27 rotates, the present applicant has pointed out that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b because only one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a contacts the stop hanging portion 20f even if the member 27 rotates. I have confirmed.

  The operation of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. Assuming that the body frame 3 is supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support bracket is provided in a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in a body frame shaft support 644 (see FIG. 67) of the body frame 3. 21 need to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16 (A), the pivot pin 633 of the upper pivot bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is brought into contact with the side surface of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 and is pushed in. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the pivot pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. When the pivot pin 633 reaches the leading space of the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the pivot pin 633 does not come into contact with the tip side surface of the stopper 27a. Therefore, the lock member 27 is rotated clockwise by being urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the entrance portion of the support hook hole 20c. The tip of the stopper 27a faces the pivot pin 633 so that the pivot pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook hole 20c.

  This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support hook hole 20c. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the body frame 3 is lifted, and the engagement between the body frame shaft support hole formed in the body frame shaft support 644 and the support protrusion 21 d of the lower support metal 21 is released, so that the body frame 3 is moved to the outer frame 2. It can be removed from.

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the related art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of light metal ( For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility lined up in a game arcade, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing the pachinko machine 1 at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical surface of the island because the extruded material is an aluminum alloy). However, since such an operation is performed by nailing the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nail can be easily hammered, and the pachinko machine 1 can be installed on the existing island facility without any problem. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a light-weight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded material, the thickness can be reduced while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. A game board 4 having a large left-right width when viewed from the front of a peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 67 and the like) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and having a large size in the left-right direction. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3 and, at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12, 13. The outer frame 2 is fastened tightly to the inner surface, and is fastened in a state where the connecting member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other. It can be used as a rectangular framework. After the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached to a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member that protrudes outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, (Adjacent ball rental machine) can be mounted in close contact.

[Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear right. FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back.

  As shown, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the game window 101 on the front of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. There is a left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, and an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

  Further, the door frame 5 includes a plate unit 300 attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100 below the gaming window 101, an operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the plate unit 300, and a door penetrating the plate unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball; and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 disposed behind the plate unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. , A ball feed unit 580 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and mounted to close the gaming window 101 behind the door frame base unit 100. And a glass unit 590.

[Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 28 shows a state of wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view which expands and shows.

  As shown, the door frame base unit 100 of the present example has a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and which penetrates in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a vertically long substantially elliptical shape. A frame base body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 disposed on the front left and right outer sides of the gaming window 101 on the front of the door frame base body 110, and a speaker for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base body 110. A bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 attached to the front lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 to support the handle device 500 are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like outside the right side speaker 130 in a front view. Further, a cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111, and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not interfere when the side speaker 130 is mounted or removed. It has become.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is configured such that a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and a lower portion of the gaming window 101 are covered with a rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and a left side (open side) ) And a firing cover 191 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the gaming window 101, and a rotation position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the firing cover 191. A handle device relay board 192 for relaying the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100, and a rear side of the handle device relay board 192 is covered. The door frame is disposed on a side opposite to the firing cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 with respect to the center in the left-right direction (right side (axial support side) of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear) with the middle device relay board cover 193 therebetween. A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base body 110, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a pivotally rotatably supported by the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. A wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of a wiring 196 (see FIG. 28) that connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side.

  In the door frame base unit 100 of the present example, a reinforcing unit 150 in which a metal sheet metal is assembled with rivets or the like is fixed to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of a synthetic resin, thereby increasing the overall rigidity. In addition, it has a strength that can sufficiently support the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The door frame base substrate 194 of the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. 4140, and includes an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the signal to each speaker 130. In this example, the decorative units 200, 240, and 280, the decorative boards 430 and 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a and 432b provided in the operation unit 400, respectively. 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the wire lending unit 360 of the dish unit 300, etc., and the wiring 196 connecting the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. Side), is bundled together at a position (side), and while being described in detail later, is held by the wiring holding member 197 and extends rearward, and the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3 are extended. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

  The door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape by a synthetic resin as shown in FIGS. The substantially elliptical gaming window 101 is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the left and right inner edges of the gaming window 101 are formed in a continuous smooth curved shape, while the lower inner edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. ing. In addition, a square notch 101a at the lower inner peripheral edge of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110, through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the pivot side (left side in front view). Is formed. In the door frame base body 110, the upper side formed by the gaming window 101 and the width of the left and right sides are the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151, the pivot side supporting sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. , And the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body 110 in a front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 disposed on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider game area 1100 than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It has become.

  The door frame base main body 110 is, besides the game window 101, a speaker mounting portion 111 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101 for mounting and fixing the side speakers 130, and a ball feed unit 580. The game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 penetrating in a front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feed unit mounting concave portion 112 (see FIG. 26) and the ball feed unit mounting concave portion 112 for the ball feeding unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supply and a handle mounting for mounting a handle bracket 140 inclined obliquely so that the right (open side) end of the front surface which is disposed at the lower right corner in the front view and bulges forward is retracted. A wire passage opening 115 through which a wire from the handle device 500 can pass through in a front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114; Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base main body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 below the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and a door frame base main body in rear view. A board mounting portion 118 disposed on the lower right side (supporting side) for mounting the door frame base substrate 194, and a position closer to the center than the speaker mounting portion 111 on the left side (open side) of the lower end of the gaming window 101 when viewed from the rear side (open side). The security cover mounting portion 119 that protrudes rearward and mounts the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 have a rearwardly recessed glass unit 590 substantially along the inner circumference of the gaming window 101. And a glass unit supporting step 110a with which the outer peripheral edge of the front surface of the game unit 101 can abut, and a glass unit locking member 190 which projects rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 and can be rotated. Further comprises a, and two of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, there is provided a door frame protruding piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower side by a predetermined amount, and the door frame protruding piece 110c is provided with an engagement groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through a gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Also, the tool can be prevented from entering by the door frame projection 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, a positioning projection 110d that projects rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in rear view and that fits into the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3 is provided. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d into the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base body 110 has a plurality of mounting bosses 110e protruding forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the plate unit 300, and the like on the front surface thereof. In addition, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. In the door frame base body 110, a mounting boss 110g for mounting a speaker bracket 132 for mounting the side speaker 130 and a mounting hole 110h (see FIG. 18 and the like) for mounting the side speaker cover 338 are appropriately positioned. Are formed respectively.

  Further, in the door frame base main body 110, between the ball feeding unit mounting concave portion 112 and the substrate mounting portion 118, the lower tray ball supply port 310g in the tray unit base 310 of the tray unit 300 described later and the At a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b, a rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  Further, the door frame base main body 110 has a shallow dish-shaped security recess 120 formed on the front side above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 and recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A security member 121 formed in a shallow box shape from the front side is inserted into the security recess 120. The security member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape with a front side opened by bending a metal plate. Accordingly, in order to perform an illegal act on the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, a hole made by a thin drill or the like from a joint portion between the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the plate unit 300 is made of metal. It can be prevented by the security member 121, and it is possible to prevent improper conduct.

  Although a detailed illustration of the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is omitted, the intersection of the center axes is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1 m) from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view. .5m) so that the sound reaches the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 most efficiently. The side speaker 130 mainly outputs sounds in the mid-high range, and is disposed at a position as far away from the pachinko machine 1 as possible in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speakers 130, it is possible to output sounds with high stereo feeling.

  The outer periphery of the side speakers 130 is sandwiched between the substantially annular speaker bracket 132 arranged on the front side and the speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 arranged on the rear side, so that the door frame is It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is mounted on the mounting boss 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side by a predetermined screw.

  The door frame base board cover 195 of the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape having an open front side as shown in FIGS. Is provided with a stepped portion 195a which is depressed forward at a position slightly lower than the center. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending long in the lateral direction, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, and has an I-shaped cross section. , Made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 has a plurality of (in this example, three each for upper and lower sides) holding holes 197a at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. When the door frame 5 is assembled, the end of the wiring holding member 197 on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 is vertically attached to the rear step portion 195 a of the door frame base board cover 195. The wiring holding member 197 is rotatably supported about the extended axis, and although not shown in detail, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is turned toward the door frame base board cover 195, so that the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. The door frame base board cover 195 can be accommodated in the step portion 195a.

  The wiring holding member 197 is provided with a predetermined binding band in a pair of holding holes 197 a in a state where wiring 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is arranged on the rear surface side. The wire 196 can be held by tightening the wire 196 together with the wire holding member 197 by passing the wire 198 through the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in a direction to close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring 196 to the main body frame 3. As a result, it is pushed forward to rotate in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. As a result, as the door frame 5 closes, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base board cover 195, and the wiring 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side becomes free end. The bend becomes large (sharp) in the vicinity. Then, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring 196 is folded horizontally in two on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the closed door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively separated from each other, so that the wiring is held by the wiring 196 connected to the main body frame 3. The free end side of the member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 smoothly rotates so that the free end side moves away from the door frame base board cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). Thus, the wiring 196 folded at the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is developed so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being hindered by the wiring 196.

  As described above, according to this example, the end of the wiring holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported is moved so that the free end moves toward the body frame 3. The rear frame is rotatably supported and a part of the wiring 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring 196 can be laterally folded or unfolded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is caught or pinched when the door frame 5 is opened or closed. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles (breakage of the wiring 196, disconnection of the connector, etc.).

  Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when force is applied via the wiring 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, The wiring 196 can be prevented from being blurred in the direction, and the wiring 196 can be reliably folded in the horizontal direction to prevent the occurrence of a problem.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a state is obtained in which a bridge is hung between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part of the wiring is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the door frame 5 cannot be closed or the door frame 5 cannot be closed, and a main control board 4100, a peripheral control unit 4140, a payout control board 4110, and the like as the main body-side electric device, and a door side. Decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, speakers 130, 222, 262, ball rental unit 360, Bundle 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  In addition, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197. Even when the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 rotates. Since the force can be released, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and to prevent a problem such as the wiring 196 being pulled and being disconnected or the connector from being disconnected. it can. Further, since a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is only partially bent with the rotation of the wiring holding member 197, a conventional one (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-2113675) is used. 2), the wiring 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from rubbing and causing problems such as electric leakage and disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted through a plurality of penetrating holding holes 197a arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. The held binding band 198 can be prevented from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and the wiring 196 together with the binding band 198 can be reliably prevented from falling off from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

  Further, even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side supporting the door frame 5, as described above, the wiring 196 is formed by the wiring holding member 197. Since the wiring 196 can be prevented from hanging down when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding (guidance), the strength and rigidity of the side frame side of the door frame 5 that is supported by the shaft are enhanced. And the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention against fraudulent acts.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with ridges protruding from both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction at least to the side along which the wiring 196 extends, the wiring is formed by a pair of ridges and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the ridge, the bending rigidity of the plate-shaped wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from bending when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a favorable state.

  Further, the length from the base end to the tip end of the wiring holding member 197 is set to be substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the axis of the base end, and the main body frame 3 extends in the wiring 196. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axis of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Since a pantograph-like link is formed at the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, the wiring for opening and closing the door frame 5 is formed. The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, and the like can be made smooth, so that the opening and closing work can be easily performed. In addition, a problem such as disconnection is caused by reducing an excessive force acting on the wiring 196 or the like. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-shaped link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, a portion of the wiring 196 extending from the distal end of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back on the distal end side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compacted, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  Further, the door frame 5 is recessed in the door frame base board cover 195 of the door frame 5 which pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base board cover 195. Since it is stored in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, and the door frame 5 can be easily closed. The wiring 196 can be made compact and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by another member, thereby preventing a problem from occurring.

  Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is in the closed state, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (the door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced as much as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force, an impact force, or the like that opens and closes the door frame 5. Thus, it is possible to reliably achieve the above-described operation and effect. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and there is no need to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, the space for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 relatively. The pachinko machine 1 having a large game board 4 capable of holding a game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 and having a large game board 4 can strongly attract a player's interest. it can.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 of the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft from the rear end of the tubular portion 141 to the axis of the tubular portion 141. An annular flange portion 142 extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction, and a plurality (three in this example) of ridges projecting into the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110. Although not shown, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 substantially coincides with the wire passage port 115 when attached to the handle attaching portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one ridge 143 on the upper side and two ridges 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these ridges 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three grooves 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three grooves 502a of the handle device 500 match. I have. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 that is inclined obliquely, so that the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 extends to the right (open side) as it goes forward in front view. The shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is also inclined obliquely.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back side of the upper side of the door frame base body 110, and a door frame base body. 110, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 mounted along the back side of the open side edge of the door frame base body 110, and a support side reinforcing sheet metal 153 mounted along the back side of the open side side of the door frame base body 110. And a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 attached along the lower surface of the lower side of the gaming window 101, and these are formed in a square shape by being mutually fastened with screws or rivets.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 has an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having upper and lower ends of a shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 and a shaft pin 155 provided on the upper surface so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. And a lower shaft support 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper and lower shaft supports 630 and 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3 on the shaft support side, so that the door frame 5 is moved relative to the body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially equal to the lateral width dimension of the door frame base body 110. A lower bent protruding piece 159 that is bent forward (see FIG. 25), and an upper bent protruded piece 160 that is bent forward toward the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in a front view. And a vertically bent protruding piece 161 which is bent rearward at the center of the upper long side edge and extends vertically. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by a lower bent protrusion 159 and an upper bent protrusion 160. The vertically bent protruding piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with a locking piece 592b formed at a lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertically bent protruding piece 161 is locked by the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is moved in the left and right direction and It can be restricted from moving backward. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 has a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101 a of the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 has open-side outer bent protruding pieces 163 bent rearward on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. And an open-side inner bent protrusion 164. The open-side inner bent protrusion 164 is formed to extend rearward longer than the open-side outer bent protrusion 163 as shown in the figure. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 is provided at a lower rear portion of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 in contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 described later. Further, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped support-side U-shaped protruding piece 166 which extends rearward at an outer end of a long side thereof and opens outward on the support side (FIG. 112). In addition, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent protruding pieces 167 bent rearward on both sides of its long side.

  The supporting-side reinforcing metal plate 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported on the main body frame 3 only at the upper and lower two points of an upper supporting portion 156 and a lower supporting portion 158. If an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the supporting metal plate 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased, thereby causing an illegal operation. Although the act may be easily performed, the strength of the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased because the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example includes the supporting-side U-shaped protrusion 166. , The pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. The U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that a front end piece 952b of a side security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the U-shape (FIG. 112), the insertion of the tool can be prevented, and the bending of only the pivot-support-side reinforcing metal plate 152 can be prevented, so that the security function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. This security cover 180 is provided with a security function for covering the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent unauthorized devices from entering the game board 4. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing sheet metals 152 and 153, and the upper side thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4. The contact recess 181 is formed, and a post-security piece 182 protruding rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, on both left and right ends of the security cover 180, security rear end protrusions 183 projecting rearward along the end shape are provided, respectively. In addition, in the rear view, the security rear end protrusion 183 on the right side (the shaft support side) is formed to extend rearward longer than the security rear end protrusion 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 180, the front security piece 184 protrudes along the shape below the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 with the security cover 180 attached, And a U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 protruding forward at a lower end of the mounting member.

  In the security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in front view is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (supporting side) is mounted on the plate. By attaching to the security cover attaching portion 364 of the unit 300, the unit can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. In a state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, although not shown in detail, the security pre-projection piece 184 fits with the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, and The rear surface at the lower end of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bent protruding piece 161. When the door frame 5 is closed, half of the pivot support side is inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 and half of the open side is projected forward when the door frame 5 is closed. It is configured to be inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112 of the component 1110. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool is to be intruded into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the post-security piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  In addition, since the security cover 180 can cover the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed, by the back surface thereof. In addition, it is possible to prevent a ball hitting the glass plate 594 from hitting or feeding backward in the guide path portion.

  Thus, in this example, since the security cover 180 covers the outer periphery of the lower portion of the rear side of the glass unit 590 (the game window 101) in the door frame 5, the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 are formed from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if an attempt is made to insert a highly flexible tool into the pachinko machine and perform an illegal action inside the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100), the security cover 180 can prevent the entry of the tool. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more secure with respect to the like.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with a fitting portion 190a that rotatably fits into a locking member mounting portion 110b that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110. A locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. This glass unit locking member 190 fixes a screw for retaining to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is configured to be rotatably supported on the locking member mounting portion 110b.

  Although not shown in detail, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge protruding rearward on the rear side, and the ridge rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached and detached. The finger is used when operating.

  The firing cover 191 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed to predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, respectively. In a state where the firing cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame base unit 100, the rear surfaces thereof are substantially flush with each other. The front surface of the hit ball firing device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decorative unit 200 of the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 29A is a front perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29B is a rear perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as viewed from the front by exploding. Further, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as viewed from the rear.

  As shown, the right side decorative unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right outer half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower portion in a front view, and the inside is the gaming window 101. In addition to being formed in an arc shape along the outside, the outside is formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, a side inner lens 212 disposed behind the side lens 210, A right upper decorative board 214 on the rear side of which the plurality of LEDs 214a (full-color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) are mounted on the upper surface of the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from the substantially vertical center, and the lower side inner side A lower right side decorative board 216 on which a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LED) and 216b (white LED) are mounted on the surface, and a rear side of a right side upper decorative board 214, which are arranged below the lens 212 from substantially the center in the vertical direction. The right side mounted on the side inner lens 212 so as to cover the right side upper decorative substrate 214 An upper decorative substrate cover 218 and a right side lower decorative substrate cover 220 that covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 and is attached to the side lens 210 and the side outer cover 202 so as to sandwich the right side lower decorative substrate 216 therebetween. ing.

  The right side decoration unit 200 is provided at a right outer corner of the side lens 210 and a side outer cover 202. The right side decoration unit 200 is disposed at a predetermined interval in front of the side lens 210 and in a circumferential direction of the game window 101. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 extending radially from the center, a side upper inner lens 206 disposed between the upper left of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side inner lens 206 An inner lens bracket 208 for attaching to the 212 and an upper right speaker 222 to be attached to the side upper inner lens 206 are provided.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, the side outer cover 202, the side flash lens 204, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the upper side inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

  Although not shown in detail, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surfaces of the side inner lens 212 and the upper side inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a and 214b mounted on the surfaces (front surfaces) of the upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right side decorative substrate 216 disposed behind the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the side upper inner lens 206, respectively. 216a, 216b and the like cannot be clearly seen from the player side. The front surfaces of the upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right side decorative substrate 216 are white, and the light of the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like allows the right side decorative unit 200 to efficiently emit light. The decorative substrates 214 and 216 are not so noticeable when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right side decorative substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b to emit light as appropriate, so that the right side decoration unit 200 can emit light.

  As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has a right end and an upper end formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base body 110 in a front view, and a left end thereof as a game window 101. Is formed in a curved shape along the right outer periphery. The side lens 210 includes a peripheral lens portion 210a having a plurality of curved surfaces having a substantially spindle shape, and a plurality of peripheral lens portions 210a divided into a plurality in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and extending substantially concentrically with the game window 101. And a radiation lens part 210b having a prism surface. As shown, the plurality of radiation lens portions 210b of the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend on the radiation centered on the center lower portion of the game window 101 in a front view, and from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is formed to be recessed rearward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

  In addition, the side lens 210 includes a side diffusion lens portion 210c that extends in the front-rear direction and is arranged in the vertical direction on the right side surface. The light from the upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right side decorative substrate 216 can be widely diffused by the side diffusion lens portion 210c in the rightward and vertical directions of the pachinko machine 1. Although not shown in detail, a plurality of through holes are formed in a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker, so that sound from the upper right speaker can be favorably transmitted to the player. It can be transmitted.

  The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent, and is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side. As illustrated, a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, a portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Although not shown in detail, the side inner lens 212 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on a crest portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a and protruding forward. The side inner lens 212 is capable of irregularly refracting and irregularly reflecting light with a wrinkle-shaped portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses, and cooperates with the side lens 210 disposed on the front side to make the outer appearance of the right side decoration unit 200 glitter. It makes it possible to make the perspective look strange and mysterious.

  The upper right decorative board 214 and the lower right decorative board 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a used have relatively wide irradiation angles (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 emit relatively light. Those having a small angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) are used. Note that the LEDs 214c of the upper right side decorative board 214 are red and green LEDs in this example.

  The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs the sound in the middle and high frequency ranges similarly to the side speaker 130, and is mounted at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the side upper inner lens 206. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 has a cylindrical horn portion that extends obliquely forward and downward at the left and right centers of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front, and at the back of the upper end of the horn portion, The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side in front view.

  The upper right speaker 222 of the present example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 to a player below by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, and generates noise for other pachinko machines. It is becoming more difficult. In addition, similarly to the side inner lens 212, the side upper inner lens 206 has a front surface formed in a wrinkle shape, and a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed in a crest portion protruding forward in a wrinkle-shaped portion. The light can be irregularly refracted and irregularly reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small-diameter lenses.

  The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged to be inserted in front of the radiation lens portion 210b which is recessed rearward of the side lens 210, and simulates a rocky surface formed by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. It is possible to add an accent to the side lens 210 that has been set. In addition, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214b and 216a of the upper right decorative board 214 and the lower right decorative board 216 disposed on the rear side, and can also perform the peripheral lens section 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 32A is a front perspective view of the left side decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the left side decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as viewed from the front by disassembly. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decoration unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing a light emission mode of the left side decoration unit by a photograph.

  As shown, the left side decorative unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating a left half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding a lower portion in a front view, and the right side is the gaming window 101. It is formed in an arc shape along with the left side and the upper side is formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed asymmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decorative unit 240 has a plurality of large window frames 242a extending substantially in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with a width substantially equal to the width of the right side decorative unit 200, and an elliptical shape arranged between the large window frames 242a. A frame-shaped lower side decorative frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, two large window frames 244a extending above the side lower decorative frame 242 and extending in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 and arranged in a row. And a frame-shaped upper side decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b disposed between the window frames 244a.

  Further, the left side decorative unit 240 includes a side flash lens 246 fitted into the small window frames 242b, 244b of the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 from the rear side, and a side flash lens 246 on the rear side. And a transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a that are supported from behind and are fitted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 from the rear side. A plurality of slits 251a formed in the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 are formed, and an inner decoration member 251 having a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface thereof, and a rear side of the inner decoration member 251 are provided. Bands extending radially around the lower left and right center of the gaming window 101 A side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by the lens, and a.

  Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and has a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LED) and 254b (white LED) mounted on the surface on the left side. A substrate 254, a lower side lower decorative substrate 256 which is disposed below the lower side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 256 a (full color LED) and 256 b (white LED) mounted on the surface; A left upper decorative board cover 258 attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to cover the rear side of the left upper decorative board 254 and sandwich the left side upper decorative board 254, and a left side covering the rear side of the left side lower decorative board 256. Left side lower decorative board cover attached to side lens 250 so as to sandwich lower decorative board 256 It is provided with a 60, a.

  Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is provided with an upper left speaker 262 disposed in front of the side inner lens 252 and at the upper right portion in front view, and a transparent speaker which supports the upper left speaker 262 and is attached to the front upper right portion of the side inner lens 252. An upper speaker bracket 264 and a diffuser formed by a plurality of belt-shaped lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted into the inner decoration member 251 on the upper right in front view from the rear side and extending radially around the lower left and right centers. And an upper right inner lens 266 having a 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

  In the left side decorative unit 240, the lower side decorative frame 242, the upper side decorative frame 244, the left side upper decorative substrate cover 258, and the left side lower decorative substrate cover 260 are formed of an opaque member. The surface of the decoration member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (in this example, silver). The side flash lens 246 has translucency and is entirely formed of a milky white synthetic resin. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

  In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b, 244b in the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 (the small windows are arranged in the radial axis centering on the lower left and right central portions of the game window 101). Opening frames 242c, 244c that penetrate the side lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 in a notched state are formed on both sides of the frames 242b, 244b), and the small window frames 242b, 244b and The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by a side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, the rear side of the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c of the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 cannot be seen from the player side by the milky white side flash lens 246. .

  On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 from the rear side, and is closed. The inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the player side through 250a. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251. The light is diffusely refracted by the diffusion part 252a, so that the light passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 and is behind the side inner lens 252. The side is not clearly visible. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the upper left decorative substrate 254 and the lower left decorative substrate 256 disposed behind the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. cannot be clearly recognized from the player side.

  The front surfaces of the upper left decorative board 254 and the lower left decorative board 256 are white, and the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b and the like allows the left decorative unit 240 to efficiently emit light. The decoration substrates 254 and 256 are not so noticeable when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a and 256b are not lit. The upper left decorative board 254 and the lower left decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each of the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. Is emitted as appropriate, so that the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated.

  The lower side decorative frame 242 of the left side decorative unit 240 of the present example extends vertically along the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and has a U-shaped cross section with an open rear side. The lower side decorative frame 242 includes a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small frame disposed between the large window frames 242a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. A window frame 242b, and an opening frame 242c that is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 242b (the gaming window 101 side and the outside of the pachinko machine 1), penetrates in the front-rear direction, and is cut out to the side surface, are provided. Is formed.

  The side lower decorative frame 242 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Are fitted from the rear side. That is, the lower side decorative frame 242 can form an outer peripheral frame of the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side flash lens 246.

  The upper side decorative frame 244 in the left side decorative unit 240 is substantially triangular in front view, extending from the upper left outer periphery to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 and continuing from the upper end of the lower side decorative frame 242. It is formed in a U-shaped cross section with an open side. The upper side decorative frame 244 includes two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small window frame disposed between the large window frames 244a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. 244b, and an opening frame 244c that is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 244b (the gaming window 101 side and the outside of the pachinko machine 1), penetrates in the front-rear direction, and is cut out to the side surface. ing.

  The upper side decorative frame 244 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is fitted from the rear side. That is, the upper side decorative frame 244 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively. The upper side decorative frame 244 forms a design that is continuous with the lower side decorative frame 242 when assembled as the left side decorative unit 240.

  In this example, the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses facing the large window frames 242a, 244a, the small window frames 242b, 244b, and the opening frames 242c, 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 are emphasized.

  The side lens 250 in the left side decorative unit 240 has a size obtained by combining the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244, and has a size extending to the left side and the upper side of the game window 101 from the center to the left side. I have. The side lens 250 has a peripheral lens portion 250a fitted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 from the rear side, and a concave shape rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250a. And a radiation lens portion 250b in which a side flash lens 246 is disposed on the front side. In the side lens 250, the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one smoothly curved surface, and the radiation lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. The side lens 250 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

  Further, the inner decorative member 251 of the left side decorative unit 240 is provided behind the peripheral lens portions 250a of the side lens 250, and includes a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-back direction. ing. As illustrated, the inner decoration member 251 also has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and is also concentric with the center of the game window 101 in the width direction. There are several. The inner decorative member 251 has a front surface on which a plurality of slits 251 a are formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250. Note that the inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, and can be visually recognized from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. .

  The side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. I have. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decorative member 251 is inserted from the rear side into each of the inner decorative members 251. The diffuser 252a of the side inner lens 252 has a plurality of belt-like lenses extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 on the front surface. The decoration member 251 intersects (substantially orthogonally) with the direction in which the slit 251a extends.

  In the side inner lens 252, the diffusion part 252a is visible from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. However, since light is irregularly refracted by a plurality of band-shaped lenses formed in the diffusion part 252a, the diffusion is not performed. The rear side is not clearly seen through the portion 252a. Further, as shown in the figure, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion portions 252a, and the light from the upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

  The left upper decorative board 254 and the left lower decorative board 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the large size of the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244. The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have relatively wide irradiation angles (for example, 60 to 180 degrees). LEDs 254b arranged at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c of the lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246). 256b has a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 6 °). °) it is used.

  The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs a sound in the middle and high frequency ranges similarly to the side speaker 130, and is mounted at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. I have. The upper speaker bracket 264 supporting the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn (not shown) projecting obliquely forward and downward at the left and right centers of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back side of the upper end of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via a protective plate 268, so that the upper left speaker 262 is not seen from the player side in a front view. It has become. In addition, the protection plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent a mischief by the upper left speaker 262 or break of a cone of the upper left speaker 262 to insert an unauthorized tool into the pachinko machine 1. Has become. The upper left speaker 262 of this example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 to a player below, and is less likely to generate noise with respect to other pachinko machines.

  Next, a description will be given of a characteristic light emission effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of the present example. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 forms the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240 and includes the side lens 250 having the curved transparent peripheral lens part 250a, and the rear lens unit 250a is disposed on the rear side and on the surface. An inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a having a metallic glossy plating layer and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and extending in a direction intersecting the direction in which the slit 251a extends, which is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251; A left inner upper decorative board 254 and a left lower lower decorative board 256 having a side inner lens 252 provided with a diffusion portion 252a formed of a plurality of band-shaped lenses, and a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a mounted on the rear side of the side inner lens 252; (See FIG. 35 and the like). Thereby, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a emit light, the light emitted forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. Irradiation is performed from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 to the player side, so that the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated.

  By the way, the light irradiated forward (to the side of the side lens 250) through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 is partially transmitted to the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected on the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a and irradiates the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Since the inner decoration member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, light reflected toward the inner decoration member 251 on the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a is reflected on the surface of the inner decoration member 251. The light is reflected toward the peripheral lens portion 250a at the (front) side, and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decorative member 251 is transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and irradiated to the player side.

  At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the peripheral lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251 and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are each smoothly curved, so that the inner surface side ( The light reflected on the rear surface side is converged and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) is diffused, and the peripheral lens portion 250a receives the direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 and the peripheral lens portion 250a. The indirect light reflected on the front surface of the lens portion 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is applied to the shifted positions. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 is diffused and intersected by the diffusing portion 252a formed by a plurality of band-shaped lenses in the side inner lens 252 in the direction in which the slit 251a extends. The light is diffused in a direction (substantially orthogonal). Therefore, a plurality of striped lights having different shades are radiated (projected) on the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 in a direction longer than the width of the slit 251a in a direction intersecting the direction in which the slit 251a extends. Thus, a fantastic light-emitting decoration with a perspective can be provided (see FIG. 36).

[Upper decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decorative unit 280 of the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIG. 17 and the like, the upper decorative unit 280 of the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is located at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and is located between the upper edges of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 on the central side. It is attached between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decoration unit 280 has an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extension frame 281b that extends elongated from the upper part of the central frame 281a to the left and right, and becomes thinner toward the tip. A front decorative member 281 provided with a frame-shaped lower extending frame 281c extending from the lower portion of the central frame 281a to the left and right toward the tip, and an upper extending frame 281b and a lower portion arranged behind the front decorative member 281. A light-transmitting upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and a cylindrical shape inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282. A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward, and a surface disposed behind the upper central lens 284. A plate-shaped diffusion lens 285 on which a plurality of fine prisms are formed; an annular lens support member 286 which holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282; and a rear side of the lens support member 286 And a light-shielding member 287 having a cylindrical portion 287 a having substantially the same diameter as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286, and a light-shielding member 287 disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the cylindrical portion 287 a of the light-shielding member 287. A plurality of LEDs 288a, and an upper central decorative board 288 having a plurality of LEDs 288b disposed at positions corresponding to the outside of the cylindrical portion 287a mounted on the front surface.

  The upper decorative unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decorative member 281, the upper lens 282, the light blocking member 287, and the upper central decorative substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of units arranged on the rear side of the unit base 289 and arranged on the front side. The upper side decorative board 290 on which the LED 290a is mounted, the board cover 291 which covers the rear surface of the upper side decorative board 290 and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 289, and which is mounted on the lower rear part of the board cover 291 and extends rearward. A mounting bracket 292; an upper lower cover 293 which is attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extends rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281; And an upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped into a shape.

  Further, the upper decoration unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decoration member 281 in a plate shape, and has a cutout 295a having a rear end opened at the center in the left-right direction. A cover 295, a plate-like lid member 296 for closing the cutout portion 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decorative member 297 attached to the right side of the unit base 289 in a front view and formed into a predetermined shape are provided. .

  In the upper decoration unit 280 of the present example, a plating layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decoration member 281, and the front decoration member 281 shines with light from the outside. The upper lens 282 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a central annular lens portion 282b facing the center frame 281a of the front decoration member 281 around the outer periphery of the through hole 282a, and an upper extension of the front decoration member 281. A frame 281b and an extension frame lens portion 282c facing inside the frames of the lower extension frame 281c. The upper lens 282 has a plurality of radially extending strip-shaped lenses arranged in the circumferential direction on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b, and the center of the through-hole 282a on the front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. Thus, the light can be irregularly refracted by the plurality of prisms and the band-shaped lenses of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

  The upper central lens 284 of the upper decoration unit 280 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 has a smooth spindle shape on the front side, while a plurality of lenses concentric on the rear side are formed. Is invisible to the public.

  The upper central decorative board 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs, respectively, and the upper central lens 284 and the central frame 281a in the front decorative member 281. The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 and the outer periphery thereof can be separately illuminated. Further, the upper side decorative board 290 of the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface as full color LEDs, respectively, and these LEDs 290a are connected to the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decorative member 281. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the insides of the frames. The upper side decorative substrate 290 can emit light and decorate the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decoration member 281 by appropriately emitting the LED 290a.

[Dish unit]
Subsequently, the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the plate unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the plate unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the dish unit taken along the ball lending unit in the door frame.

  The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls paid out from a prize ball device 740 described later, and a game stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a hit ball launching device 650 described later via a ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIG. 43 and FIG. 44, the plate unit 300 of this example includes a substantially plate-shaped plate unit base 310 fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending in the left-right direction, and a plate unit base 310. A plate-shaped upper plate main body 312 which is fixed to a substantially front center, is open at the upper and rear sides, and has a left-side (axial support side) swelling greatly forward when viewed from the front. An upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward when viewed, an upper plate front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front edge of the upper plate upper panel 314, and an upper plate front An upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 disposed between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314, and a right upper portion of the upper plate upper panel 314 which is continuous with a right portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316. A dish upper right decorative member 319 on the cover, and a.

  Further, the plate unit 300 is mounted on a plate-shaped substrate mounting base 320 having a plurality of fine prisms formed on the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 from the left and right center to the right side, and mounted on a lower side of the substrate mounting base 320. And an upper plate decorative substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper surface thereof. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322, a part of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be light-emitting decorated.

  Further, the plate unit 300 is fixed to the front of the plate unit base 310 below the upper plate main body 312 and is open at the top and the rear, and the center in the left-right direction swells forward in front view, and the front end moves to the center in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped lower dish main body 324 formed so as to become lower as it goes forward, and is fixed to the upper portion of the lower dish main body 324, and the center in the left-right direction in front view bulges forward substantially in the same manner as the lower dish main body 324, and the front end extends in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of a lock device 1000 described later at a portion that covers the lower front end of the lower plate main body 324 and extends to the right in front view. A lower plate cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing it, and an upper opening 330a coaxial with the lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 by decorating the right side of the lower end of the lower plate cover 328 from the left and right center positions. And Shitasara side cover 330 provided with a lower opening 330b of the handle 500 is inserted from the front opening on the lower side of the upper opening 330a, and a.

  Further, the plate unit 300 includes a lower plate upper left side cover 332 that extends obliquely and covers the front left end of the lower plate main body 324 and the left front end of the lower plate top plate 326, and is disposed at the lower end of the lower plate left upper side cover 332. A lower cover left lower side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate that is closed from the rear side with the opening 334a of the lower left side cover 334 closed, and protection. A frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower left lower side cover 334. The right front end of the lower plate top plate 326 is covered with an upper plate front decorative member 316.

  Further, the plate unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the plate unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left upper side cover 332 are designed. And a side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338. And a cover body 339 having a disc-like shape and a plurality of holes that are gently curved so as to close the portion 338a from the rear side and swell toward the front side.

  In this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, the cover body 339 is not easily deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be used. As long as it can be protected. The side speaker cover 338 has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster formed on the surface. The cover body 339 is colored black.

  Further, the plate unit 300 includes an upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 attached to the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate main body 312 for pulling out game balls stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, and a lower plate main body 324. A lower plate ball pulling mechanism 350 mounted on the lower surface for pulling out the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 downward, and mounted on the upper left side when viewed from the front of the plate unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6, not shown).

  The plate unit 300 of the present example constitutes an upper plate 301 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, the upper plate main body 312, the upper plate upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the plate unit 300 constitutes a lower plate 302 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, the lower plate main body 324, the lower plate top plate 326, the lower plate cover 328, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the plate unit base 310 of the plate unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on an upper edge extending in the left-right direction. Provided. A ball lending unit mounting portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and mounting the ball lending unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The plate unit base 310 is disposed below the ball lending unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner in front view) and has a horizontally long rectangular plate hole supply port 310c penetrating in the front-rear direction. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d which penetrates in the front-rear direction below the right end of the decorative portion 310a below the mouth 310c (substantially in the height direction of the plate unit base 310) and extends vertically, and an upper plate A pair of lower plate support portions 310e, which are disposed immediately below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper plate ball supply port 310c, protrude forward, and have the same upper surface, are provided. The upper bowl discharge port 310d is formed continuously up to the intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower bowl support 310e disposed immediately below.

  In addition, the plate unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower plate support portions 310e, is fitted to the lower plate main body 324 and the rear end of the lower plate top plate 326, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular annular shape in front view. It has a groove 310f, and a rectangular lower dish ball supply port 310g that is disposed at a lower portion on the right side of the center of a portion surrounded by the lower dish support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h that extends rearward so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an opening side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. And a notch 310i formed on the side surface and having a size that allows a game ball to pass therethrough.

  The upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit base 310 is connected to the door frame base unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit through the cutout portions 101a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150. The first sphere outlet 544a of the unit 540 is communicated with. At the front end of the upper dish ball supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends long in the right direction as viewed from the front and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end in front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end is lower in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 is increased toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. Is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in the present example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the fal cover unit 540, Since it is impossible to linearly enter the front upper plate 301 from the upper plate supply port 310c, the dispensed game balls contact the game balls having the front side of the upper plate supply port 310c closed and roll. The direction is changed, guided so as to roll in the guide recess 310j to the right in front view, and discharged from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, so that the player does not bring the game balls by hand when the game balls close the front of the upper plate supply port 310c. Even so, it is possible to continue supplying (discharging) the paid out game balls into the upper plate 301, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling troublesome in storing the game balls in the upper plate 301. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game by devoting the player to the operation of hitting the game ball or playing the game ball, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301. Can be done.

  The upper bowl discharging port 310d of the bowl unit base 310 is connected to the opening 344a of the upper bowl removing base 344 of the upper bowl removing mechanism 340 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 through the door. Furthermore, 310 g of lower dish ball supply ports extend rearward from a lower dish ball supply gutter 310 h that extends rearward from the rear side through the ball passage port 110 f of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. Above, it is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the notch 310i of the lower counter ball supply gutter 310h is provided in the upper counter ball removing mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball drain channel 344c of the upper bowl drain base 344.

  In addition, in this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with an opening 310k that expands leftward when viewed from the front. The front end of 310 g is spread in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress early occurrence of ball clogging in the lower dish ball supply port 310g due to game balls in the lower dish 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower dish ball supply port 310g. The balls can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

  The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed such that the left side (the pivot side) from the center in front view bulges forward, and the bottom surface is entirely lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. I have. The bottom of the upper plate main body 312 has a rear end on the pivot side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c in the plate unit base 310 and a rear end on the open side in the upper plate ball discharge port 310d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls which are formed so as to be located near the vertical intermediate position, respectively, and are supplied to the upper plate main body 312 (the upper plate 301) from the upper plate ball supply port 310c are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  The upper plate main body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 313 that can contact the game ball from the center of the bottom surface to the open side from the center in the left-right direction. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 313 is electrically grounded (earthed), so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate main body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 projects forward, and is located outside the open side of the upper plate main body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the upper ball removing button 341 to be described later penetrates vertically. The upper plate upper panel 314 has a front end formed in a stepped shape lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312 by one step, and is a decorative mounting portion 314b for mounting the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318. And an operation unit attachment portion 314c formed in a stepped shape lower than the decoration attachment portion 314b at a position in front of the upper plate main body 312 at the center in the left-right direction and for attaching an operation unit 400 described later. I have.

  The upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in a shape extending in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate front decorative member 316 has a smooth shape on the left side and a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape on the right side from a position near the right in the center in the left-right direction. It is formed in such a rugged shape. Although a detailed illustration of the upper plate front decorative member 316 is omitted, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on a right rear surface formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, so that light can be irregularly refracted. The rear side is not clearly visible from the player side. The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 is disposed behind the smoothly formed portion on the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316, and has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. Thus, the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 can be clearly seen from the player side through the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 in the assembled state, while the upper plate upper inner decorative member 316 can be clearly seen from the player side. The part seen through is seen from the player side in an unclear and uncertain sense of distance.

  The upper plate upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper plate upper right decorative member 319 has a surface formed by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces like the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316. In addition to being formed in a shape integral with the right side portion, the upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of an upper tray ball removing button 341 described later. In addition, the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface) so that light can be irregularly refracted and the lower side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. I have. An upper plate decorative board 322 is disposed on the rear side of the right side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and below the upper plate upper right decorative member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is turned on. By appropriately emitting light, the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can emit light as appropriate.

  The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a that spreads in a fan shape forward in a plan view, and a rear end is formed linearly in the left-right direction, and a substantially center of the upper surface is formed to be lowest, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from a front end and a side end excluding a rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is lower on the front side and higher on the rear side. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a linear shape, and the left and right ends of the lower plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear portion of the upper end.

  In the lower plate main body 324, the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plate 324c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. In addition, the lower plate hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by an opening / closing shutter 352 of a lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 disposed on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is formed of a black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower plate side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a silver plated metal layer on its surface (a matte state such as a sandblasted one instead of a mirror surface). The lower plate side cover 330 has a plate-like portion extending rearward from the lower end and forming a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. The lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 attached to the main frame 3, and are formed in the main frame 3. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

  The lower plate upper left side cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin, and has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The lower plate left lower side cover 334 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plating layer having a red metallic luster on its surface. It has a plate-shaped part forming a part. The opening 334a of the lower plate left lower side cover 334 is formed at a position corresponding to the front of a lower speaker 821 (low-pitched speaker) provided in the main body frame 3 described later. It can be transmitted to the side. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower left lower side cover 334 is made of a punched metal having a plurality of holes formed in a metal plate, and prevents an unauthorized tool from being inserted therein. .

  In the plate unit 300 of this example, the bottom surface except for the center in the left-right direction is closed by the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower side cover 334, and the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower side cover are provided. 334 is closed by a lower bowl removing mechanism 350 described later.

  The upper bowl removing mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300 is provided with an upper bowl removing button 341 attached to the mounting hole 314 a of the upper upper panel 314 so as to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction. The operating piece 342 is moved up and down more than the up and down movement of the upper dish ball removing button 341 to be supported on the front side of the dish unit base 310, and the operating piece 342 is operably (rotatably) supported and the dish unit base 310 is supported. And a contact piece that slides up and down by an up and down movement of an operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 and that comes into contact with an operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583 in a ball feed unit 580 described later. An upper tray ball removing slider 343 provided on the rear side of the tray unit base 310 including a tray 343a; The an upper pan ball vent base 344 attached to the rear side of the vertical direction slidably supported to be countersunk unit base 310, and a.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the operation piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper countersunk button 341 such that the upper countersunk button 341 is located at the upper moving end is omitted. It is urged upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper countersunk ball removing slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper countersunk ball removing slider 343 and the upper countersunk ball removing base 344.

  The upper bowl removing base 344 of the upper bowl removing mechanism 340 closes the upper bowl discharge port 310d of the bowl unit base 310, and at the same time, communicates with the upper bowl discharge port 310d to open forward 344a (FIG. 43), and a ball guiding flow path 344b (FIGS. 42 and FIG. 42) that guides the game ball that has communicated with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper bowl removing base 344 and that has passed through the opening 344a, and then guides the ball backward. 44), extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding flow path 344b, and then extending substantially along the lower side of the upper bowl removing base 344 toward the right end (supporting side) in rear view. And a ball removal channel 344c in which the game balls can roll.

  The opening 344a communicates with the upper bowl discharging port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guiding flow path 344b that communicates with the opening 344a has the lower end of the ball of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are communicated with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feed opening 113, and the ball feed unit 580 It can be supplied to.

  The upper end of the ball removing channel 344c of the upper bowl removing base 344 communicates with the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 through the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 at the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding channel 344b. In addition, the lower end extending to the pivot side communicates with the cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 is used for playing. It can be guided to the lower plate 302. In addition, the lower part of the rear end of the ball emptying channel 344c is closed by an upper dish emptying channel cover 345.

  When the upper counter-ball-pulling button 341 is pressed downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper counter-ball-pulling mechanism 340 slides the upper counter-ball-pulling slider 343 downward, and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward also. Move down. Then, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a rotates the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction by moving the contact piece 343a downward. Then, the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication. Thereby, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are transferred from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 through the opening 344a of the upper plate extraction base 344 and the ball guiding channel 344b. After entering, the ball is discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball drain channel 344c of the upper ball drain base 344, and from the lower ball feed port 310g through the lower ball feed gutter 310h of the plate unit base 310, the lower plate 302. Can be discharged to

  The ball pulling member 583 of the ball feed unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper counter ball pulling slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by a coil spring. Even if a game ball is supplied vigorously onto the partitioning portion 583a, the impact can be absorbed by a coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being damaged and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition 583a.

  The lower plate removing mechanism 350 in the plate unit 300 is disposed between the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower side cover 334 below the lower plate main body 324 and forms the bottom center of the plate unit 300. The ball-opening base 351, a plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 352 rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower-plate ball-opening base 351, and capable of opening and closing the lower-plate ball-opening hole 324 b, and the opening / closing shutter 352. A lower plate pull-out slide 353 supported on the upper surface of the lower plate pull-out base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower plate pull-out button 354 attached to the front end of the lower plate pull-out slide 353. ing.

  The lower bowl removing base 351 includes a base bowl removing hole 351a vertically penetrating at a position facing the lower bowl removing hole 324b of the lower bowl main body 324. The opening / closing shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower countersunk ball hole 324b, and a shutter ball punching hole disposed in front of the closing portion 352a and penetrating in a vertical direction substantially coincident with the lower countersunk ball hole 324b. 352b, and the closing portion 352a is urged by the coil spring 356 so as to be in a position to close the lower ball removing hole 324b and the base ball removing hole 351a between the lower ball removing base 351 and the lower portion 352b. .

  Although not shown in detail, the opening / closing shutter 352 includes a contact pin that can be brought into contact with the lower plate ball removing slide 353, and the contact pin comes into contact with the lower plate ball removing slide 353. The closing hole 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b are rotated so as to move backward by the lower ball removing slide 353, and the lower ball removing slide 353 is slid forward by the urging force of the coil spring 356. You can do it.

  Further, in the lower dish removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower dish removing hole 324b of the lower dish main body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower dish removing base 351. A holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower dish removing slide 353 at a predetermined position is further provided for holding the slide 353 at the predetermined position.

  In a state where the surface shape of the lower plate ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 and the like, the lower plate ball removing button 354 is in a closed state in which the lower plate ball removing button 354 has moved to the front end. In this state, the lower plate hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, game balls can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower-plate ball-pulling button 354 is pressed rearward, the lower-plate ball-pulling button 354 and the lower-plate ball-pulling slide 353 slide rearward, and the lower-plate ball-pulling slide 353 slides rearward. The opening / closing shutter 352 rotates so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball hole 352b move rearward against the urging force of the coil spring 356.

  Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates backward, the shutter ball hole 352b overlaps the lower ball hole 324b and the base ball hole 351a, and then the shutter ball hole 352b and the lower ball hole 352b. 324b matches, and the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged below the plate unit 300 via the lower plate ball hole 324b. In addition, when the slide 353 for removing the lower dish ball moves backward to a position where the shutter hole 352b and the lower dish ball 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower mechanism slide 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower-drill ball pull-out slide 353 is locked (held), the lower-drill ball pull-out button 354 is kept in an open state in which the lower-drill ball pull-out button 354 is retracted rearward, and the lower-drill ball drain hole 352b is set in the lower-drill ball extraction hole 352b. The game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate 302 is kept pressed and the lower ball punch button 354 is not pressed.

  On the other hand, in the case of closing the lower bowl removing hole 324b, when the lower bowl removing button 354 that is retracted is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower bowl removing slide 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released, and the lower bowl removing slide 353 is released. The ball-sliding slide 353 can slide, and the opening / closing shutter 352 in which the closing portion 352a is urged by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower-stem ball removing hole 324b, the closing portion 352a is moved by the urging force. It turns in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the slide 353 for pulling out the lower platen ball slides forward, the closing portion 352a closes the lower platen hole 324b, and the lower platen release button 354 is pressed down. It returns to the closed position substantially coincident with the front surface of the dish cover 328 and the like, so that game balls can be stored in the lower dish 302.

  The holding mechanism 355 of the lower bowl removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the mechanism will be omitted.

  The ball lending unit 360 in the plate unit 300 includes a ball lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display portion 363 between the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. The ball lending unit 360 inserts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and presses a ball lending button 361 to place a predetermined number of game balls in the plate unit 300. Can be rented out (paid out) into the upper plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the remaining cash and the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the remainder of the loaned amount are returned. I have. In addition, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash or prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

  The ball lending unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball lending unit attachment portion 310b formed on the decoration portion 310a at the upper end of the plate unit base 310. Further, the ball lending unit 360 is provided with a security cover mounting portion 364 which projects rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the pivot side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

  More specifically, the ball lending unit 360 is provided with a transparent ball lending unit front cover 365 that covers the front side of the lending remaining display unit 363, and a lending remaining display unit 363 that is disposed behind the lending ball lending unit cover 365. A ball-lending unit board 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch operated by operating the ball-lending button 361 and the return button 362 is attached, and a ball-lending unit covering the rear side of the ball-lending unit board 366 and the plate unit base 310 And a rear cover 367 attached to the rear side of the attachment portion 310b. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 367.

  The ball lending unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 to which the ball lending unit 360 is mounted has a circular button opening 310m facing the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362, and a lending formed between the button openings 310m. It has a rectangular display opening 310n that is closed by the ball unit front cover 365, and a protruding portion 310o that is formed on the outer periphery of each of the two button openings 310m and protrudes forward, and is transparent to close the display opening 310n. The remaining lending display portion 363 disposed on the rear side through the front cover 365 of the lending unit can be seen from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protruding portion 310o of the plate unit base 310 has a rounded front end.

  As shown in the drawing, the ball-lending unit 360 of this example has the ball-lending unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 disposed above the upper plate 301, directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c, and has a front surface. It is arranged to face. Also, in the ball lending unit 360, the return button 362 is arranged at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the ball lending button 361. In this example, the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362 are colored differently from the plate unit base 310 (ball lending unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easy for the player to recognize the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362.

  Further, the ball lending unit 360 includes a protruding portion 310o that protrudes forward (toward the player) from the outer periphery of the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362, and when the player inserts his hand into the upper plate 301. Since the hand touches the protrusion 310o before the hand touches the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362. It is possible to prevent erroneous operation of the 361, the return button 362, and the like.

  The plate unit 300 of this example includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as a conventional pachinko machine having two storage plates. A new pachinko machine 1 (a new pachinko machine) can be used as a pachinko machine 1 that can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play by reducing anxiety or the like given to a player even with a new pachinko machine 1 (a new pachinko machine). Has become.

[Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 46A is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46B is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as viewed from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as viewed from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a state where the pressing operation unit of the operation unit is pressed.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 according to the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and includes a dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and a press that can be pressed by the player. And an operation unit 405. The operation unit 405 can receive a player's operation according to a game state, and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved. , So that the user can also participate in the effects during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular driven unit connected to a lower end of the dial operation unit 401. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 meshing with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 in which the drive gear 412 is fixed to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416 a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support tube 416b that supports the pressing operation unit 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and a pressing operation unit 405 that is disposed inside the button support tube 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 It has a spring 418 that urges upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a of the operation section holding member 416 and the button support cylinder 416b can pass. A base member 420 to which the operation unit holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed on the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 having an opening 422a covering the upper surface of the base member 420 and allowing the inner cylinder 401a of the dial operation unit 401 to pass therethrough. And a lower cover 424 that is attached to the lower side of the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420 and covers the base member 420 and the lower surface of the dial drive motor 414.

  Further, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the plate unit 300; and a plating having a silver metallic luster on the surface, which is disposed above the cover main body 426 and is formed in a predetermined shape. An inner cover 427 provided with a layer and a transparent surface cover 428 that covers the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder 401c of the dial operation unit 401 can pass.

  Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430a which is attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 and the inner cylinder 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass. A dial decoration board 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of a circle, and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 and detecting rotation of the dial operation unit 401. 432b, a pressing detection sensor 432c for detecting operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decoration board 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface immediately below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decoration board 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation section holding member 416 by the board holding claws 416g of the operation section holding member 416.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of the present example is formed of a translucent material, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder 401a extending in the vertical direction, and outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder 401a. An annular top plate 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extension surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c that extends downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a tubular shape and is shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a, and an outer cylinder And a flange portion 401d extending annularly outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401d in the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a in the upper cover 422. Further, the dial operating section 401 includes a connection locking section (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylindrical section 401a, and the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked, whereby the dial operating section 401 is locked. 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Further, the dial operating unit 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401a at a position lower by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The protrusion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner cylinder 401a. As will be described later in detail, the projecting portion 401f can be brought into contact with the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405, and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 The contact with the portion 401f can prevent the button cap 407 (the pressing operation portion 405) from further immersing into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

  As shown in the figure, the projecting portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401 and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 of the pressing operating portion 405 have their contact surfaces lower as going toward the center of the dial operating portion 401. The contact surfaces are large when they come into contact with each other. Thus, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  Further, the pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape having a closed upper end, and has a button body 406 having a bottomed cylindrical shape, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. It has a cap inner 408 that is arranged inside the 407 and is sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407. The button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the bottom lower surface is narrowed downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the truncated cone lower surface. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating vertically is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone, and light from the LED 432d of the button decoration board 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It has become.

  Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b extending downward from the outer periphery lower part and having a lower end protruding outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis. By locking with a locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not fall out of the button support cylinder 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 includes a contact portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) does not rotate in the button support cylinder 416b. In addition, a predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap causes the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

  Further, the button body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c that extends downward from a position different from the lower part of the outer periphery of the locking claw 406b and that can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decoration board 432. When the button body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418, the pressing detection piece 406c is detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a smaller outer diameter than the upper center in the vertical direction, and a step 407a between the upper and lower sides. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) has a lower portion than the step portion 407a and a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the protrusion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and an upper side of the step portion 407a has a dial operation portion. The diameter of the inner tube 401 is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner tube 401a and larger than the inner diameter of the protrusion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (the pressing operation section 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder section 401a from above the dial operation section 401, the step section 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the projection 401f of the dial operation section 401. The button cap 407 (pressing operation section 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder section 401a (see FIG. 50).

  Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation section 405 are formed of a material having a light-transmitting ring. The character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 has a plurality of gear teeth meshing with the drive gear 412 on the annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than an outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416 b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has an annular sliding surface on the lower surface which is in contact with the gear rail 416 a of the operation portion holding member 416. The moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the driven gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the driven gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It has become.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connection locking claws 410 b extending upward from a position facing the upper end and protruding inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation unit 401 are connected so as to be integrally rotatable by being locked with the connection locking unit 401e of the inner cylinder unit 401a.

  In addition, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detecting pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration board 432, and details of the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c will be described later. With the slit 410d formed therebetween, the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c. In this example, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detecting piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  The drive gear 412 of the operation unit 400 is a spur gear meshing with the driven gear 410 as shown in the figure, and is fixed so as to be able to rotate integrally with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor that can arbitrarily control a rotation direction, a rotation speed, and a rotation angle. The dial drive motor 414 drives the drive gear 412 to rotate via a rotation shaft by the dial drive motor 414. Thus, the dial operating unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. In addition, the dial operating motor 401 can be vibrated by repeatedly rotating the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) forward and reverse by the dial drive motor 414 in small increments. In addition, by stopping the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 for each predetermined rotation angle for a short period of time based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 can be clicked. The feeling can be given.

  Further, the operation unit holding member 416 of the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416 a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, a cylindrical body protruding upward from the inside of the gear rail 416 a, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 therein. And a locking projection 416f formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom in the button supporting cylinder 416b and capable of locking with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406. 49 and 50) and a through-hole 416c that passes light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration board 432 through the center of the bottom inside the button support cylinder 416b and sends the light to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (the pressing operation unit 405). And a rotation detection sensor 4 that vertically penetrates a bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b and is attached to the button decoration substrate 432. An opening 416d through which the holes 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e penetrating vertically through the bottom of the button support tube 416b, and which the pressing detection sensor 432c attached to the button decoration board 432 desires from above, and downward from below. A pair of substrate holding claws 416 g for locking and holding the extended button decorative substrate 432.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation unit holding member 416 is disposed in the button support cylinder 416b, and forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 and locks the same. It further includes a plurality of abutting portions capable of abutting the claw 406b. The contact portion allows the button body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range, and prevents the button body 406 from rotating in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420 and positioning bosses for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432 are appropriately positioned. It is provided in.

  The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation unit 401) about a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 through the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and mounting the driven gear 410 on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so as to be capable of dynamic rotation. Further, by inserting the button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation unit 405 can be supported via the button body 406 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. . A coil-shaped spring 418 is arranged between the bottom inside the button support cylinder 416b and the frusto-conical lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is urged upward.

  The base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, so that the operation unit 400 is hardly damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is hit hard. The base member 420 vertically penetrates a lower concave portion 420b in which the outer periphery of the operation portion holding member 416 is fittable and is depressed upward and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b in a vertical direction. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c which is arranged on the opposite side to the lower recess 420b with the opening 420a interposed therebetween and which is recessed downward to accommodate at least the driven gear 410, It has. As shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414, and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) legs 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and positioning holes 420f opening downward at the lower ends of the legs 420e are provided.

  Further, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 disposed on the upper side outside the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is located above a different position outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of substrate mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decorative substrate 430 protruding therefrom. Further, although detailed description of the base member 420 is omitted, positioning bosses for positioning the respective members, mounting holes, and the like are formed at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

  The operating member holding member 416 is fitted and inserted into the lower concave portion 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side of the base member 420 into the central opening 420a. Is screwed from above into the operation section holding member 416 through the ceiling of the lower concave portion 420b, so that the operation section holding member 416 can be supported. Although the detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly higher than the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower concave portion 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper concave portion 420c in a state where the operation portion holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate within the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  The leg 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof fitted with a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom of the lower cover 424 described later. The lower cover 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and disposed in the upper concave portion 420c, and the dial decorative board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

  Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor attachment portion 420d, and the heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. , And the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be radiated by the base member 420. Thus, overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and a problem can be prevented from occurring in the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and has an opening 422a on the top plate with an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the flange portion 401d cannot pass. ing. The top cover 422 has a long direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation portion 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed so as to extend, and is provided with an engagement claw 422b protruding downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engagement claw 422b with the engagement portion 424b of the lower cover 424, The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  The upper cover 422 has a claw-shaped locking piece 422c that extends downward from the outer periphery of one of the short-axis directions (the front-rear direction in the pachinko machine 1) (the front side in the pachinko machine 1) and has a lower end protruding outward. It has. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper plate front decoration member 316 in the plate unit 300. By locking the locking piece 422c to the upper plate front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming out of the operation unit mounting portion 314c upward.

  The upper cover 422 has the operation member holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration substrate 430, the dial operation portion 401, and the like attached to the base member 420, and the dial operation portion 401 from below the opening 422 a. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so that the dial operation part 401 passes, the opening 422a can prevent the dial operation part 401 from coming off upward.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape whose upper side is open, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially matching the outer periphery of the upper cover 422, and a leg portion of the base member 420 at a predetermined position on the bottom upper surface. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420e is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with an engaging portion 424b that can be engaged with the engaging claw 422b of the upper cover 422 on both ends in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

  As shown, the cover body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that penetrates vertically in the center and through which the upper cover 422 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a to attach the operation unit to the plate unit 300. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided.

  The operation unit 400 of this example is configured to be attached to the plate unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426. Although not shown in detail, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the plate unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (the lower cover 424) is mounted with the lower surface slightly floating (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm) from the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. The cover body 426 can be elastically deformed to reduce the impact when the button is pressed or hit.

  In this operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the plate unit 300 with a predetermined screw. The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are mounted on the upper surface of the cover body 426.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has the circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The length in the direction is the same length. In addition, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration board 432 has a circumferential interval corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 that is 2.5 times the circumferential length of the rotation detection piece 410c. It has been. As a result, although details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs between the detection and non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection is performed. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detecting piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  Although details will be described later, the operation unit 400 of this example can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial driving motor 414. . Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a step-by-step manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, The rotation can be assisted, prevented from rotating intentionally, and a click can be given to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can cause the dial operation unit 401 to vibrate by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 forward and backward in small increments.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protrusion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, as shown in FIG. 407 (pressing operation unit 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylindrical portion 401a, so that the load applied to the pressing operation unit 405 is dialed through the step portion 407a and the protruding portion 401f. The pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, so that it is hard to break.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment gradually pushes the dial drive motor 414 while pressing the pressing operation portion 405 so that the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the protrusion 401f of the dial operating portion 401. By repeatedly rotating and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be caused to vibrate together with the dial operation unit 401, and the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 can surprise the player and enjoy a game or an effect. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed can be supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, even if the player or the like strongly hits the operation units 401 and 405, the operation unit 400 can be prevented from being damaged, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely provided to the player. In addition to being able to be operated, the operability of the operation units 401 and 405 can be improved, and it is possible to prevent the effect using the operation units 401 and 405 from being enjoyed and to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing. it can.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the ring-shaped dial operation unit 401, and if the user tries to hit the pressing operation unit 405 strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is likely to hit, too. The force for tapping 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, so that the impact of the tapping is prevented from being concentrated, and the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 are prevented from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 withstand a strong blow, and to allow the player to freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. The operability of the operation unit 405 can be improved, and the effect using the operation units 401 and 405 can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the plate unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As described above, the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the plate unit 300, and when the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit with an impact or a load is applied. Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the impact and the load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover body 426, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, the bottom of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (the plate unit 300) causes an impact or a shock. Since it is possible to receive the weight, it is possible to disperse the impact and the like from the operation units 401 and 405 to avoid the concentration of the impact and the like, and to reduce the impact resistance and load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300. Can be enhanced.

  Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420 e projecting downward at a position away from a position supporting the operation units 401 and 405, and the legs 420 e of the base member 420 are attached to the operation unit of the plate unit 300. Even if an impact from the operating portions 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 by contacting the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not disposed immediately below the impact, so the operating portions 401 and 405 of the base member 420 are not provided. Is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the shock from the operating portions 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the plate unit 300. The impact can be reduced to prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  Further, the dial operating unit 401 is held by the operating unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operating unit 401 overlaps the base member 420 in plan view. Even when the operation unit holding member 416 that holds the dial operation unit 401 is disengaged from the base member 420 and moves downward when the operation unit 401 is hit hard from above, the dial operation unit 401 abuts on the upper surface of the base member 420. The downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 can be restricted by the base member 420, and the fall of the dial operation unit 401 can be favorably prevented.

  Further, since the dial operating unit 401 in which the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center is rotated by the dial driving motor 414 according to the game state, the dial operating unit 401 that rotates (rotates including vibration) without permission. With this, the player can be surprised to pay attention to the effects of the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can be entertained. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, whereby the dial operation unit The effect using the 401 (pressing operation unit 405) can be made more varied and hard to get tired, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the dial operating unit 401 is rotated by the dial driving motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the driving gear 412, and the position of the rotating shaft of the dial driving motor 414 is likely to be adjusted by the dial operating unit 401 (the driven gear). Since the position of the rotary shaft of (410) can be eccentric to the position of the rotary shaft, even if the dial operating unit 401 or the pressing operating unit 405 is strongly hit, the impact is transmitted via the rotary shaft of the dial operating unit 401. The direct drive motor 414 can be prevented from being directly applied, and the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, the diameter of the opening 420a of the base member 420 is made smaller than that of the dial operating portion 401, and the dial operating portion 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even when the gear rail 416a (the operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from the 401, the dial operation unit 401 can contact the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 can It is possible to reliably prevent the temperature from dropping below 420. Further, since the dial operating section 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operating section 401 and the operating section holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased, and the dial operating section 401 can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation section holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing an impact or a load from the operation section.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotating the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 is rotated. Due to the fact that the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player in spite of the fact that the rotation is driven by the The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be satisfactorily dissipated and radiated through the base member 420, so that the dial drive motor 414 can be prevented from malfunctioning due to overheating. To be able to withstand high loads Ri, it is possible to sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial drive motor 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, it is provided with rotation detecting sensors 432a and 432b for detecting rotation of the dial operating unit 401 and a pressing detecting sensor 432c for detecting pressing of the pressing operating unit 405. Since the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the player can be detected, it is possible to perform an effect in accordance with the operation of the player based on the detection signal. It is possible to provide an effect with a bodily sensation, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, a dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 for decorating the operation units 401 and 405 with light emission are provided, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be light-emitting decoration. By doing so, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

  Further, when the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation section 405 and the projection 401f of the dial operation section 401 are in contact with each other. Is pressed, the dial operation motor 401 is repeatedly rotated forward and backward within a predetermined angle range by the dial drive motor 414 and vibrated, so that the dial operation unit 401 is in contact with the protrusion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 via the stepped portion 407a. The pressing operation section 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even if a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405 is not separately provided, it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405, which is thought to not move arbitrarily. It is possible to make the user think that there is a possibility that the game may occur, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game and to prevent the interest from lowering. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move without permission, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the user can participate in the effect using the operation unit 400. The operation unit 400 can be easily operated and the operation unit 400 can be positively operated by the player, and the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed, thereby reducing the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operating unit 401 side. This makes it possible to distribute the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 also to the dial operation unit 401 side even when the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit, and the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 Can be increased. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is hit hard, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged, thereby preventing the game from being interrupted due to the damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). Thus, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from playing the game from decreasing due to the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation portion 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range around an axis extending in the up-down direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation portion 405, the dial drive is performed. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is rotationally driven by the motor 414, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to reliably recognize the respective roles of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and to make it easy for the player to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400, and to guide the player to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The "PUSH" character is not turned or greatly inclined, and can be easily read from the player side. It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operating portion 401 includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes from the inner circumference of the inner cylinder portion 401a to the axial center side, and has a smaller diameter on the outer circumferential surface of the pressing operating portion 405 than a predetermined vertical position. Since the step portion 407a is formed by the following steps, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operating portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible to the upper end of the operation unit 400. As a result, the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance, and the inside of the operation unit 400 via the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign substances such as dust and dirt to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation section 401 to rotate or to press the pressing operation section 405 due to the entry of foreign substances. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Further, a contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the dial operation unit 401 is moved in a circumferential direction. Since the contact can be made even at the position, even if the pressing operation part 405 is pressed with a feeling of being inclined (a position deviated from the center of the pressing operation part 405 toward the outer periphery), the pressing operation part 405 is surely brought into contact with the dial operation part 401. Thus, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the press operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. Further, since the dial operating unit 401 and the pressing operating unit 405 are in annular contact, the load from the pressing operating unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operating unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the pressing operating unit 405 and The impact resistance can be further improved.

  Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401. In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 via the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. Further, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be radially dispersed outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, preventing the load from being concentrated, and preventing the operation unit 400 from withstanding the load. The loadability and the impact resistance can be reliably increased, and the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased. The occurrence of malfunctions during the game is reduced as much as possible, and the interest of the player is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of normal rotation and reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 can be simply stopped at a predetermined position, not simply rotated, or can be rotated forward or backward. The operation unit 400 (sling machine 1) that can easily vibrate by repeating the operation and has the above-described effects can be embodied reliably.

  Further, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the plate unit 300 having the upper plate 301 for storing game balls, the strength and rigidity of the plate unit 300 are high in order to store a large number of game balls. Thus, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a strong blow to the operation unit 400 (the pressing operation section 405), and it is possible to easily enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400.

[Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 of the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 51 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device disassembled and viewed from the rear. As shown, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to a handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the lower opening 330b of the lower plate side cover 330 of the plate unit 300. A fixed and cylindrical handle base 502 whose front end bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, a handle body 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a front face of the handle body 504. A front end cover 506 which is arranged and is fixed to the handle base 502 and cooperates with the handle base 502 to rotatably support the handle main body 504.

  The handle device 500 has an inner base 508 attached to the front of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle body 504, and a rear end and a front end rotatably supported by the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506. A shaft member 510 rotatable integrally with the shaft 504 and having a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 meshing with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a rotatable integrally with the transmission gear 511. A rotation position detection sensor 512 sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

  Further, the handle device 500 has one end side attached to the inner base 508 and the other end side attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 via the transmission gear 511 in a clockwise direction in a front view. A biasing auxiliary spring 514, a touch sensor 516 mounted on the rear side of the inner base 508, the touch sensor 516 is connected to a firing stop switch 518 mounted at a different position on the rear surface of the inner base 508, and the inner base 508. A single-shot button 520 that is rotatably supported to actuate the firing stop switch 518, and one end is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end is attached to the handle main body 504 so that the handle main body 504 is in the initial rotation position (counterclockwise in front view). End of rotation in the direction of A handle return spring 522 that includes a.

  As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present embodiment has a front end that is open and has a rear end that cylindrically extends rearward from a front end that bulges backward and round. Three grooves 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 correspond to the three ridges 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140, one at the upper side, two at the lower side, and at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. Are located. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 such that the groove portion 502a fits with the protrusion 143.

  In the handle device 500, an arc-shaped slit 504a arranged concentrically with the rotation axis is formed in the handle body 504, and three mounting bosses 506a projecting rearward are formed in the front end cover 506. The mounting bosses 506a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504a of the handle body 504. As a result, the rotation range of the handle body 504 is regulated by the circumferential end of the slit 504a of the handle body 504 abutting on the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506.

  In the handle device 500, a locking projection 504b projecting rearward is formed on the handle main body 504. The other end (front end) of the coil-shaped handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking projection 504b. By being locked, the handle main body 504 is urged by a handle return spring 522 attached at one end to the handle base 502 to rotate counterclockwise in a front view.

  The handle device 500 of the present embodiment is configured to be attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 via a handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 has a mounting surface that is inclined so as to face outward (open side) in a plan view when viewed from above, so that the handle can be mounted via the handle bracket 140. The device 500 is also inclined outward in a plan view (in other words, the front end of the device 500 is inclined with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical surface of the pachinko machine 1 so as to be directed outside the pachinko machine 1). 5 to be fixed. Thus, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and can easily perform the rotation operation without any unnaturalness in the rotation operation.

  In the handle device 500, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor. When the handle body 504 (the handle device 500) is rotated, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is transmitted via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a rotates. Then, the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the hit ball firing device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is shot into the game area 1100 with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500. Therefore, when the handle main body 504 is turned so that the firing intensity becomes equal to or more than the predetermined value, the game ball fired toward the game area 1100 reaches the right area on the right side of the center role 2500, and the right area. Flow down. On the other hand, when the handle main body 504 is turned so that the firing intensity becomes smaller than the predetermined value, the game ball fired toward the game area 1100 flows down the left area from the center role 2500. As described above, it is possible to hit a game ball into the right area and the left area by the operation of the player. Note that the ball speed of a game ball flowing down the right side area of the center role 2500 is relatively faster than the ball speed of a game ball flowing down the left side area of the center role 2500. A game ball flowing down the right region at a relatively high ball speed can win a second starting port 2102 described later, and a game ball flowing down the left region at a relatively slow ball speed is described later. It is possible to win the first starting port 2101.

  Note that the outer peripheral surfaces of the handle body 504 and the front end cover 506 are plated with a conductive material, and the touch sensor 516 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the handle body 504 or the like. Then, when the handle body 504 rotates while the touch sensor 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the player hits the game ball. Can be done. That is, even if the player attempts to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 by some method without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven, and the player cannot drive the game ball. It is possible to prevent a player from playing a game different from the original game and reduce a load (burden) on a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  When the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 (see FIG. 118) operates the firing solenoid 654. The rotation drive is stopped. Thus, without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, the firing of the game ball can be temporarily stopped, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 520, the operation before the single-shot button 520 is operated is released. A game ball can be fired at the driving strength.

  In the handle device 500 of this example, after the rotation operation of the handle main body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, based on the detection of the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512, Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5 and the hit ball firing device 650 provided on the main body frame 3 are different from the conventional pachinko machine in that the door When the frame 5 is closed, there is no need to provide a mechanical (eg, a joint unit) mechanism so that the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened and the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. As well as eliminating the occurrence of malfunctions in the joint unit, and suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player due to a malfunction of the game ball being hit. It has to be able to bet.

  In the hitting ball firing device 650 (the firing solenoid 654) according to the present embodiment, when the handle device 500 is operated (if maintained), 100 game balls are sequentially fired at a constant interval in one minute. It is driven so as to have a launch speed (pace). Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the operation of the handle device 500 is performed (maintained), the game balls are successively hit into the game area 1100 at 0.6 second intervals.

[Fall cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 52A is an exploded perspective view of the door cover frame in a disassembled state as seen from the front, and FIG. 52B is an exploded perspective view of the door cover frame exploded in a rear view. FIG. 53 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed.

  The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the gaming window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is fired by a game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700, which will be described later, or a hit ball firing device 650. In spite of this, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 having a front side opened and having a plurality of flow paths for game balls therein, and a front cover 544 for closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (B), the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 is disposed at the upper right corner in rear view and communicates with the first ball inlet 542a penetrating in the front-rear direction. A first ball passage 542b extending rightward in front view toward the front end of the cover base 542, and a second ball inlet arranged outside the first ball inlet 542a (right side in rear view) and larger than the first ball inlet 542a. 542c, and a second sphere passage 542d that communicates with the second sphere inlet 542c and extends inside the cover base 542 and extends downward and slopes down to the lower right corner in front view. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are connected to the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. As shown, the height of a portion of the second ball passage 542d of the cover base 542 extending in the left-right direction along the lower end is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. A storage space 546 capable of storing a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 is disposed substantially at the upper center in the left-right direction and is open at an upper side with a foul ball inlet 542e, and can communicate with the foul ball inlet 542e to guide game balls to an upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. And a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542 g contacts the spherical contact portion 793 d of the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank 793. The opening / closing shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 542, is disposed at the upper left corner in front view, communicates with the first spherical passage 542b of the cover base 542, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. And a second ball outlet 544b disposed at the lower right corner in front view and communicating with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is configured to be connected to the upper dish ball supply port 310c of the dish unit 300 through the notch 101a of the door frame base unit 100. The second ball outlet 544b is configured to be connected to the rear end of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h in the dish unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 of the present embodiment transfers the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a to the first ball outlet 542b through the first ball passage 542b. 544a can be supplied to the upper plate 301 through the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. Further, the foul cover unit 540 transfers the game ball supplied from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d. 544b can be supplied to the lower plate 302 through the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball firing device 650 does not reach the inside of the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls down in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, foul cover unit 540 discharges (supplies) the game ball received at foul ball inlet 542e from second ball outlet 544b to lower plate 302 of plate unit 300 through foul ball passage 542f and second ball passage 542d. ) Can be.

  In addition, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and is swingably movable by the game balls stored in the accommodation space 546. 548, a full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting the rocking of the rocking member 548, and a spring for urging the rocking member 548 in a direction in which the rocking member 550 is not detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the swinging member 548 has a lower end pivotally supported by the cover base 542 and an upper end that rotates leftward in a front view. In this state, the left side wall of the housing space 546 is formed. The swinging member 548 is urged by a spring 552 to a position where the swinging member 548 is substantially vertical. Further, the swinging member 548 has a detection piece 548a projecting outward on a side surface opposite to the storage space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. I have.

  Further, foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of accommodation space 546 in second spherical passage 542d, a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of cover base 542 in rear view, respectively. , So that static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to rolling of the game ball can be removed.

  In this example, the game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 is supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540, Even if the upper plate 301 is full, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, the ball stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 is closed. When the upstream normal passage 773 is also full, the game balls roll toward the full tank passage 775 through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 83), and the full tank branch unit 770 From the full sphere outlet 776 to the second sphere inlet 542c, the second sphere passage 542d, and the second sphere outlet 544 of the foul cover unit 540. It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via the.

  Then, when the inside of the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 becomes full of game balls, the game balls cannot come out from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 and stay in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and many game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the stored pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the urging force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 moves to the left. Then, when the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 118) stops paying out the game balls from the prize ball unit 700 and plays the game. The user is notified that the game balls in the plate unit 300 are discharged to the outside.

  When the game ball in the accommodation space 546 (the lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the urging force of the spring 552, the detection of the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 is performed. The detection is not performed, and the payout of the game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[Antistatic measures for door frame base substrate 194]
As described above, the foul cover unit 540 (molded product of transparent polycarbonate) (see FIGS. 52 (A), (B) and 53) includes a second ball passage 542d for guiding a game ball to a lower plate and a game ball. Is formed, and the game ball (metal) passes at a high speed while being in contact with the wall of the passage, so that the game ball and the resin rub against each other to generate static electricity, thereby charging the game ball. Cheap.

  For this reason, a metal ground rail 554 is provided at the bottom of the second ball passage 542d for removing static electricity of the game ball generated by rolling resistance due to rolling of the game ball and discharging the ball to the lower plate. I have. Further, the foul cover unit 540 is provided with a plate-like ground metal 556 covering the right end and the left end of the cover base 542, and the left metal ground metal 556 can be electrically connected to the ground rail 554 on the bottom surface of the foul cover unit 540. (See FIGS. 52 (A), (B) and FIG. 53). The ground metal 556 is screwed to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (FIGS. 18, 23, and 26) of the door frame 5 so that static electricity escapes.

  Although the second ball passage 542d of the foul cover unit 540 can remove static electricity from the game ball by the ground rail 554 as described above, the electrostatic charge is accumulated in the polycarbonate in this portion, and it can be as high as 10 kV. (3-4 kV at most even when pain is felt by discharging the accumulated electrostatic charge). Further, even if the electric charge accumulated in the resin is grounded, only a very small portion of the electric charge escapes, and most of the electric charge remains. Then, there is a possibility that the digital amplifier circuit of the door frame base substrate 194 adjacent thereto may malfunction due to electrostatic induction due to the electric charge.

  In the gaming machine, a ground wire for releasing static electricity is attached to the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, for example. However, there is a possibility that the ground wire may be disconnected due to an accident or the connection terminal of the ground wire may be disconnected.

  The embodiment described below is made in view of such circumstances, and even if the ground is not taken, the charge accumulated in the foul cover unit 540 does not cause electrostatic induction. The invention relates to an invention relating to an antistatic mechanism for shielding a door frame base substrate 194 with a metal plate (a shield plate 562 described later) and preventing static electricity released to the shielding metal plate from jumping to surrounding conductors. It is.

  FIG. 54 is a front view of the static electricity prevention mechanism. FIG. 55 is a perspective view when the door frame showing the state provided with the static electricity prevention mechanism is viewed from the back. FIG. 56 is a main part rear view of the door frame showing a state where the antistatic mechanism is provided. FIG. 57 is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the static electricity prevention mechanism 560 in the embodiment is a metal (tin in this example) plate that shields the door frame base substrate 194 so as to prevent electrostatic induction due to charges accumulated in the foul cover unit 540. Shield plate 562 and a thin plate of polyethylene terephthalate (PET) which is formed in an outer peripheral shape larger than shield plate 562 and insulates so that electric charges jumping to shield plate 562 do not jump to surrounding conductors. And an insulating sheet 570.

  The shield plate 562 has, at the upper part in the vertical direction, a flat plate-shaped conductive part 563 that is in conductive contact with the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the door frame 5, and a step part 568 bent and formed in the left-right direction. And a substantially plate-shaped shield portion 564 which is located below and deeper than the conductive portion 563 with the boundary as a boundary, and is disposed over substantially the entire area on the back side of the door frame base substrate cover 195 attached to the lower back surface of the door frame 5. And

  A mounting portion 565 extending in a substantially semicircular shape is formed in the middle of the upper side of the conductive portion 563, and an insertion hole 566 is formed in the mounting portion 565. Are drilled.

  The insulating sheet 570 has a shape larger than the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562, and has a function of electrically insulating the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 from surrounding conductors. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, an insulating sheet 570 is attached to the shield plate 562 near the upper side of the back surface of the shield portion 564 by sticking.

  55 to 57, as described above, the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194 is covered with the door frame base substrate cover 195 (FIGS. 23 and 24). The insulating sheet 570 of the static electricity prevention mechanism 560 is disposed over substantially the entire rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. At this time, the shield plate 562 is disposed on the rear surface of the insulating sheet 570 so that the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570. That is, the shield plate 562 is disposed between the door frame base substrate cover 195 and the shield plate 562. At this time, the outer peripheral portion of the insulating sheet 570 is located radially outside the outer peripheral portion of the shield plate 562. The conductive portion 563 of the shield plate 562 comes into contact with the back surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (see FIG. 23) of the door frame 5 to make conductive contact, thereby discharging static electricity.

  In addition, bosses 110g, 110h, 110i, 110j for attachment to the foul cover unit 540 are protruded at appropriate places on the right side of the lower rear surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base body 110). Also, screw insertion holes 154a and 154b for screwing the shield plate 562 and the earth metal fitting 556 into the metal lower reinforcing plate 154 so as to release static electricity are provided at appropriate positions of the lower reinforcing plate 154. , 154c (see FIG. 56).

  The shield plate 562 is positioned by inserting the mounting boss 110g into the insertion hole 566, screws are inserted into the mounting holes 567 and the screw insertion holes 154a of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, and the screws are screwed into the door frame. Screwed to base body 110.

  Fail cover unit 540 is arranged such that front cover 544 is brought into surface contact with the back surface of shield plate 562, and a screw is inserted into its mounting portion, and the screw is screwed into mounting boss portions 110g to 110j. It is screwed to the back of the door frame base body 110. Also, a screw is inserted into a mounting portion of the grounding metal member 556, and a screw is inserted into the screw insertion holes 154b and 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. It is screwed to the door frame base body 110 so as to escape.

  In addition, the shield plate 562 and the foul cover unit 540 are attached to the attachment boss 110g together with screws by screwing. In addition, a ground wire (not shown) is attached to the screw insertion hole 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 together with a ground metal 556 by screws.

[Operation of antistatic mechanism 560]
The static electricity accumulated in the foul cover unit 540 escapes to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 through the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562 that is in surface contact and the conductive portion 563 that is in surface contact with the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, so that metal With the thin shield plate 562, the door frame base substrate 194 can be shielded so that the charge accumulated in the foul cover unit 540 does not cause electrostatic induction.

  In addition, since the shield plate 562 is disposed so that the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570, the electric charge that has jumped to the shield plate 562 transfers the surrounding conductor (metal) from the corner or end face of the shield portion 564. Objects and harnesses) can be prevented from jumping over.

[Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 58A is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame, and FIG. 58B is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit. FIG. 59 is a rear view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 60 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 60 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit with the rear case removed and viewed from behind. Further, FIG. 61 (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, and (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member as viewed from the front. (D) is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and can also play the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 can be pulled out to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310 d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110, and are forward and backward. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball vent 581b opening below the entrance 581a and having an open rear, a rear end of the front cover 581 closed and a front opened. A rear cover 582 having a hit ball supply port 582a for supplying a game ball which has a box shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction and penetrates from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hit ball launching device 650, a rear cover 582 and a front cover A partition portion 58 that is rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front and rear covers 581 and partitions the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b behind the front cover 581. a, and the game balls on the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 are sent one by one to the ball supply port 582a of the rear cover, and extend vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. A ball feeding member 584 rotatably supported around the axis, and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member 584. In this example, as shown in the figure, a ball feed member 584 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, and a ball punching member 583 is provided on the left side of the ball feed member 584, and a ball feed solenoid 585 is provided on the right side thereof. Are located.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583 described later extends forward from 581c. The front cover 581 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a. When the front cover 581 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding flow path 344b in the upper bowl removing base 344. It is formed so as to close.

  In addition, the ball removing member 583 has a partition portion 583a below the entrance 581a and between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b, the upper surface of which is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584, and a partition 583a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 584 and bends in a V-shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, with the lower end extending around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 583b rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c And a weight portion 583d protruding to the opposite side from the partition portion 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 58), and a ball feed opening of the door frame base body 110. The upper end of the abutment piece 343a of the upper dish removing slider 343 in the upper dish removing mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300 is contacted via 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 includes a blocking portion 584a having a fan shape in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the direction of the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583, and the blocking portion 584a. The ball holder 584b includes a sphere holding portion 584b that is depressed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are respectively formed within an angle range of about 90 ° about the rotation axis. The ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size that can hold one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 is rotated around the rotation axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 to move the rod 584c disposed at a position eccentric to the rotation axis in the left-right direction. ing.

  The ball feeding member 584 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a and a direction in which the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces in the direction of the partition portion 583a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is at the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 582a to the hit ball launching device 650, and enters the partition portion 583a from the entrance 581a. The movement of the ball to the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) is blocked by the blocking portion 584a, and the ball stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partitioning portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the rod portion 584c side closes the hit ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Further, the ball feed unit 580 is moved forward and backward by the ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip swings up and down by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and the movement of the tip of the ball feed action rod 586 which swings up and down. And a ball feed crank 587 that rotates about the axis extending in the vertical direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 about the axis that extends in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is capable of engaging with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 and extending in the left-right direction, and a side of the engagement part 587a that engages with the ball feed operation rod 586. A shaft 587b that is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582; and a ball feed member 584 extending upward from the shaft 587b. And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 60) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center in FIG.

  The ball feed unit 580 of the present example transmits the movement of the ball feed operation rod 586 that swings by driving the ball feed solenoid 585 that moves up and down by the ball feed operation rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587 to thereby transmit the ball feed member. 584 can be rotated. When the ball-feeding solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball-feeding operation rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball-feeding solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In the state, the ball feed member 584 is located at the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 586 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the tip that swings is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released from driving (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 receives the ball. The game balls are sent (supplied) to the hitting ball firing device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 654.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 rotatably supported by the ball in the ball feeding unit 580 in this example is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise in front view by the weight portion 583d, When the operating rod 583c protruding forward comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper tray ball removing slider 343 in the upper bowl removing mechanism 340 of the tray unit 300, the rotation thereof is restricted. In normal times, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b so that game balls do not enter the ball outlet 581b. Then, when the player presses the upper tray ball removing button 341 of the upper tray removing mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300 downward, the upper tray removing slider 343 slides down together with the contact piece 343a to make contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  As described above, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the abutting piece 343a of the upper bowl removing mechanism 340, the bowl removing member 583 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the entrance by the partitioning portion 583a. The partition between the ball opening 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered through the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball discharging channel 344c of the upper plate ball discharging base 344 of the plate unit 300. , Is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  In addition, since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing slider 343 with which the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 contacts is urged upward by the coil spring, the game ball is supplied vigorously onto the partitioning portion 583a. In addition, the impact can be absorbed by a coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, so that the ball removing member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball can be prevented from being damaged. The partition 583a can be prevented from bouncing off.

  In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 60 (B) and the like) which is recessed forward and to the upper right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a in the rear cover 582 is formed. At the same time, a fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feed unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 582 b of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 59 and the like, the anti-fraud member 588 is formed in a rectangular shape having a horizontally long overall outer diameter in a rear view, and is located on the opposite side from the substantially vertical center at the tip on the left side in the rear view. The upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c, which are vertically divided by a dividing line 588a extending toward the base end side (right side) of the upper piece 588b, and the tips of the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c. By bending the base end of the upper piece 588b away from each other in the vertical direction (rearward) with respect to the general surface of the tamper-proof member 588, V formed between the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c. It has a U-shaped cutting portion 588d, and an inclined portion 588e formed at the tip of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cutting portion 588d.

  As shown in the figure, as shown in the figure, the cutting portion 588d is formed by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588b so that the tip (left end in rear view) of the upper piece 588b moves backward. It is formed in a V-shape in plan view, and a wire Iw attached to an illegal game ball I is inserted into the V-shape. The cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 has a state in which the lower side of the upper piece 588b and the upper side of the lower piece 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. It is formed as follows.

  Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and can guide the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I into the cutting portion 588d by the inclined portion 588e. It has become. In the ball feed unit 580 of this example, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted from the rear side in the mounting concave portion 582b of the rear cover 582 as shown in the drawing, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting concave portion 582b of the rear cover 582. Are formed in a form that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the same time as the part where the is formed and communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

  According to the fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I to which the wire rod Iw is attached is supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the hitting ball launching device 650, and the illegal playing ball I is transferred by the hitting ball launching device 650 to the game area of the game board 4. When the player hits the inside 1100, the illegal game ball I fired by the hit ball firing device 650 moves diagonally to the upper left along the firing rail 660 in front view, and moves between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. Through the game area 1100. At this time, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire Iw is different from the movement locus of the illegal game ball I, Within the route within the shortest distance. Therefore, the wire Iw extending from the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball firing device 650 side through the hitting ball supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 causes the game ball I to move in the upper left direction in the front view (upper right direction in the rear view). Thus, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a to move on the shortest route, and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed in the upper right corner in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a. Then, the wire rod Iw that has moved to a portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) extending rightward in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 disposed at the position. After being guided into 588d, the game ball I is further pulled rightward in rear view by the force of the illegal game ball I.

  As a result, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the force of the illegal game ball I in the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 in the direction in which the gap becomes narrower (to the left in front view). The wire rod Iw is cut by the friction and shearing force applied by the cutting portion 588d (see FIG. 61 (D)). At this time, since the force of the illegal game ball I with the wire Iw is attenuated due to friction or the like acting on the wire Iw, the fraudulent game ball I can be inserted between the outer rail 1111 and the launch rail 660 without entering the game area 1100. Will be discharged through

  Therefore, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, so that the illegal game ball I attached with the wire rod Iw in the game area 1100 causes an illegal act. Can be prevented. Even if an illegal game ball I enters the game area 1100, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the illegality prevention member 588, as described above, so that an illegal act cannot be performed. Further, even if the wire rod Iw could not be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw cuts into the V-shaped cut portion 588d to attenuate the momentum of the illegal game ball I, thereby reducing the game area 1100. It is possible to prevent intrusion into the inside, so that it is possible to prevent fraud.

  As described above, according to this example, the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301 and the game balls are supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, and then the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5 is used by the player. When operated, the game ball is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 by driving the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball sending unit 580, and the hitting ball launching device 650 drives the game ball into the game area 1100, thereby causing the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to play. The game is played in the game area 1100 which can be visually recognized through the door frame, so that the player can be entertained and a feed mechanism (a ball feed member 584 or a ball feed solenoid 585) is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and a ball feed unit 580 provided with a discharge mechanism (ball punching member 583), so that only the ball feeding member 584 and the ball punching member 583 are used. The ball sending member 584 and the hitting ball firing device 650 are also as close as possible to each other, and when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, the ball remains on the ball feeding member 584 side. The number of game balls can be reduced as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bad and to prevent the player's interest from lowering.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 including the ball removing member 583 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game balls can be driven. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early by the operation, or to prevent the inside of the upper plate 301 from being filled up with the game balls early. It is possible to reduce the annoyance of the player by reducing the annoyance of the player, and to reduce the interest of the player, and to reduce the size of the plate unit 300 while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301. The area 1100 can be enlarged (widened) to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's interest strongly.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball pulling member 583, the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 are compared with a separate ball feeding member 583. The ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in assembling can be simplified, and the feed unit 580 can be easily replaced. However, the problem can be easily solved by replacing the ball feed unit 580.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side, so that the upper bowl ball is provided. There is no need to configure a transmission mechanism (upper ball pull-out mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the pull-out button 341 to the ball pull-out member 583 of the ball feed unit 580 so as to straddle the openable and closable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration relating to the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (every time the door frame 5 is opened is compared with the case where the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the body frame 3 side. By shutting off the upper bowl removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism is worn out early and malfunction or break, and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feed unit 580 and the like can be avoided. And durability can be improved.

  In addition, since the upper plate ball release button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 by simply pressing the upper plate ball release button 341 downward, or the upper plate 301 Of the game ball from the player can be stopped, and the player can easily perform the operation of removing the ball in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball release button 341.

  In addition, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball-pulling member 583 is made to move by the movement of the ball-pulling-out slider 343 that slides up and down in response to the operation of the ball-pulling-out button 341. In addition, since the partitioning portion 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, it is possible to minimize the horizontal moving range of the slider 343 and the partitioning portion 583a as much as possible. The unit 580 can be reduced in size, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely achieve the above-described effects.

  Further, the slider 343 is pressed upward, and the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 connects the entrance 581a and the ball supply port 582a when the slider 343 is in the raised position. Therefore, even if the game ball vigorously comes into contact with the partition portion 583a from the upper plate 301, the impact can be mitigated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removing member) 583) can be improved in durability. Further, since the impact on the partition 583a can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper bowl removing slider 343, even if the game ball collides with the partition 583a, it is difficult to repel the game ball. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing a problem.

  Further, since the partition 583a is rotated, the movement of the partition 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition 583a is related to the case where the partition 583a is slid. Friction loss can be reduced, the operability can be improved by lightening the operation of the upper bowl button 341, and the moving range of the partition 583 a can be reduced in planar projection, as in the above. The operation and effect of the present invention can be achieved.

  Further, since the partition 583a is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are communicated with each other, if a problem occurs in the partition 583a or the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, the partition 583a can be rotated. Is rotated by its own weight, so that the entrance and the discharge port are communicated with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (input device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it is discharged to the player side without being played, it is possible to make the player recognize that a malfunction has occurred in the pachinko machine 1, and to move to the pachinko machine 1 having no malfunction, and to have interest. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Further, since the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is rotated via the bent rotary rod portion 583b, when a game ball collides with the partitioning portion 583a, the impact is reduced by the bent rotary rod portion. By dispersing by the 583b or absorbing by bending of the rotating rod 583b, it is possible to prevent the impact from being transmitted linearly to the rotating shaft, and to improve the durability of the ball removing member 583. Can be enhanced.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when discharging the game balls in the upper plate 301, the left and right of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 are set. The movement in the direction can be minimized, and the play of the game balls in the ball feeding unit 580 can be improved so that the game balls can be discharged well. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 can be made as short as possible. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to prevent the ball feed unit 580 from being unnecessarily increased in size.

  Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cutting portion 588d) is arranged at a position as close as possible to the hitting ball firing device 650. Therefore, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I in the state of the highest speed (with momentum) immediately after being fired by the hit ball firing device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d By rapidly (strongly) pulling the wire Iw, the wire Iw can be reliably cut, and at the same time, the momentum of the illegal game ball I is attenuated to prevent the illegal ball Iw from entering the game area 1100. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent an illegal game ball I from performing an illegal act.

  Further, since the fraud prevention member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting concave portion 582b which is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rear cover 582, it is necessary to form the V-shaped cutting portion 588d. The upper piece 588b bent rearward can be prevented from protruding rearward from the rear end face of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece 588b of the tamper-proof member 588 can be injured by an operator during assembly or the like. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I, the upper piece 588b on the upper side is bent backward across the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate. Thus, since the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed, the cutting portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

[Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 590 has an opening of approximately the same size as the gaming window 101 and has a unit frame 592 of an annular and vertically long octagonal shape formed of synthetic resin, and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. And a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 112). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes two stoppers 592a disposed at the upper portions on both left and right sides and extending outward in a plate shape, and a plate-shaped engagement member extending in the left and right direction along the lower end and extending downward. A stop piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end so as to engage with the vertically bent protruding piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from above and behind. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit supporting step 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stopper piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190, so that the door frame is locked. It is configured to be detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[Shape decoration on door frame]
Next, the molding decoration, that is, the shape decoration in the door frame 5, will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 62. FIG. FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame cut at substantially the center in the vertical direction. As shown, the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls arranged vertically below the vertically elliptical game window 101. For driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 disposed behind the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101 on the right side of the lower plate 302 in a front view. The handle device 500 is arranged. In the door frame 5, the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the upper decoration unit 280 are arranged to surround the left, right, and upper sides of the gaming window 101, and surround the lower side of the gaming window 101. Dish unit 300 is arranged as described above.

  The outer appearance of the door frame 5 is greatly different on both sides across the gaming window 101, and the right side has a rugged natural rock-like appearance by the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decorative unit 200. On the other hand, the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 can be seen from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decorative unit 240 on the left side, so that the appearance of the metal is sharp and artificial. ing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 62, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 differ in the amount of forward projection of the door frame 5, and the right side decoration unit 200 has a left side decoration unit. It protrudes forward more than 240. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed to have a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed to be a slightly curved flat shape.

  Thus, in the door frame 5 of the present example, when viewed from the right front, the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 look similar to each other (see FIG. 19), whereas the left front decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 look similar to each other. When viewed from the right side, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240, and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is almost invisible, so that a different impression can be given depending on the player's standing position with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In other words, the appearance of the present pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the present pachinko machine 1, and it can be illusioned as a pachinko machine of a different model. Can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can attract the interest of the player.

  Further, since the front exterior of the door frame 5 is asymmetrical left and right, for example, when the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a plurality of rows in the left and right direction in an island facility of a game hall or the like, the exterior of the entire island facility is solid and solid. The right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 having different forms are alternately arranged to give a rhythmical impression to give the player an exciting appearance (atmosphere). This makes it possible to enhance the appeal to the player and strongly attract the interest of the player.

  In addition, the door frame 5 emits an LED mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 and the like provided in the units 200, 220, 280, and 300, thereby causing the gaming window 101 to emit light. Can be illuminated with an arbitrary luminescent color so as to surround. Also, of the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240, the LEDs 214b, 216b disposed behind the side flash lenses 204, 246. , 254b, 256 are turned on or off so that the mode of the light-emitting decoration surrounding the gaming window 101 can be changed.

[Light-emitting decoration on door frame]
Subsequently, the light-emitting decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. 63 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emission decoration on the door frame. FIG. 64 is a front view showing a system of light emitting decoration LEDs in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of the units 200, 240, 280, and 300 includes a decorative board 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which an LED is mounted. Can be decorated with light.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery except for the lower side of the game window 101, and the plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250 are formed. The lens units 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centered on the lower portion of the center of the game window 101 in the left-right direction. Are arranged between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

  In the door frame 5 of the present example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is formed. Is formed by one smooth and gentle curved surface. In the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are disposed behind the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is arranged between the peripheral lens part 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252.

  Further, the door frame 5 is provided at the rear side of the inner side lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, on the right side upper decoration board 214, the right side lower decoration board 216, and the left side upper decoration board 254. , And a left side lower decorative substrate 256 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256. ing.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214, right side lower decorative substrate 216, left side upper decorative substrate 254, and left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 have peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a are arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are arranged at positions corresponding to the emission lens units 210b and 250b (side flash lenses 204 and 246). . In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens units 210a and 250a are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b corresponding to the radiation lens units 210b and 250b have relatively high luminance. It is an LED. The two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the upper right side decorative board 214 are a green LED and a red LED.

  In this example, the surfaces of the upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the upper left side decorative substrate 254, and the lower side left decorative substrate 256 are formed of white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, and the like. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that light from the player side is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 214a, 216a, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating the appearance, and to reflect the light emitted from the LEDs 214a and 216a to the player side by the substrate, thereby improving the side view. The lenses 210 and 250 can be decorated with light emission more brightly.

  As described above, the upper decorative unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the upper portions of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 facing the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the gaming window 101. The upper decoration unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 arranged at the center in the left-right direction, an annular central ring lens portion 282b arranged on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and an outer portion outside the central annular lens portion 282b. And four extension frame lens portions 282c extending to the right and left sides. The extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered with an upper lower decorative cover 294 on the front surface.

  The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central decorative substrate 288 that is disposed on the rear side of the upper central lens 284 and the central annular lens portion 282 b of the upper lens 282, and a laterally extending upper lens 282 than the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decorative substrate 290 arranged on the rear side of the extension frame lens portion 282c and the upper central decorative substrate 288. A plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the center ring lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface of the upper center decoration substrate 288, and the upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282b are mounted. And can be separately illuminated. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c are mounted on the front side of the upper side decorative substrate 290, and each extension frame lens portion 282c can be light-emitting decorated. . The LEDs 288a, 288b, 290a of the upper central decorative substrate 288 and the upper side decorative substrate 290 are full-color LEDs.

  Subsequently, the outer surface of the dish unit 300 is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces having a substantially spindle shape, and has an external appearance that is continuous with the external appearance of the right side decorative unit 200. In the dish unit 300, an upper dish decorative board 322 is arranged behind the upper dish decorative member 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322 a mounted on the upper dish decorative board 322 allows the upper plate decorative member 316 to be used. An upper plate upper right decorative member 319 for decorating the right side portion and the front outer periphery of the upper plate ball pullout button 341 can be illuminated. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative board 322 is a full-color LED.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 300 includes a light-transmitting annular dial operation unit 401 and a light-transmitting cylindrical pressing operation unit disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. 405, and a dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 are arranged below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality (four in this example) of LEDs 430b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. The button decoration board 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a high-luminance white LED, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full-color LED. The surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same operation and effect as described above can be achieved.

  By the way, in the door frame 5 of this example, it corresponds to each peripheral lens part 210a, 250a of the side lens 210, 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 which covers the outer periphery above the lower side of the gaming window 101. The LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a include a first annular group 102 (within a hatched area in FIGS. 63 and 64) close to the gaming window 101 and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (Within the range of the cross hatch in FIGS. 63 and 64), and the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light appropriately, so that they are substantially concentric so as to surround the gaming window 101. A plurality (two in this example) of light emitting decorations can be made. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the first annular group 102 emit light, the area of the hatch near the gaming window 101 is decoratively illuminated annularly, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the second annular group 103 are turned on. When all light is emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is decoratively lighted in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. The radial group 104 (FIGS. 63 and 64) extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction. (Within the shaded area). By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the gaming window 101 can be radially illuminated and decorated. The luminous decoration can be made to be divided in the circumferential direction.

  In the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the upper right side decorative board 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decorative unit 200 is the notification group 105. Various information can be notified to a player or an employee of a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 288 a and 288 b corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282 b of the upper decoration unit 280 for decorating the upper center of the gaming window 101 are formed by the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. Is formed as an upper central group 106 which emits light at the upper center. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 288a and 288b of the upper central group 106, the upper center of the gaming window 101 can be illuminated and decorated. It is possible to make a luminous decoration that becomes a point. The LED 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper center side group 107 for emitting and illuminating the left and right sides of the upper center group 106. By appropriately causing the LEDs 290a of the upper central side group 107 to emit light, the boundaries between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be illuminated.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 322 a corresponding to the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 disposed below the gaming window 101 causes the upper plate 301 to emit light. The dish group 108 is provided. In the door frame 5, LEDs 430 b and 432 d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the lower center of the game window 101 and at the upper center of the plate unit 300, operate the operation unit 400. An operation group 109 for performing light emission decoration is provided. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be illuminated, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be determined. People can be notified.

  The light emitting decoration of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in further detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are further subdivided in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109 to which they belong, corresponding to the control system. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64, 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are provided with 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the peripheral lens units 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250. Have been.

  Also, the 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems of 104a to 104h for each of the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. The two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems: a central part 106a, a right part 106b, and a left part 106c. Further, the seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems of a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the 11 LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems of 108a to 108d in front and rear and left and right. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include a pair of LEDs 430b in which four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405 as a set. And one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 is divided into three systems, one system. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems. ing.

  By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems to emit light in full color. In light emission control, the number of systems is 84, which is three times as large. The LEDs 288a and 430b are high-luminance white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high luminance. One system is connected, and the actual light emission control is doubled to eight systems.

  Note that the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b are white LEDs of normal brightness and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED, and belongs to two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b constituted by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system, and therefore, the same number of ten systems is provided in actual light emission control.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting and blinking are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, it is possible to perform an expressive light-emitting effect.

  As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is sequentially emitted from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequentially in the same color or a similar color) to spread outward around the gaming window 101. A light emission effect, or conversely, a light emission effect such that light is converged from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light (same color or similar color) from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102, Alternatively, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 emit light at the same time, so that a light emission effect or the like can be performed such that the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 emits light widely.

  Also, by cooperating with the LEDs (not shown in detail) provided on the game board 4, the LEDs of the game board 4, the LEDs of the first annular group 102 near the gaming window 101, and the first annular group 102 With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged outside, it is possible to perform a more expressive light-emitting effect, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and to make the player entertain and entertain. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

  In the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, the respective systems 102 a to 102 j and 103 a to 103 j are appropriately lit to emit light. Light emission can be performed such that light moves toward the center lens 284 or light moves from the upper center lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into ten systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (ten divisions). However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about eight systems (about eight divisions), it is possible to satisfactorily perform a light emission effect in which light orbits the outer periphery of the game window 101.

  Further, by emitting light only in the radial group 104, a light emitting effect of emitting light radially around the game window 101 is performed, and simultaneously with the radial group 104, the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 emit light. The light emitting effect of causing the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly by emitting the light, and the radial group 104 emitting light (lighting / flashing) during the light emission of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are annular. Or a luminous effect for giving an accent to the luminous decoration. In addition, by causing each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, a light emission effect in which the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b) orbit can be performed.

  In addition, the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 emit light, so that a chance is given to the player or a specific game state (for example, a jackpot game state, a probable change game state, a time saving game state, a probable change time short game state). , Etc.) can be performed.

  Further, by appropriately emitting light from each of the systems 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, a light emitting effect for lighting and decorating the upper plate 301 is provided, or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation For example, a light emission effect for prompting the operation of the unit 405 can be provided. The system 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 are appropriately illuminated to emit light to prompt the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and guide the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, a light emission effect for prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be provided.

  Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full-color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to perform a light-emission effect in which a gradation such as a light-emission color or brightness is made different for each 109 or for each of the systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c. A rich luminous effect can be performed.

[Overall configuration of body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 65 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 66 is a rear view of the main body frame. FIG. 67 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 68 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 69 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment has a left side supported by the outer frame 2 when viewed from the front, and is supported like a door so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 behind the door frame 5. The front side is opened and closed by a door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this embodiment includes a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding opening 601 for forming the skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base. An upper bracket 630 and a lower shaft bracket 640 attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end portion of the front view 600 and supported by the outer frame 2 and supporting the door frame 5, respectively, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 650 mounted on the lower front surface of the game board 4 for driving game balls into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and pays out game balls to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 mounted on the rear side of the main frame base 600. Ball unit 700 for mounting, and the flow of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and is attached to the front of the body frame base 600. Ball exit opening It includes a unit 790, a.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes a door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and various control boards for controlling electric components provided on the main body frame 3, a power supply board 851, and the like. , A back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding opening 601 in the main frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front to open and close the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and open and close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[Main frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the body frame base in the body frame. FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the body frame base in the body frame. The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, has a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 when viewed from the front, and is substantially in the front-rear direction. It is formed so as to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 69). Accordingly, when the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, and the like are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, the work is performed with the main body frame base 600 face down. In addition, the rear surface of the body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the height of the depth D of the body frame base 600, so that the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily mounted, and the workability related to the assembly of the body frame 3 is improved. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a game board holding opening capable of fitting and holding the outer circumference of the game board 4 by penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within about 3/4 of the entire range from the upper part to the lower part. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end of the main body frame base 600 excluding the left side when viewed from the front, and the front end frame portion 602 is recessed from the front to the rear, and the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5 Frame protruding piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the upper side, upper bent protruding piece 167 protruding rearward of upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in reinforcing unit 150 of door frame 5, and open side protruding rearward of open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. An engagement groove 603 into which the bent protruding piece 163 is inserted and engaged.

  The lower part of the main frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding opening 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame part 602 and spreads in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604; The free end portions (upper and lower left ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other by the peripheral wall portion 605, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It has become.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding opening 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall section 604 and has a game board placement section 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and a game board placement section 606. A positioning projection 607 that protrudes upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game panel 4, and a game board of the game board 4 formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 when viewed from the front. A game board engaging portion 608 (see FIG. 65) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate-like shape which is suspended downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. And a plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 is fitted to the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the backward direction. ing. Further, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the right side of the game board 4 in the front view from moving in the front-rear direction when the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 is locked. I have. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 in front view will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is regulated by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a metal fitting for mounting the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 on a rear surface of a free end (upper left and right ends in a front view) of a U-shaped front end frame 602. A portion 610 is provided (see FIG. 73). As shown in FIG. 72 and the like, the bracket mounting portion 610 is reinforced at its front side with a plurality of ribs extending vertically and horizontally, and is used to mount the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 with sufficient strength. Can be done. The main body frame base 600 has a substantially circular cylinder lock through-hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and a door frame 5 formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through-hole 611 in front view. And a U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with the positioning projection 110d projecting rearward from the door frame base body 110, and houses the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 formed at the lower left of the fitting groove 612 when viewed from the front. And a solenoid housing recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example has the lower rear wall portion 604 formed at a position one step lower than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the lower rear wall portion 604 has a right side in front view. On the front surface, the hitting ball firing device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state in which the hit ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 67, FIG. A fale space 626 extending downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has an opening 614 that penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left from the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in front view, and a plurality of openings are formed on the upper side of the opening 614 and on both left and right sides in front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed by a relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 70 and the like) from the front side, and passes through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the lower rear wall portion 604. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the board unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. Note that the through holes 615 arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation type holes having a front wall.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support section rotatably supporting a game board fixing tool 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 to the vicinity of the front upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 that projects forward from the lower right of the fixture supporter 616 when viewed from the front and regulates the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 65 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around an axis supported by the fixing tool supporting portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. An operation piece 690b extending outward from one end in the circumferential direction (a side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise in front view). The game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 clockwise in a front view. The fixing piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board placement part 606, and is inserted into the fixing recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placement part 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. The game board fixture 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and the pivoting end in the counterclockwise direction in front view is restricted by coming into contact with the stopper 617. Has become.

  Further, the body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, the body frame base 600 is provided with a body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on a rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( When the main frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has three U-shaped front end frame portions 602 that penetrate vertically (in the front-rear direction) inwardly (in the axial support side) from the engagement grooves 603 on the right (open side) side in the front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock hole 621 penetrating in the front-rear direction below the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and arranged in two in the left-right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are formed near the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and substantially at the center in the vertical direction, respectively. The upper and central door hook holes 620 and the lock holes 621 are adapted to engage and lock the locking projections 1004 provided on the upper and lower ends of the lock device 1000. The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in front view in FIG. When the lock device 1000 is mounted on the body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620, and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. 1010 projects forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 67).

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is gently and obliquely lowered from the upper right end toward the center in the left-right direction, as viewed from the rear, on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and then at the approximate center in the left-right direction. And a main frame base ball removal passage 622 from which a game ball is allowed to roll down from the middle in the up-down direction to a slightly upward position. The rear side of the main body frame base ball passage 622 is closed by the substrate unit base 810 of the substrate unit 800. As will be described in detail later, the game ball that has rolled in the ball discharge passage 741d of the prize ball device 740. Are rolling.

  Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in rear view, and the back cover shaft support portions 623 rotatably support the support pins 906 of the back cover 900. A mounting part 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front left side of the opening 614 on the front side of the lower rear wall part 604, and the lock device 1000 on the right side (opening side) of the peripheral wall part 605 in front view. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, and the like are appropriately located on the main body frame base 600. Is formed.

[Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 of the main body frame 3 are respectively attached to metal mount mounting portions 610 on the upper left and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 in the front view using predetermined screws, so that the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 are attached to the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with the outer frame 2.

  First, the upper bracket 630 is attached to the upper bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like mounting portion 631 extending forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. A front extension 632, a pivot pin 633 protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension 632, and a pivot pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in a front view. And a door frame support hole 634 (see FIG. 67 and the like) penetrating in the up and down direction, and hanging downward from the left end in the front view of the front extension portion 632 to rotate the door frame 5 toward the open side. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 69 and 113) for regulating the end. In the upper bracket 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending and forming a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support 640 includes a door frame support 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and a body support 3 that is disposed below the door frame support 642 and supports the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. And a body frame shaft support 644 for performing the operation. The door frame shaft support 642 of the lower shaft support 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a. A plate-shaped front extension 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 634 that penetrates vertically near the front end of the front extension 642b, and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extension. And a stopper 642d that stands upward from the left end of the front view 642b when viewed from the front and regulates the pivotal end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In this door frame shaft bracket 642, a mounting portion 642a, a front extending portion 642b, and a stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The main frame support 644 of the lower support 640 is attached to a metal mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions. A front extension portion 644b extending forward, and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 644b. Also in the main frame support 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extension portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower bracket 640 of this example has a state in which the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft mounting 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the body frame shaft mounting 644 overlap (contact) with each other in the front-rear direction. The front extending portion 642b of the shaft support 642 and the front extending portion 644b of the main frame support 644 are separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and are attached to the lower mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600. It has become.

  The upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pins 633 of the upper shaft support 630 and the body frame shaft support holes (not shown) of the lower shaft support 640. Are positioned coaxially, and the main frame support hole of the main frame support 644 in the lower support 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21 d of the lower support 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, after the front extension portion 644b of the body frame shaft support 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support 21, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting the main frame 3 into the support hook hole 20c of the upper support bracket 20, the main frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 are attached to the body frame base 600, and the door frame support holes 634 of the upper shaft support 630 and the door frame support of the lower shaft support 640. The metal fitting 642c is positioned coaxially with the door so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the door frame shaft support 642 of the lower shaft support 640. After placing the lower shaft support 158 of the frame 5 on the front extension 642 b of the door frame support 642, the shaft pins 155 of the door frame 5 are inserted into the door frame support holes 634 of the upper shaft support 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the up and down direction. When the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Once the door is slid downward so that the upper shaft support 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension 632 of the upper shaft support 630 overlap vertically, the shaft pin 155 is slid upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[Ball launcher]
Next, the hit ball firing device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. 74 is a front perspective view of the hit ball firing device in the main body frame. FIG. 75 is a rear perspective view of the hit ball firing device in the main body frame. The hitting ball firing device 650 can hit a game ball supplied from the ball feed unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a strength corresponding to a rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  The hitting ball launching device 650 of the present embodiment has a launching base 652 of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a rotary drive shaft 654 a protruding forward on the lower rear surface of the launching base 652. Launching solenoid 654, a hitting hammer 656 fixed to the driving shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting hammer 656, and a movement locus of the tip 658. A tip of a ball hitting hammer 656 between a firing rail 660 extending obliquely to the upper left from a predetermined position on the upper side and attached to the front surface of the firing base 652 and a firing rail 660 above the base end of the firing rail 660. A ball stop that forms a gap through which game balls cannot pass at the same time that game balls 658 are allowed to pass and holds game balls at the base end of the firing rail 660 The pin 662 and the ball stopper 662 restrict the rotation of the hitting hammer 656 (hammer tip 658) toward the firing rail 660 from a hitting position at which a game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 can be hit. And a stopper 664.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 of the hit ball firing device 650 is configured such that the drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. Also, the ball hammer 656 of the ball launching device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a gently extending arc extending from the fixed portion 656a with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A rod portion 656b to which a hammer tip 658 is fixed at the tip in the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c extending to the opposite side of the rod portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween and capable of contacting the stopper 664 are provided. ing. When the stopper 656c of the hitting hammer 656 contacts the stopper 664, the tip 658 of the tip of the hitting ball 656 is rotated more toward the firing rail 660 than the hitting position (rotational end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). It is being regulated.

  The firing rail 660 of the hitting ball firing device 650 has a loose arc shape with its lower part depressed substantially along the lower end extension of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 102), and also in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center has a V-shaped concave shape, and the game ball hit by the ball hammer 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 along the firing rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  In addition, the hitting ball firing device 650 includes a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of a stopper 664 capable of restricting a rotation end of the hitting hammer 656 toward the hitting position side, and a rotation of the hitting hammer 656 that is away from the hitting position. A stopper 668 for regulating an end (a rotation end in a clockwise direction in front view). The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example has the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, can absorb the impact when the hitting hammer 656 abuts, and suppresses the generation of noise due to the abutment. You can do it.

  As shown in FIG. 67, FIG. 102, and the like, when the hitting ball firing device 650 of this example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the firing rail 660 is lower at the approximate center in the left-right direction. It is located below the upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, below the game board placement section 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601), and the outside of the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111 and a predetermined width in the left-right direction and spread downward. Then, the hit ball launching device 650 of this example launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side in front view of the launch rail 660, thereby driving the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. Is available. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 The game ball which has not been driven into the ball but falls into the foul space 626 falls, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

  Further, the hitting ball firing device 650 is configured such that the firing solenoid 654 is driven by the firing control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. Is driven in synchronization with the driving of More specifically, in the ball feeding unit 580 that supplies game balls to the hitting ball firing device 650, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feeding member 584 receives game balls, and from that state, the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven. Is released (OFF), the ball feeding member 584 sends the received game ball to the hitting ball firing device 650 side, so that the firing solenoid 654 is driven almost simultaneously with the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. By performing (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the firing rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting hammer 656. ing.

[Prizeball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 77 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit in an exploded manner and shown from behind. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit, which is disassembled and viewed later. FIG. 82 is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view showing a rolling path of a ball in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island facility side to the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility in a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then issues a predetermined payout instruction. Is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1 based on the above. The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and a prize ball tank 720 mounted on the rear upper portion of the prize ball base 710 for receiving and storing game balls supplied from the island facility side. And a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls aligned by the tank rail unit 730 The award ball device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction, and the game balls paid out by the award ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and are paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls. And a full tank branch unit 770 capable of branching a game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes a rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding metal for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fixing a back cover engaging groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to a rear surface thereof, and for fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the left side of the back cover engaging groove 780a in rear view. And a rear cover fastening hole 780b (see FIGS. 77 and 79).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are provided on the upper side. Along with the arrangement, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is disposed on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is disposed below the prize ball device 740. An external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are disposed immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, as shown, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding opening 601 in front view. And are integrally formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 extends substantially rearward along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall 710a with a predetermined width and is disposed on substantially the same plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 79, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and can form a space in which the game board 4 can be accommodated when attached to the main body frame base 600. ing.

  Further, the prize ball base 710 includes a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, and an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate disposed next to the tank mounting portion 711 (right side in rear view). An external terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the lower rear side of the upper edge of the rear wall portion 710b, and a vertical rear side of the rear wall portion 710b. A prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740 to the prize ball device 740; a prize ball passage 715 for guiding a game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 downward; And a mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full branch unit 770 at the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Further, the prize ball base 710 has an escape hole 717 for letting out a payout motor 744 and the like that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740, and a back surface. And a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although detailed description is omitted in the prize ball base 710, mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, and the like, and mounting the prize ball base on the main body frame base 600 are appropriately positioned. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 80, the prize ball tank 720 of the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open top, and has a bottom wall portion that is substantially rectangular in a plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall 721 and protrudes rearwardly from the bottom wall 721 in a rectangular shape only in a right rear portion (opening rear) in plan view; A discharge port 723 that is formed by a portion that protrudes rearward from a bottom wall portion 721 at the right rear portion of the outlet port 722 and that opens downward. Eaves portion 724, a bar-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left side of the eaves portion 724 in plan view, and award balls formed near the base end of the shaft portion 725 and at both front ends of the outer peripheral wall portion 722. Put the tank 720 on the prize ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the winning balls tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Also, the prize ball tank 720 is inclined such that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 becomes lower toward the discharge port 723, and the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 rotatably supported by the shaft 725. As shown in the figure, the ball leveling member 727 has one end supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end is suspended by its own weight. . The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730 described later, and can level the game balls rolling in the tank rail unit 730. Further, the eaves portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially half of the upper side of the tank rail unit 730, so that it is possible to prevent game balls from overflowing from inside the tank rail unit 730, It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined such that the left side (the side far from the outlet 723) in plan view becomes lower toward the right side, and The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) in a plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. Thereby, the flow of the game balls can be made smooth, the occurrence of clogging of the balls in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed, and at the same time, from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. Gaming balls can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 that is disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extends long in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 is a gutter-like shape having a predetermined depth with an open upper portion, and has a width (depth) in which game balls can be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is sloped so that is lower. The tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 83) that opens downward at the left (supporting side) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at substantially the center in the front-rear direction, and a front lower surface. A plurality of locking projections 731c (see FIG. 78) that project downward and are locked from above from the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710.

  The tank rail 731 has a right end (open side) end in front view located immediately below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720. After being received, it can be rolled leftward and delivered from the discharge port 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. In addition, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the prize ball base 710 by locking the locking projection 731 c of the tank rail 731 to the attachment locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710. ing.

  In addition, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with an aligning gear 732 rotatably supported above the outlet 731a of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the upper part of the aligning gear 732, and a right end of the gear cover 733 in a front view. A ball pressing plate 734 for closing the upper part of the tank rail 731; and a ball stopper which can be advanced and retracted into the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and an earth plate 736 that is disposed in the tank rail 731 and can contact a game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two aligning gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls divided in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. Further, the ball holding plate 734 includes an attachment portion 734a to which a ball stopper 735 is attached at an upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in a vertical direction and through which a protrusion 735a of the ball stopper 735 can be inserted.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball pressing plate 734. The game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. I can do it. In addition, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game balls that were not at one level by the ball leveling member 727 one level, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. Attached to the tank rail 731 as described above.

  As shown, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is axially supported so that the pitch of the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by a half pitch. Thus, when the upper part of the game balls flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the downstream outlet 723 while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately one by one. It is sent to the device 740.

  It should be noted that a narrow groove which penetrates up and down is formed at the bottom of the tank rail 731 so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls with the game ball in the tank rail 731 falls downward from the narrow groove. Has become. The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is grounded externally via a grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via a grounding metal 782, though not shown in detail. When the game ball contacts the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  In addition, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stopper 735 rotatably attached to the attachment part 734a of the ball holding plate 734, so that the protruding piece 735a of the ball stopper 735 passes through the slit 734b, and the inside of the tank rail 731. , The two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the protruding pieces 735a, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 side can be stopped. I have.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the state of a game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 pays out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Things. The prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 mounted on the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710 as shown in FIGS. 81 to 83 and the like. As shown, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 has a supply passage that opens to the upper end on the rear surface side, extends slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball, and extends slightly below the center in the vertical direction. A distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and having a space of a predetermined size, and communicating with a lower end (open side) of the distribution space 741b on the rear side on the rear side and bent in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the rear. A prize ball passage 741c that opens on the left side surface, and a ball passage 741d that communicates with the lower end of the distribution space 741b on the right side (the pivot side) in rear view and extends downward to open at the lower end are provided. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball ejection passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed to be open rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example includes a back cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and having a shorter length in the vertical direction than the unit base 741, and a plate-shaped motor support disposed below the back cover 742. A dispensing motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotating shaft 744a projects rearward from the motor supporting plate 743; and a rotating shaft 744a of the dispensing motor 744. A first gear 745 rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745 and supported by the unit base 741, and meshed with the second gear 746 A third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and a payout cycle which rotates together with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741b of the unit base 741. The body 748 and the payout rotating body 748 are fixed on the opposite side with the third gear 747 interposed therebetween so as to be integrally rotatable, and have a plurality (three in this example) of detection slits 749 a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. 749.

  The prize ball device 740 includes a ball out switch 750 attached to the unit base 741 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and a game ball attached to the unit base 741 and rolling in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for counting the number, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting a detection slit 749a of a rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 that is held and attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 Sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball cutout switch 750, a counting sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 that relays the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110 and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. It has.

  The prize ball device 740 further includes a substrate cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay substrate 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (a rotation detection board 749). ), A gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a supply passage that can contact a game ball rolling in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741. A grounding metal 757, a screw 758 for fixing the dispensing motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween, and connecting the dispensing motor 744 to the ground, and a back cover 742 detachably supported on the unit base 741. And a detachable button 759 to be operated.

  In the prize ball device 740 of the present example, the back lid 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d are opened rear ends. Is to be closed. The unit base 741 has a shape in which a position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a once bulges rearward, and can relieve the momentum of the game balls discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730. I can do it. In addition, the unit base 741 is partially cut out on one side (left side in rear view) below the position of the supply passage 741a that swells rearward, and is outside the cutout position of the supply passage 741a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball-out switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a front and rear side penetrating below the prize ball passage 741c. And a motor insertion hole 741g which is formed and through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By mounting the cut-out switch 750 on the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operating piece of the cut-out switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a, and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the playing ball, the presence / absence of a playing ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the ball cutout switch 750. In a state where the game ball in the supply passage 741a is not detected by the ball-out switch 750 (ball-out state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and it is determined that the ball has run out. It is to be notified to the side.

  The unit base 741 is provided between the bearing 741h for supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (the payout rotating body 748), and the switch mounting part 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. And a button support hole 741j which is disposed on the unit base 741 and supports a detachable button 759 for detachably supporting the back cover 742. Have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage grounding metal 757 can be brought into contact with game balls in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage grounding metal 757 to the grounding metal mounting portion 741i. The front surface of the supply passage grounding metal 757 is in contact with the rear end of the lower end of the U-shaped grounding metal 782, and the static electricity of the game ball rolling in the supply passage 741 a via the supply passage grounding metal 757 is removed. You can do it.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape as a whole, and an upper end bulging rearward. A button insertion hole 742a through which the detachable button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on a substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and an relay board mounting The sensor board mounting portion 742c for mounting the sensor substrate 753 is provided below the portion 742b, and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located behind the grounding metal mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

  In this example, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is made of an aluminum plate, and comes into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, so that heat generated by the payout motor 744 is released. Heat can be easily dissipated.

  As shown in FIG. 82, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 includes three concave portions 748a each having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. As the 748 rotates, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated one by one in the recess 748a, and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d. In addition, three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the positions between the concave portions 748a of the payout rotating body 748, and the detection slits 749a are rotated by the rotation angle sensor 752. By detecting, the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

  The prize ball device 740 according to the present example is configured such that a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6, or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or the payout motor is operated by operating the ball removal switch 860b. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is driven to rotate, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshing with the first gear 745 is rotated. The third gear 747 that meshes with the gear rotates. A payout rotator 748 is fixed to the front side of the third gear 747 and a rotation detection plate 749 is fixed to the rear side thereof so that the payout rotator 748 and the rotation detection plate 749 can be rotated together with the third gear 747. It is designed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 82, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 is rotatably supported substantially at the center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise in rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c by the rotation of the body 748 are counted by the counting sensor 751 one by one, and are then transferred to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated clockwise in rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the ball ejection passage 741d side. The game balls dispensed toward the ball removal passage 741d by the ball removal passage 778 of the full tank branch unit 770, the body frame base ball removal passage 622 of the body frame base 600, and the board unit 800 from the lower end of the ball removal passage 741d. The pachinko machine 1 can be discharged to the rear outside through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply substrate box holder 840.

  Note that the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball ejection passage 741d, and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, so that troubles such as ball clogging can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 78, 79, and 83. The full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c of the prize ball device 740 to the dish unit 300. When the game balls are full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game balls can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 so as to pay out the game balls.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is fixed to a substantially central upper portion in the front-rear direction at a locking portion 770a locked to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710, and at a rear upper portion to the lower surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710. And a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the fixed portion 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  As shown in the drawing, the full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box shape such that the whole becomes lower from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at substantially the center in the left-right direction at the upper end of the rear end. A prize ball receiving port 771 for receiving game balls flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 disposed below the prize ball receiving port 771 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 83). A normal passage 773 (see FIG. 83) for guiding the game ball from immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, and the game ball rolling in the normal passage 773 is discharged forward to be forwarded. 83. A normal ball exit 774 opened at the right end in front view, and a full tank passage 775 (FIG. 83) for guiding game balls toward the front side from a position further to the right in rear view than immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772. three A), a full Tan passage 775 to release the rolling was game balls forward and full ball outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball ejection port 777 that opens upward at the left end of the upper rear end in front view and receives a game ball flowing down the ball ejection passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, A ball passage 778 (see FIG. 83) for guiding the game ball received by the withdrawal opening 777 to the front side, and a game ball rolled in the ball discharge passage 778 is discharged to the front and a normal ball exit 774 at the left end in front view. And a ball ejection port 779 opened at a position behind the full tank exit 776.

  When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 in the full tank branch unit 770 of this example, the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 are respectively connected to the first cover of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball discharged from the normal ball outlet 774 is connected to the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c so as to face and communicate with each other. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Further, the ball ejection port 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 in the rear view of the main body frame base 600, and the game ball discharged from the ball ejection port 779 is used for the main body frame base 600. Is transferred to the body frame base ball passage 622.

  In this full tank branching unit 770, the game ball paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 is received at the prize ball receiving port 771 through the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In a normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 disposed immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. The game ball that has flowed into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal ball outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and passes from the first ball outlet 544a to the plate unit 300. It will be supplied to the upper plate 301.

  By the way, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game balls that cannot escape from the upper plate 301 from the side 544a stay in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 and eventually fill the upstream normal passage 773 through the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773 and starts moving laterally in the branch space 772 and moves in the horizontal direction. The game ball enters the full tank passage 775, and from the full tank outlet 776, under the plate unit 300 via the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  It should be noted that the full tank branching unit 770 of this example is entirely formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. This makes it possible to easily find foreign matter such as dust and dirt that has entered the full-branch branch unit 770 and the occurrence of clogging without disassembling the full-branch branch unit 7700. .

  As described above, when the game balls are full in the upper plate 301, the full tank branch unit 770 of the present example automatically converts the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the full game balls are released. The lower plate 302 can be supplied to the lower plate 302, so that the upper plate becomes full and the ball release button on the upper plate is operated as in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the game ball is not supplied to the hitting ball firing device. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the game ball from being interrupted, to eliminate the troublesomeness during the game, and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  In addition, as described above, when the upper plate 301 is full, the full tank branch unit 770 of this example branches the path of the game balls to be paid immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. The game balls stayed in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are paid out to the upper plate 301, so that the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are hit by the ball launching device. The game ball 650 can be directly hit by the game ball, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added. Can be. Accordingly, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the gaming window 101 of the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider gaming area 1100 can be played. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided, and the wide gaming area 1100 can entertain the player.

  Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage dish and the receiving port (first Even when only one ball entrance 542a and second ball entrance 542c) are provided, game balls can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 which can correspond to the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage trays can be provided without changing the flow path of the game balls (the full tank branch unit 770) in the main body frame 3. In addition, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 including the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage plates.

  Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 is changed, it is possible to cope with the change without changing the main body frame 3. , And various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Further, game balls sent from the normal ball exit 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 are preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray is provided. Even if the game ball is exchanged, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage dish via the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from the payout to the storage can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to a shortage of game balls for driving, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage dishes. .

  As long as the upper plate 301 is not full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. This makes it possible for the player to concentrate on the operation of hitting the game ball and the like, thereby suppressing the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right, and even if the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage dish, the first ball The position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a or the like can be set to the same height as the first ball inlet 542a or the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storing dishes. It is possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls by making the storage dish deep, so that the player can play the game without worrying about the storage amount frequently. Can be performed and the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays can be accommodated without changing the body frame 3 side, thereby increasing the cost of changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the like. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Therefore, even if the game balls cannot be ejected from the normal ball exit 774, the amount of the game balls stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball exit 774 to the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. As a result, the substantial storage amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In the case where only one storage dish is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage dish is full of game balls and the game balls cannot be discharged from the normal ball exit 774 or the full ball exit 776, Since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is located as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are provided not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full tank passage 775. Can be stored, and the storage amount of the substantial game balls stored in the storage plate can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the amount of game balls stored in each door frame 5 can be maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). The number of pachinko machines 1 can be increased as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

  In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 have a width capable of rolling game balls in a plurality of rows. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount including the game balls in the full branch unit 770 from being reduced. The pachinko machine 1 can correspond to the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3.

  Further, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the inside of the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 from a transparent resin, a malfunction occurs because the game balls are clogged in the full tank branch unit 770. In this case, the location of the ball clogging can be easily found from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and the malfunction can be eliminated at an early stage, and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased.

[Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 84 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is mounted on a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end in front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 is moved to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5. Of the game ball can be cut off.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 in front view so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 792 held in a shutter base 791 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing shutter 792 ascending via the opening / closing crank 793. And an opening / closing spring 794 that urges the opening / closing spring.

  The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening / closing shutter 792 slidably in the vertical direction so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in a front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank disposed on the front surface of a left end portion in a front view and rotatably supporting an opening / closing crank 793 around an axis extending in a front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side of the opening 791b when viewed from the front, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed near the upper left portion from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  Further, the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding projections (not shown) which project from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in sliding grooves 791a of the shutter base 791. ), And a horizontally-long rectangular drive hole 792b disposed between the pair of sliding protrusions and facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by a crank supporting portion 791c of the shutter base 791, and a right outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view. A drive rod 793b extending outward to the right and extending to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and is slidably inserted into a drive hole 792b of the open / close shutter 792 projecting rearward from the distal end of the drive rod 793b. Drive pin 793c, a contact portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a lower front view and having a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end) of an opening / closing spring 794 formed on the upper surface in the middle of the drive rod 793b. ), And a spring locking portion 793e for locking.

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are disposed on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792 even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised. The normal sphere exit 774 and the full sphere exit 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 can be visually recognized.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example is configured such that the driving pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates vertically in an arc by rotating the opening / closing crank 793 about an axis extending in the front-back direction, and at the same time, the driving pin 793c The opening / closing shutter 792 slides up and down via the drive hole 792b into which the is inserted. In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 contacts the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, The contact portion 793d is rotated clockwise in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated clockwise in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the opening / closing shutter 792 is lowered to open the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 on the door frame 5 is released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is opened. Is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. You can do it.

  In this way, in response to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 are automatically set by the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, it is possible to prevent the game balls from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776. You can do it.

[Substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 88 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front by disassembly. Further, FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit after exploded. FIG. 91 is a perspective view illustrating the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. FIG. 92 (A) is a cross-sectional view of a terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 92 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit when disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 93 (A) is a front view of the firing power supply board box, and FIG. 93 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG.

  The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 mounted on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 mounted on the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 when viewed from the front, and a board unit base. A power supply board box 830 attached to the rear right side of the right end of the power supply board 810, a power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear face of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the power supply board box 830 from the rear side, and a power supply board box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 mounted on the rear surface and having a rear end substantially the same plane as the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control substrate box 860 mounted on the rear surfaces of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. And payout control board box A terminal board box 870 attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end portion of the front face 860 in a front view, and a main relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral relay terminal board 882 attached to the front face of the board unit base 810. Have.

  As shown, the board unit base 810 of the board unit 800 of the present example is formed to extend long in the left-right direction, and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction is stepped down one step and gradually gently inclines upward toward both right and left ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding forward from the front, an opening portion 812 that is disposed above a position of the shielding wall portion 811 that is one step lower in the left-right direction center and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the shielding wall portion 811 And a board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view for mounting the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813 in front view. A tubular slit portion 814 that penetrates, and a vertically elongated slit-like compound penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface. A through hole 815 of, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  The board unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The game balls can be prevented from falling down from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the board unit base 810 can be increased. Further, the board unit base 810 sends the game balls flowing down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-back direction. You can do it.

  Also, the board unit base 810 has a board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. When the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are mounted on the board mounting portion 813, the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are positioned on the front side through the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It has come to face. The board unit base 810 can transmit sound from the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side through the duct 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Further, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing section 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box housing section 816 is arranged on the rear side, and the box housing section 816 and the front box housing section 843 are formed. Thus, an accommodating recess for accommodating the firing power supply board box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is provided with a lower speaker 821 which is literally attached to the front side. The speaker box 820 has a horizontally long rectangular opening 822 formed on the left side of the lower speaker 821 when viewed from the front, while covering the rear side of the lower speaker 821 in a sealed manner. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space on the rear side of the lower speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinthine passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound on the rear side of the lower speaker 821. This is a bass-reflex type speaker box that can emit a deeper sound with respect to the diameter of the lower speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well to the front. ing.

  The launch power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear, and includes a launch power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. In the firing power supply board box 830, various electronic components attached to the firing power supply board 831 are housed. Can be released to the outside.

  The fired power supply board box 830 is detached from above in a housing recess opened upward formed by a box housing portion 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box housing portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 described later. It is to be accommodated as possible. Accordingly, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a failure occurs in the firing power supply board box 830, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to be replaced or repaired. (See FIG. 67).

  Further, the firing power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 93, the firing power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging power from the DC / DC converter 831a. , And the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current from the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the hit ball firing device 650 to be driven. In the firing power supply board box 830, slits 830a as heat radiation holes are formed on the upper and lower surfaces of the firing power supply board box 830 to release heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the firing power supply board 831. ing.

  Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side of the firing power supply board box 830 in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is arranged has a heat radiation hole. A slit 830a is formed. The firing power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. Is formed integrally from the bottom surface to the end opening edge so as to connect the lower surface and the inner wall of the lower surface. Thus, when the firing power board 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power board box 830 to close the internal space of the firing power board box 830, the internal space of the firing power board box 830 is accommodated by the partition wall 830b to accommodate the electrolytic capacitor SC0. And a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a, the partition wall 830b is provided with a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0. , And a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a.

  The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat radiation hole formed in the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface communicating the accommodation space 830c and the outside air. By releasing the heat to the outside via 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the storage space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is stored. Therefore, heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the housing space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is housed, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is radiated to the heat dissipation holes formed in the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the housing space 830d and the outside air. By releasing the heat to the outside through the slit 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the housing space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 of the hit ball firing device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the firing power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, the firing power supply board 831 can be easily handled due to its miniaturization, and the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831 can be facilitated, which can contribute to a reduction in time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement work, the state in which the firing power supply board 831 is still attached to the end opening of the firing power supply board box 830, that is, the entire firing power supply board box 830 can be replaced.

  Further, even if the pachinko machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life, and the drive firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game must be interrupted, the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831 is easy. The interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. Therefore, the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be eliminated very easily, and the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire can be resolved at an early stage to resume the game, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 is degraded and reaches the end of its life by being repeatedly charged and discharged, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute, every time the firing solenoid 654 drives and fires. In contrast, the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from an AC power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but does not repeatedly charge and discharge the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831. , Compared with the firing power supply board 831, its life is extremely long. In other words, the firing power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration caused by the charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply board 851 reaches its end of life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the combined current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the launch power supply board 831 separate from the power supply board 851 to achieve a long life. Electronic components associated with the long-term aging can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. Thus, it is possible to prevent the electronic component from being replaced with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life because of the long-life aging.

  Further, since the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, the capacity is changed in order to change the hitting characteristics. It is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to attach and detach the firing power supply board 831 even if an attempt is made to change to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a different electrolytic capacitor SC0. In this way, it is possible to prevent fraud that deliberately alters the optimized driving strength of the firing power supply board 831 that has been tampered with and modified. The pachinko machine 1 can prevent a player who has been frustrated or the like from developing into a fraud such as a fraud.

  Further, since the launch power supply board 831 is detachable and can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launch power supply board 831 is tampered with, the launch power supply board 831 is immediately replaced and the tampering is performed. It is possible to shorten the period of interruption of the game as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the frustration or disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage, It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the firing power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the firing control unit 4120 for controlling the hit ball firing device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced due to a model change or the like, the launch power supply board 831 (the launch power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can also be easily replaced, which matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. By replacing the launching power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a capable of realizing the hitting characteristics, the hitting characteristics of the hitting ball firing device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 can be changed to a new game. It can be matched to the board 4. Therefore, the driving characteristics of the game balls can be easily adjusted to the concept of the game board 4, so that the game using the new game board 4 can be sufficiently enjoyed, and the interest of the player is prevented from deteriorating. can do.

  In addition, since the firing power supply board 831 of the firing control unit 4120 is detachable from the front side, when exchanging the firing power supply board 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 to an island facility such as a game hall. The time and effort required for the exchange can be simplified, the exchange can be performed in a short time, and the burden on the game hall can be prevented from increasing. Further, since the firing power supply board 831 (the firing power supply box 830) is detachable and can be replaced, the driving characteristics are changed as compared with the case where the entire firing control unit 4120 (dispensing control board 4110) is replaced. Can be reduced, and the burden on the hall side and the like can be reduced.

  Further, when changing the model or the like, only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5, the main body frame 3 and the like can be used as they are, so that the fire control unit 4120 can be used for a long time. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 is deteriorated, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side as described above. Troubles can be eliminated, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and at the same time, the interruption of the game can be frustrated and unfortunate feeling can be eliminated as soon as possible It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  In addition, the launch power supply board 831 (the launch power supply board box 830) is supported through the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3. To detach the firing power supply board 831, the launch power supply board 831 is held by the game board holding opening 601. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing wrongdoing enters through the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the game board 4 may cause the illegal tool to reach the firing power supply board 831. Can be prevented, and it is possible to prevent the firing power supply board 831 from being tampered with, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 with a high defense against the tampering.

  Furthermore, since the firing power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding opening 601, the position for supporting the firing power supply board box 830 is more likely to be behind the front surface of the main body frame 3; A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the firing power supply board box 830 and has the above-described operation and effect can be reliably realized.

  In addition, since the firing power supply board 831 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0, and the firing power supply board 831 can be easily attached and detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Therefore, even if the load on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is easily deteriorated, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (the firing power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, and the trouble can be eliminated early to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely achieve the above-described effects.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives the game ball discharged upward and discharged downward from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 to the left front side from the center in the right and left directions when viewed from the front. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 for guiding the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and discharging the same, and a front surface (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. A front box receiving portion 843 which is opened forward and upward to accommodate the rear side of the firing power supply board box 830, and a front end of the power supply board box 850 which is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is depressed forward. And a rear box storage section 844 that can store the data.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 and that the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 is located at a position desired for the discharge passage 842. The main frame base 600 rolls through the main frame base baseball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main frame base 600, passes through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810, and moves behind the substrate unit base 810. The game balls flowing down to the side and the game balls discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841, which will be described in detail later, are passed through the discharge passage 842 to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. It can be discharged downward.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box storage section 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box storage section 816 and the front box storage section 843 accommodate the fired power supply board box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and transfers heat from the electronic components and the like to the outside through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. As shown in FIG. 90, a power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

  The power supply board box 850 includes a vertical wall protruding rearward along a lower side of an opening in which a power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 88 and 90) attached to a lower side of the power switch 852 in the power supply board 851 faces rearward. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c that protrudes rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 that is disposed in front of and below the standing wall portion 850b. And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a simple gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece for locking with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece are provided. Are locked so that the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the power supply board box 850 has the upright wall portion 850b connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 and the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854, and slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855. It is formed so as to protrude. In the power supply board box 850 of the present example, the wiring cord 854 wraps around from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be hooked on the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. The terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, when the connector terminal from which the wiring cord is extended is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board and the wiring cord is pulled toward the board, the connector terminal is connected by the tension from the wiring cord. Since the connector terminal is pressed against the terminal, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the front end side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853) faces the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even if the connector 855 is pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed so as to be turned (turned) backward from the connector terminal 855 by the upright wall portion 850 b projecting rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force such that the terminal 855 is pressed against the power supply terminal 853 from acting, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  In addition, since the power supply board box 850 includes the protrusions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the vertical wall 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the vertical wall 850b, the rear end of the power supply board box 850 does not move. The projections 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and can prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the upright wall 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring code 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring code 854 folded back by the vertical wall portion 850b can be moved toward the vertical wall portion 850b side. Can be made hard to come off, and the wiring code 854 can be immediately turned to the vertical wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d after the wiring code 854 is folded back at the vertical wall portion 850b, so that a series of operations can be continuously performed. It can be performed, and the working process relating to the assembly can be simplified.

  Note that the power supply board box 850 and the power supply board box holder 840 are formed so that the front-rear dimension in the assembled state is substantially the same as the front-rear dimension of the speaker box 820. , The rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  Further, in this example, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power terminal 853 facing the opening of the power substrate box 850 covering the power substrate 851, and the connector is formed by the standing wall 850b protruding rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded, the tension acting on the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is applied to the power supply terminal to which the connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. 853 can be operated in such a direction as to cancel the connection with the power supply terminal 853, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 can be avoided. , And maintenance such as replacement of the substrate can be easily performed.

  Also, the wiring code 854 is folded back by the vertical wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the wiring cord 854 can be bent more loosely than when there is no vertical wall portion 850b. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being broken by an unreasonable force and causing a problem.

  Further, an upright wall portion 850b is provided near the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853. Since the upright wall portion 850b is located at a position adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, it is connected to the power supply terminal 853. It is possible to extend the wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 as straight as possible to the rear side as far as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken and it is impossible. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting, and to prevent a problem such as disconnection from occurring.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 covering the power supply board 851 is provided with the upright wall 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the upright wall 850b, and the assembly work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. . Further, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, it is possible to prevent dust and dirt or the like which may cause a problem from adhering to the power supply board 851, and to mount the power supply board 851 on the power supply board 851. Electronic components (e.g., resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) that are difficult to touch or replace, thereby increasing the defense against fraud. Has become.

  The direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power terminal 853 on the power substrate 851 is substantially perpendicular to the substrate surface (front-back direction). Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply board 851, it is possible to prevent a shear force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and it is possible to prevent the lead portion. Of the power supply board 851 and detachment of the power supply terminal 853 from the power supply board 851 can be prevented, and the pachinko machine 1 in which a failure is unlikely to occur can be provided.

  Furthermore, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means using the locking claws and the locking pieces, the wiring code 854 is folded back by the vertical wall portion 850b, so that the wiring code 854 is formed. Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in such a direction as to release the connection with the power terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. The connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained, and the occurrence of problems such as poor contact or poor current can be prevented.

  Also, since the rear end of the rear end of the power supply board box 850 where the wiring code 854 is folded back is provided with the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward, the wiring code 854 is folded back at the vertical wall 850b. Even when sliding along the side, the protrusions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward and prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the upright wall 850b. It is possible to implement the pachinko machine 1 that reliably prevents the above-described operation and effects from occurring.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall 850b is moved toward the standing wall 850b by the wiring guide 850d provided in the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 is hardly detached from the standing wall 850b. Thus, the above-described operation and effect can be reliably achieved, and the wiring code 854 is folded back at the upright wall portion 850b, and immediately the wiring code 854 is brought closer to the upright wall portion 850b at the wiring guide portion 850d. This makes it possible to perform a series of operations continuously, thereby simplifying the operation steps related to assembly and suppressing an increase in cost.

  The dispensing control board box 860 in the board unit 800 is a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and has an open rear, and a thin box-shaped cover that fits into the box base 861 from the rear and is open at the front. 862, and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 118) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Also, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation and cutting portions 863 protruding outward from the left end in rear view and formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated without cutting the separation cutting section 863. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace is left. . Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been illegally opened and closed. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In the dispensing control board box 860, an error canceling switch 860a, a ball removing switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like attached to the dispensing control board 4110 face the rear through the cover 862 (see FIG. 66). ). In the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like face rearward through the cover 862.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 of the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and has a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side in rear view and a substrate cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in rear view. The board base 871 has a peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 in which a peripheral panel relay terminal 872a is mounted on a rear surface of the substrate base 871 and a substrate mounting portion 871a of the substrate base 871, and a substrate cover mounting portion 871b of the substrate base 871. A connection terminal plate cover 873 having an opening 873b extending from the rear wall portion 873a and extending vertically, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a facing rearward from the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are mounted on the rear surface. Unit connection terminal plate 8 supported in the connection terminal plate cover 873 4, a, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the frequency display for displaying the operating state and the like of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to the pachinko machine 1. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as the CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 to the pachinko machine 1. Note that the board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are provided with external peripheral panel relay terminal boards 872 and CR unit connection terminals from the outside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, the contents of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator or the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side when a problem such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1. The displayed status display sticker 876 is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 92, the board base 871 of the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with an open rear end. The board base 871 is formed at an upper portion inside the board mounting portion 871a and fixes to an upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 (not shown). A terminal board box locking claw 871i for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 is detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the terminal board box locking claw 871i. You can do it.

  Further, the board base 871 has a board cover mounting portion 871b formed in a thin box shape opened to the rear side, and the inner circumference is large enough to insert the outer circumference of the connection terminal plate cover 873. And an inner peripheral wall thereof is an outer piece 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 extends from the bottom wall of the board cover mounting portion 871b to the rear and abuts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has two protruding ridges 871e extending in the up-down direction, and a locking hole 871f arranged on the left outside of the board cover attaching portion 871b in rear view and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The projecting ridge 871e of the board base 871 has a rearwardly projecting amount slightly smaller than that of the outer piece 871c, and, as shown in the drawing, is provided on both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as much as possible. It is arranged so that it may become a position near.

  Further, the board base 871 is disposed on the rear surface on the right side of the board cover mounting portion 871b in a rear view and is vertically separated from each other. The bearing base 871g rotatably supports the board box cover 875, and a left end in the back view. A locking portion 871h, which is disposed on the rear surface near the portion and extends in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting portion 871b surrounded by the outer piece 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall 873a for closing the rear end of the outer wall 873c; a rectangular opening 873b extending vertically through the rear wall 873a; and a rear wall substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 873b. An inner wall portion 873d extending forward from 873a (toward the substrate base 871), and a CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d is in contact with the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And a pair of claw-shaped substrate holding portions 873e formed on the 873c.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 is disposed at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating the rear wall portion 873a, and a substantially vertical direction. A box-shaped protection portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed at the center and has a left side opened in rear view, and a board base 871 that extends outward (rightward) from the right end in rear view of the outer wall 873c. And a pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d of the base member 87, and an elastic claw-shaped engagement member formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c as viewed from the rear and capable of being locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. And a stop claw piece 873i. Although not shown, an inner wall portion 873d extending forward is formed above and below the inner periphery of the central opening 873f provided with the protection portion 873g.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape with a front side opened by an outer wall portion 873c and a rear wall portion 873a. The connection terminal plate cover 873 inserts the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side, so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d prevents the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving backward. It is possible to prevent the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving forward by the pair of substrate holding portions 873e, so that the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. Has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 inserts the fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the board base 871, and then locks the locking claw piece 873i into the locking hole 871f of the board base 871 to thereby fix the board. The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

  The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a on the front side (rear side) for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall. In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball lending unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. I have.

  The board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size substantially covering the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and entirely open to the front side. A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871g, through holes 875b corresponding to the opening portions 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and forward from both left and right ends of the through holes 875b. And a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

  The board box cover 875 can open and close the rear surface of the board base 871 together with the connection terminal board cover 873 by pivotally supporting the pair of shafts 875a on the bearings 871g of the board base 871. I have. In addition, the board box cover 875 has a length such that an impact wall 875c on the side (supported by the shaft) near the shaft portion 875a extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and the impact wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective impact walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear faces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It has become.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a rectangular two-piece connector, and is attached so as to be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 92, the terminal board box 870 of this example, when assembled, has an outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and a board base 871 in a direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Of the connection terminal plate cover 873, the inner wall 873 d, and the shaft 875 a of the board box cover 875 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the side wall 875c is present, a multi-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, for example, even if an attempt is made to insert an illegitimate tool having excellent flexibility between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool is not bent along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal is not bent. Intrusion of an unauthorized tool from a direction along the surface of the plate 874 can be surely prevented, and illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be reliably prevented. It has become.

  Also, in this terminal board box 870, the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, so that the CR unit mounted as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if a D-sub connector having a gap formed with the connection terminal plate 874 is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, thereby preventing fraud. It has become.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft parts 875a on the board box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871 and on the shaft part 875a side of the through hole 875b where the CR unit connection terminal 874a faces. An impact wall 875c having a length extending between them is provided, and the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the impact wall 875c. Therefore, a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the board box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed, making it more difficult to perform wrongdoing and reducing deterrence. It can be expensive.

  Further, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, in a state where the connection terminal on the wiring cord is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b formed as a two-piece connector, an illegal act of inserting a needle-like electrode through a gap between the connector main body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord will be performed. In this case, the insertion of the electrodes can be prevented by the protection portion 873g and the board box cover 875, and illegal acts on the internal connection terminals 874b can be prevented.

  As described above, according to this example, the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, so that the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the front side of the pachinko machine 1 are mounted. Even if an incorrect tool is inserted through the gap or the like, and the tip of the incorrect tool enters the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the housed CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is protected by the terminal board box 870. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874.

  In a state where the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate are arranged in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The ridge 871e and the outer piece 871c of the base 871 and the outer wall 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 in the direction along the rear surface (the surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the collision wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a multi-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. In an analogous manner, an attempt is made to allow an illegal and highly flexible tool to enter between (boundary) between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871. Also, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and it is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from intruding from a direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can surely prevent illegal acts on the unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b.

  Also, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is made to contact the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the substrate as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even with the use of the D-sub connector, the outer periphery of the exposed lead portion can be covered by the inner wall portion 873d, and it is possible to surely prevent fraud.

  Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is rotatably supported by the rear face of the board base 871 to rotatably cover the rear face of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the opening 873b of the connection terminal board cover 873. And a board box cover 875 having a plate-like impact wall 875c extending forward from the axially supported side end of the through hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the board base 871 to form a gap and allow an illegal tool to enter, the improper tool is connected by the collision wall 875c. It can be prevented from reaching the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) side, thereby preventing improper conduct. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the board box cover 875 and then open the connection terminal plate cover 873, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And deterrence against wrongdoing can be enhanced. Further, the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the collision wall 875c. Can be prevented from being distorted, and the formation of a gap can be prevented.

  Further, even if an illegal act of inserting a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord connected to the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be handled. Since the rear side of the opened portion 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protection portion 873g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870 ( A needle-like electrode cannot be inserted into the gap of the connector body from the rear side), and it is possible to prevent improper conduct from being performed on the terminal of the connected wiring cord, and it has a high crime prevention ability It can be.

  In addition, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall portion 873c extends forward from the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap in order to perform wrongdoing, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves rearward together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is formed on the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). The CR unit connection terminal on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be kept protected by Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of a transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from outside the terminal board box 870 without disassembly. Whether an incorrect tool is inserted into the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, or the like housed therein, or whether the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like has been replaced with an incorrect one. Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether electronic components (for example, ROM, IC, resistor, capacitor, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like are replaced with unauthorized ones. In addition, it is easy to detect wrongdoing, and it is easy to detect wrongdoing. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  In addition, since the terminal board box 870 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame 3 so that the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like faces in the rear direction, the outer frame 2 is used for maintenance or the like. When the main body frame 3 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 3 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like accommodated in the terminal board box 870 are oriented to the worker side (player side). The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

  The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 are connected to a peripheral control unit 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. 5 for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided in 5, the decorative board, the operation unit 400 and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 have a plurality of connection terminals for connection to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a board formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals are directed to the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

  The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are so formed that their front sides are covered by a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, as shown in FIGS. At the same time, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

  Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 is provided with a ball lending button 361, a return button 362, a lending remaining display portion 363, and a rotation position detection sensor of the handle device 500 of the ball lending unit 360 in the plate unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the connection between the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540 and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is attached to each of the decorative units 200, 240, and 280 disposed on the door frame 5 side and each of the decorative boards 430, 432 and the operation unit 400 provided in the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400. This is for relaying the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b, 432c and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 94A is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 94B is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 95 is an enlarged sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover as seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of the present example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding opening 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. . The back cover 900 includes a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes a rear opening of the game board holding opening 601, a side 904 that extends forward from a right side of the main body 902 in a front view, and a front end of the side 904. A plurality of support pins 906 that are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, project downward, and are supported by the back cover support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and prize balls formed respectively on the upper left and lower left sides of the main body 902 when viewed from the front. An engaging piece 908 that engages with the back cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and a back cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, respectively, and a back cover 900 near the lower engaging piece 908 is attached to the main body frame. 3 is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening the opening / closing unit 3 so that it cannot be opened and closed.

  As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the left side in the rear view of the lower locking piece 923a in the main body 902 of the back cover 900. 921, a vertically-long rectangular locking port 922 which is disposed at a predetermined distance to the left in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking section which is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side. A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a piece 923a at one end and a horizontally elongated hole 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 at the other end, and a main body 902 which is inserted through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 through the insertion hole 921, and a guide member 92 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924. A holding member 925 mounted so as to sandwich the, and a. The guide member 923 of the fastening mechanism 920 is made of a soft synthetic resin, and is easily bent.

  Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking pieces 923a of the guide member 923 are loosely locked to the locking openings 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. It can be idle. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the elongated hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the elongated hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction and does not fall out of the long hole 923b. When the locking piece 923 a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking opening 922 of the main body 902, the fastening mechanism 920 engages the fastening member 924 protruding forward through the elongated hole 923 b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body 902.

  The back cover 900 of this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by supporting the pivot pin 906 on the rear cover supporting section 623 of the main body frame base 600. The closed state can be achieved by engaging the engagement pieces 908 with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame base 600 and the award ball passage cover 780. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 substantially coincide with each other.

  In a state where the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted into the insertion hole 921 from the rear side to the front side is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the distal end of the male screw portion 924a stops at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 projects rearward from the main body 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 locked by the main body 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900, The state located at the rear side of the main body 902 is maintained.

  Then, from this state, by inserting the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. Note that, when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, even if the guide member 923 supporting the fastening member 924 is inclined with respect to the main body 902, the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example can Since it is supported by the elongated hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male thread portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably inserted into the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by one fastening mechanism 920, the fastening or fastening can be easily performed by operating only one fastening member 924. It can be released, and the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified to improve maintainability.

  Further, the back cover 900 has a connection notch 910 that is cut upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 in front view, and a confirmation opening that penetrates in a rectangular shape above the connection notch 910 in front view. 912, and a check notch 914 cut into a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and through the connection notch 910, the RAM clear switch 4100 c and the main control input circuit 4100 f of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4. Etc. come to the rear side. The back cover 900 has a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 105) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 through the confirmation opening 912 facing the rear side. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces the notch 914. Thereby, even if the back cover 900 is not opened with respect to the main body frame 3, it is possible to perform operation confirmation, external appearance confirmation, management state confirmation, and the like of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100.

  The back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 that penetrate the main body 902 and the side 904, and heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 is transmitted to the main body frame 3 (the pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the outside on the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through holes 918 are provided at predetermined positions in the left-right direction, which are wide and extend vertically in the left-right direction, at a position slightly to the left from the center when viewed from the front. These through holes 918 allow the back cover 900 to be closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second The liquid crystal display device 3252 is located on the rear side of a cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3252. It can be exhausted. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the hole 918.

  Thereby, in this example, the fastening member 924 for fastening the back cover 900 for closing the rear side of the game board 4 held on the body frame 3 to the body frame 3 is attached to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. When the game board 4 is held on the main body frame 3 and the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to perform maintenance or the like on the rear side of the game board 4, Even if the fastening of the fastening member 924 that secures the back cover 900 to the body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is still the guide member 923. , The fastening member 924 can be prevented from being lost or left inside the pachinko machine 1. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, since the fastening member 924 can be prevented from dropping from the opened back cover 900, it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 having been released in a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. , Can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, so that maintenance can be easily performed.

  Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 extends at least to the opposite side to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be positioned straight through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, and the male screw portion 924a is surely placed in the correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be securely fastened to the main body frame 3, and the security effect of the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, the holding member 925 that cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 to hold the fastening member 924 movably with respect to the guide member 923 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head of the support member 925 and the holding member 925, so that the external thread portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming out of the elongated hole 923 b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap between the guide member 923 and the elongated hole 923b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating the holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 is inserted through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to cover the back cover of the main body frame 3. When the fastening member 924 is fastened to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess. As a result, the protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility that another member abuts on the protruding portion of the guide member 923 or the fastening member 924 is reduced, thereby reducing the occurrence of problems. And can improve the appearance.

  Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is a female screw portion and is screw-coupled to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, compared to the engagement with a simple locking claw, the fastening can be achieved by just pulling. Can not be released, the back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the security effect of the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent to illegal acts can be provided.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (the insertion hole 921) can be further increased. It is easy to position the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 in a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 or to move the male screw portion 924a straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  Further, in a state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along an inner wall extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 of the locking opening 922 of the back cover 900, the locking opening is formed. Since the guide member 923 is elastically locked to the guide hole 922, the distal end side (the long hole 923 b side) of the guide member 923 movably attached to the guide member 923 extends in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921. The locking piece 923 a can be pivotally moved around the center, and the locking piece 923 a can be supported by the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the elongated hole 923b on the distal end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Since the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 or the back cover fastening hole 780b, the fastening operation by the fastening member 924 can be easily performed.

  Further, a plurality of back cover engaging grooves 718, 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engaging grooves 718, 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 are further provided. By engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780 a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is performed. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the number of fastening operations can be reduced as much as possible using only one fastening member 924, and operations such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. Can be enhanced. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement pieces 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closing range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding opening 601 (the rear side of the game board 4) in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a favorable state without increasing the number of fastening portions by the fastening members 924.

  In addition, the back cover 900 can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 3 by supporting the support pin 906 of the back cover 900 with the back cover supporting portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600). Therefore, simply turning the back cover 900 in the closing direction to close the rear side of the game board holding opening 601 in the main body frame 3, and fastening the rear cover 900 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the main body frame 3. The holes 780b can be easily matched with each other, and the fastening members 924 held on the back cover 900 through the insertion holes 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening holes 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 3, even when the back cover 900 is opened by releasing the fastening by the fastening member 924 during maintenance or the like, the back cover 900 is opened. The cover 900 can be kept in a state of being supported by the main body frame 3, and there is no need to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, thereby simplifying the time required for opening and closing the back cover 900.

[Side security board]
Next, the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. As shown, the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 extruded in a shallow U-shape in plan view, a mounting bracket 954 fixed vertically up and down near the inner front end of the main body 952, and mounted on the front surface of the main body frame base 600. , A positioning member 956 fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engaged with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 extends vertically in the same length as the height of the main body frame base 600 and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a right front view from the front end of the side piece 952a. A front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance behind the front end piece 952b and projecting less than the front end piece 952b, and a front face from the rear end of the side piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d extending to the right in a direction longer than the front end piece 952b (see FIG. 112). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by a side piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d, and a front component 1110 of the game board 4 is provided between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. The left side of the game panel 1150 when viewed from the front is inserted (see FIG. 112).

  In the side security plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is mounted on the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952 d of the main body 952 is mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. When the side security plate 950 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is connected to the support side reinforcement sheet metal 152 of the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shaped protruding piece 166 to prevent insertion of a tool for performing wrongdoing between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view. (See FIG. 112). Also, the main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, an aluminum alloy) extruded material and has a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a middle piece 952c arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are enhanced, and the strength of the entire main body frame 3 is increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported. It has become.

  Thus, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is located between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side security plate 950. Of the reinforcing unit 150 is inserted (penetrated) into the substantially U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the reinforcing unit 150, and the front end piece 952b is connected to the U-shaped. Since the door frame 5 is sandwiched by the protruding pieces 166, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. This makes it possible to prevent the abutting U-shaped projection 166 of the door frame 5 from moving in the direction away from the main body frame 3, thereby preventing the closed door frame 5 from being opened. That the door frame 5 is opened against the body frame 3. It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  Further, since the side security plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted to each other, the gap between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is reduced. The strength and rigidity of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be hardly distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the main body frame base 600 supporting the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, the side security plate 950 on the side supporting the door frame 5 (supporting side) is formed of metal. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire body frame 3 is formed of metal.

  Further, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 for locking the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one point between the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower ends. The door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hooks 1041 so that the open side is illegitimate such as a crowbar. It is possible to prevent the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from spreading even if they are scooped by a simple tool, and to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly opened.

  In addition, the rear end of the side piece 952a of the side security plate 950 is made to extend rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the dimension of the side piece 952a in the front-rear direction is increased. Since the bending rigidity with respect to the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the entire side security plate 950 can be further increased, and it is possible to prevent the side security plate 950 from being forcibly bent and fraudulent. .

  Further, since the side security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by a metal extruded die, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined cross-sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily formed. It is possible to suppress the increase in cost even if the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, and to reduce defects such as a decrease in strength generated during processing as compared with the case where the metal plate is bent. The side security plate 950 can be reduced as much as possible and has high durability and strength.

[Locking device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 97 (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main frame, and FIG. 97 (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 98 (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 98 (B) is a slide rod for a glass door and a slide rod for a main frame which are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the lock device. (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device when disassembled and seen from behind, and FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame in the locking device. FIG. 101 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the fraud prevention member in the lock device.

  The locking device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. A door hook hole 620 formed on the upper right side (open side) of the front end frame portion 602 of the main body frame base 600 and a lock hole 621 formed on the lower portion; And a plurality of lock attachment portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 to 99, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. A sliding rod 1040, a main frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and a U-shaped sliding rod 1050 so that the sliding of the main frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be illegally performed. Anti-fraud members 1023, 1032 attached to the lower part of the base 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and has therein a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame and a sliding rod 1050 for a main body frame. Are slidably disposed. It should be noted that the U-shaped base 1001 is much thinner in width than the conventional locking device integrated into a base formed into an L-shaped cross section. Thereby, the horizontal dimension of the lock device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased, thereby further increasing the game area. 1100 wide game boards 4 can be provided.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is mounted with the open side of the U-shaped cross section facing the back surface of the main body frame base 600. When the lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3, the U-shaped base 1001 is U-shaped. The open side of the base 1001 is closed by the body frame base 600. As a result, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame disposed inside the U-shaped base 1001 are attached to the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has an anti-fraud structure in which it is difficult to perform an illegal act on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate up and down on the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through-opening 1002, an upper portion of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 99) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and a screwing portion 1003 protruding midway outward; The upper surface and the middle portion on the open side (front side) of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 99) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the protrusions 1003 are provided, and the lower end of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b project forward. Locking projection 1004.

  The screw stopper 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is connected to the door hook hole 620 of the main body frame base 600. When inserted upward from the rear side after being inserted into the lock hole 621, the screwing portion 1003 and the locking portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock mounting portion 625 via the intermediary, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

  The locking of the lock device 1000 by screws is performed not only at the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also at the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on a lock mounting piece 1008 described later and near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611. The locking device 625 is also fixed to the body frame base 600 with screws (not shown), so that the lower portion of the locking device 1000 can also be mounted.

  When the lock device 1000 is mounted, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower positions on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are connected to the upper door hook hole 620 and the upper locking hole. 621, and is positioned and locked, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with a screw. (The body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated on the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the lock device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front and rear sides of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 constituting the front locking structure (may be a fixed structure) protrudes from the side surface 1001 a that is not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear fixing structure projects from the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 close to the peripheral wall portion 605 toward the peripheral wall portion 605, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as to prevent rattling, as compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b which is close to the side surface 1001b.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion hole 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction at the upper, middle and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 with the main frame sliding rod 1050 housed therein and caulking, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main frame sliding rod 1050 are inserted inside the U-shaped base 1001. Can be slidably mounted vertically.

  In other words, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper end of the rivet long hole 1042 formed at the upper, middle and lower three positions of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower ends of the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061 respectively formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding rod 1050. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame can be moved upward, and the sliding rod 1050 for the body frame can be moved downward.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 protrudes laterally from the front end of the side face 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the open body frame base 600, and the tamper-proof notch 1007 formed on the closed side face at the bottom. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 is formed, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief horizontal hole 1022 are formed in a side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall 605. Although the details of the notch prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001 will be described later, the stopper piece 1027 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 moves forward and backward. Further, the lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 has the side surface 1001b so that the lock device 1000 is positioned lower than the lower end side of the game board holding opening 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009 that projects from the front end to the side and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and two mounting holes 1013 formed on the lock mounting board 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 by screws 1012 are provided at upper and lower positions. And a screw stop 1003 formed to mount the lower portion of the lock device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3.

  The U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 through which the first engagement projection 1017 and the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking a spring 1035 that urges the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and a lateral escape hole 1022 that forms an escape hole so as not to hinder the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It has.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is mounted on the lock mounting piece 1008 on the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock main body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock main body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. The engaging cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. This engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side is a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 during rotation. The end side is a second engaging projection 1018 that engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 during rotation.

  The cylinder lock 1010 is formed by inserting a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and then mounting holes 1013 formed in two upper and lower positions of the lock attachment board 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through the through hole.

  The tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 are provided with a sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, for example, using a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key. Is to prevent the lowering of. As shown in FIG. 99, the anti-fraud members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first anti-fraud member 1023 and the second anti-fraud member 1032 are connected by connecting pins 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is a vertically long plate and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is moved through the pivot shaft hole 1025 together with the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001. The lower mounting hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are used for mounting.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is vertically opened at a position overlapping with the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 on its plate-shaped surface, so that the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The protruding piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. When the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 penetrates the projection insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. And the second engaging projection 1018 engages with the upwardly engaging hole 1045 of the second member. In addition, the first anti-fraud member 1023 has an obliquely inclined outer side in front of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 that can contact the rear surface side of the first engaging protruding piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. When the engagement cam 1016 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engagement protrusion 1017, so that the first tamper-proof member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. (In the clockwise direction in FIG. 101B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is further provided with a stopper piece 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped base 1001 from the outer side obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 toward the U-shaped base 1001 and further from the position where the stopper piece 1027 protrudes. The control projection 1031 includes a regulating projection 1031 protruding downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that penetrate in the left-right direction and are arranged vertically at the front side of the regulation projection 1031. The stopper piece 1027 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 is engaged with the anti-fraud notch 1007 and the engaging notch 1066 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 when the main frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. Thus, it is possible to prevent the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame from sliding illegally. In addition, the regulating protrusion 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the second fraud prevention member 1032 urged upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

  The pin hole 1029 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 has a guide pin 1028 inserted and fixed from the back side of the first anti-fraud member 1023. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with the horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. Is available. Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 is for rotatably connecting the first anti-fraud member 1023 and the second anti-fraud member 1032 by a connecting pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second anti-fraud member 1032 connected to the first anti-fraud member 1023 is formed of an inverted “L” -shaped plate, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring engagement hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The second anti-fraud member 1032 can be relatively rotatably connected to the first anti-fraud member 1023 by inserting the connecting pin 1034 after aligning the connecting hole 1033 with the connecting hole 1030 of the first anti-fraud member 1023. I can do it. In addition, the second tamper-proof member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. As a result, the spring 1035 is urged upward. Further, the contact portion 1037 of the second anti-fraud member 1032 comes into contact with the closing plate 25 fixed to the lower inside of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate member. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with three door frame hook portions 1041 protruding forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 with the door frame sliding rod 1040 housed in the U-shaped base 1001. When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the lock device 1000 projects forward from a door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 67 and 72) formed in the main body frame base 600, and The hook 5 can be engaged with a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5. The hook portion 1041 for the door frame has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the drawing, whereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are raised by raising the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. The locked state with the 165 can be released.

  Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces, and has a vertically long rivet long hole 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and a lower part of the uppermost rivet long hole 1042 and a door frame. At the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040, there is provided a guide protruding piece 1043 projecting in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet long hole 1042 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is adapted to allow the rivet 1006 to be inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 and the rivet 1006 to slide the door frame sliding. The rod 1040 is formed to be vertically long so as not to hinder the ascent operation of the rod 1040. In a normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet long hole 1042 is in a state of contact. In addition, the guide rod 1043 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050. , And can guide the mutual sliding operation of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame.

  Further, the sliding hook 1040 for the door frame has a spring hook portion 1046 formed at an upper end thereof for locking one end of the spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. The rod 1040 is urged downward and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is urged upward. Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in the middle of the vertical direction in a convex shape, and is punched out from one side surface of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and can prevent the door frame sliding rod 1040 from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It has become.

  Further, the sliding rod 1040 for a door frame has a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is provided at the distal end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to hinder the rotation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The part constitutes a movable space. In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the ascending engagement hole 1045 is adapted to rotate the door frame sliding rod 1040 by the rotation of the engagement cam 1016. To engage with. In addition, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame includes a relief notch 1049 that is notched in the vertical direction to be larger than the tamper-proof notch 1007 in the lower rear portion of the vertical side. The escape notch 1049 is disturbed by the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 is securely engaged with the anti-fraud notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The corresponding parts have been cut out so as not to be disturbed.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1053 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, It has. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not formed of one vertical metal plate as in the related art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 made of metal are connected by a thin metal connecting rod 1053. Accordingly, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame can be efficiently stored in the space of the narrow U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at an upper end portion, and a rivet long hole 1055 penetrating in a left-right direction on a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left-right direction below the rivet long hole 1055, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates through the hook through-opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper side on the open side of the outer frame 2. And a locking claw portion is formed upward.

  The rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed on the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end of the rivet long hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the guide projecting piece 1043 above the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame are inserted. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with 1050.

  The spring hook 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. The connection hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the upper end of the connection rod 1053 is bent and inserted. Further, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, so that the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051 occurs. It can slide smoothly without backlash.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 is provided with a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward from a lower end portion and a rivet penetrating in the left and right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052. A long hole 1061, a descending engagement hole 1062 disposed below the rivet long hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the lower engagement hole 1062, and a play hole 1063 below the play hole 1063. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connection hole 1060 formed in the front end side of the upper end of the lower hook member 1052 at the front end side, and a coupling formed at the lower part of the lower vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. It has a joint notch 1066 and contact portions 1067 formed on the upper and lower sides of the lower hook member 1052.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates through the hook through opening 1002 below the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side inside of the outer frame 2. And a locking claw portion is formed upward. The rivet long hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet long hole 1042 formed at the lower part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end of the rivet long hole 1061. This allows the lower hook member 1052 to move downward.

  Further, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotated, the main frame slide rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation. For engagement. The play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is provided with the second engagement protrusion 1018 so that the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 does not hinder the rotation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 is inserted and rotated. Is able to form a space in which the tip end can move. In addition, the projecting piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052 is adapted to receive the guide projecting piece 1043 below the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. Mutual movement with the moving rod 1050 can be guided.

  Also, the bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and When the hook member 1052 performs a sliding operation, the hook member 1052 can be smoothly slid without rattling.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in this state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided. The piece 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056, 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the long rivet long hole 1042 and the rivet long hole 1055, 1061 are aligned and overlapped. In the superposed state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook through-opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 while the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the main frame. After inserting the sliding rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005. .

  When the rivet 1006 is inserted, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, and 1042. When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. Before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are connected with the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is connected to the pin hole. It is necessary to further insert the guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after fixing it to the 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Further, in a state where the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 with the rivets 1006, the spring 1048 is bridged between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in opposite directions to each other, and a spring 1035 is wrapped around the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. The member 1032 is brought into contact with the regulating protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock mounting piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the mounting hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip of the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024, and the second engagement projection of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 such that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  As described above, in order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the hook portion 1041 for the door frame of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the hook hole 620 for the door formed in the main body frame base 600. While being inserted, the hook-shaped locking projection 1004 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the locking hole 621 of the body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in this state, the screw stopper 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is moved. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by making it coincide with the lock attachment portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the coincident hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed so as to protrude from the side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while fixing the rear portion. Since the screw stopper 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, the locking structure of the front part contacts the peripheral wall 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main frame base 600 so as to prevent rattling as compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b.

  Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 100, in a state where the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. The closing plates 24, 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hooks 1054, 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are locked, and the hook 1041 for the door frame of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the door frame 5. The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The distal end of the first engagement projection 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 to push down the lower hook member 1052 against the urging force of the spring 1048, and is connected thereto. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and descend. As a result, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame is released, and the main frame 3 is removed by pulling the main frame 3 toward the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a state of being raised by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as the state shown in FIG. 100A). , 1065 are inclined downward toward the outside. Forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2 causes the upper slopes of the hook portions 1054, 1065 to be closed. Since the slide rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered downward because of the contact with the lower end, the upwardly-facing claws of the hooks 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again, and the slide for the main body frame is performed. The rod 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip of the two engagement projections 1018 engages with the ascending engagement holes 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 to push up and move the door frame sliding rod 1040 upward against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, since the hooked state of the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 for the door frame are released, the door frame 5 is pulled forward by pulling the door frame 5 forward. It can be opened to the body frame 3.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a state of being lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 100A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 is upwardly inclined toward the outside, the door frame 5 is forcibly pressed against the main body frame 3 so that the inclined portion of the lower side of the door frame hook portion 1041 becomes the hook cover 165. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame rises upward by contacting the upper end of the door frame, and the downwardly-facing claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 165 are again locked, so that the sliding for the door frame is performed. The moving rod 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. In addition, the sliding rod 1040 for a door frame in the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hooks 1041, which are attached over the entire length and are locking portions with the door frame 5, are formed at three places of an upper end, a center, and a lower end of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 over the entire length in the vertical direction, and to forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from the gap therebetween. The act cannot be performed.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 5 of the present embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. By rotating, the door frame 5 can be unlocked from the main body frame 3. Further, the lock device 1000 of this example performs an illegal act such that a piano wire or the like is hooked on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 and lowered, without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010. Is not possible. The first structure for preventing such misconduct is a lock mechanism including a first fraud preventing member 1023 and a second fraud preventing member 1032, and the second fraud preventing structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are housed in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism as the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 101A, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second tamper-proof member 1032 are in contact with each other. It is in the state of having done. In this state, the first anti-fraud member 1023 rotates counterclockwise by the urging force of the spring 1035, and the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is moved to the fraud prevention notch. It is in a state of being engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even when the piano wire or the like is hooked and pulled down on the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, since the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 are engaged, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is moved. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) is impossible, and improper act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the main body frame 3 is unlocked properly, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first engagement prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The rotation starts in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around 1025, and the stopper piece 1027 also moves so as to retract from the tamper-proof notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second tamper-proof member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engagement projection 1017, the tip of the first engagement projection 1017 is engaged with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. As a result, the entirety of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered, so that the locked state between the hook portions 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

  When the main frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second tamper-proof member 1032 is in contact with the regulating protrusion 1031. The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second tamper-proof member 1032 abut from the front, and finally reach the state shown in FIG. 101 (A). Thus, the first anti-fraud member 1023 and the second anti-fraud member 1032 do not become an obstacle when closing the main body frame 3. Also, in the present embodiment, the first fraud preventing member 1023 and the second fraud preventing member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being fraudulently performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult. For this reason, it is devised that unauthorized operation on the body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be performed.

  Further, even with the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not possible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an improper act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (the main body frame base 600), The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided in the housing are completely accommodated in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. In this state, even if a piano wire or the like is inserted and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 is pulled down, both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 are pulled down. As a result, the intrusion of the fraudulent equipment into the closed space is prevented, so that the fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment includes the sliding lever 1040 for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 1001 whose width dimension is extremely thin as compared with the lock device integrated into the conventional L-shaped base. The mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 to the U-shaped base 1001 for slidably mounting the body frame sliding rod 1050 and operating the lock device 1000 is set to a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the up-down direction is extremely large and the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame 3 is enlarged, the lock device 1000 is firmly placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be installed.

  Further, since the U-shaped base 1001 is mounted so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, the inside of the lock device 1000 when the lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600). The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, which are arranged in the same manner, are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is not possible to easily perform an illegal act such as inserting a piano wire or the like and pulling down a sliding rod 1050 for a main body frame provided therein.

  When the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at three locations on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook holes 620 and the lock holes 621. And the three screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower positions on the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. With such a structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this embodiment, a screwing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 and a portion near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 are formed as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. Although a structure in which the formed lock mounting portion 625 is screwed is shown, a screw 1012 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock mounting piece 1008 is used instead, and the tip of the screw 1012 is locked. A lock mounting hole to be screwed through the piece 1008 may be formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Also, without fixing the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001 with a screw, the lock device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear portion of the lock device 1000 and the lock mounting portion 625. It can be fixed sufficiently firmly to the back surface of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of the present example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the body frame are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with rivets or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. A door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided in a closed space formed by an L-shaped base (tablet base) and a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base (tablet base) and the peripheral wall 605. The storage device may be configured to be stored, and the same operation and effect as the above-described lock device 1000 can be obtained.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-back direction) behind the main body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball tank 720 for storing game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are arranged to rearward the prize ball base 710. A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of the base 710b, and a game ball released from the tank rail unit 730 paid out to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, and a rear wall portion of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball device 740 partially attached to the rear side of the 710b has a transparent prize ball device 740 and a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600. Of the game board 4 held in the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like. The rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized, and the rear side of the game board 4 can be easily inspected (visual inspection) without opening the back cover 900 covering the rear side of the game board 4. The pachinko machine 1 can be used.

  In addition, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like. When the game board 4 is detached from the front side to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver and pliers, cleaning waste, dust and dirt, etc. remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, they are removed from the outside. Can easily be found, and any trouble caused by the residue can be prevented.

  Further, as described above, since the rear surface and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the outside, unauthorized devices and tools for performing illegal acts are attached to the rear side and the side surface of the game board 4. Even if it is done, it can be easily found, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent activities from being performed, and it is possible to easily find an unauthorized device attached to the game board 4 from the outside. It is possible to hesitate to attach an illicit device or the like, and the pachinko machine 1 has a high deterrent against illegal acts.

  In addition, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 Foreign matter such as dust and dust can be prevented from adhering to the rear side of the game board 4, and the game board 4 can be maintained in a good state to suppress occurrence of a problem.

  In addition, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position about twice the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is set to about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, so that the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is set to be about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to have a flat shape. This makes it easier to perform the mounting operation for mounting the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main frame base 600.

  Further, the rear surface (the main body 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, and the prize ball device 740 attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made a substantially flat surface, and it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being caught or abutted with other members in the installed island equipment by eliminating the rearward projections. By doing so, it is possible to prevent problems from occurring. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, a simple-shaped cushioning material can be used when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, and the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased. The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. 4 can be made easier to see, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 and the like of the back cover 900. In addition, the heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from being accumulated, and the control of the game due to the heat becomes unstable, and the members such as the synthetic resin are deformed to suppress the occurrence of the trouble. be able to. Further, since the slits 916 and the through holes 918 of the back cover 900 have a size that does not allow game balls to pass through, for example, even if game balls are spilled to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facilities, they pass through the slits 916 and the like. It is possible to prevent the game balls from entering the pachinko machine 1 and to prevent a trouble from occurring due to the entry of the game balls.

[Basic configuration of game board]
Next, a basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 102 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. 103 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. Further, FIG. 106 (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in a game board in a state of being attached to a pachinko machine, and FIG. 106 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

  FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from that of the example of FIG. 104 and the like viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 is a game view of FIG. 107 viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of a game panel of the game board of FIG. 107 cut in a vertical direction. Further, FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board using the front constituent member of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 107 and the like viewed from the front, and FIG. 111 is a gaming board viewed from the rear of FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of.

  As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 of the present embodiment has a front configuration in which the outer periphery of a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven by a player operating the handle device 500 is formed to have a substantially rectangular front shape. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 disposed behind the front component 1110 and defining the rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 disposed below the game panel 1150 on the rear lower side, and a substrate holder 1160. A main control board box 1170 for accommodating a main control board 4100 which is mounted on the rear surface of the game area 1100 and controls a game performed by driving a game ball into the game area 1100; A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying a game situation and attached to a predetermined position of the front component 1110 so as to be visible to the player. To have. This game board 4 further includes a front unit attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, which are not shown in FIGS. (See FIGS. 113, 116, etc.).

  The basic structure of the game board 4 of this embodiment is formed by a front component 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and the game board 4 is attached to the game panel 1150. The front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 accommodated in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration that characterizes the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[Front component]
Next, the front component 1110 of the game board 4 will be described. The front component 1110 of the game board 4 of the present example has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, and an inner shape penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction. The outer circumference of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner circumference of the inner shape. An outer rail 1111 extending in an arc shape from the lower left end to the left in the left-right direction in the front view and extending in the clockwise circumferential direction from the center in the front view, passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending obliquely to the upper right, An inner rail 1112 that is disposed substantially inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, so as to smoothly continue from the lower end of the inner rail 1112. An inner rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise in front view, an end (upper end) of the inner rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111. And an inner rail 1112 and an inner peripheral rail 1113 that allow the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111 to contact with the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111. At the lower end of the game area 1100 at the lower end of the game area 1100, and is lower at the rear, and is rotatably supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112 to close between the outer rail 1111. As described above, it is possible to rotate only between a closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and an open position opened in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front to open the outer rail 1111. And a backflow prevention member 1116 urged by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. It is located on an extension of the firing rail 660 of the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed. , And jumps into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow preventing member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is moved. By rotating to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter the gaming area 1100.

  Also, when a game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 is brought into contact with the stop 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by contacting the game ball with the stop portion 1114, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner peripheral rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. Even if a game ball that has entered (has been driven into) the game area 1100 attempts to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the urging force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, when the game balls hit into the game area 1100 are not received in the starting ports 2101 and 2102, the winning ports 2103, 2104 and 2201, and the like of the front unit 2000 described later, they flow down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, the player is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and is discharged from the out port 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, when the game ball fired from the hit ball firing device 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Rolling downward in the opposite direction, a foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. As a result, it is received by the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located below the foul space 626, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

  The outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to the rolling of the game ball is enhanced and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the impact portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin disposed on a surface thereof, so that even if a game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is reduced. And the game ball can be repelled inward.

  The front component 1110 has a wall-shaped security protrusion 1117 protruding forward from the lower outside of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially central portion in the vertical direction along the inner circumferential rail 1113 from below the out-port guiding surface 1115. And a groove-shaped rail security groove 1118 recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security projection 1117 on the front component 1110 overlaps the security rear end projection 183 of the security cover 180 on the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. Thereby, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is intruded from between the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot side (left side in front view), the illegal tool can reach the inside of the game area 1100. Is not possible.

  When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 in the front component member 1110 of this example, the post-security projection 182 of the security cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. So that the projected piece 182 after security is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to substantially contact the outer surface (the side opposite to the game area 1100) of the inner rail 1112. With the inner rail 1112, the rail security groove 1118, and the post-crime protruding piece 182, an illegal tool such as a piano wire that has penetrated from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the gaming area 1100. Can be prevented.

  Further, the front component 1110 is disposed at a left end in a front view in a vertical direction and is arranged to be depressed from the front to the rear, and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 opened to the left end, and vertically separated to a right end in a front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120, a fixed recess 1121 which is disposed on the left side in front view of the lower end of the outer rail 1111, is opened downward, is formed in an arc shape on the upper side, and is recessed from the front side, and a front view, Near the left end of the lower end, there is provided a cutout portion 1122 for a ball passage, which is extended in the left-right direction upward from the lower end in a rectangular shape. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the front end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding opening 601 is viewed from the front. However, it is possible to restrict movement in the front-rear direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By locking the locking portion 608, the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3 in the front view can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  In addition, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component 1110 allows the game board fixing tool 690 supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 to be viewed from the front in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3. When rotated clockwise, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixture 690. It has become. The ball passage notch 1122 of the front component member 1110 has a similar ball passage notch 1152 formed at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used to hold the game board 4 with the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3. In this state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122, 1152.

  Further, the front component 1110 has a horizontally long through-hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction near the right end in the front view at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction at the lower side of the through-hole 1123 from the center in the left-right direction to the left in the front view. It has a fastening portion 1124 having a small thickness, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1125 arranged on the left side of the through-hole 1123 in a front view for attaching a certificate stamp for certification confirmation. The fastening portion 1124 of the front component 1110 is not shown in detail, but when the present game board is attached to a conventional body frame, a predetermined fastening band is inserted into a fastening hole formed in the conventional body frame. By wrapping and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4 and to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

  Further, the front component 1110 has a display portion 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later, which is located outside the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and at the lower right in front view. The front component 1110 also includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from both left and right lower ends of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160. A predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162. By attaching, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. The positioning projection 1127 is fitted to an inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150, so that the inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150.

[Game panel]
Subsequently, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a woody plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and has an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component 1110. The game panel 1150 has an out-port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 of the front component member 1110 at a lower portion substantially at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is horizontally elongated in the front-rear direction at the lower left side in the front view. And a ball passage notch 1152 which is opened downward and has the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, and a rear projection of the function display unit 1180 which penetrates the lower right corner in front view in the front-rear direction. And an insertion hole 1153 into which the 1182 is inserted.

  In the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110 near the left and right ends of the lower portion, and positioning projections 1127 of the front component 1110 are inserted and fixed. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 to be formed and a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1156 recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and having the lower end side opened downward (see FIG. 105) And a notch 1157 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component 1110 and cut out so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The game panel 1150 in the game board 4 of the present example can define the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is defined by the front component member 1110, and within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface, A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. The game panel 1150 is formed such that the out port 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100. When the game panel 1150 is assembled to the game board 4, it is formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 of the front component 1110. The game ball guided backward by the provided out port guiding surface 1115 enters the out port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper part and the front part opened. In this substrate holder 1160, an out-ball discharge portion 1161 formed to penetrate vertically in the front end of the bottom wall at substantially the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front is formed, and the top surface of the bottom wall is formed as an out-ball. The game balls which are formed so as to become lower toward the discharge portion 1161 and are discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit or the back unit, and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the substrate holder 1160, It is designed to be discharged downward from the out-ball discharge portion 1161. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3. The game balls discharged from the pachinko machine 1 are all discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800.

  Further, the substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixing bosses 1162 protruding forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 1520 and then fit with the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110. In a state where the board holder 1160 is fitted to the boss 1126, a predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the board holder 1160 through the inside of the fixed boss 1162, so that the board holder 1160 is attached to the front component 1110. In addition to being able to be assembled, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  As shown in FIG. 105, the board holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 to which a fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the side at the rear left end of the rear wall of the rear wall portion, and a fixing portion. A locking portion 1164 that is disposed to face the 1163 and is capable of locking the elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 from behind. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160 by the fixing part 1163 and the locking part 1164 of the board holder 1160.

[Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontally long box-shaped board base 1171 having an open rear side, and a thin horizontally long box shape having a front side opened by covering the rear face of the board base 1171 and fitted into the inside of the board base 1171 from the rear side. The board cover 1172 includes a main control board 4100 in which electronic components, terminals, and the like are mounted on the rear side at the front end of the board cover 1172. In addition, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end of the board base 1171 in the rear view and is fitted to the fixing portion 1163 of the board holder 1160, and from the right end of the board cover 1172 in the rear view. And an elastic fixing piece that projects rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 105 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed on the right end in rear view with the elastic fixing piece 1175 interposed therebetween and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) stuck over the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower end of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal covering the surface of the hermetic seal It has a protective cover 1177 and a board management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the board cover 1172. The sealing section 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation cutting section 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is fixed by caulking in any one of the four sealing sections 1176. Have been. In the main control board box 1170, it is necessary to cut off the sealing portion 1176 fixed by caulking in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, so that a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1170 remains. Has become. This makes it possible to visually and externally determine whether the main control board box 1170 has been illegally opened.

  In this example, since four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. In the main control board box 1170 of this example, a sealing seal is stuck over the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. When the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the sealing seal is cut. It must be peeled off or peeled off, and even with this hermetic seal, traces of opening and closing remain. Accordingly, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally remodeled or replaced with an unauthorized main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such misconduct.

  In the main control board box 1170, an opening that penetrates the board cover 1172 in the front-rear direction is formed at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the main control input circuit 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening. Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face the rear side. By connecting a predetermined measuring device to the main control input circuit 4100f facing the rear of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-described sealing portion 1176 and the hermetic seal are finely crafted, it is possible to check the presence or absence of unauthorized alteration of the main control board 4100 by visual inspection, and the pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention performance. You can do it.

[Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is attached and arranged at a predetermined position on the front component 1110. The display unit 1181 is provided on the front surface of the front component 1110 so as to be visible from the player side. And a rear protruding portion 1182 protruding rearward from the rear surface.

  On the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, a game state that is changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end in a front view as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. A game status indicator 1183 made up of one LED for performing the game, and two LEDs vertically arranged on the right side of the game status indicator 1183, and the number of reserves for accepting a game ball to the first starting port 2101 is displayed. 1st special symbol storage display 1184 for the first, and the lottery result of the first special symbol (the first special symbol) which is arranged on the right side of the first special symbol storage display 1184 and which is drawn by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2101. Special lottery result) as a first special symbol, a first special symbol display 1185 comprising one 7-segment LED, and a diagonally upper right of the first special symbol display 1185 A second 7-segment LED for displaying, as a second special symbol, a lottery result (second special lottery result) of a second special symbol selected and arranged by receiving game balls into the second starting port 2102. A special symbol display 1186 and a second special symbol for displaying the number of reserves relating to the reception of game balls to the second starting port 2102, comprising two LEDs vertically arranged on the right side of the second special symbol display 1186. And a storage display 1187.

  In addition, the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 displays the number of reserves related to the passing of the game ball through the general-purpose gate 2301 by being arranged in an arc shape substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the second special symbol display 1186. , A normal symbol storage display 1188 composed of four LEDs for displaying a normal symbol, and a normal symbol lottery result which is arranged below the normal symbol memory display and drawn by passing a game ball through the general symbol gate 2301 to display a normal symbol. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, which is arranged side by side on the diagonally upper right side of the ordinary symbol display 1189 made up of one LED for displaying as A round display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening 2103 at the time of “operating hit”. It is provided with a 1190, a.

  The game status indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a red / green / orange color LED that can change its emission color. Depending on the combination, various game states (for example, a probability change state, a time reduction state, a short-change time short game state, a big hit game state, and the like) can be displayed. In the present embodiment, at least the probability variation state, the time reduction state, and the right-handed game state are configured to be displayed. In particular, in the present embodiment, a game state that is advantageous to a player if a game ball is fired (so-called “left-handed”) on the game area 1100 on the left side of the center role 2500, and a game on the right side of the center role 2500 If a game ball is fired in the area 1100 (so-called “right-handed”), a game state that is advantageous to the player is mixed, so that the timing of performing “right-handed” is clearly notified and displayed to the player. Thus, even a beginner of the game can smoothly switch the hitting method (hitting operation) in accordance with the transition of the game state, without making a mistake between “left hit” and “right hit”.

  In addition, the game state display 1183 is not limited to one constituted by one color LED, and may be constituted by a plurality of LED groups or 7-segment LEDs. Any configuration may be used as long as the player can easily grasp the current game state, particularly, the game state in which the player can right-turn when the player turns his or her eyes to the game state indicator 1183 during the game.

  The function display unit 1180 is controlled by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and transmits this control signal to a peripheral control unit 4140 of a peripheral control board 4010, which will be described later, to provide a player with a liquid crystal display device 1900 with a player. It is preferable to notify "right-handed". Normally, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is disposed in front of the player (behind the front line of sight). Therefore, when “right-handed” is notified on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the line of sight is placed on the left end in front view. The player can switch to an appropriate hitting method (hitting operation) without moving.

  In addition, when the first special symbol storage display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the first special symbol variably on the first special symbol display 1185, the game ball is received in the first starting port 2101. In such a case, the number of changes (the number of storages) of the first special symbol for which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol storage display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a composed of a predetermined LED and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of reservations is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a, 1184b are provided. Are turned on together, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a flashes when the number of reservations is three, and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned on. When the number of reservations is four, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are both. It is blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  When the second special symbol display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the second special symbol variably on the second special symbol display 1186, a game ball is received in the second starting port 2102. In this case, the display of the number of changes (the number of storages) of the second special symbol for which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The second special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a composed of a predetermined LED and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off. When the number of reservations is two, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are used. Are turned on together, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b flashes when the number of reservations is three, and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned on. It is blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are the first special lottery selected by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102. It displays the result and the second special lottery result. The 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and is stopped by the light-emitting pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED. The special lottery result and the second special lottery result can be recognized by the player.

  Further, the ordinary symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a red / green / orange color LED that can change its luminescent color, and is a combination of a luminescent color that emits light and lighting / flashing. Accordingly, it is possible to display a normal lottery result which is selected by a game ball passing through the general-purpose gate 2301. The display of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 1189 is, like the special symbol, displayed for a predetermined period of time and then stopped and displayed in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result.

  In addition, the normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 starts the variable display when the game ball passes through the general symbol gate 2301 when the normal symbol cannot be changed and displayed on the normal symbol display 1189. The number of reserved (stored) ordinary symbols is displayed. The ordinary symbol storage display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and each of which is a predetermined LED. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, the number of reserved ordinary symbols can be displayed. In this example, up to four variable displays of ordinary symbols are reserved (stored).

  Further, the round display 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes round display lamps 1190a and 1190b each formed of a predetermined LED, and by turning on these display lamps, the number of rounds in the “big hit” game can be displayed. It has become.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (A), the function display unit 1180 of this example can be visually recognized from the player through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In addition, the game state indicator 1183, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187 of the function display unit 1180, and the normal symbol memory The display 1188, the ordinary symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are mounted on the front of a function display board (not shown). A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear projection 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front component 1110 of the game board 4, the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150, so that the function display unit 1180 is provided. The display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost. Even if the configuration of the game board 4 embodied by the back unit 3000 and capable of characterizing the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different, the position of the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change. To be able to make the clerk of the hall recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without being confused You have me.

  The function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may have a form as shown in FIG. 106 (B). In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 each composed of seven segment LEDs are each composed of eight LED groups. In addition, the first special symbol storage display 1184 and the second special symbol storage display 1187 are each configured by four LED groups, and the ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is configured by two LEDs.

  The function display unit 1180 can also provide the same operation and effect as described above, and also, since the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are configured by eight LED groups, the function display unit 7180 Compared with the case where the segment LED is used, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since the content displayed on the function display unit 1180 is difficult to understand, it is possible to prevent the display of the function display unit 1180 from being anxious during the game and becoming difficult to concentrate on the game. It is possible to make the game more enjoyable by devoting itself to movable effects and effect images.

[Second embodiment of gaming panel]
Next, a game panel 1200 different from the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the front component 1110, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 107 to 109 have the same configuration as that described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. The game panel 1200 according to the present embodiment is a plate-like member that is thinner than the above-described game panel 1150 and is capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110 from the outer shape of the front component 1110. It also includes a panel plate 1210 having a small external shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110.

  The panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the game area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. Is formed. The thickness of the panel plate 1210 is smaller than that of the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum thickness that can be sufficiently held even when the obstacle nail G is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1210 includes a plurality of fitting holes 1211 which are arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and long holes 1212 which are arranged in the vicinity of the lower left outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend vertically. It has. These fitting holes 1211 and long holes 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100, and perform positioning with the panel holder 1220. The panel plate 1210 is provided with a stepped engagement step 1213 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engagement step portion 1213 is cut out to substantially half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100 like the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning protrusion 1127 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 such as the center accessory 2500 and the like. Unit is inserted and fixed.

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 of the game panel 1200 has a size including the panel board 1210 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and has a thickness substantially equal to the thickness of the game panel 1150 made of the above-described wooden board (in this example, about 20 mm) (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1220 holds the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner and is concave from the front side to the rear side. The inside of the holding step 1221 is substantially the same size as the game area 1100. And a through hole 1222 penetrating in the direction.

  The holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface substantially equal to the thickness of the panel plate 1210. And are substantially flush with each other. In addition, the holding step portion 1221 has a front inner peripheral surface having a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 relatively expands and contracts due to a change in temperature or a change with time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. The clearance may be filled with an elastic member such as rubber.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step 1221, and is arranged from the front of the holding step 1221 to the front. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned with respect to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engagement claw 1224 and an engagement piece 1225 that engage with the engagement step 1213 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1221. It projects toward and elastically engages with the engaging step 1213. The engaging claw 1224 has such a size that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and has a With a predetermined gap large enough to allow the engagement step 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted, the plate 1210 extends upward (center side) by a predetermined amount along the front surface of the panel holder 1220. By engaging the engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held to the panel holder 1220.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 which penetrates the mounting boss 1126 provided on the front component 1110 in the front-rear direction and can be inserted into the boss insertion hole 1226. By inserting 1126, panel holder 1220 and front component 1110 are positioned with respect to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 108, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave the lower side and the outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. Due to the mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of the depression ( The depth (depth) is set to about 2.5 mm (in this example, about 2.5 mm in this example) in which the flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c (see FIG. 116) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the attachment supporting portion 1227 can be accommodated. And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 1227, the fixing portion 3010c can be prevented from protruding rearward from the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (Pachinko machine 1) can be reliably installed and mounted in the game board holding port 601.

  Further, in the panel holder 1220, as shown, a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and above the accommodation recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw are arranged in a predetermined arrangement. ing. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. This positioning hole 1229 is provided with a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (shown in the figure) that projects forward from a fixing portion 3010c formed in a front flange shape on the back box 3010). Are omitted)). In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a substantially rectangular (square hole) blind hole as viewed from the rear.

  It should be noted that, for the mounting hole 1228, a hole having a large diameter and a hole having a small diameter are mixed, and a mounting hole having an appropriate diameter is selected according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 107, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed on the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, within a predetermined range from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height. Since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is substantially flat, the rear surface of the front component 1110 disposed on the front surface is substantially flat, and the game ball fired from the hitting ball firing device 650. Is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a lightening portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and they support them and maintain the strength of the panel holder 1220. For example, a box-shaped rib is formed.

  The panel holder 1220 has a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to a positioning device such as an obstacle nail implantation device (not shown) or an assembling jig. The game panel 1150 is held by the obstacle nail implantation device. It can be set in the state where it was done. In the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out port guide surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and penetrating horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end in a front view, and downward. And a ball passage notch 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 and a rear protruding portion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating the lower right corner in the front view in the front-rear direction. And an insertion hole 1234.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 108) which is recessed forward from the rear surface by a predetermined amount on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and has a lower end side opened downward. A notch 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and cut out from the right end in front view so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge groove 1235 of the panel holder 1220 is formed on the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). The positioning protrusion 607 provided is fitted, and the outboard discharge groove 1235 is fitted to the positioning protrusion 607, so that the game board 4 relatively moves in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame 3. It is being regulated.

  In the gaming panel 1200 of the present embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225 and the engaging step 1213 are engaged. By the combination, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front sides of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. The panel board 1210 can be set to the conventional obstacle nail implantation device while holding the panel plate 1210 in the panel holder 1220 without modifying the installation device, and the cost for implanting the obstacle nail G is increased. It can be suppressed.

  Although not shown, the gaming panel 1200 of the present example is configured such that a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in a predetermined gauge array in a range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. And a front unit 2000 can be attached. Further, a rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thus, since only the front unit is supported on the thin panel plate 1210, the panel plate 1210 can be prevented from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the game panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the entire game panel 1200, and to provide a transparent panel. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen from the player through the board 1210 can be embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's interest strongly.

  Also, since the gaming panel 1200 is divided into a panel board 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel board 1210 in which the position of the obstacle nail, the winning opening, etc. changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 having the game board 4 capable of supporting various models can be provided only by replacing the panel plate 1210 alone.

  Further, since a plurality of mounting holes 1228 are provided in the panel holder 1220 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 which is mounted and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 1220 depending on the model. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members so as to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228 even if the positions are different. It has become.

[Second embodiment of front component]
Next, a front component 1110A in a form different from the front component 1110 in the gaming board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. The game panel 1200, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 110 and 112 have the outer shape of the panel plate 1210 and the inner shape of the through hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220 in the embodiments shown in FIGS. Only the configuration is different from that of the example of FIGS. 107 to 109, and a detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The front component 1110A shown in FIGS. 110 and 111 is different from the above-described front component 1110 in that a part of the inner peripheral shape penetrated in the front-rear direction is different and does not include the function display unit 1180. The points are very different. The other configuration is the same as that of the front component 1110, the same reference numerals are given, and the detailed description is omitted. In the game board 4 using the front component 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit). 2000).

  As shown in the figure, the front component 1110A has a frame-shaped inner peripheral shape extending from the out-port guiding surface 1115 in a clockwise direction in a front view to the stop portion 1114 of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. The shape is formed in the same shape as the above-mentioned front member 1110, and the shape from the stop portion 1114 to the out-port guiding surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from the above-mentioned front member 1110. ing. Specifically, a portion from the stop portion 1114 to a position immediately above the right stamp stamping portion 1125 disposed immediately below the stop portion 1114 is formed in a gentle arc shape, and the out port is formed from the lower end of the arc shape. It is formed in a linear shape that is inclined so that the space up to the guiding surface 1115 becomes lower toward the out-port guiding surface 1115.

  The front component 1110A of the present example can secure a wider game area 1100 as compared with the above-described front component 1110, and can make the player more entertained by the wide game area 1100. I can do it.

[Security structure of pachinko machines]
Next, a security structure of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 112 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the security structure on the pivot side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the game board in a housed state as seen from the rear side.

  First, as shown in FIG. 112, the security structure on the pivot side of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is a side surface on the pivot side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. And a metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 formed of a synthetic resin in the door frame 5.

  As described above, the side security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded material, and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. At the same time, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction of the game panel 4 in which the front component 1110 and the game panel 1150 are combined. The side security plate 950 extends in the up-down direction and extends in the front-rear direction to form a side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end extending inward (open side) in a substantially right angle direction from the front end of the side surface piece 952 a. Piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending from the side piece 952a along the front end piece 952b so as to form a predetermined amount of gap behind the front end piece 952b, and a piece extending substantially perpendicularly inward from the rear end of the side piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d. Thus, the front end of the side security plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

  In addition, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 (main body 952) is increased by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d which are arranged at right angles to the surface of the side piece 952a. The strength of the entire body frame 3 is increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported.

  On the other hand, as described above, the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed by forming a plurality of long metal plates into a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 by using spot welding, rivets, or the like. The outer side of the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the supporting side is provided with a supporting-side U-shaped protruding piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section that is opened outwardly (on the supporting side). In the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased by the supporting-side U-shaped protrusion 166, and the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hardly bent. .

  By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is mounted and supported on the main body frame 3 only at the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft support 156 and the lower shaft support 158, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side is provided. When an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a bur is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the supporting metal plate 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large. There is a risk that wrongdoing will take place. On the other hand, in the security structure of the present example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, between the front end piece 952 b and the middle piece 952 c formed inside the front end of the side security plate 950. The rear side piece of the U-shaped projection 166 formed in the substantially U-shape of the reinforcement unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (penetrated), and the front end piece 952b is supported. The side U-shaped protruding piece 166 sandwiches it. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 is closed. Can be prevented from moving in the direction away from the main body frame 3, so that the closed door frame 5 can be prevented from being cut open, and the main body frame can be prevented. 3 can be prevented from being fraudulently performed such as opening the door frame 5.

  In addition, since the side security plate 950 formed of metal in the body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted to each other, the gap between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is reduced. Of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be hardly distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the security performance can be enhanced.

  Further, since the rear end of the side piece 952a of the side security plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 of the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 may be temporarily behind the rear end of the side piece 952a. Is broken, an illegal tool such as a piano wire cannot enter the game area 1100 on the front of the game board 4 (game panel 1150) from the rear end of the side piece 952a, and an illegal act is performed. Can be reliably prevented. In addition, as shown in FIG. 112, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the side security plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. Can be fully countered. In general, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it is almost impossible for an unauthorized tool to penetrate behind the rear end of the middle piece 952c, and the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

  Then, as a security structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 113, the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731 and the prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 accommodating the game board 4 are provided. Since the unit base 741, the full tank branching unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the rear and side surfaces of the game board 4 accommodated in the main body frame 3 are used for the game board 4 Even if it is not removed from the main body frame 3 or the back cover 900 is opened, it can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily detected, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed. Further, since an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach the unauthorized device, and it is possible to increase deterrence against illegal acts. ing.

  In addition, the rear and side surfaces of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like. When the game board 4 is attached to / detached from the main body 3, even if tools such as a driver and pliers, cleaning waste, dust and dirt, etc. remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, they are kept outside. , It is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring, and it is possible to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[Detailed configuration of game board]
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the gaming board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. FIG. 115 is a front view when the special winning port of the game board in the pachinko machine is opened. FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from behind, and FIG. 117 is an exploded view of the main components of the game board (the center role 2500 is not shown). It is the perspective view seen.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium is formed by a player operating the handle device 500. It includes a frame-shaped front component 1110A that defines the inner periphery of the game area 1100 to be driven in, and a plate-shaped game panel 1200.

  The game panel 1200 of this example includes a transparent panel plate 1210 having a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose inner periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110A and having a smaller outer shape than the front component 1110A. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110A. The opening of the game panel 1200 is formed in a transparent panel plate 1210.

  Further, the game board 4 has a front unit 2000 attached to the opening of the game panel 1200 from the front side, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a front end left end of the back unit 3000. A function display unit 1180 which is visible from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210 and is located at a position where it becomes visible to the player side from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 when attached to the pachinko machine 1; A liquid crystal display device 1900 having a rectangular display screen (display area) attached to the back side of the back unit 3000 so as to be visible from the player side and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and covers a lower portion of the back unit 3000 from the back side. And a substrate holder 1160 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the game panel 1200 A main control board box 1170 to be attached, and a.

  As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, in the game area 1100, a large number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a windmill is provided at a predetermined position on the way. At a substantially central position of the game area 1100, a center role 2500 is arranged, and the design of the center role 2500 characterizes the model of the pachinko machine 1, the game concept, and the like.

  Further, behind the center role 2500, an effect display device 1900 that effects and displays a large area in front view so as to attract attention from a player is provided. As the effect display device 1900, an appropriate display device capable of displaying image information obtained by combining decorative pattern image information, background image information, character image information, and the like is used. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as effect display device 1900.

  Above the liquid crystal display device 1900, a second liquid crystal display device 3252 having a smaller display area than the liquid crystal display device 1900 and realizing an auxiliary display effect is provided. The second liquid crystal display device 3252 may also display image information obtained by combining decorative pattern image information, background image information, character image information, and the like.

  On the other hand, from the right side area to the lower side area of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100, the general figure gate 2301, the large winning port 2103 of the attacker device 2100, the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101, the second A starting port 2102 is provided. On the other hand, a plurality of general winning openings 2201 are provided in the left area of the center role 2500 in the gaming area 1100. In addition, a permanent winning opening 2101a of the first starting opening 2101 is provided in an area below the center role 2500 in the gaming area 1100.

  Here, the first starting port 2101 is located substantially at the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction and below the liquid crystal display device 1900, and has a permanent winning opening 2101a in which a gaming ball can always win. On the right side, a special winning port 2101b is provided in which a game ball can be won only when a movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 operates. Then, when a game ball enters the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b), the first starting port sensor 3131 (see FIG. 118) described later enters the game ball (winning). ) Is detected. At this time, if a predetermined special start condition is satisfied, an attacker (described later) is updated based on a random number for a first special symbol that is periodically updated (generated) within a predetermined numerical range (for example, every 4 ms). A first special symbol lottery (first special determination) for a hit that triggers the operation of the apparatus 2100 is performed, and the first special symbol dynamically displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is variably displayed for a predetermined time. You. Then, when a winning is won, after the variable display is completed, drive control of an attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 118), which will be described later, including a solenoid or the like, is performed, thereby opening and closing the attacker device 2100. Will be activated. After the attacker device 2100 is opened and closed in this manner, it is possible to control the shift to the later-described time-saving gaming state in which the ease of awarding a game ball to the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 is improved. .

  As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a control structure capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and by starting the change of the second special symbol. A symbol change according to the result of the first special symbol lottery cannot be set to a change start waiting state.

  The general-purpose gate 2301 is provided above the special winning opening 2101b, and is configured to allow a game ball driven into the right area of the center role item 2500 to pass therethrough. Then, when the game ball is received (passed) to the general-purpose gate 2301, it is detected by the later-described gate sensor 2302 (see FIG. 118) that the game ball has been received.

  At this time, if a predetermined normal start condition is satisfied, the movable piece (normal) is updated based on a random number for a normal symbol that is regularly updated (generated, for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range. Judgment processing (ordinary judgment) is performed on the ordinary hit which triggers the operation of the electric accessory 2111, and the ordinary symbol dynamically displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189 is variably displayed for a predetermined time. Then, when the winning is won, after the variable display is completed, drive control of a later-described ordinary accessory driving mechanism 3114 (see FIG. 118) including a solenoid or the like is performed. By this drive control, acceptance of the game ball into the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 is allowed through an opening operation in which the movable piece 2111 rotates the upper end clockwise around the lower end. .

  That is, the special winning opening 2101b is used only when the movable piece 2111 performs an opening operation (rotation of the upper end about the lower end of the movable piece 2111) in response to the winning of the normal winning. The ball is provided so that a prize can be won. In this sense, the movable piece 2111 includes a mode in which game balls cannot enter the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 (rejection mode) and a mode in which the same ball is allowed (permission). (The ball mode), and can be said to be maintained in the rejected ball mode unless drive control of the ordinary accessory drive mechanism 3114 is performed. Therefore, in the special winning port 2101b, basically, when a game is in a normal game state (non-time saving game state), a prize of a game ball hardly occurs. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state, the game ball is driven into the right area of the center role item 2500 in the game area 1100 (right-handed), thereby improving the ease of receiving the game ball. A game property centering on a game (first special symbol lottery) corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the winning opening 2101b is realized.

  The second starting port 2102 is provided below the special winning port 2101b, is driven into the right area of the center role 2500, and has a special winning port 2103 of the attacker device 2100 and a special winning port of the first starting port 2101. A game ball not accepted by the mouth 2101b is configured to be able to enter the ball. Then, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2102, a ball (winning) of the game ball is detected by a second starting port sensor 3132 (see FIG. 118) described later. At this time, if a predetermined special start condition is satisfied, an attacker (described later) is updated based on a random number for a second special symbol that is periodically updated (generated, for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range. A second special symbol lottery (second special determination) is performed for a hit that triggers the operation of the device 2100, and the second special symbol dynamically displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 is displayed in a fluctuating manner for a predetermined time. You. Then, when a win is obtained, after the variable display is completed, drive control of an attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 118) described later having a solenoid or the like is performed, whereby the attacker device 2100 is performed. Is opened and closed.

  Here, the attacker device 2100 according to the present embodiment is provided above the special winning opening 2101b, and is configured to be able to receive a game ball driven into the right side area of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100 when in the open state. Have been.

  The attacker device 2100 includes a special winning opening 2103, an opening / closing member 2106 operable between a closed state and an open state, and an attacker driving mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 118) for driving the opening / closing member 2106 to open and close. Usually, it is closed by the opening and closing member 2106 so that the game ball is not received in the special winning opening 2103.

  However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the special winning opening 2103 is opened as a result of the special lottery performed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 (the first special opening). When the special winning lottery opening 2103 is opened as a result of the special lottery performed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 (the hitting game on the second special symbol side), The number of balls that can be received by the game ball is adjusted by making the control modes for opening the balls different.

  That is, the attacker device 2100 opens the big winning opening 2103 by opening and closing the opening and closing member 2106 when a big hit or a small hit is obtained as a result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment. As a result, a big hitting game state or a small hitting game state as a privilege advantageous to the player is generated. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 2101 (first starting port sensor 3131) or the second starting port 2102 (second starting port sensor 3132), three game balls are paid out. When a game ball wins in the big winning port 2103 (count sensor 2122a) used for executing the big hit game state or the small hit game state, 15 game balls are paid out. It should be noted that when a game ball wins the general winning opening 2201 (general winning opening sensor 3133), ten game balls are paid out.

  By the way, in the time saving game state (rush preparation mode in the present embodiment), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is “0.08 seconds”, and after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped, the movable piece 2111 is in the open state (special winning opening 2101b). Is maintained at the right turning position where the game ball can be awarded) (5.5 seconds). That is, when a game ball passes through the general-purpose gate 2301, a win is always made for a normal hit, and the passed game ball reaches the movable area of the movable piece 2111 for a shorter time (0 hours). (.08 seconds), the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped, so that the game ball that has triggered the win of the normal hit can directly enter the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101. According to such a configuration, in the time-saving gaming state, it is possible to prevent the game ball from winning in the second starting port 2102 which is provided further below the special winning port 2101b and can receive the dropped game ball. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of the second special symbol lottery in the time-saving gaming state in which the execution of the first special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning port 2101b is preferred.

  After the movable piece 2111 is maintained for “5.5 seconds” in the open state (the position where the game ball can be received in the special winning opening 2101b), the movable ball 2111 is closed (the game ball is in the special winning opening 2101b). (A position that is considered unacceptable).

  Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode), the winning probability of a normal symbol is 100%, and the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b is moved to the right-rotation side position for a long time (5.5 seconds in this example). In this case, by right-handing in this case, it becomes easy to win a game ball to the special winning opening 2101b. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state rush preparation mode), the center role is set so that many game balls win in the first starting opening 2101 (special winning opening 2101b) instead of the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101a). It is considered advantageous for a player to fire a game ball aiming at the right side of 2500 (so-called “right-handed”).

  On the other hand, in the non-time saving game state (the normal mode and the rush mode in the present embodiment), the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 0%, and the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is set to a predetermined variation time (for example, 1 second). ), It is impossible to accept game balls in the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101.

  It should be noted that, even in the non-time-saving game state, whether the shooting ball is aimed at the left or right of the center role 2500 is more advantageous to the player depending on whether or not the game state is the probable change game state. In the normal game state (normal mode), which is a non-time saving game state and not a probable game state, the left side of the center role item 2500 is positioned so that many game balls win the regular winning port 2101a of the first starting port 2101. It is considered advantageous for a player to fire a game ball (so-called "left-handed"). Also, in the non-time-saving game state, and in the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) in which the jackpot winning probability is higher than the normal game state, a large number of game balls are in the second starting port 2102. It is considered advantageous for the player to fire the game ball (so-called “right-hand”) aiming at the right side of the center role 2500 so as to win a prize.

  In addition, as the time saving function, control for increasing the winning probability of the ordinary symbol than in the non-hour saving gaming state, control for shortening the time required for the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbol than the non-hour saving gaming state, The control to extend the period in which the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b is maintained at the right rotation side position from the non-time saving game state, and the number of times the movable piece 2111 is operated to the right rotation side position as compared to the non-time saving game state. Any one or any combination (or all) of the increasing controls may be executed.

  The back unit 3000 of the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), the front side is opened, and the opening penetrates the rear wall 3010a in the front-rear direction facing the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. A back box 3010 in which a 3010b is formed, a back decoration unit 3100 disposed near the front end in the back box 3010, a back effect unit 3200 disposed above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and a back box The lower back production unit 3400 arranged below the opening 3010b in the inside 3010, and the lower right back arranged between the back lower production unit 3400 and the front decoration unit 3100 at the lower right corner in front view inside the back box 3010 And an effect unit 3600. The front display unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is provided with a function display unit 1180 at a position visible from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210.

  Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 of the game board 4, a peripheral control board for accommodating a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 118) having a peripheral control section 4140 and a liquid crystal control section 4150, which will be described in detail later. A box 1910 is provided.

  The game board 4 of the present embodiment is a wide area where the game ball can sufficiently roll between the outer circumference on the left side of the center role item 2500 and the outer circumference of the game area 1100 (the inner circumference of the front component 1110A). In the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel plate 1210 in the area on the left side of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100.

  In the game board 4 of the present example, when a game ball is hit to the right side of the center role 2500 (hit with a strength equal to or more than a predetermined strength), the game ball is located upstream of the stop portion 1114 of the front component 1110A. It flows down the right passage 2545 of the center role 2500 from the side. Here, the right passage 2545 has a width that allows the game balls to flow down one by one. After the game balls flowing down the right passage 2545 are decelerated by the stopper 1114, first, the path of the right passage 2545 It arrives at the general-purpose gate 2301 arranged above. Thereafter, the user is guided to the movable area of the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker device 2100. In this movable area, the game ball that has not been received in the special winning opening 2103 by the opening / closing member 2106 is then guided to the movable area of the movable piece 2111. It should be noted that the game ball flowing down to the upper right of the movable area is decelerated by the first guiding section 2901 and its flowing direction is changed before being guided to the movable area of the movable piece 2111. Here, a game ball that has passed through the upper general-purpose gate 2301 is guided to the special winning port 2101b in a state where the game ball is received by the movable piece 2111.

  In the movable area of the movable piece 2111, the game ball not guided by the movable piece 2111 so as to be accepted by the special winning opening 2101b is decelerated again by the second guiding section 2902, and then guided to the second starting port 2102. Is done. The game ball flowing down the right passage 2545 is guided to the second starting port 2102 with a probability close to 100% unless the ball enters the special winning port 2103 or the special winning port 2101b.

  As described above, in the time-saving gaming state, the game ball that has been right-handed and passed through the general-purpose gate 2301 is accepted by the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 with a probability of almost 100%.

  When a large hit or a small hit is obtained as one of the first special judgment and the second special judgment as a result of such a game being played, the large winning opening 2103 is opened by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106. As a result, a big hit game state or a small hit game state is generated as a benefit advantageous to the player.

[Liquid crystal display]
Subsequently, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of the present example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to a game state. As shown in FIG. 117 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixing piece 1902 projecting outward from both left and right sides, and can be attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 via the fixing piece 1902. ing.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted from the rear side into a liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 projects from the right side in front view. After one fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the two liquid crystal fixing portions 3010e on the left side of the back box 3010 when viewed from the rear, the other fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the insertion opening formed by the lock mechanism 3050. The liquid crystal display 1900 can be locked and attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the lock mechanism 3050 downward to close the insertion opening.

  As shown in FIG. 116 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 containing a peripheral control unit 4140, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 118), and the like, and a lower part of the peripheral control board box 1910. And a volume 1912 extending rearward. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, the volume output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5, the lower speaker 821 provided on the body frame 3, and the like can be adjusted. It has become.

  Note that the liquid crystal display device 1900 uses a light-brightness white LED as a backlight.

[Various substrates]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and these two groups share various controls. The group of the main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 for controlling a game operation (progress of a game) and a payout control board 4110 for controlling payout of game balls and the like. Also, a group of peripheral control boards 4010 includes a peripheral control section 4140 that controls various effects during a game based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display 1900 based on a command from the peripheral control section 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the display of the effect image.

[Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, the main control board 4100a for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e (hereinafter, also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”) built in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. . The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter, also referred to as “main control built-in ROM 4100d”) and a main control built-in RAM 4100e, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), and a device for preventing impropriety. And other functions are also built-in.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes a first starting port sensor 3131 for detecting a game ball received by the first starting port 2101, and a second starting port sensor for detecting a game ball received by the second starting port 2102. 3132 and a detection signal from a general winning opening sensor 3133 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2201 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, respectively, or the gate sensor 2302 and the count sensor 2122 (count). The detection signals from the sensor 2122a, the count sensor 2122b), the specific sensor 2580, and the magnetic detection sensor 3134 attached to the back unit 3000 are transmitted to the panel relay board 3040 attached to the game board 4, and the main control I / O port 4100b. Or to be input via the Internet.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g based on these detection signals, so that the normal accessory drive mechanism 2114 via the panel relay board 3040, A drive signal is output to the attacker drive mechanism 2121, the winning port distribution drive motor 2558, and the specific area distribution drive motor 2559, and via the main control I / O port 4100 b, the panel relay board 3040, and the function display board 1191. 1st special symbol display 1185, 2nd special symbol display 1186, 1st special symbol memory display 1184, 2nd special symbol memory display 1187, ordinary symbol indicator 1189, ordinary symbol memory display 1188, game state display For example, a driving signal is output to the display 1183 and the round display 1190.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to a peripheral control unit 4140 of a peripheral control board 4010 to be described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness not shown). The main control MPU 4100a, when described in detail later, receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, shapes these various commands, and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from a power supply board 851, as will be described in detail later. The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. Described). This capacitor allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages fall below the power failure warning voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[Payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of the game balls and the like controls the payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout, the firing control by the firing solenoid 654, and the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 585. A launch control unit 4120 for performing control, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720 , A tank rail 731, and a ball release switch 860 b for discharging game balls in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 to start a ball removal operation.

[Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 118, a payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. , A payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and an external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT4111c”) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally. And a payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. , Is provided. The payout control MPU 4111a has a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”) and a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) as well as a built-in payout control MPU 4111a to prevent fraud. Functions are built in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b, In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from the RAM clear switch 4100c being input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, and the ball out switch 750 The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 may be input via the winning ball relay board 754.

  A ball out switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply path 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball path 741c formed in the unit base 741. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the winning ball relay board 754 of the winning ball device 740, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed in the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first transmitted via the sensor substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay substrate 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 and the body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first output from the payout control input circuit. 4111e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the stored game balls is transmitted to the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal first. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4111b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 as an error LED display. A signal to be displayed on the payout control I / O port 4111b is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, and a command for indicating the state of the pachinko game 1 is output via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The main control board 4100 transmits the number of game balls actually paid out to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The following are the contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection failure” (specifically, the main control board 4100 Is notified that the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it is notified that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740). (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotator 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740. When That the payout rotator 748 is difficult to rotate due to the engagement with the technical ball near the entrance), and when the number “3” is displayed, it is a “count switch error” (specifically, Is notified based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751), and when the number “5” is displayed, it is a “retry error” (specifically, payout). The number of operation retries has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full” (specifically, from the full-state detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal, the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is notified that the game balls are full with the stored game balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it is “CR not connected” (payout). control That the electrical connection is disconnected at any point from the plate 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number “9” is displayed, it is “stocking” (specifically, That the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

  The ball lending request signal from the ball lending switch 365a and the prepaid card return request signal from the return switch 365b are transmitted to the ball lending unit board 366, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 first. The data is input to the CR unit 6 via the control unit. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in a serial manner, and this signal is used as the payout control I / O. The data is received by the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. Further, the CR unit 6 updates a residual value of the inserted prepaid card in accordance with the number of lent game balls, and transmits a signal for displaying the residual value on the residual number display 365c to a CR unit connection terminal. The signal is output to the plate 874, the main-side relay terminal plate 880, and the ball rental unit board 366, and this signal is input to the residual frequency indicator 365c.

[Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 118, the firing control unit 4120 that performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585 includes a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are input. 4120a, an oscillating circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the clock signal, A firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit 4120c generates a launch reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillating circuit 4120b so that 100 game balls per minute are launched toward the game area 1100, and outputs it to the launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball-feeding reference pulse that is a predetermined number times the firing reference pulse is generated and output to the ball-feeding solenoid driving circuit 4120e.

  A detection signal from a touch sensor 516 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle main body 504, and a detection stop switch 518 for detecting whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by a player's will. Is first input to the firing control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, and is input to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit 4120a as a CR connection signal, and is input to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. A signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotation position of the handle main body 504 is first supplied to the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880. Is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d via the.

  The launching solenoid drive circuit 4120d outputs a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launching strength commensurate with the rotational position of the handle main body 504 based on a signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512. Is output to the firing solenoid 654 in response to the input of. On the other hand, when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit 4120e applies a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192. By outputting the ball, the ball feed member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 receives one ball of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, and when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is completed, the constant current is output. Is stopped, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the hitting ball firing device 650 side. Thus, while the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the firing solenoid 654 is variably controlled, the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. Is controlled.

  The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see Otsu 169) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. . The payout control MPU 4111a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM even when the power is turned off by the capacitor BC1 in the power-off processing. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, the peripheral control board 4010 performs a performance control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like based on control data from the peripheral control section 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 118, a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and performs high-quality sound performance. The sound source IC 4140c includes a sound ROM 4140d that stores sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4140a transmits the various commands to the decorative boards of the game board 4 based on the various commands. The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to the lamp drive board 3041 or the game board. A game board-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in the game machine 4 is transmitted from the game board decoration drive board serial I / O port to the motor attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. To transmit a drive signal to the drive board 3045 or to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 A door-side drive comprising door-side drive data and door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5. The light emission data is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame base board 194 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, or to the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display. In addition to transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the device 3252 from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, a control signal for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d ( Sound command) to the sound source IC 4140c.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting the original positions of various effect units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via a motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Have been. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressing detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are based on the door frame base board. 194, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, which are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the operation signal. are doing.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. The lower speaker 821 is controlled so that music and sound effects matched to various effects flow from the lower speaker 821 to the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the provided speakers 130, 222, and 262 and the lower speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and protruding backward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

  In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the peripheral control unit 4140 includes an external watchdog timer (hereinafter, “peripheral control external device”) not shown. The peripheral control MPU 4140a diagnoses whether or not its own system is out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by a serial input / output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k). ) Bits per second (hereinafter, referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, a door frame side lighting / flashing command, a game board side lighting / flashing command, a movable body driving command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp driving board 3041 or the motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The display command is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

  The lamp driving board 3041 and the motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 transmit a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 to the door frame. 5 is output to the LEDs of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc., and a lighting signal or a blinking signal is generated based on the received game board side lighting blinking command. It outputs to the LED of each decorative board 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3114, 3115, 3123, 3124, 3266, 3320, 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546, etc. provided in the game board 4. The panel relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body to the dial drive motor provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882. 414, the respective drive motors 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508, etc., provided in the game board 4, and outputs to the respective solenoids.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or receives a signal from the operation unit 400 provided in the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressure operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are transmitted to the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 and the back box. An input is made via a lamp driving board 3041 or a motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the lamp 3030.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on a sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and outputs a lamp drive board 3041, a motor drive board 3045, and the like on the rear surface of the back box 3010 and a peripheral side relay terminal board. The lower speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 from the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 via 882 or the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The control is performed so that music, sound effects and the like according to various effects flow. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged above the gaming window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. Sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal or a 4.1ch surround signal to which a lower speaker 391 described later is added) to the lower speaker 821 for low sound. Thus, a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) can be presented.

[Measures to prevent abnormal sound generation]
The door frame 5 is equipped with various acoustic facilities, LEDs, sensors, and other facilities requiring power, and a door frame base substrate 194 is attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 (FIG. 25). The door frame base substrate 194 includes side speakers 130, upper speakers 222 and 262 (FIGS. 29 and 32) of left and right side decorative units, and lower speakers 821 (FIG. 67) in a speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 (FIG. 67). The speaker is connected to a bass speaker (FIG. 89) (FIG. 89), and is connected to a peripheral control board 4010 provided on the game board 4. The audio signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 is amplified and output to each speaker. An amplification circuit (digital amplifier circuit) is provided.

  Further, on the door frame base board 194, wirings for connecting various kinds of audio equipment, LEDs, sensors, and the like to the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4010, and the like are collectively bundled and extended rearward. The main frame 3 is connected to the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 (FIGS. 67 and 89). The rear side of the door frame base substrate 194 is covered with a door frame base substrate cover 195 (FIG. 23).

  Also, at the position (rear side) where the door frame base board cover 195 is provided, the game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 or the game area 1100 despite being fired by the hit ball firing device 650. A foul cover unit 540 (transparent polycarbonate molded product) that guides the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit is provided in proximity (FIG. 23).

  Since the game ball (metal) passes through the ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 at a high speed while contacting the wall of the passage, an electrostatic charge is accumulated in the polycarbonate in this portion, and it may be as high as 10 kV. (3-4 kV at most even when pain is felt by the discharge of the accumulated electrostatic charge). Also, unlike metals, most of the electric charge accumulated in the resin passes through only its periphery even when grounded, and most of the electric charge remains.

  Then, the digital amplifier circuit (not shown) of the door frame base substrate 194 close to the electrostatic induction by the electric charges may malfunction. In this case, an abnormal audio signal that continues for a certain period of time is input to the voice coil of the speaker, or the audio signal by the digital amplifier circuit is extremely amplified and exceeds an appropriate amplification width (when an excessive AC voltage is applied). Occur. In such a case, for example, a cracked sound such as a rattling sound is generated from the speaker, or the sound reproduced by the speaker becomes a loud unpleasant sound (abnormal sound is generated), and the player receives an unpleasant sound. You will feel it. Further, the speaker may be damaged, which is not good for the speaker. Note that the digital amplifier circuit has a DC voltage cut function on the input side, but does not normally have the function on the output side.

  Since the woofer of the lower speaker 821 is hard to hear, the output tends to be set to a relatively large value.

  The embodiment described below detects whether or not the audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 to the lower speaker 821 is the abnormal audio signal described above. The present invention relates to an invention relating to an abnormal audio signal cut-off board (described later) that blocks an abnormal audio signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and receives various commands from the main control board 4100. Based on this, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c (FIG. 118).

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the lower part provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, the door frame base substrate 194, and the like. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speakers 821 and the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 provided on the door frame 5 (see FIGS. 118 and 119).

[Abnormal sound signal cut-off board]
Next, the abnormal sound signal cut-off board will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119 is a block diagram of the door frame base substrate 194, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884, and the lower speaker 821. FIG. 120 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884.

  As shown in FIG. 119, the door frame base substrate 194 disposed on the door frame 5 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 disposed on the main body frame 3 are connected by wiring 196, and The +24 V voltage and the woofer + signal and the woofer-signal, which are the audio signals for the lower speaker 821 amplified by the door frame base substrate 194, are output to the side relay terminal plate 882, and are output to the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 via the wiring 196. It is to be transmitted.

  As shown in FIG. 119, an abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 is provided between the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 and the lower speaker 821 housed in the speaker box 820 in the main body frame 3, and the peripheral side relay terminal The plate 882 and the abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 are connected by a speaker protection harness 883, and the abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 and the lower speaker 821 are connected by a lower speaker harness 819.

  In FIG. 120, a ground GND, a + 24V voltage, a woofer + signal and a woofer, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 and output from the door frame base substrate 194, are transmitted from the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 to the abnormal audio signal cutoff substrate 884. -The signal is relayed and transmitted to the abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883.

  Further, a woofer + signal and a woofer- signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821, are output from the abnormal audio signal cut-off board 884 to the lower speaker 821, and supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. Have been. As described above, the audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 through the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 is supplied and input to the lower speaker 821.

  Incidentally, it is desirable that the location of the abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 in the main body frame 3 is a location that is hardly affected by electrostatic noise. In the present embodiment, the abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 is arranged at a location far from the foul cover unit 540, for example, inside the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. By arranging the abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 at a position that is hardly affected by static electricity noise, it is possible to stably prevent an abnormal sound signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

[Circuit of abnormal sound signal cut-off board]
The abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 detects whether or not the sound signal supplied to the abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883 is an abnormal sound signal. It blocks the audio signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

  As shown in FIG. 120, the abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 detects whether the sound signal is an abnormal sound signal and outputs an abnormal detection signal, and outputs an abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and an abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885. An abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 is provided to cut off supply of an abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821 when receiving the output abnormality detection signal.

  The + 24V voltage supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 through the + 24V supply line 886 in the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884. Further, the ground GND supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 through the ground line 887 in the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884.

  The woofer + signal, which is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two on an abnormal audio signal cutoff board 884, one of which is input to the abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895 through the woofer + signal line 888, and the other is input. It is input to the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885.

  The woofer signal, which is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two at an abnormal audio signal cut-off board 884, and one is relayed at the abnormal audio signal cut-off board 884 through a woofer signal line 889. And is connected to an external lower speaker 821 through a lower speaker harness 819. The other is input to the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885.

[Abnormal sound signal detection circuit]
The abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 includes a rectifier bridge circuit formed by connecting four diodes SD1 to SD4 in a bridge type, a resistor SR1 (47 kΩ) disposed at a stage subsequent to the rectifier bridge circuit, and an electrolytic capacitor SC1 (in the present embodiment, It mainly includes an infrared LED of a transistor STR1, a transistor STR2, and a photocoupler SPC1 (incorporating an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

  The cathode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD2, and the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD4 and the anode terminal of the diode SD2 receives the other woofer + signal of the two branches. . The cathode terminal of the diode SD3 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD1, and the other woofer signal of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD1. ing.

  Further, the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 and the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 are electrically connected, and the anode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD4 are electrically connected to form a rectifying bridge circuit. The cathode terminal of the diode SD2 is connected to a + voltage line 890 for supplying a positive voltage rectified by a rectifying bridge circuit to the subsequent stage, while the anode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to a rectifying bridge to the subsequent stage. The circuit is connected to a 0 V line 891 for supplying 0 V whose minus portion is cut and the voltage is substantially 0 V.

  Then, at the subsequent stage of the rectifier bridge circuit, one end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, the other end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the-terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is connected to the 0V line 891. It is connected.

  In other words, the woofer + signal and the woofer-signal (+ voltage waveforms in which the high and low peaks of the audio signal waveform are continuously connected to each other with 0 V as a connection point) rectified by the rectification bridge circuit are subjected to electrolysis via the resistor SR1. When the voltage is applied to the + terminal of the capacitor SC1, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak, and the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0V is charged. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 discharges. The time constant of charging and discharging in a series circuit (smoothing circuit) of the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is determined by the resistance value of the resistor SR1 and the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

  At a stage subsequent to the connection point of the resistor SR1 of the + voltage line 890, one end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the + voltage line 890, and the other end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR1. The base terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected not only to the other end of the capacitor SC2, but also to the other end of the resistor SR3, one end of which is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1. That is, the voltage of the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 via the resistor SR3. Further, the ripple of the waveform of the + voltage is removed and smoothed by the capacitor SC2.

  At the subsequent stage of the connection point of the capacitor SC2 of the + voltage line 890, the collector terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, and the rectified and smoothed woofer signal, that is, the + voltage is applied. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to one end of a resistor SR2, the other end of the resistor SR2 is connected to one end of a resistor SR4, and the other end of the resistor SR4 is connected to a 0V line 891. The resistors SR2 and SR4 are voltage dividing resistors.

  One end of a resistor SR5 is connected to a connection point between the resistors SR2 and SR4, the other end of the resistor SR5 is connected to a cathode terminal of a Zener diode SZD1, and an anode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1 is connected to one end of a resistor SR6. The other end of the resistor SR6 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2. Further, one end of a resistor SR7 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2, and the other end of the resistor SR7 is connected to a 0V line 891.

  That is, the voltage at one end of the resistor SR7, which appears based on the output voltage of the emitter of the transistor STR1, is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2.

  On the other hand, at the subsequent stage of the connection point of the + voltage line 890 with the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the anode terminal of the diode SD5 is connected to the + voltage line 890, and the cathode terminal of the diode SD5 is connected to the anode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1. It is connected to the. The cathode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR2 is connected to the 0V line 891.

  That is, when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on.

[Abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit]
The abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 mainly includes the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, the transistor STR3, and the relay SRL1. That is, the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 are connected through the photocoupler SPC1.

  In the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, the 24V supply line 886 is branched into two, one is connected to the collector terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, and the other is connected to the eighth terminal (coil + input) of the relay SRL1. Have been. The emitter terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to one end of a resistor SR8, the other end of the resistor SR8 is connected to one end of a resistor SR9, and the other end of the resistor SR9 is connected to a ground line 887. The resistors SR8 and SR9 are voltage dividing resistors.

  The connection point between the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR3 for relay operation, and is connected to one end of a capacitor SC3 having the other end connected to the ground line 887. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the ground line 887, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the first terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1 and the third terminal (one of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1.

  The fourth terminal (the other of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the ground line 887. Further, the fifth terminal (one of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the woofer + signal line 888, and the sixth terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the lower speaker harness 819 as an external output of the woofer + signal. Is connected to an external lower speaker 821.

  Further, a varistor SZNR1 for inductive current bypass by self-induction action is connected in parallel between the eighth terminal (coil + input) of the relay SRL1 and the first terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1. A varistor SZNR2 for contact protection is connected in parallel between the terminal (one of the B contacts) and the sixth terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1.

  Since the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 are signal-connected by the photocoupler SPC1, electric noise does not directly enter the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885. It has become.

  Next, the operation of the circuit of the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884 configured as described above will be described.

[Operation when a normal audio signal is input]
<Abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885>
When a normal audio signal (waveform of an AC voltage having a different amplitude peak) is input, in the rectifier bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, in the case of a woofer + signal, the diodes SD2 and SD3 conduct, In FIG. 120, a current flows from the top to the bottom of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during a period from the positive voltage waveform of 0 V to the peak voltage of the peak.

  When a normal audio signal (a waveform of an AC voltage having a different amplitude peak) is input, the voltage increase due to the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on and maintains the off state.

  Next, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0V, and the electric charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 through the resistor SR1.

  In the case of the woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 conduct, and a current flows from the top to the bottom through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 120 to reach a peak voltage of 0 V from a + V waveform. During the period, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

  When a normal audio signal (waveform of an AC voltage having a different amplitude peak) is input, the voltage rise due to the charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on and maintains the off state.

  Next, during a period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged, and the electric charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 through the resistor SR1.

  As described above, when a normal audio signal (a waveform of an AC voltage having a different amplitude peak) is input, the transistor STR1 of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 maintains an off state. Therefore, the transistor STR2 and the infrared LED (photocoupler) of the photocoupler SPC1 also remain off, and the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 does not actually turn on.

<Abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895>
On the other hand, in the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, the transistor STR3 also maintains the off state because the photocoupler SPC1 maintains the off state. Further, relay SRL1 is in a non-operation state. Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in the non-excited state, and the non-operating B contact (the contact is closed) between the fifth terminal and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 is non-operating between the third terminal and the fourth terminal. The contact A is in an open state. Accordingly, the fifth and sixth terminals of the relay SRL1 are in a conductive state, and the woofer + signal on the woofer + signal line 888 is supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819.

[When an abnormal sound signal that continues for a certain period is input]
[Operation when abnormal audio signal is input by fixed DC voltage]
<Abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal (for example, a constant voltage of +24 V, +18 V, +1.5 V, etc.) due to a fixed DC voltage is continuously input, in the rectifying bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 conducts, and in FIG. 120, a charging current flows from top to bottom through the resistor SR1 to the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 continues to be charged.

  When an abnormal audio signal with a fixed constant voltage is input, an increase in the voltage of the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 due to an increase in the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 over time is applied. The constant voltage approaches a certain constant voltage, and reaches a base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 turns on.

  When the transistor STR1 is turned on, a current flows through the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the emitter terminal of the transistor STR1, the resistors SR2 and SR4, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR4 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistors SR2 and SR4). , A current flows through the resistor SR5, the Zener diode SZD1, the resistor SR6, and the resistor SR7, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR7 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistor SR6 and the resistor SR7) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2 in the subsequent stage. This turns on the transistor STR2.

  When the transistor STR2 is turned on, the collector voltage of the transistor STR2 is reduced to the 0V line 891 side, and the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on via the diode SD5. That is, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. Here, turning on the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 corresponds to outputting the abnormality detection signal described in claim 1. Note that the diode SD5 limits the current flowing through the infrared LED.

<Abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895>
When the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, and a current flows to the ground through the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, the resistors SR8 and SR9. Here, turning on the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 means receiving an abnormality detection signal. The voltage applied to the resistor SR9 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3, turning on the transistor STR3. Note that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3 is smoothed by removing noise from the capacitor SC3.

  When the transistor STR3 is turned on, the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side, and the first terminal of the relay SRL1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side. The coil inside the relay SRL1 between the first terminal and the terminal is energized, and the relay SRL1 operates.

  Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in the excited state, and the B contact (the contact is open) between the fifth and sixth terminals of the relay SRL1 in the operating state (the contact is open) during the operating state between the third and fourth terminals. A contact (contact closed) is established. Therefore, the fifth terminal and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 shift to the cutoff state, and the output of the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off. Thus, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is shut off.

  Further, the third terminal and the fourth terminal of the relay SRL1 shift to the conductive state, the third terminal of the relay SRL1 is pulled down to the ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 connected to the third terminal of the relay SRL1 is connected to the ground. The transistor STR3 is turned off.

  On the other hand, the first terminal of the relay connected in parallel with the third terminal of the relay SRL1 is also pulled down to the ground, so that the current flows through the route of the eighth terminal, the first terminal, the third terminal, the fourth terminal, and the ground line 887. The state shifts to the flowing conductive state, and the energized state of the coil is maintained. Therefore, the output of the woofer + signal from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 remains interrupted.

  As described above, when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed constant voltage is input, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs an abnormal detection signal (photocoupler). Turns on). Upon receiving the abnormality detection signal output from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 (when the photocoupler is turned on), the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 supplies an abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821 by operating the relay SRL1. Cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the speaker from being damaged due to the continuous application of the fixed DC voltage to the speaker.

  In the above-described embodiment, when an abnormal sound is input, the energized state of the coil of the relay SRL1 is maintained, and the output of the woofer + signal from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off. The highest priority is given to preventing speaker damage, and ultimately safety measures are taken. Therefore, when the cause of the abnormal sound signal can be grasped by a staff or the like, or when the sound output stop state is confirmed, the operation state of the relay SRL1 is released by turning on the power of the game machine again. It is possible to return to a normal initial state.

[Operation when abnormal audio signal due to excessive AC voltage is input]
<Abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal due to excessive AC voltage is input, that is, when an audio signal is excessively amplified and an excessive AC voltage exceeding an appropriate amplification width is input, for example, in the case of a woofer + signal, The diode SD2 and the diode SD3 conduct, the charging current flows from the top to the bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 120, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from the positive voltage waveform of 0V to the peak voltage of the peak. Is done.

  For example, in the case of a woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 conduct, the charging current flows from the top to the bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. During the period up to the peak voltage, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

  In this case, since the peak voltage of the abnormal audio signal is extremely higher than the peak voltage of the normal audio signal, even if the width of the peak waveform is the same between the normal waveform and the abnormal waveform, the resistance SR1 Rapidly flows through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 to charge the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

  Therefore, the charge stored at the + terminal of electrolytic capacitor SC1 through resistor SR1 rapidly increases. Due to this rapid increase in charge, the voltage at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 rises and reaches the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 turns on.

  The operation of the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the operation of the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 after the transistor STR1 is turned on are the same as the operations when the abnormal sound signal with the fixed DC voltage is input as described above. Yes, and will be described briefly.

  Turning on the transistor STR1 turns on the transistor STR2, and turning on the transistor STR2 turns on the photocoupler SPC1. In the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, when the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the transistor STR3 is turned on, and when the transistor STR3 is turned on, the relay SRL1 is activated and the fifth and sixth terminals of the relay SRL1 are cut off. The state shifts to the state where the output of the woofer + signal on the woofer + signal line 888 from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off. Thus, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is shut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an abnormal sound from being generated due to an abnormal audio signal of an excessively alternating voltage that is extremely amplified and exceeds an appropriate amplification width. Therefore, an unpleasant sound can be prevented from being output to the player.

[LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 118, the liquid crystal control unit 4150a that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 on the peripheral control board 4010 includes a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b for storing various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) 4150c for controlling display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 And a character RAM 4150e to which various data stored in the character ROM 4150d are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140, and controls the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the The drawing control of the two liquid crystal display device 3252 is performed. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-progress signal, which will be described later, from the VDP 4150c, and performs an interrupt process when the output of the in-progress signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, A plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to the control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining a screen configuration in a time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured such that when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e, the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order is arranged in chronological order. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in accordance with the progress of the schedule data and various data are transferred in advance from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e is defined.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays the sprite data on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. The drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the VDP 4150c does not receive screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. Note that the VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. The “line buffer method” means that one line of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in a line buffer, and the one line of drawing data held in the line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. This is a method of outputting to the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

  The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data, and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored and affects the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. Note that the sprite data is base data which is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a unit. For example, when various people are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, data for drawing each person is called "sprite". Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, a plurality of sprites is used. In addition to the person, the house, the mountain, the road, and the like that constitute the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be one sprite. These sprites are set in a position arranged on the screen or in a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite overlapping order”), and the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device are set. 3252 is drawn.

  Note that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in, for example, 2 × 3. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be represented using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 sequentially perform main scanning for setting a display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixel from left to right as viewed from the front, and intersect with the one direction. And a sub-scan that repeats a main scan in the direction in which the scan is performed. When one line of drawing data output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input, the liquid crystal display device 1900 goes from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning. , And sequentially output to pixels of one line. When the output of one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data of the next line is input, Based on the drawing data of each minute, the data is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning.

[Control processing on main control board]
Next, an example of a control process executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly, the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main processing]
FIG. 121 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main processing performed by the main control board according to the present embodiment. When the supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes power-on processing (step S1). In the power-on process, it is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (set value at the time of the occurrence of a power failure) or not. If the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and the device settings around the CPU (normal initial setting) are executed. , Interrupt timing setting, etc.).

  When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM as backup data. If the RAM clear switch 624a for instructing the clearing of the backup data stored in the RAM in the power-on process is on, the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed. In the power-on processing, if backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed.

  In the power-on process, a process of setting the peripheral control unit 4140 to a state in which a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been started can be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 when normal initialization is performed is also performed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 of the progress of the game such as the activation of the main control board 4100 and the game state at the time of power-off. When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed or the like, the backup data is stored in the RAM, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is restored again. When supply is started, power-on processing is executed.

  When the power-on processing ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop processing for repeatedly executing each processing for the game. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S2). In the present embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by a power supply board. That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate at different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply board. Supplying equipment. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board falls below the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 is stopped is issued. Sent. Then, when the power failure notice signal is detected by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S2, a power failure occurrence process is executed (step S4).

  The processing at the time of the power failure occurs when the power supply voltage (24 V in the present embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after the power failure is restored (hereinafter, referred to as power restoration), and the operation of the gaming machine is changed from the state before the power failure. This is a process of storing the state at the time of occurrence of the power failure as backup data in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) to start. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the processing at the time of power failure occurrence is not an interrupt processing, but a branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop in accordance with the detection of the power failure notice signal. It is incorporated in the main processing (main control processing).

  By the way, when the power failure notice signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the random number updating process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S2). S3).

[Process when power failure occurs]
FIG. 122 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process when a power failure occurs according to the present embodiment. The power-off processing is a processing executed when a power failure notice signal is detected in the main processing.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt processing is not executed (step S4a). Then, a checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM before the power failure are retained when the power is restored.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power failure occurrence has been performed to a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM (Step S4c). When the above processing is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d), and enters an infinite loop to prepare for stopping power supply. In this processing, when the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a short-time power failure or the like (hereinafter, referred to as “instantaneous power failure”), the power-off processing is started, Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, in the above process, there is a possibility that it is not possible to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, a watchdog timer is provided in the main control MPU 4100a of the present embodiment, and the watchdog timer is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is updated periodically during normal processing. However, the processing starts when a power failure occurs, and the update is not performed. As a result, even when the process is started due to an instantaneous power failure and the process enters an infinite loop, the reset is performed after the elapse of a predetermined period, and the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 123 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the timer interrupt process according to the present embodiment. The timer interrupt processing is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in the present embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100.

  The main control MPU 4100a first executes a register save process (step S10), and then executes the processes of steps S11 to S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring a detection signal of the above-described switch (a gate switch, a starting port sensor, a count sensor, a general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In the present embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. In the payout operation process in step S13, a payout command for instructing payout of game balls is set in the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  In the special control process of step S14, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed on the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186 based on the progress of the game, or the special electric accessory (that is, the attacker driving mechanism 2121) is used. The opening / closing member 2106) for opening / closing the special winning opening 2103 is controlled in accordance with the processing to change the open / close state of the special winning opening 2103.

  In step S15, a normal control process including a lottery process for a winning per normal winning which is an operation trigger of the movable piece 2111 is executed. In the normal control process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs the lottery process so that the driving frequency of the movable piece 2111 becomes higher when a specific condition (time-saving flag ON) is satisfied after the big hit game state. (A so-called time-saving gaming state). In the present embodiment, the time required for the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbol is reduced for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game state, and the operation time when the movable piece 2111 operates is set to a long time. This realizes a time-short game state in which it is easier to accept game balls into the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 than in the normal state (low-probability non-time-short game state).

  In the output data setting process of the subsequent step S16, a process of outputting a status signal indicating the game status to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer or the like) and a drive signal to a special figure start storage display (not shown) And the like. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting an effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140 is performed. In the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control unit 4140 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the processing from step S11 to step S17 is performed, a register return processing (step S18) is performed, and the processing ends.

  Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the above-described random number update processing 1 (step S12) and random number update processing 2 (step S3) will be described. In the present embodiment, as a variety of random numbers used in the game, a jackpot determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state (also referred to as a jackpot determination or a jackpot lottery), and a jackpot game state is generated in the jackpot determination. A big hit symbol random number used to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to be made, a judgment whether or not to generate a small hitting game state instead of the big hit (also referred to as a small hit determination, a small hit lottery) ), A random number for a small hit symbol used to determine a stop symbol of a special symbol when it is determined that a small hit game state is generated in the small hit determination, a big hit lottery and a small hit A reach determination random number used for determination (reach determination) as to whether or not to perform a high expectation effect such as a reach effect when it is determined that a hit is not achieved in a lottery; Variation display pattern random number (variation time random number) used to determine the variation display pattern (variation time etc.) of the special symbol displayed on the separate symbol display 1185, 1186, a big hit (small hit) game (special bonus) A random number for round determination used to determine the opening mode (such as the number of rounds) of the special winning opening 2103 in the game, and the movable piece 2111 that opens and closes the special winning opening 2101b is opened (the upper end is clockwise around the lower end). There is an ordinary hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to perform control (a state of being in a rotated position) (an ordinary lottery hit determination).

  The random number for the jackpot symbol is also provided for the determination of the jackpot state type (whether or not to activate the time-saving function) performed when it is determined that the jackpot has been won.

  Among these random numbers, in the random number update processing 1, the big hit (small hit) determination random number, the big hit (small hit) design random number, the round determining random number, and the movable piece 2111 related to the big hit (small hit) lottery are opened. The random number for ordinary symbol hit determination related to whether or not to control is updated. That is, the random number used for the determination regarding the big hit (small hit) lottery and the opening / closing control of the movable piece 2111 is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, the probability (probability of determining to generate a big hit (small hit) gaming state, probability of determining to control the movable piece 2111 to the open state) in each random number in a predetermined period is made constant. This can prevent the player from being disadvantaged. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the reach determination random number and the variation display pattern random number which are not related to the big hit (small hit) lottery and the normal lottery are updated.

[Special control processing]
Next, the special control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special control process according to the present embodiment.

  In this special control process, first, the first and second starting opening winning process (step S110) is performed. In the first and second starting opening winning processing, determination is made as to whether or not a game ball has won the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102. Then, after the first and second start opening winning processing (Step S110) is performed, the second special symbol control processing (Step S14b) in which the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is controlled, and the first special symbol controlling processing (Step S14b). The first special symbol control process (step S14a) in which the progress of the game on the symbol side is controlled is sequentially performed. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game on the first special symbol side (the first special symbol) and the game on the second special symbol side (the second special symbol) can be simultaneously changed, Thus, even when the symbol change on one side starts, the symbol change on the other side does not stop.

[First and second starting opening winning process]
Next, the first and second starting opening winning processing (the processing of step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing an example of the first and second start-up winning processing according to this embodiment.

  In the first and second starting opening winning processing (step S110), the processing for determining whether or not a game ball has been won in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, On the condition that it is determined that there is a special symbol, a process for updating the holding state of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is performed.

  Therefore, main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a detection signal has been output from second starting port sensor 3132. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal has been output from the second starting port sensor 3132, it is determined that a game ball has been awarded to the second starting port 2102 (YES in step S201), and then Step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second special symbol lottery (eg, a jackpot determination random number, a jackpot symbol random number, etc.) are acquired, and the second random number is provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). A determination is made as to whether the value of the number-of-suspended counter is less than 1, which is the upper limit. If the second hold number counter is less than 1 (the second hold number counter is 0), the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data (the random number for the jackpot determination, the symbol for the jackpot symbol) acquired by the game ball winning in the second starting port 2102 as the second start hold storage process (step S203). Random numbers, etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while associating them with the types of special symbols and the order of suspension. Next, as the hold history update processing (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM.

  In the process of step S203, a prize notification command indicating that a game ball has been awarded to the second starting port 2102 (more precisely, the type of special symbols and the order of holding) is set. The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, through the control of the peripheral control unit 4140, when the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like performs the hold display on the side of the second start port 2102, this can be promptly updated.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S201, when it is determined that the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 3132 is not output, or in the process of step S202, the value of the second pending number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the value is 1, next, as a process of step S205, a determination is made as to whether or not a detection signal has been output from the first starting port sensor 3131. Then, as a result, when it is determined that the detection signal has been output from the first starting port sensor 3131, it is determined that a game ball has been awarded to the first starting port 2101 (YES in step S205). Then, the process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first jackpot lottery (eg, a jackpot determination random number, a jackpot symbol random number, etc.) are obtained, and the value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is set to the upper limit. A determination is made as to whether or not the value is less than 4. As a result, if the first hold number counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a firstly performs, as the first start hold storing process (step S207), various data (the random number for the jackpot determination and the random number for the jackpot symbol) acquired by the game ball winning the first start port 2101. Etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while associating them with the types of special symbols and the order of suspension. Next, as a hold history update process (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM.

  In the process of step S207, a prize notification command indicating that a game ball has been awarded to the first starting port 2101 (more precisely, the type of special symbols and the order of holding) is set. The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). With such a configuration, through the control of the peripheral control unit 4140, even when the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like performs the hold display on the first start port 2101 side, the display can be quickly updated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of step S205 that no game ball has been won in the first starting port 2101, or in the processing of step S206, the counter value of the first pending number counter becomes the upper limit value. If it is determined that the number has reached 4, the first and second start-up winning processing is terminated at this time.

  In the present embodiment, after the winning process for the second starting port 2102 (steps S201 to S204) is executed, the winning process for the first starting port 2101 (steps S205 to S208) is executed. . However, instead of this, a mode in which a winning process to the second starting port 2102 is executed after a winning process to the first starting port 2101 may be executed.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a may execute a preceding determination process based on the obtained various random numbers and transmit a command indicating the result of the preceding determination process to the peripheral control unit 4140 as a winning notification command. The precedence determination process is performed prior to a lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, a jackpot lottery, a probable variation lottery, and a determination of a variable display pattern, which will be described later), and the lottery result is determined in advance It is. The precedence determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the precedence determination table. The precedence determination table is a table similar to the table used for the lottery using the random numbers. In the precedence determination process, by comparing the random number with the precedence determination table, a lottery result when a lottery using the random number is performed (whether or not a big hit (small hit), a big hit type, a variation display pattern) Etc.) (the determination made prior to the lottery is also referred to as “prefetch determination”). The peripheral control unit 4140 may realize an effect reflecting the received prize notification command (preceding determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed (such an effect is “read ahead”. Direction).

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the contents of the preceding determination table are the same as the contents of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the contents of the preceding determination table may be different from the contents of the table used for the lottery.

  Hereinafter, a first special symbol control process in which the progress of the game on the first special symbol side is controlled (step S14a), and a second special symbol control process in which the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is controlled (step S14b) A detailed procedure for each will be described. Here, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol control process (step S14a) will be described first, unlike the control execution procedure.

[1st special symbol control process]
Next, the first special symbol control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special symbol control process on the first special symbol side according to the present embodiment. In the first special symbol control process, the above-described first and second start opening winning process (FIG. 125) and the second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) described later are executed in the above-described special control process (FIG. 124). This is a process executed later.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the interlock flag on the first special symbol side is on (step S100a). The interlock flag of the first special symbol is a flag that is set to ON when the game of the first special symbol is to be interlocked with the game of the second special symbol.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a control structure in which a game on the first special symbol side and a game on the second special symbol side can simultaneously proceed. In such a control structure, there is a fear that a big hit game (small hit game) may occur between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side. To avoid this, when a big hit (small hit) is obtained in one game, an interlocking flag indicating that the progress of the other game is controlled irrespective of the processing flag is turned on. Therefore, the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is set to the ON state when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (small hit) in a second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) described later.

  When the interlock flag of the first special symbol is on (YES in step S100a), the main control MPU 4100a does not perform the processing (steps S130a to S200a) according to the first processing flag, and One interlock setting process is executed (step S250a). The details of the first linkage setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the interlock flag of the first special symbol is in the off state in the process of step S100a (NO in step S100a), the main control MPU 4100a performs the original game of the first special symbol. Assuming that the progress is allowed, the state of the first processing flag indicating the progress of the game on the first special symbol side is confirmed. Then, the main control MPU 4100a selectively selects a process that matches the state of the first process flag (the progress of the game on the first special symbol side) among a plurality of processes (steps S130a to S200a) shown in the figure. Since the game is executed, the game on the first special symbol side is appropriately advanced.

  More specifically, main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the first processing flag is 0 (step S120a). If the first processing flag is 0 (YES in step S120a), A 1 change start process (step S130a) is executed. In the first change start process (step S130a), after setting for starting change display of the first special symbol based on the result of the winning first special symbol lottery (first special determination) and the like is performed, The one processing flag is updated to “1”.

  On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first processing flag is 1 (step S140a). Then, as a result, if the first processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140a), the first variation pattern setting processing (step S150a) is executed. In the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a), the variation pattern of the first special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 (the first special symbol (identification) on the first special symbol display 1185). The first processing flag is updated to "2" after the variable time of the symbol (variable time from the start of the variable display to the stop display) is determined.

  On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first processing flag is 2 (step S160a). Then, as a result, if the first processing flag is 2 (YES in step S160a), the first variation processing (step S170a) is executed. In this first variation process, the variation time set in the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a) is monitored by a timer, and based on the timeout, the first special symbol display 1185 displays the first special symbol display. Stop the fluctuation display. Then, after this, when it is determined in the first change start process (step S130a) that a big hit has been won, an interlocking flag for linking the game on the second special symbol side to the game on the first special symbol side is set. After the ON state, the first processing flag is updated to “3” to start the big hit game. However, if the winning is not achieved (losing), the first processing flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interruption process, the process is restarted from the first variation start process (step S130a).

  On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S160a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first processing flag is 3 (step S180a). Then, as a result, if the first processing flag is 3 (YES in step S180a), a first big hit game start process (step S190a) for creating an interval period before starting the big hit game is executed. When the interval period before starting the big hit game has elapsed, the first processing flag is updated to “4” in the first big hit game start processing.

  On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S180a), the main control MPU 4100a executes the first big hit game start processing (step S200a). In the first big hit game start process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game, is operated or the time saving function is stopped. Then, after the preparation for starting the big hit game is completed, the first processing flag is updated to “4”.

  On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S180a), the main control MPU 4100a determines that the first processing flag is 4 and executes the first big hit game processing (step S200a). In the first jackpot game process, the mode of the jackpot game (the number of rounds, the opening time, the maximum number of winnings, etc.) is set, and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled based on the set jackpot game mode. . When the big hit game ends, a process for stopping the operation of the condition device is performed, and then the process flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interruption process, the process is restarted from the first variation start process (step S130a).

  As described above, in the process of step S100a, if the interlock flag indicating that the game on the first special symbol side should be interlocked with the game on the second special symbol side is in the off state, When any one of S130a, S150a, S170a, S190a, and S200a is selectively executed based on the state of the first processing flag, the first special control processing in the interrupt processing is Will be terminated.

  Hereinafter, the first variation start process (Step S130a), the first variation pattern setting process (Step S150a), the first variation process (Step S170a), the first big hit game start process (Step S190a), the first big hit game process ( The detailed procedure of each process of step S200a) and the first linkage setting process (step S250a) will be described separately.

[First fluctuation start processing]
First, the first variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first change start process according to the present embodiment. The first variation start process is executed when the first process flag is “0” in the first special symbol control process (FIG. 126).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not there is a lottery process of the first special symbol in a suspended state based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter as the process of step S301a. I do. If it is determined that there is no lottery process for the first special symbol in the suspended state based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter (YES in step S301a), the process in the interrupt process is not performed. The first change start process is temporarily ended. That is, in this case, every time the above-described interrupt processing is performed, in the processing of step S301a, it is determined whether or not there is a lottery processing of the first special symbol in the suspended state. Until it is determined that there is a first special symbol lottery process, the progress of the game on the first special symbol side is substantially in a standby state.

  On the other hand, if the main control MPU 4100a determines in the processing of step S301a that there is a lottery processing of the first special symbol in a suspended state (NO in step S301a), then the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to step S302a. As a process, it is determined whether or not the ST count is 0. The number of STs is the number of times of the lottery process (the number of times the special symbol has been changed) in which the winning probability of the big hit is a high probability (probable change state), and is set at the end of the big hit game in a first big hit game process (FIG. 131) described later. . In the present embodiment, 70 times are given as the number of STs after the end of all the big hit games. The details of the type of big hit will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the number of STs is not 0 (NO in step S302a), main control MPU 4100a updates the number of STs by 1 as a process in step S303a. On the other hand, if the ST count is 0 (YES in step S302a), the process proceeds to step S304a without performing the process in step S303a.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a, as the processing of Step S304a, performs a random number group (for example, the first hitting) related to the lottery processing of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. The random number group stored in the earliest storage area among the determination random number, the first symbol random number, the first reach random number, and the first variable random number is read from the RAM 4100e. Next, as a process of step S305a, a random number group (first hit determination random number) stored in each storage area of the first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100e of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. , A first symbol random number, a first reach random number, a first variable random number) in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) manner.

  More specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with the occurrence of a start winning prize in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, if a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. Thereby, the order in which the fluctuation display control of the first special symbol is suspended is stored so as to be specified, and the suspension of the fluctuation display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a counts down the first special hold number counter and performs the lottery process (the first hit count) based on the read first random number for random determination as steps S306a and S307a. 1 special symbol lottery). In the lottery process for the above hit, a lottery is performed to determine whether to make a big hit or not to make a big hit based on the random number for the first hit determination. The process of determining the big hit symbol, that is, the type of big hit, based on the first symbol random number is executed.

  Here, in the first special symbol lottery according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), when the jackpot probability state is the normal state (low probability non-time saving state), the jackpot with a probability of 1/399. Is set so that if the winning probability state of the jackpot is a probable change state (high probability state), the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/45.

  When the first special symbol lottery is performed (step S307a), the main control MPU 4100a sets a flag indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery and a winning information command as the process of step S308a. I do. At this time, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol lottery is also determined. Then, thereafter, as the process of step S309a, the process ends when the first process flag is updated to "1" so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a).

  It should be noted that the result of the first special symbol lottery obtained in the first variation start process is determined as the winning information command set in the process of step S308a by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Section 4140.

[First variation pattern setting process]
Next, a first variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the first special symbol is set based on the result of the first special symbol lottery (step S307a) and the like will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first variation pattern setting process according to the present embodiment.

  In the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a) executed when the first process flag is “1”, as shown in FIG. 128, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has won a big hit. If the flag indicating that the big hit has been set (YES in step S401a), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the big hit according to the game state is selected (step S402a), and the flag state indicating that the big hit has not been won is set. If there is (NO in step S401a), a variation pattern table at the time of loss is selected (step S403a).

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines a variation pattern by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the first variation random number read in step S304a in the first variation start process (step S404a), and determines the determined variation pattern. Of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is set (step S405a). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern in the first fluctuation timer (Step S406a). Thus, the variation control is performed by the first special symbol display 1185 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 for the variation time determined in this way. Then, thereafter, as the process of step S407a, the process ends when the first process flag is updated to "2" so that the process shifts to the first process during variation (step S170a).

  The variation pattern set in the first variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 as the variation pattern command set in the process of step S405a. Is done. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the result of the big hit lottery is indicated based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the winning information command through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side. The display effect is performed.

  Note that among the fluctuation pattern tables used in the processing of steps S402a and S403a, the fluctuation pattern tables used in the normal game state (normal mode) and the high-precision time-short game state (rush preparation mode) include liquid crystal display. A plurality of variation patterns (variation times) for enlivening a display effect in the device 1900 are stored. In these fluctuation patterns, effects (including reach effects) that differ in the degree of expectation of "winning" are set, and in the process of step S405a, any of the fluctuation patterns is selectively determined. It becomes. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern table used in the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode), the shortened fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) is always selected. Details of the setting of the fluctuation time will be described later with reference to FIG.

[First fluctuation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the first changing process (step S170a) executed when the first process flag is “2” will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first changing process of the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether the value of the first variation timer set in the process of step S406a in the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a) has become 0 as the process of step S501a, A determination is made as to whether or not the determined fluctuation time has elapsed. As a result, as long as the first fluctuation timer is not 0, that is, as long as it is determined that the set fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in step S501a), the first fluctuation processing (step S170a) is performed. Each time the process is performed, the first variable timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S521a.

  As a result of such processing, when it is determined in the processing of step S501a that the first fluctuation timer has become 0, that is, when it is determined that the set fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S501a). ), The main control MPU 4100a displays, on the first special symbol display 1185, a stopped symbol (stop symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol lottery) which has been determined as the process of step S502a and step S503a. The display control for terminating the variable display is thereby performed, and the first fixed stop command for instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol in accordance with the stop symbol of the first special symbol is issued. This is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140. The first confirmation stop command thus set is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect of the display effect is definitely displayed through the later-described control by the peripheral control unit 4140.

  After the process related to the symbol stop is performed in this manner, the process is terminated when various processes corresponding to the result of the first special symbol lottery are executed.

  When the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (YES in step S504a), the main control MPU 4100a sets the second special symbol side in order to avoid the occurrence of a double hit on the second special symbol side. The interlock flag of the second special symbol, which indicates that the game is to be interlocked with the game of the first special symbol, is turned on (step S505a). In addition, the probability change flag indicating that the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in the high probability state (probability change state) is turned off (step S506a). Then, thereafter, when the first processing flag is updated to “3” in order to start the big hit game (step S507a), this processing ends.

  By performing such control, the end interval of the big hit game ends and the interlock flag of the second special symbol is turned off (the first big hit game process (FIG. 131) described later). In step S726a), the game on the second special symbol side is stopped in conjunction with the game on the first special symbol side, or the current state is maintained, regardless of the second processing flag.

  On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss (NO in step S504a), the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the probability change flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 is on. A determination is made (step S511a). The probability change flag is set to the ON state when the winning probability of the jackpot is changed from the normal probability (normal state) to the high probability (probability change state). Since the change of the jackpot winning probability is triggered by the occurrence of a jackpot, the probability change flag is set at the end of the jackpot game in a first jackpot game process (FIG. 131) described later.

  Then, when the probability change flag is in the ON state (YES in step S511a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the ST count is 0 (step S512a). If the ST count is 0 (YES in step S512a), it is determined that the probable change state has ended, and the probable change flag is set to the off state (step S513a).

  On the other hand, when the probable change flag is in the OFF state (NO in step S511a), main control MPU 4100a proceeds to the process in step S514a. If the number of STs is not 0 even when the probable change flag is on (NO in step S512a), the probable change state is continued, so that the on state of the probable change flag is maintained and the process proceeds to step S514a. .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time saving function is operating as the process of Step S514a (Step S514a). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag provided in RAM 4100e of main control board 4100 is in an ON state. The time-saving flag is set to the ON state when the time-saving function is operated in a time-saving function setting process (step S725a) of a first big hit game process (FIG. 131) described later.

  Then, when the time saving function is operating (YES in step S514a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether to stop the time saving function (step S515a). In the present embodiment, the time saving function is provided together with the certainty changing function when the first big hit A occurs, and operates while the certainty changing function is continued. Therefore, it is determined that the time saving function is to be stopped when the probable change flag is off, and it is determined that the operation of the time reduction function is to be continued when the probable change flag is on.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a stops the time saving function when the probability change flag is set to the off state in the processing of the above-described step S513a, assuming that the condition for terminating the time saving gaming state is satisfied (step S516a). After the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this manner, the special symbol is stopped to fluctuate so as to indicate a loss, and it is determined that the special symbol is in the processing stage in which the special symbol has been reserved and the first processing flag is set to “ "0" (step S517a), and this process ends. Thereby, when the next interruption control is performed, the next variation related to the first special symbol is performed.

[First big hit game start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the first big hit game start process (step S190a) executed when the first process flag is “3” will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of the first big hit game start process of the present embodiment.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the timer (first big hit start interval timer) for counting the interval before the start of the big hit game is set as the process of step S601a. As a result, if the first big hit start interval timer has not been set yet (NO in step S601a), as a process in step S602a, the condition device is operated (the attacker device 2100 is not opened and closed, but the attacker device is not operated). A condition for enabling the opening / closing operation of the apparatus 2100 is satisfied), and if the time saving function is operating (YES in step S603a) as the processing in step S603a and step S604a, the operation is stopped. Let it. That is, after such preparation is completed, the first big hit start interval timer is set as the processing of steps S605a and S606a and the first big hit interval start command is set in order to start the interval before the start of the big hit game. This process is temporarily terminated.

  Note that the first big hit interval start command set in the process of step S606a is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a display effect during the interval before the start of the big hit game appears through the later-described control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the first big hit start interval timer is set in this way, each time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the first big hit start interval timer has been set in the process of step S601a ( In step S601a, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first big hit start interval timer is 0 in the process of the next step S611a, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game elapses. A determination is made as to whether or not this has been done. In the process of step S611a, the first big hit start interval timer is not 0, that is, as long as it is determined that the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game has not elapsed (NO in step S611a). ), Every time the first big hit game start processing (step S190a) is performed, the first big hit start interval timer is decremented by one as the processing of step S621a.

  Then, as a result of performing such processing, in the processing of step S611a, it is determined that the first big hit start interval timer has become 0, that is, that the time set as the pre-big hit game start interval has elapsed. At this time (YES in step S611a), main control MPU 4100a updates the first processing flag to “4” to execute the jackpot game (step S612a), and ends this processing.

  The length of the first big hit start interval timer can be set according to the type of the big hit symbol (the type determined by the first symbol random number).

[First big hit game process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the first big hit game process (step S200a) executed when the first process flag is “4” will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first big hit game process of the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the first big hit game execution flag indicating that the control related to the execution of the big hit game is already in progress is a process of step S701a. The first big hit game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100, is set to an on state in a process of a step S703a described later at the start of the first big hit game, and is turned off in a process of a step S723a described later at the end of the first big hit game. Is set.

  If the first big hit game execution flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S701a), the main control MPU 4100a performs the process of step S702a to start the control related to the execution of the big hit game using the attacker device 2100. Is set according to the type of jackpot (the number of rounds, the opening time of each round, the maximum number of winnings in each round). The details of the opening mode according to the type of the big hit will be described later with reference to FIG. 146 (C).

  After the execution mode of the jackpot game is set in this manner, the main control MPU 4100a performs the first jackpot game execution indicating that the control relating to the execution of the jackpot game is already in progress as the processing of steps S703a and S704a. When the flag is turned on and the first big hit start command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

  That is, after the first big hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, each time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the control related to the execution of the big hit game is already in progress ( In step S701a, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the set number of rounds has been exhausted, as processing in the next step S711a. In the process of step S711a, as long as it is determined that the set number of rounds has not yet been exhausted, that is, it is determined that the control of the execution of the big hit game is in the middle of the process (NO in step S711a). Each time the first big hit game process (step S200a) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a executes control according to the set opening pattern as the process of step S712a. Accordingly, every time the above-described interrupt processing is performed (every 4 ms), the movement (including the interval between rounds) concerning the opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2106 is updated (managed) through the processing of step S712a. Eventually, a big hit game in which the attacker device 2100 opens and closes with an opening pattern according to the type of big hit is realized.

  Then, while such control is being performed, in the process of step S711a, when the set round number has been consumed, that is, when it is determined that all the controls related to the execution of the big hit game are completed. (YES in step S711a), the main control MPU 4100a performs processes (step S721a, step S722a, step S731a, step S741a, and step S742a) for generating a jackpot game end interval.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the timer for measuring the big hit game end interval (first big hit end interval timer) has been set (step S721a). Then, as a result, if the first big hit end interval timer has not been set yet (NO in step S721a), the first big hit end interval is set as the processing of steps S741a and S742a to start the big hit game end interval. When the timer is set and the first big hit interval end command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

  The first big hit interval end command set in the process of step S742a is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a display effect during the end interval of the big hit game appears through the later-described control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the first big hit end interval timer is set in this way, every time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the first big hit end interval timer has been set in the process of step S721a ( In step S721a, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first big hit end interval timer is 0, that is, the time set as the big hit game end interval elapses in the next step S722a. A determination is made as to whether or not this has been done. In the process of step S722a, the first big hit end interval timer is not 0, that is, as long as it is determined that the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game has not elapsed (NO in step S722a). Each time the first big hit game process (step S200a) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a subtracts 1 from the first big hit end interval timer as the process of step S731a.

  As a result of such processing, when it is determined in the processing of step S722a that the first big hit end interval timer has become 0, that is, that the time set as the big hit game end interval has elapsed. (YES in step S722a), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (steps S723a to S728a) for ending the big hit game.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a firstly turns off the first big hit game execution flag indicating that the control for the execution of the big hit game is already in progress as the process of step S723a. Then, as a process of step S724a, the probability change flag indicating that the big hit winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in the high probability state (probable variation state) is turned on, and the number of times of the special symbol lottery to be in the high probability state ( (ST times) is set to 70 times. Here, the probability change flag that has been turned on is turned off when the ST count has been exhausted (step S513a) or when a big hit has occurred before the digestion (step S506a).

  In the present embodiment, the probability change function is operated for all jackpots. However, when the probability change function is not operated or not depending on the type of the jackpot, a time saving function setting process described later (step S725a) As described above, a process of first determining whether or not a big hit that activates the probability change function may be executed. Then, in the case of a jackpot to activate the probability change function, the main control MPU 4100a operates the probability change flag to the ON state and sets the number of STs as in the process of step S724a. Further, in the case of a big hit in which the probability change function is operated until the next big hit, the main control MPU 4100a only needs to set the probability change flag to the ON state and does not need to set the number of STs.

  Next, as a step S725a, the main control MPU 4100a executes a time saving function setting process for setting whether or not to activate the time saving function according to the type of the big hit and the gaming state. The details of the time saving function setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the processing related to the probability change function and the time saving function is performed, the main control MPU 4100a sets the second special symbol side in consideration of the possibility that the big hit game is not duplicated on the second special symbol side. The above-mentioned interlocking flag indicating that the game is to be interlocked with the game of the first special symbol is turned off (step S726a). Thereafter, the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S727a), and the first processing flag is updated to "0" assuming that the first special symbol that has become the current big hit is in the processing stage of being held off (step S728a). ), This process ends. Thereby, when the next interruption control is performed, the next variation related to the first special symbol is performed.

  According to such a jackpot game process, the corresponding jackpot 2103 is opened until the round game reaches the maximum number of rounds in the process of step 711a according to the type of the jackpot. The game is repeatedly opened in step S712a), and the player can acquire prize balls according to the type of the big hit.

[Time saving function setting process]
Next, the time saving function setting process (step S725a) of the above-described first big hit game process (FIG. 131) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the time saving function setting process according to the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the current big hit is a big hit for activating the time-saving function according to the type of the big hit (step S751). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (C) described later, the time-saving function is provided only when the big hit of the symbol A (the first big hit A) is won in the first special symbol lottery.

  Then, when it is a big hit to activate the time saving function (YES in step S751), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the current game mode is the rush mode (step S752). The rush mode in the present embodiment indicates a game state in which the probability change function operates and the time reduction function does not operate (high-precision non-time reduction game state). Therefore, specifically, it is determined whether or not the probable change flag is on and the time reduction flag is off.

  If the current game mode is not the rush mode (high-precision non-time saving game state) (NO in step S752), main control MPU 4100a operates the time reduction flag to turn on the time reduction function (step S753). . After that, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the current big hit is not a big hit that activates the time saving function (NO in step S751), the main control MPU 4100a ends this processing without operating the time saving flag. Also, when the current big hit is a big hit for activating the time saving function and the current game mode is the rush mode (highly accurate non-time saving game state) (YES in step S752), the time saving flag is not operated. This processing ends. Here, the time saving flag is set to an off state when the big hit game is started by the processing of steps S603a and S604a of the first big hit game start processing (FIG. 130) described above.

  Therefore, when the current game mode is the rush mode (high-precision non-time saving game state), even if the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (first big hit A) that activates the time saving function, the time saving function is not performed. It will not be activated. In this embodiment, a game state (rush mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a game state (rush preparation mode) in which the time reduction function is activated by not operating the time reduction function that is generally considered to be advantageous to the player is provided. It is characterized by the following.

[First interlock setting process]
Next, the first interlock setting process (step S250a) of the first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first linkage setting process according to the present embodiment.

  In the first interlocking setting process, when a big hit or a small hit is derived in the game on the second special symbol side, the game on the first special symbol side is controlled to interlock with the game on the second special symbol side.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the first special symbol is changing (Step S1001a).

  If the first special symbol is changing (YES in step S1001a), the main control MPU 4100a has already determined in the first special symbol lottery (step S307a) of the first change start process (FIG. 127). The stop symbol is set to a predetermined loss symbol (step S1002a).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs display control for terminating the variable display by displaying the set loss symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 (step S1003a). Also, a first fixed stop command for instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S1004a). . The processing in steps S1003a and S1004a is the same as steps S502a and S503a performed when the fluctuation time has elapsed in the above-described first fluctuation processing (FIG. 129).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a performs processing similar to the processing of steps S511a to S517a executed when the first special symbol is lost in the above-described first changing processing (FIG. 129) by the processing of steps S1005a to S1011a. After the execution, the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1001a), the main control MPU 4100a continues the current state of the first special symbol (that is, the state where the first special symbol does not change). (Step S1021a), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the first interlocking setting process, when a large hit or a small hit is derived by the change of the second special symbol (when the first interlock flag is on), the changing first special symbol is forcibly set. To stop with a losing symbol. Further, the first special symbol that is not fluctuating is brought into a standby state in which fluctuation is not started until the first interlocking flag is turned off. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a collision between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side.

  In the present embodiment, the first interlocking flag is set to ON at the timing when the changing time of the second special symbol ends in the process of step S505b of the second changing process (FIG. 137), and the first interlocking setting process is performed. The stop symbol determined in the hit determination process (step S307a) of the first variation start process (FIG. 127) is changed to a lost symbol, but is not limited to this. The first interlocking flag may be set to ON at the timing when the change starts according to the gaming state. For example, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode), the first interlocking flag is turned on when a large hit or a small hit is derived in the hit determination processing (step S307b) of the second change start processing (FIG. 135). To set. When the hit determination process (step S307a) of the first variation start process (FIG. 127) is performed during the variation in which the second big hit is derived, the random determination is performed without using the first hit determination random number. You may decide to determine a missing symbol. With this, the shift of the first special symbol executed during the change of the second special symbol from which the big hit is derived is determined at the start of the change, so that the process at the change end timing of the second special symbol is simplified. can do.

  Further, as a modified example of the first interlocking setting process of the present embodiment, a standby state in which the fluctuating state is maintained even when the first special symbol is fluctuating may be created. In this case, when the big hit is derived by the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the loss is forcibly controlled, and the player loses the chance of obtaining the first big hit which should be originally obtained. Gone.

  Next, detailed procedures of the second special symbol control process (step S14b) in which the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is controlled will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Note that the second special symbol control process may be performed by using the same program as in the case of performing the above-described first special symbol control process and changing various values referred to in the program.

[Second special symbol control process]
The second special symbol control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special symbol control process on the second special symbol side according to the present embodiment.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the interlock flag on the second special symbol side is on (step S100b). The interlock flag of the second special symbol is a flag that is set to an on state when the game on the second special symbol side is to be interlocked with the game on the first special symbol side.

  That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a control structure in which the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side can simultaneously proceed. In such a control structure, there is a concern that a big hit game (small hit game) may overlap between a game on the first special symbol side and a game on the second special symbol side. Therefore, when a big hit (small hit) is obtained in one game, an interlocking flag indicating that the progress of the game on the other side is controlled regardless of the processing flag is turned on at that time. ing. Here, the interlock flag of the second special symbol is set to the ON state when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit in the above-described first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) (step S505a).

  When the interlock flag of the second special symbol is on (YES in step S100b), main control MPU 4100a does not perform any processing (steps S130b to S240b) according to the second processing flag. Then, the second interlock setting process is executed (step S250b). The details of the second linkage setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the interlock flag of the second special symbol is in the off state (NO in step S100b) in the process of step S100b, the main control MPU 4100a originally performs the game of the second special symbol. It is determined that the game state is such that the progress of the game is permitted, and the state of the second processing flag indicating the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is confirmed. Then, the main control MPU 4100a, among the plurality of processes (steps S130b to S240b) shown in the figure, the process that matches the state of the second process flag (the progress of the game on the second special symbol side) thus confirmed. Is selectively executed, so that the game on the second special symbol side proceeds properly.

  More specifically, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the second processing flag is 0 (step S120b). If the second processing flag is 0 (YES in step S120b), the 2 A change start process (step S130b) is executed. In the second change start process (step S130b), after setting for starting change display of the second special symbol is performed based on the result of the winning second special symbol lottery (second special determination) and the like, The second processing flag is updated to “1”.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120b), it is determined whether the second processing flag is 1 (step S140b). Then, as a result, if the second processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140b), the second variation pattern setting processing (step S150b) is executed. In the second variation pattern setting process (step S150b), the variation pattern of the second special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 (the second special symbol (identification) on the second special symbol display 1186). (Variation time from the start of the variable display of the symbol) to the stop display) is determined, and then the second processing flag is updated to “2”.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second processing flag is 2 (step S160b). Then, as a result, if the second processing flag is 2 (YES in step S160b), the second fluctuation processing (step S170b) is executed. In the second variation process, the variation time set in the second variation pattern setting process (step S150b) is monitored by the timer, and based on the timeout, the second special symbol display 1186 displays the second special symbol display. Stop the fluctuation display. Then, after this, when it is determined in the second variation start processing (step S130b) that a big hit has been won, an interlocking flag for linking the game on the first special symbol side to the game on the second special symbol side is set. After the ON state, the second processing flag is updated to “3” to start the big hit game. When it is determined that the small hit has been won, the small hit game is started after the link lag for linking the game on the first special symbol with the game on the second special symbol is turned on. In this case, the second processing flag is updated to “5”. However, if neither the small hit nor the big hit is won (loss), the second processing flag is updated to “0”. As a result, the current fluctuation is completed, and in the next interrupt processing, the second fluctuation start processing (step S130b) is executed.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S160b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second processing flag is 3 (step S180b). Then, as a result, if the second processing flag is 3 (YES in step S180b), the second big hit game start processing (step S190b) is executed. In the second big hit game start process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game, is operated or the time saving function is stopped. Then, after the preparation for starting the big hit game is completed, the second processing flag is updated to “4”.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S180b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second processing flag is 4 (step S200b). Then, as a result, if the second processing flag is 4 (YES in step S200b), the second big hit game processing (step S210b) is executed. In the second jackpot game process, the mode of the jackpot game (the number of rounds, the opening time, the maximum number of winnings, etc.) is set, and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled based on the set jackpot game mode. In addition, when the big hit game ends, the processing of stopping the operation of the condition device is performed, and then the second processing flag is updated to “0”. As a result, the current fluctuation is completed, and in the next interrupt processing, the second fluctuation start processing (step S130b) is executed.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S200b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second processing flag is 5 (step S220b). Then, as a result, if the second processing flag is 5 (YES in step S220b), a second small hitting game start process (step S230b) for creating an interval period before starting the small hitting game is executed. When the interval period before starting the small hitting game has elapsed, the second processing flag is updated to “6” in the second small hitting game start processing.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 5 (NO in step S220b), the main control MPU 4100a determines that the second processing flag is 6, and executes the second small hitting game processing (step S240b). In the second small hitting game process, a small hitting game in which the opening / closing member 2106 is opened / closed in a control manner according to the type of the small hitting is performed. When the small hitting game ends, the second processing flag is updated to “0”. As a result, the current fluctuation is completed, and in the next interrupt processing, the second fluctuation start processing (step S130b) is executed.

  As described above, in the process of step S100b, if the link flag indicating that the game on the second special symbol side should be linked with the game on the first special symbol side is in the off state, At the point in time when any one of S130b, step S150b, step S170b, step S190b, step S210b, step S230b, and step S240b is selectively executed based on the state of the second processing flag, the interrupt processing is executed. The second special control process ends.

  Hereinafter, the second variation start process (Step S130b), the second variation pattern setting process (Step S150b), the second variation process (Step S170b), the second big hit game start process (Step S190b), the second big hit game process (Step S190b) Steps S210b), the second small hitting game start process (step S230b), the second small hitting game process (step S240b), and the second interlocking setting process (step S250b) are described in detail. Each will be described.

[Second fluctuation start processing]
First, the second change start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second change start process according to the present embodiment. The second variation start process is executed when the second process flag is “0” in the above-described second special symbol control process (FIG. 134).

  First, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not there is a lottery process of the second special symbol in a suspended state based on the counter value of the second special reserved number counter as the process of step S301b. When it is determined that there is no lottery process for the second special symbol in the suspended state based on the counter value of the second special reserved number counter (YES in step S301b), the process in the interrupt process is not performed. The second change start process is temporarily ended. That is, in this case, each time the above-described interrupt processing is performed, it is determined in the processing of step S301b whether or not there is a lottery processing of the second special symbol in a suspended state. Until it is determined that there is a second special symbol lottery process, the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is substantially in a standby state.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 4100a determines in the process of step S301b that there is a lottery process of the second special symbol in a suspended state (NO in step S301b), the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to step S302b. As a process, it is determined whether or not the ST count is 0. The number of STs is the number of times of the lottery process (the number of times the special symbol changes) that makes the winning probability of the big hit a high probability (probable change state), and is set at the end of the big hit game in a second big hit game process (FIG. 139) described later. . In the present embodiment, 70 times are given as the number of STs after the end of all the big hit games. The details of the type of big hit will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the number of STs is not 0 (NO in step S302b), main control MPU 4100a updates the number of STs by 1 as a process in step S303b. On the other hand, if the ST count is 0 (YES in step S302b), the process shifts to step S304b without performing step S303b.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a, as the processing of Step S304b, performs a random number group (for example, the second hitting pattern) related to the lottery processing of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. The random number group stored in the earliest storage area among the judgment random number, the second symbol random number, the second reach random number, and the second variable random number) is read from the RAM 4100e. Next, as a process in step S305b, a random number group (second hit random number) related to the second special symbol lottery process stored in each storage area of the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. , A second symbol random number, a second reach random number, a second variable random number) in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  More specifically, the second special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, if a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. Thereby, the order in which the fluctuation display control of the second special symbol has been suspended is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become. In the present embodiment, only the first area (digestion area) of the second special symbol holding storage area is valid. That is, the variable display control of the second special symbol according to the present embodiment stores the random number extracted according to the subsequently generated start winning prize unless the second special symbol corresponding to the previously generated starting prize has changed. It will not be done.

  Then, after that, the main control MPU 4100a counts down the second special hold number counter and performs the lottery process (the second process) based on the read second random number for random determination as the processes of steps S306b and S307b. 2 special symbol lottery). In the lottery process for the above-mentioned hit, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to make a big hit and whether to make a small hit based on the random number for the second hit determination. The process of determining the big hit symbol, that is, the type of big hit, based on the second symbol random number is executed.

  Here, in the second special symbol lottery according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), when the winning probability state is the normal state, a big hit is won with a probability of 1/399, and the winning probability state is changed. In the case of the state (high probability state), it is set to win the jackpot with a probability of 1/45. When the winning probability state is the normal state, the small hit is won with a probability of 390/399, and when the winning probability state is the probable change state (high probability state), the small hit is won with a probability of 44/45. Is set.

  When the second special symbol lottery is performed (step S307b), the main control MPU 4100a sets a flag indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery and a winning information command as the process of step S308b. I do. At this time, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second special symbol lottery is also determined. Then, thereafter, as the process of step S309b, the process ends when the second process flag is updated to "1" so that the process shifts to the second variation pattern setting process (step S150b).

  Note that the result of the second special symbol lottery obtained in the second variation start process is the winning information command set in the process of step S308b, and the peripheral control is performed by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. Section 4140.

[Second variation pattern setting process]
Next, the second variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second variation pattern setting process according to the present embodiment. The second variation pattern setting process is executed when the second processing flag is “1” in the above-described second special symbol control process (FIG. 134).

  If the flag indicating that the big hit has been won is set (YES in step S401b), the main control MPU 4100a selects the large hit variation pattern table according to the game state (step S402b), and wins the small hit. If the flag indicating that the game has been performed is set (YES in step S403b), the variation pattern table at the time of the small hit according to the game state is selected (step S404b), and the loss is neither the big hit nor the small hit. If it is in the flag state (NO in step S403b), a variation pattern table at the time of loss is selected (step S405b).

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines a variation pattern by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the second variation random number read in step S304b in the second variation start process (step S406b), and determines the determined variation pattern. Of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 is set (step S407b). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern in the second fluctuation timer (Step S408b). As a result, the variation control is performed in the second special symbol display 1186 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 for the variation time determined in this way. Then, thereafter, as the process of step S409b, the process ends when the second process flag is updated to "2" so that the process shifts to the second process during variation (step S170b).

  The variation pattern set in the second variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 as the variation pattern command set in the process of step S407b. Is done. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the result of the big hit lottery (small hit lottery) based on the fluctuation pattern shown by the above-mentioned production command and the information shown by the above-mentioned winning information command through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side. The display effect is performed as shown by.

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side proceed simultaneously, the liquid crystal display device 1900 Through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140, the display effect on the first special symbol side (such as a change in decorative symbol) and the display effect on the second special symbol side (such as a change in decorative symbol) appear simultaneously. .

  Note that among the variation pattern tables used in the processes of steps S402b, S404b, and S405b, the variation pattern tables used in the normal game state (normal mode) and the high-accuracy short-time game state (rush preparation mode) include: A variation time (for example, 600 seconds) having a length of 10 times or more than any other variation time that can be selected on the first special symbol side is always selected. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern table used in the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode), the shortened fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) is always selected. The details of the setting of the fluctuation time will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Second fluctuation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 137, a description will be given of the second changing process (step S170b) executed when the second process flag is “2”. FIG. 137 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second changing process of the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the value of the second variation timer set in the process of step S408b in the second variation pattern setting process (step S150b) has become 0 as the process of step S501b. A determination is made as to whether or not the determined fluctuation time has elapsed. As a result, as long as the second fluctuation timer is not 0, that is, as long as it is determined that the set fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in step S501b), the second fluctuation processing (step S170b) is performed. Each time the process is performed, the second variation timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S521b.

  As a result of such processing, when it is determined in the processing of step S501b that the second fluctuation timer has become 0, that is, when it is determined that the set fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S501b). ), The main control MPU 4100a displays, on the second special symbol display 1186, a stopped symbol (stop symbol according to the result of the second special symbol lottery) which has been determined as the process of step S502b and step S503b. The display control for terminating the variable display is thereby performed, and the second fixed stop command for instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the second special symbol is issued to the liquid crystal display device 1900. This is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140. Note that the thus-set second confirmation stop command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect of the display effect is definitely displayed through the later-described control by the peripheral control unit 4140.

  After performing the process related to the symbol stop in this way, the process is terminated when various processes corresponding to the result of the second special symbol lottery are executed.

  When the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (YES in step S504b), the main control MPU 4100a sets the first special symbol side in order to avoid the occurrence of a double hit on the first special symbol side. The above-mentioned interlock flag of the first special symbol indicating that the game is to be interlocked with the game of the second special symbol is turned on (step S505b). In addition, the probability change flag indicating that the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in the high probability state (probability change state) is turned off (step S506b). Then, thereafter, when the second processing flag is updated to “3” in order to start the big hit game (step S507b), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, even when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit (NO in step S504b and YES in step S531b), the main control MPU 4100a first overlaps the hit on the first special symbol side. In order to avoid occurrence, the above-mentioned interlock flag of the first special symbol, which indicates that the game of the first special symbol is to be interlocked with the game of the second special symbol, is turned on (step S532b). ). Then, thereafter, when the second processing flag is updated to “5” in order to start the small hitting game (step S533b), this processing is ended.

  By performing such control, the period from the end of the big hit game to the end of the interlock flag of the first special symbol is turned off (the second big hit game process (FIG. 139) described later). In step S726b), the game on the first special symbol side is stopped in conjunction with the game on the second special symbol side, regardless of the first processing flag, or the current state is maintained.

  On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss (NO in step S504b and NO in step S531b), the main control MPU 4100a first turns on the probability change flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100. Is determined (step S511b). The probability change flag is set to the ON state when the winning probability of the jackpot is changed from the normal probability (normal state) to the high probability (probability change state). Since the change of the jackpot winning probability is triggered by the occurrence of a jackpot, the probability change flag is set at the end of the jackpot game in a second jackpot game process (FIG. 139) described later.

  Then, when the probability change flag is in the ON state (YES in step S511b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the ST count is 0 (step S512b). If the ST count is 0 (YES in step S512b), it is determined that the probable change state has ended, and the probable change flag is set to the off state (step S513b).

  On the other hand, when the probable change flag is in the OFF state (NO in step S511b), main control MPU 4100a shifts to the processing in step S514b. If the number of STs is not 0 even if the probable change flag is on (NO in step S512b), the probable change state continues, so the probable change flag is kept on and the process proceeds to step S514b. .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time saving function is operating as the process of Step S514b (Step S514b). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag provided in RAM 4100e of main control board 4100 is in an ON state. The time-saving flag is set to the ON state when the time-saving function is operated in a time-saving function setting process (step S725b) of a second big hit game process (FIG. 139) described later.

  Then, when the time reduction function is in operation (YES in step S514b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether to stop the time reduction function (step S515b). In the present embodiment, the time saving function is provided together with the certainty changing function when the first big hit A occurs, and operates while the certainty changing function is continued. Therefore, it is determined that the time saving function is to be stopped when the probable change flag is off, and it is determined that the operation of the time reduction function is to be continued when the probable change flag is on.

  In other words, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the condition for terminating the time-saving gaming state is satisfied when the probability change flag is set to the OFF state in the processing of step S513b, and stops the time-saving function (step S516b). After the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this manner, the special symbol is stopped to fluctuate so as to indicate that a loss has occurred, and the second symbol is set to the processing stage in which the special symbol is reserved and exhausted. "0" (step S517b), and this process ends. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation relating to the second special symbol is performed.

[Second big hit game start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the second big hit game start process (step S190b) executed when the second process flag is “3” will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second big hit game start process of the present embodiment.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the timer (second big hit start interval timer) for counting the interval before the start of the big hit game is set as the process of step S601b. As a result, if the second big hit start interval timer has not been set yet (NO in step S601b), the condition device is operated as the processing in step S602b, and the time saving is performed as the processing in steps S603b and S604b. If the function is operating (YES in step S603b), the operation is stopped. That is, after such preparations are completed, the second big hit start interval timer is set and the second big hit interval start command is set as the processing of steps S605b and S606b in order to start the interval before the start of the big hit game. This process is temporarily terminated.

  The second big hit interval start command set in the process of step S606b is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a display effect during the interval before the start of the big hit game appears through the later-described control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the second big hit start interval timer is set in this way, every time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the second big hit start interval timer has already been set in the process of step S601b ( In step S601b, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second big hit start interval timer is 0 in the process of the next step S611b, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game elapses. A determination is made as to whether or not this has been done. In the process of step S611b, the second big hit start interval timer is not 0, that is, as long as it is determined that the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game has not elapsed (NO in step S611b). ), Every time the second big hit game start processing (step S190b) is performed, the second big hit start interval timer is decremented by one as the processing of step S621b.

  Then, as a result of such processing, in the processing of step S611b, it is determined that the second big hit start interval timer has become 0, that is, the time set as the pre-big hit game start interval has elapsed. At this time (YES in step S611b), main control MPU 4100a ends this process when the second processing flag is updated to “4” in order to execute the big hit game (step S612b).

  The time length of the second big hit start interval timer can be set according to the type of the big hit symbol (the type determined by the second symbol random number).

[2nd jackpot game process]
Next, the second big hit game process (step S200b) executed when the second process flag is “4” will be described with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second big hit game process of the present embodiment.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second big hit game execution flag indicating that the control related to the execution of the big hit game is already in progress is performed as the process of step S701b. The second big hit game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100, is set to an on state in a process of a step S703b described later at the start of the second big hit game, and is turned off in a process of a step S723b described later at the end of the second big hit game. Is set.

  When the second big hit game execution flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S701b), the main control MPU 4100a starts the process of step S702b to start the control related to the execution of the big hit game using the attacker device 2100. Is set according to the type of jackpot (the number of rounds, the opening time of each round, the maximum number of winnings in each round). The details of the opening mode according to the type of the big hit will be described later with reference to FIG. 146 (C).

  After the execution mode of the big hit game is set in this way, the main control MPU 4100a executes the second big hit game indicating that the control related to the execution of the big hit game is already in progress as the processing of steps S703b and S704b. When the flag is turned on and the second big hit start command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

  That is, after the second big hit game execution flag is turned on, it is determined that the control for executing the big hit game is already in progress each time the interrupt processing is performed ( In step S701b, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the set number of rounds has been exhausted, as processing in the next step S711b. In the process of step S711b, as long as it is determined that the set number of rounds has not been exhausted yet, that is, it is determined that the control of the execution of the big hit game is in the middle stage (NO in step S711b) Each time the second big hit game process (step S200b) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a executes control according to the set opening pattern as the process of step S712b. Accordingly, every time the above-described interrupt processing is performed (every 4 ms), the movement (including the interval between rounds) related to the opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2106 is updated (managed) through the processing of step S712b. Eventually, a big hit game in which the attacker device 2100 opens and closes with an opening pattern according to the type of big hit is realized.

  Then, while such control is being performed, in the process of step S711b, the set round number has been consumed, that is, it is determined that all the controls related to the execution of the big hit game have been completed. (YES in step S711b), the main control MPU 4100a performs processes (step S721b, step S722b, step S731b, step S741b, step S742b) for generating an end interval of the big hit game.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the timer (second big hit end interval timer) for measuring the end interval of the big hit game is already set (step S721b). Then, as a result, if the second big hit end interval timer has not been set yet (NO in step S721b), the second big hit end interval is processed as steps S741b and S742b to start the big hit game end interval. When the timer is set and the second big hit interval end command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

  The second big hit interval end command set in the process of step S742b is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a display effect during the end interval of the big hit game appears through the later-described control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the second big hit end interval timer is set in this way, every time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the second big hit end interval timer has been set in the process of step S721b (see FIG. In step S721b, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second big hit end interval timer is 0 in the process of the next step S722b, that is, the time set as the big hit game end interval has elapsed. A determination is made as to whether or not this is the case. In the process of step S722b, as long as it is determined that the second big hit end interval timer is not 0, that is, it is determined that the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game has not elapsed (NO in step S722b). Each time the second big hit game process (step S200b) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a subtracts 1 from the second big hit end interval timer as the process of step S731b.

  As a result of performing such processing, when it is determined in the processing of step S722b that the second big hit end interval timer has become 0, that is, that the time set as the big hit game end interval has elapsed. (YES in step S722b), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (step S723b to step S728b) for ending the big hit game.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a firstly turns off the second big hit game execution flag indicating that the control related to the execution of the big hit game is already in progress as the process of step S723b. Then, as a process of step S724b, the probability change flag indicating that the special hit lottery winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in the high probability state (probable change state) is turned on, and the number of special symbol lotteries to be set in the high probability state ( (ST times) is set to 70 times. Here, the probability change flag that has been turned on is turned off when the ST count is exhausted (step S513b) or when a big hit occurs before the exhaustion (step S506b).

  In the present embodiment, the probability change function is operated for all the jackpots. However, when the probability change function is not operated or not depending on the type of the jackpot, a time saving function setting process described later (step S725b) As described above, a process of first determining whether or not a big hit that activates the probability change function may be executed. Then, in the case of a jackpot to activate the probability change function, the main control MPU 4100a operates the probability change flag to the ON state and sets the number of STs as in the process of step S724b. Further, in the case of a big hit in which the probability change function is operated until the next big hit, the main control MPU 4100a only needs to set the probability change flag to the ON state and does not need to set the number of STs.

  Next, as a step S725b, the main control MPU 4100a executes a time saving function setting process for setting whether or not to activate the time saving function according to the type of the big hit and the gaming state. The time saving function setting process is the same as the time saving function setting process (step S725a) in the above-described first big hit game process (FIG. 131), and is as described above with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the processing related to the probability change function and the time saving function is performed, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the first special symbol side has no possibility that the big hit game will be duplicated. The above-mentioned interlock flag indicating that the game is to be interlocked with the game of the second special symbol is turned off (step S726b). Then, after that, the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S727b), and the second processing flag is updated to "0" assuming that the second special symbol which has become the current big hit is in the processing stage of being held off (step S727b). S728b), this process ends. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation relating to the second special symbol is performed.

  According to such a jackpot game process, the corresponding jackpot 2103 is opened until the round game reaches the maximum number of rounds in the process of step 711b according to the type of the jackpot. The game is repeatedly opened in step S712b), and the player can acquire prize balls according to the type of the big hit.

[Second small hit game start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the second small hitting game start process (step S230b) executed when the second process flag is “5” will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second small hitting game start process according to the present embodiment.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the timer (second small hit start interval timer) for measuring the interval before the start of the small hit game is set as the process of step S801b. Then, as a result, if the second small hit start interval timer has not been set yet (NO in step S801b), the process in steps S802b and S803b is executed in order to start the interval before the start of the small hit game. When the small hit start interval timer is set and the second small hit interval start command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

  Note that the second small hit interval start command set in the process of step S803b is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a display effect during the interval before the start of the small hitting game appears through the later-described control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the second small hit start interval timer is set in this manner, it is determined that the second small hit start interval timer has already been set each time an interrupt process is performed (YES in step S801b). The main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second small hitting start interval timer is 0 in the processing of the next step S811b, that is, whether or not the time set as the interval before the start of the small hitting game has elapsed. Will do. In the process of step S811b, as long as it is determined that the second small hit start interval timer is not 0, that is, it is determined that the time set as the interval before the start of the small hit game has not elapsed (step S811b). NO), every time the second small hitting game start process (step S230b) is performed, the second small hitting start interval timer is decremented by one as the process of step S821b.

  Then, as a result of performing such processing, in the processing of step S811b, the second small hitting start interval timer becomes 0, that is, it is determined that the time set as the interval before the start of the small hitting game has elapsed. When it is performed (YES in step S811b), the main control MPU 4100a ends this processing when the second processing flag is updated to “6” in order to execute the small hitting game (step S812b).

[2nd small hit game process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the second small hitting game process (step S240b) executed when the second process flag is “6” will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second small hitting game process of the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the second small hitting game execution flag indicating that the control related to the execution of the small hitting game is already in progress is performed as the process of step S901b. I do. The second small hitting game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100, and is set to an on state at the start of the second small hitting game at a step S903b described later, and is turned off at the end of the processing at a step S921b described later. Set to state.

  Then, when the second small hitting game execution flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S901b), the main control MPU 4100a executes step S902b in order to start control relating to execution of the small hitting game using the attacker device 2100. In the process (1), an opening mode (opening pattern) according to the type of the small hit and a control timer for measuring the time required for executing the control according to the opening pattern are set. It should be noted that there is one type of small hit in the present embodiment. The details of the opening mode of the small hit will be described later with reference to FIG. 146 (D).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a turns on the second small hitting game execution flag indicating that the control related to the execution of the small hitting game is already in progress as the processing of step S903b and step S904b. When the second small hit start command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

  That is, after the second small hitting game execution flag is turned on in this manner, each time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the control related to the execution of the small hitting game is already in progress. (YES in step S901b), and the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the timing of the control timer is 0 in the process of the next step S911b, that is, whether or not the timing for ending the control related to the execution of the small hit game has come. Will be determined. In the process of step S911b, as long as it is determined that the control timer is not 0, that is, it is determined that the control of the execution of the small hit game is in the middle (NO in step S911b), the second small hit Every time the game process (step S240b) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a first executes the opening / closing control of the attacker device 2100 according to the set open pattern as the process of step S912b. Accordingly, every time the above-described interrupt processing is performed (every 4 ms), the movement of the opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2106 is updated (managed) through the processing of step S912b, and the small hit when the attacker device 2100 performs the opening and closing operation is performed. The game will be realized.

  Then, while such control is being performed, in the process of step S911b, if it is determined that the control timer is 0, that is, it is determined that all the controls related to the execution of the small hitting game are completed (step S911b YES), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (step S921b to step S929b) for ending the small hitting game.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a turns off the second small hitting game execution flag indicating that the control related to the execution of the small hitting game is already in progress as the process of step S921b. Next, in view of the possibility that the jackpot game is not duplicated on the first special symbol side, the game on the first special symbol side should be linked with the game on the second special symbol side. The interlock flag of the first special symbol shown is turned off (step S922b).

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the probable change flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 is on (Step S923b). If the probability change flag is on (YES in step S923b), it is determined whether or not the ST count is 0 (step S924b). If the ST count is 0 (YES in step S924b), it is determined that the probable change state has ended, and the probable change flag is set to the off state (step S925b).

  On the other hand, when the probable change flag is in the OFF state (NO in step S923b), main control MPU 4100a shifts to the processing in step S926b. If the number of STs is not 0 even if the probable change flag is on (NO in step S924b), the probable change state continues, so the probable change flag is kept on and the process proceeds to step S926b. .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time saving function is operating as the process of Step S926b. If the time saving function is in operation (YES in step S926b), it is determined whether or not the time saving function is stopped (step S927b). In the present embodiment, the time saving function is provided together with the certainty changing function when the first big hit A occurs, and operates while the certainty changing function is continued. Therefore, it is determined that the time saving function is to be stopped when the probable change flag is off, and it is determined that the operation of the time reduction function is to be continued when the probable change flag is on.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the condition for terminating the time-saving gaming state is satisfied when the probable change flag is set to the off state in the process of step S925b, and stops the time-saving function (step S928b). After the processes related to the probability change function and the time saving function are performed in this manner, the second process flag is updated to “0”, assuming that the special symbol from which the small hit has been derived is in the processing stage of being held off (step S929b). , And terminates this processing. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation relating to the second special symbol is performed.

[Second interlock setting process]
Next, the second interlock setting process (step S250b) of the above-described second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second linkage setting process according to the present embodiment.

  In the second interlocking setting process, when a big hit is derived in the game on the first special symbol side, the game on the second special symbol side is controlled to interlock with the game on the first special symbol side.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the second special symbol is changing (Step S1001b).

  When the second special symbol is changing (YES in step S1001b), the main control MPU 4100a has already determined in the second special symbol lottery (step S307b) of the second change start process (FIG. 135). The stop symbol is set to a predetermined loss symbol (step S1002b).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs display control for terminating the variable display by displaying the set loss symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 (step S1003b). Also, a second fixed stop command for instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of the second special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S1004b). . The processing in steps S1003b and S1004b is the same as steps S502b and S503b performed when the fluctuation time has elapsed in the above-described second fluctuation processing (FIG. 137).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a performs processing similar to the processing of steps S511b to S517b executed when the second special symbol is lost in the above-described second fluctuation processing (FIG. 137) by the processing of steps S1005b to S1011b. After the execution, the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the second special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1001b), the main control MPU 4100a continues the current state of the second special symbol (that is, the state where the second special symbol does not change). (Step S1021b), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the second interlocking setting process, when the big hit is derived by the fluctuation of the first special symbol (when the second interlocking flag is on), the changing second special symbol is forcibly lost. To stop. In addition, the second special symbol that is not fluctuating is brought into a standby state in which fluctuation is not started until the second interlocking flag is turned off. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a collision between the game on the second special symbol side and the game on the first special symbol side.

[Normal symbol processing]
Subsequently, the normal control processing (step S15) of the above-described timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the ordinary control process, ordinary symbol fluctuation control (ordinary symbol lottery) based on the passing of the game ball by the ordinary symbol gate 2301 is executed. The winning assist control for facilitating winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b by operating the electric accessory 2111 is executed.

[Normal control processing]
FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the normal control process according to the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the gate sensor 2302 for detecting the passage of the game ball to the general-purpose gate 2301 is in an on state (step S2001). When the gate sensor 2302 detects that the game ball has passed to the general-purpose gate 2301 and is in the ON state (YES in step S2001), the main control MPU 4100a outputs the ordinary random number of the ordinary symbol to the random number counter. (Step S2010). The details of the gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 144.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs one of five process processes (a normal symbol normal process, a normal symbol variation time determination process, a normal symbol variation process, a normal symbol stop process, and an ordinary electric accessory opening process) according to the ordinary symbol process flag. And the normal control process is terminated.

  First, in the normal symbol normal processing of step S2100, the main control MPU 4100a reads out the ordinary random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a, and based on the read ordinary random number, the display mode when the fluctuation control of the ordinary symbol is stopped. Perform lottery processing and the like.

  Next, in the ordinary symbol variation time determination process in step S2200, the main control MPU 4100a performs a lottery process on the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189 based on the ordinary symbol variation random number. Execute.

  Next, in the ordinary symbol variation process of step S2300, the main control MPU 4100a executes a process of waiting until the variation display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1189 is stopped.

  Next, in the normal symbol stop process of step S2400, the main control MPU 4100a normally uses the normal symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the normal symbol variation control is stopped. A process is executed to stop the variable display of the normal symbol as displayed on the symbol display 1189.

  Next, in the normal electric accessory opening processing of step S2500, the main control MPU 4100a turns the movable when the result of the lottery processing regarding the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped indicates a mode of “per-genuine hit”. A piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 is operated to execute a process of controlling a game ball to be awarded to the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101.

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that normal symbol normal processing (step S2100) should be performed in the process of initializing data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM 4100e.

[Gate passage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the gate passage processing (step S2010) of the above-described ordinary control processing (FIG. 143) will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the gate passage processing according to the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first obtains the counter value of the normal reservation number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a, and based on the counter value, the number of reserved ordinary symbols is a value less than the maximum value “4”. It is determined whether or not (Step S2011).

  When the number of ordinary symbols to be held is less than the maximum value (YES in step S2011), the main control MPU 4100a sets step S2012 in order to newly set the variable display control of the ordinary symbols to a suspended state. To S2014. First, as a process of step S2012, the ordinary suspension number counter is counted up (addition of 1). Next, as a process of step S2013, an ordinary random number and an ordinary figure variable random number are acquired from a random number counter. Next, as the process of step S2014, each of the random numbers thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. Thereafter, the present gate passage processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved ordinary symbols is the maximum value (NO in step S2011), the main control MPU 4100a does not newly suspend the variable display control of the ordinary symbols. That is, the gate passage process ends without executing the processes of steps S2012 to S2014.

[Normal symbol normal processing]
Next, the normal symbol normal processing (step S2100) of the above-described normal control processing (FIG. 143) will be described with reference to FIG. The normal symbol normal process is executed when the normal symbol process flag indicates that this process should be performed in the above-described normal control process. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing of the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not there is a variable display control of the ordinary symbol in the suspended state based on the counter value of the ordinary suspended number counter (step S2101). As a result, when it is determined that there is the variable display control of the ordinary symbol in the suspended state (YES in step S2101), the ordinary symbol stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is displayed. The random number stored in the earliest storage area out of the random numbers related to the display mode (for example, ordinary random number, ordinary figure variable random number) is read from the RAM (step S2102). Then, a countdown for decrementing the ordinary reserve number counter by 1 is performed (step S2103), and the display mode when the variable display of the ordinary symbols stored in each storage area of the ordinary reserve storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is stopped. A random number (ordinary random number, ordinary figure variable random number) is shifted in a first-in first-out manner (First-In First-Out) (step S2104).

  Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a stores the random numbers extracted in accordance with the passage of the game ball to the general symbol gate 2301 in order from the first (earliest) area of the ordinary symbol holding storage area having four storage areas. I do. When a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the general-purpose gate 2301, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out, and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored. Are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is suspended is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving gaming state (step S2105). Then, if the current gaming state is the time reduction gaming state (YES in step S2105), a time reduction time ordinary figure hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step S2106), and the current gaming state is the non-time saving gaming state. If it is (NO in step S2105), a non-working time general-purpose hit table (not shown) is selected (step S2107). After that, the ordinary figure hit determination table selected in the process of step S2106 or S2107 is compared with the ordinary random number read in the process of step S2102 (step S2108).

  It should be noted that the normal map hit determination table is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and is used when the game state is a time reduction, and is used when the game state is a non-time reduction. A non-working time normal time hit table. Then, in the time-saving-time general-purpose hit determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random number, all the 255 types of normal random numbers coincide with the general-purpose hit determination value indicating that the general-purpose hit was won. Ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to coincide with a deviation determination value in a general view indicating a deviation. In this manner, in the time-saving gaming state, when a game ball passes through the general-purpose gate 2301, the ball is always won per general-purpose figure, and the movable piece (normal electric accessory) 2111 is operated to activate the first starting port 2101. Is controlled so that a game ball can be won in the special winning port 2101b.

  In addition, in the non-working time general-purpose hit determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, it is found that all of the 255 types of normal random numbers coincide with the general-purpose hit determination value indicating that the winning has been achieved. However, ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the out-of-usual-drawing determination value indicating that the out-of-usual figure is out of place. As described above, in the non-time-saving game state, even if a game ball passes through the general-purpose gate 2301, the ball is not won per general-purpose figure, so that the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 is opened. It is not controlled so that a game ball can be won in the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101. In addition, as described above, it may be possible to obtain a hit of a normal symbol even in a non-time saving game state. In this case, a winning probability (for example, 50%) lower than that of the time saving game state is set, and a lottery result of the normal symbol is obtained. When a hit occurs, the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b is opened for a shorter time than the time-saving gaming state, for example, 0.1 second to allow a game ball to enter the special winning opening 2101b and then closed. In this way, it is possible to disable the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b.

  The main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the result of the processing in the above-described step S2108 is a normal drawing (step S2109). Then, in the case of a normal symbol hit (YES in step S2109), after setting a general symbol hit flag indicating that the change of the normal symbol has won the general symbol hit (step S2110), the normal symbol is changed. A symbol per ordinary symbol is determined as a mode (variable symbol stop symbol) when the fluctuation control is stopped (step S2112).

  On the other hand, if the result of the processing in step S2108 described above is a loss (NO in step S2109), the main control MPU 4100a sets the general symbol as a mode (normal symbol stopped symbol) when the fluctuation control of the ordinary symbol is stopped. A lost symbol is determined (step S2111).

  After the processing in step S2112 or step S2111 is completed, the main control MPU 4100a updates the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the ordinary symbol variation time determination processing (step S2200) (step S2113), and ends this processing. .

  In the present embodiment, the winning probability of a normal symbol in the non-time saving game state in which the time saving function does not operate is set to 0%, and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol in the time saving game state in which the time saving function operates is set to 100%. However, it is not limited to this. In the time-saving game state, the frequency of winning the game ball (prize probability) to the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 is always higher than the frequency of winning (prize probability) of the game ball to the winning port 2101a, that is, the time-saving game. In this state, it is only necessary that the game specification of the ordinary symbol (the winning probability per ordinary figure, the ordinary figure varying time, and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory) can guide the player to make a right strike instead of a left strike. Specifically, in the time-saving game state, the general-purpose probability change function that increases the probability of winning per general-purpose figure compared to the non-time-saving game state, the general-purpose change shortening function that shortens the general-purpose change time, and the opening operation by the ordinary electric character At least one of the normal power release extension functions for extending (winning assistance control) is provided. As a result, in the time-saving game state, the prize assist reinforcement control in which the prize assist control set in the non-time-saving game state is further enhanced is executed.

[Game specifications of special design]
FIG. 146 is an example of various tables showing game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the present embodiment.

  First, the winning probability in the first special symbol lottery of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 146 (A), in the first special symbol lottery of the present embodiment, when the hit winning probability is a normal state (low probability state), a big hit is won with a probability of 1/399. In addition, in the case of the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the hit winning probability is set higher than the normal state, a big hit is won with a probability of 1/45. In the first special symbol lottery according to the present embodiment, only a big hit in which the condition device operates and a small hit in which the condition device does not operate do not occur. In the hit determination process (step S307a) of the above-described first variation start process (FIG. 127), a big hit determination is made with a winning probability of 1/399 or 1/45 depending on the probability state at the time of executing the lottery.

  Next, the winning probability in the second special symbol lottery of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (B). As shown in FIG. 146 (B), the hit in the second special symbol lottery of the present embodiment includes a big hit and a small hit. The jackpot winning probability in the second special symbol lottery is the same as the jackpot winning probability in the first special symbol lottery described above. The small hit winning probability in the second special symbol lottery is such that when the big hit winning probability is in the normal state (low probability state), the small hit is won with a probability of 390/399, and the big hit winning probability is in a probable state (high probability state). , A small hit is won with a probability of 44/45. The small hit winning probability is a constant probability regardless of the gaming state, and does not change between the normal state and the probable change state unlike the big hit winning probability. In the hit determination process (step S307b) of the above-described second variation start process (FIG. 135), a big hit determination is performed with a winning probability of 1/399 or 1/45 according to the probability state at the time of executing the lottery, and 390/399. Alternatively, the small hit determination is performed with a winning probability of 44/45.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the small hit winning probability in the second special symbol lottery is set high. In particular, in the second special symbol lottery in the probable change state, when a big hit is not won, a setting is made so as to always win a small hit. In addition, in the second special symbol lottery in the probable change state, if the big hit is not won, the small hit may not necessarily be won. Anything that wins the small hit with a much higher probability than the probability (for example, the big hit winning probability is 1/45, the small hit winning probability is 40/45, and the loss probability is 4/45) is obtained.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 146 (C), the big hit type of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146 (C), the jackpot according to the present embodiment includes a first jackpot A and a first jackpot B that can be generated in the first special symbol lottery and a second jackpot that can be generated in the second special symbol lottery. A total of four types of jackpots, A and a second jackpot B, are provided.

  The first big hit A occurs with a probability of 75% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, and the change display of the first special symbol is stopped at the symbol A at this time. The first big hit B occurs with a probability of 25% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit. At this time, the change display of the first special symbol is stopped at the symbol B.

  The second big hit A occurs with a probability of 50% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, and the change display of the second special symbol is stopped at the symbol A at this time. The second big hit B is generated with a probability of 50% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit. At this time, the change display of the second special symbol is stopped at the symbol B.

  With these four types of jackpots, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is shifted to the probability change state with a probability of 100%, and the probability change state is maintained until the number of times of the change of the special symbol after the jackpot game is executed 70 times. It is provided so that a function can be given. In addition, the first big hit A can provide a time-saving function of performing a prize assist control for assisting a prize of a game ball to the special prize port 2101b of the first start port 2101 by operating the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111. Is provided.

  The opening mode of the special winning opening 2103 is set according to the type of the big hit, and the first big hit A, the first big hit B, the second big hit A, and the second big hit B are opened patterns A, B, and C, respectively. And D are set. Here, the number of prize balls obtainable by the player is changed according to the open pattern, thereby increasing the interest of the big hit game.

  The opening patterns A to C are set so that the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 is long and the player can acquire a sufficient prize ball. For example, the opening pattern A and the opening pattern B are big hit games in which round games are performed four times, and the opening time and the maximum number of winnings in each round are set so that the player can acquire 500 prize balls. The opening pattern C is a jackpot game in which a round game is performed 16 times, and the opening time and the maximum number of winnings in each round are set so that the player can acquire 2,000 prize balls.

  On the other hand, the opening pattern D is set so that the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 is short, and the player cannot acquire enough prize balls. For example, the opening pattern D is a big hit game in which a round game is performed 16 times, and is set so that a player cannot substantially acquire a prize ball by repeating high-speed opening in which one opening time is short.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 146 (D), the small hit type according to the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146 (D), the small hit in the present embodiment is provided with a second small hit C that can be generated in the second special symbol lottery. The second small hit C occurs at a probability of 100% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit, and the change display of the second special symbol is stopped at the symbol C at this time. In addition, an opening pattern E is set in the opening mode of the special winning opening 2103 in the small hitting game. The opening pattern E is provided so that one opening time is short and a prize ball can be acquired by accidental winning. Here, the accidental prize is not a prize obtained by the player hitting a game ball into the game area for the purpose of prize in the special prize port 2103, but a game area where the special prize port 2103 is provided. This is a prize that can be obtained by the game ball that has been driven down a position where a prize can be won by chance when the large winning opening 2103 is opened. In the second small hit C, the number of rounds and one opening time of the large winning opening 2103 so that if the player hits the game ball by right-handing, about 1-2 balls can be expected by chance. Is set. When about one or two balls are won in the large winning opening 2103 by the second small hit C, about 15 to 30 prize balls can be obtained.

  In the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) of the present embodiment, the second small hit C is provided so as to frequently occur. It is possible to promote an accidental prize based on the second small hit C generated during the rush mode, and the number of prize balls obtainable during the rush mode is the majority of the total number of prize balls obtainable during the rush mode To occupy. In the present embodiment, when the second small hit C (maximum 30 balls) of the number of STs (70 times) occurs during the rush mode, a prize ball (maximum 2100 balls) equal to or larger than the above-mentioned prize ball (2000 balls) due to the big hit ) Can be expected, so that there is no decrease in the interest of the game due to the occurrence of small hits where almost no prize balls can be obtained. Rather, a small hit game that occurs a plurality of times, rather than a single big hit game, keeps the player interested in the game, so that the interest in a series of games during the rush mode can be enhanced.

  Further, with reference to FIG. 146 (E), the fluctuation time of the special symbol of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146 (E), the variation time of the special symbol of the present embodiment differs depending on the game mode (game state). The variation time of the first special symbol is set to 30 seconds to 60 seconds according to the presence or absence of the reach effect when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and 1 second when the game mode is the rush mode. Is set. Also, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 600 seconds when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and is set to 1 second when the game mode is the rush mode.

  Here, the normal mode is a game mode that prompts the player to win a game ball to the regular winning opening 2101a of the first starting port 2101 (that is, “left-hand”), and has a special symbol lottery jackpot winning probability. Indicates a normal state (low probability state) and a normal game state in which the time saving function is not provided. The rush preparation mode is a game mode that prompts a player to win a game ball (ie, “right-hand”) into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101, and has a special symbol lottery jackpot winning probability. Indicates a highly probable state (high probability state) and a high-probability time-saving gaming state to which the time-saving function is provided. The rush mode is a game mode that prompts a player to win a game ball to the second opening 2102 (that is, “right strike”), and the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in a stable state (high probability). State) and a highly accurate non-time saving game state in which the time saving function is not provided. The high-precision time-saving gaming state in the rush preparation mode is a gaming state that can be shifted to when the first big hit A occurs.

  As described above, in the special symbol game provided to the player, the above-described specifications (hit probability, hit type, fluctuation time, etc.) change according to the game state. The transition from the normal game state to the advantageous game state which is advantageous to the player is triggered by the occurrence of a big hit, and the transition from the advantageous game state to the normal game state is performed for the given ST times (here, 70 times). Triggered by the completion of the symbol lottery (fluctuation).

[Transition of game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 147 to FIG. 149, a description will be given of transition of the gaming state and control of simultaneous fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in each gaming state. FIG. 147 is a diagram illustrating transition of a game state (game mode) according to the present embodiment.

(Normal mode)
First, the game mode at the start of the game is a normal game state (normal mode). In the normal game state, the game ball is fired (so-called “left-handed”) aiming at the game area 1100 on the left side of the center role item 2500 so that the game ball can win at the regular winning opening 2101a of the first starting port 2101. Is the best play method for the player.

  Here, the second starting port 2102 of the present embodiment can easily win a prize simply by a game ball fired (so-called “right-hit”) aimed at the game area 1100 on the right side of the center role item 2500 following the flow path. It is provided in. In the second special symbol lottery based on the winning in the second starting port 2102, the winning probability of a small hit in which a prize ball can be obtained is high (390/399 in a normal state, 44/45 in a probable state). In this case, the player strives right from the start of the game to try to win a game ball in the second starting port 2102. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (E) described above, the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the game state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) in which it is not recommended that a game ball is won to the second starting port 2102. The time is set to long-term fluctuation (600 seconds). As a result, it takes a long time until the variable display of the second special symbol is started in both modes until the stop display is performed (the lottery result is found), so that the player can be prevented from right-handing. .

  In addition, since the second starting port 2102 of the present embodiment is always open and easy to win, the second special opening in the game state where the winning is not recommended in order to suppress the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102. Although the fluctuation time of the symbol is set to a long time, it is not limited to this. A state conversion member capable of converting the second starting port 2102 into an easy winning state and a difficult winning state is provided, and winning is performed in a gaming state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) in which it is not recommended that a game ball enter the second starting port 2102. You may make it set to a difficult state. In the present embodiment, in order to avoid complication of the configuration and processing related to the control of the state conversion member and to provide a game that is easy for the player to obtain, the changing time is changed for the player by changing the variation time according to the game state. You are guided to play in the best way.

  Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the first special symbol lottery based on winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a) is mainly executed. If the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss, the normal game state is continued, while if the result of the first special symbol lottery is the first big hit A, a high-probability time-saving game state (rush preparation mode, (First advantageous game state). When the result of the first special symbol lottery is the first big hit B, the game shifts to a high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state).

  As described above, in the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set long in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. For this reason, the possibility that the result of the second special symbol lottery is found in the normal gaming state (the occurrence of the game state transition triggered by the second big hit of the second special symbol) is extremely low.

(Lash preparation mode)
Next, a case in which the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state (normal mode) to the high-probability time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode) will be described. At the time of this state transition, the occurrence of the first big hit A gives the player a privilege that is advantageous to the player, such as obtaining a winning ball and providing a probability changing function and a time reduction function.

  In the high-probability time-short game state (rush preparation mode), a special prize port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 is fired by firing a game ball (so-called “right-hit”) aiming at the right game area 1100 of the center role item 2500. Is the best game method for a player.

  Here, when the right-hitting game ball passes through the general-purpose gate 2301 disposed in the game area 1100 on the right side of the center role 2500, the time-saving function is activated, so the normal symbol lottery is derived by the ordinary symbol lottery. (Probability of 100% per ordinary figure in the time reduction state). As a result, the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 is operated, and the winning of the game ball to the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 becomes easy. In addition, as described above, in the time-saving gaming state, the frequency of winning game balls into the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 (prize probability) is always higher than the frequency of winning game balls into the winning port 2101a (prize probability). Since it is set to be high, the player makes a right strike to aim at the special winning opening 2101b.

  Therefore, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the first special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (special winning port 2101b) is mainly executed. Then, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss for 70 consecutive times, the game shifts to the normal game state (normal mode). In addition, if the result of the first big hit A is derived before the special symbol lottery is executed 70 times, the ST number is reset to 70 times and the main game state (rush preparation mode, first advantageous game state). To continue. If the result of the first big hit B is derived before the special symbol lottery is executed 70 times, the game shifts to the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state).

  As described above, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be long in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, the possibility of the result of the second special symbol lottery being determined in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (the occurrence of the game state transition triggered by the second big hit of the second special symbol) is extremely low.

(Rush mode)
Next, a case will be described in which the gaming state has shifted from the normal gaming state (normal mode) or the high-probability time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode) to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode). At the time of this state transition, the occurrence of the first big hit B gives the player a privilege that is advantageous to the player, such as obtaining a winning ball and adding a certainty changing function.

  In the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode), a game ball is shot at the second starting port 2102 by firing the game ball (so-called “right-hit”) aiming at the game area 1100 on the right side of the center role 2500. Playing is the best game method for the player.

  Here, the second starting port 2102 of this embodiment is provided downstream of the gaming area 1100 on the right side of the center role item 2500. Therefore, the right-hitting game ball reaches the second starting port 2102 after flowing down the movable area of the movable piece 2111 of the special winning gate 2101b and the special winning port 2101b, but reaches the second starting port 2102. Even after passing through 2301, there is no occurrence of a per-drawing (that is, an easy winning state of the special winning opening 2101b by the operation of the movable piece 2111). Accordingly, a game ball that is right-hit in the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode) almost wins the second starting port 2102.

  Therefore, in the high-probability non-time saving game state, the second special symbol lottery based on winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is mainly executed. The execution of the first special symbol lottery is limited to the first special symbol lottery held in the gaming state before the transition when the gaming state transitions. Then, when the result of the special symbol lottery in the main gaming state is not a big hit for 70 consecutive times, the game shifts to the normal gaming state (normal mode). In addition, if any of the jackpot results is derived before the special symbol lottery is executed 70 times, the ST count is reset to 70 times and the main game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state) is set. continue.

  In the second special symbol lottery in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, if a big hit is not derived with a probability of 1/45, a small hit is always derived. Then, in the small hitting game generated at this time, the player can acquire a small number of game balls (for example, 30 balls) as prize balls, which is less than the number of game balls obtainable in the big hit game. Therefore, in the main game state, the player can acquire the prize ball by the small hit game every time the second special symbol lottery is executed until the next big hit. And, in this game state, a maximum of 70 small hit games can be continuously generated. That is, a series of games in the second special symbol until the next big hit occurs becomes a privilege game in which a prize ball can be acquired.

  It should be noted that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state are set to a short time (1 second). In this game state, the execution of the second special symbol lottery is recommended, so that the variation time of the first special symbol is set to a long time (600 seconds) so that it takes time until the result of the first special symbol lottery is determined. It is also possible to do. However, in the present embodiment, the period during which the probability change function is provided is controlled by the number of times of execution of the special symbol (the number of STs), and the number of STs is counted at the start of the special symbol. For this reason, when the variation time of the first special symbol to which the probability change function is to be given is long, a case where the first special symbol is provided with the probability change function but the second special symbol is not provided with the probability change function Can occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol to the same short time as the second special symbol, the probability state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the simultaneous fluctuation state are different. Occurrence (obfuscation of termination of probable change state) is prevented. In addition, as a modified example, when the end of the provision period of the probability change function is controlled until the occurrence of the next big hit, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the present game state may be set to a long time. In the present embodiment, when one special symbol lottery derives a big hit, the other special symbol lottery that is simultaneously changing can be forcibly stopped, so that the end of the probable change state as described above is unclear. No transformation occurs.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode), a prize ball can be acquired in a series of small hit games of the second special symbol even if a big hit is not derived, and the total number of prize balls Is larger than the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game that occurs in the same mode. Therefore, the most advantageous game state for the player is not the high-probability time-saving game state (rush preparation mode, first advantageous game state) but the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state).

  The high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode) is a gaming state that can be generated when the first big hit B is derived in the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, the player first sets the normal gaming state (normal mode) or the high In a certain time saving game state (rush preparatory mode), a game aiming at winning of a game ball to the first starting port 2101 is performed. Then, when the gaming state shifts to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode) triggered by the occurrence of the first big hit B, the player then performs a game aimed at winning the gaming ball to the second starting port 2102. Do.

[Control timing chart for each game state]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the game on the first special symbol side (first special symbol) and the game on the second special symbol side (second special symbol) can be simultaneously changed. However, a big hit game or a small hit game using the attacker device 2100 cannot be generated in both games in an overlapping manner. Therefore, with reference to FIG. 148 and FIG. 149, the timing of the simultaneous variation control in each game state will be described.

(Simultaneous fluctuation control timing chart)
FIG. 148 is an example of a timing chart illustrating the simultaneous variation control of the present embodiment. FIG. 148 (A) is an example of the interlock stop control of the second interlock setting process (FIG. 142) in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and FIG. 148 (B) is the first interlock setting process (FIG. 133) in the rush mode. 9) is an example of the interlock stop control of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (A), in the normal mode (normal game state) and the rush preparation mode (high-precision time-short game state), if a game ball wins in the second starting port 2102, the second special symbol changes. The time (second fluctuation time) is set to 600 seconds, and the long-term fluctuation is started. Then, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a or special winning port 2101b), the fluctuating time of the first special symbol (first fluctuating time) is set to 30 seconds to 60 seconds, and the first special symbol is changed to 30 seconds to 60 seconds. The change of one special symbol is executed.

  In the game on the first special symbol side, when a big hit is derived, the change is stopped at the first big symbol stop symbol (step S502a), and the game on the second special symbol side is linked to the first special symbol side. The linked flag (second linked flag) to be set is set to the ON state (step S505a). Then, the first big hit game is executed (steps S190a, S200a).

  Then, in the game on the second special symbol side, in response to the second interlock flag being turned on, the second interlock setting process (step S250b, FIG. 142) is executed, and the changing second special symbol is displayed. A stop is forcibly displayed with a stop symbol (step S1003b).

  Here, when the first big hit game using the attacker device 2100 on the first special symbol side is executed, the second interlocking flag indicates a big hit game or a small hit game on which the attacker device 2100 is similarly used on the second special symbol side. This flag is provided to avoid the execution of the game, but is also necessary to prepare for entering the rush mode.

  Specifically, in the normal mode (normal game state) and the rush preparation mode (high-precision time-short game state), when the first big hit B occurs, the game state after the end of the first big hit game is changed to the rush mode (high game state). (Non-time saving game state). In the rush mode after the transition, the game on the second special symbol side based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 becomes mainstream. At this time, if the change of the second special symbol started before the shift is continued, the game on the second special symbol side waits for the change to be stopped and enters a standby state. Therefore, the second interlocking flag is a flag necessary for starting the game in the rush mode without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (B), immediately after shifting to the rush mode (high-precision non-time saving gaming state), the fluctuation of the first special symbol held in the gaming state before shifting is executed. At this time, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to a short time (1 second). And in the rush mode, the game of the second special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is the mainstream. The second starting port 2102 is a winning port where even a game beginner can win a prize by right-handing, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 1 second, so that the fluctuation of the second special symbol frequently occurs. The second special symbol that does not derive a big hit derives a small hit.

  Therefore, in the game on the second special symbol side, the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the small hitting game (the second small hitting game) are alternately repeated until the next big hit occurs. Then, each time the change of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (step S502b), an interlock flag (first interlock flag) for interlocking the game on the first special symbol with the second special symbol is set to an on state. (Step S532b). Then, the second small hitting game is executed (steps S230b and S240b), and when the second small hitting game ends, the first interlocking flag is returned to the off state (step S922b).

  In the game on the first special symbol side, a first interlock setting process (step S250a, FIG. 133) is executed in response to the first interlock flag being turned on. At this time, the first special symbol that has not started to change is set in a standby state so as not to start changing (step S1021a), and starts changing when the first interlocking flag is turned off (step S130a). In addition, the first special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed with a stop symbol that has come off (step S1003a).

  As described above, in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode in which the game on the first special symbol side is the mainstream, the execution frequency of the second interlock setting processing (FIG. 142) is high, and the rush mode in which the game on the second special symbol side is the mainstream. , The execution frequency of the first linkage setting process (FIG. 133) is high. In the present embodiment, since there is a concern that a hit game may occur between a game on the first special symbol side and a game on the second special symbol side, the game on one side is avoided in order to avoid this. When a win is obtained, the game on the other side is controlled by the interlocking setting process at that time.

(Game mode transition timing chart)
FIG. 149 is an example of a timing chart showing an ideal game mode transition in the present embodiment.

  When the player starts a game in an initial state of the pachinko machine 1 such as a state where the RAM of the pachinko machine 1 is cleared, first, the normal mode starts. In the normal mode, it is best for the player to make a left-hand shot to aim at the always winning port 2101a of the first starting port 2101. Here, the launching force of the game ball at the start of the hit is too strong and the ball is right-handed. When the game ball wins the second starting port 2102, the variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol is long. Long-term fluctuations are performed.

  After that, when the player adjusts the firing force and makes a left-handed hit, and the game ball wins the regular winning port 2101a of the first starting port 2101, the first special symbol is changed. The variation time (first variation time) at this time is 30 seconds to 60 seconds depending on the variation pattern selected. In the game on the first special symbol side, a first special symbol lottery in which a big hit is won with a probability of 1/399 is executed. Then, when the first big hit A is won, the fluctuation is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol A, and the first big hit game is executed. At this time, since the second interlocking flag is set to the ON state, the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the long-time fluctuation state is forcibly stopped and displayed at the undesignated symbol. Then, the second interlock flag is returned to the off state with the end of the first big hit game, and the game mode shifts from the normal mode to the rush preparation mode.

  In the rush preparation mode, it is best for the player to strike right and aim at the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101. Further, in the rush preparation mode, a certainty changing function of performing 70 times of ST and a time saving function of performing a prize assist control for facilitating a prize in the special prize port 2101b are provided.

  When the player makes a right hit and a game ball wins in the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101, the first special symbol is changed. The variation time (first variation time) at this time is 30 seconds to 60 seconds depending on the variation pattern selected. In the game on the first special symbol side, a first special symbol lottery in which a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/45 is executed. Then, at the start of the change of the first special symbol, the ST count is decremented and updated by one. Then, if the first big hit B is won when the count of the ST count is 68, the fluctuation is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol B, and the first big hit game is executed. At this time, the second interlocking flag is set to the ON state, but the state is maintained because the change of the second special symbol is not executed. Then, at the end of the first big hit game, the second interlocking flag is returned to the off state, and the game mode shifts from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode.

  In the rush mode, it is best for the player to strike right and aim at the second starting port 2102. Further, in the rush mode, the time saving function is not provided, and only the certainty changing function with 70 ST times is provided. Here, the ST count at which the count value at the end of the rush preparation mode is 68 is counted again from the count value of 70.

  Here, the player continues to make a right strike. The game ball hit right does not win the special winning opening 2101b because the time saving function does not operate, and wins the second starting opening 2102 further below. Since a prize to the second starting port 2102 is easy even for a game beginner, a prize of a game ball to the second starting port 2102 frequently occurs. At this time, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (second fluctuation time) is set to 1 second, so that the fluctuation of the second special symbol is frequently executed.

  In the game on the second special symbol side, a second special symbol lottery is executed in which a large hit is won with a probability of 1/45, and if the big hit is not won, a small hit is won. Then, at the start of the change of the second special symbol, the ST count is decremented and updated by one. If a small hit is a result of the second special symbol lottery, the change is stopped and displayed in the small hit symbol C, and the second small hit game is executed. At this time, while the second small hitting game is being executed, the first interlocking flag is set to the ON state.

  Immediately after the start of the rush mode, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b generated in the rush preparation mode before the transition is in a holding state, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is changed. Will be executed.

  In the game on the first special symbol side, a first special symbol lottery in which a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/45 is executed. At this time, the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is set to 1 second. In the rush mode, in the game on the second special symbol side, the small hitting game frequently occurs, so that the first interlocking flag is also frequently set to the ON state. Therefore, if the first special symbol is changing when the second special symbol is stopped, the stop symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, the first interlock flag is returned to the off state at the end of the second small hitting game, so that the next change of the first special symbol is started. Then, the ST number is also decremented and updated by one at the start of the change of the first special symbol.

  As described above, immediately after the start of the rush mode, the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the fluctuation of the second special symbol are efficiently executed in a short time, so that the speed of subtracting the number of STs is fast. Until the count value of the ST count becomes 0 or the next big hit is won, the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the second small hit game are alternately and repeatedly executed.

  In the rush mode of the present embodiment, when the big hit is not won in the second special symbol lottery, the small hit is won, so the second small hit game frequently occurs. The number of prize balls that can be acquired during the rush mode is 2,100 when the number of small hits of the ST number (70) is 30 when the number of prize balls in one second small hit game is 30. This is larger than the maximum number of prize balls (2000 balls) that can be obtained in the jackpot game of the present embodiment. Accordingly, a series of second small hit games in the rush mode can be privilege games equivalent to the big hit games. Also, during the rush mode, there is a possibility that the game will be a big hit with a probability of 1/45, so the rush mode is the most advantageous (to be aimed) game mode for the player.

  Note that it is highly likely that the ST number in the rush mode will be more beneficial to the player if the ST number is consumed by the change number of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is preferable that the first special symbol in the hold state is not carried over to the rush mode. Therefore, when the transition to the rush mode is determined, that is, when it is determined that the first big hit B is won in the game mode before the transition, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 is suppressed. Control may be performed. For example, the operation of the movable piece 2111 may be controlled so as to stop the operation of the time saving function for assisting winning in the special winning opening 2101b or to reduce the winning assist function. Also, some notification effects may be performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[Control on peripheral control board side]
Next, with reference to FIG. 150 and FIG. 151, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described.

[Sub main processing]
FIG. 150 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the sub-main process according to the present embodiment. The sub main process is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

  When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first performs an initialization process (step S3001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing a RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. Then, when the initialization processing ends, a loop processing for monitoring whether the 16 ms elapsed flag T has been set to “1” is started (step S3002).

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every time 2 ms elapses, and executes the 2 ms steady processing. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter has elapsed. A process of resetting the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (setting it to 0) while setting the flag T is executed. As described above, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to “0”.

  When the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set to “1” (YES in step S3002), the peripheral control MPU 4140a resets the 16 ms elapsed flag T to “0” (step S3003), and then performs the 16 ms steady processing. Execute (step S3004). In the 16 ms regular process, a process of controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, lamps / LEDs, speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like based on a command received from the main control board 4100 is executed.

  After finishing the 16 ms regular process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a returns to the process of step S3002 again, and repeats the processes of steps S3003 to S3004 described above every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms.

  On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set to “1” (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”) (NO in step S3002), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set. Perform loop processing.

[16ms steady processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the 16-ms regular process (step S3004) executed every 16 ms in the above-described sub-main process (FIG. 150) will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the 16-ms regular processing according to the present embodiment.

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes a command analysis process of analyzing a command received from the main control board 4100 (Step S3101). Next, an effect control process for controlling the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the control command (the received fluctuation pattern command or the like) analyzed in the above-described command analysis process is executed (step S3102).

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes a sound control process for controlling sounds output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 (step S3103). Next, a lamp control process for controlling the effect of the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed (step S3104). In addition, information for executing an effect such as a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp drive substrate 3041 and a process of transmitting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units to the motor drive substrate 3045 is output. An information output process is performed (step S3105). Thereafter, a random number update process for updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process of step S3102 is executed (step S3106), and the 16 ms steady process ends.

  It should be noted that the 16 ms steady-state processing usually ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start to the end of the 16 ms steady processing, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the 16 ms steady processing from the beginning (the processing of step S3101) when 16 ms elapses from the start of the processing. Never. That is, when 16 ms elapses during the execution of the 16 ms steady-state process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set in the sub-main process (step S3002), and the 16 ms elapse flag is set in the sub-main process after the end of the 16 ms steady process. When it is determined (YES in step S3002), the next 16 ms steady processing is started.

  In the present embodiment, the random number updating process (step S3106) is executed in the 16-ms regular process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is not limited to this. is not. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing and the 16 ms steady processing in the above-described sub-main processing (FIG. 150).

(Effect of this embodiment)
According to this embodiment, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, the special winning port 2101b) and the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102. It has a control structure capable of simultaneously changing two special symbols, and a player can aim at a prize area (always a prize port 2101a, a special prize port 2101b, a second starting port 2102) or a game ball driving operation in accordance with a game state. A plurality of game states are provided so that (right-handed (second game state) and left-handed (first game state)) are different. In the present embodiment, by providing the function display unit 1180 with the gaming state indicator 1183 including an LED capable of clearly notifying the timing of performing “right strike” (second gaming state) to the player, Also, it is possible to smoothly switch the way of hitting (hitting operation) in accordance with the transition of the game state without mistakenly hitting "left hitting" and "right hitting".

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits a control signal for controlling the game state display 1183 to the peripheral control section 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010, so that the player can “right-click” on the liquid crystal display device 1900. You may be notified. Usually, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is arranged in front view (beyond the front line of sight) of the player. Therefore, when “right hit” is notified on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player can switch to an appropriate hitting method (driving operation) without shifting his / her line of sight to the left end (function display unit 1180) in front view. It becomes possible.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the plurality of gaming states include a normal gaming state (normal mode), a highly accurate time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode), and a highly accurate non-time saving gaming state (rush mode). Then, in the rush mode, every time a second special symbol lottery is performed based on winning of a game ball to the second starting port 2102, which is easy for even a game beginner to win, a prize ball acquisition opportunity (small hit game or Jackpot game) is given. Also, in the rush mode, the number of game balls that can be obtained by the player tends to be higher in the ratio of the number of game balls obtainable in the small hit game than in the big hit game. Accordingly, since a series of small hit games in the rush mode can be expected to provide more game balls than the big hit game, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game related to the small hit game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the rush mode (second advantageous game state) in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state is a high-accuracy time-saving game state (rush preparation mode) that activates the time-saving function that is generally advantageous to the player. Mode, the first advantageous gaming state). When the current game mode is the rush mode (high-precision non-time saving game state), even if the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (first big hit A) that activates the time saving function, the time saving function is not performed. Control to continue the rush mode without operating. Since a game that overturns the existing concept that the time reduction function is activated (given) is more advantageous to the player can be provided by the small hit game of the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b) and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102. In the case where the second special symbol is simultaneously changed, if one of the hits (big hit or small hit) is derived, the other one being changed is forcibly stopped and displayed with a missing symbol. This avoids overlapping between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side, and before and after the transition to another game state triggered by the big hit And the other variation is prevented from being executed.

(2nd Embodiment)
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention has a first special symbol based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b) and a game ball to the second starting port 2102. Has a control structure capable of simultaneously changing the second special symbol based on the winning. In such simultaneous variable control, a specific game (small hitting game, big hitting game) is prevented from occurring repeatedly between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side. Control is required. In the first embodiment described above, when one special symbol stops changing with a stop symbol indicating a specified result (small hit, big hit), if the other special symbol is changing, the stopped symbol is replaced with a missing symbol. By controlling such that the other special symbol does not fluctuate during the specific game, a control structure capable of simultaneously fluctuating is formed.

  In the second embodiment, various control patterns of a control structure that can be simultaneously varied will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 186.

[Game board]
FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. Members having the same functions as those of the game board 4 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 114) are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. Here, a characteristic configuration of the game board 4 of the second embodiment will be described.

  In the game area on the right side of the center role 2500 of the second embodiment, a general-purpose gate 2301, a second starting port 2102, a special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101, and a large winning port 2103 are arranged in order from the upstream. ing.

  In this embodiment, the game ball that has flowed down the right passage 2545 first reaches the general-purpose gate 2301. Then, when the game ball passes through the general symbol gate 2301, a normal symbol lottery is executed. In addition, a second starting port 2102 is provided below the general-purpose gate 2301. The second starting port is provided so as to be able to receive game balls that have passed through the gate 2301 and game balls that have not passed. When a game ball is received in the second starting port 2102, a second special symbol lottery is executed if a predetermined special starting condition is satisfied.

  A special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 is provided directly below the second starting port 2102. The special winning opening 2101b is provided with a pair of movable members (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 which open in an inverted “C” shape at the upper portion and convert the gaming ball into a state in which it can be easily received (an easily accepted state). The pair of movable members 2111 normally keeps a closed state (a disadvantageous state for a player) with an interval of about the diameter of a game ball. The special winning port 2101b is provided with the second starting port 2102 above, so that the game ball cannot be received when the movable member 2111 is in the closed state. The movable member 2111 is converted from the closed state to the easy-to-accept state when the normal symbol lottery is won, whereby the acceptance of the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b is allowed. When a game ball is received in the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101, the first special symbol lottery is executed if a predetermined special starting condition is satisfied.

  In addition, below the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101, the hit of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery serves as an opening operation trigger, and during operation, game balls flowing down the right passage 2545 can be received. An attacker device 2100 is provided. The attacker device 2100 according to the present embodiment is a so-called combia tacker device that opens the special winning opening 2103 by opening and closing two opening and closing members (a first opening and closing member 2106a and a second opening and closing member 2106b) that slide in the front-rear direction. Details of the attacker device 2100 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, the function display unit 1180 of the present embodiment is disposed at the lower left portion of the front surface of the front component 1110 and outside the outer rail 1111. In the function display unit 1180, in the first embodiment, the game state display 1183 is provided with an LED capable of clearly notifying the timing of performing “right strike” (second game state), but in the present embodiment, the game state display is provided. A right-handed state indicator 1192 is provided separately from the device 1183. Details of the function display unit 1180 of this embodiment will be described later with reference to FIG. 153 (B).

  In the present embodiment, a 7-segment display 1920 is provided at the upper right portion of the center role 2500 and at the upper right of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The display of the 7-segment display 1920 is controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920, respectively, according to the gaming state. Details of the 7-segment display 1920 will be described later with reference to FIG. 153 (C).

  As described above, the game board 4 of the present embodiment and the game board 4 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 114) are different from each other in the configuration as described above, but their playability (recommended game mode transition). The driving operation recommended in the game mode) is the same.

  Next, configurations of the attacker device 2100, the function display unit 1180, and the 7-segment display 1920 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Attacker device]
FIG. 153 (A) is a simplified structural diagram of an attacker device 2100 provided on the game board 4 of the second embodiment.

  The attacker device 2100 includes a special winning opening 2103, a first opening / closing member 2106a and a second opening / closing member 2106b operable between a closed state and an open state, and an attacker driving mechanism 2121 (FIG. 118) for driving the opening / closing member of the second opening / closing member. Reference). The attacker device 2100 of this embodiment is characterized in that one large winning opening 2103 is provided with two opening / closing members (a first opening / closing member 2106a and a second opening / closing member 2106b).

  The first opening / closing member 2106a and the second opening / closing member 2106b normally maintain a closed state that closes the special winning opening 2103 so that game balls cannot be received in the special winning opening 2103. It is configured as a part of a guiding flow path 2110 for guiding a game ball flowing down the right game area to a game area below the center role 2500.

  Then, when a win occurs in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, after the variable display related to the lottery is completed, the drive control of the attacker driving mechanism 2121 is performed, and the first opening / closing member 2106a and the second opening / closing are performed. The sliding operation of the member 2106b in the front-rear direction is performed. The opening and closing operations of the first opening and closing member 2106a and the second opening and closing member 2106b are controlled at the same timing.

  Here, the first opening / closing member 2106a and the second opening / closing member 2106b are arranged side by side at an interval on the upstream side and the downstream side of the guide flow path 2110. That is, the special winning opening 2103 has two openings that can receive game balls when the opening state is established. The special winning opening 2103 is configured such that it receives the game balls from either of the openings and merges therein, and the reception of the game balls is detected by one count sensor 2122a.

  As described above, the attacker device 2100 of the present embodiment is configured to open the large winning opening 2103 by opening the first opening / closing member 2106a on the upstream side and the second opening / closing member 2106b on the downstream side. There is a combat tacker structure that allows a plurality of game balls that roll from the upstream to the downstream in the guide channel 2110 by opening each time to be received in the special winning opening 2103.

[Function display unit]
FIG. 153 (B) is an enlarged front view of a function display unit 1180 provided on the game board 4 of the second embodiment. The function display unit 1180 is controlled by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

  The function display unit 1180 of the present embodiment is provided with a right-handed state indicator 1192 including two LEDs for indicating that it is time to perform “right-handed” above the display unit 1181. Below the right strike state display 1192, four LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2103 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "hit". A first special symbol storage display 1184 comprising a round display 1190 comprising a plurality of LEDs and a plurality of LEDs disposed below the round display 1190 for displaying the number of reserves for accepting game balls in the first starting port 2101. And a lottery result of the first special symbol (first special lottery result) which is arranged on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and which is randomly selected by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2101 as a first special symbol. A first special symbol display 1185 including eight LED groups for display is provided. In addition, below the first special symbol display 1185, a second special symbol storage display 1187 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves for accepting game balls to the second starting port 2102, A second lottery result (second special lottery result) of the second special symbol, which is arranged on the left side of the special symbol memory display 1187 and is drawn by receiving game balls into the second starting port 2102, is displayed as a second special symbol. A second special symbol display 1186 comprising eight LED groups is provided.

  Also, below the display section 1181, a game state indicator 1183 made up of two LEDs for displaying the game state, and a normal symbol made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves related to passing through the general-purpose gate 2301. A storage display 1188 and a normal symbol display 1189 made up of two LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn as the game ball passes through the general symbol gate 2301 as a normal symbol are provided side by side. I have.

  The right-handed state indicator 1192 of this embodiment turns on the LED when it is time to perform “right-handed” (second game state), and notifies the player of “right-handed”. Note that the LED is turned off when it is time to perform “left hit” (first gaming state).

  In the present embodiment, if it is detected that a game ball has passed to the general-purpose gate 2301 due to “right-handing” at the timing of “left-handing”, a signal that warns the player is sent to the main control board. 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010. Then, the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 displays a message warning that the liquid crystal display device 1900 should return to the left-hand mode, and emits an alarm sound for several seconds (for example, 10 seconds). After that, if "right hit" is detected, penalty control for imposing a predetermined penalty disadvantageous to the player is performed.

[7-segment display]
FIG. 153 (C) is an enlarged front view of a 7-segment display 1920 provided on the game board 4 of the second embodiment. The 7-segment display 1920 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010.

  The 7-segment display 1920 displays a change display (lottery process) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and information on the number of reservations. On the 7-segment display 1920, a first special symbol display section 1921 composed of 7-segment LEDs for displaying a variable display (lottery result) of the first special symbol, and a display section for displaying the number of reserved first special symbols. A first special symbol storage display unit 1922 composed of two LEDs, a fourth symbol display unit 1923 composed of one LED for displaying a fourth symbol relating to the variable display of the first special symbol, and a variation of the second special symbol. A second special symbol display unit 1924 composed of 7-segment LEDs for displaying a display (lottery result), and a second special symbol storage display unit 1925 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserved second special symbols. And a fourth symbol display section 1926 comprising one LED for displaying a fourth symbol relating to the variable display of the second special symbol.

  The 7-segment LED constituting the first special symbol display portion 1921 and the second special symbol display portion 1924 indicates that the variable display is being performed by repeating the lighting and extinguishing (ie, blinking) of each segment in order, and according to the result, a predetermined value is displayed. The variation result (lottery result) is displayed by lighting the segment. During standby, the same segment as when the lottery result is out is lit.

  The two LEDs constituting the first special symbol storage display unit 1922 are turned off when the number of reservations is “0”, the upper LED is turned on when the number of reservations is “1”, the lower LED is turned off, When the hold number is “2”, both LEDs light up, when the hold number is “3”, the upper LED blinks, the lower LED lights up, and when the hold number is “4”, both LEDs turn on. Flashes.

  Two LEDs constituting the second special symbol storage display unit 1925 are turned off when the number of reservations is “0”, the upper LED is turned on when the number of reservations is “1”, and the lower LED is turned off, When the number of reservations is “2”, both LEDs are turned on. In the present embodiment, it is possible to store "1" second special symbols on hold.

  One LED constituting the fourth symbol display portions 1923 and 1926 can emit red and green light instead of monochromatic light, and repeatedly turns on and off in red during the fluctuation display, and turns green when the fluctuation result is out of order. It lights up and lights up in red when the fluctuation result is a hit (big hit, small hit).

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (normal mode) and the high-precision time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode), the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the variable display of the second special symbol. Is displayed on the 7-segment display 1920. When the gaming state is the high-precision non-time saving gaming state (rush mode), the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed on the 7-segment display 1920, and the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is done.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the display device that displays the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is switched according to the gaming state. Note that the transition of the gaming state is triggered by a jackpot in the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, or by the end of the assigned ST count. When the big hit is triggered, the special symbols to be displayed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the 7-segment display 1920 are switched after the big hit game ends. When the end of the ST count is used as an opportunity, when the final variation of the ST ends and the probable change flag is set to OFF (step S513a in FIG. 129 and step S513b in FIG. 137), the liquid crystal display devices 1900 and 1900 The seg display 1920 switches a special symbol to be displayed.

[Game specifications of special design]
Next, FIG. 154 is an example of various tables showing game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the second embodiment. Here, the specifications different from the game specifications (FIG. 146) in the first embodiment will be described.

  First, as shown in FIGS. 154 (A) and 154 (B), in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probable change state is 1/51 for both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. In addition, the small hit winning probability is always 1/3.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 154 (C), there are four types of big hits and there is no change, but the presence or absence of the time-saving function is different depending on the winning game state. In the present embodiment, the time-saving function is provided for the big hit other than the big hit B of the first special symbol. Therefore, the only way to enter the rush mode is with the big hit B of the first special symbol. Further, as shown in the above-described time-saving function setting process (FIG. 132), the time-saving function is not provided to the big hit that occurs in the rush mode.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (D), in this embodiment, the number of small hits increases. In the small hit according to the present embodiment, a second small hit D is provided in addition to the second small hit C that can be generated in the second special symbol lottery. The second small hit C and the second small hit D are different in the mode of opening the large winning opening 2103 in the small hit game. The opening pattern E has a short opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) and is opened only once, whereas the opening pattern F has a shorter opening time (for example, 0.9 seconds). ) Opened twice. When the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit, the second small hit C or the second small hit D occurs with a probability of 50%.

  It should be noted that, between the open pattern E and the open pattern F, the open pattern F can be expected to win the large winning opening 2103. As described above, the attacker device 2100 of the present embodiment has the large winning opening 2103 which can be opened at two locations, upstream and downstream, of the guiding flow path 2110 through which the game balls flow, and can receive the game balls, so that once Even if the opening time is short, the opening pattern F that is opened twice has a higher expectation of winning a game ball.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 154 (E), in the present embodiment, when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol differs according to the fluctuation result. The fluctuation time when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a hit is a shortened fluctuation of 5 seconds to 90 seconds, and the fluctuation time when the result is a loss is a long time fluctuation of 600 seconds. Further, when the game mode is the rush mode, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is a shortened fluctuation having a width of 1 second to 30 seconds.

[Transition of game state]
Next, FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating transition of a game state (game mode) according to the second embodiment. Here, a description will be given of specifications different from the transition of the gaming state (FIG. 147) in the first embodiment described above.

  In the first embodiment described above, the rush preparation mode can be shifted when the first big hit A (FIG. 146) occurs, but in the present embodiment, the first big hit A, the second big hit A and the second hit in the normal mode. The transition can be made in response to the occurrence of two big hits B (FIG. 154). The transition from the rush preparation mode to another game mode is due to the transition to the normal mode due to the fluctuation of the ST count or the transition to the rush mode due to the occurrence of the first big hit B. The transition from the rush preparation mode to another game mode (normal mode) is based on the change in ST times. In the rush mode, no matter which jackpot occurs, the mode does not shift.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the second special symbol lottery in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode derives a hit (small hit, big hit), the variation time is reduced by one second. Originally, the rush mode is a game mode that prompts a prize of a game ball to the second starting port 2102, but in this case, it is highly likely that a prize to the second starting port 2102 is aimed at in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode. Therefore, when the result of the second special symbol lottery derives a loss, a long time variation (600 seconds) is set, or even if the game ball is launched toward the attacker device 2100 after the small hit result is determined, the small variation is obtained. By setting the opening timing so as not to be in time for opening of the special winning opening 2103 in the winning game, or making it difficult to guess the opening pattern by providing a plurality of opening modes, the second mode in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode is set. Suppress the execution efficiency of special symbol lottery.

  In the present embodiment, the winning in the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101, that is, the game in the rush preparation mode in which “right-hand” is recommended is diversified. In the first embodiment, even if a game ball is won in the second starting port 2102 by "right-handing", the variation of the second special symbol is a long time, and therefore, only the variation of the first special symbol can be enjoyed substantially. Did not. However, in the present embodiment, the variation of the second special symbol in the rush preparation mode is short in deriving the hit result, and the short-term variation occurs with a probability of 1/3 or more. If the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit, a new ST count is given and the time saving function is continued. Therefore, it is possible to find interest in the fluctuation of the second special symbol, and the game characteristics in the rush preparation mode are improved.

[Control pattern]
Next, referring to FIG. 156, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b) and the game ball winning to the second starting port 2102. An outline of a control pattern in a control structure capable of simultaneously changing a second special symbol based on the control pattern will be described. FIG. 156 is a diagram for describing an outline of a control pattern of the simultaneous fluctuation control structure. Hereinafter, an outline of the four control patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 (A) to 156 (D).

  First, FIG. 156 (A) is a timing chart showing a basic control pattern. As described in the first embodiment, the basic control pattern is such that when one special symbol is a hit result, the other special symbol being changed is forcibly replaced with a loss result and the change is stopped. .

  For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (A), when the change of the second special symbol stops at the small hit stop symbol, the changing first special symbol is changed from the determined big hit stop symbol to a predetermined off stop symbol. Replace and stop fluctuating with the off stop symbol.

  Describing specifically according to the control processing of the first embodiment, in the second fluctuation processing (FIG. 137) relating to the second special symbol, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol times out, and the fluctuation occurs in the small hit stop symbol. Is stopped, the interlock flag of the first special symbol is set to ON (YES in step S501b → step S502b → step S503b → NO in step S504b → YES in step S531b → S532b). Thereby, in the first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) for the first special symbol, the first interlocking setting process is executed regardless of the progress of the change of the first special symbol (YES in step S100a → Step S250a).

  Then, in the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133), the fluctuating first special symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined outlier symbol (YES in step S1001a → step S1002a → step S1003a). Here, the process of determining whether or not the first special symbol is a hit (hit determination process) is a step of the first variation start process (FIG. 127) executed when the first special symbol starts to vary. The process is executed in S307a, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined together with the start of the change. Therefore, in the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133), the determined stop symbol (here, the big hit symbol) is replaced with a predetermined lost symbol.

  As described above, in the basic control pattern of the above-described first embodiment, the linkage flag for linking the game on the other special symbol to the one special symbol is turned on at the timing when one of the special symbols for deriving the hit stops fluctuating. Set to state. For this reason, the other special symbol generated during the change of one special symbol is forcibly determined by the interlocking stop control. (Lottery process) had to be executed.

  In the second embodiment, as another control of the basic control pattern of the first embodiment, an interlocking flag is set to an on state at a timing when a special symbol for deriving a hit starts to change, and the other special symbol is set to an interlocking flag when the change starts. An example will be described in which when the is set to the ON state, it is set so as not to perform the hit determination processing (without lottery) and to stop the fluctuation in a lost symbol.

  The details of the control processing of the basic control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 157 to 166.

  Next, FIG. 156 (B) is a timing chart showing a priority control pattern. The priority control pattern compares the results derived by both special symbols, and preferentially executes a special symbol that derives a result that is advantageous to the player, and stops the other special symbol from fluctuating at a missing symbol.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (B), when a change to derive a small hit is performed in the second special symbol and a change to derive a large hit in the first special symbol occurs, both lotteries are performed. As a result of the comparison, the first special symbol that derives a big hit that is advantageous to the player stops changing at the big hit symbol. Then, in the second special symbol, the determined small hit stop symbol is replaced with a predetermined loss stop symbol, and the second special symbol is fluctuated and stopped at the loss stop symbol.

  In this way, in the priority control pattern, a special symbol that changes at the same time according to the lottery result derived by the special symbol is determined as a priority special symbol, that is, a special symbol that derives a more advantageous result for the player is prioritized. Can be performed. In the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above, even if the special symbol is a big hit in the hit determination at the start of the change, if the other special symbol that is the small hit first stops the change, it is forcibly lost. Although it is set, such a special symbol that can be a big hit is not reluctantly missed. Therefore, the priority control pattern can maintain the original gaming ability of the gaming machine more than the basic control pattern.

  The details of the control processing of the priority control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, FIG. 156 (C) is a timing chart showing an interruption control pattern. The interruption control pattern is to interrupt the other special symbol while the hit game based on the hit result derived from the one special symbol is performed, and resume the fluctuation of the remaining time after the end of the hit game. It is.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (C), when the fluctuation for deriving the small hit is executed in the second special symbol and the fluctuation for deriving the large hit in the first special symbol is executed, the second special symbol is changed to the small hit. When the fluctuation stops at the symbol, the first special symbol suspends the temporary fluctuation. Then, the small hit game corresponding to the small hit result of the second special symbol is executed. During this time, the first special symbol stops changing. When the small hit game ends, the first special symbol resumes the suspended fluctuation.

  As described above, in the interruption control pattern, the generated first special symbol and the second special symbol can all be changed and executed as a result based on the obtained random numbers. In the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above, one of the special symbols that fluctuates simultaneously is forcibly set to be off regardless of the obtained random number. However, in the interrupt control pattern, the result of the special symbol acquired by the player ( The hit determination result based on the random number) is not overturned. Therefore, the interruption control pattern can maintain the original gaming characteristics of the gaming machine more than the above-described priority control pattern. In addition, the effect in the fluctuation at the time of resumption can make the first special symbol and the second special symbol appear to be related to the hit game, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The details of the control processing of the interruption control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 176 to 181.

  Next, FIG. 156 (D) is a timing chart showing a reset control pattern. The reset control pattern is for resetting the remaining fluctuation time when resuming the interrupted special symbol based on the above-described interrupt control pattern.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (D), when the fluctuation for deriving the small hit is executed in the second special symbol and the fluctuation for deriving the big hit in the first special symbol is executed, the second special symbol is changed to the small hit. When the fluctuation stops at the symbol, the first special symbol suspends the temporary fluctuation. Then, the small hit game corresponding to the small hit result of the second special symbol is executed. During this time, the first special symbol stops changing. Up to this point, the control is the same as the above-described lottery control pattern. In the reset control pattern, when the small hitting game is finished and the first special symbol resumes the suspended fluctuation, the fluctuation is restarted after a new fluctuation time is set.

  As described above, in the reset control pattern, the degree of freedom in the effect in the fluctuation at the time of resumption increases more than in the above-described interruption control pattern, so that the interest of the game can be further enhanced. In addition, a recommended game can be provided by setting the fluctuation time at the time of restart according to the game situation.

  The details of the control processing of the reset control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Basic control pattern>
Subsequently, a characteristic control process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

  In the basic control pattern of the second embodiment, the forced off flag of the other special symbol is set to the ON state at the timing when the special symbol for deriving a hit starts to fluctuate. If it is in the ON state, it is characterized by a control structure in which it does not perform a hit determination process (without lottery) and stops changing with a lost symbol.

[First fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 157 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the first change start process in the basic control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the first variation start process (FIG. 127) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  After executing the processing of step S306a, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the forced off flag of the first special symbol for setting the first special symbol to non-lottery is on. (Step S311a). When the forced off flag of the first special symbol is not in the ON state (NO in step S311a), the processing of steps S307a and S308a of performing the lottery of the first special symbol and setting the lottery result information is executed.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the flag indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery set in the processing of the above-described step S308a indicates a hit result (step S313a). If the flag indicates the hit result (YES in step S313a), the second special symbol forcible removal flag for changing the variation of the second special symbol generated during the variation of the first special symbol to the removal result is set. Is turned on (step S314a). On the other hand, if it is not the flag indicating the hit result, that is, if the flag indicates the loss result (NO in step S313a), the process proceeds to step S309a without executing the process in step S314a.

  On the other hand, when the forced off flag of the first special symbol is on (YES in step S311a), the main control MPU 4100a sets a flag indicating a result of the first special symbol loss and a deviation information command (step S311a). S312a). After that, the processing shifts to the processing of step S309a.

  As described above, in the first variation start process, when the first special symbol derives a hit result, the forced loss flag of the second special symbol is set to the ON state, so that it is generated after the first special symbol starts to vary. The second special symbol to be set is set so as to derive a deviation result in the non-lottery.

[First big hit game process]
FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first big hit game process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 1st big hit game process (FIG. 131) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the interlock flag and the forced off flag of the second special symbol to the off state when the first big hit game ends (Step S751a).

[First interlock setting process]
FIG. 159 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the first interlocking setting process in the basic control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the first interlock setting process (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  When the first special symbol is changing (step S1001a), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the lost symbol determined in the process of step S312a of the first change start process (FIG. 157) to the first. It is displayed on the special symbol display device (step S1101a). After that, the processing shifts to the processing of step S1004a.

[Second fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 160 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the second change start process in the basic control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the second variation start process (FIG. 135) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  After executing the processing of step S306b, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the forced off flag of the second special symbol for setting the second special symbol to non-lottery is on. (Step S311b). If the forced off flag of the second special symbol is not in the ON state (NO in step S311b), the processes of steps S307b and S308b of performing the lottery of the second special symbol and setting the lottery result information are executed.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the flag indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery set in the processing of the above-described step S308b indicates a hit result (step S313b). If the flag indicates a hit result (YES in step S313b), the first special symbol forcible removal flag for changing the variation of the first special symbol generated during the variation of the second special symbol to the removal result is set. Is turned on (step S314b). On the other hand, if it is not the flag indicating the hit result, that is, if it is the flag indicating the loss result (NO in step S313b), the process proceeds to step S309b without executing the process in step S314b.

  On the other hand, when the forced loss flag of the second special symbol is on (YES in step S311b), main control MPU 4100a sets a flag indicating a result of the second special symbol loss and a deviation information command (step S311b). S312b). After that, the processing shifts to the processing of step S309b.

  As described above, in the second variation start processing, when the second special symbol derives a hit result, the forced loss flag of the first special symbol is set to the ON state, so that the second special symbol is generated after the variation starts. The first special symbol to be set is set to derive a deviation result in the non-lottery.

[2nd jackpot game process]
FIG. 161 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the second big hit game process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 2nd big hit game process (FIG. 139) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the interlock flag and the forced off flag of the first special symbol to the off state when the second big hit game ends (step S751b).

[2nd small hit game process]
FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second small hitting game process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 2nd small hitting game process (FIG. 141) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the interlocking flag and the forced off flag of the first special symbol to the off state when the second small hitting game ends (step S951b).

[Second interlock setting process]
FIG. 163 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a second interlock setting process in the basic control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the second interlock setting process (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  When the second special symbol is changing (step S1001b), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 removes the lost symbol determined in the process of step S312b of the second change start process (FIG. 160). It is displayed on the special symbol display device (step S1101b). After that, the processing shifts to the processing of step S1004b.

[Right-hand penalty setting process]
Next, FIG. 164 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a right-hand penalty setting process in the basic control pattern according to the second embodiment. The right-handed penalty setting process is a process executed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 regarding a warning and a penalty for "right-handed" when it is time to perform "left-handed".

  In this processing, if "right-handed" is performed in the gaming state where "left-handed" is recommended, a warning is first issued, and if "right-handed" is performed after the warning, a penalty is imposed. Is set.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the current game mode is in the normal mode (low-probability non-time saving state) (step S1201). Then, if the game mode is the normal mode (YES in step S1201), it is determined whether or not “right-handed” has been detected (step S1202). Here, the detection of “right strike” means that the gate sensor 2303 detects the passage of a game ball to the general-purpose gate 2301 disposed in the game area on the right side of the center role 2500. Note that the detection of the reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 may be performed.

  The main control MPU 4100a ends the present process when the current game mode is not the normal mode (NO in step S1201) or when the right-handed is not detected even in the normal mode (NO in step S1202). I do.

  Then, when "right-handed" is detected (YES in step S1202), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a warning has been executed (step S1203). The warning is to notify the player to return to “left-handed”. Whether or not the warning has been executed may be determined by checking whether or not a warning executed flag set when a warning timer described later times out is in an on state.

  If the warning has not been executed (NO in step S1203), main control MPU 4100a sets a time (warning timer) for performing the warning (step S1204). Then, when the time of the warning timer expires (YES in step S1205), the warning execution completed flag is set to the ON state (step S1206), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the warning has been executed (YES in step S1203), main control MPU 4100a determines that “right-handed” is continued despite the warning, and thus penalizes for a predetermined period.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a sets a penalty timer which is a period for imposing a penalty (step S1211), and sets a forced off flag of the second special symbol to an on state (step S1212). Until the penalty timer times out (NO in step S1213), the forced off flag of the second special symbol is turned on.

  When the penalty timer times out (YES in step S1213), main control MPU 4100a sets the forced off flag and the warning execution completed flag of the second special symbol to the off state (step S1214), and ends the process.

  As described above, when “right-handed” is detected in the normal mode in which “left-handed” is recommended, first, a warning is issued to the player to return to “left-handed”. If the "right-handed" is still continued, a "penalty" is given to give a penalty period that results in a non-lottery result even if a game ball is won to the second starting port 2102. Then, since the player is notified (suggested) that the penalty has been imposed (see FIG. 166), the player can be guided to perform an appropriate driving operation according to the game mode.

  Next, a description will be given of a characteristic process of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010.

[Liquid crystal display processing]
FIG. 165 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a liquid crystal display process in the basic control pattern according to the second embodiment. The liquid crystal display process is one of the effect control processes (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 regarding the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the current game mode is the rush mode (high-precision non-time saving state) (step S3201). Then, if the current game mode is not the rush mode, that is, if it is the normal mode (low-probability non-time saving state) or the rush preparation mode (high-probability time saving state) (NO in step S3201), the main control MPU 4100a performs the second It is determined whether or not a hit change for deriving a hit result is executed on the special symbol side (step S3202). Then, when the hit change is executed on the second special symbol side (YES in step S3202), the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out (step S3203). On the other hand, when the hit change is not executed on the second special symbol side (NO in step S3202), a normal display effect is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (step S3204).

  Here, the blackout refers to a display effect in which the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is dark and noise is applied. The blackout is started when the special symbol to be changed and displayed on the 7-segment display 1920 starts changing to derive a hit result, and is continued until the hit symbol is determined by the change. Note that the special symbol displayed on the 7-segment display 1920 is due to winning of a game ball to a starting port which is not recommended to a player in the game mode. Therefore, the blackout can also be said to be a hit announcement effect for notifying that a hit change due to a special symbol not recommended in the game mode has occurred.

[Right-handed penalty notification processing]
FIG. 166 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a right-hand penalty notification process in the basic control pattern according to the second embodiment. The right-handed penalty notification processing relates to a warning and a penalty notification for “right-handed” when it is time to perform “left-handed”, and is one of the effect control processing (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010. One. This is an effect process corresponding to the right-handed penalty setting process (FIG. 164) executed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the current game mode is in the normal mode (low-probability non-time saving state) (step S3301). Then, when the game mode is the normal mode (YES in step S3301), it is determined whether or not "right-handed" is detected (step S3302). Here, the detection of “right strike” means that the gate sensor 2303 detects the passage of a game ball to the general-purpose gate 2301 disposed in the game area on the right side of the center role 2500. Note that the detection of the reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 may be performed.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a ends the process when the current game mode is not the normal mode (NO in step S3301) or when the right-handed is not detected even in the normal mode (NO in step S3302). I do.

  If “right-handed” is detected (YES in step S3302), peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether a warning has been executed (step S3303). Whether the warning has been executed may be confirmed by checking the state of the warning executed flag set on the main control MPU 4100a.

  If the warning has not been executed (NO in step S3303), peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a time (warning timer) for performing the warning (step S3304). The warning timer may obtain timer information from the main control MPU 4100a. Then, a warning notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 to display a message “Please return to left-handed” (step S3305). At this time, a warning sound may be sounded for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and a warning may be suggested. Until the warning timer expires (NO in step S3306), a warning notification is performed (step S3305), and when the warning timer expires (YES in step S3306), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if the warning has been executed (YES in step S3303), peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that “right-handed” has been continued despite the warning, and accordingly, main control MPU 4100a performs the predetermined operation. A period penalty will be imposed.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a penalty timer (Step S3311). Then, penalty notification for notifying that a penalty has been imposed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed (step S3312). The penalty notification is continued until the penalty timer expires, and when the penalty timer expires (YES in step S3313), this process ends.

<Effects of basic control pattern>
As described above, according to the basic control pattern of the present embodiment, the presence / absence of the interlock stop control is determined at the timing when the special symbol for deriving a hit starts to fluctuate. Without performing the determination process (without lottery), it is possible to stop the fluctuation with a lost symbol. Even if the hit determination processing is executed, useless processing can be omitted in the other special symbol for which the loss result is forcibly set, so that the processing load can be reduced.

<Priority control pattern>
Next, a characteristic control process in the priority control pattern according to the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

  In the priority control pattern, control is performed such that the first symbol and the second symbol are compared to derive a result that is advantageous to the player, and a special symbol that derives a result advantageous to the player is preferentially executed. Features a structure.

[First fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 167 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the first change start process in the priority control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the first variation start process (FIG. 127) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  After executing the processing of step S307a, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the current change of the first special symbol is a change advantageous to the player as compared with the change of the second special symbol. A first priority determination process is performed (step S321a). Details of the first priority determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a executes the process of step S308a and ends this process.

[First priority determination process]
FIG. 168 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the first priority determination process in the priority control pattern according to the second embodiment. The first priority determination process is executed as the process of step S321a of the above-described first variation start process (FIG. 167).

  First, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the second special symbol is changing (Step S361a). If there is no second special symbol that is changing (NO in step SS361a), there is no comparison target, and thus this process ends.

  If there is a fluctuating second special symbol (YES in step S361a), main control MPU 4100a acquires the result of the fluctuating second special symbol hit determination process (step S362a). The result is compared with the result of the hit determination process in step S307a of the change start process (FIG. 167) (step S363a).

  When the first special symbol is more advantageous for the player (YES in step S364a), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second special symbol is a loss result (step S365a). If the result is a miss (YES in step S365a), the process ends. On the other hand, when the result is not a loss result, that is, when the result is a small hit or a big hit (NO in step S365a), the forced off flag for forcibly removing the second special symbol is set to an on state (step S366a). ), End this processing.

  On the other hand, when the second special symbol is more advantageous for the player (NO in step S364a), the main control MPU 4100a sets the result of the first special symbol hit determination processing to be out (step S367a). ), End this processing.

  Thus, in the first priority determination process, if there is a changing second special symbol when the change is started in the first special symbol, it is determined which variation result is more advantageous for the player, If the first special symbol is advantageous, the second special symbol is determined to be a loss result. If the first special symbol is not advantageous, the first special symbol is determined to be a loss result. The winning game is not duplicated with the special symbol.

[First fluctuation processing]
FIG. 169 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the first changing process in the priority control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the first changing process (FIG. 129) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, after determining that the time of change of the first special symbol has timed up in the processing of step S501a, determines whether the forced off flag of the first special symbol is on. (Step S551a). The forced off flag of the first special symbol is set to the on state in the processing of step S366b of the second priority determination processing (FIG. 171) described later.

  Then, when the forced release flag of the first special symbol is on (YES in step S551a), the main control MPU 4100a replaces the stopped symbol of the first special symbol with the release and sets the forced release flag to the off state. It is set (step S552a).

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the stopped symbols determined in the process of step S502a on the first special symbol display device (the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920). Therefore, when the first special symbol during the change is replaced with a loss result by the second special symbol that has been started to change later, the stop symbol determined at the start of the change at the change stop timing of the first special symbol is removed. replace.

[First interlock setting process]
FIG. 170 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the first interlocking setting process in the priority control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the first interlock setting process (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the first special symbol is fluctuating in the process of step S1001a, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the forced off flag of the first special symbol is on (step S1111a). ). The forced off flag of the first special symbol is set to the on state in the processing of step S366b of the second priority determination processing (FIG. 171) described later.

  Then, when the forced off flag of the first special symbol is on (YES in step S1111a), the main control MPU 4100a replaces the stopped symbol of the first special symbol with the off, and turns off the forced off flag. It is set (step S1112a). If the forced off flag of the first special symbol is not in the ON state (NO in step S1111a), the first special symbol is lost in the hit determination process at the start of the change (step S307a of the first change start process). The result is.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the stop stop symbol determined in the processing of step S307a or step S1112a on the first special symbol display device (the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920) (step S1113a). Therefore, the first special symbol during the change is replaced with the loss result by the second special symbol which is changed later, and the change stop timing of the second special symbol is changed rather than the change stop timing of the first special symbol. If the timing is earlier, the stop symbol determined at the start of the fluctuation at the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol is replaced with a loss.

[Second fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 171 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the second change start process in the priority control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the second variation start process (FIG. 135) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  After executing the process of step S307b, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the current change of the second special symbol is a change advantageous to the player as compared with the change of the first special symbol. A second priority determination process is performed (step S321b). Details of the second priority determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a executes the process of step S308b, and ends the process.

[Second priority determination process]
FIG. 172 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the second priority determination process in the priority control pattern according to the second embodiment. The second priority determination process is executed as the process of step S321b of the above-described second variation start process (FIG. 171).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether the first special symbol is changing (step S361b). If there is no fluctuating first special symbol (NO in step SS361b), the process ends because there is no comparison target.

  If there is a fluctuating first special symbol (YES in step S361b), the main control MPU 4100a obtains the result of the fluctuating first special symbol hit determination process (step S362b), The result is compared with the result of the hit determination process in step S307b of the change start process (FIG. 171) (step S363b).

  If the second special symbol is more advantageous for the player (YES in step S364b), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the first special symbol is a result of the loss (step S365b). If the result is a miss (YES in step S365b), the process ends. On the other hand, when the result is not a loss result, that is, when the result is a big hit (NO in step S365b), a forced loss flag for forcibly removing the first special symbol is set to an ON state (step S366b). The process ends.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol is more advantageous to the player (NO in step S364b), the main control MPU 4100a sets the result of the second special symbol hit determination processing to be out (step S367b). ), End this processing.

  As described above, in the second priority determination process, if there is the first special symbol that is changing when the change is started in the second special symbol, it is determined which of the change results is advantageous to the player, If the second special symbol is advantageous, the first special symbol is determined to be a loss result, and if the second special symbol is not advantageous, the second special symbol is determined to be a loss result, thereby simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The winning game is not duplicated with the special symbol.

[Second fluctuation processing]
FIG. 173 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the second changing process in the priority control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the second changing process (FIG. 137) of the first embodiment, and the description is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, after determining that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has timed up in the process of step S501b, determines whether the forced off flag of the second special symbol is on. (Step S551b). The forced off flag of the second special symbol is set to the ON state in the processing of step S366a of the above-described first priority determination processing (FIG. 168).

  Then, when the forced off flag of the second special symbol is on (YES in step S551b), the main control MPU 4100a replaces the stopped symbol of the second special symbol with the off, and turns off the forced off flag. It is set (step S552b).

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the stopped symbol determined in the process of step S502b on the second special symbol display device (the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920). Therefore, when the changing second special symbol is replaced by the first special symbol that has been changed later, the stop symbol determined at the start of the change at the change stop timing of the second special symbol is changed to the wrong one. replace.

[Second interlock setting process]
FIG. 174 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the second interlocking setting process in the priority control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the second interlock setting process (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the second special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001b, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the forced off flag of the second special symbol is on (step S1111b). ). The forced off flag of the second special symbol is set to the ON state in the processing of step S366a of the above-described first priority determination processing (FIG. 168).

  Then, when the forced off flag of the second special symbol is on (YES in step S1111b), the main control MPU 4100a replaces the stopped symbol of the second special symbol with the off, and turns off the forced off flag. It is set (step S1112b). If the forced off flag of the second special symbol is not in the ON state (NO in step S1111b), the second special symbol is lost in the hit determination process at the start of the change (step S307b of the second change start process). The result is.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the missing stop symbol determined in the processing of step S307b or step S1112b on the second special symbol display device (the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920) (step S1113b). Therefore, the second special symbol during the change is replaced with the loss result by the first special symbol which is started to change later, and the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol. If the timing is earlier, the stop symbol determined at the start of the fluctuation at the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol is replaced with a loss.

  Next, a description will be given of a characteristic process of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010.

  As described above, the special symbol for which the forced off flag is set to the on state is replaced with the off stop symbol at the fluctuation stop timing. In such a special symbol, since the stop symbol before replacement is a hit (small hit, big hit), the display contents (reach effect, etc.) of the character and the like displayed during the change on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the change stop There is a possibility that a sense of incongruity may be generated with the display content (out) of. For example, it is unnatural if the character on the player side is dominant in battle battle and is suddenly switched to defeat even though it is near victory. Since many players recognize the fluctuation result by the effect display of characters and the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, it is desirable to avoid unnaturalness (unnaturalness) occurring in the transition of the effect display.

  Therefore, in the priority control pattern of the present embodiment, a process of delaying the special symbol change result notification timing (effect display indicating a loss) by the effect display of a character or the like on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is delayed from the special symbol change stop timing. Execute.

[Forced removal effect additional processing]
FIG. 175 (A) is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a forced off-effect presentation adding process in the priority control pattern according to the second embodiment. The forced-miss effect addition process is one of the effect control processes (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 for the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the forced off flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is on (step S3321). Here, the forced loss flag is set to an on state for a special symbol whose hit stop symbol is replaced with a loss stop symbol at the fluctuation stop timing. When the forced off flag of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is in the off state (NO in step S3321), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, when the forced off flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is on (YES in step S3321), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether the special symbol on which the forced off flag is set is on. It is determined whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1900 is a target to be variably displayed (step S3322). As described above, when the game mode is the normal mode or the rush preparation mode, the first special symbol is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and when the game mode is the rush mode, the second special symbol is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is displayed. If the special symbol for which the forced off flag is set to the ON state is not a target to be variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (NO in step S3322), the process ends.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4140a adds the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the special symbol with the forced off flag set to the ON state is to be variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (YES in step S3322). A loss notification effect is set (step S3323), and the process ends.

  Here, the additional loss notification effect is an effect of notifying the deviation in a predetermined period by an effect display of a character or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, an effect in which the character on the player side loses in the character's battle effect). Show. It should be noted that the display contents other than the decorative patterns displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are targeted.

  FIG. 175 (B) is a timing chart of the special symbol change and the effect display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the additional miss notification effect is set in the above-described forced loss effect adding process.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (B), the effect display corresponding to the special symbol that is switched from the hit stop symbol to the stop stop symbol at the change stop timing is selected based on the hit result, and the effect during the change is a game. There is a high possibility that the effect expected by the player (the character on the player side is dominant in the battle effect). Even if such an effect is executed, it is unnatural if a loss-determined effect (defeat of the player's character) is suddenly executed at the fluctuation stop timing. Therefore, after the special symbol change stop timing, an additional missing notification effect is executed. As a result, the effect transition from the expected effect (dominant) to the definitive effect (defeat) can be made an uncomfortable effect transition, and it is possible to provide an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable (unnatural).

<Effect of priority control pattern>
According to the priority control pattern of the second embodiment, a special symbol that derives a result advantageous to the player by comparing results derived from the first special symbol and the second special symbol is preferentially executed, and the other special symbol is Since the variation stops at the loss symbol, a special symbol for deriving the big hit at the variation stop timing as in the basic control pattern is not processed as the loss result. Therefore, the priority control pattern can maintain the original gaming property (game property) of the gaming machine more than the basic control pattern.

  In the priority control pattern of the present embodiment, the first symbol and the second symbol are compared to derive the result, and the special symbol that derives a result advantageous to the player is preferentially executed. Not limited to When deriving a big hit together, a special symbol that has started to fluctuate first may be prioritized, or a priority result may be ranked according to the game mode, and a special symbol prioritized may be determined according to the ranking. .

  In addition, when an effect of a special symbol that is a forced loss is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, an additional error notification effect is set so that the character display effect ends with a delay from the special symbol change stop timing. As a result, even in the effect display accompanying the hit result, it is possible to make a transition to the effect display for deriving the loss result, so that the player reading the result from the effect display of the character or the like can recognize the loss without a sense of incongruity. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing due to the unusual effect display.

<Interruption control pattern>
Subsequently, a characteristic control process in the interruption control pattern according to the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

  The interruption control pattern is characterized by a control structure in which, while a hit game based on a hit result derived from one of the special symbols is being performed, the other special symbol interrupts the change and resumes the remaining change after the end of the relevant game. I do.

[1st special symbol control process]
FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol control process in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends this processing when the interlock flag of the first special symbol is on in the processing of step S100a. In the above-described first embodiment, the first interlocking setting process (step S250a, FIG. 133) for forcibly removing the first special symbol and stopping the variation with the symbol is executed. 2 While the hit game is being played on the special symbol side, the game on the first special symbol side is interrupted (temporarily stopped) as it is, so no processing is performed.

[Second special symbol control process]
FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second special symbol control process in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends this processing when the interlock flag of the second special symbol is on in the processing of step S100b. In the above-described first embodiment, the second interlocking setting process (step S250b, FIG. 142) for forcibly removing the second special symbol and stopping the change in the symbol is executed. While the winning game is being played on the first special symbol side, the game on the second special symbol side is interrupted (temporarily stopped) as it is, so no processing is performed.

  Next, a description will be given of a characteristic process of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010.

  As described above, in the interruption control pattern, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is interrupted with the occurrence of a hit game on one special symbol side, but if the effect performed before the interruption is continued as the effect after resumption, the corresponding game There is a possibility that it is not appropriate as a later production.

  Therefore, in the interruption control pattern of the present embodiment, a resumption effect change process for changing the effect after resumption of the interrupted special symbol from the specified effect selected at the start of the change and performed before the interruption is executed.

[Resumed production change processing]
FIG. 178 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the restart effect change processing in the interruption control pattern according to the second embodiment. The restart effect change process is one of the effect control processes (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 regarding the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not a current hit game is being played (step S3331). In the present embodiment, the linkage flag is set to an on state at the start of a hit game, and is set to an off state at the end of the game. Therefore, it may be determined whether the interlocking flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set to the ON state. If the hit game is not in progress (NO in step S3331), the process ends because there is no suspended change to be the effect change.

  Next, if a hit game is being played (YES in step S3331), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not there is a suspended change (step S3332). This can be determined by determining whether the first processing flag or the second processing flag is “2”. When the processing during the first fluctuation (FIG. 129) or the processing during the second fluctuation (FIG. 137) is executed (that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing), the first processing flag or the second processing flag is set. The two processing flag is set to “2”. If there is no suspended change (NO in step S3332), the process ends because there is no target for effect change.

  Next, when there is a suspended change (YES in step S3332), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether the change is a hit (step S3333). If it is a hit (YES in step S3333), it is determined whether or not the hit is more advantageous to the player than the hit of the currently executed hit game (step S3334). Here, the determination that the player has an advantage is determined in the same manner as the determination of which special symbol is to be prioritized in the above-described priority control pattern. Will be done accordingly.

  If the suspended change derives a hit game that is more advantageous to the player than the currently executed hit game (YES in step S3334), the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs a step-up effect as an effect after resumption. Is set (step S3335), and this process ends.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a bonus effect as an effect after resuming (Step S3334) when the interrupted variation derives a hit game that is not as great as the currently running hit game (NO in Step S3334). S3336), this process ends.

  In addition, when the interrupted fluctuation derives the loss (step S3333: NO), the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the related effect as the effect after resumption (step S3337), and ends the process.

[Example of resuming production]
FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect after restart in the restart effect change process (FIG. 178). Here, as an example, a case is described in which the variation of the second special symbol that derives a hit is executed first, and the variation of the first special symbol that is started later is interrupted with the remaining time t at the stop timing of the variation. Will be described.

  Case (A) is a case for explaining the step-up effect (step S3335). Here, a small hit C is generated by the second special symbol, and a large hit B is generated by the first special symbol. In this case, as an effect (restart effect) corresponding to the change (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after the restart, a step-up effect that makes it appear that the small hit C has developed into the big hit B is set to be executed. . Specifically, the effect of the wave after the small hit game is changed to a rough wave and a big hit comes is performed.

  The case (B) is a case for explaining the bonus effect (step S3336). Here, a big hit A is generated by the second special symbol, and a big hit B is generated by the first special symbol. It is assumed that the jackpot A of the second special symbol and the jackpot B of the first special symbol give the player the advantage of the jackpot A of the second special symbol which is more advantageous for the player. In this case, as an effect (restart effect) corresponding to the change (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after the resumption, it is as if the jackpot game of the first special symbol was given along with the jackpot game of the second special symbol. Is set so that the bonus effect shown in FIG. More specifically, the rough wave after the big hit game once stops and changes to a rough wave again, and an effect of a big hit comes. In the bonus effect, particularly when the interruption fluctuation derives a small hit, the timing of opening the big winning port 2103 at the time of the small hit game is notified by a countdown display of the remaining time t or the like. The small hit game can be shown as an additional privilege added to the hit game executed when the fluctuation is interrupted.

  As described above, in the step-up effect and the bonus effect, the hit game on the first special symbol side and the hit game on the second special symbol side are a series of hits (the operation of the attacker device 2100 in the double hit game is a series of actions). An effect is performed to make it look as if it were. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the effect after the resumption from being an effect that is not suitable for the game situation at the time of execution, and it is possible to show a continuous hit as a series of hits, thereby enhancing the interest, so that the game has high game characteristics. Games can be offered.

  Case (C) is a case for explaining the related effect (step S3337). Here, although the small hit C occurs due to the second special symbol, the first special symbol interrupted at this time is a result of the loss. In this case, as an effect (resume effect) corresponding to the change (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after the restart, a related effect such as the lingering of the small hit game (such as expecting the development from the small hit game). Is set to be executed. Specifically, an effect is produced in which a temporary wave rises after the small hitting game but returns gently and ends without shifting to a new hitting game.

  In the case where the interrupted fluctuation is deviated as in the case (C) described above, a staging effect such as a step-up staging or a bonus staging that gives relevance to the preceding and following hit games cannot be obtained. , The resumption of the fluctuation may be stopped.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 180 and FIG. 181, as a modified example of the interruption control pattern, a characteristic control process in a pattern of terminating the fluctuation without restarting when the interrupted fluctuation derives a loss result will be described. I do. Note that different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the above-described first embodiment.

[First interlock setting process]
FIG. 180 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a first interlocking setting process in a modification of the interruption control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the first interlock setting process (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the stop symbol determined at the start of the change of the first special symbol is missing when the first special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001a. (Step S1121a). If it is a loss (YES in step S1121a), the determined loss symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device (the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920) (step S1122a). After that, a process for stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed in the processes after step S1004a.

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a continues the current state if the determined stop symbol of the fluctuating first special symbol is not an outlier, that is, a hit (NO in step S1121a), that is, the above-described interruption. The process is temporarily stopped (interrupted state) as in the control pattern (step S1021a), and the process ends.

[Second interlock setting process]
FIG. 181 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a second interlocking setting process in a modified example of the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the second interlock setting process (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the stop symbol determined at the start of the change of the second special symbol is missing when the second special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001b. (Step S1121b). If it is a loss (YES in step S1121b), the determined loss symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device (the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920) (step S1122b). After that, in the processing after step S1004b, the processing relating to the stop of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed.

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a continues the current state when the determined stop symbol of the fluctuating second special symbol is not an outlier, that is, a hit (NO in step S1121b), that is, the interruption described above. The process is temporarily stopped (interrupted state) as in the control pattern (step S1021b), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the modified example of the interruption control pattern of the present embodiment, the control for forcibly stopping the other special symbol at the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol for deriving one of the hits in the above-described basic control pattern, At the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol for deriving one of the hits in the control pattern, the other special symbol is temporarily stopped and combined control with the control of restarting after the corresponding game is performed.

  In the modified example, the stop is performed only when the other special symbol is lost at the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol for deriving one of the hits, and is interrupted when the special symbol is a hit. As a result, the related effect described above (case (C) in FIG. 179) is not executed. For this reason, the resuming effect due to the fluctuation interruption is either a step-up effect or a bonus effect, and the execution of the resuming effect itself can be a highly-expected notice effect (hit confirmation effect).

<Effects of interruption control patterns>
According to the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment, the generated first special symbol and the second special symbol can all be variably executed as a result based on the obtained random numbers. In the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above, one of the special symbols that fluctuates simultaneously is forcibly set to be off regardless of the obtained random number. However, in the interrupt control pattern, the result of the special symbol acquired by the player ( The hit determination result based on the random number) is not overturned. Therefore, the interruption control pattern can maintain the original gaming characteristics of the gaming machine more than the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above.

  In the interruption control pattern, while a winning game is being performed based on a winning result derived from one of the special symbols, the other special symbol is interrupted, and the remaining fluctuation is resumed after the end of the corresponding game. At this time, an effect (resume effect) corresponding to the restarted change is newly set in accordance with the preceding and following game situations (a hit game on one special symbol side and a game derived from the change). This makes it possible to provide an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable even if the suspended fluctuation is resumed. Also, if the interrupted fluctuation derives a hit game, the resumption effect can show that the relevant game is related to the hit game on one special symbol side, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced it can.

<Reset control pattern>
Subsequently, a characteristic control process in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

  In the resetting control pattern, while a special game is being played based on the winning result derived from the special game, the other special symbol suspends the change, and after the end of the game, the suspended change is reviewed according to the game state. It is characterized by a control structure that is restarted after restarting.

[First fluctuation processing]
FIG. 182 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the first in-fluctuation process in the reset control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the first changing process (FIG. 129) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 repeats the subtraction of the timer value as the process of step S521a until the time for the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the process of step S501a is up. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 4100a sets the reset flag to the off state before the processing in step S521a (step S561a).

  Here, the reset flag is set to the on state in the processing of step S1134a of the first interlock setting processing (FIG. 183) described later. The reset flag is a flag that is set to the ON state when reset setting processing for resetting the variation time of the interrupted variation according to the game state is performed.

[First interlock setting process]
FIG. 183 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the first interlocking setting process in the reset control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the first interlock setting process (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the reset flag is on when the first special symbol is changing in the processing of Step S1001a (Step S1131a). If the reset flag is on (YES in step S1131a), the current state is continued, that is, temporarily stopped (interrupted state) as in the above-described interrupt control pattern (step S1021a). The process ends.

  On the other hand, when the reset flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S1131a), main control MPU 4100a acquires the timer value of the first variable timer (step S1132a). Then, the acquired timer value is reset according to the gaming state (step S1133a), and the reset flag is set to the ON state (step S1134a), followed by terminating the present process. Here, the processing from step S1132a to step S1134a is the reset setting processing. In addition, the target to be reset in the interrupted fluctuation is not limited to the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation, but may be the entire control content related to the fluctuation time, such as a fluctuation pattern.

  As described above, in the reset control pattern, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted, first, the reset setting processing for the fluctuation after the restart is executed. When the reset setting process is executed, the reset flag is set to the ON state, the first special symbol maintains the reset timer value until the first interlocking flag is released to the OFF state, and the temporary stop state is set. Become. Then, when the first interlocking flag is released to the off state and the execution of the first in-fluctuation process is resumed, the reset flag is returned to the off state, and the resetting of the reset timer value is started (that is, the fluctuation). Will be resumed).

[Second fluctuation processing]
FIG. 184 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the second changing process in the reset control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the second changing process (FIG. 137) of the first embodiment, and the description is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 repeats the subtraction of the timer value as the processing of step S521b until the time of the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the processing of step S501b is up. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 4100a sets the reset flag to the off state before the processing in step S521b (step S561b).

  Here, the reset flag is set to the on state in the processing of step S1134b of the second interlock setting processing (FIG. 185) described later. The reset flag is a flag that is set to the ON state when reset setting processing for resetting the variation time of the interrupted variation according to the game state is performed.

[Second interlock setting process]
FIG. 185 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the second interlock setting process in the reset control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the second interlock setting process (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the reset flag is on when the first special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001b (step S1131b). If the reset flag is ON (YES in step S1131b), the current state is continued, that is, temporarily stopped (interrupted state) as in the above-described interrupt control pattern (step S1021b). The processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the reset flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S1131b), main control MPU 4100a acquires the timer value of the second fluctuation timer (step S1132b). Then, the obtained timer value is reset according to the gaming state (step S1133b), and the reset flag is set to the ON state (step S1134b), followed by terminating the present process.

  As described above, in the reset control pattern, when the change of the second special symbol is interrupted, first, the reset setting process for the change after the restart is performed. When the reset setting process is executed, the reset flag is set to the ON state, and the second special symbol maintains the reset timer value until the second interlocking flag is released to the OFF state. Become. Then, when the second interlocking flag is released to the off state and the execution of the second in-fluctuation process is resumed, the reset flag is returned to the off state, and the reset timer value starts to be subtracted (that is, the fluctuation). Will be resumed).

<Effect of reset control pattern>
According to the reset control pattern of the second embodiment, all of the first special symbol and the second special symbol generated similarly to the above-described interruption control pattern can be variably executed as a result based on the obtained random numbers. Therefore, the reset control pattern can maintain the original gaming characteristics of the gaming machine more than the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above.

  The reset control pattern changes the remaining fluctuation time of the interrupted special symbol according to the game state. Here, the interruption of the fluctuation of the special symbol is caused by the hit game on the other special symbol side. Therefore, the game mode after the relevant game may have shifted to another game mode. Therefore, if the fluctuation by the fluctuation pattern set based on the game mode before the transition is restarted as it is, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, according to the reset control pattern, the control content such as the change time is reviewed for the change restarted after the hit game, so that the change corresponding to the game state to be executed is provided without giving the player a sense of incongruity. be able to. Further, since the degree of freedom in the effect in the fluctuation at the time of resumption is increased as compared with the above-described interruption control pattern, the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  Specifically, it may be reviewed in accordance with the above-described first special symbol and second special symbol variation time (FIG. 154 (E)). For example, when the change for deriving the loss result of the second special symbol is interrupted, if the game mode after the shift is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, the game mode is reset to the long-time change, and the game mode after the shift is the rush mode. In the case of the mode, it may be reset to the short-time fluctuation.

  Also, when the game mode is the rush mode, it is desired to reduce the number of STs to cause the small hit C and the small hit D of the second special symbol to frequently occur. Therefore, with reference to FIG. 186, a description will be given of the reset setting in the case where the first special symbol for deriving the big hit has occurred in the rush mode with the number of STs remaining.

  FIG. 186 is a timing chart illustrating a reset setting process of the interruption variation in the reset control pattern according to the second embodiment. As described above, when the first special symbol for deriving the big hit occurs in the rush mode in a state where the number of STs remains, the ST number given in the current game is consumed as much as possible before the first special symbol is used. I want to hit a jackpot game (that is, a new ST count).

  Therefore, if a large hit change occurs in the first special symbol when the remaining ST count is less than the predetermined number (here, less than 5), the big hit change is interrupted by the small hit game of the second special symbol. After the restart, the fluctuation time after restart is set to a long time t1. The long time t1 is, for example, a time obtained by extending the remaining time t of the original fluctuation, and a time during which a small hitting game can be expected.

  Then, while the large hit change of the first special symbol restarts the change of t1 for a long time, the small hit change of the second special symbol occurs, and the timing of stopping the small hit change is reached. And the big hit change is interrupted again. Since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the rush mode is a short fluctuation of one second (FIG. 154 (E)), the ST count is digested with a good tempo.

  When the number of remaining STs becomes one, the fluctuation time after the resetting is restarted is set to a short time t2. The short time t2 is, for example, a time obtained by shortening the remaining time t of the original fluctuation, and is a time during which the fluctuation does not end even if the fluctuation of the second special symbol in which the number of STs becomes zero occurs. is there. Thereby, the big hit variation of the first special symbol, which has been frequently interrupted, can be stopped in a variation state in which the number of STs is valid, that is, in the probable change state determined as the big hit result. Nothing.

  As described above, according to the reset control pattern, the fluctuation time after the resumption of the fluctuation of the special symbol to be interrupted can be adjusted according to the game state, so that not only the fluctuation control of the special symbol to be interrupted, The fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol in the game state can also be adjusted. Therefore, since it is possible to flexibly cope with a variety of supposed game characteristics, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

  Also in the reset control pattern, similar to the above-described interruption control pattern, the effect corresponding to the restarted change (resume effect) is a game situation before and after (a hit game on one special symbol side and a game derived from the change). , A new effect can be provided. Also, if the interrupted fluctuation derives a hit game, the resumption effect can show that the relevant game is related to the hit game on one special symbol side, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced it can.

  As described above, according to the present invention, there is provided a control structure that employs any one or a combination of the basic control pattern, the priority control pattern, the interruption control pattern, and the reset control pattern described in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, A specific game (small hitting game, big hitting game) is prevented from occurring repeatedly between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side, and can be simultaneously changed. Here, even if the prize of the game ball to the prize area occurs at the same time, only one lottery game is performed according to the priority, and the other lottery games are set to the standby state. Of the game ball (ie, the player's game tempo) and the lottery game tempo, the game interest is reduced. In the present invention, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing as described above by the simultaneous variation control.

(Third embodiment)
In the above-described first and second embodiments, the game mode is shifted from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode when the big hit game ends, but the game mode is switched from the rush preparation mode without the big hit game being ended. A transition to the rush mode may be performed. Such an example will be described below as a third embodiment.

[Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 187 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium when a player operates the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component 1110A that defines the inner periphery of the game area 1100 into which the game is driven, and a plate-shaped game panel 1200 are provided.

  The game panel 1200 of this example includes a transparent panel plate 1210 having a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose inner periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110A and having a smaller outer shape than the front component 1110A. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110A. The opening of the game panel 1200 is formed in a transparent panel plate 1210.

  Further, the game board 4 has a front unit 2000 attached to the opening of the game panel 1200 from the front side, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a front end left end of the back unit 3000. A function display unit 1180 which is visible from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210 and is located at a position where it becomes visible to the player side from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 when attached to the pachinko machine 1; A liquid crystal display device 1900 having a rectangular display screen (display area) attached to the back side of the back unit 3000 so as to be visible from the player side and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and covers a lower portion of the back unit 3000 from the back side. And a substrate holder 1160 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the game panel 1200 A main control board box 1170 to be attached, and a.

  As shown in FIG. 187, in the game area 1100, a large number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a windmill is provided at a predetermined position in the middle thereof. At a substantially central position of the game area 1100, a center role 2500 is arranged, and the design of the center role 2500 characterizes the model of the pachinko machine 1, the game concept, and the like.

  Further, behind the center role 2500, an effect display device 1900 that effects and displays a large area in front view so as to attract attention from a player is provided. As the effect display device 1900, an appropriate display device capable of displaying image information obtained by combining decorative pattern image information, background image information, character image information, and the like is used. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as effect display device 1900.

  Above the liquid crystal display device 1900, a second liquid crystal display device 3252 having a smaller display area than the liquid crystal display device 1900 and realizing an auxiliary display effect is provided. The second liquid crystal display device 3252 may also display image information obtained by combining decorative pattern image information, background image information, character image information, and the like.

  On the other hand, a second large winning opening 2103b and a second starting opening 2102 of the second attacker device 2100b are provided in order from the upstream from the right side area to the lower side area of the center role 2500 in the gaming area 1100. On the other hand, from the left side area to the lower side area of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100, the general figure gate 2301, the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b), and the first attacker are arranged in order from the upstream. A first big winning opening 2103a of the device 2100a is provided. In the lower left area of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100, a plurality of general winning openings 2201 are provided.

  Here, the first starting port 2101 is located substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 and below the liquid crystal display device 1900, and has a permanent winning opening 2101a in which a gaming ball can always win, and a movable piece (normal). It has a special winning port 2101b in which a game ball can be won only when the electric accessory 2111 operates. Then, when a game ball enters the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b), the first starting port sensor 3131 (see FIG. 188) causes the ball to enter (win). Is detected. At this time, if a predetermined special start condition is satisfied, a later-described first special symbol random number is updated (generated) periodically (for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range. A first special symbol lottery (first special determination) is performed for a hit that triggers the operation of one attacker device 2100a, and the first special symbol dynamically displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 fluctuates for a predetermined time. Is displayed. Then, when the winning is won, after the variable display is finished, the drive control of a first attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 188) described later having a solenoid or the like is performed, whereby the first attacker is controlled. The device 2100a is opened and closed. After the first attacker device 2100a is opened and closed in this manner, the transition to the time-saving gaming state in which the ease of awarding of a game ball to the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 can be improved can be achieved. .

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has a control structure capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and starts changing the second special symbol to start the first special symbol. The symbol change according to the result of the symbol lottery cannot be set to the change start waiting state.

  Further, the general-purpose gate 2301 is provided above the special winning opening 2101b, and is configured to allow a game ball driven into the left area of the center role item 2500 to pass therethrough. Then, when the game ball is received (passed) to the general-purpose gate 2301, the gate sensor 2302 (see FIG. 188) detects that the game ball has been received.

  At this time, if a predetermined normal start condition is satisfied, the movable piece (normal) is updated based on a random number for a normal symbol that is regularly updated (generated, for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range. Judgment processing (ordinary judgment) is performed on the ordinary hit which triggers the operation of the electric accessory 2111, and the ordinary symbol dynamically displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189 is variably displayed for a predetermined time. Then, when a winning is won, after the variable display is completed, the drive control of the ordinary accessory driving mechanism 3114 (see FIG. 188) having a solenoid or the like is performed. By this drive control, acceptance of the game ball into the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 is allowed through an opening operation in which the pair of movable pieces 2111 rotate outward at the upper end around the lower end.

  That is, the special winning opening 2101b is a game only when there is an opening operation by the movable piece 2111 (turning operation of the upper end of the movable piece 2111 in the outward direction around the lower end) in accordance with the winning of the normal winning. The ball is provided so that (entering) winning can be performed. In this sense, the movable piece 2111 includes a mode in which game balls cannot enter the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 (rejection mode) and a mode in which the same ball is allowed (permission). (The ball mode), and can be said to be maintained in the rejected ball mode unless drive control of the ordinary accessory drive mechanism 3114 is performed. Therefore, in the special winning port 2101b, basically, when a game is in a normal game state (non-time saving game state), a prize of a game ball hardly occurs. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state, a game ball is driven into the left area of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100 (left-handed) as in the normal game state (non-time-saving game state). Therefore, game characteristics centering on a game (first special symbol lottery) corresponding to the reception of a game ball to the special winning opening 2101b, which is intended to improve the ease of accepting, are realized.

  Also, the second starting port 2102 is provided below the second winning port 2103b of the second attacker device 2100b, and is driven into the right area of the center role 2500, and the second starting port 2102 of the second attacker device 2100b. Game balls not accepted by the winning opening 2103b are configured to be able to enter the ball. Then, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2102, the second starting port sensor 3132 (see FIG. 188) detects that the game ball has entered (winning). At this time, if a predetermined special start condition is satisfied, the second attacker is updated based on a random number for the second special symbol that is periodically updated (generated) within a predetermined numerical range (for example, every 4 ms). A second special symbol lottery (second special determination) is performed for a hit that triggers the operation of the device 2100b, and the second special symbol dynamically displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. You. Then, when a win is obtained, after the variable display is completed, drive control of a second attacker drive mechanism 2121b (see FIG. 188) described later, which includes a solenoid or the like, is performed. The two-attacker device 2100b is opened and closed.

  Here, the attacker device 2100 according to the third embodiment is located below the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b), and in the open state, the left side of the center role 2500 in the gaming area 1100. A first attacker device 2100a capable of accepting a game ball driven into the area, and a game ball driven into the right area of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100 when in the open state above the second starting port 2102; And a second attacker device 2100b capable of receiving the same.

  The first attacker device 2100a includes a first big winning opening 2103a, a first opening / closing member 2106a operable between a closed state and an open state, and a first attacker driving mechanism 2121a (open / close driving of the first opening / closing member 2106a). 188), and is normally closed by the first opening / closing member 2106a so that the first large winning opening 2103a cannot receive the game ball.

  The second attacker device 2100a includes a second big winning opening 2103b, a second opening / closing member 2106b operable between a closed state and an open state, and a second attacker drive mechanism 2121b (open / close driving of the second opening / closing member 2106b). Normally, it is closed by the second opening / closing member 2106b so that the game ball is not received in the second big winning opening 2103b. When the drive control of the second attacker drive mechanism 2121b is performed, the second opening / closing member 2106b moves the game ball to the second starting port 2103b through an opening operation in which the upper end rotates rightward (clockwise) about the lower end at the upper end. Acceptance becomes acceptable.

  However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment, as a result of the special lottery performed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b), the first lottery is performed. When the first big winning opening 2103a is opened (hit game on the first special symbol side), the second big winning opening 2103b is set as a result of the special lottery performed based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102. At the time of releasing (hitting game on the second special symbol side), the number of balls that can be accepted by the game ball is to be adjusted by making the control modes related to their release different.

  That is, the first attacker device 2100a allows the player to open the first big winning opening 2103a by opening and closing the first opening and closing member 2106a when a big hit is obtained as a result of the first special judgment. A jackpot game state as an advantageous privilege is generated. Further, the second attacker device 2100b opens and closes the second big winning opening 2103b by opening and closing the second opening and closing member 2106b when a big hit or a small hit is obtained as a result of the second special judgment. A big hit game state or a small hit game state is generated as an advantage that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 2101 (first starting port sensor 3131) or the second starting port 2102 (second starting port sensor 3132), three game balls are paid out. When a game ball wins in the first big winning opening 2103a (count sensor 2122a) or the second big winning opening 2103b (count sensor 2122b) used for executing the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state, 15 game balls are won. It is paid out. It should be noted that when a game ball wins the general winning opening 2201 (general winning opening sensor 3133), ten game balls are paid out.

  By the way, in the time saving game state (rush preparation mode in the third embodiment), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is “0.08 seconds”, and after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped, the movable piece 2111 is in the open state (special winning opening). The time for which the game ball is maintained at the winning position in 2101b) is “5.5 seconds”. That is, when a game ball passes through the general-purpose gate 2301, a win is always made for a normal hit, and the passed game ball reaches the movable area of the movable piece 2111 for a shorter time (0 hours). (.08 seconds), the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped, so that the game ball that has triggered the win of the normal hit can directly enter the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101.

  After the movable piece 2111 is maintained for “5.5 seconds” in the open state (the position where the game ball can be received in the special winning opening 2101b), the movable ball 2111 is closed (the game ball is in the special winning opening 2101b). (A position that is considered unacceptable).

  Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode), the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is 100%, and the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b is maintained at the outer position for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). In this case, by making a left-handed hit in this case, the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b becomes easy. Therefore, in the time-saving game state (rush preparation mode), a game ball is fired aiming at the left side of the center role object 2500 (so-called “right Hitting) is considered to be advantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, in the non-time saving game state (the normal mode and the rush mode in the third embodiment), the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 0%, and the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is set to a predetermined variation time (for example, 1%). (Seconds), it is impossible to accept game balls into the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101.

  It should be noted that, even in the non-time-saving game state, whether the shooting ball is aimed at the left or right of the center role 2500 is more advantageous to the player depending on whether or not the game state is the probable change game state. In the normal game state (normal mode), which is a non-time saving game state and not a probable game state, the left side of the center role item 2500 is positioned so that many game balls win the regular winning port 2101a of the first starting port 2101. It is considered advantageous for a player to fire a game ball (so-called "left-handed"). Also, in the non-time-saving game state, and in the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) in which the jackpot winning probability is higher than the normal game state, a large number of game balls are in the second starting port 2102. It is considered advantageous for the player to fire the game ball (so-called “right-hand”) aiming at the right side of the center role 2500 so as to win a prize.

  In addition, as the time saving function, control for increasing the winning probability of the ordinary symbol than in the non-hour saving game state, control for shortening the time required for the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbol than in the non-hour saving game state, and control of the first starting port 2101 The control to extend the period in which the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b is maintained at the outside position (open position) from the non-time saving game state, and the number of times the movable piece 2111 is operated to the outside position (open position) in the non-time saving game state. Any one or an arbitrary combination (or all) of the controls that increase more than the above may be executed.

  The back unit 3000 of the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), the front side is opened, and the opening penetrates the rear wall 3010a in the front-rear direction facing the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. A back box 3010 in which a 3010b is formed, a back decoration unit 3100 disposed near the front end in the back box 3010, a back effect unit 3200 disposed above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and a back box The lower back production unit 3400 arranged below the opening 3010b in the inside 3010, and the lower right back arranged between the back lower production unit 3400 and the front decoration unit 3100 at the lower right corner in front view inside the back box 3010 And an effect unit 3600. The front display unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is provided with a function display unit 1180 at a position visible from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210.

  Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board box 1910 for accommodating a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 188) having a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150 is provided. I have.

  The game board 4 of the third embodiment is a wide area where the game ball can sufficiently roll between the outer circumference on the left side of the center role 2500 and the outer circumference of the game area 1100 (the inner circumference of the front component 1110A). A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel plate 1210 in the area on the left side of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100.

  In the game board 4 of the present example, when a game ball is hit to the right side of the center role 2500 (hit with a strength equal to or more than a predetermined strength), the game ball is located upstream of the stop portion 1114 of the front component 1110A. It flows down the right passage 2545 of the center role 2500 from the side. Here, the right passage 2545 has such a width that the game balls can flow down one ball at a time, and the game balls flowing down the right passage 2545 are decelerated by the stopper 1114, and then the second attacker device 2100b Of the second opening / closing member 2106b. It should be noted that the game ball flowing down to the upper right of the movable area is decelerated by the first guiding section 2901 and converted in the flowing direction, and then guided to the movable area of the second opening / closing member 2106b of the second attacker device 2100b. Therefore, when the second opening / closing member 2106b of the second attacker device 2100b is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down the right passage 2545 is accepted by the second big winning opening 2103b with a probability close to 100%.

  In the movable region of the second opening / closing member 2106b of the second attacker device 2100b, the game ball that has not been accepted by the second large winning opening 2103b by the second opening / closing member 2106b is again decelerated by the second guiding portion 2902, and then , To the second starting port 2102. The game ball flowing down the right passage 2545 is guided to the second starting port 2102 with a probability close to 100% unless the ball enters the second large winning opening 2103b.

  As described above, in the high-precision non-time saving game state (rush mode), the game ball that is hit right and flows down the right passage 2545 is accepted by the second start port 2102 with a probability of almost 100%. Note that the right-hitting game ball is not limited to being accepted by the second starting port 2102 with a probability of almost 100%, and may be accepted by the second starting port 2102 at a lower ratio. For example, the second start port 2102 may be accepted at a rate of about 1/8.

  Then, as a result of such a right-handed game being played, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2102 and a large hit or a small hit is obtained as a result of any of the second special determinations, the second attacker By opening and closing the second opening and closing member 2106b of the second opening and closing member 2106b of the device 2100b, a big hitting game state or a small hitting game state as a privilege advantageous to the player is generated.

[Various substrates]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 188 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment. Hereinafter, among the control configurations of the pachinko machine of the first embodiment described above, different control configurations will be described.

  The attacker device 2100 according to the third embodiment is driven below the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b) and, when in the open state, in the left area of the center role 2500 in the gaming area 1100. A first attacker device 2100a capable of receiving a game ball to be inserted, and a game ball to be driven into a right side area of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100 when in an open state above the second starting port 2102. And a second attacker device 2100b. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes a first count sensor 2122a for detecting a game ball received in the first winning port 2103a of the first attacker device 2100a, and a second major prize of the second attacker device 2100b. A detection signal from the second count sensor 2122b for detecting a game ball received by the mouth 2103b is transmitted through a panel relay board 3040 attached to the game board 4 and a main control I / O port 4100b. To be entered.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g based on these detection signals, whereby the first attacker device is connected via the panel relay board 3040. A drive signal is output to a first attacker driving mechanism 2121a for driving the first opening / closing member 2106a of the 2100a to open and close, and a second attacker driving mechanism 2121b for driving the second opening / closing member 2106b of the second attacker device 2100a to open / close. I have.

[1st special symbol control process]
FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol control process in the third embodiment. Note that processes common to the first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends this processing when the interlock flag of the first special symbol is on in the processing of step S100a. In the first embodiment described above, the first interlocking setting process (step S250a, FIG. 133) for forcibly removing the first special symbol and stopping the change in the symbol is executed. Similarly to the interruption control pattern, while the hit game is being played on the second special symbol side, the game on the first special symbol side is interrupted (temporarily stopped) as it is, so that no processing is performed.

  The measurement of the first variation time is interrupted while the hit game is being played on the second special symbol side. In other words, while the hit game is being played on the second special symbol side, the process (step S521a) of subtracting the first variable timer executed in the first variable process (FIG. 129) is not executed. When the measurement of the first fluctuating time is interrupted in this way, the LED of the first special symbol display 1185 is controlled to a non-display state (light-off state), or the first special symbol display 1185 is stopped and displays the shifted symbol. For example, the change of the first special symbol may be temporarily interrupted to interrupt the game on the first special symbol side, or the control content of the first special symbol display 1185 may be changed according to the change pattern. By interrupting the switching of the control data shown in time series and repeatedly executing the control of the first special symbol display 1185 based on the control data being executed, the LED of the first special symbol display 1185 is set in a non-display state (turned off). State) or the first special symbol display 1185 does not stop and display the shifted symbol, so that the current fluctuation (the fluctuation speed or the like) may be continued. In addition, when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped while the hit game is being played on the second special symbol side, the decoration is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and varies in response to the variation of the first special symbol. The change of the decorative symbol (the first decorative symbol) may be temporarily interrupted by changing the symbol (the first decorative symbol) to the non-display state or by stopping and displaying the symbol in the off symbol, or may correspond to the variation pattern. The control of the first special symbol display 1185 is interrupted by switching the control data in which the control content is displayed in time series, and the control of the first special symbol display 1185 based on the control data being executed is repeatedly executed. The current variation (fluctuation speed, etc.) is continued without controlling the LED of the special symbol display 1185 to a non-display state (extinguished state) or stopping the display of the symbol on the first special symbol display 1185. In this case, the control mode of the liquid crystal display device 1900 related to the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and fluctuating in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol is switched in a time series. Is interrupted, and the control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 relating to the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is repeatedly executed based on the control data being executed, thereby being displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and responding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Then, the current fluctuation (the fluctuation speed or the like) may be continued without changing the decorative symbol (the first decorative symbol) that is fluctuating to the non-display state or stopping and displaying the decorative symbol. In addition, while the hitting game is being performed on the second special symbol side, the effect related to the second big hitting game is executed over the entire area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, while the decoration changes in response to the change of the first special symbol. A design (first decorative symbol) is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like, and a display of a variation of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) executed in response to the variation of the first special symbol is displayed. Control may be performed such that the player is less likely to notice that the game on the first special symbol side has been interrupted (temporarily stopped) by being interrupted.

[Second special symbol control process]
FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second special symbol control process in the third embodiment. Note that processes common to the second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends this processing when the interlock flag of the second special symbol is on in the processing of step S100b. In the first embodiment described above, the second interlocking setting process (step S250b, FIG. 142) for forcibly removing the second special symbol and stopping the change in the symbol is executed. Similarly to the interruption control pattern, while the hitting game is being performed on the first special symbol side, the game on the second special symbol side is interrupted (temporarily stopped) as it is, so that no processing is performed.

  In addition, while the hit game is being performed on the first special symbol side, the game on the second special symbol side may be interrupted by stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol, or the second fluctuation time may be interrupted. By interrupting the measurement and interrupting the switching of control data in which the control content of the second special symbol display 1186 is displayed in time series, the current variation (variation speed, etc.) can be obtained without stopping the variation of the second special symbol. You may make it continue. In addition, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped while the hit game is performed on the first special symbol side, the decorative symbol executed in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The variation of the (second decorative symbol) may be stopped, or the measurement of the second variation time may be interrupted, and the switching of control data in which the control content of the second special symbol display 1186 is shown in time series may be interrupted. In this case, when the current fluctuation (the fluctuation speed or the like) is continued without stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the decorative symbol ( The current variation (the variation speed or the like) may be continued without stopping the variation by interrupting the switching of the control data in the control mode of the variation of the second decorative symbol. In addition, while the hitting game is being performed on the first special symbol side, the effects related to the first big hitting game are executed over the entire area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, while being executed in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol. The variation of the decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) is reduced and displayed on the upper left portion of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like, and the variation of the decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) executed in response to the variation of the second special symbol. Control that makes it difficult for the player to notice that the variation of the decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) executed in response to the variation of the second special symbol is interrupted by interrupting the display of the symbol. May be executed.

[First variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 191 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a first variation pattern setting process according to the third embodiment. Note that processes common to the first variation pattern setting process (FIG. 128) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  If the flag indicating that the big hit has been won is set (YES in step S401a), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 selects the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the big hit according to the gaming state (step S402a). It is determined whether or not the current game mode is the rush preparation mode (step S408a). The rush preparation mode in the third embodiment indicates a game state (high-precision time-short game state) in which both the probability changing function and the time-saving function are operating. Therefore, specifically, it is determined whether or not the probable change flag is on and the time reduction flag is on.

  When the current game mode is not the rush preparation mode (high-precision time-saving game state) (NO in step S408a), main control MPU 4100a proceeds to step S404a without operating the time-saving flag. In this case, when the big hit game is started by the processing of steps S603a and S604a of the above-mentioned first big hit game start processing (FIG. 130), the time reduction flag is set to the off state.

  On the other hand, when the current game mode is the rush preparation mode (high-precision time-saving gaming state) (YES in step S408a), main control MPU 4100a operates the time-saving flag to an off state to stop the time-saving function. Thereafter (step S409a), the process proceeds to step S404a.

  Therefore, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit in the case where the current game mode is the rush preparation mode (high-precision time-saving gaming state), at the time when the first special symbol variation display based on the result is started ( The time saving function is stopped (triggered by the start of the variable display) and the mode shifts to the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state). The probability change flag is set to the OFF state when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 by the process of step S506a of the first changing process (FIG. 129). That is, in the rush mode (high-probability non-saving time state), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started based on the result of the first special symbol lottery that becomes a big hit, and then the big hit game based on the result of the first special symbol lottery is started. Continued until

[Game specifications of special design]
FIG. 192 is an example of various tables showing game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the third embodiment. Here, the specifications different from the game specifications (FIG. 146) in the first embodiment will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 192 (C), the big hits according to the third embodiment include the first big hit A and the first big hit B that can be generated in the first special symbol lottery and the big hits that can be generated in the second special symbol lottery. A total of four types of jackpots, a second jackpot C and a second jackpot D, are provided.

  The first big hit A occurs with a probability of 12% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, and the change display of the first special symbol is stopped at the symbol A at this time. The first big hit B is generated with a probability of 88% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, and at this time, the change display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol B.

  The second big hit C occurs with a probability of 5% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, and the change display of the second special symbol is stopped at the symbol C at this time. The second big hit D occurs at a probability of 95% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit. At this time, the change display of the second special symbol is stopped at the symbol D.

  With these four types of jackpots, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is shifted to the probability change state with a probability of 100%, and the probability change state is maintained until the number of times of the change of the special symbol after the jackpot game is executed 70 times. It is provided so that a function can be given. In addition, the time-saving function is provided for the jackpots other than the jackpots (the second jackpot C and the second jackpot D) of the second special symbol. That is, the time saving function is not provided to the big hit of the second special symbol generated during the rush mode. As described above, when the big hit (the second big hit C and the second big hit D) of the second special symbol occurs during the rush mode, the mode shifts to the rush mode again even after the big hit game state.

  The opening mode of the special winning opening 2103 (the special winning opening 2103a and the special winning opening 2103b) is set in accordance with the type of the big hit, and the first big hit A, the first big hit B, the second big hit C, and the second big hit C are set. For the big hit D, open patterns A, B, C, and D are set, respectively. Here, the number of prize balls obtainable by the player is changed according to the open pattern, thereby increasing the interest of the big hit game.

  The opening patterns A to D are set such that the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 (the special winning opening 2103a and the special winning opening 2103b) is long, and the player can acquire a sufficient prize ball. For example, the opening pattern A is a jackpot game in which a round game is performed 15 times, and the opening time and the maximum winning number of each round are set so that the player can acquire 2000 balls as prize balls. In a big hit game in which a round game is performed four times, the opening time and the maximum number of winnings in each round are set so that the player can acquire 500 prize balls, and an opening pattern C is a round game performed 11 times. In the big hit game, the opening time of each round and the maximum winning number are set so that the player can obtain 1500 balls as prize balls. The opening time of each round and the maximum number of winnings are set so that 1,000 balls can be acquired as prize balls.

  Although described in detail later, in the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode) of the third embodiment, the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is changed to the normal game state (low-probability non-time reduction state; normal mode). ) Or by changing to a fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) shorter than the high-probability time-saving state (rush preparation mode), the second small hit C occurs frequently. Further, the opening mode of the large winning opening 2103b in the small hitting game is provided such that one opening time is short and a prize ball can be acquired by accidental winning. Here, the accidental prize is not a prize obtained by the player hitting a game ball into the game area with the intention of winning the big prize mouth 2103b, but a game area where the big prize mouth 2103b is provided. This is a prize that can be obtained by the hitting game ball flowing down a position where a prize can be won when the large winning opening 2103b is opened. In the second small hit C, the number of rounds and the opening time of the large winning opening 2103b are set so that if the player hits the game ball with the right, about 1-2 balls are accidentally expected to be won. Is set. When about 1 to 2 balls are won in the big winning opening 2103b by the second small hit C, about 15 to 30 prize balls can be obtained.

  Further, in the rush mode, it is possible to promote an accidental prize based on the second small hit C generated during the rush mode by continuously causing the player to strike a game ball with a right-handed prize. The number of balls occupies most of the number of award balls that can be acquired during the rush mode (the total number of acquired balls). In the third embodiment, since the second small hit C (maximum 30 balls) frequently occurs during the rush mode, a prize ball (maximum 2100 balls) equal to or larger than the prize ball (2000 balls) due to the above-described big hit can be expected. There is no decrease in the interest of the game due to the occurrence of small hits where a ball cannot be obtained. Rather, a small hit game that occurs a plurality of times, rather than a single big hit game, keeps the player interested in the game, so that the interest in a series of games during the rush mode can be enhanced.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 192 (E), the fluctuation time of the special symbol of the third embodiment differs depending on the game mode (game state). When the game mode is the normal mode, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 3 seconds to 120 seconds according to the presence or absence of the reach effect. If so, 3 seconds is set, and if it is a big hit, 300 seconds or 600 seconds is set. Further, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 600 seconds when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and is set to 5 seconds when the game mode is the rush mode. When the game mode is the rush mode, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is not newly started, so that the fluctuation time is not set.

  As described above, in the special symbol game provided to the player, the above-described specifications (hit probability, hit type, fluctuation time, etc.) change according to the game state. The transition from the normal game state to the advantageous game state which is advantageous to the player is triggered by the occurrence of a big hit, and the transition from the advantageous game state to the normal game state is performed for the given ST times (here, 70 times). Triggered by the completion of the symbol lottery (fluctuation).

  Note that the number of award balls that can be obtained during the rush mode may be changed by changing the fluctuation time of the first special symbol when entering the rush mode. For example, in the example described above, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is the first big hit, either one of 300 seconds or 600 seconds is changed according to the change pattern determined regardless of the type of the first big hit. Although the setting for the time has been shown, the fluctuating time may be associated in advance with each of the first big hit types. Specifically, in the case of the first big hit, the first big hit A is determined to have a change pattern having a change time of 300 seconds, while the first big hit B is set to a change pattern having a change time of 600 seconds. A variation pattern table corresponding to the type of the first big hit may be provided so as to be determined. In this case, about 500 prize balls less than the first big hit A capable of acquiring about 2,000 prize balls Even in the case of the first big hit B in which the game can be acquired, a large amount of prize balls can be acquired during the rush mode executed for a long period of time, so that a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed. In this way, the control is performed such that the longer the fluctuation time is selected as the number of prize balls obtainable in the big hit game is smaller (the lower the expected value of the number of prize balls obtainable in the big hit game), the longer the duration of the rush mode. Then, a larger amount of prize balls may be acquired during the rush mode than a jackpot having a larger number of prize balls that can be acquired in the jackpot game (a jackpot having a higher expected value of the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game).

  When the first big hit is the first big hit A, the change pattern having the change time of 600 seconds is determined on the other hand, while the first big hit B is determined as the change pattern having the change time of 300 seconds. May be provided with a variation pattern table corresponding to the type of the first big hit. In this case, when the first big hit A that can acquire about 2,000 prize balls is executed, it is executed for a longer time. Since a large number of prize balls can be acquired during the rush mode that is performed, the first special lottery result will be the first big hit A and a large number of prize balls that can not be obtained with one big hit game can be obtained It is possible to improve game entertainment. In other words, control is performed such that the longer the fluctuation time is selected as the number of prize balls obtainable in the big hit game (the higher the expected value of the number of prize balls obtainable in the big hit game) is, and the duration of the rush mode is lengthened. This may further increase the value (advantage to the player) of the jackpot having a large number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game (a jackpot having a high expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game).

  Further, as described above, the player can acquire the number of prize balls that can be obtained according to the type of the big hit game, in this example, about 2000 prize balls in the big hit game executed when the first big hit A is reached. It can be predicted in advance that about 500 prize balls can be acquired in the big hit game executed when the first big hit B is reached, but as described above, for each type of the first big hit, By associating the fluctuation time in advance, it is no longer possible to determine the degree of advantage only by the jackpot type, so that the interest in the game can be improved by focusing on the duration of the rush mode. In other words, the duration of the rush mode is proportional to the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the rush mode, so that attention can be paid to the duration of the rush mode.

  In addition, in addition to the control for changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the rush mode by changing the variation time of the first special symbol at the time of the rush mode as described above, 1 Independently of the control of changing the number of award balls obtainable during the rush mode by changing the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (the second special symbol The number of prize balls that can be acquired during the rush mode may be changed by executing control for changing the second special symbol (variation pattern table in which the fluctuation time is set). For example, a rush mode A (high-probability non-saving time state) in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is always set to 5 seconds as a rush mode (high-probability non-saving time state), and a fluctuation time of the second special symbol always being 10 seconds Rush mode B (high-probability non-time saving state B) set to one of two seconds, and the change time of the second special symbol can be set to 5 seconds and 10 seconds. Rush mode A (high probability non-time saving state A), which is more likely to be set to 5 seconds than seconds (for example, set to 5 seconds with a probability of 80% and set to 10 seconds with a probability of 20%) Like the rush mode A, the variation time of the second special symbol can be set to 5 seconds and 10 seconds, and is more likely to be set to 10 seconds than 5 seconds (for example, to 10 seconds with a probability of 80%). And set it to 5 seconds with a 20% probability) And Yumodo B (high probability non-time reduction state B), may be controlled in one of. In this way, by making it possible to control the transition to a plurality of types of rush modes in which the variation time of the second special symbol is different or the appearance ratio of the variation time of the second special symbol is different, it is advantageous only with the big hit type and the duration of the rush mode. The degree of advantage cannot be determined, and the degree of advantage can be determined only by comprehensively determining the jackpot type, the duration of the rush mode, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, so that the player can pay more attention to the game. Yes, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a variation pattern of 300 seconds, the control is performed to shift to the rush mode B. On the other hand, when the variation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a variation pattern of 600 seconds. In order to control the shift to the rush mode A, a plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to the variation time of the first special symbol may be provided as the variation pattern table of the second special symbol. (1) The difference between the two types of rush modes (rush mode A and rush mode B) which are generated when the start of the change of the special symbol can be provided with a difference, and the change time of the first special symbol is 600 seconds. , That is, when the rush mode is continued for a long period of time (in this example, rush mode A), many prize balls can be obtained. To become, it can suppress the deterioration of the gaming interest by paying attention to the occurrence of rush mode.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a variation pattern of 300 seconds, the control is shifted to the rush mode A, while the variation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a variation pattern of 600 seconds. In order to control the shift to the rush mode B, a plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to the variation time of the first special symbol may be provided as the variation pattern table of the second special symbol. (1) The same level of prize balls can be obtained regardless of which one of the two types of rush modes (rush mode A and rush mode B) occurs when the special symbol starts to change. Not only can the game interest be improved, but also the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the two types of rush mode is the same. Duration which is disadvantageous for the player if it is possible to enhance the advantageous degree of short rush mode A. That is, since the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each of the two types of rush mode is substantially the same, the rush mode A that is executed in a shorter time increases the number of prize balls obtained per unit time and is more useful to the player. Since it is in an advantageous state, the degree of advantage of the rush mode A having a short duration can be increased.

  In addition, the first special hit A (15 rounds) is controlled to shift to the rush mode A, while the first big hit B (four rounds) is controlled to shift to the rush mode B. As the variation pattern table, a plurality of variation pattern tables according to the type of the first big hit, that is, a plurality of variation pattern tables according to the opening mode (number of rounds) determined by the type of the big hit may be provided. In this case, when the first big hit A in which about 2,000 prize balls can be obtained is obtained, the number of times of the change display of the second special symbol which can be executed during the rush mode can be further increased. A large amount of prize balls can be obtained, and the first special lottery result becomes the first big hit A, which is too large to be obtained by one big hit game. The gaming interest becomes possible win of the winning balls can be improved. In other words, as the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first big hit is larger (the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit game is higher) as the first big hit, the second big hit is determined with a shorter fluctuation time. The change display of the special symbol is executed to increase the number of times of the change of the second special symbol in the rush mode, and the control of causing the second big hit or the small hit based on the second special symbol lottery to be executed frequently is performed, whereby the first big hit is performed. Among them, the value of the big hit (the degree of advantage to the player) of the type having the larger number of prize balls that can be obtained (the expected value of the number of prize balls obtainable in the big hit game) may be further increased.

  The second special symbol is controlled so as to control the shift to the rush mode B when the first big hit A (15 rounds), and to control the shift to the rush mode B when the first big hit B (four rounds). As the variation pattern table, a plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to a plurality of variation pattern tables according to the first jackpot big hit type, that is, the opening mode (number of rounds) determined by the big hit type may be provided. In this case, even if the first big hit B can obtain about 500 prize balls smaller than the first big hit A that can obtain about 2000 prize balls, the first big hit B can be executed during the rush mode. (2) Since a large number of prize balls can be obtained during the rush mode by increasing the number of times of display of the special symbols, a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed. As described above, as the first big hit is determined to be the type of the big hit in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first big hit is small (the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit game is low), the first big hit is determined with a shorter fluctuation time. By performing the change display of the second special symbol and increasing the number of times the second special symbol changes during the rush mode to execute the second big hit or the small hit based on the second special symbol lottery, the first special symbol is changed. The value of the big hit (the degree of advantage to the player) of the type in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit is small (the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit game is low) is increased, and the big hit can be obtained in the first big hit. It may be possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to a type of big hit in which the number of prize balls is small (the expected value of the number of prize balls obtainable in the big hit game is low).

[Transition of game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 193 and FIG. 194, a description will be given of transition of a gaming state and control of simultaneous variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in each gaming state according to the third embodiment. FIG. 194 is a diagram illustrating transition of a game state (game mode) according to the third embodiment.

(Normal mode)
First, the game mode at the start of the game is a normal game state (normal mode). In the normal game state, the game ball is fired (so-called “left-handed”) aiming at the game area 1100 on the left side of the center role item 2500 so that the game ball can win at the regular winning opening 2101a of the first starting port 2101. Is the best play method for the player.

  Here, the second starting port 2102 of the third embodiment easily wins simply by following the flow path of a game ball fired (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the right game area 1100 of the center role 2500. It is provided as possible. In the second special symbol lottery based on the winning in the second starting port 2102, the winning probability of a small hit in which a prize ball can be obtained is high (390/399 in a normal state, 44/45 in a probable state). In this case, the player strives right from the start of the game to try to win a game ball in the second starting port 2102. Therefore, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 192 (E) described above, the second special symbol in the game state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) in which it is not recommended that a game ball enter the second starting port 2102 is won. The fluctuation time is set to a long time fluctuation (600 seconds). As a result, it takes a long time until the variable display of the second special symbol is started in both modes until the stop display is performed (the lottery result is found), so that the player can be prevented from right-handing. .

  Since the second starting port 2102 of the third embodiment is always open and easy to win, the second starting port 2102 in the gaming state where the winning is not recommended to suppress the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is suppressed. Although the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to a long time, it is not limited to this. A state conversion member capable of converting the second starting port 2102 into an easy winning state and a difficult winning state is provided, and winning is performed in a gaming state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) in which it is not recommended that a game ball enter the second starting port 2102. You may make it set to a difficult state. In the third embodiment, in order to avoid complication of the configuration and processing related to the control of the state conversion member and to provide a game that is easy for the player to obtain, the variation time is changed according to the game state to change the variation time. Is guided to play in the best way to play.

  Therefore, in the normal gaming state (normal mode), the first special symbol lottery based on winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a) is mainly executed. When the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost, the normal gaming state is continued, while when the result of the first special symbol lottery is the first big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B), After the end of the big hit game based on the first big hit, the game mode shifts to the high-probability time-saving game state (rush preparation mode, first advantageous game state).

  As described above, in the normal gaming state (normal mode), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set long in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. For this reason, the possibility that the result of the second special symbol lottery is found in the normal gaming state (the occurrence of the game state transition triggered by the second big hit of the second special symbol) is extremely low.

(Lash preparation mode)
Next, a case in which the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state (normal mode) to the high-probability time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode) will be described. In this state transition, the occurrence of the first big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) gives the player an advantage which is advantageous to the player, such as obtaining the winning prize ball and providing the certainty changing function and the time saving function.

  In the high-probability time-short game state (rush preparation mode), similarly to the normal game state (normal mode), the game ball is fired at the game area 1100 on the left side of the center role 2500 (so-called “left hit”). Making the special prize port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 a game ball is the best game method for the player.

  Here, when the left-hitting game ball passes through the general-purpose gate 2301 disposed in the game area 1100 on the left side of the center role 2500, the time-saving function is activated, so that the general symbol hit is derived by the ordinary symbol lottery. (Percentage per 100% in time-saving state). As a result, the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 is operated, and the winning of the game ball to the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 becomes easy. Also, as described above, in the time-saving gaming state, the frequency of winning game balls into the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 (prize probability) is always higher than the frequency of winning game balls into the winning port 2101a (prize probability). Since it is set high, the player makes a left-handed shot to aim at the special winning opening 2101b.

  Accordingly, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode), the first special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (special winning port 2101b) is mainly executed. Then, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss for 70 consecutive times, the game shifts to a normal game state (normal mode). If the first big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is determined before the first special symbol lottery is executed 70 times, a high probability is triggered by the start of the change of the first special symbol. The state shifts to a non-time saving state (rush mode, second game state). This high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode) continues until a big hit game based on the first big hit is started.

  As described above, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set long in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. For this reason, it is extremely unlikely that the result of the second special symbol lottery will be known in the high-probability time-saving gaming state.

(Rush mode)
Next, the case where the gaming state has shifted from the high-probability time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode) to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode) will be described.

  In the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode), a game ball is shot at the second starting port 2102 by firing the game ball (so-called “right-hit”) aiming at the game area 1100 on the right side of the center role 2500. Playing is the best game method for the player. It should be noted that, in the second special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 2102, the second attacker is set regardless of whether the big hit (the second big hit C, the second big hit D) or the small hit is derived. Since the second big winning opening 2103b is opened by the opening and closing operation of the second opening and closing member 2106b of the device 2100b, the right hit is performed as in the case where the game ball is won in the second starting opening 2102. That is, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode), it is only necessary to keep right-handed. On the other hand, in game states other than the high-probability non-time-short game state (rush mode) (normal game state (normal mode) and high-probability time-short game state (rush preparatory mode)), the left-handed player makes the first hit as described above. It is the best game method for a player to make a game ball win in the starting opening 2101, and when a big hit is derived in the first special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball in the first opening 2101, Since the first big winning opening 2103a is opened by the opening and closing operation of the first opening and closing member 2106a of the first attacker device 2100a, the left hit is performed as in the case where the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2101. That is, in a game state other than the high-probability non-time-short game state (rush mode), left-handing may be maintained. Therefore, it is necessary to switch from left-handed to right-handed at the time of transition to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode), and to switch from right-handed to left-handed at the end of the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode).

  Here, the second starting port 2102 of the third embodiment is provided downstream of the game area 1100 on the right side of the center role item 2500, and the right-hit game ball in the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode) is substantially The second start port 2102 is won.

  Therefore, in the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode), the second special symbol lottery based on winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is mainly executed. In the high-probability non-time-saving game state, since the first special symbol is being changed based on the first big hit, the first special symbol is newly added based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 2101. The symbol lottery is not executed, and even if the player makes a left hit, a prize ball cannot be obtained in the game of the first special symbol.

  In the second special symbol lottery in the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode), if a big hit is not derived with a probability of 1/45, a small hit is always derived. Then, in the small hitting game generated at this time, the player can acquire a small number of game balls (for example, 30 balls) as prize balls, which is less than the number of game balls obtainable in the big hit game. Therefore, in the main game state, the player obtains a prize ball by the small hitting game every time the second special symbol lottery is executed until the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the first big hit ends. be able to.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 192 (E), the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes a big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) in the high probability time saving state (rush preparation mode), so that the high probability non-time saving is achieved. In the case of starting the change of the first special symbol which triggers the transition to the gaming state (rush mode), the change pattern table at the time of the big hit and the first change start selected in the first change pattern setting process (step S170a). One of 300 seconds and 600 seconds is set as the variation time (first variation time) of the variation in accordance with the variation pattern determined by comparing the first variation random number read in step S304a in the processing. You. In the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode), the execution of the second special symbol lottery is recommended, but the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 5 seconds. In the third embodiment, since the control structure capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol is provided, the first special symbol based on the first big hit when the change time of the second special symbol ends. When the change display of the special symbol is interrupted and the small hit game generated when the small hit is derived as a result of the second special symbol or the big hit game generated when the big hit is derived, the first big hit is performed. The variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special symbol is continued, and the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special symbol is restarted when the small hit game or the big hit game ends. I have. For this reason, in the high-probability non-short-time gaming state, a maximum of 60 to 120 times of the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed, so that a maximum of 60 to 120 times of the small hit game and the big hit game occur continuously. I can do it. That is, a series of games of the second special symbol from the start to the end of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the first big hit is a privilege game in which a prize ball can be acquired. It should be noted that the longer the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, which is a trigger for shifting to the high probability non-time saving game state (rush mode), the more the number of times the second special symbol can fluctuate during that period increases. Therefore, the number of times that the small hit game and the big hit game can be continuously generated increases, and the number of prize balls that the player can obtain increases. In this example, the high-probability non-time-saving game is set depending on whether the first special symbol is changed to 600 seconds or 300 seconds as the variation time of the first special symbol that has caused the transition to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode). Make the duration of the state (rush mode) different. Thereby, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player during the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) is made different, and when the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 600 seconds, The number of award balls that can be obtained by the player is increased as compared with the case where the time is set to 300 seconds.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) is set in a series of second jackpots (second jackpot C and second jackpot D) regardless of the derivation of the second jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. Prize balls can be acquired in the small hit game of the special symbol 2, and the total number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the number of prize balls obtainable in the big hit game. Therefore, the most advantageous game state for the player is not the high-probability time-saving game state (rush preparation mode, first advantageous game state) but the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state).

  The high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) is a game state that can be generated when the first big hit is determined in the first special symbol lottery in the high-accuracy time-short game state (rush preparation mode). First, the player plays a game aiming at winning the game ball to the first starting port 2101. Then, when the game state shifts to the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) triggered by the start of the change of the first special symbol based on the first big hit, the player then moves the game ball to the second starting port 2102. Playing games aimed at winning.

  When the derivation of the first big hit is determined in the first special symbol lottery in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode), a high probability non-time saving is triggered by the start of the change of the first special symbol based on the first big hit. After shifting to the game state (rush mode), the game state (rush mode) is continued unless the fluctuation time of the first special symbol ends. Then, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the first big hit ends, the big hit game based on the first big hit is executed. For this reason, when the derivation of the first big hit is determined by the first special symbol lottery in the high-accuracy time-saving game state (rush preparation mode), the game shifts to the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode), Not only can a prize ball be obtained by a series of second special symbol games from the start to the end of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on one big hit, but also by the big hit game based on the first big hit. Can also obtain award balls, so that it is possible to obtain a large number of award balls. Also, at this time, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the first big hit is the continuation time of the rush mode (high-probability non-time saving state), so that the liquid crystal display device 1900 switches from the game mode to the rush mode. The elapsed time, the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (the remaining time that can be controlled in the rush mode), and the like are displayed, and the player is made aware that a chance time has occurred and that the chance time has a time limit. It has become.

  When the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the first big hit ends in the high probability non-time saving game state (rush mode), after executing the big hit game based on the first big hit, the high probability time saving game again. Transition to the state (rush preparation mode). Therefore, as long as the result of the first special symbol lottery in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode) does not lose 70 times in a row, there is no transition to the normal gaming state (normal mode). That is, as long as the first big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is determined by the time the first special symbol lottery is executed 70 times in the high probability time saving game state (rush preparation mode), the high probability time saving game is performed. Since the transition from the state (rush preparation mode) to the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) is repeated, the transition from the normal game state (normal mode) to the high-probability time-saving game state (rush preparation mode) greatly increases Players can expect to obtain a large number of prize balls.

(Game mode transition timing chart)
FIG. 194 is an example of a timing chart showing ideal game mode transitions in the third embodiment.

  When a player starts a game in an initial state of the pachinko machine 1 such as a state where the RAM of the pachinko machine 1 is cleared, first, a normal mode (normal state: low probability non-saving time state) starts. In the normal mode, it is best for the player to make a left-handed shot to aim at the regular winning opening 2101a or the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101. Here, when the firing force of the game ball at the start of the hit is too strong and the ball is right-handed, and the game ball wins the second starting port 2102, the fluctuation of the second special symbol changes as shown in FIG. 192 (E). A long-term fluctuation (600 seconds) with a long time (second fluctuation time) is executed. For this reason, when the game mode is the normal mode and the game ball has won the second starting port 2102, a display urging the player to make a left-hand drive (such as a left-hand drive!) Is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the player adjusts the firing force and makes a left-handed hit, and when the game ball wins the regular winning port 2101a or the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101, the first special symbol is changed and the first special symbol is executed. The first decorative symbol is changed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 in response to the change of the one special symbol. As described above, in the normal mode, the left-handed game is the best for the player, so that the change of the first special symbol is mainly executed, and the change of the second special symbol is hardly executed. For this reason, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the first decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed in the center and an effect corresponding to the change of the first special symbol is executed, while the second decorative symbol is reduced to the upper left portion of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. It is displayed, making it difficult for the player to notice its existence. Note that the second decorative symbol is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 at all during the normal mode or the rush preparation mode so that the presence of the second decorative symbol is hardly noticed, or during the normal mode or the rush preparation mode. By turning off the LED of the second special symbol display 1186 and not displaying the second special symbol at all, it may be difficult to notice the existence of the second special symbol.

  In addition, the variation time (first variation time) of the first special symbol in the normal mode is any one of 3 seconds to 120 seconds depending on the variation pattern selected. In the game on the first special symbol side, a first special symbol lottery in which a big hit is won with a probability of 1/399 is executed. Then, when the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes a big hit, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, and the decorative symbol that changes corresponding to the first special symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed to the first special symbol. After stopping and displaying at the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol, the first big hit game is executed. At this time, since the second interlocking flag is set to the ON state, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted. Then, at the end of the first big hit game, the second interlocking flag is returned to the off state, the suspended change of the second special symbol is resumed, and the game mode is changed from the normal mode to the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state). Move to

  Even in the rush preparation mode (high-probability time-saving state), it is best for the player to aim left at the regular winning opening 2101a or the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101 by left-handing similarly to the normal mode. Further, in the rush preparation mode, a certainty changing function of performing 70 times of ST and a time saving function of performing a prize assist control for facilitating a prize in the special prize port 2101b are provided. Note that when the game ball wins the second starting port 2102 even in the rush preparation mode, as shown in FIG. 192 (E), a long time fluctuation (600 seconds) in which the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is long is long. When the game mode is in the rush preparation mode and the game ball has won the second starting port 2102, a display urging the player to make a left-hand operation (such as a left-hand operation!) Is performed. .

  During the rush preparation mode (high-probability time-saving state), when the player makes a left strike and a game ball wins in the regular winning port 2101a or the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101, the first special symbol is changed. At the same time, the liquid crystal display device 1900 changes the first decorative symbol in response to the change of the first special symbol. At this time, if the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order, the variation time (first variation time) of the first special symbol is set to any one of 3 seconds to 120 seconds depending on the variation pattern to be selected. If the result of the symbol lottery is a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B), the variation time (first variation time) of the first special symbol is one of 300 seconds and 600 seconds according to the variation pattern selected. It is said. In the game on the first special symbol side in the rush preparation mode (high-probability time-saving state), a first special symbol lottery in which a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/45 is executed. Then, when the number of STs is decremented and updated by 1 at the start of the change of the first special symbol, and when the count of the number of STs is 70 or less, a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) of the first special symbol is won. As shown in 192 (E), a long-term variation (300 seconds or 600 seconds) in which the variation time (first variation time) of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol is long is executed. Then, the time reduction flag is set to the off state at the same time as the start of the long-time fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the game mode shifts from the rush preparation mode (high probability time reduction state) to the rush mode (high probability non-time reduction state).

  In the rush mode, it is best for the player to make a right-handed shot to aim at the second starting port 2102. Therefore, when the game mode shifts from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode, a notification that the game mode has shifted to the rush mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and a display prompting the player to make a right-hand drive (rush mode entry! Etc.). Further, in the rush mode, the time saving function is not provided, and only the certainty changing function with 70 ST times is provided. Here, the count value at the end of the rush preparation mode is reset, and the ST count is counted again from the count value of 70.

  The right-hit game ball wins the second starting port 2102. Since a prize to the second starting port 2102 is easy even for a game beginner, a prize of a game ball to the second starting port 2102 frequently occurs. At this time, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (second fluctuation time) is set to 5 seconds, so that the fluctuation of the second special symbol is frequently executed.

  As described above, in the rush mode, the right-handed game is best for the player, and the second special symbol is frequently changed, while the first special symbol is changed for a long time and stopped during the rush mode. Will not be displayed. Therefore, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the second decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed in the center and an effect corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol is executed over the entire area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, while the first decorative symbol is the liquid crystal display. The display is reduced on the upper left of the device 1900 or the like, so that it is difficult for the player to notice the presence. The present invention is not limited to the above, as long as the presence of the first decorative symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not easily noticed during the rush mode. For example, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 during the rush mode. On the other hand, the first decorative symbol may not be displayed at all, and the first decorative symbol may be displayed and the second decorative symbol may not be displayed at all when the rush mode ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode. Similarly, during the rush mode, the LED of the second special symbol display 1186 can be turned on to display the second special symbol, while the LED of the first special symbol display 1185 is turned off and the first special symbol is not displayed at all. As a result, when the rush mode ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode, the LED of the first special symbol display 1185 is enabled to display the first special symbol and the LED of the second special symbol indicator 1186 is turned off. The second special symbol may not be displayed at all.

  In the game on the second special symbol side, a big hit is won with a probability of 1/45, and if no big hit is won (probability of 44/45), a second special symbol lottery for winning a small hit is executed. Then, at the start of the change of the second special symbol, the ST count is decremented and updated by one. If a small hit is a result of the second special symbol lottery, the change is stopped and displayed in the small hit symbol C, and the second small hit game is executed. At this time, while the second small hitting game is being executed, the first interlocking flag is set to the on state to suspend the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the first interlocking flag is turned off when the second small hitting game ends. And the suspended change of the first special symbol is resumed.

  It should be noted that the ST count is also decremented by one at the start of the change of the second special symbol. When the ST count becomes 0, the probability change flag is set to the OFF state, and the game mode shifts from the rush mode to the normal mode. That is, the rush mode ends when the number of times of ST becomes 0 without winning the big hit of the second special symbol. In the rush mode, in addition to the case where the number of STs becomes 0 without winning the big hit of the second special symbol, the case where the fluctuation time of the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol has elapsed, or the case where the second special symbol If a big hit is won, the process ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode. However, when the big hit of the second special symbol is won, the probable change flag is set to the off state when the second big hit game is started, and the rush mode ends, but when the second big hit game is ended, The probable change flag is set to the ON state, and the rush mode is restarted after the second big hit game is over (continuous rush mode chan). Thus, in the rush mode, the change of the second special symbol and the second big hit game or the second small hit game are alternately and repeatedly executed. Note that the ST count may be subtracted and updated only due to the start of the change of the first special symbol without subtracting and updating the ST count due to the start of the change of the second special symbol. In this case, even if the result of the second special symbol lottery does not become a big hit (the second big hit C, the second big hit D) during the rush mode, until the fluctuation time of the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol elapses. Can be continuously controlled to the rush mode, so that it is possible to prevent the rush mode from ending during the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol and to reduce the number of award balls that can be obtained by the player.

  Further, as described above, in this embodiment, the number of STs is set to 70 times, whereas the winning probability of the second special symbol in the probable change state (high probability state) is set to 1/45. Means that a big hit of the second special symbol occurs once before the ST count becomes zero. If the second special symbol hits during the rush mode, the rush mode is temporarily terminated. However, the rush mode is resumed after the end of the second big hit game, so the rush mode is substantially continued. State. In other words, the greatest factor as a condition for ending the rush mode is that the fluctuation time of the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol elapses. Therefore, when shifting to the rush mode, the elapsed time after the game mode shifts to the rush mode on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (the remaining time that can be controlled to the rush mode). Is displayed so that the player can recognize that a chance time has occurred and that the chance time has a time limit.

  In the game on the first special symbol side, the big hit symbols (symbol A and symbol B) are stopped and displayed based on the elapse of the long-term fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and the probability change flag is set to the off state, After setting the second interlocking flag to the ON state, the first big hit game is started. As a result, the rush mode is ended, the mode is shifted to the normal mode, and the change of the second special symbol is interrupted. When the first big hit game ends, both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are set to the ON state, and after the first big hit game ends, the mode shifts to the rush preparation mode.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol elapses during the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted together with the start of the first big hit game, and the first big hit game ends. At the same time, the suspended change of the second special symbol is resumed. That is, the second big hit game or the second small hit game is executed according to the result of the change of the second special symbol restarted during the rush preparation mode after the end of the first big hit game. In the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state), when the second special symbol has a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D), the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state) after the end of the second big hit game ), But when the second big hit game is executed in the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state), the game shifts to the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state) after the end of the second big hit game. That is, the big hits of the second special symbol (the second big hit C and the second big hit D) are set so that the game mode after the end of the second big hit game is changed according to the game mode at the time of starting the second big hit game. Has become. Specifically, if the time-saving function is in operation at the time of starting the second big hit game, the time-saving function is operated even after the end of the second big hit game, and the time-saving function is stopped at the time of starting the second big hit game. If so, the state is stopped without activating the time saving function even after the end of the second big hit game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transition to the rush mode again immediately after the transition from the rush mode to the rush preparation mode, and to suppress an excessive improvement in gambling.

  In addition, when the big hit of the second special symbol (the second big hit C, the second big hit D) becomes, after the end of the second big hit game, it is possible to always shift to the rush mode (high probability non-saving time state), In this case, attention can be paid to the fluctuation of the second special symbol restarted immediately after the transition from the rush mode to the rush preparation mode, and the expectation of re-entry to the rush mode can be improved.

  Also, in the rush mode of the third embodiment, when the big hit is not won in the second special symbol lottery, the small hit is always won and the probability is 44/45, so that the second small hit game frequently occurs. Become. Further, since the second fluctuation time during the rush mode is 5 seconds, if the fluctuation time of the long-time fluctuation of the first special symbol is 600 seconds, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is about 120 times during the rush mode. When the variation time of the long-term variation of the first special symbol is 300 seconds, the variation of the second special symbol is executed about 60 times during the rush mode. The number of STs is set to 70 as described above, and the number of STs is subtracted and updated during the rush mode due to the start of the change of the second special symbol. Therefore, when the number of remaining STs is 69, the mode shifts to the rush mode, and during the rush mode, it is assumed that the second special lottery result is not a big hit but all of the small hits. The game mode shifts from the rush mode to the normal mode when the game is performed 69 times. That is, when the variation time of the long-term variation of the first special symbol is 600 seconds, the variation of the second special symbol is executed 120 times unless a big hit is won at least once in the second special symbol lottery. Since the rush mode ends before, if the long time fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 600 seconds, at least one big hit and at most 119 times to continue the rush mode over the entire period. It is necessary to generate a small hit. On the other hand, when the transition time to the rush mode with the remaining number of times of ST being 69 when the fluctuation time of the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol is 300 seconds, the rush mode ends in the middle of the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol. Without hitting, up to 60 small hits occur. Here, about 30 prize balls can be obtained in one second small hit game, and about 1000 to 1500 prize balls can be obtained in one second big hit game. That is, during the rush mode, one big hit is won, and when 119 small hits are won, about 4570 to 5070 prize balls can be obtained, and when 60 small hits are won during the rush mode, 1800 balls are won. Prize balls can be obtained. This is equal to or greater than the maximum number of prize balls (2000 balls) that can be obtained in the jackpot game of the third embodiment. Therefore, by shifting to the rush mode, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. As described above, in the second special symbol lottery in the probable state (particularly in the rush mode (high-probability non-time saving state)), if the big hit is not won, the small hit may not necessarily be won. 2 If the special symbol lottery does not win a big hit, it is sufficient if the small hit is won with a much higher probability than the probability of a loss, but in this case also a small hit game where small hit games frequently occur By setting a winning probability (for example, a winning probability of 80% or more), a large amount of prize balls can be obtained during the rush mode.

  After the rush mode ends, the first big hit game is started. It is possible to obtain about 500 to 2,000 prize balls in one first big hit game, so that about 2300 to 7070 prize balls can be obtained by winning a big hit in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode. Become. Therefore, even if the first big hit B in which only about 500 prize balls can be obtained by executing the big hit game in which the round game is performed four times is the total of the prize balls obtained in the rush mode. If the round game is executed 15 times, more prize balls can be obtained than the first big hit A which can obtain about 2,000 prize balls, and disappointment due to the first big hit B can be obtained. Can be suppressed, and a decrease in entertainment interest can be suppressed. In addition, by obtaining the prize ball of the first big hit A in addition to the prize ball obtained in the rush mode, the prize ball that can be obtained in one first big hit game can be obtained many times, so that the rush ball can be obtained. It is possible to increase expectations for the mode and the first big hit A, and to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In the third embodiment, a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to win a big hit and whether to win a small hit as a second special symbol lottery. It is sufficient to execute the lottery process for determining whether or not to win, and the lottery process for determining whether or not to win a big hit may not be executed, so that the big hit game may not be executed in the game on the second special symbol side. In addition, only at least during the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state) is a lottery process for determining whether or not to win a small hit without performing a lottery process for determining whether or not to win a big hit as a second special symbol lottery. By doing so, in the game on the second special symbol side in the rush mode, control may be performed such that the small hit game can be executed while the big hit game cannot be executed. As described above, in the game on the second special symbol side in the rush mode, control is performed such that only the small hitting game can be executed, so that the change of the second special symbol and the small hitting game are repeatedly executed in the rush mode. A rush mode other than the rush mode in which the prize balls obtained by executing the big hit game at a stretch (mainly 100%) and a rush mode in which the prize balls obtained by executing the small hit game are gradually increased. And a single pachinko machine 1 can provide different playability, thereby preventing the player from getting tired and suppressing a decrease in the game entertainment. Also, during the rush mode, a large amount of prize balls (thousand prize balls of 1000 to 1500 balls) cannot be obtained at a stroke (in a short time) because the big hit game is not executed, and the prize balls gradually obtained. Is executed, so that it is possible to concentrate on the game on the second special symbol side in the rush mode in order to generate more small hits, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest.

  In addition, even if a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to win a big hit as a second special symbol lottery, and if a lottery is won as a second special symbol lottery, a small By executing the big hit game similar to the hit game (opening mode of the big winning opening 2103b for opening and closing the second opening / closing member 2106b of the second attacker device 2100b in the opening pattern E), the big hit game and the like mainly (even 100%) (Good) A game mode other than the rush mode in which a large number of prize balls are obtained at once may be distinguished from a rush mode in which the number of prize balls to be obtained is gradually increased. In addition, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit only at least during the rush mode (high-probability non-saving time state), it is the same as the small hit game (in the opening pattern E, the second opening / closing member 2106b of the second attacker device 2100b) (A mode of opening the special winning opening 2103b for opening and closing the game) may be executed. In this way, when the big hit is won as the second special symbol lottery, the lottery is performed in the same manner as in the small hit game (opening mode of the big winning opening 2103b for opening and closing the second opening and closing member 2106b of the second attacker device 2100b in the opening pattern E). By executing the big hit game, the same operation and effect can be obtained as in the case where the small hit game can be executed in the game on the second special symbol side in the rush mode while the big hit game is not executed. It will be possible to play.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when a big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol is stopped before the big hit symbol and the first special symbol is displayed. At the time of starting the change of the special symbol (triggered by the start of the change of the first special symbol), the shift to the rush mode in which the expected value of obtaining the prize ball is higher than in the normal mode (low probability non-time saving state), At the start of the change of the first decorative symbol executed in response to the change of the symbol and the first special symbol, the mode is suddenly shifted to the rush mode (the rush mode occurs), thereby giving the player surprise and surprise. Since it is possible to pay attention to the start of the fluctuating display of the first decorative symbol while expecting the occurrence of the rush mode, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest. In addition, not only the first big hit game executed in accordance with the result of the first special symbol lottery, but also a transition to the rush mode to control an advantageous state in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained, thereby increasing the game motivation. In addition to being able to improve, it is possible to play by paying attention to other than the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the variation of the first special symbol, and thus corresponds to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol. Even in a period before the big hit symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In the third embodiment, when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device in step S502a of the first changing process (FIG. 129), the probable change flag is set to the off state. Although the rush mode is configured to end, the rush mode may be ended at least before the first attacker device 2100a opens and closes in the first big hit game. For example, the first big hit game start process (FIG. 130) When the time saving flag is set to the off state in step S604a), the probable change flag may be set to the off state. That is, in the present example, the control is switched to the rush mode triggered by the start of the change of the first special symbol based on the winning of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery, but within the change time (first change time) of the first special symbol. The rush mode is not limited to the rush mode, and the rush mode is maintained until at least the first attacker device 2100a is opened and closed even after the first special symbol change time (first change time) has elapsed. Control may be performed.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (the first special symbol lottery) is not changed until the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). 2 fluctuation time) is 600 seconds, which is much longer than the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol, so that the first special symbol lottery has a big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit). Before winning the big hit B), it is made to execute only the game on the first special symbol side. That is, in the first special symbol lottery, the state before winning the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is substantially the execution of the game on the second special symbol side (in other words, a part of the function of the pachinko machine 1). ) Is a restricted state. Then, when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery, before the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, the time when the first special symbol starts to change To release the restriction (at the time of the start of the change of the first special symbol) and shift to the rush mode allowing the execution of the game on the second special symbol side so as to improve the expected value of winning a prize ball compared to the normal mode. , A novel game in which the rush mode is suddenly shifted to the rush mode (the rush mode occurs) at the start of the change of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol executed in response to the change of the first special symbol, As a result, the player can be surprised and surprised, so that it is possible to focus on the establishment of the start condition while expecting the occurrence of the rush mode, and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  In the above-described third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is changed until a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). The second special symbol is displayed for a long time, and the stop display frequency of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed for the first special symbol. By drastically lowering the frequency compared to the frequency, it is possible to execute only the game on the first special symbol side before winning the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) in the first special symbol lottery. Although the game on the second special symbol side is substantially restricted, until a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). Weakens the launching intensity of the game ball by the hitting ball launching device 500 to less than the predetermined intensity so as not to be able to hit right, or makes the center ball 2500 of the gaming ball launched by the hitting ball launching device 500 with the intensity higher than the predetermined intensity enter the right area. By preventing the game ball from entering the second starting port 2102 by interfering with a member or the like, or by stopping the detection by the second starting port sensor 3132, the game ball enters the second starting port 2102. Even if a detection signal is output from the second starting port sensor 3132, the detection signal is ignored (in the first special symbol lottery in step S201 of the first and second starting port winning processing (FIG. 125)). If a flag indicating that a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) has been set is set, it is determined that a game ball has not been won to the second starting port 2102. In order to prevent the game on the second special symbol side from being executed, the first special symbol is selected when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery. Before the stop display with the big hit symbol and when the change of the first special symbol is started (at the time of the start of the change of the first special symbol), the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state) is shifted to the rush mode (high). The game on the second special symbol side may be executed during the probability non-saving time state). This makes it possible to reliably switch the main game (the game on the first special symbol side or the game on the second special symbol side) between the rush mode and the other game modes.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (the first special symbol lottery) is not changed until the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). 2 fluctuation time) is 600 seconds, which is much longer than the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol, so that the first special symbol lottery has a big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit). Before winning the big hit B), it can be said that the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol is substantially restricted. Then, when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery, the frequency of stopping and displaying the second special symbol triggered by the start of the change of the first special symbol (the second special symbol In order to increase the change frequency of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, the second special symbol and the second special symbol are suddenly changed when the first decorative symbol that changes corresponding to the change of the first special symbol starts to change. A novel game in which the frequency of stop display of the second decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of increases can be realized, thereby giving the player surprise and surprise. Also, the second decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, which change in response to the variation of the second special symbol, are increased in the stop display frequency (the frequency at which the variation of the second special symbol is started). Since it is possible to improve the expectation of being stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the second special symbol and the small hit symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol of the second special symbol, the first special symbol can be improved. Also, by focusing attention on the start of the change of the first decorative symbol that changes in response to the change of the first special symbol, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest. That is, even when the first decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol, the second decorative symbol of the second decorative symbol that changes in response to the change of the second special symbol and the second special symbol is changed. The probability that the second special symbol will be stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol per unit time due to the increase in the stop display frequency, and the second hit symbol or the second hit symbol corresponding to the second hit symbol of the second special symbol. In addition to being able to improve the probability of being stopped and displayed at the small hit symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol of the special symbol, thereby increasing the willingness to play, the first special symbol and the first special symbol are changed in response to the change. Not only the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol to be played, but also the game while paying attention to whether or not the stop display frequency of the second decorative symbol that changes in response to the change of the second special symbol and the second special symbol increases. Can do , The first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the change of the first special symbol are the big hit symbol (the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the big hit symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol) Even in the period before the stop display is performed in the pattern, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (the first special symbol lottery) is not changed until a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). By performing a long-term fluctuation that is significantly longer than the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol, the second fluctuation time of which is 600 seconds, the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol is substantially limited, and the first special symbol is stopped. The frequency at which the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (change of the second special symbol is started) when the first special symbol starts to change when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the symbol lottery. Frequency) is increased, but the second special symbol and the second special symbol are won until a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). 2nd special figure Is controlled so as not to stop and display the second decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the first special symbol lottery when the first special symbol lottery wins a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B). Before the stop display, at the time when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate), the rush mode (high-probability non-time saving state) is switched to the rush mode (high-probability non-time saving). Only during (state), the regulation may be released so that the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the second special symbol can be stopped and displayed. For example, when it is determined in step S501b of the second change processing (FIG. 137) that the second change time has elapsed (the second change timer has become 0), the state of the time-saving flag and the probability change flag are checked, and If it is a game mode other than the mode (high-probability non-saving time state) (normal mode (low-probability non-saving time state), rush preparation mode (high-probability non-saving time state)), it changes according to the second special symbol and the second special symbol. The processing is terminated without stopping and displaying the second decorative symbol to be performed, and the second special symbol and the second special symbol that change in response to the transition to the game mode other than the rush mode are changed. (2) The decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed. This makes it possible to reliably switch the main game (the game on the first special symbol side or the game on the second special symbol side) between the rush mode and the other game modes.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (the first special symbol lottery) is not changed until the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). 2 fluctuation time) is 600 seconds, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is much longer than the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of 600 seconds, and in the first special symbol lottery, a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) In the case of winning, the first special symbol and the first special symbol correspond to the first special symbol in order to shorten (change) the variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol to 5 seconds upon the start of the variation of the first special symbol. Time (second fluctuation time) until the second decoration symbol suddenly fluctuating in response to the second special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the start of the fluctuation of the first decoration symbol fluctuating (change) Can be realized a novel game that is Next, whereby it is possible to provide surprise and unexpected to the player. In addition, since the fluctuation time until the second decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the second special symbol is stopped and displayed is reduced (changed), the first special symbol and the first special symbol are supported. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment by paying attention to the first special symbol and the start of the change of the first decorative symbol which varies in response to the first special symbol and the first special symbol. That is, the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the change of the first special symbol are the big hit symbol (the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the big hit symbol of the first special symbol). Even if the stop display is not performed at the big hit symbol), the change time until the stop display of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that changes corresponding to the second special symbol is shortened (changed). The stop display frequency of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the second special symbol increases, whereby the second special symbol and the second fluctuating symbol corresponding to the second special symbol change per unit time. The decorative symbol is a big hit symbol (a big hit symbol of the second special symbol and a big hit symbol of the second decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the second special symbol) or a small hit symbol (the small hit symbol of the second special symbol and the second special symbol) Corresponding to the small hit symbol In order to improve the probability of stopping and displaying at the second decorative symbol (small hit symbol), the fluctuation time until the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that changes corresponding to the second special symbol are stopped and displayed is reduced (changed). ) Can improve the willingness to play. As described above, not only the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol that changes in response to the change of the first special symbol and the first special symbol, but also the second symbol that changes in response to the change of the second special symbol and the second special symbol. The player can play the game while paying attention to whether or not the variation time (second variation time) of the decorative symbol is reduced, and the first decorative symbol and the first decorative symbol that varies in response to the variation of the first special symbol. Can be suppressed even in a period before the game is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol (the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the big hit symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol).

  In the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (until the gaming mode shifts to the rush mode) until a big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery. The first special symbol lottery has a long variation of 600 seconds, which is much longer than the first special symbol variation time (first variation time), and the first special symbol lottery has a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B). ), The change time of the second special symbol (second change time) is shortened (changed) to 5 seconds upon the start of the change of the first special symbol, and the rush mode is set when the rush mode is entered. Although the variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol is shortened as compared with the other game modes (normal mode, rush preparation mode), the rush mode is changed at least when the mode shifts to the rush mode. It is only necessary to change the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol than the game modes (normal mode, rush preparation mode) other than the game mode, and when the mode shifts to the rush mode, the game mode other than the rush mode The variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol may be longer than that in the (normal mode, rush preparation mode). In this case, the fluctuation time until the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol is stopped and displayed is changed, so that the second special symbol and the second special symbol are changed. The stop display frequency of the fluctuating second decorative symbol changes, and accordingly, the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol per unit time are the big hit symbol (the second special symbol of the second special symbol). The second decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the second special symbol and the small hit symbol (the small hit symbol of the second special symbol and the small hit symbol of the second special symbol) Of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that changes in response to the second special symbol are changed because the probability of stop display at the small hit symbol is increased or decreased. Change the willingness to play by It can be. That is, not only the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol, but also the second decoration that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to play the game while paying attention to whether or not the fluctuation time of the symbol (the second fluctuation time) is changed. The first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol are changed. Even in the period before the big hit symbol (the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the big hit symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol) is stopped and displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, the state before winning the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) in the first special symbol lottery is substantially the execution of the game on the second special symbol side (in other words, the game). And part of the functions of the pachinko machine 1) are limited, so that if the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit, the first The control of the second big hit game can be started with the start of the change of the special symbol. That is, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the control of the first big hit game is started when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbols (first big hit A, first big hit B). On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (the second big hit C, the second big hit D) or a small hit, the start of the change in which the result of the first special symbol lottery of the first special symbol becomes the big hit is Since the control of the second big hit game can be started by shifting to the rush mode as an opportunity, a novel game in which the second big hit game or the small hit game is suddenly started after the start of the change of the first special symbol can be realized. This can give the player surprise and surprise. Further, it is possible to pay attention to the first special symbol and the start of the change of the first decorative symbol that changes in response to the first special symbol while expecting the occurrence of the second big hit game, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest. In addition, the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the change of the first special symbol are the big hit symbol (the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the big hit symbol of the first special symbol). The control of the second big hit game and the small hit game is started not only when the stop display is performed at the big hit symbol) but also when the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that changes corresponding to the first special symbol start to change. Since it becomes possible to acquire a prize ball by obtaining, in addition to the first special symbol and the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol which fluctuates in response to the variation of the first special symbol, it is possible to make the player pay attention and play the game. In addition, it is possible to improve the willingness to play the game, and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  In the above-described third embodiment, the game on the second special symbol side is substantially restricted before winning the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) in the first special symbol lottery. When the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (the second big hit C, the second big hit D) or a small hit, the first special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is changed to the big hit to trigger the second hit. If the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be able to start a big hit game or a small hit game. The control of the second big hit game or the small hit game can be started without triggering the fluctuation start in which the result of the first special symbol lottery of the symbol becomes a big hit, but the big hit (the first big hit A, I mentioned above before winning the first big hit B) In this way, the result of the second special symbol lottery is set to be a big hit (the second big hit C, the second big hit C, or the second special symbol) by preventing the game on the second special symbol side from being executed or restricting the second special symbol from being stopped and displayed. In the case of a big hit D) or a small hit, the result of the first special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is always changed to the rush mode at the start of the change to the big hit, so that the second big hit game or the small hit game can be performed. The control may be started. Accordingly, when the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game is started based on the result of the second special symbol lottery being a big hit (a second big hit C, a second big hit D) or a small hit, In this case, the control of the first big hit game is always started, and the wins (big hits, small hits) are continuously generated, so that double joy is obtained. Can be suppressed.

  In the third embodiment, when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery, the game mode is shifted to the rush mode before the control of the first big hit game is started. In order to enable a prize ball to be acquired by a game on the second special symbol side, a first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to a change in the first special symbol and the first special symbol during execution of the game on the first special symbol side. Is stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol). Can be provided, and a new game that breaks the conventional wisdom of being able to acquire is provided, and surprise and surprise can be given to the player. In addition, since the prize ball can be obtained by shifting to the rush mode other than the first big hit game, the motivation of the game is improved, and the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol which fluctuates in correspondence with the first special symbol are improved. Since it is possible to play while paying attention to other than the stop symbol, the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that changes in response to the change of the first special symbol are the big hit symbols (the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the first special symbol). Even if the stop display is not performed at the first decorative symbol (big hit symbol corresponding to the special symbol big hit symbol), it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In the third embodiment, control is performed such that the result of the second special symbol lottery always becomes a big hit or a small hit during the rush mode. Therefore, when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery, the game mode is shifted to the rush mode before the control of the first big hit game is started, and the second special symbol side When the game is executed, the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (a second big hit C, a second big hit D) or a small hit is started. Will be. That is, during the rush mode, the second special symbol side game is executed, or the second special symbol lottery is determined to be a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit based on a small hit. When the control of the game or the small hitting game is started, the player thereafter changes the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol which fluctuates according to the fluctuation of the first special symbol to the big hit symbol (the big hit of the first special symbol). It can be inferred that the stop display is performed at the symbol and the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol), or that the first jackpot game is controlled. As described above, during the rush mode, the game on the second special symbol side is executed, or the second special symbol lottery is based on the fact that the result of the lottery is a big hit (a second big hit C, a second big hit D) or a small hit. When the control of a big hit game or a small hit game is started, it is possible to recognize that hits (big hits, small hits) occur continuously, and to obtain double pleasure to improve the willingness of the game. It can suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, in the third embodiment, the game on the second special symbol side can be executed even in a game mode (normal mode, rush preparation mode) other than the rush mode. Control of the second big hit game or the small hit game based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit in the rush preparation mode). There is. In other words, the game on the second special symbol side is executed, or the second special symbol lottery based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit. Even when the control of the hit game is started, there is a case where the control of the first big hit game is not thereafter performed. In other words, a second big hit game or a small game based on the fact that the game on the second special symbol side is executed or that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (a second big hit C, a second big hit D) or a small hit. The start of the control of the hit game indicates the control of the first big hit game, and does not indicate that the control is always executed. Before winning the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) in the first special symbol lottery, the game on the second special symbol side cannot be executed as described above, or the second special symbol can be executed. When the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game is started by restricting the stop display from being stopped, the control may always be controlled to the first big hit game thereafter.

  In the third embodiment, when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state), the first special symbol is changed and displayed. During the variable display of the first special symbol (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol) from the start of the game until the stop display with the big hit symbol, the expectation of the prize ball is higher than in the normal mode (low probability non-time saving state). By controlling the rush mode (high-probability non-saving time state) in which the value is high and which is advantageous to the player, the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol executed corresponding to the first special symbol are displayed while being changed. The sudden occurrence of the rush mode can provide the player with surprise and surprise. Further, even before the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, the rush mode is generated during the variable display of the first special symbol, so that the player can advantageously proceed with the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In the third embodiment, the time-saving flag is set to the OFF state when the first special symbol display 1185 starts displaying the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 in step S409a of the first variation pattern setting process (FIG. 191). Thus, the rush mode (high-probability non-saving time state) is configured to start, but it is sufficient that the rush mode is started at least after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, the rush mode is ended by setting the probable change flag to the OFF state when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device in step S502a of the first changing process (FIG. 129). Although the configuration is made as described above, it is sufficient that the rush mode is terminated at least before the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol (before the variation time of the first special symbol elapses). For example, the rush mode is started by setting the time reduction flag to the OFF state before the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses in step S501a of the first fluctuation processing (FIG. 129), or the first special symbol is also changed. The rush mode may be ended by setting the probable change flag to the off state before the change time elapses. That is, in this example, the rush mode is controlled from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the winning of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery until the stop display of the big special symbol is started. The rush mode may be started during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), or the rush mode may be started during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. It may be terminated.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (until the gaming mode shifts to the rush mode) until the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery ( Since the second fluctuation time is a long time fluctuation that is significantly longer than the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol of 600 seconds, a big hit (the first big hit A, Before winning the first big hit B), it is made to execute only the game on the first special symbol side. That is, in the first special symbol lottery, the state before winning the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is substantially the execution of the game on the second special symbol side (in other words, a part of the function of the pachinko machine 1). ) Is a restricted state. Then, when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol to the stop display of the big hit symbol. During the fluctuation display (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), the restriction is released by shifting to the rush mode, the execution of the game on the second special symbol side is allowed, and the prize ball is obtained more than in the normal mode. The expectations have been improved. For this reason, during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol executed in correspondence with the first special symbol (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), the mode is suddenly shifted to the rush mode, thereby limiting. Is released to allow the execution of the game on the second special symbol side, so that the player can be provided with surprise and surprise. In addition, during the fluctuating display of the first special symbol (during the period of the fluctuating time of the first special symbol), the mode is shifted to the rush mode to release the restriction and allow the execution of the game on the second special symbol side. By executing a suitable game, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  In the above-described third embodiment, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed until the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). The time (second fluctuation time) is 600 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is much longer than the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol. By drastically lowering the display frequency compared to the display frequency, the first special symbol lottery is performed so that only the game on the first special symbol side is executed before winning the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B). , The game on the second special symbol side is substantially restricted, but until the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (the game mode shifts to the rush mode). Ma ) Weakens the launching intensity of the game ball by the hitting ball launching device 500 to less than a predetermined intensity so as not to hit the right, or the game ball hit by the hitting ball launching device 500 with the predetermined intensity or more enters the right side area of the center role 2500. Is prevented by a member or the like, or the detection of the second starting port sensor 3132 is stopped so that the entering of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is not detected, or the game ball enters the second starting port 2102. Even if the ball is balled and a detection signal is output from the second starting opening sensor 3132, the detection signal is ignored (the first special symbol lottery in step S201 of the first and second starting opening winning processing (FIG. 125)). If a flag indicating that a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) has been set is set in, it is determined that no game ball has been won in the second starting port 2102. In this way, the game on the second special symbol side cannot be executed, and when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol is won. During the fluctuation display (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), the game on the second special symbol side may be executed by shifting to the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state). This makes it possible to reliably switch the main game (the game on the first special symbol side or the game on the second special symbol side) between the rush mode and the other game modes.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (until the gaming mode shifts to the rush mode) until the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery ( Since the second fluctuation time) is a long time fluctuation that is significantly longer than the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol of 600 seconds, a big hit (the first big hit A, Before winning the first big hit B), it can be said that the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol is substantially restricted. When a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state), the first special symbol is displayed in a variable display (first special symbol). (During the period of the fluctuation time), the frequency of stopping and displaying the second special symbol (the frequency at which the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started) is increased by shifting to the rush mode (high probability non-saving time state). . That is, the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol are the big hit symbol (the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the big hit symbol of the first special symbol). Even if the stop display is not performed at the big hit symbol), the stop display frequency of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol increases, so that the second special symbol increases per second. (2) The probability that the special symbol is stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol, and the second decorative symbol is the small hit symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the second special symbol or the small hit symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. Improve the probability of stop display. As described above, by suddenly shifting to the rush mode during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol executed in correspondence with the first special symbol (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), Since the lottery frequency of the second special symbol increases, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and surprise. In addition, by performing a novel game in which the frequency of the second special symbol is increased by shifting to the rush mode during the variation display of the first special symbol (during the variation time of the first special symbol). In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in entertainment interest.

  In the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) until a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery ( By performing a long-term fluctuation that is much longer than the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol whose second fluctuation time is 600 seconds, the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol is substantially restricted, In the special symbol lottery, if a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won, the rush mode (high probability non-high probability) is displayed during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (during the period of fluctuation of the first special symbol). Although the frequency of stopping and displaying the second special symbol (the frequency at which the change of the second special symbol is started) is increased by shifting to the time saving state, the big special (the first big hit) is performed in the first special symbol lottery. A, first big hit B Until the game is won (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode), the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the second special symbol are controlled so as not to be stopped and displayed. In the first special symbol lottery, When a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won, the rush mode (high-probability non-time saving state) is displayed during the change display of the first special symbol (during the change time of the first special symbol). By shifting, the regulation may be released, and the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the second special symbol may be stopped and displayed. For example, when it is determined in step S501b of the second change processing (FIG. 137) that the second change time has elapsed (the second change timer has become 0), the state of the time-saving flag and the probability change flag are checked, and If it is a game mode other than the mode (high-probability non-saving time state) (normal mode (low-probability non-saving time state), rush preparation mode (high-probability non-saving time state)), it changes according to the second special symbol and the second special symbol. The processing is terminated without stopping and displaying the second decorative symbol to be performed, and the second special symbol and the second special symbol that change in response to the transition to the game mode other than the rush mode are changed. (2) The decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed. This makes it possible to reliably switch the main game (the game on the first special symbol side or the game on the second special symbol side) between the rush mode and the other game modes.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (until the gaming mode shifts to the rush mode) until a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery. In the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high-probability time-saving state), a long-term variation is performed that is much longer than the variation time (first variation time) of the first special symbol whose second variation time is 600 seconds. When a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won, the rush mode (high-probability non-time saving state) is displayed during the change display of the first special symbol (during the change time of the first special symbol). By shifting, the variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol is reduced (changed) to 5 seconds. That is, the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the change of the first special symbol are the big hit symbol (the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the big hit symbol of the first special symbol). Even if the stop display is not performed at the big hit symbol), the fluctuation time until the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that changes corresponding to the second special symbol is stopped and displayed is reduced (changed). The stop display frequency of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the second special symbol increases, whereby the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol per unit time. The probability and the probability that the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the second special symbol and the small hit symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol of the second special symbol are improved. As described above, by suddenly shifting to the rush mode during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol executed in correspondence with the first special symbol (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), Since the lottery frequency of the second special symbol increases, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and surprise. In addition, by performing a novel game in which the frequency of the second special symbol is increased by shifting to the rush mode during the variation display of the first special symbol (during the variation time of the first special symbol). In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in entertainment interest.

  In the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol until the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). The (second fluctuation time) makes a long time fluctuation that is significantly longer than the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol of 600 seconds, and in the first special symbol lottery, the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit) In the case of winning in B), during the change display of the first special symbol (during the period of the change time of the first special symbol), the mode shifts to the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state) to change the second special symbol. The time (second fluctuation time) is reduced (changed) to 5 seconds. That is, in the case of shifting to the rush mode, the change time (second change time) of the second special symbol is shortened as compared with the game modes (normal mode, rush preparation mode) other than the rush mode. In the case of shifting to the rush mode, it is only necessary to change the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol than in the game modes (normal mode, rush preparation mode) other than the rush mode. The variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol may be longer than in the game modes (normal mode, rush preparation mode) other than the rush mode. In this case, the fluctuation time until the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol is stopped and displayed is changed, so that the second special symbol and the second special symbol are changed. The frequency of the stop display of the fluctuating second decorative symbol changes, and accordingly, the probability that the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol per unit time and the second decorative symbol is the second special symbol Since the probability of stopping and displaying at the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol of the second special symbol is improved or decreased, it fluctuates according to the second special symbol and the second special symbol. By changing the variable time until the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the player's willingness to play can be changed. That is, not only the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol, but also the second decoration that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to play the game while paying attention to whether or not the fluctuation time of the symbol (the second fluctuation time) is changed. The first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol are changed. Even if it is not stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol (the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the big hit symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol), it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Further, as described above, in the third embodiment, the second special symbol is used until a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). The second special symbol lottery results in a big hit or a small hit because the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is 600 seconds, which is much longer than the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol. The control of the second big hit game or the small hit game based on the following is rarely started. On the other hand, when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state), the first special symbol is displayed in a fluctuating display (first special symbol). In the period of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery, in order to reduce the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (second fluctuation time) to 5 seconds by shifting to the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state), The control of the second big hit game or the small hit game based on the result of the big hit or the small hit can be started frequently. That is, when a big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery, the rush mode is displayed during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (during the fluctuation time of the first special symbol). By shifting to the (high-probability non-saving time state), the probability that the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game is started is improved. As described above, by suddenly shifting to the rush mode during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol executed in correspondence with the first special symbol (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), Since the start frequency of the control of the second big hit game and the small hit game is increased, and the opportunity for the player to acquire the prize ball is increased, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and surprise. Also, during the fluctuating display of the first special symbol (during the fluctuating time of the first special symbol), by shifting to the rush mode, the frequency of starting the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game is increased. By executing the game, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  In the third embodiment described above, the game on the second special symbol side is substantially restricted before winning the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) in the first special symbol lottery, Although the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game based on the result of the second special symbol lottery being a big hit or a small hit is rarely started, the second big hit game or the small hit game is configured. May not be started. For example, in the first special symbol lottery, a game on the second special symbol side cannot be executed as described above before winning a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B), or a second special symbol can be executed. The result of the first special symbol lottery of the first special symbol becomes a big hit whenever the result of the second special symbol lottery becomes a big hit or a small hit by restricting the stop display of the second special symbol lottery. The control of the second big hit game and the small hit game may be started by shifting to the rush mode as an opportunity. Accordingly, when the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game is started based on the result of the second special symbol lottery being a big hit or a small hit, the control of the first big hit game is always started thereafter. As a result, wins (big hits, small hits) occur successively, so that double pleasure can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness to play the game and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In the third embodiment, when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state), the first special symbol is changed and displayed. In the middle (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), it is possible to acquire the prize ball by the game on the second special symbol side by shifting to the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state). That is, the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the change of the first special symbol are the big hit symbol (the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the big hit symbol of the first special symbol). Even if the stop display is not performed at the big hit symbol, the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the change of the second special symbol are the big hit symbol (the big hit symbol of the second special symbol and the second special symbol). The second decorative symbol big hit symbol corresponding to the special symbol big hit symbol and the small hit symbol (the second decorative symbol small hit symbol corresponding to the second special symbol small hit symbol and the second special symbol small hit symbol) By controlling to the second big hit game or the small hit game based on the stop display of the prize ball, a prize ball can be obtained. As described above, the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that changes in response to the change of the first special symbol are the big hit symbol (the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the big hit symbol of the first special symbol). Even if the stop display is not performed at the symbol big hit symbol), the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game can be started by suddenly shifting to the rush mode, so that the player is surprised and surprised. Can be given. In addition, the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the change of the first special symbol are the big hit symbol (the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the big hit symbol of the first special symbol). When the stop display is performed at the big hit symbol, not only does the control of the first big hit game start, but also the rush mode (high probability) during the changing display of the first special symbol (during the period of the changing time of the first special symbol). Even when the state shifts to the (non-time saving state), the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game can be started, so that the opportunity for the player to acquire the prize ball increases, and therefore, the decrease in the gaming interest is suppressed. be able to.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (until the gaming mode shifts to the rush mode) until a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery. In the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high-probability time-saving state), a long-term variation is performed that is much longer than the variation time (first variation time) of the first special symbol whose second variation time is 600 seconds. When a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won, the rush mode (high-probability non-time saving state) is displayed during the change display of the first special symbol (during the change time of the first special symbol). By shifting, the variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol is reduced (changed) to 5 seconds. Then, the rush mode is ended when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has elapsed, and the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol are the big hit symbols (the first special symbol). The control of the first big hit game is started when stop display is performed with the big hit symbol and the first decorative symbol big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the first special symbol. That is, when the change time (second change time) of the second special symbol is reduced by shifting to the rush mode, the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit) must be performed in the first special symbol lottery thereafter. It can be recognized that the game is controlled by the first big hit game based on winning in B). For this reason, even during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), the second decorative symbol which fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed. By executing a novel game in which attention can be paid to whether or not the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) is changed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Further, in the third embodiment described above, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit in the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state), the time reduction function is stopped and the rush Although it is configured to shift to the preparation mode (high-probability non-time saving state), the timing for stopping the time saving function (timing of the rush mode) is not limited to the start of the change, and stops the change of the first special symbol. The timing at which the time reduction function is stopped (the time when the rush mode occurs) may be set as appropriate within the period up to. For example, the time saving function may be stopped 5 seconds after the start of the change of the first special symbol which becomes a big hit in the rush preparation mode, and the shift to the rush mode may be controlled, or the first special symbol may be controlled in the rush preparation mode. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the first special symbol is started to change in accordance with the type of the first big hit or the type of the change pattern of the first special symbol, and a predetermined plurality of types of time (for example, 0 seconds) When the time determined from among (at the start of fluctuation), 5 seconds, and 10 seconds has elapsed, the time saving function may be stopped and the shift to the rush mode may be controlled.

  In the above-described first to third embodiments, when performing the transition control to the rush mode, an advantageous state different from the big hit or the small hit is obtained by performing display or the like on the liquid crystal display device 1900 notifying the fact. Although the player is made to recognize that the event has occurred, the display for notifying the shift control to the rush mode is not performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the rush mode is used in the first embodiment and the second embodiment. In the case of the big hit in the preparation mode, the effect display during the big hit game executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 in connection with the first big hit game is continuously executed even after the end of the first big hit game. In the effect display during a big hit game, the number of rounds is added and updated until the rush mode ends (for example, the rush mode is opened after the first big hit game is executed 16 rounds). In this case, when the second big hit game or the small hit game is started during the rush mode, the number of rounds added to the round number of the first big hit game is displayed.) The end of the first big hit game and the start of the rush mode May be made to be difficult to be recognized, and the rush mode may be displayed integrally with the first big hit game. In this case, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one big hit game is markedly different from that of the conventional gaming machine. (In the above example, it is about twice) It is possible to improve the value of the big hit by giving the illusion that it has been increased, so that the entertainment interest of the game can be improved. In the third embodiment, the rush preparation mode is used. 1 When a special symbol lottery results in a big hit, a game ball is driven into the right area of the center role 2500 while the decorative symbol executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 fluctuates according to the lottery result. The rush mode may be performed in such a way as to show the rush mode integrally with the reach production by executing the reach production.In this case, it is possible to obtain a prize ball while the reach production is being performed. In the third embodiment, the first big hit game is started when the rush mode based on the big hit as a result of the first special symbol lottery is started as the rush preparation mode in the third embodiment. After the notification of the effect, the effect display during the first big hit game is started, and is continued until the first big hit game is completed. (In the effect display during the first big hit game executed together with the start of the rush mode, the first big hit game is displayed. By adding and updating the number of rounds until the game is over), the rush mode and the first big hit game may be integrally displayed, and in this case, once The illusion that the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game is greatly increased (about twice in the above example) as compared with the conventional gaming machine can be illusioned, and the value of the jackpot can be improved. Can be improved. When the first big hit game is started, an effect of notifying the start of the first big hit game and notifying that the game is to be switched to the right is executed. In the first big hit game, a game ball is driven into the right area of the center role item 2500. It is made to make. Therefore, even when the effect display during the first big hit game is executed at the start of the rush mode or when the effect display during the first big hit game is continued until the rush mode is terminated after the first big hit game, The player can drive a game ball into the right side area of the center role 2500 and make the second big winning opening 2103b win a game ball, which can obtain a prize ball, so that there is no disadvantage. . As described above, in the present example, in the second special symbol lottery executed during the rush mode, either one of the small hit and the big hit is obtained, and the result is not lost. Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery is performed during the rush mode, the small hit game or the first big hit game is always executed and the prize ball can be obtained. That is, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, a state in which a prize ball can be obtained by controlling the transition to the rush mode after the end of the first big hit game (the second big hit game or the small hit in the first big hit game and the rush mode). Games) occur continuously, and in the third embodiment, a state in which a prize ball can be obtained continuously occurs by controlling the transition to the rush mode before the start of the first big hit game. For example, by executing a series of effects (for example, reproducing a moving image composed of a series of stories) over a state in which the continuously generated prize balls can be acquired, the first big hit game and the second in the rush mode are performed. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between a big hit game and a small hit game. In the third embodiment, as a reach effect performed over a period from the start to the end of the rush mode, for example, after displaying a battle mode on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a second big hit game or the like in the rush mode is performed. When the small hitting game is started, a display such as “Right-hit and shoot an ammunition at the enemy army!” Is displayed, so that the player makes a right-hand operation and the player makes a right-hand operation to make the second big winning opening 2103b. In response to the acceptance of the game ball, an effect may be executed in which a shell is shot at the enemy army to reduce the number of enemy armies. In addition, as described above, in order to perform an effect in which the player hits a game ball into the right area of the center item 2500 as an effect that shows the first big hit game and the rush mode integrally, The game ball can be driven into the second large winning opening 2103b by driving the game ball into the right area of the 2500 and the prize ball can be acquired by this, so that there is no disadvantage.

  In the third embodiment, when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state), the first variation pattern setting process ( In step S409a in FIG. 191), the rush mode (high-probability non-time saving state) is started by setting the time saving flag to the OFF state when the first special symbol display 1185 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. However, the rush mode may be started after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. For example, after the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the time reduction flag is set to the off state before the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses in step S501a of the first fluctuation process (FIG. 129), The rush mode may be started during the fluctuation display of one special symbol (during the period of fluctuation of the first special symbol). That is, in the third embodiment, when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery, either 300 seconds or 600 seconds is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol. The time for controlling the rush mode (high-probability non-time saving state) is made different by setting the time-saving flag to OFF when starting the variation display of the first special symbol. Even when the start timing of the rush mode is changed by changing the time from when the display is started to when the time saving flag is set to the off state, the rush mode is started and then ended (variation of the first special symbol). The time until the time elapses) changes, and the time for controlling to the rush mode can be made different.

  With reference to FIGS. 195 and 196, a specific example of the case where the start timing of the rush mode is changed during the change display of the first special symbol (during the change time of the first special symbol) as described above will be described. FIG. 195 is an example of a fluctuation pattern table selected in the high-probability time-saving state (rush preparation mode), and FIG. 196 is a timing chart showing the effect contents executed when the start timing of the rush mode is changed. This is an example.

  As shown in FIG. 195, the result of the first special symbol lottery is selected at the time of the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) in the variation pattern table selected in the high probability time saving state (rush preparation mode). A fluctuation pattern table and a fluctuation pattern table in which the result of the first special symbol lottery is selected at the time of loss are set. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table selected when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B), four kinds of fluctuation patterns of the big hit fluctuation patterns A to D are set. In the variation pattern table that is selected when the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost, two types of variation patterns A and B are set. Then, when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery in the high probability time saving state (rush preparation mode), the step of the first variation pattern setting process (FIG. 191). In S402a, a variation pattern table when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is selected as a change pattern table according to the high probability time saving state (rush preparation mode), and the big hit change One of the variation patterns A to D is determined. On the other hand, if a loss is determined in the first special symbol lottery in the high probability time reduction state (rush preparation mode), the high probability time reduction state (rush preparation mode) is set in step S403a of the first variation pattern setting process (FIG. 191). Is selected as the variation pattern table corresponding to the result of the first special symbol lottery, and one of the variation patterns A and B is determined.

  In the big hit variation patterns A to D, the variation time of the first special symbol from the start to the end of the variation display of the first special symbol is set, and the timing of setting the time reduction flag to the OFF state ( Rush mode start timing) is set. In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 70 seconds for the big hit variation patterns A to D, and after the variation time of the first special symbol elapses, the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery. The first big hit game based on this is executed. In the big hit variation patterns A to D, the timing of setting the time reduction flag to the OFF state (start timing of the rush mode) is different. First, in the big hit variation pattern A, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. When the time saving flag is set to the OFF state when starting the game, the mode shifts to the rush mode (high-probability non-time saving state). ing. In the case of the big hit variation pattern B, the rush mode is set by turning off the time saving flag 20 seconds after the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, so that the variation time of the first special symbol is changed. The remaining time of 50 seconds is the time for controlling the rush mode. In the case of the big hit variation pattern C, the shift to the rush mode is performed by setting the time reduction flag to the OFF state 40 seconds after the variation display of the first special symbol is started. The remaining time of 30 seconds is the time for controlling the rush mode. As described above, in this example, the control time to the rush mode becomes longer as the timing of setting the time saving flag to the OFF state (start timing of the rush mode) is earlier, even though the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same. As a result, the number of times the second special symbol that can be executed during the rush mode changes is increased, and the number of times the second small hitting game is executed based on winning in the second special symbol lottery during the rush mode is also increased. Since the number increases, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the rush mode can be increased.

  In addition, in the big hit change pattern D, the shift to the rush mode (high-probability non-short-time state) is prevented by setting the time saving flag to the off state when the change time of the first special symbol has elapsed. As described above, when the big hit variation pattern D is executed, the second small hit game based on winning in the small hit in the second special symbol lottery can be executed without shifting to the rush mode. It has become difficult. That is, after the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses, only the first big hit game based on winning the big hit in the first special symbol lottery is executed, and the prize ball can be obtained only by the first big hit game. .

  In the loss-time variation patterns A and B, the variation time of the first special symbol from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol to the end thereof is set. In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 70 seconds which is the same as the big hit variation patterns A to D for the loss variation pattern A, and the first special symbol is set to the first special symbol for the loss variation pattern B. 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the symbol. Further, in the losing time variation patterns A and B, the time reduction flag is not set to the OFF state, and the rush preparation mode (high-probability time reduction state) is continued even after the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed. I have.

  Next, the effects displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the large hit variation patterns A to D and the loss variation pattern A are executed will be described. In the liquid crystal display device 1900, the rush mode (the high probability non-time saving state) is set by setting the time saving flag to the off state during the variation display of the first special symbol based on the big hit variation patterns A to D and the loss variation pattern A. ) Is executed, and if the game is not shifted to the rush mode, an effect is issued to notify whether or not to execute the first big hit game. More specifically, at the stage of 0 to 20 seconds out of 70 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, "Doki Doki 1" is executed as an effect to be notified whether or not to shift to the rush mode. At the stage of 40 seconds, a “throb effect 2” is executed as an effect to be notified whether or not to shift to the rush mode. At the stage of 40 to 70 seconds, the first special symbol is changed after the change time of the first special symbol has elapsed. "Thrilling effect 3" is executed as an effect to be notified whether or not to execute the big hit game.

  Specifically, when the big hit variation pattern A is executed, as shown in FIG. 196 (A), the rush mode is set by setting the time reduction flag to the OFF state when the variation display of the first special symbol is started. (High-probability non-time saving state), during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, an effect is displayed as displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 to notify that the rush mode is being performed. I have. When the big hit variation pattern B is executed, as shown in FIG. 196 (B), the time reduction flag is set to the off state 20 seconds after the variation display of the first special symbol is started, so that the rush mode is set. (High-probability non-time saving state), but at the stage of 0 to 20 seconds, the hero character attacks the enemy character as a successful performance of "Pounding production 1" displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. An effect to notify that the mode is to be entered is being executed. After that, as the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 during the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the effect of notifying that the rush mode is being performed is executed.

  When the big hit variation pattern C is executed, as shown in FIG. 196 (C), the time-saving flag is set to the OFF state 40 seconds after the first special symbol variation display is started, thereby enabling the rush mode. (High-probability non-saving time state), but at the stage of 0 to 20 seconds, an enemy character attacks the hero character as a failure effect of “Pounding effect 1” displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and 20 to 20 seconds At the stage of 40 seconds, as a successful performance of “Pounding Direction 2” displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, an effect of notifying that the main character shifts to the rush mode by avoiding the attack of the enemy character is executed. I have. After that, as the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 during the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the effect of notifying that the rush mode is being performed is executed.

  When the big hit variation pattern D is executed, as shown in FIG. 196 (D), the time reduction flag is turned off when the variation display of the first special symbol is started and the variation display ends 70 seconds after the start of the variation display. At the stage of 0 to 20 seconds, the enemy character attacks the protagonist character at the stage of 0 to 20 seconds. As a failure effect of “Pounding Direction 2” displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the hero character eats an attack of an enemy character, and at a stage of 40 to 70 seconds, the “Pounding Direction 3” displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 As a successful effect, an effect is given to notify that the first big hit game will be executed after the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has elapsed by the rise of the main character. As described above, the rush mode (high-probability non-time-saving state) is performed until a successful production is performed in any of the “excitement production 1”, the “excitement production 2”, and the “excitement production 3” displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. ) Or whether to execute the first big hit game after the change time of the first special symbol elapses, the player pays attention to the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 with expectation. can do.

  When the losing time variation pattern A is executed, as shown in FIG. 196 (E), the time reduction flag is not set to the OFF state, but it is 0 out of 70 seconds which is the variation time of the first special symbol. At a stage of about 20 seconds, as an unsuccessful production of "Pounding production 1" displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, an enemy character attacks the hero character and is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 at a stage of 20 to 40 seconds. As a failure production of “Pounding production 2”, the main character eats the attack of the enemy character, and at 40 to 70 seconds, the main character falls down as a failure production of “Pounding production 3” displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Thus, an effect of notifying that the first big hit game is not executed is executed. As described above, even during the change display of the first special symbol based on the determination of the loss in the first special symbol lottery, the “excitement effect 1”, “excitement effect 2”, and “excitement effect” are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. By executing the “effect 3”, the player can pay attention to the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the end.

  In addition, when the loss variation pattern B is executed immediately before the variation display of the first special symbol based on any of the big hit variation patterns B to D and the loss variation pattern A, the first variation based on the loss variation pattern B is performed. During the special symbol fluctuating display, a preceding effect that the main character meets an enemy character may be executed as an effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the loss-time variation pattern B, the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, and the next first special symbol in the suspended state is held. It is determined in advance whether or not to execute any of the jackpot variation patterns B to D and the losing variation pattern A as the symbol variation display (so-called look-ahead), and as the next first special symbol variation display, If it is determined in advance that one of the variation patterns B to D and the loss variation pattern A is to be executed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 performs the preceding display during the variation display of the first special symbol based on the loss variation pattern B. What is necessary is just to perform an effect. Then, when the preceding effect is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol executed thereafter is based on one of the big hit fluctuation patterns B to D and the loss time fluctuation pattern A. Since it is possible to recognize that the effects such as “Pounding production 1”, “Pounding production 2”, and “Pounding production 3” are executed, it is possible to increase the expectations of the player before the execution of such a production. .

(Fourth embodiment)
In the third embodiment, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the control for shifting the game mode to the rush mode is executed upon the start of the change of the first special symbol. When the result of the symbol lottery does not become a big hit, a control to shift to the rush mode triggered by the start of the change of the first special symbol at a predetermined rate (before starting the first big hit game after starting the change of the first special symbol) May be executed as long as control for shifting to the rush mode is executed). For example, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order during the rush preparation mode (high-probability time saving state), the first variation pattern setting process is executed, and when the special variation pattern is selected, the first variation pattern is selected. The game mode may be shifted to the rush mode when the change of the special symbol starts. With such a configuration, the chance of acquiring the prize ball increases, so that when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, attention can be paid to the occurrence of the rush mode, and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed. Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment will be described.

[First variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 197 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first variation pattern setting process according to the fourth embodiment. Note that processes common to the first variation pattern setting process (FIG. 191) of the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  If the flag indicating that the jackpot has been won is not set (NO in step S401a), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 selects the variation pattern table at the time of a miss according to the game state (step S403a). ), A variation pattern is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the first variation random number read in step S304a in the first variation start process (step S404a ').

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the determined variation pattern is a specific variation pattern (a variation pattern of 180 seconds and a variation pattern of 300 seconds corresponding to the first special symbol loss during the rush preparation mode shown in FIG. 198 (E) described later). Is determined (step S408a '), and if it is a specific variation pattern, the time saving flag is turned off to stop the time saving function (step S409a), and then the process proceeds to step S405a.

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the determined variation pattern is a specific variation pattern (a variation pattern of 180 seconds and a variation pattern of 300 seconds corresponding to the loss of the first special symbol in the rush preparation mode shown in FIG. 198 (E) described later). ) (NO in step S408a '), the process proceeds to step S405a without operating the time reduction flag.

  Therefore, when the current game mode is the rush preparation mode (high-precision time-saving game state) and the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order, a specific variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Then, at the time when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the result is started (at the start of the variable display), the time saving function is stopped and the mode shifts to the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state). As described above, the probability change flag is set to the off state when the total number of times of the change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol executed after the end of the big hit game reaches 70 times. That is, the rush mode (high-probability non-time saving state) is continued until the total number of changes between the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 70 after the end of the big hit game. It is to be noted that the probable change flag is set to the off state when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped based on the specific fluctuation pattern, or the time reduction flag is set to the on state again when the fluctuation of the specific fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is stopped. A transition to the rush mode may be made until the variation based on the specific variation pattern of the first special symbol is stopped. In this case, the variation of the second special symbol is performed by the second variation start process executed during the rush mode. By not subtracting the number of times of ST when starting, the rush mode may not be ended until at least the fluctuation based on the specific fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is stopped.

[Game specifications of special design]
FIG. 198 is an example of various tables showing game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the fourth embodiment. Here, specifications different from the game specifications (FIG. 192) according to the third embodiment will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 198 (E), the fluctuation time of the special symbol of the fourth embodiment differs depending on the game mode (game state). When the game mode is the normal mode, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 3 seconds to 120 seconds according to the presence or absence of the reach effect. In this case, any one of 3 seconds, 180 seconds, and 300 seconds is set. In the case of a big hit, 300 seconds or 600 seconds is set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost in the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state), the specific variation pattern (300 seconds) is used as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. , 600 seconds), the mode shifts to the rush mode (high-probability non-time saving state). That is, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss, the variation time of the first special symbol is varied depending on the type of the variation pattern of the first special symbol. It should be noted that the rush mode that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost and a specific fluctuation pattern is executed is more advantageous to the player than the rush mode that occurs when a large hit occurs. Is set to be low. More specifically, in the rush mode that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost and a specific fluctuation pattern is executed, the rush mode continues for 180 seconds or 300 seconds, whereas the big hit In the rush mode that occurs when the condition (2) is reached, the time is continued for 300 seconds or 600 seconds. That is, in the rush mode that occurs when a big hit occurs, the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost, and a value equal to or more than the rush mode that occurs when a specific fluctuation pattern is executed. It is provided to the player. In addition, in the case where the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and the rush mode that occurs when a specific fluctuation pattern is executed, a value equivalent to the rush mode that occurs when a big hit occurs (300) Second or 600 seconds), in which case the expectations for the rush mode can be further improved.

  Further, the probability that a specific variation pattern is executed is set to be lower than the winning probability in the high probability state (for example, about 1/500). As described above, even if the result of the first special symbol lottery is incorrect, a state (rush mode) advantageous to the player can be generated, so that the player has a greater chance of acquiring a prize ball. In some cases, expectations for the occurrence of the rush mode can be improved. In addition, in recent years, the fluctuation time has been prolonged, but when the above-described reach effect is executed for a long time and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the big hit is gradually increased with the expectation for the big hit being gradually increased. Although it is effective to enhance the entertainment of the game because it can be generated, when the out-of-design is stopped and displayed, not only the disappointment from the state where the expectation for the big hit is gradually increased but also waste for a long time is large. Recognition that the user has spent a great amount of time may reduce the entertainment interest of the game. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first special symbol is fluctuated for a long time when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order, but it is advantageous for the player within the fluctuating time of the first special symbol. Since a state (rush mode) is generated and a prize ball can be obtained, it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of a game based on a result of a long-term change being lost.

  In addition, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is unsuccessful and a specific variation pattern is executed, control is performed to vary the variation time of the second special symbol executed during the rush mode which occurs when the specific variation pattern is executed. By doing so, the number of award balls that can be obtained during the rush mode may be made different. For example, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is unsuccessful and a specific variation pattern is executed, the variation time of the second special symbol is always 10 as a rush mode (high probability non-time saving state). One of a rush mode C (high-probability non-time-saving state C) set to seconds and a rush mode D (high-probability non-time-saving state D) where the variation time of the second special symbol is always set to 15 seconds. Or the second special symbol can be set to 10 seconds and 15 seconds as a variation time, and it is more likely to be set to 10 seconds than 15 seconds (for example, 10 seconds with an 80% probability). Rush mode C (high-probability non-time saving state C), and 10 seconds and 15 seconds as the rush mode C as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. It's possible, 10 seconds Rush mode D (high-probability non-time saving state D) that is likely to be set to 15 seconds (for example, set to 15 seconds with a probability of 80%, and set to 10 seconds with a probability of 20%). Alternatively, control may be performed. As a result, the degree of advantage cannot be determined only by the type of the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the duration of the rush mode, and the type of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the duration of the rush mode, and the second special symbol Since the degree of advantage can be determined only by comprehensively determining the fluctuation time of the game, it is possible to further focus attention on the game, and to improve the interest in the game. Also, in the rush mode that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost and a specific variation pattern is executed, the second special symbol in the rush mode that occurs when a large hit occurs By setting the second special symbol to fluctuate for a change time (10 seconds or 15 seconds) longer than or equal to the change time (5 seconds or 10 seconds), the degree of advantage of the player is reduced. That is, in the rush mode that occurs when a big hit occurs, the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost, and a value equal to or greater than the rush mode that occurs when a specific fluctuation pattern is executed. Is given to the player. Also, in the case where the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost and the rush mode which occurs when a specific fluctuation pattern is executed, the second special symbol in the rush mode which occurs when a big hit occurs. The second special symbol may fluctuate in a fluctuation time (5 seconds or 10 seconds) equivalent to the fluctuation time in this case. In this case, expectations for the rush mode can be further improved.

  In addition, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss, and when a specific variation pattern is determined, the shift time of the second special symbol in the rush mode is controlled during the rush mode. You may make it different according to the type of pattern. For example, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and the variation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a variation pattern of 180 seconds as a specific variation pattern, the transition control to the rush mode D is performed. On the other hand, when the variation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a variation pattern of 300 seconds as a specific variation pattern, the shift control to the rush mode C is performed so that the first special symbol is changed to the first variation pattern table as the variation pattern table of the second special symbol. A plurality of variation pattern tables according to the variation pattern type of the special symbol may be provided. In this case, the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and a specific variation pattern is executed. The difference between the two types of rush modes (rush mode C and rush mode D) that occur in the case can be provided in the first mode. Many prize balls can be obtained when the result of the symbol lottery is out and the rush mode continues for a longer period (rush mode C in this example) when a specific fluctuation pattern is executed. Therefore, the occurrence of the rush mode can be noticed to prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

  Further, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and the variation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a variation pattern of 300 seconds as a specific variation pattern, the transition control to the rush mode D is performed. On the other hand, when the variation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a variation pattern of 180 seconds as the specific variation pattern, the first special symbol is changed to the rush mode C so that the first special symbol is changed to the first variation pattern table as the variation pattern table of the second special symbol. A plurality of variation pattern tables according to the variation pattern type of the special symbol may be provided. In this case, the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and a specific variation pattern is executed. The same prize ball is obtained regardless of which one of the two types of rush mode (rush mode C and rush mode D) occurs. In the case where the rush mode occurs, not only can the game interest be improved, but if the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the two types of rush mode is the same, it is disadvantageous for the player. The advantage degree of the rush mode C having a short duration is increased. That is, since the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each of the two types of rush mode is substantially the same, the rush mode C that is executed in a shorter time increases the number of prize balls obtained per unit time, and is more useful to the player. Since it is in an advantageous state, the degree of advantage of the rush mode C having a short duration can be increased.

[Transition of game state]
Subsequently, a transition of the gaming state according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that only portions different from the third embodiment will be described, and description will not be repeated.

(Lash preparation mode)
As in the third embodiment, in the high-probability time-short game state (rush preparation mode), the first special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball mainly to the first starting opening 2101 (special winning opening 2101b) is executed, and the first special symbol lottery is executed. The result of the special symbol lottery is continuously lost 70 times and is based on a variation pattern other than a specific variation pattern described later (a non-specific variation pattern; a variation pattern in which a variation time of 3 seconds is set in this example). When the first special symbol fluctuates 70 times continuously (when it becomes non-specific loss), it shifts to the normal game state (normal mode). In the third embodiment, the first special symbol is started to change only when the first big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is determined before the first special symbol lottery is executed 70 times. As a transition to a high probability non-saving time state (rush mode, second gaming state), in this embodiment, even if the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost, based on a specific fluctuation pattern When the first special symbol is changed (when the first special symbol is changed), a transition to the high probability non-time saving state (rush mode, second game mode) is triggered by the start of the change of the first special symbol. In addition, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the high probability non-time saving game state (rush mode) continues until the big hit game based on the first big hit is started. When the result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and a specific variation pattern is executed, the process is continued until the total number of variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 70 times. Has become.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the occurrence timing of the rush mode is increased as compared with the third embodiment. That is, in the third embodiment, the rush mode is generated only when a big hit occurs in the rush preparation mode. However, in the fourth embodiment, even if a big hit does not occur in the rush preparation mode, a specific variation pattern is generated. Is selected, the rush mode is generated. When the rush mode is generated, specifically, when the first special symbol based on a specific variation pattern is started to change, a display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, “rush mode entry! ), A sound output from a speaker (for example, “rush mode entry; right-handed.”), A lighting mode of a lamp and an LED (a lighting mode for encouraging right-handed operation, for example, a door surrounding an outer periphery of the game window 101). Controlling the transition to the rush mode by the lamp and the LED provided on the frame 5 by the mode in which the light moves from the firing rail 660 toward the right area of the center role 2500) and the like, and switching to the right-handed mode. The player is notified.

  Also, the rush mode that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and a specific variation pattern is executed is, as described above, the number of times of the variation between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. During the rush mode, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the remaining number of times that the user can stay in the rush mode, so that the player has a chance time. To recognize that there is a time limit. When the rush mode is terminated when the change of the first special symbol based on the specific change pattern is stopped, the elapsed time after the game mode is shifted to the rush mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. , The remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (the remaining time that can be controlled in the rush mode) and the like are displayed so that the player can recognize that a chance time has occurred and that the chance time has a time limit. Is also good.

  In the above-described fourth embodiment, the first special symbol lottery is determined to be out of order, and when the first special symbol is changed based on a specific variation pattern (in the case of specified outlier), the first special symbol is determined. Although the control to shift to the rush mode upon the start of the change of the special symbol has been described, the shift control to the rush mode is performed due to the fact that the first special symbol is fluctuated in a specific fluctuation pattern and the missing symbol is stopped and displayed. It may be. For example, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order, when the variation of the first special symbol based on the variation pattern is stopped, the specific variation pattern is set in step S515a of the first variation process (FIG. 129). It is determined whether or not the first special symbol has been changed based on the specific variation pattern, and if it is determined that the first special symbol has been changed based on a specific variation pattern, the time reduction flag is turned off to stop the time reduction function. It may be. In this case, since the transition to the rush mode is performed after the first special symbol is changed, the relation between the change time of the specific change pattern (180 seconds or 300 seconds in the above example) and the rush mode duration is lost. There is no need to change the first special symbol over a long period (180 seconds or 300 seconds) as described above.

  In this case, the rush mode is continued until the ST count becomes zero, but after the transition control to the rush mode (high-probability non-time saving state), the first special symbol lottery is performed before the ST count becomes zero. If the result is a big hit, the rush mode is terminated, and after the first big hit, the control is shifted to the rush preparation mode (high-probability time-saving state).

  In the rush mode in which the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss, the shift control is performed based on the fact that the first special symbol is fluctuated based on a specific variation pattern and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed. , Both the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed. As described above, during the rush mode, the result of the second special symbol lottery is not lost. Therefore, during the rush mode, it is better to change only the second special symbol and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The number of award balls that can be obtained by the player is greater than when both are varied. In this example, as described above, the first starting port 2101 is disposed in the left area of the center role 2500, while the second starting port 2102 is disposed in the right area of the center role 2500. Although a game ball can enter the first starting port 2101, a game ball cannot enter the second starting port 2102, and when hit right, a game ball can enter the second starting port 2102. A game ball cannot enter the first starting port 2101. Therefore, if only right-handing without left-handing is performed when the control is shifted to the rush mode, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed and the number of STs is reduced until the first reserved number counter becomes 0. However, after the first reserved number counter becomes 0, a small hit or a big hit is generated in all of the remaining times of the ST number without the change of the first special symbol being started, so that the prize ball can be obtained. .

  In the above-described example, the pachinko machine 1 that performs the so-called sequential change control in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are respectively changed each time a start winning is generated, but the second special symbol is changed to the first special symbol. Even when the pachinko machine 1 is a so-called priority fluctuating control that fluctuates with priority, the result of the first special symbol lottery is a failure, and the first special symbol fluctuates based on a specific fluctuation pattern. Then, it may be possible to control the rush mode in which the shift control is performed based on the stop display of the missing symbol. In this case, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost, the rush mode in which the first special symbol is changed based on a specific variation pattern and the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed to cause transition control. By right-handing inside, the second special symbol is constantly changed and it is possible to prevent the first special symbol from changing, so that the number of STs at the time when the transition to the rush mode is controlled is controlled. By changing the second special symbol in all remaining times to generate a small hit or a big hit, it becomes possible to acquire a prize ball.

  Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and a specific variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol according to the lottery result, a rush occurs. Although the mode is controlled to shift to the mode, the mode may be shifted to the rush mode when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a specific loss. Specifically, the first special symbol random number for determining the symbol to be lost is provided as a random number related to the lottery process of the first special symbol, and the first random symbol random number is determined when the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost. It is configured to draw a specific loss symbol or a non-specific loss symbol based on the lottery, and when a lottery result indicating that it is a specific loss symbol is obtained, the control is shifted to the rush mode. You may.

(Fifth embodiment)
In the above-described third embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol is made different depending on the game mode (game state), and when the game mode is the normal mode (normal state) and the rush preparation mode (high-probability time-saving state). Is set to 600 seconds as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and 5 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol when the game mode is the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state). That is, the transition time from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode is used as an opportunity to vary the variation time of the second special symbol, but the variation time of the second special symbol during the rush mode is changed after the rush preparation mode is started. The change may be made in accordance with the number of times the special symbol has changed before shifting to the rush mode (in the rush preparation mode, the game on the first special symbol side is performed, so the number of times the first special symbol changes). Regarding such an example, points different from the third embodiment will be described below as a fifth embodiment.

  First, in the fifth embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery in the normal mode, after the first big hit game based on the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) ends, the game mode is changed to the rush preparation mode (high probability mode). After the transition to the rush preparation mode, the special symbol fluctuation counter is incremented by 1 each time the special symbol fluctuation display is executed, and the fluctuation frequency of the special symbol during the rush preparation mode is counted. Counting. In the rush preparation mode, since the game on the first special symbol side is performed, the number of times of the change of the first special symbol is mainly counted. Then, in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode, after the fluctuation display of the first special symbol based on the big hit (the first big hit A, the first big hit B) is started, the game mode is changed to the rush mode (high probability non-time saving). State), and whether the number of times the special symbol has been counted until the shift to the rush mode is equal to or more than a predetermined number (50 times in this example) or less than the predetermined number is determined in the rush mode. 2 The variation pattern tables used for determining the variation time of the special symbol are different.

  As shown in FIG. 200, in the fluctuation pattern table used during the rush mode, two types of fluctuation patterns in which 5 seconds and 10 seconds are set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol are set. Some of the two types of fluctuation patterns are determined. In addition, in the variation pattern table used during the rush mode, the number of times the special symbol is counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is 50 times or more, and less than 50 times. The case and the case are different in the probability of determining each of the two types of variation patterns. Specifically, when the number of times of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is 50 or more, 5 seconds is set as the variation time of the second special symbol. The probability of determining a variation pattern is set to 80%, and the probability of determining a variation pattern in which 10 seconds is set as the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 20%. On the other hand, when the number of times of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is less than 50 times, the variation in which the second special symbol is changed to 5 seconds is set. The probability of deciding a pattern is set to 20%, and the probability of deciding a fluctuation pattern in which 10 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 80%.

  As described above, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is 50 or more, 10 seconds is set as the change time of the second special symbol. The probability of determining the variation pattern in which the second special symbol has a variation time of 5 seconds is set higher than the probability of determining the variation pattern. In addition, when the number of times of change of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is 50 or more, the change of the second special symbol is less than the case of less than 50 times. Of the time, the probability of deciding 5 seconds, which is the shorter fluctuation time, is increased. Therefore, when either 300 seconds or 600 seconds is executed as the time for controlling the rush mode (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is reduced. By increasing the probability of determination, the number of times the second special symbol can be changed during the rush mode increases, and the second special symbol lottery based on winning in the second special symbol lottery during the rush mode increases. Since the number of executions of the small hitting game increases, the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the rush mode can be increased. In other words, the larger the number of times the special symbol changes from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode, the shorter the fluctuation time of the second special symbol during the rush mode is determined. By increasing the probability of performing, the prize balls that can be acquired during the rush mode can be increased. And, as the number of special symbol changes required from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode increases, the frustration and frustration of the player tends to increase, but it can be acquired during the rush mode By increasing the number of such prize balls, such dissatisfaction and frustration of the player can be eliminated.

  On the other hand, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is less than 50 times, the change in which the change time of the second special symbol is set to 5 seconds. The probability of determining a variation pattern in which 10 seconds is set as the variation time of the second special symbol is higher than the probability of determining a pattern. In addition, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is less than 50 times, the change of the second special symbol is more than the case of 50 times or more. The probability of deciding to be 10 seconds, which is the longer fluctuation time, is increased. For this reason, when either 300 seconds or 600 seconds is executed as the time to control the rush mode (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is increased. By increasing the probability of determination, the number of times of the change of the second special symbol that can be executed during the rush mode is reduced, and the second special symbol lottery based on winning in the second special symbol lottery during the rush mode is reduced. Since the number of executions of the small hit game is also reduced, the prize balls that can be acquired during the rush mode are reduced.

  In the fifth embodiment, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is equal to or more than a predetermined number (in this example, 50), the predetermined number is set. It is configured such that the probability of determining the variation time of the second special symbol that is shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol is higher than the case of less than the predetermined number of times. If the number is less than 50 times in the example), the probability that the variation time of the second special symbol is determined to be shorter than the predetermined number of times may be higher than the case where the number is more than the predetermined number. . For example, when the number of times of change of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is less than 50 times, a change in which the change time of the second special symbol is set to 5 seconds. When the probability of determining a pattern is 80%, the probability of determining a variation pattern in which 10 seconds is set as the variation time of the second special symbol is 20%, and when the number of variations of the special symbol is 50 or more, Sets the probability of determining a variation pattern in which 5 seconds is set as the variation time of the second special symbol to 20%, and the probability of determining a variation pattern in which 10 seconds is set as the variation time of the second special symbol is 80%. And it is sufficient. In such a configuration, the smaller the number of times of the special symbol executed from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode, the shorter the fluctuation time of the second special symbol during the rush mode. By increasing the probability of deciding on the prize ball, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the rush mode. Then, as the number of times the special symbols change from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode decreases, the number of award balls that can be acquired during the rush mode increases, and during the rush preparation mode, Can play games with a sense of tension.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, whether the number of changes of the special symbol required from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is 50 times or more or less than 50 times is determined in the rush mode. 2 The variation pattern table used to determine the variation time of the special symbol is configured to be different, but the number of variations of such a special symbol is not a fixed number of times such as 50 times but the number of times of the rush preparation. The number of times may be varied according to the type of the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) that has triggered the transition to the mode. For example, if the big hit that triggered the transition to the rush preparation mode is the first big hit A, the number of changes in the special symbol required from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is 20 times or more. Or less than 20 times, and if the big hit that triggered the shift to the rush preparation mode is the first big hit B, from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode. It may be determined whether the number of required special symbol changes is 50 or more or less than 50. Then, as in the fifth embodiment, the number of times the special symbol changes from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is 20 times (first big hit A) or 50 times (first big hit B). ) Or more, the fluctuating time of the fluctuating time of the second special symbol during the rush mode is shorter than the case of less than 20 times (first big hit A) or less than 50 times (first big hit B). If it is configured so that the probability of being determined to be high is set to 20 as the number of times such a special symbol changes due to the first big hit A and becomes 20 or more times, it is caused by the first big hit B Is set to 50 times and the probability is higher than 50 times or more. Therefore, the probability that the second special symbol is executed with a shorter fluctuation time during the rush mode becomes higher, and is acquired during the rush mode. It is possible to increase the Rukoto is capable of winning balls. In other words, for each type of jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) that triggered the transition to the rush preparation mode, the criterion at the time of transition from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode (the second Since the variance pattern table used to determine the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined differently, the prize balls that can be acquired during the rush mode are also different. It is possible to pay attention to the type of the big hit that triggers the transition to the preparation mode, and to prevent the game from becoming rut during the rush preparation mode.

  In the fifth embodiment, whether the number of times the special symbol has changed from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is equal to or more than a predetermined number (50 times in this example) or less than the predetermined number. In the rush mode, the variation pattern table used to determine the variation time of the second special symbol is configured to be different, but the number of times the second special symbol has changed since the shift to the rush mode is changed. The variation pattern table used to determine the variation time of the second special symbol may be made different when the predetermined number of times (50 times in this example) is reached. For example, when the number of times of change of the second special symbol after shifting to the rush mode is less than a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 times), the change time of the second special symbol is changed to the longer change time. In the case where the probability of determination is increased, and the number of times of change of the second special symbol after shifting to the rush mode is equal to or more than a predetermined number of times (50 in this example), the change time of the second special symbol Among them, the probability of deciding the one with the shorter fluctuation time may be increased. In such a configuration, when the number of times the second special symbol changes after shifting to the rush mode reaches a predetermined number (50 times in this example), the change time of the second special symbol is changed. The state where the probability of being determined to be longer is high is changed to the state where the probability of being determined to be the fluctuation time of the second special symbol whose fluctuation time is shortened is high. It is also possible to change from the state in which the probability of determining the change time of the second special symbol to be shorter is high to the state in which the probability of determining the change time of the second special symbol having the longer change time is high. Good. That is, when the number of times of change of the second special symbol after shifting to the rush mode reaches a predetermined number (50 times in this example), the change time of the change time of the second special symbol during the rush mode is changed. By changing the probability of being determined to be shorter (longer), a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 times) as the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after shifting to the rush mode, even during the same rush mode Before and after the game, the frequency of winning a prize ball (the frequency of execution of the second small hit game based on the winning of the small hit in the second special symbol lottery) differs, thereby preventing the game from becoming rut during the rush mode. be able to.

  In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained. 146, 154, 192, 198, and 200 are examples of the number of round games, open patterns, types of hits (big hits, small hits), winning probabilities, fluctuation times, and the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be appropriately changed as long as the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

(Sixth embodiment)
[Overall configuration of gaming board]
Next, the overall structure of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 201 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 202 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, FIG. 203 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 204 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. FIG. 205 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 206 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. Further, FIG. 207 is a front view in which the front structural member and the front unit in the game board are cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area.

  The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. Further, the game board 5 is provided with a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape that is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 so that the rear end of the game area 5a is formed. A plate-shaped gaming panel 1100 to be divided, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, which is driven by driving game balls into the gaming area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 262) for controlling the game content to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, a main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front panel attached to the game panel 1100. And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is mounted on the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted on the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and also holds a transparent flat panel plate 1110 and an outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear side and on the rear side.

  The front unit 2000 includes a plurality of general winning openings 2001 which are always open to accept game balls hit into the gaming region 5a, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the gaming region 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to accept a ball, a gate 2003 mounted at a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting the passage of a game ball, and a game ball passing through the gate 2003 The second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be accepted in accordance with the result of the ordinary lottery selected by the lottery, and the first special portrayed by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A first winning prize port 2005 and a second winning prize port 2006 are provided, in which game balls can be accepted in accordance with either a lottery result or a second special lottery result. The second special winning opening 2006 is composed of two special winning openings, a second upper winning opening 2006a and a second lower winning opening 2006b arranged in one flow path through which the game ball circulates (FIG. 207).

  Also, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the technique area 5a, and has a first starting port 2002 and a first winning port 2005, and a starting port unit 2100; The lower side unit 2200 is attached along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the mouth unit 2100 in front view and has three general winning openings 2001, and is mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in front view. A frame shape attached to the upper side unit 2300 and substantially at the center in the game area 5a and having one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006. A center role 2500.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to a rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape having a front opening and a square back opening 3010a in a rear wall. The back unit 3000 is disposed at a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage table unit 2000, and a lock mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 for detachably mounting the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A mechanism 3020 and a right ball passage unit 3030 attached to the right end of the back box 3010 when viewed from the front, for discharging a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the center role 2500, Attached near the front end of the lower right corner in front view inside the back box 3010, the second big winning opening 2006 and the second Lower right ball passage unit 3035 for discharging accepted gaming balls out port 2543C, and a.

  The back unit 3000 also includes an upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, an upper relay board cover 3041 covering the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and a rotatable attachment to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Box-shaped effect drive board box 3042, effect drive board 3043 accommodated in effect drive board box 3042, panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010, and panel relay board 3044 And a panel relay board cover 3045 that covers the rear side of the panel.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end inside the back box 3010 at an upper side from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A rear lower movable effect unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, a rear upper left movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a back box A rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view within the 3010, and a back upper middle attached from the center in the left and right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A movable rendering unit 3400 and a movable rendering unit 3100 after the bottom of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The inner shape of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower left end from the center in the left-right direction as viewed from the front and extending in the clockwise circumferential direction from the center in the front view, passing through the upper center in the left-right direction as viewed from the front, and extending obliquely to the upper right, An inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view. And an out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000 and having an upper portion curved inside the front component 1000; and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. An impact portion 1006 that connects the upper end of the game ball 1001 and abuts a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow preventing member which is turned by the spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only in the open position where it is turned around and opened to the outer rail 1001 and returned to the closed position side. 1007.

[Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface. The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an out opening 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. The panel plate 1110 has a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate back and forth to mount the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel board 1110 detachably from the rear side. Further, panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting back unit 3000 and a plurality of positioning holes formed on the rear surface.

  When the game panel 1100 is mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel board 1110 is opened on the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guiding section 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper part and the front part opened, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. When the board holder 1200 is assembled on the game board 5, the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 can be covered from below. Thereby, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged part 1201 (see FIG. 205).

[Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 206 and FIG. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Must be performed, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against improper acts on the main control board 1310 is increased.

[Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 displays a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  Although not shown in detail, the function display unit 1400 has a state indicator made up of one LED for displaying a game state, and two LEDs based on a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball to the gate unit 2003. , A normal symbol display for displaying these two LEDs in a lighting mode in accordance with the normal lottery result after the normal symbol is variably displayed by flashing control, and a fluctuation display of the normal symbol relating to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. Among them, a normal holding indicator consisting of two LEDs for indicating the number of holdings, which is the number of changing displays for which the start condition of the changing display has not yet been satisfied, and reception of game balls to the first starting port 2002 (starting prize After the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed by controlling the blinking of the eight LEDs based on the result of the first special lottery selected by (occurrence). And the first special symbol display for displaying the LED in the lighting mode according to the result of the first special lottery, and the variation display of the first special symbol related to the reception of the game ball to the first starting port 2002. A first special reserve number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the reserve number, which is the number of variable displays for which the start condition is not satisfied, and the reception of game balls to the second start port 2004 (the occurrence of a start prize). The second special symbol is displayed by varying the second special symbol by blinking and controlling the eight LEDs based on the selected second special lottery result, and then displaying these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the second special lottery result. A second display for displaying a symbol display and the number of suspended displays, which are the number of variable displays for which the start condition of the variable display has not yet been satisfied among the variable displays of the second special symbol relating to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004; Two L D and the number of repetitions of the opening / closing pattern of the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like. And a round indicator comprising two LEDs for displaying (number of rounds).

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, blinking, and the like the provided LEDs.

[Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. The peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 262) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image (see FIG. 262). reference).

[Main liquid crystal display]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to a substantially central rear surface of a rear wall of the back box 3010. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display a still image or a moving image.

  As shown in FIGS. 205 and 206, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side in front view, and right fixing pieces protruding outward from the right side in front view. 1602. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 has two fixing grooves 3010c, which are open on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view, inside a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of a back box 3010 described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 from obliquely behind the box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is moved downward. By sliding to, it is attached to the back box 3010.

[Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 201 to 203 and FIGS. 205 to 207. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. The front end protrudes forward from the front of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end passes through the opening 1112. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The front unit 2000 according to the present embodiment is configured such that a plurality of general prize openings 2001 which are capable of receiving a game ball hit into the game region 5a and are always open, and a plurality of general prize openings 2001 are in the game region 5a. A first opening 2002 which is always open to accept a game ball at a different position, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, A second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing through the section 2003, and a lottery performed by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. A first special winning opening 2005 and a second special winning opening 2006 that allow game balls to be accepted in either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  Of the plurality (four in this example) of general winning ports 2001, three are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged near the upper right in front view in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate section 2003 is arranged in the game area 5a at the upper right in front view and substantially immediately below the stop section 1006. The second starting port 2004 is disposed right below the gate portion 2003 as viewed from the front. Among the plurality of general winning openings 2001 described above, the general winning opening 2001 arranged near the upper right in front view in the game area 5a is arranged immediately above the second starting opening 2004. The first special winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111. The second special winning opening 2006 is disposed above the first special winning opening 2005 on the right side of the first starting opening 2002 in a front view.

  As shown in FIG. 207, the second big winning opening 2006 in the front unit 2000 includes a second upper winning opening 2006a and a second lower winning opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which the game ball circulates. It is comprised by. In the second special winning opening 2006, the second upper special winning opening 2006a is arranged near the lower right in front view in the game area 5a, and the second lower special winning opening 2006b is viewed in front of the second upper special winning opening 2006a. It is located below on the left.

  Also, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the technique area 5a, and has a first starting port 2002 and a first winning port 2005, and a starting port unit 2100; The lower side unit 2200 is attached along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the mouth unit 2100 in front view and has three general winning openings 2001, and is mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in front view. A frame shape attached to the upper side unit 2300 and substantially at the center in the game area 5a and having one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006. A center role 2500.

[Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 208A is a perspective view of the starting port unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 208B is a perspective view of the starting port unit as viewed from the back. The starting port unit 2100 is disposed in the gaming area 5a, near the lower end in the left-right direction, immediately above the out port 1111 and attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 and a first winning port 2005.

  The starting port unit 2100 has a rectangular unit base 2101 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and having a rectangular shape extending left and right and having a first special winning opening 2005 penetrating back and forth. A ball receiving portion 2102 protruding forward from an upper portion in the left-right direction substantially above the large winning opening 2005 and forming a first starting opening 2002, and a first starting opening attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101. A ball guiding unit 2103 for guiding a game ball received in 2002 downward, a first starting port sensor 2104 attached to the ball guiding unit 2103 and detecting a game ball received in the first starting port 2002; A first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the big winning opening 2005.

  The first attacker unit 2110 of the starter unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first big winning opening 2005 from the rear, and has a front end which is substantially the same size as the first big winning opening 2005 and is opened forward. Box-shaped unit case 2111, and a first oblong opening door having a horizontally long rectangular shape and a flat plate shape whose lower side is rotatably supported at the front end of the unit case 2111 so that the first winning opening 2005 can be opened and closed. A member 2112, a first attacker solenoid 2113 mounted in the unit case 2111 for driving the first winning port door member 2112 to open and close, and a first winning port 2005 mounted in the unit case 2111 and received in the first winning port 2005. The first big winning opening sensor 2114 which detects the game ball which has been dropped, and the first A starting port unit relay board 2115 for relaying the connection between the moving port sensor 2104, the first attacker solenoid, and the first winning port sensor 2114 and the main control board 1310; A starting port unit decorative board (not shown) for illuminating the winning port 2005.

  The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 has a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time, and is open upward. The first special winning opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 has a size capable of receiving a plurality of (for example, 4 to 6) game balls at a time and is opened forward.

  In the starting port unit 2100, a first starting port 2002 formed by the ball receiving portion 2102 is opened upward, and a game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is unit-based by the ball guiding portion 2103. After being guided downward at the rear side of 2101 and made to be detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, it can be discharged downward through the first attacker unit 2110. In the present embodiment, two first starting port sensors 2104 are provided. In the main control board 1310, when the two first starting port sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first starting port sensor 2104 is provided. In 2002, it is determined that a game ball has been accepted. This makes it possible to detect an improper act caused by improper insertion of a tool into the first start port 2002.

  In the starting port unit 2100, the first attacker unit 2110 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, so that the first winning port door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is opened in the unit base 2101. It is inserted from the back into the mouth 2005 to close the first winning opening 2005. The first special winning opening door member 2112 is attached to the left and right both ends of the lower side by the unit case 2111 so as to be rotatable in an upright state in which the first special winning opening 2005 is closed. By rotating so as to move downward, the first special winning opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state.

  The first special winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is upright in a normal state (when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is not energized), and closes the first special winning opening 2005. Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the game state, the first big winning opening door member 2112 is rotated so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side is slightly above the lower side. It will be located. In other words, the first winning opening door member 2112 is inclined so as to be higher from the lower side of the first winning opening 2005 toward the front.

  In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first special winning opening 2005 and abuts on the first special winning opening door member 2112, the distribution direction of the game ball is from below due to the inclination of the first special winning opening door member 2112. It changes to the rear, and is received in the first big winning opening 2005 and enters the unit case 2111. Then, the game balls received in the first special winning opening 2005 are discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 after being detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2114.

[Bottom of side unit]
Next, the lower side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 (a) is a perspective view of the lower side unit and the upper side of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 209 (b) is a perspective view of the lower side unit and the upper side of the side unit as viewed from the rear. The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001.

  The lower side unit 2200 is a flat plate-shaped unit base 2201 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and extending in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The side unit lower portion 2200 protrudes forward from the front surface of the unit base 2201. The rear is open, and three ball receiving portions 2202 each forming a general winning opening 2001, and communicate with the rear end of the ball receiving portion 2202 and protrude rearward from the rear surface of the unit base 2201. A gutter 2203 for guiding the game ball received in the winning opening 2001 backward.

  The unit base 2201 extends in an arc shape so as to become higher toward the left as viewed from the front. The three ball receiving portions 2202 protrude from the front surface of the unit base 2201 while being separated from each other left and right. The ball receiving portion 2202 forming the general winning opening 2001 has a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time, and is open upward.

  With the lower side unit 2200 attached to the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), the leftmost general winning opening 2001 in front view is located slightly to the right of the right end of the upper side unit 2300. The lower side unit 2200 can guide the game balls received in the three general winning openings 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1112 by the gutter 2203. Then, the game ball guided to the rear of the panel board 1112 is a general winning opening sensor 3015 (see FIG. 245) mounted in the lower left lower ball guiding unit 3505 in the lower rear front movable rendering unit 3500 of the rear unit 3000. And is discharged downward.

[On the side unit]
Next, the upper side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front in the game area 5a from the center in the up-down direction at the upper left of the lower side unit 2200 in a front view and slightly downward.

  The upper side unit 2300 includes a flat unit base 2301 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a shelf 2302 protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2301 and extending left and right so that the right end side in front view becomes lower. And The shelf 2302 extends from the left end to the right end of the unit base 2301.

  The left side of the shelf 2302 is close to the inner rail 1002 when the side unit upper 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right by the shelf 2302. (The center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a).

[Center Accessories]
Next, the center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 210 to 213. FIG. 210 is a perspective view of the center role of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 211 is a perspective view of the center role of the front unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 212 is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of the right channel in the center role. Further, FIG. 213 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the second attacker unit in the center accessory, and FIG. 213 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG.

  The center role item 2500 is disposed above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit lower 2200 in the game area 5a, substantially in the center in front view, and slightly upward, and is positioned on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Installed. The center role item 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and it is possible to visually recognize, from the front, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 through the frame and the effect units provided in the back unit 3000. it can. The center role item 2500 has one general winning opening 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006.

  The center role 2500 includes a flat frame-shaped flange portion 2511 that contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 along the periphery of the opening portion 1112 that penetrates the center of the panel plate 1112 greatly forward and backward, and forward from the flange portion 2511. A frame-like shape having a front peripheral wall portion 2512 that protrudes and prevents game balls from entering the frame, and a rear peripheral wall portion 2513 that projects rearward from the flange portion 2511 and is inserted into the opening 1112. A center base 2510 is provided. The front peripheral wall portion 2512 is formed over substantially the entire periphery of the flange portion 2511 except for a part of the lower side. Further, the front peripheral wall portion 2512 is highest at a position slightly leftward from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side.

  In addition, the center role product 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 in which a game ball in the game area 5a is opened at a front outer wall portion 2512 of the center base 2510 at a substantially central outer peripheral surface in a vertical direction on a left side in a front view, so that a game ball can enter. A warp passage 2521 that guides the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 to the lower end of the left side when viewed from the front in the front peripheral wall portion 2512, and a game ball that has flowed through the warp passage 2521 can be discharged. The warp exit 2522 (see FIG. 207) that is open at the bottom and the game ball released from the warp exit 2522 is moved to the center in the left-right direction along the lower side behind the flange portion 2511 and within the frame of the center base 2510. A guiding path 2523 for guiding and a game ball guided by the guiding path 2523 can be supplied from the left end in front view. And a stage 2530 that extends left and right along the lower side within the frame of the center portion of the center base 2510 in the left and right direction and rolls the supplied game ball in the left and right direction and then discharges it into the game area 5a. Have.

  The stage 2530 is curved so that the left and right ends are high at the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and the right and left sides of the portion corresponding to the center in the left and right direction of the game area 5a are the lowest, and the space between the lowest portions is slightly higher. Is out. That is, stage 2530 is formed in a W-shape with a gentle inclination. The stage 2530 is formed at the apex of a slightly elevated portion corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, and has a fan-shaped central guiding portion 2531 which is lowered forward and slightly spreads right and left, and a central guiding portion 2531. And a fan-shaped side guide portion 2532 which is formed at each of the two lowest portions on the left and right sides of the left and right portions, and is lowered toward the front and spreads to the left and right.

  When the game board 5 is assembled, the stage 2530 enters the warp entrance 2520 in the game area 5a, and the game ball supplied to the stage 2530 via the warp passage 2521, the warp exit 2522, and the guide path 2523 is It is discharged forward from either the center guiding portion 2531 or the side guiding portion 2532 of the stage 2530 and returned again into the game area 5a (returned). In the state where the game board 5 is assembled, the stage 2530 has the first starting port 2002 immediately below the central guiding section 2531, and when the game ball is released from the central guiding section 2531 into the game area 5a. , With a very high probability.

  As shown in FIG. 212, the center role item 2500 has an upper right portion in which a part of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 extends substantially vertically downward from the right end in the front view of the upper side of the center base 2510 to approximately the center in the vertical direction. In the state where the game board 5 is assembled from the lower end of the vertical wall portion 2512a and the upper right vertical wall portion 2512a, the front peripheral wall is slightly lower to the vicinity of the inner periphery of the game area 5a (near the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000). A right upper horizontal wall portion 2512b in which a part of the portion 2512 extends rightward, and a right hanging wall portion in which a part of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 extends downward from the right end of the upper right horizontal wall to approximately the same height as the stage 2530. 2512c and a lower right lateral wall portion 2512d in which a part of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 extends leftward from the lower end of the right hanging wall portion 2512c toward the center in the left-right direction. , And a.

  Further, the center role item 2500 is formed on the outer peripheral side of the upper right vertical wall portion 2512a and the upper right horizontal wall portion 2512b in cooperation with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and an upper right circulation space 2541 through which a game ball can flow, A right flow passage 2542 through which game balls can flow downward on the right side in front view of the right hanging wall portion 2512c communicating with the circulation space 2541, and a game ball formed below the lower right horizontal wall portion 2512d communicating with the right flow passage 2542. And a lower right circulation space 2543 that can be circulated and can communicate with the game area 5a. The upper right circulation space 2541, the right flow passage 2542, and the lower right circulation space 2543 form a right hitting game area 2540 in the game area 5a.

  The upper right circulation space 2541 is a space having a predetermined size whose dimensions in the up-down direction and the left-right direction are sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and allows the game ball to flow down a free path. The right flow passage 2542 is bent so that the vicinity of the lower end vertically extending downward is bent so as to extend diagonally lower left in front view, and has a width in the left-right direction slightly wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. This allows the game balls to flow down in a row in a vertical direction.

  The lower right circulation space 2543 extends to the left such that the left end side in front view is lower from immediately below a portion communicating with the lower end of the right flow passage 2542, and then opens to the left, and a second attacker passage 2543a that opens to the left. A discharge passage 2543b communicating with the right end of the two-attacker passage 2543a in a front view and extending downward, and a discharge passage 2543b formed at a lower end of the discharge passage 2543b and penetrating through the flange portion 2511 so as to allow game balls to pass therethrough and opening rearward. And a two-out port 2543c. The second attacker passage 2543a of the lower right circulation space 2543 is a passage whose vertical dimension is about twice as large as the outer diameter of the game ball, and the discharge passage 2543b is such that the left and right dimensions are outside the game ball. The passage is slightly wider than the diameter. When the lower right circulation space 2543 is assembled to the game board 5, the left end (downstream end) of the second attacker passage 2543 a is at the left of the starting port unit 2100 when viewed from the front, and is connected to the first starting port 2002 and the first large port. It is open to the left at a height between the winning opening 2005 and game balls are discharged into the game area 5a from the left end of the second attacker passage 2543a. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b is sent to the rear of the flange portion 2511 (game panel 1100) through the second out port 2543c opened at the lower end of the discharge passage 2543b, and returned to the game area 5a. It is discharged from the game board 5 without being played.

  The upper right circulation space 2541 is entirely open at the front, and is a flange extending from the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the upper right vertical wall portion 2512a and the upper right horizontal wall portion 2512b at a substantially lower half in the vertical direction at the rear. It is closed by the part 2511. The right flow passage 2542 is closed by a flat transparent right front decoration plate 2544 extending rightward in front view from the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the right hanging wall portion 2512c at the front, and the right hanging wall at the rear. It is closed by a flange portion 2511 extending from the rear end of the portion 2512c. The lower right circulation space 2543 is closed by a flat transparent lower right front decorative plate 2545 extending downward from the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the lower right lateral wall portion 2512d at the front, and the lower right lateral wall at the rear. It is closed by a flange portion 2511 extending from the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the portion 2512d.

  The center role 2500 has a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 protruding into the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right flow space 2543 and extending in a direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball. In the right flow passage 2542, a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 alternately protrude at predetermined intervals from surfaces of the right front decorative plate 2544 and the flange portion 2511 facing each other in the flowing direction of the game ball. In the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 in the right flow passage 2542, the interval between the deceleration ribs 2546 on the right front decorative plate 2544 side and the flange portion 2511 side is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the interval between the protruding end of the deceleration rib 2546 protruding from the right front decorative plate 2544 and the protruding end of the deceleration rib 2546 protruding from the flange portion 2511 is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball always flows down zigzag in the vertically extending right flow passage 2542, and a sufficient damping force can be applied to acceleration due to gravity.

  On the other hand, in the lower right circulation space 2543, a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 alternately protrude at predetermined intervals from the opposing surfaces of the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the flange portion 2511 in the game ball distribution direction. . The plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 in the lower right circulation space 2543 are such that the interval between the deceleration ribs 2546 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball between the lower right decoration plate 2545 side and the flange portion 2511 side. I have. Further, the interval between the protruding end of the deceleration rib 2546 protruding from the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the protruding end of the deceleration rib 2546 protruding from the flange portion 2511 is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, even in the lower right circulation space 2543, the game balls always flow down in a zigzag manner, and the circulation speed of the game balls is attenuated to prevent the game ball from becoming too fast.

  In the present embodiment, one general winning opening 2001, a gate 2003, and a second starting opening 2004 are provided in the upper right circulation space 2541, and a second big winning opening 2006 is provided in the lower right circulation space 2543. Provided.

  Specifically, the gate portion 2003 is provided so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 extending rightward when viewed from the front from the upper rear end of the upper right vertical wall portion 2512a, and one game ball is provided. It is formed so that it can pass only in the vertical direction. A gate sensor 2547 for detecting the passage of a game ball is attached to the gate section 2003. The gate portion 2003 is arranged slightly to the left as viewed from the front with respect to immediately below the stop portion 1006 of the front component 1000 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled.

  The general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the center role item 2500 project forward from the front of the flange portion 2511 below the gate portion 2003, closing the substantially lower half behind the upper right circulation space 2541. It is prepared for. More specifically, the center role 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511, and has a general winning opening 2001 formed at the upper end in a container shape with the upper part and the rear part opened, and directly below the general winning part 2001. A ball receiving member 2548 formed such that the second starting port 2004 is opened to the left on the left side in front view, and around a shaft whose lower end extends back and forth by the ball receiving member 2548 and the flange portion 2511. A second starting port door member 2549, which is rotatably mounted and closes the second starting port 2004 so that it can be opened and closed, and opens and closes the second starting port door member 2549, which is mounted on the rear surface of the flange portion 2511. A starting port solenoid 2550 (see FIG. 262), a second starting port sensor 2551 for detecting a game ball received in the second starting port 2004, and It is equipped with a.

  The general winning opening 2001 of the center role 2500 has an opening of a size that can receive only one game ball upward just below the gate portion 2003 rightward when viewed from the front in front. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided backward from the flange portion 2511 and then discharged from the center role 2500 to the right in a front view.

  The second starting port 2004 is opened immediately below the general winning opening 2001 to the left as viewed from the front, and is opened to the left when the second starting door member 2549 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front. As a result, game balls can be accepted. The second starting port door member 2549 has a base end circle that defines the lower portion and two sides extending from one point outside the base end circle so as to be in contact with the base end circle. Are formed in a so-called “flow-drop shape”, and are rotatably mounted at the center of the base end circle.

  In the second starting port 2004, in a normal state, the starting port solenoid 2550 is de-energized, and the second starting port door member 2549 is in an upright state in which the distal end is located almost directly above the base circle. The second starting port door member 2549 is closed so that game balls cannot be received. Then, when the starting port solenoid 2550 is energized in response to the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball through the gate unit 2003, the distal end side of the second starting port door member 2549 moves to the left in front view. Then, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates, and stops rotating with the tip side slightly higher. As a result, the second starting port 2004 is opened, and a state where game balls can be accepted is obtained. In a state where the second starting port door member 2549 is rotated and opened, the tip of the second starting port door member 2549 is substantially in line with a vertical line passing through the center of the gate portion 2003.

  The game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is guided by the second starting port sensor 2551 after being guided to the rear of the flange portion 2511 and discharged downward.

  The second special winning opening 2006 is arranged on the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a in the lower right circulation space 2543 so as to open upward. More specifically, a second upper winning opening 2006a forming the second winning opening 2006 is opened upward at the right end in front view in the second attacker passage 2543a, and the second upper winning opening is also provided. A second lower winning prize opening 2006b constituting 2006 is open upward in the front left and below the second upper winning prize opening 2006a in the second attacker passage 2543a. The second upper winning prize opening 2006a and the second lower winning prize opening 2006b have left and right widths formed in a range of three to four times the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The center role item 2500 is supported by a center base 2510 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction so as to be able to open and close a second upper winning opening 2006a that opens upward, and has a front end on the front surface of the flange portion 2511. The second upper special winning opening door 20062 which projects further forward and closes the second upper special winning opening 2006a and is inclined so that the left end side in front view is lower, is attached to the rear surface of the center base 2510. 262, a second upper attacker solenoid 2553 for driving the opening and closing of the second upper winning opening door member 2552, and a second upper winning opening sensor 2554 for detecting a game ball received in the second upper winning opening 2006a (FIG. 262). ), And the center base 2510 moves forward and backward so that the second lower winning opening 2006b opening upward can be opened and closed. The front end is protruded forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 and the front end projects forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 to close the second lower big winning opening 2006b. The lower large winning opening door member 2555, the second lower attacker solenoid 2556 attached to the rear surface of the center base 2510 and driving the second lower winning opening gate member 2555 to open and close, and the second lower winning opening 2006b are received. And a second lower winning prize port sensor 2557 (see FIG. 262) for detecting a game ball that has been hit.

  The center role 2500 extends in the left-right direction across the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b, and extends forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511. A flat plate-like plate portion 2558 that is inclined so that the left end side thereof becomes lower and forms a part of the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a, and extends forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 and has a second lower size. A flat discharge plate portion 2559 extending in the left-right direction from the front end left end of the winning opening 2006b to the left end of the second attacker passage 2543a so as to be lower on the left end side and forming a part of the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a. And The cross plate portion 2558 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is within a range of two to three times the outer diameter of the game ball. The left and right lengths of the discharge plate portion 2559 are formed within a range of 3 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

  In the second attacker passage 2543a, a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 extend up and down. On each side of the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the flange portion 2511, rows are arranged in the left and right direction at intervals slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. Is established. As shown in FIG. 213, in the second attacker passage 2543a, the first reduction rib 2546a, the second reduction rib 2546b, the third reduction rib 2546c, the fourth reduction rib 2546d, Ten deceleration ribs 2546 of a fifth deceleration rib 2546e, a sixth deceleration rib 2546f, a seventh deceleration rib 2546g, an eighth deceleration rib 2546h, a ninth deceleration rib 2546j, and a tenth deceleration rib 2546j are provided. Odd-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 are provided on the front surface of the flange portion 2511, and even-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 are provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545.

  Further, the positional relationship between the first deceleration rib 2546a to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j, the second upper special winning opening 2006a, and the second lower special winning opening 2006b will be described in detail. The first deceleration rib 2546a is disposed slightly to the right of the left end in the front view of the second upper winning opening 2006a. The second deceleration rib 2546b is disposed near the right end of the passing plate portion 2558 on the left side of the left end of the second upper winning opening 2006a in a front view. The third deceleration rib 2546c is disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the cross plate portion 2558. The fourth deceleration rib 2546d is disposed near the left end of the passing plate portion 2558 on the right side of the right end of the second lower special winning opening 2006b in a front view. The fifth deceleration rib 2546e is disposed on the left side of the right end of the second lower special winning opening 2006 in a front view. The sixth deceleration rib 2546f is disposed at the center in the left-right direction of the second lower special winning opening 2006b, rightward in front view. The seventh deceleration rib 2546g is disposed at the center in the left-right direction of the second lower special winning opening 2006b and is located to the left in front view. The eighth deceleration rib 2546h is disposed closer to the right than the left end in front view of the second lower special winning opening 2006b. The ninth deceleration rib 2546i is arranged from the left end in the front view of the second lower winning opening 2006b to the vicinity of the right end of the discharge plate portion 2559. The tenth deceleration rib 2546j is disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the discharge plate portion 2559.

  Of the first to tenth deceleration ribs 2546a to 2546j, on the front surface of the flange portion 2511, odd-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 from the first to ninth deceleration ribs 2546a to 2546i are provided. The deceleration rib 2546 extends over the entire height from the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a to the ceiling (lower right lateral wall portion 2512d). Further, among the first reduction rib 2546a to the tenth reduction rib 2546j, an even-number reduction rib 2546 from the second reduction rib 2546b to the tenth reduction rib 2546j is provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545. The even-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 extend from a position above the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a to near the ceiling (see FIG. 213 (a)).

  Among the even-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545, the second deceleration rib 2546b and the second deceleration rib 2546b closest to the left end in front view of the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b, respectively. As shown in FIG. 213 (a), the eighth deceleration rib 2546h has a lower end formed on the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a (the upper surface of the second upper winning opening door member 2552 and the second lower winning opening door member 2555). From the lower surface of the other deceleration rib 2546. More specifically, the lower ends of the second deceleration rib 2546b and the eighth deceleration rib 2546h are the same distance from the left ends of the second upper winning prize opening 2006a and the second lower winning prize opening 2006b when viewed from the front, respectively, as substantially the outer diameter of the game ball. , So as to be separated from each other.

  Accordingly, when the second upper winning opening 2006a or the second lower winning opening 2006b shifts from the open state in which game balls can be received to the closed state in which it cannot receive game balls, the second upper winning opening that slides forward. The front end of the door member 2552 or the second lower winning opening door 2555, the left end of the second upper winning opening 2006a in front view or the left end of the second lower winning opening 2006b in front view, and the second deceleration rib 2546b. It is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged (ball biting) in which the game ball is sandwiched between the lower end or the lower end of the eighth deceleration rib 2546h.

  In a state in which the second upper winning opening door member 2552 and the second lower winning opening door member 2555 project forward to close the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b, A state where the second upper winning opening door member 2552 and the second lower winning opening door member 2555 are placed on the upper surfaces of the left end and the right end of the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b. Therefore, the gap between the upper surface of the second upper winning opening door member 2552 or the second lower winning opening door member 2555 and the lower end of the second reduction rib 2546b or the eighth reduction rib 2546h is the outer diameter of the game ball. The game balls that are narrower than the above and are flowing (rolling) on the upper surfaces of the second upper winning opening door member 2552 and the second lower winning opening door member 2555 are the second reduction rib 2546b and the eighth reduction rib 2546h. , And a sufficient damping effect is maintained.

  The center role item 2500 is assembled on the game board 5 and, on the front side wall portion 2512, a portion on the right side in the front view from substantially the center of the upper side in the left-right direction and the inner peripheral surface of the game area 5a (the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000). ), A space having a width that allows only one game ball to flow is formed. Therefore, when the game ball is driven along the outer rail 1001 so as to be driven to the right in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the upper part of the center role object 2500 (so-called right-handed), the center in the game area 5a is hit. A game ball can be distributed in the right hitting game area 2540 on the right side of the accessory 2500 in a front view.

  Further, in a state where the nails are assembled on the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in the left and right of the center role item 2500 in the game area 5a and in the upper right circulation space 2541 of the right hitting game area 2540. ing. Therefore, the game ball hit into the game area 5a flows downward through various routes by contacting the plurality of obstacle nails.

[Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 214 is a perspective view of the back unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 215 is a perspective view of the back unit viewed from the back. FIG. 216 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 217 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 218 (a) is a perspective view of the back box or the like of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 218 (b) is a perspective view of the back box or the like as viewed from the back.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100. Further, a main liquid crystal display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to a rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape having a front opening and a square back opening 3010a in a rear wall. The back unit 3000 is disposed at a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage table unit 2000, and a lock mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 for detachably mounting the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A mechanism 3020 and a right ball passage unit 3030 attached to the right end of the back box 3010 when viewed from the front, for discharging a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the center role 2500, Attached near the front end of the lower right corner in front view inside the back box 3010, the second big winning opening 2006 and the second Lower right ball passage unit 3035 for discharging accepted gaming balls out port 2543C, and a.

  One of the plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 is attached to the right ball passage unit 3030. The right ball passage unit 3030 guides the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the center role item 2500 to the bottom in the back box 3010, and then, along the bottom, the center in the left-right direction. After being guided to the vicinity, it is guided to the front end of the back box 3010, dropped from the front end of the back box 3010 onto the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, and discharged. The lower right ball passage unit 3035 guides the game ball received at the second winning port 2006 or the second out port 2543c of the center role 2500 to the left in front view along the bottom in the back box 3010, It is discharged from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the back box 3010 onto the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and discharged.

  The back unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 above the opening 3010a on the left side in rear view, and is behind the effect drive board 3043 connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and the back upper left movable effect unit 3200. An upper relay board 3040 for relaying the connection with the upper left decorative board 3253, an upper relay board cover 3041 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and a rear face of the back box 3010 A box-shaped effect drive substrate box 3042 rotatably mounted around an axis extending left and right along the lower side of the opening 3010a, and a box-shaped effect drive substrate box 3042 accommodated in the effect drive substrate box 3042 An effect drive board 3043 for driving each drive motor, decorative board, and the like based on the control command, and a rear view A panel relay board 3044 which is attached to a corner and relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and each winning opening sensor, each solenoid, etc., and a rear face of the back box 3010 so as to cover a rear side of the panel relay board 3044. And a panel relay board cover 3045 attached thereto.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end inside the back box 3010 at an upper side from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A rear lower movable effect unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, a rear upper left movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a back box A rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view within the 3010, and a back upper middle attached from the center in the left and right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A movable rendering unit 3400 and a movable rendering unit 3100 after the bottom of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[Back Box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The back box 3010 has an opening 3010a that is box-shaped with an open front and penetrates the rear wall in a square shape, and a flat frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b that projects rearward with an interval from the periphery of the opening 3010a. And two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed outward from the inside of the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in the rear view and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is inserted. A notch portion 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the right side in rear view, and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

  The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. The lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 so that the lock mechanism 3020 can be slid up and down on the left side of the rear surface of the cutout 3010d in the rear surface.

  Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

  Although detailed description of the back box 3010 is omitted, bosses and mounting holes for mounting each movable effect unit and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

[Back left center decoration unit]
Next, the back center decoration unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217. The back left middle decoration unit 3050 is mounted near the front end in the back box 3010 on the left side when viewed from the front and upward from the center in the vertical direction. The back left middle decoration unit 3050 includes a light-transmitting unit base 3051 attached to the back box 3010 and a decoration attached to the front of the unit base 3051 and three-dimensionally imitating a mahjong “middle tile”. A back left middle decorative body 3052 having translucency, a back left middle decorative board 3053 mounted between the back left middle decorative body 3052 and the unit base 3051 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; It has.

  The back left center decoration unit 3050 can cause the back left center decoration body 3052 to emit light by appropriately lighting the LED of the back left center decoration substrate 3053.

[Movable production unit behind the back]
Next, the back-to-back movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 219 to 225. FIG. 219 (a) is a perspective view of the movable effect unit behind the back of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 219 (b) is a perspective view of the movable effect unit behind the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 220 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear underside movable effect unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 221 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the lower back lower movable effect unit, viewed from the front together with the lower back lower first decorative body and the lower back lower second decorative body, and FIG. 222 illustrates the rotary drive unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back with the 1st decoration body after back disassembly and the 2nd decoration body after back. FIG. 223 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the drive system of the rear-facing movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 224 (a) is a front view of the lower back rear movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 224 (b) rotates the back lower first decorative body and the lower back second decorative body together from the normal state. FIG. 4 is a front view of the second decorative body with the second decorative surface facing the front side, and FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of a state in which is moved to the left moving end in front view. In addition, FIG. 225 (d) shows the state of FIG. 224 (c), in which the back lower first decorative body and the lower back lower second decorative body are rotated together to change the first decorative surface of the lower back lower first decorative body. It is the front view of the state turned to the front, (e) rotates the back lower first decorative body from the state of (d), and opens the lower back lower first decorative body and the lower back lower decorative body. It is a front view in the state where the 2nd decorative surface of the 1st decorative body after back and back and the 2nd decorative surface of the 2nd decorative body after back and back face to the front.

  The rear lower rear movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the front of the rear wall below the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010. The lower back rear movable effect unit 3100 includes a lower back lower first decorative body 3110 supported coaxially and rotatably on one vertical side extending vertically along an axis extending vertically. A rear second decorative body 3120, a rotational drive unit 3130 to which the lower back lower first decorative body and the lower back lower decorative body are attached so as to be hinged rotatable and which can be individually driven to rotate, and a rotary drive unit 3130 The slide unit 3150 includes a slide unit 3150 that is attached to the back box 3010 so as to be slidable in the left and right direction, and a lower back fixed decorative body 3160 that is attached to the front surface of the slide unit 3150.

  The first decorative body 3110 is arranged rear-facing to each other and has different decorations formed thereon, and has a translucent first decorative surface 3111 and a second decorative surface 3112; The first decorative body 3113, which has a thin rectangular parallelepiped shape and supports the 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 so as to face each other, is attached to the first decorative body 3113, and the display screen is the third decorative body 3113. The sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 facing outward from one decorative surface 3111 and the outer side from the side in contact with the second decorative surface 3112 of the four vertically extending sides of the first rectangular parallelepiped main body 3113. And two first hinge portions 3115 that can be supported so as to rotate about an axis extending vertically and a first decorative body between the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the second decorative surface 3112. Body 3113 Attached first decorative substrate after under the back of a plurality of LED are mounted on both sides has (not shown) in which provided with a.

  The first decorative surface 3111 of the first decorative body 3110 after the back is formed in a frame shape, and the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 faces forward from within the frame. The second decorative surface 3112 of the first decorative body 3110 after the back is formed with a decoration in which the left half of the character “Holy” is applied. The sub liquid crystal display device 3114 can display a predetermined effect image (effect animation) by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510.

  The two first hinge portions 3115 are vertically separated from each other and mounted coaxially. These first hinge portions 3115 are rotatably supported by the second hinge portions 3124 of the second back decoration 3120. The first decorative substrate 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 can be made to emit light by appropriately lighting the LEDs on both surfaces after the back.

  The lower back second decorative body 3120 includes a first decorative surface 3121 and a second decorative surface 3122, which are arranged facing each other, have different decorations formed thereon, and have translucency, and a first decorative surface. The thin rectangular parallelepiped second decorative body 3123 supporting the 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122 so as to face each other, and four vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped second decorative body 3123. The two first hinge portions 3115 of the first decorative body 3110 that protrude outward from the side of the two sides that are in contact with the second decorative surface 3122 so as to rotate around the vertically extending axis. Three second hinge portions 3124 that can be supported and are vertically separated from each other, and a decorative body that cylindrically projects downward from the lower end of the lowermost second hinge portion 3124 of the three second hinge portions 3124 A support shaft 3125, The second decorative body-side operating gear 3126 attached to the outer periphery of the lower end of the decorative body support shaft 3125, the bearing member 3127 attached to the lower end lower surface of the decorative body support shaft 3125, and the outer peripheral surface of the decorative body support shaft 3125 The second detection piece 3128 extending in the direction, and between the first decoration surface 3121 and the second decoration surface 3112 are mounted in the second decoration body 3123, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on both surfaces. And a second decorative substrate (not shown) after the back.

  The first decorative surface 3121 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back is formed with a decoration in which characters of "Tenun" in vertical writing are given. On the second decorative surface 3122 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back, a decoration in which the right half of the character of “holy” is given is formed. The second decorative body 3123 of the second lower decorative body 3120 is formed substantially the same size as the first decorative body 3113 of the first lower decorative back body 3110. In other words, the outer dimensions of the first decorative surface 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 of the first lower decorative body 3110 and the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122 of the second lower decorative body 3120 are different. They are formed in substantially the same size.

  The three second hinges 3124 of the second back decoration 3120 are vertically separated from each other and mounted coaxially, and the first back decoration 3200 is located between the second hinges 3124. The first hinge portion 3115 of the 3110 is positioned and hinged to each other. Thereby, the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are in a closed state in which the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3121 face each other due to the hinge rotation, and in the first decorative surface of each other. It is possible to rotate (hinge rotation) between an open state in which the 3111 and 3121 and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are substantially on the same plane. Then, in a state where the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 are opened, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are left and right with the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 interposed therebetween. And the decorations are unified, and the word "holy" appears. Although detailed illustration is omitted in the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124, the first decorative surface 3111, The decoration corresponding to the decoration applied to the 3121 and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 is applied, and when the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back and the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back are opened, the second decorative body 3120 The one hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 are less noticeable.

  The decorative body support shaft 3125 has an upper end that allows the rotation transmission member 3132 of the rotation drive unit 3130 to rotate the hinge after rotating the first decorative body 3110 behind the back and the second decorative body 3120 independently from the back. Inserted. In the decorative body support shaft 3125, the rotation transmission member 3132 at the upper end and the bearing member 3127 at the lower end are supported by the upper bearing 3131c and the lower bearing 3131d of the rotation drive unit base 3131 of the rotation drive unit 3130. The decorative body support shaft 3125 is formed to have a length (height) of 75% to 95% with respect to the height of the first decorative surfaces 3111 and 3121 and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122. More specifically, it is formed to a length of 80% to 90%. Thus, even if the lower back-side first decorative body 3110 or the like having the heavy weight by providing the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 is eccentric on one of the vertically extending sides and the hinge can be rotated, the lower back-side first decoration body 3110 can be rotated. The decorative body 3110 and the like (the decorative body support shaft 3125) can be made hard to fall down.

  As shown in FIG. 222, the second decorative body-side operating gear 3126 has a stopper 3126a protruding beyond the gear teeth at one place on the outer periphery, and cannot be rotated once. The second decorative substrate under the back of the second decorative body 3120 can illuminate the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122 by appropriately illuminating the LEDs on both surfaces.

  The rotary drive unit 3130 of the rear-facing rear movable effect unit 3100 is a box-shaped open front side rotatably supporting the decorative body support shaft 3125 and attached to the slide unit 3150 so as to be slidable left and right. 3131, a cylindrical sleeve portion 3132 a rotatably supported by the rotation drive unit base 3131 and rotatably attached to the outer periphery of the upper end portion of the decorative body support shaft 3125; One of a connecting portion 3132b attached to a lower portion of the rear first decorative body 3110, one of a first decorative body-side operating gear 3132c and a first decorative body-side operating gear 3132c formed over a half circumference at an outer periphery of a lower end portion of the sleeve portion 3132a. It has a first detecting piece 3132d extending outward from the end. Includes a rotation transmitting member 3132 are, the.

  In addition, the rotation drive unit 3130 includes a first drive gear 3133 in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the first decorative body-side operation gear 3132c of the rotation transmission member 3132, and a back-to-back first drive motor that rotationally drives the first drive gear 3133. 3134, a first drive motor bracket 3135 to which the first rear lower back drive motor 3134 is attached and which is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131, and a second decorative body-side operating gear 3126 of the second lower back decorative body 3120 are meshed. The second drive gear 3136 in the form of a spur gear, the second rear drive motor 3137 for rotating and driving the second drive gear 3136, and the second rear drive motor 3137 are attached and inside the rotation drive unit base 3131. And a second drive motor bracket 3138 to be attached.

  Further, the rotation drive unit 3130 is attached to the second drive motor bracket 3138, and can detect the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmission member 3132, and the lower side of the first rotation detection sensor 3139. And a second rotation detection sensor 3140 that is attached to the second drive motor bracket 3138 and is capable of detecting the second detection piece 3128 of the second decorative body 3120 behind the back.

  The rotary drive unit 3130 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131, and includes a sub liquid crystal display device 3114, a lower back first decorative board, a lower back second decorative board, a lower back first drive motor 3134, The second rear drive motor 3137, the first rotation detection sensor 3139, the second rotation detection sensor 3140, and the rotation drive unit relay board 3141 that relays the connection with the rear back relay board 3158 of the slide unit 3150. , And more.

  The rotary drive unit 3130 includes a flat unit cover 3142 that closes the front surface of the rotary drive unit base 3131, a rack gear 3143 a attached to the lower surface of the rotary drive unit base 3131 and extending left and right, and a rack gear. And a rack member 3143 having a flat detection piece 3143b formed at the right end of the front view 3143a.

  The rotation drive unit base 3131 of the rotation drive unit 3130 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, and includes a decorative body support shaft 3125, a main portion 3131a in which the back lower first drive motor 3134, the lower back second drive motor 3137, and the like are accommodated. A sub-portion 3131b, which is substantially cubic and approximately half as high as the main portion 3131a, is disposed on the left side of the main portion 3131a when viewed from the front, and accommodates the rotary drive unit relay board 3141. The main part 3131a and the sub part 3131b of the rotary drive unit base 3131 communicate with each other with their bottom surfaces aligned.

  Further, the rotary drive unit base 3131 includes a U-shaped upper bearing 3131c and a lower bearing 3131d which are open at the front end and are cut rearward on the top plate and the bottom plate of the main portion 3131a. . The upper bearing portion 3131c penetrates up and down, and the sleeve portion 3132a of the rotation transmitting member 3132 is rotatably inserted. On the other hand, the lower bearing portion 3131d is depressed downward from above and does not penetrate vertically, and the bearing member 3127 of the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back is inserted. The open front ends of the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d are closed by the unit cover 3142.

  The lower back first drive motor 3134 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131 via the first drive motor bracket 3135 at a position on the right side of the decorative body support shaft 3125 in a front view. The second rear drive motor 3137 is attached to the inside of the rotary drive unit base 3131 via the second drive motor bracket 3138 at a position on the left side of the decorative body support shaft 3125 in a front view.

  The rear lower back first drive motor 3134 drives the first drive gear 3133 to rotate, so that the connection portion 3132b rotates together with the first decorative body-side operation gear 3132c of the rotation transmission member 3132 meshed with the first drive gear 3133. , The first decorative body 3110 can be rotated after the back. On the other hand, the second rear drive motor 3137 drives the second drive gear 3136 to rotate, whereby the second decoration body-side operation gear 3126 at the lower end of the decoration body support shaft 3125 meshed with the second drive gear 3136 causes the second drive gear 3136 to rotate. The back second lower decorative body 3120 can be rotated together with the decorative body support shaft 3125.

  As shown in FIG. 220, the slide unit 3150 of the rear-facing movable effect unit 3100 is mounted in a back box 3010 and has a box-shaped unit base 3151 whose front and upper sides are open, and is mounted on an upper part of the unit base 3151. The slide guide 3152 extends right and left with the rotary drive unit base 3131 of the rotary drive unit 3130 attached to the front surface, and is mounted rotatably around an axis extending forward and rearward at the approximate center of the unit base 3151 in the horizontal direction. A transmission gear member having a pinion gear 3153a that meshes with a rack gear 3143a of a rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130, and a spur gear-shaped driven gear 3153b that rotates integrally with the pinion gear 3153a and has a larger diameter than the pinion gear 3153a. 3153 A drive gear 3154 in the form of a spur gear meshing with a driven gear 3153b of a transmission gear member 3153; A slide detection sensor 3156 which is mounted inside the 3151 and detects the detection piece 3143b of the rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130, and closes a substantially lower half of a front open portion of the unit base 3151 to close the unit base 3151 It has a horizontally long flat plate-shaped slide cover 3157 attached to the front end, and a lower back rear relay board 3158 mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 3151 and relaying the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the rotary drive unit relay board 3141. ing.

  The slide guide 3152 of the slide unit 3150 supports the rotary drive unit 3130 so as to be slidable left and right. The rear lower back third drive motor 3155 rotationally drives the drive gear 3154 to rotate the pinion gear 3153a via the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153 meshing with the drive gear 3154, thereby rotating the pinion gear 3153a. The rotation drive unit 3130 can be slid in the left and right directions by the rack gear 3143a of the rack member 3143 in the rotation drive unit 3130 meshing with the rotation drive unit 3130.

  Subsequently, the operation of the rear lower movable effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 223 and 224 (a) and the like, in the normal state, the rotational drive unit 3130 is positioned at the right end in front view with respect to the left and right sliding directions by the slide unit 3150, as shown in FIGS. ing. Further, in a normal state, the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are closed with the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 facing each other, The first decorative surface 3111 of the first decorative body 3110 (the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114) faces forward. In this normal state, the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are located on the right side in front view with respect to the hinge rotation axis (decorative body support shaft 3125) extending vertically. are doing. Further, in a normal state, the side opposite to the decorative body support shaft 3125 supported by the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 so as to be able to rotate hinges is the decorative body. The whole is rotating so as to be located forward of the center of the support shaft 3125. Although detailed illustration is omitted, in a normal state, the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 are rotated approximately 20 degrees clockwise in plan view.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 223, the detection piece 3143b of the rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3156 of the slide unit 3150. In the normal state, the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmission member 3132 in the rotation drive unit 3130 that rotates integrally with the first decorative body 3110 after the back is in a state where the detection by the first rotation detection sensor 3139 is not detected. Has become. Further, in the normal state, the second rotation detecting sensor 3140 detects the second detection piece 3128 of the decorative body support shaft 3125 in the second rear decorative body 3120.

  In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 201 and the like, in a state in which the first decorative body 3110 under the back is facing the front (front) of the movable decorative body unit 3100 under the back under the state assembled to the game board 5. The first decorative surface 3111 (the sub liquid crystal display device 3114) is located in front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and on the right side in the front view, at the lower right corner in the front view in the frame of the center role 2500, and on the player side. , The display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 can be visually recognized. Further, in this normal state, as described above, the right-hand sides of the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 are located forward of the center of the hinge rotation, and the sub liquid crystal display device The display screen 3114 is inclined with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100 so as to face a vertical line passing through the center of the game area 5a.

  In this normal state, the rear lower second drive motor 3137 of the rotary drive unit 3130 passes through the second drive gear 3136, the second decorative body-side operating gear 3126, and the decorative body support shaft 3125 to form the second rear lower back. When the second decorative body 3120 is rotated in the clockwise direction (160 degrees) in a plan view after the lower back so that the second decorative surface 3122 facing the rear of the decorative body 3120 faces the front, the lower side is closed. The lower back lower first decoration body 3110 located in front of the rear second decoration body 3120 is pressed by the rear lower back second decoration body 3120 and rotates together, and the lower back side provided with the decoration of "Tenun" The second decorative surface 3122 of the rear second decorative body 3120 faces the front (see FIG. 224 (b)). In addition, the first decorative surface 3111 (the sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the back lower first decorative body 3110 which faces the front in the normal state is turned rearward and cannot be viewed from the player side. In addition, from this state, neither the back lower back first decorative body 3110 nor the back lower back second decorative body 3120 can be further rotated clockwise in plan view.

  In the state of FIG. 224 (b), the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmission member 3132 that rotates integrally with the first decorative body 3110 after the back is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 3139. The second detection piece 3128 of the decoration support shaft 3125 that rotates integrally with the second decoration 3120 is in a non-detection state with respect to the detection of the second rotation detection sensor 3140.

  On the other hand, when the drive gear 3154 is driven to rotate clockwise in the front view by the third drive motor 3155 after the back of the slide unit 3150, the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153, the pinion gear 3153a, and the rack gear of the rack member 3143. Via the 3143a, the rotary drive unit 3130 can be slid to the position of the left end in front view together with the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120. In a state where the rotary drive unit 3130 is slid to the left end position in a front view in a state where the rotary drive unit 3130 is assembled to the game board 5, an axis extending vertically in the rotation of the hinge (a center line of the decoration support shaft 3125) It substantially coincides with the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a.

  FIG. 224 (c) shows a state where it is slid to the left end position in front view while keeping the state of FIG. 224 (b). FIG. 225 (d) shows the state of FIG. 224 (a) being moved to the left end position in the front view, and driving the first rear drive motor 3134 to drive the first drive gear 3133 and the rotation transmitting member. The lower back lower first decorative body 3110 is rotated by a predetermined angle (20 degrees) in a counterclockwise direction in plan view via the first decorative body side operation gear 3132c and the connecting portion 3132b of the lower rear lower decorative body 3132, and When the first decorative surface 3111 (sub-liquid crystal display device 3114) of 3110 is directed straight forward, or the state shown in FIG. Is rotated 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view, so that the second lower decorative body 3120 is rotated together with the first lower decorative body 3110 so as to rotate the first decorative body 3110. One decorative surface 3111 ( A state with its blanking liquid crystal display device 3114) in front shows.

  Then, in the state of FIG. 224 (c), the rear lower back second decorative body 3120 is rotated by 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction in plan view by driving the rear lower back second drive motor 3137, or FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 225 (e), when the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 is rotated 180 degrees clockwise in plan view by driving the lower back lower first drive motor 3134, as shown in FIG. 225 (e). From the state where the second decorative surface 3112 of the first decorative body 3110 and the second decorative surface 3122 of the second lower decorative body 3120 are folded to face each other, the hinge is rotated and the lower decorative surface 3112 is rotated. The first decorative body 3110 and the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back are opened, and the respective second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are aligned right and left and face the front.

  In the state of FIG. 225 (e), the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 310 are overlapped with each other and closed. By arranging the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the second back decoration 3120 right and left, the decoration surface formed by the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120 is formed. The size can be doubled, can be noticed in the game area 5a to strongly attract the interest of the player, and the appearance of the large decoration can surprise the player. In the state of FIG. 225 (e), the decorations of the second decoration surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120 are integrated, and the character of “Holy” is written. The decoration becomes visible. In addition, the 1st hinge part 3115 and the 2nd hinge part 3124 of the 1st decoration body 3110 after back back, and the 2nd decoration body 3120 after back bottom have the 1st decoration surface 3111, 3121 and the 2nd decoration surface 3112, 3122. The decoration corresponding to the decoration that has been performed is provided, and when the first back decoration 3110 and the back bottom second decoration 3120 are opened, the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 are provided. Can be made inconspicuous, and the character of “holy” can be visually recognized by the player in a favorable state.

  As shown in the figure, the integrated decoration formed by the second decoration surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120 has "Sacred" on " A cut-out decoration 3170 like "I" is formed. The cut-out decoration 3170 is obtained by cutting out a part of one character or picture and decorating the cut-out decoration 3170. On the cut-out decoration 3170, a back upper left first decorative body 3210 of a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 described later. When the cutout decoration 3260 in which the decoration of the fixed decoration member 3211 of the above and the decoration of the second decoration member 3222 of the back upper left second decoration body 3220 are arranged on the left and right is located, the decoration of the entire character of “sparrow” is completed. (See FIG. 254).

  As described above, according to the underside rear movable effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment, from the state where the backside lower first decorative body 3110 and the backside lower second decorative body 3120 are closed with their surfaces superimposed on each other, When the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are arranged side by side and opened, the surface of the decoration by the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 is enlarged (extended) in the front view game area 5a. ), And the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 which are closed and cannot be seen from the player side are opened, so that they can be seen from the player side. More specifically, the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120 are closed, and the first decoration surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the first back decoration 3110 is directed forward. In this state (see FIG. 225 (d)), when the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 is rotated to line up with the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 in the front view left side, the lower back lower first decorative body is initially provided. The second decorative surface 3112 and 3122 of the back lower first decorative body 3110 and the back lower second decorative body 3120 such that the decorative area of only the first decorative surface 3111 of 3110 extends leftward. The decoration area is doubled, and the second decoration surfaces 3112 and 3122, which have not been seen, become visible from the player side (see FIG. 225 (e)). Alternatively, in a state where the back lower first decoration body 3110 and the lower back lower second decoration body 3120 are closed and the first decoration surface 3121 of the lower back lower second decoration body 3120 is directed forward (FIG. 224 (c)). Reference), when the back lower back second decorative body 3120 is rotated and arranged on the right side of the back lower back first decorative body 3110 in front view, initially only the first decorative surface 3121 of the back lower back second decorative body 3120 is used. The second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 are doubled so that the decorative area is doubled so that the decoration area that has been extended to the right. At the same time, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122, which have not been seen, become visible from the player side (see FIG. 225 (e)). In this way, by opening the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 from the closed state, the decoration range of the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower decorative body 3120 is obtained. Can be enlarged and the decoration can be changed, so that a strong impact can be given to the player, and the interest of the player can be given to the lower back first decoration 3110 and the lower back second decoration 3120. It can be strongly attracted to entertain the decorations spread by the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120, and make the player think that something is good. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, in a state where the back lower first decorative body 3110 and the back lower second decorative body 3120 are overlapped with each other and closed, the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower decorative body 3120 are joined together. In the case where the first decorative body 3110 and the second back decorative body 3120 are rotated around the vertically extending side of one of the hinges rotatably attached to the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120, When the surface (rear surface) facing rearward in the state of (1) is rotated so as to face forward, the entire positions of the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 define the central axis of hinge rotation. It will move to the opposite position between the two. More specifically, the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120 are closed, and the first decoration surface 3111 (the sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the first back decoration 3110 is directed forward. 224 (a) and (225) of FIG. 225, when the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120 are rotated together, the first back decoration below the back. The whole of the 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 moves to the left in front view, and the first decorative surface 3121 of the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 is directed forward (FIG. 224 (b) and (C)). On the other hand, in a state in which the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower decorative body 3120 are closed and the first decorative surface 3121 of the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 is directed forward (FIG. 224 (b)). And (c)), when the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower decorative body 3120 are rotated together, the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 are rotated. The whole moves to the right as viewed from the front, and the first decorative surface 3111 of the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back faces forward (see FIGS. 224 (a) and 225 (d)). Thereby, the decoration area by the back lower first decoration body 3110 or the back lower second decoration body 3120 in the front view game area 5a can be moved, and the decoration visible from the player side is changed. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120, and the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower decorative body 2110 can be attracted. The movement and decoration of 3120 can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, in a state in which the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are overlapped with each other and closed, one of the back lower back first decorative body 3110 or the back lower back second decorative body 3120 is closed. When rotating and opening or rotating the back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower decorative body 3120 together, in any case, the lower lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower lower back second decorative body 3110 Since the surface of the second decorative body 3120 that is visible from the player side starts rotating, at the beginning of the rotation, the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 open, or It is difficult to determine whether or not to rotate together, and it is possible to excite the player depending on which action is performed, thereby increasing the player's expectation. Further, with respect to the decoration which can be visually recognized in the initial state, when the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 are opened and rotated together, the player Since the change in the decoration that can be visually recognized from the side is different, the player can enjoy the change in the decoration in various patterns, and it is possible to make the player hard to get bored with various effects.

  As described above, the lower back rear movable rendering unit 3100 of the present embodiment rotates the first lower body back decoration 3110 and the lower back second decoration body 3120 by hinges, thereby providing different first decorations. The decorative surfaces 3111 and 3121 or the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 can be directed to the front, and the first back body 3110 and the second back body 3120 are slid by the slide unit 3150 in the left-right direction. And various effects can be presented to the player.

  Further, in the rear underside movable effect unit 3100, the hinge rotation is performed on one side (a position eccentric from the center of gravity) of two sides extending vertically above and below the rectangular outer shape of the second backside decoration 3120. The upper end and the lower end of the decorative body support shaft 3125 extending downward coaxially with the axis can be rotated by the upper bearing 3131c and the lower bearing 3131d of the rotary drive unit base 3131 of the rotary drive unit 3130, respectively. It is supported and rotatably supported at two locations as far apart as possible. Therefore, since the decoration support shaft 3125 protrudes from a position eccentric with respect to the center of gravity of the first back decoration 3110 and the back lower second decoration 3120, the decoration support shaft 3125 is located above the decoration support shaft 3125. Even if an eccentric load is applied to tilt the decorative body support shaft 3125 due to the weight of the attached first back decorative body 3110 and second back decorative body 3120 attached thereto, it is difficult to tilt the decorative body support shaft 3125. The first decorative body 3110 and the second decorative body 3120 can be rotated by supporting the decorative body support shaft 3125 straight. In other words, since the upper end and the lower end of the decoration support shaft 3125 extending downward are rotatably supported by the upper bearing 3131c and the lower bearing 3131d of the rotary drive unit base 3131, the decoration is provided. Since the support shaft 3125 is unlikely to be tilted, the heavy back lower first decorative body 3110 and lower back second decorative body 3120, which are attached to each other so as to be hinge-rotatable, can be coaxial with the hinge rotation axis. It can be rotatably supported without any problem.

[Upper left movable stage]
Next, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 226 to 229. FIG. 226 (a) is a perspective view of the rear upper left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 226 (b) is a perspective view of the rear upper left movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 227 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper left movable rendering unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 228 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper left movable rendering unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 229 (a) is a front view showing the back upper left movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) shows the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second decorative body in the back upper left movable effect unit. It is a front view showing in the state where it moved to the position of the right end in the front view, and (c) shows the state where the back upper left first decoration and the back upper left second decoration were developed from the state of (b). It is a front view.

  The back upper left movable effect unit 3200 is attached from the left end in front view to the vicinity of the center above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back upper left movable rendering unit 3200 extends in the front upper left upper decorative body 3210 and the upper back left upper first decorative body 3210 in which the shape of the front view is rectangular and a predetermined decoration is applied to the front surface thereof. The upper left upper decorative body 3220 and the upper left upper decorative body 3210, which are hingedly mounted on the right side and have different decorations on two opposite surfaces, and are mounted above the upper back left first decorative body 3210. A rotation drive unit 3230 that hinges and drives the back upper left second decorative body 3220, and the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are slid in the left-right direction together with the rotary drive unit 3230. And a slide unit 3240 mounted in the back box 3010.

The upper back left first decorative body 3210 of the back upper left movable rendering unit 3200 has a predetermined decoration applied to the front surface and a translucent flat fixed decoration member 3211 and a front end of the fixed decoration member 3211 on the right side in front view. A first cylindrical hinge portion 3212, which is mounted coaxially with respect to an axis extending vertically and protruding outward from the side and vertically spaced apart from each other, and covers the entire rear surface of the fixed decorative member 3211. The first decorative body base 3213 is attached to the rear side of the fixed decorative member 3211 and protrudes above the fixed decorative member 3211, and is mounted between the first decorative body base 3213 and the fixed decorative member 3211. A first upper decorative board 3214 on the back, on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a first decorative body base 321 which is connected to the upper surface of the first decorative body base 3213 and is L-shaped in side view. A connecting portion 3215 extending from the left end to a position to the right of the right end, a rack gear 3216 formed at the upper end of the connecting portion 3215 and extending left and right, and forward from near the left end of the connecting portion 3215 in a front view. And a flat detection piece 3217 extending therefrom.
It has.

  The fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is formed in a slightly elongated rectangular shape in a front view. The fixed decorative member 3211 has a length extending left and right, and a length extending left and right of the first lower decorative body 3110 and the second lower decorative body 3120 of the lower back movable effect unit 3100. The length of the vertically extending side which is the same length is shorter than the length of the vertically extending side of the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120 below. The fixed decorative member 3211 is formed with a decoration in which the left half of the character “sparrow” is given. As shown in FIG. 229 (c), in the present embodiment, the lower part of the lowermost “one” portion is interrupted for the character “sparrow”.

  The three first hinge portions 3212 are provided at both upper and lower ends of the fixed decorative member 3211 and at positions upward from the center in the vertical direction. The three first hinge portions 3212 protrude rightward and forward from the right side of the fixed decorative member 3211 in front view. The rotation drive unit 3230 is attached to the first decorative body base 3213 on the front surface of a portion protruding above the fixed decorative member 3211. The slider 3243 of the slide unit 3240 is attached to the connection portion 3215 on the rear surface of a vertically extending portion in an L shape in a side view. The rack gear 3216 meshes with the pinion gear 3248 of the slide unit 3240.

  The back upper left first decorative body 3210 can make the fixed decorative member 3211 emit light by appropriately emitting the LED mounted on the back upper left first decorative substrate 3214.

  The back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the back upper left movable rendering unit 3200 is a translucent first decorative member 3221 having a rectangular outer shape and a predetermined decoration on the surface, and a back surface of the first decorative member 3221. And a translucent second decoration member 3222 in which decoration different from the first decoration member 3221 is provided on a surface opposite to the surface of the first decoration member 3221, and left and right of the first decoration member 3221. Two second hinge portions 3223 projecting outward from the vertically extending side of one of the first hinge portions 3212 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and rotatably hinged to the first hinge portion 3212; A shaft portion 3224 extending upward from the upper second hinge portion 3223 of the second hinge portion 3223, a spur gear-shaped operating gear 3225 attached to an upper end of the shaft portion 3224, and a first decorative member 221 and the back on the left second decorative substrate having a plurality of LED are mounted on both sides is mounted between the second decorative member 3222 (not shown) is provided with a.

  The first decorative member 3221 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 is formed with a decoration on the surface of which a letter “Dokun” is given. The second decoration member 3222 has a decoration in which the right half of the character of “sparrow” is provided on the surface opposite to the surface of the first decoration member 3221. Since the second decorative member 3222 is located on the left side of the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 when viewed from the front, the second decorative member 3222 can be recognized as a character of “sparrow”. In detail, the decoration by the fixed decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222 is a cut-out decoration 3260 in which the lower part of the “one” part of the lowermost part is cut off from the upper part of the character “sparrow”. On the lower side, the decorations (cut-out decorations) of the second decoration surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decoration body 3120 in the rear lower back movable rendering unit 3100 are located. By doing so, the character of "sparrow" is completed. Note that the cutout decoration 3260 on the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 side occupies most of the characters of "sparrow", and therefore can be recognized as the characters of "sparrow" even if the lower part is cut out.

  The two second hinge portions 3223 project rightward and rearward from the right side of the first decorative member 3221 with the surface of the first decorative member 3221 facing the front. Further, the two second hinge portions 3223 are vertically separated from each other, and are respectively provided at positions closer to the center from both upper and lower ends of the first decorative member 3221. The shaft portion 3224 is rotatably inserted into the uppermost first hinge portion 3212 of the upper back left first decorative body 3210. The operation gear 3225 is attached so as to rotate integrally with the first decorative member 3211 via the shaft portion 3224 and the upper second hinge portion 3223. The operation gear 3225 meshes with the transmission gear 3233 of the rotation drive unit 3230.

  The back upper left second decorative body 3220 can cause the LED mounted on the back upper left first decorative board (not shown) to appropriately emit light, thereby allowing the first decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222 to emit light. .

  The rotation drive unit 3230 of the back upper left movable rendering unit 3200 has a space between the rotation drive base 3231 attached to the front surface of the first decoration body base 3213 of the back upper left first decoration body 3210 and the rotation drive base 3231. A rotating drive cover 3232 formed and attached to the upper side of the rotating drive base 3231; an operating gear 3225 of the second upper decorative body 3220, which is rotatably mounted between the rotating drive cover 3232 and the rotating drive base 3231; A transmission gear 3233 in mesh with a spur gear, a driving gear (not shown) meshing with the transmission gear 3233, and a back upper left first driving motor mounted on the upper surface of the rotation driving cover 3232 by driving the driving gear to rotate. 3235 and a rotation position of a driving gear which is attached between the rotation driving base 3231 and the rotation driving cover 3232. Rotation detecting sensor for detecting a (not illustrated) is provided with a.

  The rotary drive base 3231 of the rotary drive unit 3230 is attached to a position above the fixed decorative member 3211 in the first decorative body base 3213 of the upper back left first decorative body 3210. The drive gear (not shown) is provided with a detection piece extending outward. By detecting the detection piece with a rotation detection sensor, the rotation position of the drive gear is detected, and the drive gear, the transmission gear 3233, And the rotational position of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 can be detected via the operating gear 3225.

  The rotation drive unit 3230 rotates the back upper left second decorative body 3220 through the drive gear, the transmission gear 3233, and the operation gear 3225 by rotating the back upper left first drive motor 3235. Can be.

  The slide unit 3240 of the back upper left movable rendering unit 3200 is a horizontally long unit base 3241 mounted in the back box 3010, a horizontally long slide rail 3242 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3241, and is slidably mounted on the slide rail 3242. And a base cover 3244 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3241 so that a space is formed between the slider 3243 and the connection portion 3215 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 at the front surface. A second upper back left drive motor 3245 mounted on the front surface of the base cover 3244 such that the rotation shaft projects through the base cover 3244 between the base cover 3244 and the unit base 3241; Attached to the rotating shaft of motor 3245 A unit gear 3246 having a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3246, a small-diameter first transmission gear 3247a meshing with the drive gear 3246, and a large-diameter second transmission gear 3247b rotating integrally with the first transmission gear 3247a. A transmission gear member 3247 rotatably mounted between the cover 3244 and a second transmission gear 3247b of the transmission gear member 3247 and a rack gear 3216 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 A pinion gear 3248 rotatably mounted between the base 3241 and the base cover 3244, and a slide detection sensor 3249 mounted on the base cover 3244 and detecting the detection piece 3217 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210. Have.

  Also, the slide unit 3240 is attached to the front of the base cover 3244 at the front and left portion when viewed from the front, and the upper back left first decorative board 3214, the upper back left second decorative board, the upper back left first drive motor 3235, the rotation detection sensor, The upper back left relay board 3250 that relays the connection between the back upper left second drive motor 3245 and the slide detection sensor 3249 and the effect drive board 3043, and the base cover 3244 that covers the front surface of the back upper left relay board 3250. A board cover 3251 attached to the front face, a back upper left decorative base 3252 attached to the front face of the board cover 3251; A predetermined decoration is attached to the front of the upper left back decoration base 3252 so as to cover the front of the upper left back decoration board 3253. A back left upper ornamental body 3254 having formed the translucent, and a.

  When the drive gear 3246 is rotationally driven by the upper back left second drive motor 3245, the slide unit 3240 raises the upper back left first decorative body 3210 through the transmission gear member 3247, the pinion gear 3248, and the rack gear 3216. It can be slid in the left-right direction together with the left second decorative body 3220 and the rotary drive unit 3230. In addition, the LED on the back upper left decorative substrate 3253 emits light as appropriate, so that the back upper left decorative body 3254 can be made to emit light.

  Subsequently, an operation of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 will be described. In the normal state, the back upper left movable rendering unit 3200 is configured such that the back upper left second decorative body 3220 covers the front surface of the upper back left first decorative body 3210 as shown in FIG. The left second decorative body 3220 is folded by the rotary drive unit 3230 toward the upper back left first decorative body 3210, and the first decorative member 3221 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 faces the front. It is in the state that it was. In a normal state, the upper back left first decorative body 3210 is located at the left end in front view by the slide unit 3240. In this normal state, the rotation drive unit 3230 detects a detection piece of a drive gear (not shown) for detecting the rotation position of the second upper decorative body 3220 by a rotation detection sensor (not shown). In addition, the detection piece 3217 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3249 of the slide unit 3240.

  In a normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are located behind the back left middle decorative unit 3050 when assembled on the game board 5, and the player side Are invisible (see FIG. 201).

  In a normal state, when the pinion gear 3248 is rotationally driven counterclockwise in front view by the drive gear 3246 and the transmission gear member 3247 by the second drive motor 3245 on the back of the slide unit 3240, the pinion gear When the rack gear 3216 meshing with the 3248 causes the upper back left first decorative body 3210 to slide rightward in front view together with the back upper left second decorative body 3220 and the rotary drive unit 3230, and reaches the right end. The slide movement stops (see FIG. 229 (b)). In this state, when assembled on the game board 5, the vertically rotatable hinges of the upper back left first decorative body 3210 and the upper back left second decorative body 3220 are centered in the horizontal direction of the game area 5 a. , And the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is visible from the player side through the frame of the center role object 2500 (see FIG. 253).

  Then, in a state where the upper back left first decorative body 3210 is positioned at the right end in front view by the slide unit 3240, the upper back left first drive motor 3235 of the rotary drive unit 3230 via the drive gear and the transmission gear 3233. When the operating gear 3225 is rotated 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction in plan view, the back upper left second decorative body 3220 folded and covering the front surface of the upper back left first decorative body 3210 is unfolded. The hinge is rotated to the right side when viewed from the front of the upper back left first decorative body 3210 (see FIG. 229 (c)). Thereby, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are arranged side by side, so that the size is about twice as large as in a normal state, so that they stand out in the game area 5a. The player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appearance of the large decoration can surprise the player.

  In this state, the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the second decorative member 3222 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are arranged side by side to face the front, and the respective decorations are integrated. As a result, the decoration of the character of "sparrow" becomes visible. The first hinge 3212 and the second hinge 3223 of the upper back left first decorative body 3210 and the upper back left second decorative body 3220 have the decoration applied to the fixed decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222, respectively. Corresponding decorations are given, and when opening the back upper left second decorative body 3220 from the back upper left first decorative body 3210, the first hinge part 3212 and the second hinge part 3223 can be made inconspicuous. The character "sparrow" can be visually recognized by the player in a good state.

  In addition, the decoration of the character of “sparrow” which can be visually recognized as a unit is such that the lower side is interrupted from a position above the lowermost “one” part, and the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the upper back Being united with the decoration of the second decoration surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the back lower first decoration body 3110 and the back lower second decoration body 3120 of the lower back lower movable effect unit 3100 located below the left second decoration body 3220. Thus, the character of "sparrow" is completed (see FIG. 254).

  In this manner, the back upper left movable rendering unit 3200 slides the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 in the left-right direction, or extends the back upper left second decorative body 3220 up and down. By rotating the hinge about the axis, the upper back left upper decorative body 3210 can be folded so as to cover the front surface, or the upper back left upper first decorative body 3210 can be unfolded so as to line up on the right side in front view. It is possible to present various effects to the player.

[Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 230 and 231. FIG. 230A is a perspective view of the back left movable rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 230B is a perspective view of the back left movable rendering unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 231 (a) is a front view showing the back left movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 231 (b) is a front view showing the back left movable decorative body of the back left movable effect unit in a protruding state.

  The rear left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the left of the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010 when viewed from the front. The back left movable rendering unit 3300 is supported by a back right fixed decorative body 3310 having a three-dimensional predetermined decoration on the front surface and slidably in the left and right direction behind the back right fixed decorative body 3310. A decorated frame-shaped back right movable decorative body 3320 and a back right movable decorative body 3320 are slid in the left-right direction to be mounted in the back box 3010, and a back left fixed decorative body 3310 is mounted on the front. And a rear left drive unit 3330.

  The back left fixed decorative body 3310 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed in a vertically elongated substantially rectangular shape in a front view. The back left fixed decorative body 3310 is provided with a three-dimensional decorative and translucent fixed side decorative member 3311, and is attached to the rear surface of the fixed side decorative member 3311 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. And a back left fixed decorative substrate 3312. As shown in the drawing, the fixed-side decorative member 3311 is partially formed with a decoration of a “batsu” tile. The back left fixed decorative body 3310 can cause the fixed side decorative member 3311 to emit light by decorating the LED of the back left fixed decorative substrate 3312 appropriately.

  The back left movable decorative body 3320 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the back left fixed decorative body 3310 when viewed from the front. The back left movable decorative body 3320 includes a frame-shaped movable decorative member 3321 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and a light-transmissive frame-shaped decorative frame 3322 attached to the rear surface of the movable decorative member 3321. A frame-shaped movable base 3323 attached to the rear side of the decoration frame 3322; and a back left movable decoration attached between the movable base 3323 and the decoration frame 3322 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. And a substrate 3324.

  The movable side decorative member 3321 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 is provided with the same decoration as the first decorative surface 3111 of the first back decorative body 3110 in the back lower movable effect unit 3100. The movable base 3323 has a lower end protruding below the movable side decorative member 3321 and the decorative frame 3322, and the protruding portion is attached by the back left drive unit 3330 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Although not shown, the back left movable decorative substrate 3324 is formed in a U-shape so as to extend along the right side of the center of the frame-shaped decorative frame 3322 in the left-right direction in front view. By illuminating the LED on the back left movable decorative substrate 3324, the movable decorative member 3321 can be illuminated.

  The back left drive unit 3330 of the back left movable rendering unit 3300 is mounted on a unit base 3331 mounted in the back box 3010 and a lower front surface of the unit base 3331 so that the back left movable decorative body 3320 can be slid left and right. The slide guide 3332 extending in the left-right direction is attached, the back left drive motor 3333 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3331 so that the rotation axis extends forward, and the base end side of the rotation axis of the back left drive motor 3333 is A rod-shaped operating arm (not shown) attached and having a distal end connected to the back left movable decorative body 3320, and a slide detection sensor 3335 attached to the unit base 3331 for detecting the rotational position of the operating arm And a back left fixed decorative substrate 3312 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3331. Urahidari movable decorative substrate 3324, and a Urahidari relay board 3336 that relays the connection between the back left drive motor 3333, and the slide detection sensor 3335 and effect driving substrate 3043, the.

  The unit base 3331 of the back left drive unit 3330 has the back left fixed decorative body 3310 attached to the front of the back left movable decorative body 3320 at the left end side in front view. The slide guide 3332 is attached so that the lower end of the movable base 3323 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 can slide in the left-right direction. The back left drive motor 3333 is attached to the upper right corner of the unit base 3331 in rear view. The operating arm (not shown) extends from the base end attached to the rotation shaft of the back left drive motor 3333 to the front side near the lower right end of the lower side of the frame-shaped back left movable decorative body 3320 in rear view. Although not shown in the drawings, the operating arm has a slit formed at the end thereof, which penetrates back and forth and extends in the longitudinal direction. A guide pin projecting rearward from the vicinity of the lower right corner in rear view of the movable base 3323 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 is slidably inserted into the slit.

  Next, the operation of the rear left movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state, the back left movable decorative unit 3320 is located behind the back left fixed decorative body 3310 in the normal state, and is almost invisible from the front as shown in FIG. It is in a state. That is, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is located at the immersion position where it cannot be visually recognized. In this normal state, the operation arm (not shown) is detected by the slide detection sensor 3335. In a normal state, when assembled to the game board 5, a part of the right end in front view of the back left fixed decorative body disposed on the front side faces the frame of the center role 2500 and the back left side. The front left portion of the front of the fixed decorative body can be visually recognized from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 on the left side of the center role 2500. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to a position where the back left movable decorative body 3320 is at the same height as the back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 of the back lower movable effect unit 3100. ing.

  In this normal state, when the operating arm is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the back left drive motor 3333, the guide pin of the movable base 3323 slidably inserted into the slit at the tip of the operating arm is moved. Then, the operating arm presses rightward in front view, and the back left movable decorative body 3320 slides straight rightward in front view via the slide guide 3332. Then, when the right side portion of the frame-shaped back left fixed decorative body 3320 substantially remains on the left side in front view, and is located rightward from the back in front view of the back left fixed decorative body 3310, the sliding movement to the right stops. Thereby, the portion on the right side of the left side of the frame-shaped back left movable decorative body 3320 is located on the right side of the back left fixed decorative body 3310 and can be visually recognized from the front (see FIG. 231 (b)). ). That is, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is located at an appearance position where it can be visually recognized from the player side.

  In a state where the back left movable decorative body 3320 slides to the right and is located at the appearance position, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is assembled from the game board 5 and passes through the frame of the center role item 2500 from the player side. While being visible, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 disposed rearward through the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320 can be visually recognized. Therefore, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, when a predetermined effect image (effect animation) is displayed in a display area immediately behind the back left movable decorative body 3320, the player is given a frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320. It can be illusioned that a liquid crystal display device is mounted inside. Thus, the player can be illusioned that there are two sub liquid crystal display devices 3114 of the first decorative surface 3111 of the first back decoration body 3110 of the back rear movable effect unit 3100 on the left and right.

[Moveable production unit in the middle of the back]
Next, the rear upper middle movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 232 to 243. FIG. 232 (a) is a perspective view of the rear upper middle movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 232 (b) is a perspective view of the rear upper middle movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 233 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back upper middle movable presentation unit as viewed from the front, disassembled for each main configuration, and FIG. 233 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back upper middle movable presentation unit for each main configuration. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 234 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper middle decoration unit of the back upper middle movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 234 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper middle decoration unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 235 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper middle decoration unit viewed from the front and FIG. 236 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper middle decoration unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 237 (a) is an explanatory view showing the driving configuration of the back upper middle decoration unit from the front, and FIG. 237 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. FIG. 238 (a) is a front view of the back upper middle decorative body unit in a normal state, and FIG. 238 (b) is a state in which a pair of back upper middle decorative bodies of the back upper middle decorative body unit are half opened outward. (C) is a front view of the back upper middle decorative body unit in a state where the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies are completely opened outward.

  FIG. 239 (a) is a front perspective view of the rear upper middle drive unit of the rear upper middle movable effect unit, and FIG. 239 (b) is a rear upper middle drive unit of the rear upper middle movable effect unit viewed from behind. FIG. FIG. 240 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle drive unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 240 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle drive unit disassembled for each main configuration. It is the disassembled perspective view which was seen. FIG. 241 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle drive unit of the rear upper middle drive unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 241 (b) is an exploded view of the rear upper middle drive unit of the rear upper middle drive unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 242 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a drive system of the rear upper middle movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 243 (a) is a front view of the back upper middle movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 243 (b) is a front view showing the back upper middle decorative unit in the back upper middle movable effect unit. .

  The rear upper middle movable effect unit 3400 is attached from the substantially center in the left-right direction to the right end above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. As shown in FIG. 233, the back upper middle movable effecting unit 3400 is attached to a pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 and a pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 attached to each other. A back upper middle decoration body unit 3410 having a back upper middle decoration body 3412, a rotating connection member 3430 attached to the rear surface of the back upper middle decoration unit 3410, and a rotating connection member 3430. And a back upper middle drive unit 3440 attached to the inside of the back box 3010 and a back upper middle drive unit 3440 attached to the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 so as to be able to move up and down and rotatable. It comprises a unit 3480 and a middle upper back relay board 3490 attached to the rear surface of the middle middle back drive unit 3440.

  As shown in FIG. 234 and FIG. 235, the back upper middle decoration body unit 3410 of the back upper middle movable effecting unit 3400 is a pair of back upper middle decoration bodies having a predetermined decoration applied to the front surface and having translucency. 3411, a translucent second middle decorative body 3412 disposed behind the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411 and having a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and a pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies A pair of light-transmitting flat plate-shaped slide bases 3413 respectively attached to the rear surface of the body 3411 and a pair of light-transmitting flat plates mounted on the rear surface of the pair of slide bases 3413 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A back upper middle decorative substrate 3414, a back upper middle second decorative substrate 3415 attached to the rear surface of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back upper middle second decorative substrate Cover the back of 3415 A board cover 3416 attached to the rear surface of the second decorative body 3412 in the back upper part, and a rear side of the board cover 3416 so as to form a space in which the slide base 3413 is slidably received between the board cover 3416 and the board cover 3416. The slider cover 3417 includes a flat plate-shaped slider cover 3417 attached thereto and a decorative body unit base 3418 attached to a rear side of the slider cover 3417.

  In addition, the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is mounted on the rear surface of the motor base 3419 attached to the rear surface of the decorative body unit base 3418, and the rotation shaft projects from the front surface of the motor base 3419. A first upper back drive motor 3420 and a first spur gear-shaped drive gear mounted on the rotation shaft of the first back drive upper middle motor 3420 and arranged between the motor base 3419 and the decorative body unit base 3418 3421, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3422 meshed with the first drive gear 3421 and rotatably attached to the decorative body unit base 3418 so that the front end protrudes forward of the decorative body unit base. , Is meshed with the first transmission gear 3422, and is rotatably attached to the front surface of the decorative body unit base 3418. It includes a first pinion gear 3423, a.

  Further, the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is provided with a rack gear 3424a that meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 and extends left and right, and a mounting boss that passes through the slider cover 3417 and mounts one of the pair of slide bases 3413. A first slider 3424 having a 3424b and slidably mounted between the slider cover 3417 and the decorative body unit base 3418 in the left and right direction, and a rack gear 3424a of the first slider 3424 sandwiches the first pinion gear 3423. Has a rack gear 3425a that meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 on the opposite side and extends left and right, and a mounting boss 3425b that penetrates through the slider cover 3417 and attaches the rest (the other) of the pair of slide bases 3413. , Slider cover 3417 and decorative body uni A second slider 3425 slidably attached to the base unit 3418 in the left-right direction, a slide detection sensor 3426 attached to the decorative body unit base 3418 from the rear side, and detecting a sliding position of the second slider 3425; , Is provided.

  A pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 of the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 has a shape in a front view, in which one end in a longitudinal direction of a quadrangle extending left and right bulges outward in a semicircular arc, The opposite end side is inwardly recessed in a semicircular arc, and the portion depressed in the semicircular arc is a concave portion 3411a. In the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411, the outer periphery excluding the end side where the concave portion 3411a concaved in a semicircular arc is formed inward extends in a plate shape rearward. The pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411 are attached in such a manner that edges where the concave portions 3411a are formed face each other. In addition, the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 is entirely formed in a translucent milky white, and the front side of one back upper middle first decorative body 3411 has the head side of the “dragon”. On the front surface of the remaining (other) back upper middle first decorative body 3411, a decoration on the tail side of the "dragon" is formed so as to have metallic luster.

  The back upper middle second decorative body 3412 is formed in a flat plate shape in a front view and slightly smaller than a size when a pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 are combined (closed). Have been. The back upper middle second decorative body 3412 is a circular center swelling part 3412a which is inserted into the concave part 3411a of the back upper middle first decorative body 3411 at the center and bulges forward, and the left and right of the center decorative part 3412a. Two circular central horizontal decorative portions 3412b formed vertically apart on both sides, and two circular horizontal decorative portions 3412b formed on both left and right outer sides of the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b. It has an intermediate decorative portion 3412c and circular end decorative portions 3412d formed near the left and right ends on both left and right outer sides of the intermediate decorative portion 3412c and having a larger diameter than the intermediate decorative portion 3412c. The back upper middle second decorative body 3412 is entirely formed in a milky white color having a light-transmitting property, and the outer periphery of a central decorative part 3412a, a central horizontal decorative part 3412b, an intermediate decorative part 3412c, and an end decorative part 3412d on the front surface. In addition, a linear decoration having a metallic luster is formed. The back upper middle second decorative body 3412 is provided with a decoration that reminds a player of a "dot stick" of "Mahjong".

  Each of the pair of slide bases 3413 is formed in a shape substantially corresponding to the outer peripheral shape of the first upper decorative body 3411 on the back, and the outer base extending rearward of the first decorative body 3411 on the rear upper. Installed at the end. As a result, by assembling the back upper middle first decorative body 3411 and the slide base 3413, the back upper middle first decorative body 3411 forms the front surface and the slide base 3413 between the part forming the front surface. A space in which the second decorative body 3412, the upper middle back decorative board 3415, and the board cover 3416 can be inserted is formed. Each of the pair of slide bases 3413 includes a slit 3413a that penetrates back and forth and extends left and right. In one of the slide bases 3413, the slit 3413a is formed on the side closer to the upper side in one slide base 3413, and the slit 3413a is formed on the side closer to the lower side in the other slide bases 3413. Each of the pair of slide bases 3413 is formed in a milky white color having a light-transmitting property.

  The pair of back upper middle first decorative substrates 3414 and back upper middle second decorative substrates 3415 are white substrates whose surfaces (entire surfaces) are white. This facilitates the reflection and diffusion of light and makes the substrate less noticeable. Since the back upper middle first decorative body 3414 is attached to the slide base 3413 which is rearwardly distant from the portion forming the front surface of the back upper middle first decorative body 3411, light from the LED is emitted from the back upper middle first decorative body 3411. Since the irradiation range of light is widened before reaching the part forming the front surface of the first decorative body 3411, even if the number of LEDs is small, the entire first decorative body 3411 on the back can be uniformly luminous decorated. it can. On the other hand, the second middle decorative substrate 3415 is capable of illuminating and decorating the entire second middle decorative object 3412, and the central decorative portion 3412a and the central horizontal decorative portion of the second middle decorative object 3412 are also different. 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the end decorative portion 3412d can be independently illuminated.

  The board cover 3416 has a mounting boss 3416a that protrudes rearward from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the rear surface and is inserted into the slit 3413a of the slide base 3413. The rear end of the mounting boss 3416a of the board cover 3416 that passes through the slit 3413a of the slide base 3413 is mounted on the slider cover 3417. The mounting boss 3416a of the substrate cover 3416 relatively slides in the slit 3413a in the left-right direction via a rotatable bush 3427. This substrate cover 3416 is transparent.

  The slider cover 3417 penetrates back and forth and extends left and right, and a first slit 3417a through which a mounting boss 3424a of the first slider 3424 is slidably inserted. And a second slit 3417b into which the mounting boss 3425a of the second slider 3425 is slidably inserted. The first slit 3417a is formed near the lower side on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The second slit 3417b is formed near the upper side on the right side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  The first pinion gear 3423 is disposed slightly to the right from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 237). The first slider 3424 is arranged so that the rack gear 3424a meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 from below, and two mounting bosses 3424b arranged in the left and right directions from the left end in front view project forward. The two mounting bosses 3424b of the first slider 3424 have front ends protruding forward through the first slits 3417a of the slider cover 3417, and a first decoration on the back of the head on which the decoration of the “dragon” is provided. It is attached to the rear surface of the slide base 3413 attached to the body 3411. The second slider 3425 is disposed so that the rack gear 3425a meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 from above, and two mounting bosses 3425b arranged side by side from the right end in front view project forward. Two mounting bosses 3425b of the second slider 3425 have front ends protruding forward through the second slits 3417b of the slider cover 3417, and are provided with a decoration on the tail side of the "dragon". It is attached to the rear of the slide base 3413 attached to 3411. The second slider 3425 includes a detection piece 3425c that protrudes upward from the upper portion near the right end in front view in a flat plate shape. The detection piece 3425c is detected by the slide detection sensor 3426.

  Next, an operation of the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 in the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 238 (a) and the like, the back upper middle decoration body unit 3410 closes when the ends on the concave portion 3411a side of the pair of back upper middle decoration bodies 3411 abut against each other. I have. In this state, the central decorative portion 3412a of the second back upper middle decorative body 3412 swells forward through the circular opening formed by the concave portion 3411a, and the other portions of the second upper back middle decorative body 3412 are viewed from the front. I cannot see it.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 237 (a), the left end of the first slider 3424 in the front view and the right end of the second slider 2425 in the front view are in the left-right direction in the back upper middle decoration unit 3410. It is located near the center. The detection piece 3425c of the second slider 3425 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3426. In the normal state (closed state), when the central decoration portion 3412a is illuminated by the second upper decoration substrate 3415, the decoration reminiscent of the "thousand-point stick" of "Mahjong" can be shown to the player. Also, in the normal state, when the entire back upper middle decorative body 3412 is illuminated by the back upper middle second decorative substrate 3415, the back upper middle decorative body 3412 covering the front of the back upper middle decorative body 3412 is formed. The body 3411 can be entirely decorated with light. Further, when the LED of the back upper middle first decorative body 3414 is caused to emit light in a normal state, the light is formed on the rear side of the back upper middle second decorative body 3415 formed in white, the back upper middle first decorative body 3414. The light can be reflected and diffused on the front surface and the like, and the outer periphery and the like of the first decorative body 3411 in the upper back can be illuminated.

  When the first pinion gear 3423 is rotated clockwise in the front view from the normal state by the first upper drive motor 3420 via the first drive gear 3421 and the first transmission gear 3422 from the back upper side, the first With the rack gear 3424a of the first slider 3424 and the rack gear 3425a of the second slider 3425 meshing with the pinion gear 3423, the first slider 3424 slides to the left in front view, and the second slider 3425 moves to the right in front view. Slide to move. Thereby, the first decorative body 3411 on the back of the head, on which the decoration on the head side of the “dragon” attached via the attachment boss 3424b of the first slider 3424, is slid to the left in front view, and The first decorative body 3411 with the decoration on the tail side of the “dragon” attached via the attachment boss 3425b of the second slider 3425 slides to the right in front view, and a pair of the upper and lower middle The first decorative body 3411 slides in the direction away from each other and opens.

  When the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 is slid in a direction away from each other, the back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 are located between the ends on the concave portion 3411a side of the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411. A part of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 arranged behind 3411 faces forward. Then, in a state in which the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b of the second upper decorative body 3412 faces forward from between the pair of first upper decorative bodies 3411, the first upper middle drive motor 3420 is formed. Is temporarily stopped. In this state (intermediately open state), as shown in FIG. 237 (b), the middle decorative portion 3412a of the second upper back middle decorative body 3412 and the four center decorative portions 3412a are located between the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411. The center horizontal decorative portion 3412b faces forward. In this state, when the center decoration portion 3412a and the center horizontal decoration portion 3412b are illuminated and decorated by the back upper middle second decoration substrate 3415, the player can see the decoration reminiscent of the "5,000 sticks" of "Mahjong". it can.

  In this state, when the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 is slid in the direction away from each other by the back upper middle first drive motor 3420 and the rotational drive is stopped in the most separated state, FIG. As shown in c), substantially the entire back upper middle second decorative body 3412 faces forward from between the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 (full open state). In this state, all of the central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the end decorative portion 3412d of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 face the front, and the back upper middle second decorative substrate. According to 3415, when the central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the edge decorative portion 3412d are illuminated, the player can see a decoration reminiscent of "Mahjong" "ten thousand sticks". it can. Further, in this state, the back upper middle first decorative body 3411 and the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 are entirely luminous decorated by the back upper middle first decorative substrate 3414 and the back upper middle second decorative substrate 3415. be able to.

  Subsequently, the rotary connection member 3430 of the middle back effecting middle rendering unit 3400 is attached to the rear surface of the decorative body unit base 3418 in the middle back body decorative body unit 3410 in the longitudinal center, and at the back of the middle middle drive unit 3440. The intermediate rotation unit 3460 includes a connection base 3431 attached to the front surface of the driven pinion gear 3467 and a cylindrical connection bush 3432 attached to the connection base 3431 so as to be rotatable. The outer peripheral surface of the connection bush 3432 is inserted into the insertion hole 3461b of the rotary unit base 3461 of the middle upper rotary unit 3460.

  Next, the rear upper middle drive unit 3440 of the rear upper middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described. As shown in FIG. 240 and the like, the back upper middle drive unit 3440 can rotate the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 so as to be rotatable, and the back upper middle rotation unit 3460 can rotate on the front side. And a base cover 3442 attached to the unit base 3441 so as to cover the front of the unit base 3441 in front of the back upper middle rotation unit 3460, and a base cover A rear upper middle second drive motor 3443 mounted on the front surface of 3442 and having a rotating shaft protruding rearward through the base cover 3442, and a flat shaft mounted on the rotating shaft of the rear upper middle second drive motor 3443. A gear-shaped second drive gear 3444 and a large-diameter spur gear-shaped large-diameter transmission gear meshing with the second drive gear 3444. A second transmission gear 3445 that has a small diameter spur gear-shaped small diameter transmission gear 3445b that rotates integrally with the large diameter transmission gear 3445a, and that is rotatably attached to the base cover 3442; It has a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3446a that meshes with the small-diameter transmission gear 3445b of 3445, and a cylindrical drive pin 3446b that projects rearward from the rear surface of the gear portion 3446a, and is rotatably attached to the base cover 3442. And a driving pin 3446b of the lifting / lowering driving gear 3446. The second driving gear 3444, the second transmission gear 3445, and the lifting / lowering driving gear 3446 are provided. It is attached to the rear surface of the base cover 3442 so as to cover the rear side of the gear 3446, and Includes cover 3442 in cooperation with the second drive gear 3444, a second transmission gear 3445, and the elevation drive gear 3446 plate-like gear cover 3447 are rotatably mounted to, the.

  In addition, the rear upper middle drive unit 3440 is attached to the unit base 3441 and detects a rotation position of the rear upper middle rotation unit 3460. The rotation detection sensor 3448 includes a unit base 3441 and a rear upper middle rotation unit 3460. An assist spring 3449 attached between and for urging the back upper middle rotation unit 3460 in a direction in which the back upper middle decoration body unit 3410 rises, and a whole belt-shaped penetrating front and rear and extending in a longitudinal direction. An assist arm 3450 having an assist slit 3450a and a base end rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3441; Arm retainer 3451 attached to the front of the That.

  As shown in FIG. 241 and the like, a back upper middle rotation unit 3460 of the back upper middle drive unit 3440 has a bearing portion 3461a rotatably attached to the unit base 3441, and a long hole that penetrates back and forth and extends in a predetermined direction. A drive slit 3461b into which a drive pin 3446b of a lifting drive gear 3446 is slidably inserted, an insertion hole 3461c into which a connection bush 3432 of a rotary connection member 3430 is inserted, and an assist slit of an assist arm 3450 projecting rearward. It has a cylindrical assist pin 3461d inserted into 3450a, and has a shallow box-shaped rotating unit base 3461 open at the rear, and rotates to close the open rear side of the rotating unit base 3461. A rear cover 3462 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3461; It is equipped with a.

  Also, the rear upper middle rotation unit 3460 includes a rear upper middle third drive motor 3463 attached to the front surface of the rotation unit base 3461 so that the rotation axis projects between the rear cover 3462 and the rotation unit base 3461, A third drive gear 3464 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of the third drive motor 3463 in the upper back, and meshing with the third drive gear 3644 so as to be rotatable by the rotating unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462. An attached drive pinion gear 3465 in the form of a spur gear, and a rod-shaped transmission rack gear meshed with the drive pinion gear 3465 and slidably mounted in a predetermined direction between the rotary unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462. 3466 meshes with the transmission rack gear 3466 to insert the rotation unit base 3461 A spur gear-shaped driven pinion gear 3467, which is rotatably mounted at a position coaxial with 3461 c by the rotation unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462, and to which the rear end of the connection base 3431 of the rotary connection member 3430 is mounted on the front surface; It has.

  Further, the rear upper middle rotation unit 3460 detects the rotation position of the driven pinion gear 3467, and the rotation detection sensor 3468 attached to the rotation unit base 3461, and the assist pin 3461d of the rotation unit base 3461 are inserted inside. A flanged cylindrical bush 3469 whose outer side is slidably inserted into the assist slit 3450a of the assist arm 3450, and a bush 3469 which is attached to the rear end of the assist pin 3461d of the rotating unit base 3461, comes off the assist pin 3461d. And a retaining cap 3470 for preventing

  The unit base 3441 of the rear upper middle drive unit 3440 is formed in such a shape that the upper part of a vertically extending square left side in front view projects leftward, projects forward from the lower front surface, and rotates in the rear upper middle position. A rotation support pin 3441a for rotatably mounting the unit 3460 is provided. The rotation support pin 3441a of the unit base 3441 is inserted into the bearing 3461a of the rotation unit base 3461 of the middle upper rotation unit 3460. The unit base 3441 has a rotation detection sensor 3448 attached near the right end in front view at the upper end of the front surface, and an assist arm 3450 attached near the left end in front view.

  The upper back second drive motor 3463 is mounted near the upper end on the front surface of the base cover 3442. The lifting drive gear 3446 to which the rotational drive of the back upper second drive motor 3463 is transmitted via the second drive gear 3444 and the second transmission gear 3445 is located at a substantially central position in the vertical direction of the unit base 3441 and the base cover 3442. (See FIG. 242).

  The assist spring 3449 is a coiled torsion spring, and is attached so as to surround the outer periphery of the rotation support pin 3441a in the unit base 3441. The assist arm 3450 can be rotated on the same surface without backlash by being pressed against the unit base 3441 by the arm retainer 3451.

  The rotation unit base 3461 of the rear upper middle rotation unit 3460 extends left and right, and a bearing 3461a into which the rotation support pin 3441a of the unit base 3441 is inserted is formed at the lower right corner in front view. This bearing portion 3461a is formed by a metal bearing. The driving slit 3461b of the rotating unit base 3461 is formed above the bearing 3461a, and extends vertically. The insertion hole 3461c of the rotating unit base 3461 is formed near the left end in front view. The rotation unit base 3461 extends longer than the transmission rack gear 3466 left and right along the lower side, and a slide groove 3461e for slidably receiving the transmission rack gear 3466, and protrudes upward from the upper right end in front view to detect rotation. And a detection piece 3461f detected by the sensor.

  The third upper rear middle drive motor 3463 is attached to the rotation unit base 3461 at substantially the center between the bearing 3461a and the insertion hole 3461c. In the driven pinion gear 3467, the outer peripheral gear teeth that mesh with the transmission rack gear 3466 are formed only within a range of about ／ of the entire circumference, and do not make one rotation. The driven pinion gear 3467 includes a fan-shaped detection piece 3467a extending outward from a portion of the outer circumference where no gear teeth are formed. The detection piece 3467a is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3468.

  Subsequently, the back upper right decorative unit 3480 of the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described. The back upper right decoration unit 3480 is attached to the front of the base cover 3442 at a position forward of the back upper middle second drive motor 3443 in the back upper middle drive unit 3440, and is attached to the front of the decoration base 3481. A back upper right decorative board 3482 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front face, a translucent back upper decorative body 3483 which is disposed in front of the back upper right decorative board 3482 and is attached to the front face of the decorative base 3481; , Is provided.

  The back upper right decorative unit 3480 can make the back upper right decorative body 3483 emit light by making the LED of the back upper right decorative substrate 3482 emit light. When the back upper right decorative unit 3480 of the back upper right decorative unit 3480 is assembled to the game board 5, the gate portion 2003 in the right hit distribution space 2541 in the right hit game area 2540 in the front view of the center role 2500 and the general prize. It is located between the mouth 2001 and the interior of the upper right circulation space 2541 can be illuminated from behind through the transparent game panel 1100.

  The back middle relay board 3490 of the back top middle movable rendering unit 3400 includes a back top middle decoration board 3414, a back top middle second decoration board 3415, a back top middle drive motor 3420, a slide detection sensor 3426, a back top. A middle second drive motor 3443, a rotation detection sensor 3448, a back upper middle third drive motor 3463, a rotation detection sensor 3468, a back upper right decorative board 3482, and an effect drive board 3043 connected to the peripheral control board 1510; Are connected.

  Next, the operation of the rear upper middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described together with the operation of the rear upper middle drive unit 3440. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 243 (a), the upper back middle decorative body unit 3410 extends in the left and right direction so that the longitudinal direction is horizontal, and the upper side thereof is It is located slightly lower than the upper side of the unit base 3441 of the rear upper middle drive unit 3440. In this normal state, the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411 abut against each other and are closed.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 242, the upper middle rotation unit 3460 is located at the upper rotation end, and the drive pin 3446b of the elevation drive gear 3446 is connected to the drive slit 3461b of the rotation unit base 3461. Located at the lower end. In this state, a rotating moment acts on the back upper middle rotation unit 3460 so as to rotate in the counterclockwise direction in front view around the rotation support pin 3441a due to the weight of the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 and the like. ing. The driving pin 3446b is pressed to the left side via the driving slit 3461b by this rotational moment. When the drive pin 3446b is pressed, the elevation drive gear 3446 attempts to rotate. However, the drive pin 3446b passes through the rotation center of the elevation drive gear 3446 and is perpendicular to the direction in which the drive slit 3461b extends. Since it is located below, the elevation drive gear 3446 attempts to rotate clockwise in front view. However, since the drive pin 3446b of the lift drive gear 3446 is in contact with the lower end in the drive slit 3461b, the lift drive gear 3446 cannot rotate further clockwise, and the upper middle rotation unit 3460 Is maintained in a normal state, and the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is locked in a raised state. Also, in this state, the lifting drive gear 3446 does not rotate despite the action of the rotational moment, so that a load is applied to the second upper drive motor 3443 via the second transmission gear 3445 and the second drive gear 3444. In other words, the back upper middle decoration body unit 3410 can be maintained at the rising end even if the middle upper back second drive motor 3443 is not energized.

  In a normal state, the transmission rack gear 3466 slidably supported by the slide groove 3461e of the rotation unit base 3461 is located at the moving end where the rotation support pin 3441a (bearing portion 3461a) has moved away, and The driven pinion gear 3467 meshing with the transmission rack gear 3466 is at a rotational position near the turning end in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. In a normal state, the center of the insertion hole 3461c (the driven pinion gear 3467) of the rotation unit base 3461 of the rear upper middle rotation unit 3460 is located above the center of the bearing hole 3461a (the rotation support pin 3441a). ing. Further, in a normal state, the assist arm 3450 extends horizontally, and the assist pin 3461d of the rotating unit base 3461 slidably inserted into the assist slit 3450a of the assist arm 3450 is connected to the base in the assist slit 3450a. It is located near the end on the end side.

  In a normal state, the detection piece 3461f of the rotation unit base 3461 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3448, and the detection piece 3467a of the driven pinion gear 3467 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3468. In a normal state, when assembled on the game board 5, the pair of horizontally extending and closed middle upper first decorative bodies 3411 are attached to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 within the frame of the center role 2500 in front view. (See FIG. 201, etc.) above the display screen.

  When the lifting drive gear 3446 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a front view from the normal state by rotating the lifting drive gear 3446 from the normal state via the second drive gear 3444 and the second transmission gear 3445 by the second drive motor 3443 on the back upper side, the lift The driving pin 3446b of the driving gear 3446 revolves in the counterclockwise direction so as to rise inside the driving slit 3461b. When the drive pin 3446b revolves in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the drive pin 3446b presses the inside of the drive slit 3461b to the left, and the upper middle rotation unit 3460 is pivotally supported via the drive slit 3461b. It rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the pin 3441a in front view.

  When the rear upper middle rotation unit 3460 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the insertion hole of the rotation unit base 3461 located to the left above the rotation support pin 3441a (bearing portion 3461a) in front view. The 3461c (the driven pinion gear 3467) side moves downward. As a result, the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 attached to the driven pinion gear 3467 is lowered via the rotation connection member 3430 through the insertion hole 3461c of the rotation unit base 3461. At this time, since the assist pin 3461d of the rotating unit base 3461 revolves in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front centering on the rotation support pin 3441a, the assist arm 3450 is moved in the counterclockwise direction as viewed by the assist pin 3461d. While rotating, the assist pin 3461d slides in the assist slit 3450a toward the distal end side.

  Then, when the rear upper middle rotation unit 3460 rotates about 41 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state in front view, the rotation driving of the rear upper middle second drive motor 3443 stops, and the insertion hole 3461c of the rotation unit base 3461 is inserted. The driven pinion gear 3467 is located below the rotation support pin 3441a, and the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is located at the lower end (see FIG. 243 (b)). In this state, a part of the rotating unit base 3461 abuts on the unit base 3441, and the assist pin 3461d abuts on the distal end of the assist slit 3450a. The rotation is restricted.

  When the back upper middle rotation unit 3460 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, and the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is positioned at the lower end, the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is assembled on the game board 5 and The center of the body unit 3410 (the central decorative portion 3412a of the second upper decorative body 3412) is located substantially at the center of the frame of the center role 2500 (see FIG. 257).

  With the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 moved to the lower end, the drive pinion gear 3465 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction in front view by the back upper middle third drive motor 3463 via the third drive gear 3464. Then, the transmission rack gear 3466 meshing with the drive pinion gear 3465 slides rightward in the front view in the slide groove 3461e. When this transmission rack gear 3466 slides rightward, the driven pinion gear 3467 meshing with the transmission rack gear 3466 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the rotational connection mounted on the front surface of the driven pinion gear 3467. Through the connection base 3431 of the member 3430, the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 also rotates counterclockwise in front view.

  In the rear upper middle rotation unit 3460, the rear upper middle decoration unit 3410 can be rotated counterclockwise in front view until the transmission rack gear 3466 reaches the right end of the slide groove 3461e in front view. In the present embodiment, the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 can be rotated about 193 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state. Accordingly, in a state where the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is located at the lower end, it can be rotated by 208 degrees in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front with respect to a normal state extending horizontally (FIG. 243 ( b)). Then, in the state shown in FIG. 243 (b), the first upper middle drive body 3420 of the upper middle back body unit 3410 is driven to slide the pair of first middle upper back bodies 3411 in directions away from each other. (See FIGS. 258 and 259, etc.).

  As described above, the rear upper middle movable effecting unit 3400 includes the rear upper middle decorative body unit 3410 having the pair of rear upper middle decorative body 3411 and the rear upper middle second decorative body 3412, and the rear upper middle drive unit 3440. In addition to being able to be raised and lowered and rotated, the pair of upper first middle decorative bodies 3411 can be opened or closed, and a variety of movable effects can be presented to the player. In addition, depending on the degree of opening of the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411, “Mahjong” expressed by the decoration of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 facing forward from between the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411. Since the score of the "point bar" can be changed, the player's expectation of the game can be enhanced by the score of the "point bar".

[Movable production unit in front of back]
Next, the rear lower front movable effect unit 3500 of the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 244 to 251. FIG. 244 (a) is a perspective view of the rear lower front movable effect unit of the rear unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 244 (b) is a perspective view of the rear lower front movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 245 is an exploded perspective view of the underside front movable production unit excluding the underside front decorative body unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 246 is an exploded view of the underside front movable production unit except the underside front decorative body unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the sword viewed from behind. FIG. 247 is an exploded perspective view of the underside front decorative body unit of the underside front movable effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 248 is an exploded view of the underside front decorative body unit of the underside front movable effect unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 249 is a front view schematically illustrating a decoration unit lifting mechanism in the lower back front movable effect unit. FIG. 250 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a state of the decoration unit lifting mechanism when the lower back front decoration unit is raised, and FIG. 250 (b) is an enlarged view of a portion of the unit lifting pin in FIG. (C) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the unit elevating pin and the elevating slit by further enlarging (b). FIG. 251 (a) is a front view showing the lower back front movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 251 (b) is a front view showing a state where the lower back front decorative body unit is raised from the state of FIG. (C) is a front view showing a state where the lower back front first decorative body of the lower back lower decorative body unit is raised from the state of (b).

  The underside front movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the front of the underside back movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back front movable rendering unit 3500 is a back lower front decoration body unit 3501 on which a predetermined decoration is applied, and an elevation unit attached to the front of the lower back rear movable rendering unit 3100 by lifting and lowering the lower back front decoration unit 3501 3502, a lower back left decoration unit 3503 attached to the front surface of the left end portion of the lifting unit 3502 in front view, and a lower back middle decoration unit 3504 attached to the front of the front surface of the lifting unit 3502 to the left from the center in the front left / right direction. A lower back left ball guiding unit 3505 attached to the lower back middle decoration unit 3504 on the front surface of the lifting unit 3502 from the left to the front in a front view, a lower back front relay board 3506 attached to the rear surface of the lifting unit 3502, It has.

  As shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 and the like, the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 of the lower back front movable rendering unit 3500 is a back lower front first decoration in which different decorations are applied to both sides in a plate shape extending left and right. The body 3510 and the back lower front in which the first decorative body 3510 is hingedly mounted on the upper side extending left and right and is rotatably mounted on the elevating unit 3502 and is decorated on the front surface. A second decorative body 3520.

  The front lower back first decorative body 3510 of the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 has a rectangular shape extending long to the left and right when viewed from the front, has a predetermined decoration formed on the front surface, and is a shallow box-like shape having an open rear side. A first decorative member 3511 having a light property, and a predetermined decoration is formed on a rear surface of the first decorative member 3511 and a predetermined decoration is formed on a rear surface thereof. A first back decoration member 3512, a lower back front first decoration substrate 3513 attached between the first back decoration member 3512 and the first front decoration member 3511 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on both surfaces thereof, Two cylindrical first hinge portions 3514 projecting obliquely upward and rearward so as to be coaxial with an axis extending left and right from both left and right ends in front view on the upper side of the one back decoration member 3512; Positive of member 3512 A decorative body elevating pin 3515 protruding rightward from the right side surface in a columnar shape and slidably inserted into a slit 3533 a of a decorative body elevating arm 3533 of the lower back front second decorative body 3520 described later; A flat detection piece 3516 projecting rearward from the right side of the back decoration member 3512 when viewed from the front.

  In the lower back front first decorative body 3510, of the two first hinge portions 3514, the first hinge portion 3514 on the right side in front view is attached slightly to the left of the right end in front view of the first back decorative member 3512. ing. Although not shown in detail, the first decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3511 is decorated with a plurality of “mahjong” “tiles” arranged side by side.

  The lower back front second decorative body 3520 of the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is formed to be larger left and right and up and down than the back lower front first decorative body 3510, has a predetermined decoration formed on the front surface, and has a rear side. An open shallow box-shaped translucent second decorative member 3521; a back lower front second decorative substrate 3522 mounted on the rear surface of the second decorative member 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; A flat board cover 3523 that covers the back of the lower back front second decorative substrate 3522 and is attached to the rear side of the second decorative member 3521, and a front view of the upper side extending left and right of the second decorative member 3521. A first hinge portion 3514 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 that is rotatably hinged and protrudes obliquely upward and forward so as to be coaxial with respect to an axis extending left and right from the vicinity of both left and right ends; Two cylindrical second hinge portions 3524, and a right end side is inserted from the left side into the second hinge portion 3524 on the right side when viewed from the front of the two second hinge portions 3524, and the left end side is a back lower front first decorative body 3510. And a cylindrical hinge shaft 3525 inserted from the right side into the first hinge portion 3514 on the right side in front view, and a front view of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 attached to the rear surface of the second decorative member 3521 on the left end in front view. A hinge holder 3526 having a hinge shaft 3526a inserted from the left side into the first hinge portion 3514 on the left side.

  The lower back front second decorative body 3520 is mounted on the right side surface of the second decorative member 3521 in a front view, and is a shallow box-shaped gear base 3527 that is opened rightward. A lower back front first drive motor 3528 attached to the left side surface of the gear base 3527 in a front view so as to protrude rightward, and a spur gear shape attached to a rotation shaft of the lower back front first drive motor 3528. A first drive gear 3529, a transmission first gear 3530 meshed with the first drive gear 3529 and rotatably mounted on the gear base 3527, and a transmission first gear 3530 meshed with the first transmission gear 3530 and rotated on the gear base 3527; A transmission second gear 3531 rotatably attached to the transmission second gear 3531, a first lifting gear 3532 rotatably mounted on the gear base 3527, and a gear; On the left side of the base 3527 when viewed from the front, it rotates integrally with the first elevating gear 3532, penetrates in the left-right direction, and extends on the axis passing through the center of rotation. A decorative body elevating arm 3533 having a slit 3533a that is slidably inserted thereinto, and a first drive gear 3529, a transmission first gear 3530, a transmission second gear 3531, and a first elevation gear 3532, to the right in a front view. And a flat-plate gear cover 3534 attached to the gear base 3527 so as to cover the gear base 3527.

  Further, the lower back front second decorative body 3520 is attached to the left side surface of the second decorative member 3521 in a front view, and is capable of detecting the detection piece 3516 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510. A sensor cover 3536 attached to the left side of the second decorative member 3521 in front view so as to cover the decorative body elevating detection sensor 3535, and a slider attachment extending downward from the lower right end of the second decorative member 3521 in front view. A portion 3537 and a guide boss 3538 that protrudes rearward in a columnar shape from near the right end in rear view at the upper part of the rear surface of the substrate cover 3523.

  In the lower back front decorative body unit 3501, the first hinge pin 3515, the decorative body elevating pin 3515, the second hinge portion 3524, the hinge shafts 3525, 3526a, the lower back front first drive motor 3528, the first drive gear 3529, the transmission first A decorative body elevating mechanism in which the gear 3530, the transmission second gear 3531, the first elevating gear 3532, and the decorative body elevating arm 3533 rotate the hinge lowering of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 with respect to an axis extending left and right, and thereby elevate and lower. 3501A.

  In addition, the lower back front second decorative body 3520 is formed at the lower part of the second decorative member 3521 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in front view, penetrates back and forth, and has a long hole-shaped elevating slit 3540 extending left and right. , Have. As shown in FIGS. 249 and 250, the lifting slit 3540 is formed such that both ends extending left and right are formed at the same height, and a portion of the upper side extending left and right is closer to the right from the left end in front view. Has a lock projection 3540a projecting downward. The lock projection 3540a is formed in an arc shape in which the left side in front view is in contact with a line extending horizontally from the upper end of the semicircular arc at the left end of the elevating slit 3540, and the right side in front view is formed in the elevating slit. It is formed in a straight line that extends obliquely toward the left end of a portion that slightly extends leftward horizontally from the upper end of the semicircular arc at the right end of 3540. The lower side extending left and right of the elevating slit 3540 is formed in a shape following the upper side so as to form a substantially constant interval with the upper side.

  The elevating unit 3502 of the underside front movable effect unit 3500 is located between the flat base unit 3550 attached to the front of the underside back movable effect unit 3100 and the unit base 3550, under the back underside front decorative body unit 3501. A base cover 3551 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3550 with a gap capable of accommodating a portion below the front first decorative body 3510, and a rotation shaft protruding between the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551. A lower back front second drive motor 3552 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550, a spur gear shaped second drive gear 3553 attached to the rotation shaft of the lower back front second drive motor 3552, It is in mesh with the second drive gear 3553, and is rotated by the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551. A second transmission gear 3554 attached to the second transmission gear 3554, an arc-shaped second elevating and lowering gear 3555a meshing with the second transmission gear 3554, and a substantially semicircular and flat main body 3555b concentric with the arc of the second elevating and lowering gear 3555a. A shaft hole 3555c penetrating at the center of the main body 3555b and rotatably mounted by the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551; and an arm 3555d extending from the main body 3555b in a direction away from the second lifting gear 3555a. And a column-shaped arm 3555 that is attached from the front to the tip of the arm portion 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555 and that is slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3540 of the lower back front decoration unit 3501. Unit lifting pin 3556a, front end of unit lifting pin 3556a A plate-shaped connecting piece 3556b extending toward the shaft hole 3555c along the arm portion 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555, and a rear end protruding rearward from the tip of the connecting piece 3556b, and a rear end of the main body 3555b of the unit elevating arm 3555 And an arm reinforcing member 3556 having a mounting boss 3556c mounted on the front surface.

  The lower back front second drive motor 3552 is attached to the rear surface of the lower left corner of the unit base 3550 in front view. The second drive gear 3553 includes a flat detection piece 3553a extending outward. The unit elevating arm 3555 is attached so as to rotate about a position near the upper part of the unit base 3550 at a position closer to the left from the center in the left-right direction in front view. The unit elevating arm 3555 is formed such that the distance from the shaft hole 3555c to the tip of the arm portion 3555d is longer than the radius of the second elevating gear 3555a.

  In addition, the lifting unit 3502 is mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3550 and is capable of detecting the detection piece 3353a of the second drive gear 3553, and is mounted on the front end of the unit base 3550 at the right end in front view. A slide base 3558 extending vertically, a vertically extending rod-like intermediate slider 3559 attached to the front side of the slide base 3558 so as to be vertically slidable, and a vertically slidable slider attached to the front side of the intermediate slider 3559. And a vertically extending mounting slider 3560 which is mounted on a slider mounting portion 3537 of the lower back front decorative body unit 3501.

  In this elevating unit 3502, the back lower front second drive motor 3552, the second drive gear 3553, the second transmission gear 3554, the unit elevating arm 3555, the arm reinforcing member 3556 (unit elevating pin 3556a), the slide base 3558, and the intermediate slider 3559. , And the attachment slider 3560 constitute a decoration unit lifting mechanism 3502A that raises and lowers the lower back front decoration unit 3501.

  Further, the elevating unit 3502 has a base end side rotatably attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550, penetrates back and forth, extends toward the front end side, and has a guide boss 3538 of the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 inserted therethrough. Arm 3561 having a guide slit 3561a, and a guide bush into which a guide boss 3538 of the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is slidably inserted from the rear into the guide slit 3561a of the guide arm 3561. 3562, a spring base 3563 attached to the rear end of the guide boss 3538 behind the guide bush 3562, and an arm retainer attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550 so as to rotatably support the rear surface on the base end side of the guide arm 3561. 3564, arm presser 3564 and spring Over scan both ends and 3563 is provided with an assist spring 3565 which urges the respective attached and the direction in which the Ahemu presser 3564 and spring-based 3563 approach each other, the. The guide arm 3561 is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550 at the upper left position in the front view and on the right side, and the distal end side extends rightward.

  The lower left lower decorative unit 3503 of the lower rear front movable effecting unit 3500 is a translucent unit attached to the upper left corner of the unit base 3550 in a front view and formed with a three-dimensional decoration imitating a "mahjong" "tile" on the front surface. And a lower back left decorative board 3561 attached to the front of the unit base 3550 behind the back left lower decorative body 3560 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front. The lower left back decoration unit 3503 can make the lower left lower decoration body 3560 emit light by appropriately emitting the LED of the lower left lower decoration substrate 3561. The lower back left decorative unit 3503 is located behind the upper side unit 2300 when assembled to the game board 5, and can illuminate around the upper side unit 2300 in the game area 5a.

  The back decoration unit 3504 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the base cover 3551 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the decoration of the character “Dokun” is formed. A lower back middle decoration body 3570 having a property, and a lower back middle decoration board 3571 mounted on the front surface of the base cover 3551 behind the back lower middle decoration body 3570 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing. The under-back under-decoration unit 3504 can cause the under-back under-decoration decoration body 3570 to emit light by making the LED of the under-back under-decoration substrate 3571 emit light as appropriate. The lower back middle decoration unit 3504 is located between the lower side unit 2200 and the center role 2500 in the front-view game area 5a when assembled to the game board 5.

  The lower back left ball guiding unit 3505 of the lower back front movable rendering unit 3500 can guide the game balls received in the three general winning openings 2001 of the lower side unit 2200 and discharge them downward. The rear lower left ball guiding unit 3505 is attached to the front surface of the base cover 3551 and has a transparent passage member 3580 having an open front surface, and a transparent flat plate member having the open front surface of the passage member 3580 closed. The vehicle includes a cover 3581 and a side rear decorative substrate 3582 mounted on the front surface of the base cover 3551 behind the passage member 3580 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. In the passage member 3580, a general winning opening sensor 3015 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 in the lower side unit 2200 is attached. In addition, the rear lower left ball guiding unit 3505 is located behind the lower side unit 2200 in a state where the lower unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, and the LED of the rear side decorative board 3582 is appropriately illuminated, thereby lowering the lower side unit 2200. Can be luminous decoration.

  The lower back relay board 3506 of the lower back front movable rendering unit 3500 includes a lower back front first decorative board 3513, a lower back front second decorative board 3522, a lower back front first drive motor 3528, a decorative body elevating detection sensor 3535, The lower back front second drive motor 3552, the unit elevating detection sensor 3557, the lower left back decoration board 3561, the lower back middle decoration board 3571, the side back decoration board 3582, and the rendering drive board 3043 connected to the peripheral control board 1510 Is relaying the connection.

  Next, the operation of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 will be described. As shown in FIG. 251 (a) and the like, in the normal state, the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is located at the lower end, and the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is in the lower back front decorative body unit 3501. The lower back front first decorative body 3510 is hinged so as to descend and is located in front of the lower back front second decorative body 3520. In this state, the first front decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 faces forward.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 249, the tip of the arm portion 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555 of the elevating unit 3502 is located below the shaft hole 3555c, and is attached to the tip of the arm portion 3555d and The unit elevating pin 3556a of the arm reinforcing member 3556 inserted into the elevating slit 3540 of the lower front decoration unit 3501 is located near the right end of the elevating slit 3540 in front view. Further, the guide arm 3561 rotatably attached to the unit base 3550 is in a state of extending substantially horizontally with its tip directed rightward in front view, and is inserted into the guide slit 3561a of the guide arm 3561. The guide boss 3538 of the lower back front decoration unit 3501 is located at the left end in the front view in the guide slit 3561a. In this state, the detection piece 3553a of the second drive gear 3553 is detected by the unit elevation detection sensor 3557.

  In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, in a normal state, the decorative body elevating arm 3553 of the back lower front second decorative body 3520 of the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 has a state in which the tip side extends downward from the rotation center. The decorative body elevating pin 3515 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 inserted into the slit 3533a of the decorative body elevating arm 3553 is located at the end near the center of rotation in the slit 3533a. I have. In this normal state, the detection piece 3516 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is detected by the decorative body up / down detection sensor 3535 of the back lower front second decorative body 3520.

  In this normal state, when assembled on the game board 5, it is located below the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in front view and behind the lower side of the center role 2500, and the back lower front decorative body unit The first front decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 in 3501 is located above the stage 2530.

  In a normal state, the unit raising / lowering arm 3555 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the second drive motor 3552 below the back of the lifting unit 3502 via the second driving gear 3553 and the second transmission gear 3554. Then, the unit elevating pin 3556a at the tip of the arm 3555d revolves around the shaft hole 3555c in the ascending direction. When the unit elevating pin 3556a revolves and ascends, the unit elevating pin 3556a presses the inside of the elevating slit 3540 upward, and the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 ascends. Since the lower-right front decorative body unit 3501 is attached to the unit base 3550 via the slide base 3558, the intermediate slider 3559, and the mounting slider 3560, the right end in the front view rises straight without tilting.

  As the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 moves up, the unit elevating pin 3556a inserted in the elevating slit 3540 slides (moves) inside the elevating slit 3540 to the left in front view. When the unit elevating pin 3556a moves to the left in front view of the lowermost part of the locking projection 3540a projecting downward in the elevating slit 3540, the driving of the lower back front second driving motor 3552 stops. Then, the rotation of the unit elevating arm 3555 (revolution of the unit elevating pin 3556a) is also stopped, and the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is positioned at the raised end by the drive unit 3502 (decorative body unit lifting mechanism 3502A) (first raised position). ) (See FIG. 251 (b)).

  In this state, since the tip of the arm portion 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555 (unit elevating pin 3556a) is located on the upper right of the rotation center of the unit elevating arm 3555 (the shaft hole 3555c) in front view, Due to the weight of the front decoration unit 3501, a rotating moment acts on the tip of the arm portion 3555d to rotate the unit elevating arm 3555 clockwise in front view. Then, as shown in FIG. 250 (c), on the left side of the lock projection 3540a in contact with the unit elevating pin 3556a on the upper side of the elevating slit 3540, a portion on the right side of the abutting portion is Since the unit elevating pin 3556a has penetrated the inside of the boundary line L (indicated by a two-dot chain line in the figure) of the turning range, in order for the lock projection 3540a to revolve downwardly, the penetrating part is required. The lock protrusion 3540a (the lower back front decorative body unit 3501) must be moved upward against the weight of the lower back lower decorative body unit 3501 so that the outer side moves outside the boundary line L of the turning range. The rotational moment acting on the lifting pin 3556a is canceled, and the unit lifting arm 3555 does not rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. It is maintained (locked) in a state positioned.

  In a state where the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the elevating unit 3502, substantially the entire back lower front decorative body unit 3501 is in the center view of the center role 2500 in front view in a state where it is assembled to the game board 5. As a result, the decoration of the first front decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 can be favorably viewed from the player side.

  Subsequently, in a state where the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is located at the rising end, the first lower drive front drive motor 3528 of the lower back front second decorative body 3520 drives the first drive gear 3529 and the transmission first gear 3530. When the decorative body elevating arm 3533 is rotated clockwise in a right side view via the transmission second gear 3531 and the first elevating gear 3532, the decorative object elevating arm 3533 is turned into the slit 3533a by the slit 3533a. The first hinge portion 3514 and the first hinge portion 3514 are arranged such that the decorative body elevating pin 3515 of the inserted lower back front first decorative body 3510 is pressed forward, and the lower side of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 moves forward and upward. The lower back front first decorative body 3510 is hinged about the second hinge 3524.

  Then, when the decorative body elevating arm 3533 rotates approximately 180 degrees clockwise in the right side view, the rotation of the lower back front first drive motor 3528 stops, and the lower back front first decorative body 3510 moves to the lower back front second. The state is located above the decorative body 3520 (up position or open position). In this state, the first front decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 that initially faces forward is in a rearward facing state, and instead, the rear lower back front second decorative body 3520 is facing rearward. The second back decoration member 3512 facing the second decoration member 3521 faces forward with the front surface located above the second decoration member 3521 on substantially the same plane as the second decoration member 3521. As a result, the decoration of the first back decoration member 3512 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3521 are united to form one large decoration (decoration of the character “Wait”) (FIG. 251 ( c)).

  In a state in which the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is raised and the lower back front first decorative body 3510 is raised and rotated by a hinge, the center decorative body 2500 of the center role 2500 in a front view is assembled in the game board 5 in a front view. A substantially lower half of the inside of the frame (the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600) is closed by the lower back front first decorative body 3510 and the lower back front second decorative body 3520 (see FIG. 261).

  In this way, the under-below back movable effect unit 3500 maintains the under-before bottom decorative body unit 3501 stopped at the position of the rising end even when the under-below back second drive motor 3552 is not energized. Therefore, the load acting on the lower back front second drive motor 3552 can be reduced. In addition, since the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is locked in the middle of the unit elevating pin 3556a revolving in the ascending direction, the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is locked when the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is locked at the rising end position. The player can enjoy the movement of the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 without making an unnatural movement such as lowering.

  In addition, in the lower back front decorative body unit 3501, the operation of raising the lower back front first decorative body 3510 is performed by rotating the hinge with respect to the axis extending in the left and right direction to raise the front decorative body unit 3510. Compared to the case where the first decorative body 3510 under the back is visible from the player side as compared with the case where it is made to change every moment, it can be made to stand out, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. The first back decorative member 3512 of the back lower first decorative body 3510 and the lower back front second decorative body 3520 which cannot be viewed in a normal state by opening the lower back lower first decorative body 3510 by rotating the hinge. Can be shown, and the player can be surprised.

[Direction on game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 252 to 261. FIG. 252 shows a state in which the first decorative body behind the back and the second decorative body behind the back are rotated together at a normal position in the movable effect unit behind the back of the back unit, with the second decorative surface facing the front. It is a front view of the game board shown. FIG. 253 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the first decorative body and the second decorative body after the back of the movable unit are closed and the first decorative surface of the first decorative body after the bottom is turned to the front. In the state, slide to the approximate center in the left-right direction in the game area, and slide the first upper decorative body and the upper left second decorative body in the game area to the center in the horizontal direction in the gaming area. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state moved. FIG. 254 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the lower back lower first decorative body is opened by rotating the hinge from behind the back lower movable effect unit from the state of FIG. 253 to the lower back lower first decorative body and the lower back lower second decorative body. With the decorative surface facing the front, the back upper left second decorative body of the back upper left movable rendering unit is hinged and opened to open the back upper left first decorative body fixed decorative member and the back upper left second decorative body It is a front view of the game board which shows two decoration members in the state which turned to the front. FIG. 255 is a view showing the state in FIG. 253, in which the rear lower first decorative body of the rear lower movable effect unit is hinge-rotated and opened to open the lower second lower decorative first body and the lower rear second decorative body. It is a front view of the game board which shows the decoration surface facing the front.

  FIG. 256 is a front view of the game board in a state where the back left movable decorative body of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit is slid to the appearance position of the right end in front view. FIG. 257 is a front view counterclockwise in which the back upper middle decoration unit of the back upper middle movable effect unit in the back unit is moved to the position of the descending end, and the back upper middle decoration unit extends obliquely downward to the left in front view. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state rotated in the surrounding direction. FIG. 258 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the pair of back upper middle decorations is separated from the state of FIG. 257 and is slid to a position of a half-open middle opening state. FIG. 259 is a front view of the game board in a state where the pair of back upper middle decorations is further separated from the state of FIG. 258 and slid to the fully opened position. FIG. 260 is a front view of the game board in a state in which the lower back front decorative body unit of the lower back front movable effect unit of the back unit is positioned at the rising end. FIG. 261 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the lower back front first decorative body is hinged from the state of FIG. 260 to ascend above the back lower front second decorative body.

  In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 201 and the like, the game board 5 of the present embodiment displays the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 through the frame of the center role 2500. , From the player side (front). In this normal state, the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 that are hinged and rotatable behind the back unit 3000 and the movable effect unit 3100 are closed, and the back lower back first decorative body is closed. Only the first decorative surface 3111 of 3110 is directed forward so as to be visible from the player side, and the display of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 of the first decorative surface 3111 is on the right side of the lower right side of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The screen is facing forward.

  In a normal state, the upper back left first decorative body 3210 and the upper back left second decorative body 3220 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are rotated by the hinge to form the upper back left first decorative body 3210. In a folded state in which the back upper left second decorative body 3220 is located in front of the fixed decorative member 3211, it is located behind the rear left middle decorative unit 3050 which is the left end in front view with respect to the left and right sliding direction. The front side is invisiblely blocked from the player side by the back left middle decoration unit 3050.

  Further, in the normal state, the back left movable decorative body 3321 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit is located behind the back left fixed decorative body 3310 which is the left end in front view with respect to the left and right sliding direction. A part of the back left fixed decorative body 3310 faces slightly forward through the frame of the center role 2500. Also, in the normal state, the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 of the back unit 3000 is located at the rising end above the upper side of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, A part of the front part of the center role 2500 is visibly visible forward.

  Further, in a normal state, in the back lower front decoration body unit 3501 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the lower back front first decorative body 3510 is rotated in front of the rear lower back front second decorative body 3520 by hinge rotation. The lower end of the front and rear lower decorative body unit 3501 does not face forward from within the frame of the center role 2500 in a state where it is folded so as to descend to the side, and the lower end of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is lower than the lower side in front view. It is located in.

  The game board 5 is positioned behind the back of the back unit 3000 in accordance with a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result which is drawn by receiving a game ball in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. The movable rendering unit 3100, the back upper left movable rendering unit 3200, the back left movable rendering unit 3300, the back upper middle movable rendering unit 3400, and the back lower front movable rendering unit 3500 perform a predetermined rendering (movable rendering or luminous rendering). .

  Specifically, for example, as an effect using the under-rear-movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the under-rear second decorative body 3120 is viewed in plan by the under-rear second drive motor 3137 of the rotary drive unit 3130. By rotating in the clockwise direction, the second decorative surface 3122 facing backward is turned to the front (see FIG. 252). At this time, the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 that is closed and located in front of the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 is pressed by the back lower back second decorative body 3120 and rotates together. Thereby, the second back decoration 3120 along with the first back decoration 3110 is located in front of the lower right corner of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display 1600 when viewed from the front, and is positioned on the main liquid crystal display 1600. A part of the displayed effect image is obstructed, so that the lower back second decorative body 3120 can be made more prominent, and “Tenun” applied to the second decorative surface 3122 of the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 Can be visually recognized by the player, and the expectation for the game can be increased by making the player think that something is good.

  In addition, as an effect (movable effect) using the rear lower movable effect unit 3100 and the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000, the rear lower movable effect unit 3100 includes a third rear lower position of the slide unit 3150. With the drive motor 3155, the rotary drive unit 3130 is slid to the position of the left end in the front view with the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 closed, and the rotation drive unit 3130 The first back decoration body 3110 is slightly rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the back bottom first drive motor 3134 so that the first decoration surface 3111 (the sub liquid crystal display device 3114) faces the front. At the same time, in the back upper left movable rendering unit 3200, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are moved by the back upper left second decorative body 3220 by the back upper left second drive motor 3245 of the ride unit 3240. With the first decorative member 3221 closed toward the decorative body 3210 and with the first decorative member 3221 facing the front, it is slid together with the back upper left second decorative body 3220 to the right end position in front view (see FIG. 253).

  In the state shown in FIG. 253, an axis extending vertically for hinge-rotating the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the lower back lower movable effecting unit 3100, and a back upper left A vertically extending axis for hinge-rotating the back upper left second decorative body 3220 with respect to the back upper left first decorative body 3210 of the movable effect unit 3200 is located coaxially and the left and right sides of the game area 5a. It is almost the same as the center of the direction. In this state, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a state in which the back lower first decorative body 3110 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are obliquely arranged within the frame of the center role 2500 in front view. Is located in front of. Thereby, the player can be surprised by the movement of the first back decoration 3110 to the center side and the appearance of the back upper left second decoration 3220.

  Then, in a state where the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the upper back left second decorative body 3220 are moved to the center in the left-right direction (the state of FIG. 253), the rotary drive unit 3130 in the lower back lower movable effect unit 3100 The lower back lower first decorative body 3110 folded by the lower back lower first drive motor 3134 is rotated clockwise in plan view so as to open forward from the lower back lower second decorative body 3120, The rear first decorative body 3110 is arranged on the left side of the rear second decorative body 3120, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are directed to the front, and the rear upper left of the rotary drive unit 3230 in the rear upper left movable effect unit 3200. The upper back left second decorative body 3220 folded by the first drive motor 3235 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view so as to open forward from the back upper left first decorative body 3210, and A back on the left second decorative body fixing decorative member 3211 side by side 3220 on the right side of the first decorative body 3210 directs the second decorative member 3222 on the front (see Figure 254).

  In the state of FIG. 254, the first lower decorative body 3110 and the second lower decorative body 3120 are arranged side by side on the left and right of the rear lower movable effect unit 3100, and are arranged on the left and right of the upper rear left movable effect unit 3200. The back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are in a state of being united vertically in the center of the frame of the center role 2500 in a front view, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 It covers almost the front of the display screen. In addition, the second decorative surfaces 3111 and 3121 of the back lower first decorative body 3110 and the back lower second decorative body 3120 of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 facing the front, and the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 Due to the decorations applied to the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the second decorative member 3222 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220, the vertically written "Johnsei" character is displayed by the player. It becomes visible from the side. As a result, a large decorative body appears in the frame of the center role 2500 (in front of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600), giving a great impact to the player and giving a chance to “big hit game” or the like. Can be strongly suggested, and the sense of expectation for the game can be increased.

  By the way, in the above description, the effect of simultaneously opening the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 of the lower back lower movable unit 3100 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 has been described. As shown at 255, only the first back decoration body 3110 of the back lower movable effect unit 3100 may be opened first. As a result, the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 of the rear lower back movable rendering unit 3100 are first opened by hinge rotation, and their second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are turned to the front. Then, the character of "Holy" becomes visible first. At this time, since the cut-out decoration 3170 such as “one” is provided above the character “holy”, the player is provided with a decoration as a set to complete the cut-out decoration 3170 above this character. The player can be made to recognize that there is a (cutout decoration 3260), and determine whether or not the decoration that forms the pair appears (whether or not the back upper left second decorative body 3220 is hinged and opened) to determine the player. This makes it possible for the player to make a throbbing and throbbing, thereby increasing the expectation of the player.

  As an effect using the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is slid to the appearance position on the right side in front view by the back left drive motor 3333 of the back left drive unit 3330. In this state, most of the frame-shaped back left movable decorative body 3320 located directly behind the back left fixed decorative body 3310 is located on the right side of the back left fixed decorative body 3310 in front view within the frame of the center role object 2500. And is visible from the player side (see FIG. 256). In this state, when a predetermined effect image is displayed in a region corresponding to the inside of the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320 on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 disposed at the rear, it is possible for the player to An illusion can be provided that the effect image is displayed in the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320. As shown in the figure, the back left movable decorative body 3320 has the same size and the same decoration as the back lower back first decorative body 3110 in the back lower movable effect unit 3100, so that the back left movable body 3320 is provided. When the decorative body 3320 is made to appear, it is illusioned that another liquid crystal display device has appeared on the left side so as to be paired with the first decorative body 3110 (sub-liquid crystal display device 3114) after the right lower back, and the back and left movable. The effect image displayed on each of the decorative body 3320 and the back lower first decorative body 3110 can be greatly enjoyed.

  Further, as an effect using the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, the back upper middle rotation unit 3460 is moved in the counterclockwise direction in front view by the back upper middle second drive motor 3443 of the back upper middle drive unit 3440. , The back upper middle decoration unit 3410 attached to the end thereof is positioned at the lower end, and the back upper middle decoration unit is driven by the back upper middle drive unit 3463 of the back upper middle rotation unit 3460. 3410 is rotated to a counterclockwise rotation end. In this state, the center of the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is located substantially at the center in the frame of the center role 2500 in front view, and the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 extends diagonally with its right end raised. (FIG. 257). As a result, the middle back decoration unit 3410 located above the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 descends to the center position while rotating, and the movement causes the middle back decoration unit to move the player. Attention can be paid to the unit 3410, and the movement of the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 in a form reminiscent of the "thousand-point stick" of "Mahjong" makes it seem that there is something good, and expects a game. The feeling can be enhanced.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 257, the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is closed by the back upper middle drive motor 3420 from the state in which it is positioned at the lower end and extends obliquely. The pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411 are slid in directions away from each other to bring them into an intermediate open state. In this state, as shown in FIG. 258, from between the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411, the center decorative portion 3412a and the four center horizontal decorative portions 3412b of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 are Since the player faces the front, he can remind the player of the "5,000-point stick" of "Mahjong". The feeling can be further enhanced.

  When the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 is further slid from the state shown in FIG. 258 by the first upper back drive motor 3420 in a direction in which the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411 are separated from each other, as shown in FIG. The middle decoration part 3412a, the center horizontal decoration part 3412b, the middle decoration part 3412c, and the end decoration part 3412d of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 all face forward from between the back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411. The player will be able to remind the player of the "Mahjong" "man point stick" because the player is in a state of "Mahjong" and will be convinced that the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that has been drawn is a "big hit" Is possible, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  In addition, as an effect using the back lower front movable effecting unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is hinged to the front of the lower back front second decorative body 3520 and is folded. Then, the lower back lower decorative body unit 3501 is raised from the lower end position to the higher end position by the lower back lower second drive motor 3552 of the lifting unit 3502. In a state in which the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the lifting unit 3502, substantially the entire lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is positioned within the frame of the center role 2500 when viewed from the front. The decoration of the first front decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 can be viewed well from the user side (see FIG. 260). As a result, the lower back front first decorative body 3510 rises from below and covers the lower front part of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, so that it is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, and to expect a sense of the game. Can be raised. Although a detailed illustration is omitted, the first front decorative member 3511 of the back lower front first decorative body 3511 is decorated with a plurality of “mahjong” “tiles” arranged side by side. When the front decorative member 3511 is raised and becomes visible, it is possible to entertain and enjoy the illusion that the player is arranging his or her tiles.

  Then, in a state in which the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is raised to the position of the rising end by the raising / lowering unit 3502, the lower back front first drive motor 3528 of the lower back front second decorative body 3520 (decorative body lifting mechanism 3501A). By rotating the hinge with respect to the axis extending to the left and right so that the lower back front first decorative body 3510 rises and positioning it above the back lower front second decorative body 3520, the front lower back front that has not been seen before can be obtained. The upper part of the second decorative member 3521 of the second decorative body 3520 and the first back decorative member of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 are vertically arranged. In this state, when viewed from the front, substantially the lower half of the inside of the frame of the center role 2500 (the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600) is closed with the lower back front first decorative body 3510 and the lower back front second decorative body 3520. In this state, the decoration of the first back decoration member 3512 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3521 are united to form one large decoration (decoration of the character of “Wait”) (FIG. 261). See). As a result, the first front decorative member 3511 on which a plurality of “Mahjong tiles” are decorated left and right is hinged about an axis extending left and right, and the characters “wagyo” meaning “finished” , The player can be convinced that the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected for the player is a "big hit". Can be increased.

[Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 262 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game machine 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during a game based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 or a liquid crystal display based on a command from the peripheral control unit 1511. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling the display of the effect image on the device 244 or the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls payout of game balls and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls launching of game balls by rotating the handle lever 504.

[Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor, which is not shown in detail but is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. An MPU, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids The circuit includes a circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 2104 for detecting a game ball received in the first starting port 2002, and a second starting port sensor for detecting a game ball received in the second starting port 2004. 2551, a general winning opening sensor 3015 for detecting a gaming ball received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2547 for detecting a gaming ball passing through the gate section 2003, and detecting a gaming ball received in the first winning opening 2005 A first big winning opening sensor 2114, a second upper winning opening 2006a serving as a second winning opening 2006, and a second upper winning opening sensor 2554 for detecting a game ball received in the second lower winning opening 2006b. Detection signals from the second lower winning a prize mouth sensor 2557, a magnetic detection sensor for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the like are respectively the main control I / O. It is input via the port.

  The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the starting port solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, the second upper attacker solenoid 25553 and a drive signal to the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, and a first special symbol display, a second special symbol display, and a first special symbol memory display of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port. , A drive signal is output to a second special symbol storage display, a normal symbol display, a normal symbol storage display, a game status display, a round display, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the second starting opening sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening. The sensor 2557 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, whereas the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate unit 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, Also, detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2547 frequently occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. In addition, when an advantageous game state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are opened, and the game ball frequently enters. The detection of a game ball by the first special winning opening sensor 2114, the second special winning opening sensor 2554, and the second special winning opening sensor 2557 frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and long life are also used for the first special winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper special winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower special winning opening sensor 2557. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball does not frequently enter, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3015 does not frequently occur. Therefore, as the general winning opening sensor 3015, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used.

  Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to control of the game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The information is transmitted to the control unit 1511. The main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511, as will be described in detail later.

  As will be described later in detail, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from a power supply board in the power supply board box 930. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. ). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM during the power-off process even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages fall below the power failure warning voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

[Payout control board]
A payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls and the like is not shown in detail, but performs a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, a firing control by a firing solenoid 682, and a ball by a ball feed solenoid 551. A launch control unit 953 for performing feed control, an error LED display for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail 803, a ball guiding unit 820, and a ball removal switch for discharging the game balls in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 to start a ball removal operation.

[Payout control unit]
A payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 951 is not shown in detail, but is a microcontroller having a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. The payout control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM, as well as functions for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via a payout control I / O port. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch input from the dispensing control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, Detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

  Detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port. You.

  Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch that detects the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port and indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or, the number of balls actually paid out is output to an external terminal board via a payout control I / O port. This external terminal board is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 and the like.

  The error LED display is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The following are the contents displayed and notified by the error LED display. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 1310 Is notified that the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 951 is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the payout device 830), and when the number “2” is displayed, it is “ball watching” (specifically, the blade). Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout blade 839 and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passages 381d and 382d of the payout device 830 to notify that the payout blade 839 is difficult to rotate. Is displayed Indicates that "counter switch error" (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842), and the number "5" is displayed. Indicates that a retry error has occurred (specifically, that the number of retries in the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and when the number “6” is displayed, indicates “full”. (Specifically, the game balls stored in the foul cover unit 520 are full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535), and the number “7” is displayed. When the number is "9" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (electrical connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit). It has informed the message indicating "stock" (specifically, that has reached yet the number sphere ball speed is predetermined for the game ball is not paid out).

  The ball lending request signal from the ball lending button 332 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 333 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial manner, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU. Is done. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card in accordance with the number of the borrowed game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the display unit 334. 334 is entered and displayed.

[Launch control unit]
Although not shown in detail, a firing control unit 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 551 is a firing control input to which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are input. Circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a based on the clock signal, and a firing reference pulse And a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 551 based on the firing reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls per minute are launched toward the gaming area 5a, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit, A ball feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

  Regarding the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle lever 504, and a stop for detecting whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. After the detection signal from the button is input to the firing control input circuit, it is input to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle operation sensor 507 for electrically adjusting the strength of the game ball to hit the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  The firing reference pulse is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit, based on a signal from the handle operation sensor 507, based on a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle lever 504. As a result, the output is output to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball-feeding solenoid 551 in response to the input of the ball-feeding reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to drop. One ball is received in the feeding unit 540, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to send the received game ball to the hitting ball firing device 680 side. As described above, while the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 682 is variably controlled, the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

  The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. With this capacitor, the dispensing control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the dispensing control board 951 in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951.

[Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 262, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on the control data from the peripheral control section 1511. , A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244.

[Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit 1511 for performing effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but is a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance. And a sound ROM storing sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 is provided. A game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to the effect drive board 3043, or the game board. The game board-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided in the game board 5 is transmitted from the game board decoration drive board serial I / O port to the effect drive board 3043, Door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a vibrating device 242 and a door lower right drive motor 272 provided on the frame 3, and various components of the door frame 3. Door-side drive light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation light-up signal to a color LED or the like provided on the board; The control data (display command) indicating a screen transmitted from the port to the door frame 3 side or displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal display control unit. In addition to transmitting the control signal to the sound source 1512, the control unit 1510 outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the effect drive board 3043 mounted on the rear surface of the back box. . Further, detection signals from the touch panel 246 of the effect operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 and the effect button pressing sensor 258 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 Monitors operation.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and outputs music and music according to various effects from speakers 921 provided on the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and the like. Control is performed so that sound effects and the like flow. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In this embodiment, a plurality of speakers on the side of the door frame 3 and a low-range speaker 921 of the main body frame 4 are provided with sound signals as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or , 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the peripheral control MPU. It diagnoses whether or not its own system is running away by using WDT together.

  A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is performed through a serial input / output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) bits per second (hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, the movable body driving command, and a plurality of commands different from the display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

  This effect drive board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 or receives the game board side lighting / blinking command. A lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decoration board provided in the game board 5.

  The effect drive board 3043 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration device 242 and the door lower right drive motor 272 provided on the door frame 3, the respective drive motors provided on the game board 5, and the like. Or output to

[Direction display control unit]
Next, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 on the peripheral control board 1510 is not illustrated in detail, but is not illustrated as a microprocessor. A display control MPU, a display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (Video Display Processor) for controlling display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and a main liquid crystal display. An image ROM for storing various data of screens displayed on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and an image RAM for transferring and copying various data stored in the image ROM And

  The display control MPU includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the main liquid crystal display 1600. The drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is performed. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. The display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs an interrupt process when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244, as well as control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511. And a plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) corresponding thereto. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines a screen configuration in a time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244. Have been. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured such that when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM, the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order is arranged in chronological order. The non-resident area transfer data includes screen data to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 according to the progress of the schedule data in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The order in which data is transferred is defined.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs the extracted data to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the display control ROM from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and outputs the sprite data to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate. The drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244. When the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 do not receive screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. I do. The VDP employs a line buffer system. The “line buffer method” means that one line of drawing data for drawing the left and right directions of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is held in the line buffer, and the line buffer stores the data. In this method, the held drawing data for one line is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244.

  An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and This affects the speed of drawing on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. Note that sprite data is base data which is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in a compressed state in the image ROM.

  Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the upper liquid crystal display device 244, data for drawing each person is called "sprite". Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of persons on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the house, the mountain, the road, and the like that constitute the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be one sprite. These sprites are set in a position arranged on the screen and in a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite overlapping order”), and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device are set. 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

  Note that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed by using one sprite character. In the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of six sprite characters arranged in a horizontal 2 × vertical 3 or the like are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be represented using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 sequentially set the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front. And a sub-scan which repeats a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction. The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 receive one line of drawing data output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and perform main scanning. When viewed from the front of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 or the upper liquid crystal display device 244, the data is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right. When the output of one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line immediately below as sub scanning, and similarly, drawing data of the next line is input. Then, one line is sequentially read from left to right as viewed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 as main scanning based on the drawing data for the next line. Output to each pixel.

[Game content]
Next, the contents of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 201, 207, 212, 262, and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player rotating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the hitting strength. In addition, the driving strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the rotation amount of the handle lever 504, and the stronger the clockwise rotation, the stronger the ball can be hit, and a maximum of 100 continuous game balls per minute. That is, game balls can be hit at 0.6 second intervals.

  Also, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and a game ball is formed on the obstacle nail. By the contact, the flowing speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nails, a windmill (not shown) which is rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball driven into the upper portion of the center role 2500 enters the front peripheral left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500 to the left in front view, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) , And flows down the area on the left side of the center role 2500. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left area of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500, the game ball passes through the warp passage 2521. It is supplied to the stage 2530 through the guide path 2523 from the warp outlet 2522 opened in the frame of 2500.

  The game ball supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and the central guiding portion 2531 at the center in the left-right direction or the side guiding portions 2532 at the left and right thereof. Is emitted backward from any of the. When the game ball is released from the central guiding portion 2531 of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, the game released from the central guiding portion 2531 because the central guiding portion 2531 is located immediately above the first starting port 2002. The ball is accepted in the first starting port 2002 with a high probability. When game balls are received in the first opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the side guiding portion 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the first big winning port 2005 in the open state, or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed to the left side of the center role 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2302 of the upper side unit 2300, and the general winning opening of the lower side unit 2200 There is a possibility that it will be accepted in 2001, the first starting port 2002 or the like. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, a game ball hit on the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500 (struck). ), And enters the upper right circulation space 2541 of the right hitting game area 2540. Although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in the upper right circulation space 2541, and a game ball contacts the obstacle nail and circulates while changing its flowing direction in various ways. In the upper right circulation space 3541, a gate portion 2003 is provided at an upper part, and a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004 which is normally closed by a second starting opening door member 2549 are provided at a lower part.

  The game ball that has flowed down the upper right circulation space 2541 enters the lower right circulation space 2543 through the right flow passage 2542 on the downstream side. The gaming ball that has entered the lower right circulation space 2543 is a second upper winning opening that closes the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b arranged side by side as a second winning opening 2006. The upper surface of the door member 2552 and the second lower winning opening door member 2555 passes through the second attacker passage 2543a forming the bottom surface, and enters the gaming area 5a from the left end of the lower left emission plate portion 2559 in front view. Released. The downstream end (discharge plate portion 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball is directed to the first big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100, and when the first big winning opening 2005 is in the open state. When the game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is received in the first special winning opening 2005 with a high probability.

  The game balls flowing through the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right flow space 2543 flow down while the increase in the flow speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In rare cases, in the lower right circulation space 2543, the game ball may enter the discharge passage 2543b branched near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a. It is discharged out of the game board 5 from the second out port 2543c without being returned inside.

  When a game ball hitting right and entering the upper right circulation space 2541 passes through the gate unit 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, the ordinary random number updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310 , One ordinary random number is acquired, and the acquired ordinary random number is compared with a predetermined ordinary hit determination table to perform an ordinary lottery. If the normal lottery result of this normal lottery becomes “normal hit” when the time-saving control described later is not executed, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates only once in the counterclockwise direction in front view to rotate the second lottery. The starting port 2004 is opened, and game balls can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time reduction control is executed, the lottery is performed to determine which of the “normal hit”, the “second normal hit”, the “second normal hit”, and the “third normal hit” in the normal lottery. Then, if the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is any of “first normal hit”, “second normal hit”, or “third normal hit” when the time saving control is executed, the second start-up door member 2549 is activated. After turning in the counterclockwise direction to open the second starting port 2004 in a front view, a state in which game balls can be received in the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period is set, and then a front view is performed. A predetermined number of times of opening / closing control (5 in this example) in which the second starting port 2004 is closed by rotating in the counterclockwise direction to make it impossible to receive game balls in the second starting port 2004. Times). When the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is “first normal hit”, “0.3 seconds” is set as each of the five times in which the second starting port 2004 is ready to accept game balls. , "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery becomes "second normal hit" “0.3 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”, “1.1 seconds”, and “0.28 seconds” as five periods in which the second starting port 2004 is in a state in which game balls can be accepted , "0.3 seconds", and when the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary lottery is "third ordinary hit", the second starting port 2004 is set to a state in which game balls can be received. The periods are “0.3 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”, “0.3 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”, “1.1 seconds”, and “second normal hit” and “third normal”. Ri "In advantageous to the player than the" first normal per "has become a (acceptance of game balls to the second start-up port 2004 is easy) Atari. When game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. You.

  In the present embodiment, in the variation display of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the passing of the game ball through the gate unit 2003, the ordinary symbol is displayed after the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started. A certain amount of time is set before the stop display (until the normal lottery result is suggested) (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). In the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 turns to be in an open state after the elapse of the normal fluctuation time. During execution of time-saving control described later, control for reducing the normal fluctuation time is executed as compared with normal (a state in which time-saving control is not executed). Further, the opening time during which the second starting port door member 2549 is rotated to open the second starting port 2004 may be changed according to the gaming state. For example, time saving control is executed. When there is no time saving control, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 may be changed to a longer time than when the time saving control is executed.

  In addition, during the period from when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 to when the normal symbol fluctuated and displayed on the normal symbol display is stopped and displayed (until the normal lottery result is suggested), a new game ball is input to the gate unit. After passing through 2003, the normal symbol display cannot start a new variable display of the normal symbol. Therefore, the start of the variable display of the normal symbol is continued until the previous variable display of the normal symbol is completed (the normal lottery result is displayed). (Until the suggestion ends). Specifically, the ordinary random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003 by the gate sensor 2547 is stored, and the state in which the ordinary symbol variation display can be started is obtained. Until the start of the change display of the normal symbol is held. Note that the number of ordinary random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is up to four, and for more than that, even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without being retained. . This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, the pachinko machine 1 updates the game ball in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. By obtaining one first special random number from one special random number and comparing the obtained first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit" , "Small hit", etc.), a lottery of the first special lottery result is performed. Then, based on the lottery result of the first special lottery, the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined variation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the first special lottery result is obtained. (Indicating the first special symbol after the variable display and then displaying the stop symbol according to the first special lottery result) to indicate to the player the first special lottery result. In addition, the first special lottery result which is drawn when the game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 includes “out”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “8R big hit”, and “10R big hit”. Yes, the acquired first special random number is compared with the jackpot determination table to determine which of these is the case. Further, after the jackpot game, a normal (low probability state: with a probability of about 1/395 in this example) Probability improvement control (high probability state (also called probable change state): in this example, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/44) that improves the probability of winning a jackpot (winning probability) rather than the jackpot. Whether or not to execute the time-saving jackpot, and whether or not to execute the time-saving control (time-saving state) for shortening the fluctuation time more than usual when at least the first special lottery result is unsuccessful (time-saving big hit). Or time reduction control Period to execute: a (time-reduction times special symbol (number of times of the change in the first special punching pattern and the second special symbol)), so that also is determined. Note that the winning probability of "small hit" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (about 1/300 in this example).

  When the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in the predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310 is selected. Is obtained, and the acquired second special random number is compared with a predetermined jackpot determination table to obtain an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", "small hit", etc.) that is advantageous to the player. The lottery of the result of the second special lottery which generates the item (1) is performed. Then, based on the selected second special lottery result, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined variation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the second special lottery result is obtained. Is displayed in a lighting manner according to (the second special symbol is variably displayed, and then a stop symbol corresponding to the second special lottery result is displayed) to indicate the second special lottery result to the player. In addition, the second special lottery result, which is drawn when a game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, includes “out”, “2R big hit”, “4R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “6R big hit”, There are "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", and "16R jackpot", and the acquired second special random number is compared with the jackpot determination table to determine which of them is the normal random number. Low-probability state: Probability improvement control (high-probability state (also referred to as probable state), which increases the probability of winning a jackpot (winning probability) rather than winning a jackpot with a probability of approximately 1/395 in this example) In this case, whether or not to win the jackpot with a probability of about 1/44) is executed (whether or not the jackpot is a probability variable jackpot). (Time saving ) To be executed (whether or not a time saving big hit) and a period for executing the time saving control (the number of time savings: a special symbol (the number of times the first special hit symbol and the second special symbol change)) are also determined. It has become.

  When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state. After the elapse of the predetermined fluctuation time, the eight LEDs of the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are displayed in a lighting manner according to the special lottery result, and then the first big winning opening Either 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 can receive game balls in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 while the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is in an open state, a payout device is provided by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. From 830, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 11 when a game ball is received in the first winning opening 2005, or 15 when a game ball is received in the second winning opening 2006) Is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are capable of accepting game balls, by allowing the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 to receive game balls, a large number of games can be achieved. The ball can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit”, the first big winning opening 2005 plays the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern of closing after being in the acceptable open state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is “4R jackpot”, “5R jackpot”, “6R jackpot”, “7R jackpot”, “8R jackpot”, “10R jackpot”, or “16R jackpot”, the first big winning opening A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 becomes an open state in which game balls can be received, or the first special winning opening 2005 is predetermined. When either the number (for example, 7) of game balls is accepted or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted in the second special winning opening 2006, the condition is satisfied. A predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds) of repeating the opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) in which the game ball cannot be received in a closed state is repeated. For example, 4 rounds for “4R jackpot”, 5 rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 16 rounds for “16R jackpot” are repeated, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit” (the first big winning opening 2005 has a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds)). In the meantime, in the opening / closing pattern in which the game ball is opened after the game ball can be received and then closed, it is difficult to substantially allow the game ball to enter the first special winning opening 2005. On the other hand, the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is “4R jackpot”, “5R jackpot”, “6R jackpot”, “7R jackpot”, “8R jackpot”, “10R jackpot”, “16R jackpot” (A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which game balls can be received, or the first special winning opening 2005 Either a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls is accepted or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted in the second special winning opening 2006. When such a condition is satisfied, in the opening / closing pattern in which the game ball cannot be received in the closed state), it is easy to cause the game ball to enter the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006. If the special lottery result is “4R jackpot”, “5R jackpot”, “6R jackpot”, “7R jackpot”, “8R jackpot”, “10R jackpot”, or “16R jackpot”, the above first big prize A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 becomes an open state in which game balls can be received, or the first special winning opening 2005 is determined in advance. Either a certain number (for example, seven) of game balls are accepted or a predetermined number (for example, ten) of game balls are accepted in the second special winning opening 2006. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening / closing pattern for making the game balls unacceptable to be closed may be set as a substantial special lottery result, and a predetermined number (for example, , 7) When one of the conditions of accepting a game ball or accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls into the second special winning opening 2006 is satisfied, the game ball cannot be closed. The opening / closing pattern to be set and the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit” (the first special winning opening 2005 is set to a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds) During this period), a plurality of rounds including an opening / closing pattern of opening and closing the game ball after the game ball can be received may be provided. For example, a special lottery result “8R big hit with 4Rs” is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls is accepted in the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening is set. If a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be accepted to 2006 or if any of the conditions is satisfied, the open / close pattern of closing the game balls in an unacceptable closed state is repeated four times. The opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit” (for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds) An opening / closing pattern in which the game ball is opened after the game ball can be received and then closed) may be repeated four times.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, the second special winning opening 2006 is composed of a second upper special winning opening 2006a and a second lower special winning opening 2006b arranged side by side, and the second special winning opening 2006 is used. In the case of the "big hit", for example, in the first round (1R), the second upper winning prize opening 2006a is opened so that the game ball can be accepted, and the ball is closed by satisfying the condition that the game ball cannot be accepted, and then the game ball can be accepted next. Until (interval), the second round (2R) in which the second lower winning opening 2006b is opened and game balls can be accepted is started, and when the second lower winning opening 2006b becomes unacceptable, In the meantime, since the interval period has elapsed, the second upper winning opening 2006a is opened again so that game balls can be received. Then, the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds are consumed. Accordingly, in the second attacker passage 2543a, during the "big hit", either the second upper special winning opening 2006a or the second lower special winning opening 2006b is in a state in which a game ball can be received. When a game ball is distributed in the second attacker passage 2543a by right-handing, the game ball is always accepted in the second big winning opening 2006, so that the player can entertain the player without losing the game ball. Can be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, for some of the above-described types of jackpots, whether or not to execute the above-mentioned time-saving control after the end of the jackpot game is made different depending on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning. For example, when the first special lottery result is an 8R normal big hit in which the probability improvement control is not executed after the big hit game in the non-time saving state (a state where the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is the 8R normal big hit in the time saving state (a state in which the time saving control is executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. When the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit in which the probability improvement control is not executed after the big hit game in the non-time saving state (a state where the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit in a time saving state (a state where the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. In a low probability non-time saving state (a state in which both the probability improvement control and the time reduction control are not executed: also referred to as a normal state), the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game. If it is a 2R probability change big hit, the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, in the state where the probability improvement control is executed or the time saving control is executed, that is, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game in a state other than the normal state. If it is a big hit, the time reduction control is executed after the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display executed by the first special symbol display when the game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 and the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004 are displayed. The variable display of the second special symbol executed by the second special symbol display is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol which is fluctuated and displayed on the first special symbol display by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 is stopped (until the first special lottery result is suggested) and the first special symbol is indicated. Until the second special symbol which is fluctuated and displayed on the second special symbol display by stopping the game ball into the second starting port 2004 is stopped and displayed (until the second special lottery result is suggested), the first start is performed. When a new game ball is received in the mouth 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display starts a new variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Because it is not possible to change the display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) until the change display of the previous special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) ends (first special lottery Until the results and suggestions for the second special lottery result are completed. ) Is set to be pending. Specifically, the first special opening random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on detecting the game ball received in the first starting opening 2002 by the first starting opening sensor 2104, and the second starting opening sensor 2551 And the second special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball accepted by the second starting port 2004 by the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol). The change display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of symbols can be started. The maximum number of the first special random number and the second special random number that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is up to four, respectively. Even if the ball is accepted, it is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall due to accumulation of reservations. Further, the first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are digested with priority given to the second special random number. That is, regardless of the timing at which game balls are accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, if the second special random number is stored and the start of the change display of the second special symbol is suspended, the first special random number is stored. The variable display of the second special symbol is executed prior to the symbol.

  This special lottery result is indicated by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) and the main liquid crystal display 1600 (the sub liquid crystal display 3114 may also be used). The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is made by repeatedly turning on and off the eight LEDs constituting the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) for a predetermined time. It blinks, then stops in a predetermined lighting mode, and suggests a special lottery result by a combination of LEDs that are lit at the time of the stop.

  On the other hand, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled based on a control signal (a fluctuation pattern command, a determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is displayed by the effect image. Suggestions are made. Specifically, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, each of a series of decorative symbol rows including a plurality of different symbols is displayed in a plurality of columns (for example, three rows of a left decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a right decorative symbol). The decorative display of the decorative pattern row is started, and then the display is stopped sequentially (in this example, the decorative display is stopped in the order of the left decorative pattern → the right decorative pattern → the middle decorative pattern), and finally all the decorative pattern rows are stopped. When displayed, the lottery result of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed is suggested to the player side. In other words, a plurality of decorative symbol rows change according to the special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) acquired at the time of the start winning prize occurrence. After being displayed, an effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to indicate the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is displayed. In addition, the decorative design displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is better than the first special design variably displayed on the first special design display and the second special design variably displayed on the second special design display. In general, the player will pay attention to the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 because it is large and easy to see.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the symbol row fluctuates and the final image is changed) (The time until is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying an effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative body of the center role object 2500, the back left The interior decoration unit 3050, the rear lower back movable rendering unit 3100, the back upper left movable rendering unit 3200, the back left movable rendering unit 3300, the back upper middle movable rendering unit 3400, and the back lower front movable rendering unit 3500 are appropriately used. It is possible to perform a luminous effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of a control process executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly, the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 263 (a) is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a control process performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 263 (a), the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment first stores the data in various registers and RAM as a process in step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch is operated. Initialize the data that has been set. The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. The RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, one second) has elapsed since the power was turned on. When the determination is made, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize data stored in various registers and the RAM of the main control MPU.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process of storing information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) in the RAM of the main control MPU is executed. If the RAM clear switch has not been operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. When the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 is set to the initial state by executing the initialization processing without executing the recovery processing.

  Next, as a process of step S2, a random number which is a number updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment uses a special random number (first special symbol) to be subjected to a lottery process for a display mode when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped in variable display. Random numbers, second special random numbers), variable random numbers used in the lottery process for the variable time required for the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the variable display of the special symbols. Reach (variable display of decorative symbols executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600) (a state in which the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the same symbol and the middle decorative symbol is not yet stopped and displayed, or a left, middle, or left symbol). A state in which the right decorative symbols are displayed in a synchronized manner so as to be all the same symbols). A symbol random number (a first symbol random number, a second symbol random number) to be provided for a lottery process for determining a class, and a lottery process for a hit at the time of the operation trigger of the second starting door member 2549. A random number counter for holding random numbers such as ordinary random numbers is provided.

  In this example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol use a common reach random number, that is, even when the first start port 2002 is started, the second start port 2004 is started. Even in this case, the reach random number is configured to be acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach random number is updated from a different counter. The first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second reach symbol corresponding to the reach determination table to be compared with the obtained reach random number may be different from the first reach determination table. By providing a second reach determination table in which a determination value is set, the execution ratio of the reach effect may be made different.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) which are not related to the random numbers among the random numbers are updated. After the processes in steps S1 and S2 are performed, only the process in step S2 is basically repeatedly performed. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

  FIG. 263 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 263 (b), in this interrupt control, first, register save processing is performed as the processing of step S11. Next, as the processing of step S12, the gate sensor 2547, the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, the Detection signals from various switches, such as a second-prize winning opening sensor 2557 and the above-mentioned general winning opening sensor 3015, are input. Next, as a process of step S13, a random number updating process for updating the value of the random number counter for generating the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-mentioned random numbers, the random numbers (special random numbers, ordinary random numbers) relating to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol are updated. Counter operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this manner, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process according to a display mode at the time of stopping the variable symbol display as the process of step S14. Execute Although the special symbol process process will be described later, here, basically, the special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, the first special symbol process flag) indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is described. The corresponding processing is selectively executed based on the two special symbol process flags.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes, as the process of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process related to a hit at the time of the operation of the second start-up door member 2549. . In the normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the lottery process so that the driving frequency of the second starting port door member 2549 becomes higher during a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game except for some jackpots. (A so-called time-saving state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is increased only for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game, and the ordinary fluctuation time required for displaying the ordinary symbol is changed, and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is determined. , The opening time of the second starting port 2004 is extended, and the number of times the second starting port 2004 is opened is increased to realize such a time-saving state.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the ordinary symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next executes the special symbol process as the process of step S16. Then, processing for transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as the process of step S17, a process of transmitting the command similarly set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the above-described normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs an information output process of outputting data such as hit information (16R big hit, 10R big hit) supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as the process of step S18. .

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper When the detection signals of the special winning opening sensor 2554, the second lower special winning opening sensor 2557, the general winning opening sensor 3015, and the like are in an on state, the payout control is performed so that the prize ball corresponding to those signals is paid out to the player. The payout control command is output to the board 951. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 951 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit to the payout motor 834, and pays out a prize ball to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU of the same main control board 1310 next executes a storage process for checking an increase or decrease in the number of reservations as a process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the drive control of the constantly operating actuator is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is ended when the interrupt is permitted (step S24). It becomes.

  According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process using a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be performed. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers used for the various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 264, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first uses the first starting port sensor 2104 to control the main control MPU. The first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the above-mentioned random number counter on condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S31), and this is obtained from the RAM. A first opening opening passage process, such as storing in a special symbol holding storage area, is executed (step S32). On the condition that the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2551 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is replaced with the random number. A second start opening passage process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit control for controlling the big hit game is performed. The process (Step S40) is executed. In the big hit control process, the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped indicates a "2R probable big hit", "8R normal big hit", and "8R probable big hit". The opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled based on the fact, and the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled based on the fact that the mode suggesting “10R probability change big hit” is obtained. Further, based on the fact that the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "2R normal big hit", opening and closing control of the first big winning opening 2005 is performed, and "4R The second big prize entrance based on the fact that the "probable big hit", "5R probable big hit", "6R probable big hit", "7R probable big hit", "16R probable big hit" and "16R probable big hit" 2006 is opened and closed. In addition, when the big hit game based on the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol has become a mode suggesting the “10R probability big hit”, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol The result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the display is stopped indicates “4R probable big hit”, “5R probable big hit”, “6R probable big hit”, “7R probable big hit”, “8R probable big hit”, “16R probable big hit” When the big hit game based on the fact that the game has ended is completed, the result of the lottery process on the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped during the time reduction state indicates the “8R probable big hit”. When the big hit game based on the game is finished, the lottery process on the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped in a state other than the normal state When the big hit game is terminated based on the result indicating that the result suggests "2R probable big hit", the time saving flag is set to execute the time saving control (control of the time saving state) until the next big hit is achieved. I do. On the other hand, when the big hit game based on the fact that the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol indicates the “8R normal big hit” is ended during the time saving state, after the big hit game The special symbol (first special symbol, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the second special symbol, the second special symbol, The time-saving control (control in the time-saving state) is executed until the number of changes of the two special symbols reaches 72 times. In addition, during the time reduction state, when the big hit game based on the result of the lottery process on the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped indicates a mode indicating “2R normal big hit”, the second special symbol is terminated. According to the lottery result, any one of "18", "36", "54", and "72" is set in the variation counter and the time reduction flag is set, so that a special symbol (first special symbol, The time-saving control (control in the time-saving state) is executed until the number of fluctuations of the two special symbols reaches 18, 36, 54, and 72 times, the number corresponding to the second special lottery result. In addition, a high probability flag is set when a jackpot game based on a probability jackpot (2R probability jackpot, 4R probability jackpot, 5R probability jackpot, 7R probability jackpot, 8R probability jackpot, 10R probability jackpot, 16R probability jackpot) is ended. By doing so, the probability improvement control (control in the high probability state) is executed until the next big hit. The main control MPU controls the high-probability time-saving state if both the high-probability flag and the time-saving flag are set, and enters the high-probability non-time-saving state if only the high-probability flag is set without setting the time-saving flag. If the time-saving flag is set without setting the high-probability flag, the low-probability time-saving state (so-called time-saving state) is controlled. If neither the high-probability flag nor the time-saving flag is set, the low-probability flag is set. Control is performed in a non-time saving state (a so-called normal state).

  On the other hand, if the big hit execution flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being controlled is set (step S36). If it is set, a small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit game is executed. The small hit control process is based on the fact that the result of the lottery process on the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is a mode indicating "small hit". The first winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close.

  If neither the big hit executing flag nor the small hit executing flag is set, the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is “ On condition that it is "0" (step S37), a first special symbol process process including a lottery process related to a display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), and the second special symbol is held. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the storage area is not “0” (step S37), the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is changed. A second special symbol process including a lottery process is executed (step S39). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the first starting port passage processing (step S32).

  Now, in the process of step S31, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 2104 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002, as shown in FIG. 265. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs, as the process of step S41, a counter value by a first special reserved number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area. From the RAM of the main control MPU. Then, based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S41, when it is determined that the number of reserved special first symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly suspend the variable display start of the first special symbol. The processing of S42 to S44 is performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as the process of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S44, each of the random numbers thus obtained is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. To be stored.

  However, in the process of step S41, when it is determined that the reserved number of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the change display start of the first special symbol is not suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S42 to S44, the start of the change display of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

  Further, the main control MPU, based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S43, displays the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol as a big hit or a small hit. Whether or not to perform a reach effect as a game effect to be executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when a big hit or a small hit does not occur, or a mode of the game effect to be executed After performing an effect pre-determination process of determining the pre-determination information such as the type (the type of the fluctuation pattern) before starting the fluctuation display according to the starting winning (step S45), the process ends.

  FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the second starting port passage processing (step S34).

  Now, in the process of step S33, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2551 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, as shown in FIG. 266. First, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU as the process of step S51. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value “4”.

  In the process of step S51, when it is determined that the reserved number of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly set the variable display start of the second special symbol to a suspended state. The processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S52, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as the process of step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, in the process of step S54, each of the random numbers thus obtained is stored in the second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. To be stored.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S51 that the number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value, the start of the change display of the second special symbol is not suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the start of the change display of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

  FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the above-described effect pre-judgment processing (steps S45 and S55). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-judgment processing, the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 268 (A) and the obtained random numbers, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, Whether or not a big hit or a small hit is obtained by comparing with the variable random number, if the big hit is a big hit type, and if the big hit or the small hit is not made, a reach is given as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The effect is executed or the type of the game effect to be executed is specified (step S61).

  In the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first starting port passage process, a high probability flag indicating that the control in the high probability state is being executed is set. If the high probability flag is not set, the high probability jackpot determination value and the first special random number are compared to determine if the high probability flag is set. By comparing with one special random number, it is specified whether or not a big hit is made. The high probability big hit determination value (3857-3946) is set in a high probability big hit determination table (see FIG. 272 (A)) described later and is the same random value as the big hit determination value compared with the first special random number. The large-hit determination value (3937-3946) having a low probability is set in a large-hit determination table (see FIG. 272 (A)) at the low-probability time described later, and is a large-hit determination value to be compared with the first special random number. The random numbers are the same. For this reason, by comparing the first special random number and the pre-determination table in step S61, it is possible to accurately specify whether or not a big hit will occur, and to determine the contents of the game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the game effect. By specifying the type of the fluctuation pattern indicating the period (fluctuation time) in which the effect is executed, any one of "big hits 1 to 12" to be a big hit as pre-judgment information, "outside" and "reach 1 to 4" not to be a big hit Can be classified. In this example, as shown in FIG. 268 (B), the variation pattern, the normal reach variation pattern, the weak SP reach variation pattern, the non-specific strong variation pattern depends on the ratio of the big hit (also referred to as the big hit expectation value or the big hit reliability). A plurality of types of variation patterns of the SP reach variation pattern and a specific strong SP reach variation pattern are provided (exceptional jackpot variation pattern <normal reach variation pattern <weak SP reach variation pattern <strong SP reach variation pattern other than specific) <Specific strong SP reach variation pattern). In addition, the ratio of the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern setting processing described later (the first fluctuation pattern setting processing of step S82 and the second fluctuation pattern setting processing of the second special symbol processing processing) and executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Is inversely proportional to the big hit expected value (outlier variation pattern> normal reach variation pattern> weak SP reach variation pattern> strong SP reach variation pattern other than specific> specific strong SP reach variation pattern). That is, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the outlier variation pattern is executed relatively frequently, while the specific strong SP reach variation pattern is rarely executed.

  In the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first starting port passage process, the same random number is obtained regardless of whether the high probability flag is set. By comparing the small hit determination value set to the numerical value with the first special random number, it is also specified whether or not a small hit occurs. These small hit determination values (3800-3812) at the time of high probability or low probability are set in a large hit determination table (see FIG. 272 (A)) at the time of high probability or low probability, which will be described later. The random number is the same as the small hit determination value to be compared with. For this reason, by comparing the first special random number with the preliminary determination table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not a small hit is to be made, and the “big hit 9 to 12” including the small hit as the preliminary determination information is determined. Can be classified.

  In the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when the second special random number is acquired in step S53 of the second starting port passage process, a high probability flag indicating that the control in the high probability state is being executed is set. If it is set, it is determined whether or not a big hit will occur by comparing the high probability big hit determination value with the second special random number. If the high probability flag is not set, the low probability big hit determination value will be set. And a second special random number to determine whether or not a big hit will occur. The high probability big hit determination value (3857-3946) is set in a high probability big hit determination table (see FIG. 272 (A)) described later and is the same random value as the big hit determination value compared with the second special random number. The large-hit determination value (3937-3946) having a low probability is set in a large-hit determination table (see FIG. 272 (A)) for low-probability at a later-described time, and is used as a large-hit determination value to be compared with the second special random number. The random numbers are the same. For this reason, by comparing the second special random number with the pre-judgment table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not a big hit is to be made, and "big hits 1 to 12" to be a big hit as pre-judgment information, and not to a big hit It can be classified into any of "outside" and "reach 1-4".

  In this embodiment, the effect pre-judgment process executed based on the reception of the game ball in the first starting port 2002 is not executed in the time-saving state (time-saving time) in which the time-saving control is executed. I have. On the other hand, in the effect pre-judgment process executed based on the reception of the game ball in the second starting port 2004, the process is not executed in the non-time reduction state (non-time reduction time) in which the time reduction control is not performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game is controlled to the non-time reduction state, only the effect pre-determination processing based on the reception of the game ball in the first starting port 2002 is executed, and the state is controlled to the time reduction state. In this case, only the effect pre-judgment processing based on the reception of the game ball in the second starting port 2004 is executed.

  In the preliminary judgment table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when it is specified that a big hit is to be made by comparing the first special random number with the preliminary judgment table in step S61, a judgment value indicating which big hit is to be made. If the type of the big hit is specified by comparing the first special pattern random number with the second special random number and the prior determination table, the big hit is determined. The type of the big hit is specified by comparing the value with the second symbol random number. More specifically, a determination value indicating that a big hit of a specific 1 (2R probability variable big hit) by matching with the first special random number is set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 272 (C)) to be described later. It is the same random number as the judgment value (0-16) indicating that it is a specific one big hit among the judgment values compared with one design random number, and when it matches the first special random number, it is a specific 6 (8R probability variable big hit) ) Or a non-specified 2 (8R normal big hit) jackpot is determined in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 272 (C)) described later and compared with the first symbol random number. The same random number value as the judgment value (17-154, 160-199) indicating that it is a specific 6 or non-specific 2 jackpot, and when the first special random number is matched, a specific 7 (10R probability variable jackpot) jackpot The determination value indicating that The same random number value as the determination value (155-159) indicating that it is a specific seven big hit among the determination values set in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 272 (C)) and compared with the first symbol random number Have been.

  Similarly, in the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when it is specified in step S61 that a big hit is to be made by comparing the second special random number with the pre-judgment table, a judgment indicating which big hit is to be made If the type of the jackpot is specified by comparing the value with the second symbol random number, and if it is specified that the jackpot is determined by comparing the second special random number with the pre-determination table, it indicates which jackpot is to be determined. The type of the big hit is specified by comparing the judgment value with the second symbol random number. More specifically, a determination value indicating that a specific 1 (2R probability changing big hit) or a non-specific 1 (2R normal big hit) big hit by matching the second special random number is obtained from a symbol determination table (FIG. 272 ( C)) and the same random number value as the determination value (0-19, 160-199) indicating a specific 1 or non-specific 1 jackpot among the determination values to be compared with the second symbol random number Specified 2 (4R probable big hit), specific 3 (5R probable big hit), specific 4 (6R probable big hit), specific 5 (7R probable big hit), specific 6 (8R probable big hit) The determination value indicating that the big hit is set is a specific 2 to specific 6 big hit among the determination values set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 272 (C)) described later and compared with the second symbol random number. Same as the judgment value (20-55) The determination value indicating that a big hit of a specific 8 (16R probability variable big hit) is obtained by matching with the second special random number is set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 272 (C)) described later. It is the same random number as the determination value (56-159) indicating that it is a specific eight jackpot among the determination values compared with the second symbol random number.

  In the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when it is specified that a big hit is to be made, a plurality of types of reach effects are determined by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. Which of the reach productions is executed to determine a jackpot is specified. Specifically, the determination value (0-4) indicating that the normal reach effect is to be executed at the specific 7 and the specific 8 jackpot is a determination value indicating that the normal reach effect is to be executed among the determination values compared with the variable random number. The determination value (5-29), which is to be the same random value as the value and indicates that a super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation (hereinafter also referred to as a weak SP reach) is to be compared with the variable random number Among the values, the same random number value as the judgment value indicating that the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is to be executed is used, and a specific value among the super reach effect with a high jackpot expectation (hereinafter, also referred to as a strong SP reach) The judgment value (30-216) indicating that a non-super-reach effect (also referred to as a specific strong SP reach) is to be executed is a specific super-reach effect among judgment values compared with the variable random number. A judgment value that is the same random value as the judgment value indicating that a super reach effect with a high jackpot expectation to be executed is performed, and indicates that a specific super reach effect among the super reach effects with a high jackpot expectation is executed. (217-240) is the same random number as the determination value indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the determination values compared with the variable random number.

  Also, in the specific 2 to 6 or non-specific 2 jackpot, the determination value (0-4) indicating that the normal reach effect is to be executed is the determination value indicating that the normal reach effect is to be executed among the determination values compared with the variable random number. The judgment value (5-29), which is a random number value equal to the value and indicates that a super-reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is to be executed, is a super-reach effect with a low jackpot expectation value among judgment values compared with the variable random number. Is determined to be the same as the determination value indicating that the execution is performed, and the determination value (30-216) indicating that a specific super-reach effect other than the specific super-reach effect is executed among the super-reach effects having a high jackpot expectation is determined by the variable random number The same random number as the judgment value indicating that a super reach effect with a high jackpot expectation other than the specific super reach effect among the judgment values to be compared is executed, A judgment value (217-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among super reach effects having a high degree of expectation indicates that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among judgment values compared with the variable random number. The random number is the same as the judgment value.

  Further, in the specific 1 or non-specific 1 jackpot, the determination value (0-89) indicating that the normal reach effect is to be executed is the judgment value indicating that the normal reach effect is to be executed among the judgment values compared with the variable random number. The judgment value (90-189), which has the same random number value and indicates that a super-reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed, executes a super-reach effect with a low jackpot expectation value among the judgment values compared with the variable random number. The judgment value (190-216) which is set to be the same as the judgment value indicating that the super-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation is to be executed other than the specific super-reach effect is compared with the variable random number. The same random value as the judgment value indicating that a super reach effect with a high jackpot expectation other than the specific super reach effect among the judgment values is performed, The judgment value (217-240) indicating that a specific super-reach effect is to be executed among super-reach effects with a high expectation of hit is that a specific super-reach effect is to be executed among judgment values compared with the variable random number. The random number is the same as the judgment value shown.

  For this reason, by comparing the first symbol random number or the second symbol random number with the prior determination table in step S61, and comparing the variable random number with the preliminary determination table, the type of the big hit is accurately specified, and the preliminary determination is performed. As information, "Big hit 1" as a specific 7 or specific 8 jackpot from normal reach, "Big hit 2" as a specific 7 or specific 8 jackpot from weak SP reach, and strong SP reach other than specific strong SP reach "Big hit 3" to be a specific 7 or 8 big hit, "Big 4" to be a specific 7 or 8 big hit from a specific strong SP reach, 2-6 or a non-specific 2 big hit from normal reach "Big hit 5" included, 2-6 specific from weak SP reach or "big hit 6" including 2 non-specific big hits, 2 specific from strong SP reach other than specific strong SP reach "Big hit 7" including 6 or 2 non-specific jackpots, "2 big hits 8" including 2-6 specific or 2 non-specific jackpots from specific strong SP reach, 1 specific or 1 non-specific 1 from normal reach "Big hit 9" to be a big hit, "1 big hit 10" to be a specific 1 or non-specific 1 big hit from a weak SP reach, and 1 specific or non-specific 1 big hit from a strong SP reach other than a specific strong SP reach It can be classified into either "big hit 11" or "big hit 12" as a specific 1 or non-specific 1 big hit from a specific strong SP reach.

  In the advance determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A), reach is displayed when it is determined to be out of place, and when a high probability flag indicating that control in a high probability state is being executed is set. By comparing the reach determination value at the time of the probability change indicating that the reach is to be performed with the reach random number, it is specified whether or not to display the reach, and the high-probability flag is not set and the control of the time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) is executed. If only the time saving flag indicating that the reach is set is set, the reach determination value indicating that the reach is to be displayed is compared with the reach random number to determine whether or not to display the reach. If the probability flag and the time reduction flag are not set and it indicates that the control in the normal state is being executed, the reach determination value at the normal time indicating that the reach is displayed is compared with the reach random number. Ri to determine whether or not to display the reach. The reach determination value (0) at the time of probability variation is set to the same random determination value as a reach determination value set in a reach determination table at the time of probability variation (see FIG. 272 (B)) described later and compared with the reach random number. The reach determination value (0-5) at the time is set to the reach determination table (see FIG. 272 (B)) for the time reduction at the time to be described later, and is the same random value as the reach determination value compared with the reach random number. The reach determination value (0-6) at the time is set to the reach determination table at normal time (see FIG. 272 (B)) described later, and is the same random number value as the reach determination value compared with the reach random number. . For this reason, by comparing the reach random number and the pre-determination table in step S61, if a big hit does not occur, it is accurately specified whether or not a reach effect is to be executed as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The information can be classified into any of "outside" in which reach is not displayed (reach effect is executed) as the determination information and "reach 1 to 4" in which reach is displayed (reach effect is executed).

  Note that the reach determination value (0-5) at the time reduction and the reach determination value (0-6) at the normal time include the same determination value (0) as the reach determination value (0) at the time of probable change. When the same reach determination value and the reach random number match, whether to display reach (execute reach effect) in any of the game states of probable change, time saving, and normal time is classified. For this reason, by comparing the reach random number and the pre-determination table in step S61, it is possible to determine whether the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will execute the reach effect as the game effect in the game state of probable change, time saving, or normal time. Can be identified.

  In the advance determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when a reach effect is performed as a game effect performed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be performed and a variable random number are shown. The type of the game effect to be executed is specified by comparison. Specifically, the judgment value (0-163) indicating that the normal reach effect is to be executed is set in a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later, and is a normal reach effect among the judgment values to be compared with the fluctuation random number. The determination value (164-222) indicating the execution of the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is set to the same random value as the determination value indicating that the execution is performed. ) Is set to the same random number as the judgment value indicating that a super-reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is to be executed among the judgment values to be compared with the variable random number, and is specified among the super-reach effects with a high jackpot expectation value. The determination value (223-235) indicating that the non-super-reach effect other than the super-reach effect is executed is stored in a fluctuation pattern table at the time of the later-described reach (not shown). ) Is set to be the same random number as the judgment value indicating that a super-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation other than the specific super-reach effect is executed among the judgment values compared with the variable random number. The determination value (236-240) indicating that a specific super-reach effect is to be executed among the super-reach effects having a higher value is set in a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later, and is compared with the fluctuation random number. The random number value is the same as the determination value indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed. For this reason, by comparing the variable random number and the advance determination table in step S61, the type of the game effect to be executed is accurately specified, and “reach 1” for executing the normal reach effect as the advance determination information is performed. "Reach 2" to perform low super reach production, "Reach 3" to perform super reach production with high expectation of big hit (other than specific super reach production), Super reach production with high expectation of big hit (specific super reach production ) Can be classified into any of “reach 4”. Then, by comparing the reach random number with the advance determination table in step S61, the information can be classified into any of "reach 1" to "reach 4" as advance determination information.

  As described above, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A) and the obtained random numbers (special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number), symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number), reach random numbers) (Variable random number), as a result, whether a big hit or a small hit is determined, a type of the big hit if the big hit is obtained, or a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 if the big hit or the small hit is not obtained As shown in FIG. 268 (B), the pre-judgment information is specified as “outside”, “big hit 1” to “big hit 12” as shown in FIG. 268 (B). , "Reach 1" to "Reach 4".

  Then, in the above-described effect pre-judgment processing (steps S45 and S55), the specified pre-judgment information (whether a big hit or a small hit is made, if a big hit is made, or if a big hit or small hit is not made) Whether a reach effect is executed as a game effect performed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or a mode of the game effect to be executed, etc.), and a type of the obtained special random number (either the first special random number or the second special random number) And a pre-judgment command corresponding to the hold number (the value of the hold number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. For example, in the effect pre-judgment process related to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first opening passage process, the specified pre-judgment information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the number of reserved special first symbols (The value of the first special reserved number counter) and the first special symbol pre-judgment command corresponding thereto (step S62). Then, in the special symbol command control process (step S16), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the start port (first start port 2002, second start port) in which the start winning is generated. One of the mouths 2004), the number of holdings stored corresponding to the starting opening, and whether or not the display result of the change display of the special symbol based on the generated starting winning is a big hit or a small hit. If it is, the type of the big hit, if the big hit or the small hit does not occur, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the pre-determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed, The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can be grasped before starting the variable display according to the start winning.

  When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, a first holding storage area for storing advance determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol, and a second storage area for storing advance determination information regarding the variable display of the second special symbol. And a hold storage area. Further, the first hold storage area and the second hold storage area each have 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of holds, and the peripheral control MPU stores the first determination information indicated by the received prior determination command in the first storage area. The data is stored in order from the (earliest) storage area. When the advance determination command is received when the advance determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the advance determination information notified to the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is received. Is stored, and a variation pattern command (the first variation pattern command that notifies the variation display start of the first special symbol and the second variation pattern command that notifies the variation display start of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol)) is stored. Upon receiving the second variation pattern command for notifying the start of the variation display, the first storage area (if the first variation pattern command has been received, the first storage in the first hold storage area) according to the received variation pattern command. If the area and the second variation pattern command have been received, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area of the second hold storage area is discarded and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area (N = 2 to 4) is discarded. If the one variation pattern command has been received, it is stored in the Nth storage area of the first pending storage area, and if the second variation pattern command has been received, it is stored in the Nth storage area of the second pending storage area. The pre-determination information is moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) storage area (the pre-determination information stored in the reserved storage area is shifted). In addition, whether to start the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the fluctuation display of the second special symbol can be specified by a fluctuation pattern command (whether it is the first fluctuation pattern command or the second fluctuation pattern command). ), And when it is specified to start the variation display of the first special symbol based on the reception of the first variation pattern command, the advance determination information stored in the first hold storage area is shifted. Then, when it is specified to start the change display of the second special symbol based on the reception of the second change pattern command, the advance determination information stored in the second hold storage area is shifted. As a result, the pre-determination information of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the suspension of the variable display start has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information. Become so.

  In the present embodiment, the random numbers are the same as the jackpot determination value in the prior determination table and the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table described later, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a value that includes only a part of the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table as the jackpot determination value in the advance determination table, or a predetermined value different from the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table and part or all of the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table A configuration may be made so as to include a random number value, and the degree of possibility of a big hit may be determined in the effect pre-determination processing.

  More specifically, a part of the jackpot determination value and a loss determination value different from the jackpot determination value (which may include the small hit determination value) can be distinguished as a high-probability random number group. The ratio of the big hit determination value to the big hit determination value, which can be determined as the big hit determination probability, is set higher than the ratio of the big hit determination table in which the big hit winning probability is determined. The hit random number (first special random number, second special random number) among the random numbers obtained by the means is classified and determined as any of the above-mentioned loss determination value and the above-mentioned big hit determination value. The value belonging to the above-mentioned high-probability random number group in which the hit random number provided for the same determination is mixed with the jackpot determination value and the loss determination value while maintaining the state of A pseudo-probability precedence determining unit that can perform a precedence determination on an expectation (pseudo-winning probability) relating to a jackpot winning by determining whether or not there is a prize, for each determination process that is in a suspended state; Alternatively, the pseudo probability precedence determination means may determine the degree of expectation related to the jackpot winning in advance.

  The provision of the high-probability random number determination means in which the jackpot determination value and the outlier determination value are mixed as described above may result in the risk that confidential information regarding the result of the hit determination of the jackpot determination that is still on hold may be leaked. While maintaining the conventional effect structure excluding the above, the expectation degree (pseudo winning probability) related to the hit of the big hit according to the mixing ratio of the big hit determination value and the outlier determination value in the high probability random number determination means is as follows. The advance determination can be performed. For example, prior to the execution of the above-mentioned big hit determination (digestion of the determination process), the preceding determination that the random number to be provided for the big hit determination belongs to the high-probability random number group (special hit determination value) was not made. When the judgment processing based on the random number value that is not the special hit judgment value determined in advance (a value belonging to the low-probability random number group paired with the high-probability random number group) is completed, the expectation related to the winning of the big hit when the judgment processing is completed. The degree (pseudo-winning probability) is determined to be lower than the jackpot expectation degree (winning probability) (pseudo-reduced winning probability).

  According to the preceding determination method for such a high-probability random number group, at the time when a specific determination process is suspended, the jackpot determination is maintained in an unexecuted state (suspended state). The degree of expectation (pseudo winning probability) can be reported in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display according to the hold exhaustion. Will be done.

  FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, Only the first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process will be described. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process or the like for a display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Symbol normal processing (step S80)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which a process of determining the mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process on the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. )
3. Lottery processing on the variation of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display based on the variable random number, and the variation of the effect display performed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting processing in which the processing is performed (step S82)
4. First special symbol change processing that waits until the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display is stopped (step S83).
5. The first special symbol display mode is displayed on the first special symbol display so that the first special symbol variation control stopped mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol fluctuation control is stopped is displayed on the first special symbol display. First special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 263).

  FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 270, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first executes step S101. In the processing of (1), it is determined whether or not the start of the change display of the first special symbol is on hold based on the counter value of the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that the change display start of the first special symbol is in a suspended state, the process is next stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU as a process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol is read from the RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reserved storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stored. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the special symbol change display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with occurrence of a start winning prize in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. As a result, the order in which the variable display start of the first special symbol has been suspended is stored so as to be identifiable, and the variable display start suspension is sequentially released from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

  Then, thereafter, as a process of step S105, a big hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S106) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), the process is ended.

  FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the big hit determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that if the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time reduction state, high probability non-time reduction state) (step S111), a high probability state shown in FIG. A big hit determination table is selected (step S112), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), a large hit determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 272 (A) is selected (step S113) and selected. The calculated big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S114).

  The big hit determination table shown in FIG. 272 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and when the gaming state is a low probability state (a normal state (low probability non-saving time state) and a time reduction state (low probability time saving state)). And a large hit determination table used when the game state is a high probability (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state). Then, in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability, as with the above-mentioned prior determination table, the ten kinds of first special random numbers match the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won, and the thirteen kinds of first special random numbers are small. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match a small hit determination value indicating that a win has been won, and to match a loss determination value indicating that the 3924 first special random numbers indicate a loss. In addition, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, a small hit determination value is set in the low probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It has not been won and won no small wins. In the big hit determination table at the time of low probability, similar to the above-mentioned pre-judgment table, the 10 kinds of second special random numbers match the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won, and the 3937 kinds of second special random numbers are out of order. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with a loss determination value indicating that

  Further, in the big hit determination table at the time of high probability, similarly to the above-mentioned prior determination table, 90 kinds of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability Match the big hit determination value, match the small hit determination value indicating that 19 types of first special random numbers have won the small hit, and match the 3838 types of first special random numbers with the loss determination value. One special random number is associated with each. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state), the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won is determined in the low-probability state (normal state (low-probability non-time-saving state). ) And time-saving state (low probability time-saving state)). In addition, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, a small hit determination value is set in the large hit determination table at the time of high probability referred to be compared with the second special random number. It has not been won and will not win a small hit. In the big hit determination table at the time of high probability, similar to the above-mentioned prior determination table, 90 kinds of second special random numbers including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability are used. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and match the 3857 types of second special random numbers with the outlier determination value indicating the outlier.

  When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected big hit determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, and determines that the big hit is determined (step S115) ), A big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won a big hit is set, and the process is terminated (step S116), and the selected big hit determination table and the first special read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that the small hit has occurred (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the variation has won the small hit is set, and the process is terminated (step S118). As a result of comparison between the selected big hit determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, When it is determined that that compares the reach random read Reach determination table and step S102 shown in FIG. 272 (B) (step S119).

  The reach determination table shown in FIG. 272 (B) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and is used when the game state is a probable change (a high probability state (a high probability non-time saving state, a high probability time reduction state)). Reach judgment table at the time and when the game state is time reduction (low probability time reduction state) Use when the game state is normal (normal state: low probability non-time reduction state) And a normal-time reach determination table. Then, in the reach determination table at the time of the probability change, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicating that 238 types of reach random numbers do not reach, as in the above-described pre-determination table, The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match.

  Further, in the reach determination table at the time reduction, as in the above-described advance determination table, reach determination indicating that six types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table at the time of probable change reach the reach. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match a reach determination value indicating that the reach number does not reach the 233 types of reach random numbers. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating that the vehicle is to be reached is increased in the time reduction (low probability time reduction state) compared to the probability change time (high probability state).

  Furthermore, in the reach determination table at the normal time, similarly to the above-mentioned pre-determination table, it is assumed that seven types of reach random numbers including the same reach random numbers set in the reach determination tables at the time of the probability change and the time reduction are reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value shown and match the reach determination value indicating that the 232 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal state (normal state), the reach determination value indicating the reach is set higher than in the case of the probability change (high probability state) and the time reduction (low probability time reduction state).

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119). Is set, and the process is terminated (step S120b).

  FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 273, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the big hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the result of the lottery process is performed by determining whether the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set (steps S121 and S124).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 272 (C). (Step S122), the type of the big hit is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is determined (step S123).

  As shown in FIG. 272 (C), the symbol determination table includes, for each of the determination results (specific 1 2R probability variable hit, specific 2 4R probability variable hit, specific 3 5R probability variable hit, specific 3 4R, 6R probable jackpot, 5R, 7R probable jackpot, 6R, 6R probable jackpot, 7R, 10R probable jackpot, 1R, 2R regular jackpot, 2R, 8R regular jackpot (A random number, a second symbol random number) are stored in association with each other. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the obtained symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the type of the jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number, the type of the jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number, and the determination probability are set to be different.

In particular,
1. The first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close in such a manner that the game ball is difficult to enter the ball, to execute the 2R jackpot game, and to execute the probability improvement control until the next big hit after finishing the 2R jackpot game. If the game state at the time of winning is a state other than the normal state (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state), a specific 1R 2R probability change to execute time-saving control until the next big hit Jackpot 2. The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in such a manner that a game ball can enter, thereby executing a 4R big hit game, and after finishing the 4R big hit game, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed until the next big hit is achieved. 2. Two specific 4R probable jackpots that do both The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in such a manner that a game ball can enter, thereby executing a 5R jackpot game, and after the 5R jackpot game is completed, the probability improvement control and the time reduction control are performed until the next big hit. 3. Perform 3 specific 5R probable jackpots The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in such a manner that a game ball can enter, thereby executing a 6R big hit game, and after the 6R big hit game is completed, the probability improvement control and the time reduction control are performed until the next big hit is achieved. 4. Four specific 6R probable jackpots that do both The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in such a manner that a game ball can enter, thereby executing a 7R big hit game, and after the 7R big hit game is completed, the probability improvement control and the time reduction control are performed until the next big hit is achieved. 5. A specific 5 7R probable jackpot that does both If it is the first special lottery result, the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to be opened and closed in such a manner that a game ball can enter, and the 8R big hit game is executed, and after the 8R big hit game is finished, until the next big hit is made. If the time saving control is executed at the time of winning (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state), the time saving control is performed until the next big hit, and if it is the second special lottery result The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in such a manner that a game ball can enter, thereby executing an 8R big hit game, and after finishing the 8R big hit game until the next big hit, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed. 6. A specific 6R probable jackpot that does both. The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in such a manner that a game ball can enter, thereby executing a 10R big hit game, and after finishing the 10R big hit game until the next big hit, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed. 7. A specific 7 10R probable jackpot that does both The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in such a manner that a game ball can enter, thereby executing a 16R big hit game, and after finishing the 16R big hit game until the next big hit, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed. 8. Eight 16R probable jackpots that do both The first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close in such a manner that the game ball is difficult to enter, thereby executing the 2R big hit game, and not executing the probability improvement control until the next big hit after finishing the 2R big hit game. If the time saving control is executed at the time of winning (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state), the fluctuation display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is displayed a predetermined number of times after the end of the 2R big hit game ( 18. Any of 18 times, 36 times, 54 times, and 72 times) Non-specific 1R 2R normal big hit that executes time-saving control until executed The first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close in such a manner that a game ball can enter, and an 8R big hit game is executed, and after the 8R big hit game is finished, the probability improvement control is not executed until the next big hit. If the time-saving control is executed at the time of winning (high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state), the fluctuation display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 72 times after the end of the 8R big hit game. Until the time saving control is executed, any one of the 10 types of jackpots of the non-specified 2R 8R ordinary jackpot is determined.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. In the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination values is set to be different from that in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the type of the big hit and the determination ratio are different. I have to. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 272 (C), the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol includes a specific 1R 2R probability change hit, a specific 6 8R probability change hit, a specific 7 10R probability change hit, While the determination value distribution is set for the specific 2R regular jackpot, the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol includes the specific 1R 2R probability variable hit, the specific 2R 4R variable hit, the specific Determination value distribution is set for 3R 5R probable jackpot, specific 4R 6R probable jackpot, specific 5R 7R probable jackpot, specific 6R 8R probable jackpot, specific 816R probable jackpot, and non-specific 1R 2R regular jackpot. Have been.

  In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game is a big hit game in which opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled or a big hit game in which opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled, a big hit game (a game ball can be entered). In this case, a so-called right-handed game, in which a game ball is driven to the right in front view rather than the center in the left-right direction in the upper part of the center role object 2500, is performed. In the right hitting game area 2540 on the right side of the center role 2500, no obstacle nail is planted on the front of the game panel 1100. Then, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened, when a game ball is driven into the right side of the center role 2500 aiming at the second big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2006 is opened. The winning opening 2006 is always won. Therefore, in the big hit game in which the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close, the game ball hit into the right hitting game area 2540 is not wasted (is discharged to the outside from the out opening 1111 (2543c)). Big hit games can be digested in a short time.

  On the other hand, since a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position between the right hitting game area 2540 and the first special winning opening 2005 on the front surface of the game panel 1100, the game balls are obstructed by the obstacles. By contacting the nail, the game ball is given various movements and flows down. Therefore, in the big hit game in which the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled, even if a game ball is driven into the right side of the center role item 2500 aiming at the first big winning opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2005 is won. Not limited to this, game balls that did not win the first big winning opening 2005 are discharged to the outside from the out opening 1111 (2543c) provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the gaming area 5a. In this way, in the present embodiment, in the big hit game in which the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled, the game ball is more efficient than in the first big winning opening 2005 in the big hit game in which the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled. The player wins the second big winning opening 2006, and can finish the big hit game in a short time.

  Further, in this example, in one round of the opening and closing control of the first special winning opening 2005, the condition for changing the first special winning opening 2005 from the open state to the closed state, and the condition for changing the opening and closing control of the second special winning opening 2006. The conditions for changing the second special winning opening 2006 from the open state to the closed state in one round are different. As described above, the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are changed to the closed state approximately 30 seconds after being controlled to the open state. When a predetermined number of game balls have been won in the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006, the state is changed to a closed state. And in the big hit game which controls opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2005 is changed to the closed state based on the fact that seven game balls have won the first big winning opening 2005, In the big hit game in which the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled, the second big winning opening 2006 is changed to a closed state based on the fact that ten game balls have won the second big winning opening 2006. As described above, in the big hit game in which the opening and closing control of the first big winning opening 2005 is limited, only seven game balls can be made to win in the first big winning opening 2005 at maximum, so that only the winning prize ball for seven winnings per round is obtained. On the other hand, in the big hit game in which the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled, a maximum of 10 game balls can be made to win in the second big winning opening 2006 to obtain 10 winning balls for 10 winnings per round. In the big hit game in which the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close, more prize balls can be expected than in the big hit game in which the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to be opened and closed.

  When the type of the big hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the big hit is determined as the mode at the time of stopping the first special symbol. Specifically, when it is determined to be the specific 1R 2R jackpot, it is determined to be the 2R certain jackpot symbol of the first special symbol, and when it is determined to be the 8R certain jackpot, the 6R of the first special symbol is determined. If it is determined to be a symbol, and if it is determined to be a specific 7R 10R probability big hit, it is determined to be a 10R probability variable big hit symbol of the first special symbol, and if it is determined to be a non-specific 2 8R normal big hit, 8R normal of the first special symbol is determined. Determine the big hit symbol. On the other hand, if the big hit flag has not been set in step S121, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag has been set (step S124). If the small hit flag has been set, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped. Is determined as a small hit symbol (step S125), and if the small hit flag is not set, the first special symbol is determined to be an out-of-position symbol at the time of stopping the change (step S126).

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this manner, as a process of step S127, the lottery results (instruction of any one of a big hit type, a small hit, a reach loss, and a loss (stop symbol of the first special symbol) The determination result notification command according to each lottery result is set so that the determination result notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so as to proceed to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S128, this process is ended. The peripheral control MPU controls the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU, as a mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is stopped, determines a specific 7R 10R probability variable jackpot among the jackpots from the received determination result notification command. If specified, the 10R probability variable jackpot (combination in which all of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are a specific odd number symbol (for example, "7")) is determined. If the specific 16R probability variable jackpot is specified, the 16R variable probability jackpot is determined. The big hit symbol (combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are all a specific odd symbol (for example, “7”)) is determined, and when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect), The determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As described above, when the combination of all the specific odd symbols as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops changing, it is the 7R 10R certain big hit from the stop symbol of the decorative symbols and the first special lottery. Among the jackpots resulting from each of the result and the second special lottery result, the number of rounds is the largest among the jackpots, and it has been determined that a 10R jackpot game that allows easy entry of game balls to the second big winning opening 2006 is obtained. Can be determined.

  Also, when the peripheral control MPU specifies a specific 2R 4R probability variable jackpot among the jackpots from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Is determined to be a 4R probability variable jackpot pattern (combination of odd same identical decorative symbols of "1", "3", "5", "7"), and if a specific 3R 5R probability variable jackpot is specified among the jackpots Is determined to be a 5R probability variable big hit symbol (combination of odd same identical decorative symbols of "1", "3", "5", "7". Common to 4R probability variable big hit symbol) When the big hit is specified, the 6R probable big hit design (combination of odd same identical decorative designs of "1", "3", "5", "7"; common to 4R probable big hit design and 5R probable big hit design) Decide, specific 5 of the jackpot If the R-probable jackpot is specified, a 7R-probable jackpot symbol (combination of odd identical decorative symbols of “1,” “3,” “5,” and “7”; a 4R-probable jackpot symbol; If the 6R probable big hit is determined based on the second special lottery result, the 8R probable big hit design ("1", "3", "5") , "7", a combination of odd and identical decorative symbols. 4R probable jackpot symbol, 5R probable jackpot symbol, 6R probable jackpot symbol, and 7R probable jackpot symbol.) When the game time has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As described above, when the combination of the odd-numbered identical decorative symbols “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops changing, the decorative symbol stops. Although it is not possible to discriminate any one of the specific 2R 4R jackpot, the specific 3R 5R jackpot, the specific 4R 6R jackpot, the specific 5R 7R jackpot, and the specific 6R 8R jackpot from the design, It is possible to determine whether to control the winning opening 2006 to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game for controlling the opening and closing of the winning opening 2006.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU determines, based on the first special lottery result among the big hits, from the received judgment result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is stopped. If the 8R probable big hit is specified, it is determined to be the 8R probable big hit design (combination of an even number of the same decorative design of "2", "4" and "6"), and among the big hits, the unspecified 2 of the 8R normal big hits Is determined, it is determined to be the 8R normal big hit symbol (combination of an even number of the same decorative symbols of "2", "4", "6", which is common to the 8R probability variable big hit symbol) and specified from the variation pattern command. When the fluctuating time has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As described above, when the combination of the same number of the same decorative symbols of “2”, “4”, and “6” as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops changing, the specific symbol is determined from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. It is not possible to determine any of the 8R probable big hit and the non-specific 2R normal big hit, and it is determined whether or not to control to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game for controlling opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005. I can't.

  When the peripheral control MPU specifies a specific 1R 2R probability variable jackpot among the jackpots from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops changing. Is determined to be a 2R probable big hit symbol (combination of predetermined decorative symbols out of the missing symbols (separate eyes). More specifically, a combination of decorative symbols of "357"). A small hit symbol (combination of predetermined decorative symbols out of the missing symbols (separate eyes), which is the same as the 2R probable big hit symbol) is determined, and when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (the end of the game effect) At the time, the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As described above, when the combination of the decorative symbols “357” as the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops changing, it is determined whether the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is a specific 2R certain variable big hit or small hit. Cannot be determined, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is in a high probability state even after the end of the 2R jackpot game using the first big winning opening 2005 (2R jackpot game in a mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter). It is difficult to determine whether or not to control the game to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game, since the game effect is difficult to determine.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU determines, as a mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is stopped, a disconnection accompanied by a reach when the reach error is identified from the received determination result notification command. If a pattern (a combination of decorative patterns that are not the same, but the left and right decorative patterns are the same) is determined, and if a loss is specified, a loose pattern without a reach (a combination of decorative patterns that are not the same. When the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has passed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 274, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag If it has been performed (step S141), the type of the jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the change pattern table (not shown) at the time of the jackpot according to the current game state are selected (step S141). If the small hit flag has been set (step S143), a small hit variation pattern table (not shown) according to the current game state is selected (step S144), and the reach flag has been set. If (step S145), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current game state is selected (step S145). In step S146), if none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag are set, that is, if it is a normal loss (a loss in which the reach effect is not performed), a variation pattern table at the time of the loss (shown in FIG. (No) is selected (step S147).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S148). The variable pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display is started (step S149). In addition, the variation pattern determined in this way includes the special effect (in this case, the first special symbol) after the start of the variation display of the game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol). (In this case, the first special symbol) includes information indicating a fluctuation time until the fluctuation display is stopped. Upon receiving the fluctuation pattern command set in step S149, the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 starts the fluctuation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Variation of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) after starting the display of the content of the game effect and special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed on main liquid crystal display device 1600 The fluctuation time until the display is stopped is specified. Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set in correspondence with the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S150). As a result, the effect control is performed on the first special symbol display (variable display of the first special symbol in) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (variable display of the decorative symbol in the main liquid crystal display device 1600) for the variation time according to the determined variation pattern. Will be done.

  Note that a plurality of types of variation pattern tables of this example are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is included in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table. It is stored in a form associated with each random number. Thus, the main control MPU determines the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. Are obtained, and the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random numbers is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process is performed on the variation patterns of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol). The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of the present example, similarly to the above-described pre-determination table, the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number is set. It is set to be determined. Specifically, 164 kinds of variable random numbers match the determination value (0-163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is to be executed, and 59 kinds of variable random numbers are any of the super reach effects with a low jackpot expectation. And the determination values (223-240) indicating that any one of the 18 superfluous random effects with high jackpot expectation is executed. As described above, the variable random numbers are associated with each other. The super reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the jackpot game increases.

  When the first special symbol change display is started, next, as a process of step S151, a change number counter of the change number counter for counting the number of changes of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) after the big hit game is executed. It is determined whether the counter value is “0”. As described above, in this example, when the second special lottery result is a non-specific 1R 2R normal big hit and time reduction control is executed at the time of winning, a special symbol (first The time reduction control is performed until the variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (one of 18, 36, 54, and 72 times), and the first special lottery result is a non-specific 2R 8R normal In the case of a big hit and the time reduction control is executed at the time of winning, the time reduction control is performed until the change display of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is performed 72 times after the end of the 8R big hit game. I do. Therefore, when the non-specific 1R 2R normal big hit is ended in the big hit control processing, the number of times (one of 18, 36, 54, or 72 times) according to the result of the second special lottery is set in the fluctuation number counter. When the non-specified 2R 8R normal jackpot ends, "72" is set in the fluctuation counter. In step S151, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display of the number set in the fluctuation number counter has been executed after the big hit game. If the counter value is not "0", that is, if the display of the number of changes set in the change number counter has not been executed after the big hit game, the change number counter is counted down (subtracted by 1) (step S152). Then, it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the variation counter is "0" (step S153). Then, as a result, if the counter value is “0”, that is, if the fluctuation display of the number of times set in the fluctuation number counter has been executed after the big hit game, an end flag indicating that fact is set (step S154). .

  When it is determined in the process of step S151 that the counter value of the change number counter is “0”, that is, the change of the number of times already set in the change number counter after the big hit game caused by the non-specific 1 and the non-specific 2 If the display is being executed, or if it is determined in the process of step S153 that the change number counter is not “0”, that is, the change number counter is still set after the big hit game caused by the non-specific 1 and the non-specific 2 If the variable display of the number of times performed has not been performed, the process shifts to the process of step S155 at that time. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S155), the process is ended. In addition, when the time-saving control is executed until the next big hit after the big hit game caused by the big hits of the specific 1 to 8 is set, the change number counter is set to “0” in the big hit control processing, By setting the time saving flag, the time saving control is continued until the next big hit.

  FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol change process (step S83). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 275, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first executes step S171. In the process (1), the variation timer for setting the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is decremented by one. Then, when the variable time timer is 0, that is, when it is determined that the selected variable time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is ended.

  FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S84). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 277, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first executes step S181. As a process, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display is performed, and the first special symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A stop display command instructing to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the fluctuation display of the number of times set in the fluctuation number counter when the end flag is set, that is, after the big hit game caused by the non-specific 1 and the non-specific 2. Sometimes (step S183), the end flag is reset (step S184), and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction flag is reset (step S185). ). Thereby, after the fluctuation display of the number set in the fluctuation number counter is executed after the big hit game caused by the non-specific 1 and the non-specific 2, the control of the low-probability non-saving time state (normal state) is executed. .

  When the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that a big hit game is started (step S187), and executes the big hit game. The standby time until the start (time for displaying the start of the big hit game or the like) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction flag is reset. (Step S189). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S190), the process is terminated. The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is a type of jackpot (2R jackpot, 4R jackpot, 5R jackpot, 6R jackpot, 7R jackpot, 8R jackpot, 10R jackpot. , 16R probable jackpot, 2R ordinary jackpot, 8R ordinary jackpot). In step S187, according to the type of big hit (2R certain big hit, 4R certain big hit, 5R certain big hit, 7R certain big hit, 8R certain big hit, 16R certain big hit, 16R certain big hit, 2R normal big hit, 8R normal big hit) Big hit start command (2R positive big hit start command, 4R positive big hit start command, 5R positive big hit start command, 6R positive big hit start command, 7R positive big hit start command, 8R positive big hit start command, 10R positive big hit start command, 16R positive big hit start command Start command, 2R normal big hit start command, 8R normal big hit start command) are set. Thereby, the effect of the jackpot game according to the type of the jackpot specified by the jackpot start command is executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker 921, and the like.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (step S191), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a small hit start command indicating that a small hit game is started (step S192). The standby time until the start of the small hitting game (the time for displaying the start of the small hitting game) is set in the interval timer (step S193). Then, a small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S194), and the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value, of the first special symbol process flag. At the time of updating (step S190), this process ends. The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In step S195, by setting the small hit start command, the effect of the small hit game specified by the small hit start command is displayed on the main liquid crystal display. This is executed by the display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker 921, and the like.

[Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 277, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting processing, processing for clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 and the like are performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T has been set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every time 2 ms elapses, and executes a 2 ms regular process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter) is executed. At the same time as setting the flag T, a process of resetting (setting to 0) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 ms steady processing is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 ms regular processing, processing for controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, lamps / LEDs, speakers 921, and the like is executed based on a command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 ms steady processing is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T has not been set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 278 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the 16 ms regular process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms regular processing, the peripheral control MPU executes the processing of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis processing of step S601, a command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, a process corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second variation pattern setting process)) is performed. The control processing related to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like is executed based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set.

  In the sound control processing of step S603, control processing relating to the speaker 921 and the like is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, the game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is serialized for the lamp driving board. A game board side drive data for transmitting from the I / O port to the effect drive board 3043 or outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 for a game board decoration drive board. A door side for transmitting from the serial I / O port to the effect drive board 3043 or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a vibration device 242 provided on the door frame 3 or a lower right drive motor 272. A door side composed of drive data and door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 Control data (display command) indicating a screen for transmitting dynamic light emission data from the frame decoration driving board serial I / O port to the door frame 3 side or displaying the screen on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is displayed. Processing such as transmission from the serial I / O port for the control unit to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 and output of a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC are performed. In the random number updating process in step S606, a random number used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) (for example, a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 99) used in a lottery process related to a specific announcement effect described later) A process of updating a value of a random number counter for generating a determination random number) is executed.

  Note that the processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 ms regular processing ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady-state process to the end of the 16 ms steady-state process, the 16 ms steady-state process is started from the beginning immediately after the start of the 16 ms steady-state process (the command of step S601). Do not execute (from analysis processing). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady processing, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady processing, the 16 ms steady processing is performed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms regular process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing and the 16 ms steady processing in the sub-main processing.

  FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the notice determination process executed in the command analysis process (step S601). As shown in FIG. 279, when the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 (step S301), the reservation corresponding to the number of reservations indicated by the received pre-determination command is performed. The preliminary determination information is stored in the storage area (step S302). As described above, in the present embodiment, as a reserved storage area for storing the preliminary determination information indicated by the preliminary determination command, a first reserved storage area in which the preliminary determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol is stored, A second reserved storage area in which pre-determination information relating to a special symbol change display is stored, and the first reserved storage area and the second reserved storage area each correspond to a reserved number. It has two storage areas. If the received pre-determination command indicates the pre-determination information related to the variable display of the first special symbol, the peripheral control MPU stores the pre-determination in the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations indicated by the pre-determination command in the first reservation storage area. The information is stored, and if the received pre-determination command indicates the pre-determination information on the variable display of the second special symbol, the pre-determination command is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations indicated by the pre-determination command in the second reservation storage area. Stores judgment information.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not a specific notice effect to be described later is being executed (step S303) and whether or not the number of reservations indicated by the received prior determination command is “4” (step S304). If the specific announcement effect is not being executed and the number of holds indicated by the pre-judgment command is “4”, the hold storage area storing the pre-judgment information indicated by the received pre-judgment command (variation display of the first special symbol) (1) to “3” in the first hold storage area if the information indicates the preliminary determination information on the second predetermined storage information, and the second hold storage area if the information indicates the preliminary determination information on the variable display of the second special symbol. Is stored in the storage area corresponding to the large hits 1 to 12 and the hits set as the pre-judgment information in the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 268 (A). Either pre-determined information-reach 4 it is determined whether or not stored (step S305).

  If the pre-determination information other than the outlier is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations “1” to “3” among the reservation storage areas storing the pre-determination information indicated by the pre-determination command received in step S305. (YES in step S305), the processing ends without executing the processing of steps S306 to S309, that is, the lottery processing of whether to execute the specific notice effect. In the present embodiment, a series of stories is a plurality of special symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) a plurality of times (three times in this example, but may be two times, or two times of variable display as the specific notice effect). The specific liquid crystal display device 1600 may execute the specific notice effect which is divided and executed and the specific notice effect which is divided and executed three times. The display is divided into a plurality of (three in this example) predetermined variations of the decorative design and executed (so that a story completed in three episodes is displayed one by one for each variation display of the decorative design). To run). In addition, in each of the plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol for executing the specific notice effect, instead of the decorative symbol of the variable symbol, the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed at the end (for example, the upper left end) of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. After displaying a part of a series of stories (one time of a series of stories to be executed in three times), a stop symbol of a decorative symbol is displayed. In this case, if a plurality of variable displays for executing the specific announcement effect include a large hit, a small hit, or a variable display serving as a reach, a big hit game or a small hit game is started in the middle of a series of stories. It is impossible to execute the whole series of stories. In addition, the player does not execute when a big hit or a small hit is performed, but when the reach is reached, the player is informed that when the reach is reached during the execution of the specific notice effect, the player always loses. Even if the reach direction is executed, they cannot realize the expectation of the jackpot at all. For this reason, in the present example, when a start winning is generated, a predetermined number of times of the variable display that does not accompany the reach as the variable display in which the start condition of the variable display is not satisfied other than the generated start winning is set ( The lottery process of determining whether or not to execute the specific notice effect is performed only when the information is stored three times in this example).

  If the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations “1” to “3” among the storage areas storing the preliminary determination information indicated by the preliminary determination command received in step S305 does not store the preliminary determination information other than the loss. (NO in step S305), an advance determination table according to the advance determination information is selected (step S306), and advance determination in a numerical range (for example, 0 to 99) predetermined in the above-described random number update process (step S606). One notice judgment random number is acquired from the random number counter for updating the random number, and the acquired notice judgment random number is compared with the notice judgment table selected in step S306 (step S307).

  In the present embodiment, a preview determination table to be compared with the preview determination random number is provided for each of the above-described preliminary determination information (outlier, big hit 1 to big hit 12, reach 1 to reach 4), and the hit (big hit, big hit, In the pre-judgment information of the same type of small hit (small hits 1 to 4 are the big hits (specified 7, 8) of the same type in this example, and big hits 5 to 8 are the big hits of the same type (specified 2 to 6, non-specified) 2), and the big hits 9 to 12 are the same kind of big hits (specific 1, non-specific 1, small hits), and the big hit expectation of the reach effect to be executed (the high hit expectation in this example is The determination value is set such that the ratio of executing the specific announcement effect increases in proportion to (specific strong SP reach ≧ other strong SP reach> weak SP reach> normal reach).

  In addition, in the advance judgment table selected when the pre-judgment information does not become a hit and indicates that a reach is made, a large hit expectation degree of the reach effect to be executed (in this example, the height of the big hit expectation is specified. The determination value is set such that the ratio of executing the specific notice effect is increased in proportion to (strong SP reach other than specific> strong SP reach> weak SP reach> normal reach). On the other hand, in the preview determination table that is selected when the advance determination information indicates that it is out of order, the determination values are assigned so that a determination to not execute the specific preview effect is made regardless of the obtained preview determination random number.

  As described above, the variable display after the specific notice effect is executed (in this example, when it is determined that the specific notice effect is to be executed, three times before the start of the variable display based on the hold that caused the determination) The specific announcement effect is executed over the fluctuation display, and the fluctuation display that causes the execution of the specific announcement effect for the fourth time is executed). Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the occurrence of the big hit when the specific notice effect is executed. In addition, even if the preliminary determination information is other than outliers, since the ratio of executing the specific announcement effect is increased in proportion to the jackpot expectation degree of the reach effect to be executed, the execution is performed with the variable display after the execution of the specific announcement effect. In addition to giving attention to the type of reach effect, it is possible to increase the expectation of the occurrence of a big hit in the variable display after the specific notice effect is executed.

  Further, when compared with each group of pre-judgment information compiled for each type of hit, the degree of advantage to the player (in this example, the degree of advantage to the player is 1 ４4> Specified 2-6, non-specified 2 jackpots combined with big hits 5-8> Specified 1, non-specified 1 big hits, small hits combined big hits 9-12 in order) The determination value is set so that the ratio of executing the specific notice effect is high. Then, the reach 1 to 4 summarized in the outreach reach is lower in the degree of advantage to the player than the prior determination information to be a hit, so that the ratio of executing the specific notice effect is lower than that of the big hits 1 to 12. Is set to the judgment value. Thereby, when the specific notice effect is executed, a bigger hit that is more advantageous to the player, specifically, when the specific notice effect is performed with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol, the expectation of the occurrence of the 10R certain change big hit is made. If the specific notice effect is executed for the second special symbol, the expectation for the occurrence of the 16R probability change jackpot can be increased.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above-described series of stories is completed by executing the specific announcement effect over a predetermined plurality of (three in this example) variable display of the decorative pattern. It is to let. However, in the determination as to whether or not to execute the specific notice effect, the specific notice effect is executed over a variable display that is less than a predetermined number of times (one or two times in this example) as the number of notices. (So-called gaseous notice) can also be determined. If it is decided to execute this gaseous notice, the specific notice effect will end without the series of stories being completed, and the change display after the specific notice effect has been executed will have an expectation for the big hit I can't. Therefore, the player plays the game while hoping that the specific notice effect is executed for a predetermined number of times of the variable display when the effect is executed. In addition, when the specific notice effect is executed, the specific notice effect may be restarted when the change display of the next decorative symbol is started again after being temporarily stopped in the middle of a series of stories. This makes it possible to expect the specific notice effect to be resumed even when the gas notice is executed.

  If the effect control MPU determines that the specific notice effect is to be executed as a result of comparing the notice judgment random number with the selected notice judgment table (YES in step S308), the specific notice effect is being executed or the notice effect is being executed. Is set, and the determined number of times of the specific announcement effect is set in the announcement counter, and the process is terminated (step S309). The notice flag is referred to in the above-described step S303 for determining whether or not to execute the specific notice effect, and in a variable effect start process described later. If the notice flag is set in step S303, the effect control MPU performs the specific notice effect. It is determined that the process is being executed, and if the advance notice flag is set in the variable effect start process described later, the process data for executing the specific advance effect is selected from the process data corresponding to the variable pattern command received from the main control board 1310. Then, by controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the specific notice effect is executed. Also, if the number of executions of the specific notice effect is determined to be one, the notice counter is set to “1”, and if the number is determined to be two, the notice counter is set to “2”, and the number is decided to three. If so, "3" is set to the notice counter. Thereby, the specific notice effect is executed over the variable display of the execution number of the specific notice effect set in the notice counter in step S309.

  FIG. 280 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process (step S602).

  In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the effect process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. Will be done.

1. A variation pattern command that indicates the variation pattern of the special symbol analyzed in the command analysis processing (a first variation pattern command that indicates the variation pattern of the first special symbol, a second variation that indicates the variation pattern of the second special symbol) After performing a process for controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, and the like based on the pattern command), the variable effect start process for changing the effect process flag to a value corresponding to the variable effect process (step S711) )
2. The elapsed time from the start of the control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, and the like is measured, and a process of controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, and the like is performed according to the elapsed time, and the fluctuation is performed. Variation effect process during which the effect process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the variation end process in response to the elapse of the variation time corresponding to the pattern (step S712).
3. Performs a process for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result based on receiving a symbol stop command instructing to stop the variable display of the special symbol, and if it is out of place, sets the above-mentioned effect process flag to a value according to the variable effect start process , And if it is a big hit, it is changed to a value according to the big hit effect processing, and if it is a small hit, it is changed to a value according to the small hit effect processing (step S713).
4. Based on the reception of the jackpot start command instructing the start of the jackpot game, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 performs a process for executing display control during the jackpot game. Big hit production process which changes to the value according to the variable production start process (step S714)
5. Based on the reception of the small hitting start command instructing the start of the small hitting game, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 performs a process for performing the display control during the small hitting game. Small hit production process of changing the production process flag to a value according to the variable production start process (step S715)

  By the above processing, the main liquid crystal display is synchronized with the change display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display). The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the device 1600.

  FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the variable effect start processing (step S711). When the effect control process flag indicates that a variable effect start process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 281, the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 first executes the variable pattern command (first variable It is determined whether a pattern command or a second variation pattern command has been received (step S801). If a variation pattern command has been received, a stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined according to the received determination result notification command (step S802).

  Specifically, if the peripheral control MPU has received the first variation pattern command, it is set in step S128 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and transmitted from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310. Based on the judgment result notification command, it is determined to be any of the above-described 2R probable big hit design, 8R probable big hit design, 10R probable big hit design, 8R normal big hit design, small hit design, and off design, and receives the second fluctuation pattern command. If so, the above-mentioned 2R probability change big hit symbol and 4R probability change are set based on the determination result notification command transmitted from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 by being set in a second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown). Big hit design, 5R positive change big hit design, 6R positive change big hit design, 7R positive change big hit design, 8R positive change big hit design, 16R positive change Per symbol, 2R usually big hit symbol is determined to either the failure symbol.

  If the result of the fluctuation display of the received fluctuation pattern command (first fluctuation pattern command, second fluctuation pattern command) is out of order, the received fluctuation pattern command is reached (in this case, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern command). When the decorative pattern and the decorative pattern are stopped and displayed with the same pattern, and the medium decorative pattern is not yet stopped and displayed), the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are the same as the decorative pattern, Only the middle decorative symbol is determined to be a combination of symbols different from the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol (reach lost symbol).

  Upon determining the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the advance flag which is set in the above-described advance determination process and indicates that the specific advance effect is being executed is set (step S803). If the advance notice flag is not set, process data corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command is selected (step S806), and display control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is started based on the selected process data (step S807).

  On the other hand, if the advance notice flag indicating that the specific advance effect is being executed is set in step S803, the number of times this execution is performed among a plurality of (three in this example) variable displays for executing the specific advance effect. Is selected from among a plurality of types of process data corresponding to the fluctuation time indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command (step S804), and the value of the advance notice counter is decremented by 1 (step S805). Display control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is started based on the process data (step S807). The above-mentioned notice counter is a counter indicating the remaining number of times of the variable display for performing the specific notice effect, and is set according to the determined number of times of the specific notice effect when it is determined that the specific notice effect is to be executed. It has become.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when starting the variable display in which at least the special lottery results (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) are not accompanied by the reach, in other words, at least the special lottery results ( If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) do not accompany the reach and the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the start condition of the variable display other than the variable display satisfying the start condition is satisfied. In accordance with the number of variable displays that have not been performed, that is, the number of suspensions, the suspension shortening control for shortening the fluctuation time of the variable display as compared with the normal display is executed. More specifically, in this example, a deviation fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of “13 seconds”, a deviation fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of “8 seconds”, and a deviation fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of “4 seconds” as a deviation fluctuation pattern that does not involve a reach. The main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 holds the first special symbol when the condition for starting the variable display that results in the first lottery result without a reach is satisfied. If the number is "1" or "2", the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) determines that the variation pattern has a variation time of "13 seconds" and the number of reserved special symbols is "3". If it is, it is determined to be a deviation fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "8 seconds", and if the number of reserved first special symbols is "4", it is determined to be a deviation fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "4 seconds". In addition, the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 sets the number of reserved second special symbols to “1” or “1” when the start condition of the variable display in which the result of the second special lottery is not accompanied by the reach is satisfied. If the number is "2", the second variation pattern setting process (not shown) determines the variation pattern with a variation time of "13 seconds", and if the number of retained special second symbols is "3", the variation pattern has a variation time of "8 seconds". A change pattern is determined, and if the number of reserved second special symbols is “4”, a loss change pattern with a change time of “4 seconds” is determined.

  In addition, as described above, in each of the plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol for executing the specific notice effect, instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol is reduced and the end portion of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (for example, the upper left end portion) ) May be displayed) After displaying a part of a series of stories (one time of a series of stories executed in three parts), a stop symbol of a decorative symbol is displayed. Therefore, when the period of the story to be displayed in one variation display of a plurality of variation displays of the decorative symbol for executing a series of stories as the specific announcement effect is fixed, the above-described hold shortening control is executed and 1 The fluctuation time is shorter than the period of the story displayed in the single fluctuation display, so that the entire story cannot be displayed, or the period of the story displayed in one fluctuation display is shorter. Then, even if the above-mentioned hold shortening control is executed, the variation time is not shorter than the period of the story displayed in one variation display, so that the display of the story displayed in one variation display is completed and then decoration is performed. There is a problem that a useless period is generated until the stop symbol of the symbol is displayed and the player gets bored.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, for each of the plurality of display variations of the decorative symbol for executing a series of stories as a specific notice effect, the display is displayed in a single variation display so as to correspond to the above-mentioned holding shortening control. There are multiple types of process data that have different story periods. In other words, among a plurality of (three in this example) decorative design variable displays in which a series of stories as a specific notice effect is executed, a change time “8 seconds” is used as a story in which the number of notices is displayed in the first variable display. And the process data corresponding to "4 seconds", and the number of notices corresponds to the process data corresponding to the fluctuation time "13 seconds" and "8 seconds" as the story displayed in the second fluctuation display Process data corresponding to the variable time "13 seconds" and the process corresponding to the "8 seconds" as a story to be displayed in the third variable display with the process data corresponding to "4 seconds". Data and process data corresponding to “4 seconds”. In step S804, process data corresponding to the variation time indicated by the received variation pattern command is selected from the process data corresponding to the number of notices. In the above example, when the first variable display of the multiple variable displays of the specific notice effect is started, the number of reservations is always three or more. Or, only the process data corresponding to the variation time of “8 seconds” is shown, but “4 seconds” and “8 seconds” are used as the first variation display of a plurality of variation displays of the specific notice effect. Not only the process data corresponding to one variation time, but also process data corresponding to a variation time of “13 seconds” may be provided. That is, if the specific notice effect can be executed even when the number of holdings is 3 or less in the step S304 of the notice judgment processing, the first change display of the plurality of change displays of the specific notice effect is performed. In this case, when the number of holds becomes two or less and the hold shortening control is not performed, the change time of “13 seconds” may be determined. In this case, the change time of “13 seconds” May be selected to execute the first variation display among a plurality of variation displays of the specific notice effect, or the start condition of the variation display other than the variation display for which the start condition is satisfied. If the variation reduction control is executed only when the number of variable displays for which the condition has not been established is "4", the first variable display of the plurality of variable displays of the specific notice effect is started. 3 or less on hold In some cases, the variation time is determined to be "13 seconds" without executing the shortening control. In this case, the process data corresponding to the variation time of "13 seconds" is selected and the specific notice effect is performed multiple times. The first variation display of the variation display may be executed.

  The same story is displayed in multiple types of process data corresponding to the same number of notices. However, the effect contents (videos and explanations) can be simplified according to the period of the fluctuation time, The variation time and the production period are matched by making details. In addition, even if process data corresponding to the same fluctuation time is selected at successive notice times, even if process data corresponding to different fluctuation times are selected, the respective stories are smoothly connected and played. Process data is configured so as not to give a stranger a feeling of discomfort. Thereby, a series of stories can be executed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU discards the preliminary determination information stored in the first storage area among the reserved storage areas for storing the preliminary determination information in step S302 of the above-mentioned preliminary determination processing, corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command. The pre-determination information stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage area is moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) storage area, and is stored in the reserved storage area. The pre-determination information is shifted (step S808). That is, if the first variation pattern command has been received, the advance determination information stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area is discarded and the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage area is deleted. The stored pre-determination information is moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area, and if the second variation pattern command has been received, the first storage area of the second hold storage area Is discarded, and the pre-determination information stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage area is moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Let it.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU ends this process when the above-mentioned effect control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the process for variable effect production (step S712) (step S813).

  FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the variable effect ending process (step S713). When the effect control process flag indicates that the variable effect ending process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 282, the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 performs the variable effect start process (step S711). Of the stop symbol determined in step S802 is displayed (a state in which all of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are completely stopped and displayed) (step S851).

  Next, if the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 has received a jackpot start command notifying the start of the jackpot game from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 (step S852). When the above-described effect control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the big hit effect process (step S714) (step S853), the process ends.

  If a small hit start command for notifying that a small hit game is started is received from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 (step S854), the process shifts to the small hit effect processing (step S715). When the above-described effect control process flag is updated so as to be performed (step S855), the process ends.

  If neither the big hit start command nor the small hit start command is received from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 (NO in step S854), if the above-mentioned notice flag is set (step S854). S856) Whether or not the advance notice counter is “0”, that is, whether or not all of the plurality of (three in this example) variable displays for executing the specific advance effect have been executed (the remaining number of times of the specific advance effect is “0”) Is determined (step S857), and if all of the plurality of (three in this example) variable displays for executing the specific announcement effect have been executed, the announcement flag is reset (step S858). When the above-described effect control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the variable effect start process (step S711) (step S859), the process ends.

[Specific notice production summary]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal display device corresponds to a plurality of (three in this example) variable display of a series of stories as a special notice effect in a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). The process is divided into a plurality of (in this example, three times) variable display of the decorative symbol executed in 1600 and executed. However, the period for executing a series of stories as the specific notice effect is not constant, and may be changed (shortened) by the above-described hold shortening control. In this embodiment, even if the period for executing a series of stories as the specific announcement effect is changed (shortened) by the hold shortening control, these series of stories can be completed within the changed period. It has become. That is, the same story can be displayed in each of a plurality of variable times (4 seconds, 8 seconds, 13 seconds) so as to correspond to the above-mentioned hold shortening control in a series of stories executed as the specific announcement effect. The process data is configured in such a manner that the effect contents are simplified or made more detailed in accordance with the period of the fluctuation time, so that the fluctuation time and the production time are matched.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 283, in the case where the number of notices is the third time (in this example, the last change display of the specific notice effect), if the number of reservations whose change time is 4 seconds is one or two, The explanation that “the experts attack on such A” is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 as characters, whereas if the number of hold times is 13 seconds and the number of holdings is four, “the talents will bloom” A description is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 as a character, and a more detailed description is given due to the long fluctuation time. Further, in addition to the description using such characters, when the number of holdings whose fluctuation time is 13 seconds is 4 as compared with the case where the number of holdings whose fluctuation time is 4 seconds is 1 or 2, more An image is displayed. In this way, as the fluctuation time is longer, the effect contents become more detailed, so that the player can obtain more information. In addition, the explanation has been given that the effect content becomes more detailed as the change time is longer, but depending on the effect added due to the longer change time, the degree of expectation for the suspension that caused the execution of the specific notice effect was suggested. May be performed. For example, by preparing a plurality of (for example, white, blue, and red) character colors of “blooming talent” in FIG. 283, it is possible to see the specific notice effect itself with expectation.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed prior to the first special symbol. Therefore, when the special announcement effect is executed based on the occurrence of the start winning in the first starting opening 2002, the change display of the second special symbol starts when the starting winning in the second starting opening 2004 occurs. As a result, it is not possible to match the period of the story executed in one variation display and the variation time in the multiple variation display of the decorative pattern executed as the specific announcement production, or as the specific announcement production As a variable display immediately after a series of stories has been displayed over a plurality of variable displays, the variable display that caused the execution of the specific announcement effect may not be able to be executed. Therefore, in this example, when the specific notice effect is being executed based on the fact that the start winning in the first starting opening 2002 has occurred, before the variable display corresponding to the execution number of the specific notice effect is executed. Also, when the start winning in the second starting port 2004 occurs, the specific notice effect is ended. Specifically, although not shown, when the advance notice flag is set in step S803 of the above-described variable effect start processing, the notice flag is set due to a winning start in the first starting opening 2002. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern command is determined to be received in step S801 when the variation pattern command has been set due to a winning start in the first startup opening 2002 relating to the second special symbol ( If it is the second variation pattern command), the notice flag is reset and the process advances to step S806 to end the specific announcement effect before executing the variation display according to the determined number of executions. On the other hand, when the specific announcement effect based on the occurrence of the start winning prize in the second starting opening 2004 is performed in step S803, the specific announcement based on the occurrence of the starting winning prize in the first starting opening 2002 in step S803. Even when the effect is being executed, when the variation pattern command determined to be received in step S801 is a command relating to the first special symbol (first variation pattern command), the specific notice effect is continued. The process proceeds to step S804.

  In this way, the player is given a sense of incongruity by ensuring that the period of the story executed in one variation display and the variation time out of the multiple variation displays of the decorative symbol executed as the specific announcement effect are consistent with each other. In addition to suppressing that, it is possible to execute the variable display that caused the execution of the specific notice effect as a variable display immediately after displaying a series of stories over a plurality of variable displays as the specific notice effect I have. In the variable display based on the occurrence of the start winning prize in the second starting opening 2004, the specific announcement effect is performed only in the variable display based on the occurrence of the starting prize in the first starting opening 2002 without executing the specific announcement effect. May be executed. In other words, if the advance determination command received in step S301 of the advance determination process is based on the occurrence of a winning start in the second startup opening 2004, the process from step S302 to step S309, that is, the specific advance effect is executed. By ending the process without executing the lottery process of whether or not the specific announcement effect may not be executed based on the occurrence of the winning start in the second starting port 2004.

  Further, in the above-described example, when the specific notice effect is being executed based on the occurrence of the start winning in the first start port 2002, the variable display according to the execution number of the specific notice effect is executed. Although the specific announcement effect is terminated when a start winning in the second opening 2004 occurs, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the starting winning in the second opening 2004, In the case of starting the variation display of the decorative symbol, the specific announcement effect is temporarily interrupted, and the specific announcement effect is restarted based on the fact that the variation display of the decoration symbol based on the winning start in the second starting opening 2004 has been completed. Is also good. Also, in this case, a display indicating that the specific notice effect is interrupted (“notice effect interrupted”) is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the like during the change display of the decorative pattern based on the winning start in the second start opening 2004. You may make it. In addition, even when the specific notice effect is temporarily interrupted when the display of the decorative symbol based on the start winning in the second starting opening 2004 is started, the second special operation based on the starting winning in the second starting opening 2004 is performed. When the lottery result is a big hit, the process may be ended without restarting the specific notice effect.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, as a specific notice effect, a story completed with three stories is executed such that one story is displayed for each change display of the decorative pattern executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Since all three episodes of the specific notice effect can be expected to be displayed in the next variation display, the player will pay attention to the story being executed. . For this reason, in this example, when the specific notice effect is being performed, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 displays the story being executed (for example, “the third story”). .

  In the above-described embodiment, a series of stories is executed as a specific notice effect by dividing into a plurality of fluctuating displays of decorative symbols executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in correspondence with a plurality of fluctuating displays of special symbols. However, in the multiple display of the decorative pattern executed in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in response to the single variable display of the special symbol (so-called pseudo continuous fluctuation), a series of stories is produced as a specific notice effect. The decorative pattern may be divided into a plurality of variable displays and executed.

  Further, in this example, the specific announcement effect can be executed only when the number of reservations is “4” which is the maximum value of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in step S304 of the above-mentioned announcement determination process. However, even if the number of reservations is not the maximum value, the specific notice effect may be executed, and in this case, the number of executions of the specific notice effect is determined to be a number not exceeding the number of reservations. You may. For example, if a winning start to the first starting opening 2002 occurs in a state where the number of reserved first special symbols is “2”, “2” excluding a variable display based on the present winning award as the number of times of execution of the specific notice effect is performed. The number of times may not be exceeded. In addition, the probability of determining to execute the specific notice effect may be changed according to the number of reservations. For example, when the number of reservations is the maximum value, the specific notice effect is performed more than when the number of reservations is not the maximum value. Then, the probability of determination may be increased.

  Further, as described above, a series of stories as the specific announcement effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays that are out of reach without a reach. This fluctuation display without the reach is usually the most frequently executed fluctuation pattern, and is the one in which the player cannot have the highest expectation for the big hit. In this example, by executing the specific announcement effect over the fluctuation display without the reach, even if the fluctuation display in which the player can not expect the big hit is executed, the expectation for the big hit is executed. Can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, when the specific notice effect is executed, the variable display that executes the series of stories is always lost, and in the variable display immediately after completing this series of stories (the variable display that caused the execution of the specific notice effect) The probability of a big hit increases. That is, it is possible to make the player guess that the result of the variable display is incorrect in the three variable displays in which the series of stories is executed as the specific announcement effect, and the variable display immediately after completing the series of stories (specific While it is possible to expect the occurrence of a big hit for the variable display that is executed immediately after the end of the notice effect, it is possible to suppress excessive expectation for the occurrence of the big hit in the three variable displays that execute a series of stories.

  Further, in the variable display immediately after executing the series of stories as the specific notice effect (variable display that caused the execution of the specific notice effect), an effect related to the series of stories executed as the specific notice effect is executed. You may do so. As a result, the variable display that caused the execution of the specific notice effect can be executed in conjunction with the multiple display of the change that executes the specific notice effect, and the cause of executing the specific notice effect from the start of execution of a series of stories. It is possible to gradually increase the expectation of the player for the big hit by executing a related effect for a long time until the change display becomes.

  The story to be executed by one change display among the multiple change displays of the decorative symbol for executing the series of stories as the specific notice effect is changed by the number of suspensions when the change display is started. Therefore, it is possible to provide a new game property such as adjusting the driving of a game ball aiming at a change in the number of holdings in order to view all the different stories for each number of holdings. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lottery for determining whether or not to make a big hit is executed based on occurrence of a start winning prize in the first starting opening 2002 and a start winning prize in the second starting opening 2004. Yes, the greater the number of start winnings in the first starting opening 2002 and the number of starting winnings in the second starting opening 2004, the more advantageous to the player. In the pachinko machine 1 in which such a game is executed, a more detailed story is displayed as a specific announcement effect for a player whose advantage is reduced by stopping the driving of the game ball when the specific announcement effect is executed. In order to give the privilege of doing so, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's emotion due to the decrease in the degree of advantage and gradually increase the expectation of the big hit.

(Seventh embodiment)
[Monochrome preview production]
A modification of the above-described sixth embodiment will be described below as a seventh embodiment. First, in the seventh embodiment, until the number of reserves based on the preliminary determination command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is exhausted, the decorative display based on the reserve (variable display of the special symbol) is displayed. Each time the execution is performed, a monochrome preview effect is performed to determine whether or not the preview effect that appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes from color to monochrome (black and white). If the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has been occupied by a monochrome announcement effect before, a decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) based on final suspension is executed. Sometimes, an effect of entering a monochrome mode in which a background image in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is monochrome is executed. This monochrome announcement effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 284 to 288. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing the monochrome notice execution processing executed by the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 285 is an area occupation pattern determination table used to determine an area occupation pattern in the execution of the monochrome announcement effect. FIG. 286 is an example showing an area where a notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device in the execution of the monochrome notice effect. FIG. 287 and FIG. 288 are examples of the effect when the monochrome notice effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 284, in the monochrome announcement effect execution process executed in the effect control process (step S602), first, the number of holdings based on the preliminary determination command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is exhausted. In the meantime, it is determined whether or not to execute the monochrome preview effect over a plurality of display variations of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol), and if it is determined to execute the monochrome preview effect, the result of the monochrome preview effect is determined. Is performed to determine whether to enter the monochrome mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a pre-determination command has been transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on that a game ball has been won in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (start condition is satisfied). (Step S1300). If it is determined in step S1300 that the pre-determination command has been transmitted from main control board 1310 (YES), it is determined whether a monochrome notice execution flag described later has been set (step S1301). If it is determined in step S1301 that the monochrome notice execution flag has been set (YES), all of the fluctuation patterns already reserved except for the suspension based on a new winning are set to "normal". It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is “variation” (step S1302). If it is determined in step S1300 that the hold number command has not been transmitted from main control board 1310 (NO), or if it is determined in step S1301 that the monochrome notice execution flag has not been set (NO), It moves to step S1308.

  In addition, based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (start condition is satisfied), a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to determine the winning. Predetermination information on suspension (whether a big hit or a small hit, a big hit type if a big hit, or a reach effect as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 otherwise To be executed or the type of game effect to be executed) can be specified, and when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command, until the reservation based on the winning is exhausted, Prior determination information specified from the prior determination command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, when it is specified that the information is classified as “outside” as the preliminary determination information, the variation pattern executed in the suspension does not form a reach as a variation display of the decorative symbol (the reach effect is executed). ), It is determined that the change pattern of the "normal fluctuation" is set to stop displaying the losing symbol, and "big hit 1" to "big hit 12", "reach 1" to " If it is specified that the pattern is classified as any of the “reach 4”, the fluctuation pattern executed in the suspension forms the reach as the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, and then executes the reach effect, and the big hit symbol ( It is a variation pattern of “reach variation” in which stop display of “big hit 1” to “big hit 12” or a lost symbol (“reach 1” to “reach 4”) is set. It can be. Then, in step S1302, by specifying the type of the variation pattern based on the advance determination information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510, all the variation patterns that have already been reserved become “normal variation”. Is determined.

  If it is determined in step S1302 that all the fluctuation patterns already reserved except for the suspension based on the new winning are the fluctuation patterns of “normal fluctuation” (YES), the preliminary determination is made. A monochrome notice determination table (not shown) used to determine whether to execute the monochrome notice effect until the reserved number based on the command is exhausted is selected (step S1303). Then, the selected monochrome preview determination table is compared with the monochrome preview determination random number read from the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510 to determine whether or not to execute the monochrome preview effect (step S1304). Specifically, when the monochrome preview determination random number matches the determination value set in the monochrome preview determination table, it is determined that the monochrome preview effect is to be executed (YES in step S1304). It is determined that the monochrome announcement effect is not to be executed (NO in step S1304). In the monochrome announcement determination table, the monochrome announcement production is performed according to whether the variation pattern of the hold based on the new winning is the variation pattern of “normal variation” or the variation pattern of “reach variation”. Is performed, and when the variation pattern is the “reach variation”, the probability that the monochrome announcement effect is performed is higher than when the variation pattern is the “normal variation”. Is set to However, in the monochrome notice determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the monochrome notice effect in accordance with whether the lottery result regarding the hold based on the new winning is a big hit (or a small hit) or a loss. The determination may be made such that, when a big hit (or a small hit) is made, the probability of determining that the monochrome preview effect is executed is higher than in the case of a loss.

  If it is determined in step S1304 that the monochrome announcement effect is to be executed (YES), any one of the plurality of types of area occupancy patterns is used as a table corresponding to the number of holds specified from the advance determination command. An area occupation pattern determination table (FIG. 285) used for determination is selected (step S1305). In this area occupation pattern, each time a decorative design is fluctuated (special design fluctuating display) during execution of the monochrome notice effect, a notice effect is displayed in any area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. And whether or not the notice effect that has appeared is changed from color to monochrome (black and white). Then, the area occupation pattern determination table selected in response to the reservation number command is compared with the area occupation pattern determination random number read from the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510 to determine the type of the area occupation pattern (step S1306). If it is determined that the monochrome announcement effect is to be executed, a monochrome announcement execution flag indicating that the monochrome announcement effect is being executed is set and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510 (step S1307).

  On the other hand, except for the suspension based on the new winning in step S1302, any of the fluctuation patterns already reserved is not the fluctuation pattern of “normal fluctuation” (the fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation” is included). If it is determined (NO), or if it is determined in step S1304 that the monochrome announcement effect is not to be executed (NO), the process proceeds to step S1308 without executing the monochrome announcement effect. As described above, except for the suspension based on a new winning in step S1302, only when it is determined that all the fluctuation patterns already reserved are the fluctuation patterns of “normal fluctuation”, the monochrome announcement effect Can be executed, the display of the decoration pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of “normal fluctuation” does not even reach, and the expectation of a big hit cannot be increased. The black-and-white announcement effect is performed for the fluctuation pattern of “”, and there is a possibility that the black-and-white mode described later may be entered, and the expectation of entering the black-and-white mode can be increased. The discomfort caused by the operation can be eliminated.

  The area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, and is a table corresponding to the number of reservations specified from the advance determination command. It is a table used to determine an occupation pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285 (A), as an area occupation pattern determination table to be used when a hold is added based on a new winning when the number of holds is 1, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 285 (B), an area occupancy pattern determination table to be used when a hold is added based on a new winning when the number of holds is 2 is provided. A table in which the area occupation patterns 1 to 18 are set is provided, and FIG. 285 (C) shows an area occupation pattern determination table used when the number of holds is three and a hold is added based on a new winning. As shown in FIG. 7, a table in which area occupancy patterns 1 to 39 are set is provided.

  In addition, the area occupation pattern set in the area occupation pattern determination table includes a display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 every time a decorative symbol change display (special symbol change display) is performed during execution of the monochrome announcement effect. In which area of the area the notice effect is to be displayed, and whether or not the appearing notice effect is changed from color to monochrome (black and white) is set. Specifically, in the area occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (A), a notice effect is provided in each area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 while one hold already held is consumed. In the area occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (B), the two areas which have already been held are used up, and the respective areas of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are notified in advance. The effect is set so as to appear in stages, and in the area occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (C), while the three already reserved areas are consumed, the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed. The notice effect is set so that it appears in each area step by step.

  Also, when determining the area occupancy pattern, the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome preview effect (the hold determined to execute the monochrome preview effect when the hold was added based on a new winning) is described. Is a variation pattern of “normal variation” or a variation pattern of “reach variation”, the region occupation pattern that can be determined from the region occupation pattern determination table differs. It has become. Specifically, in the area occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (A), if the fluctuation pattern is “normal fluctuation”, one of the area occupation patterns 1 and 2 is determined, and the fluctuation of “reach fluctuation” is determined. If it is a pattern, one of the area occupation patterns 3 and 4 is determined. In the area occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (B), when the fluctuation pattern is “normal fluctuation”, one of the area occupation patterns 1 to 10 is determined, and the fluctuation pattern is “reach fluctuation”. In this case, one of the area occupation patterns 11 to 18 is determined. In the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (C), if the variation pattern is “normal variation”, one of the area occupancy patterns 1 to 22 is determined, and the variation pattern is “reach variation”. In this case, one of the area occupation patterns 23 to 39 is determined.

  As described above, when the fluctuation pattern of the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome preview production is the fluctuation pattern of “normal fluctuation”, the suspension that triggered the execution of the monochrome preview production is performed before the completion of the suspension. In addition, while a notice effect appears in each of the display areas of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a specific effect is provided for a part or all of the notice effect that has appeared (in this example, a point is set with respect to the notice effect). A part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is prevented from being executed by preventing the effect that the stick is pierced) from being executed and not changing part or all of the appearing effect from color to monochrome (black and white). To prevent them from being occupied by the announcement. In other words, by executing the black-and-white preview effect gassing, the black-and-white mode is expected to enter, but the black-and-white mode is not actually entered.

  Also, if the fluctuation pattern of the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome preview production is the fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation”, the main change occurs before the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome preview production is completed. A preview effect appears in each of the display areas of the liquid crystal display device 1600, and a specific effect (in this example, an effect in which a point stick is pierced in the preview effect) is performed for all of the appeared preview effects. In response to this, all of the noticed effects that have appeared are changed from color to monochrome (black and white), so that the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome noticeable effect. I try to enter the mode. In other words, by executing the monochrome notice effect, when entering the black and white mode, the reach is always formed as a variation display of the decorative symbol, and the reach effect is executed, so that the expectation of a big hit can be increased. Has become. In addition, when a specific effect is performed for all of the preview effects that appear in each of the display areas of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the entire display region of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 must be a monochrome preview effect. , And always enter the black-and-white mode, so that it is possible to pay attention to whether or not a specific effect is executed when a notice effect is produced. On the other hand, when the monochrome preview production gassing is executed, the monochrome mode is not entered, the reach is not formed as a variable display of the decorative pattern which is not the monochrome mode (the reach production is not performed), You can't raise the jackpot expectations. That is, when entering the black-and-white mode, it is a state suggesting that a big hit expectation (big hit expectation) is high, and when not entering the black-and-white mode, the big hit expectation (big hit expectation) is low. It can be said that the state suggests. Also, in the monochrome preview effect, the preview effect appears stepwise in each of the display areas of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. By changing the appeared preview effect from color to monochrome (black and white). The monochrome preview effect gradually occupies the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As the area occupied by the monochrome preview effect increases, the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 increases. The approach to the state occupied by the monochrome notice effect can be increased, so that expectations for entering the monochrome mode can be increased. In addition, when a notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the more the notice effect appears in a wider area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the more the notice effect that appears appears in color. By changing to monochrome (black and white), it is possible to occupy the wide area with the monochrome notice effect, and when the monochrome notice effect occupies the wide area, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 Is approaching a state in which the entire display area is occupied by the monochrome notice effect, the expectation of entering the monochrome mode can be increased.

  The area occupancy pattern set in the area occupancy pattern determination table includes a main liquid crystal display when a part of the already occupied hold is exhausted, except for the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome announcement effect. There is an area occupation pattern that is set so that the notice effect does not appear in the display area of the device 1600. More specifically, in the area occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (B), the area occupancy patterns 1, 2, 11, and 12 are used, and in the area occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. , 23-30, the announcement effect may appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when the first suspension already held is exhausted even if the execution of the monochrome announcement effect is determined. In other words, the setting is made so that the announcement effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when the already held next and subsequent holdings are exhausted. Further, in the area occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (B), the area occupation patterns 3, 4 and 17 to 22 have already been used in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (C). Before the last hold that has been held is consumed, a notice effect is made to appear in each of the display areas of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and when the last hold already held is consumed. Is set so that a notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As a result, it is difficult to know when the monochrome preview effect starts or ends when the monochrome reservation effect is already held, so that the player can always play the game with the expectation that the monochrome preview effect will be executed. You can do it.

  By the way, in the area occupation pattern, an area where a notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is shown in FIG. 286. As shown in FIG. 286, the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is divided into four equal parts, the area A above the display area, the area B to the left of the display area, the area C below the display area, and the display area. Is set to the area D on the right. In the present embodiment, the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is equally divided. However, the display area does not have to be equally divided. It may be.

  Further, in the area occupation pattern set in the area occupation pattern determination table, after a notice effect appears in a part of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the already held next and subsequent holdings are exhausted. At this time, it is set so that a new announcement effect appears in an area different from a part of the area where the announcement effect has already appeared. Until the announcement effect occupies the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a new announcement effect is set to appear stepwise in an area not occupied by the announcement effect. For example, in the region occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (C), in the region occupation pattern 31, after the notice effect has appeared in the region C, when the second reservation already reserved is completed, The notice effect is made to appear in the area D different from C, and when the third reservation already reserved is exhausted, the notice effect appears in the areas A and B different from the areas C and D. Like that. As described above, in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a new announcement effect appears in an area different from the area occupied by the announcement effect, so that the new announcement effect can be easily recognized. Even if various types of preview effects appear at the same time, it is difficult for a player to overlook any of the preview effects. Until the notice effect occupies the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a new notice effect can appear stepwise in an area not occupied by the notice effect. As long as there is an area that is not occupied by the notice effect, whether or not a new notice effect appears (specific effect for the notice effect that has appeared (in this example, a point stick sticks to the notice effect) Rendering), by changing the appearance of the noticed effect from color to monochrome (black and white), whether the area in which the noticed effect appears is occupied by the monochrome noticeable effect) It can be noticed.

  In the area occupancy pattern set in the area occupation pattern determination table, after a notice effect has appeared in a part of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the already held next and subsequent holdings are exhausted. At this time, the notice effect may be set to appear so that a part of the area where the notice effect has already appeared is included. For example, in the region occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (C), in the region occupation patterns 37 to 39, after a notice effect has appeared in any of the regions B, C, and D, the third already reserved is performed. When the reservation is exhausted, a notice effect is made to appear on the entire screen of the display area so as to include the areas B, C, and D.

  Further, in the area occupation pattern determination table, a notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and a specific effect is displayed on the entire screen (background image) where the notice effect does not appear (this example). In the example, an area occupation pattern (for example, an area occupation pattern 3 in the area occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (A)) in which an effect in which a dot bar is stuck on the entire screen (background image) is set. . In such an area occupation pattern, a notice effect does not appear for the areas A, B, C, and D, and a background image is displayed on the entire display area. By executing a specific effect (in this example, an effect in which a dot stick pierces the background image), the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be occupied by the monochrome background image. ing. Then, when the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome background image, the black and white mode is entered as in the case where the display area is occupied by the monochrome notice effect. For this reason, when the notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the expectation of a big hit cannot be increased, but there is a possibility that the specific effect will be executed on the contrary. , The expectation of entering black and white mode can be increased. In addition, when a notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and a specific effect is executed for the appearing notice effect (for example, the region in the region occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285A). Compared to the occupation pattern 4), the special effect is not performed in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the specific effect is performed on the entire screen (background image) where the preliminary effect does not appear. As a trigger, the case where the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome background image (for example, the area occupation pattern 3 in the area occupation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285A) is executed. Although the probability is low, the probability of a big hit after entering the black and white mode is high. That is, in the case of a big hit, the notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 than in the case of the loss, and the entire screen (background image) where the notice effect does not appear is displayed. Thus, the probability of determining the area occupation pattern in which the specific effect is executed is high. For this reason, even if the notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the probability that a big hit will occur if the specific effect is reversed (enters the black and white mode). It is possible to maintain high and big hit expectations.

  In the area occupation pattern determination table, an area occupation pattern in which a notice effect appears in each of the areas A, B, C, and D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (for example, the area occupation shown in FIG. 285 (A)) An area occupation pattern 4) in the pattern determination table is included. In an area occupation pattern in which a notice effect appears in each of the regions A, B, C, and D of the display region of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one or more notice effects appear in the regions A, B, C, and D. By performing a specific effect (in this example, an effect in which a point stick is pierced with respect to the notice effect) for all of the notice effects that have appeared, even though the decorative pattern is displayed once, The entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be occupied by a monochrome notice effect. It should be noted that, when one announcement effect appears in regions A, B, C, and D (full screen) of the display area of main liquid crystal display device 1600, regions A, B, and C of the display region of main liquid crystal display device 1600. , D (full screen), the probability of a big hit after entering the black-and-white mode is higher than when a plurality of announcement effects appear, and the expectation of a big hit when entering the black-and-white mode is further increased. Is available.

  Next, in the monochrome preview effect execution process, every time the start condition relating to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) is satisfied, until the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome preview effect is exhausted, step S1306. In addition to determining the type of the preview effect to appear in a part or the whole of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 determined as the area occupation pattern of the monochrome preview effect, the entire display region of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is monochrome. When occupied by the notice effect, control is performed to enter the monochrome mode as a result of the monochrome notice effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a change start command has been transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the establishment of the start condition for the change display of the decorative symbol (the change display of the special symbol) (step S1308). If it is determined in step S1308 that the fluctuation start command has been transmitted from the main control board 1310 (YES), it is determined whether the monochrome notice execution flag has been set (step S1309). If the change start command has not been transmitted from the main control board 1310 in step S1308 (NO), and if the monochrome notice execution flag has not been set in step S1309 (NO), the monochrome notice execution processing ends.

  If the monochrome notice execution flag is set in step S1309 (YES), the main control board 1310 changes the start condition based on the establishment of the start condition for the change display of the decorative symbol (the change display of the special symbol). By transmitting the start command, it is determined whether or not the hold that has triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is exhausted (step S1310). If it is determined in step S1310 that the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is before the digestion is completed (NO), the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is controlled based on the area occupation pattern determined in step S1306. As an area in the display area where the notice effect appears, the area corresponding to the remaining number of holds until the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is consumed is determined, and the type of the notice effect to appear in the area is determined. An announcement effect pattern determination table (not shown) used to determine the set announcement effect pattern is selected. In the preview effect pattern, one or more types of the preview effect are set so that the area determined as the area occupation pattern can be occupied. Then, based on the area determined as the area occupation pattern and the type of the variation pattern of the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome preview effect, a preview effect pattern determination table is selected, and the selected preview effect pattern determination table is selected. Then, the notification effect pattern determining random number read from the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510 is compared with the notification effect pattern determination random number, and the type of the notification effect (notification effect pattern) for occupying the area determined as the area occupation pattern is determined (step S1311). Here, before the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is completed, the decoration is based on the “normal fluctuation” fluctuation pattern by transmitting the fluctuation start command from the main control board 1310. The symbol change display is executed. During the execution of such decorative symbol change display, the type of the announcement effect determined in step S1311 appears in a part or the whole of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Is performed as described above (step S1312).

  The announcement effect pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, and is a table corresponding to the region determined as the region occupation pattern, and the announcement effect pattern in which the type of the announcement effect to appear in the region is set. Is a table used to determine the value. Specifically, as a preview effect pattern determination table used when a preview effect appears in region A of the display area of main liquid crystal display device 1600, a table in which a preview effect capable of occupying region A is set. Is provided, and as a preview effect pattern determination table used when a preview effect appears in the area B of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a table in which a preview effect capable of occupying the area B is set. A table in which a notice effect that can occupy the area C is provided as a notice effect pattern determination table used when a notice effect appears in the area C of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is provided. And a preview effect pattern used when a preview effect appears in the area D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As a decision table, announcement attraction that can be occupied it is set tables is provided a region D.

  In the case where the notice effect appears over a plurality of areas such as the area A and the area B in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the notice effect in which both the area A and the area B can be occupied. An announcement effect pattern determination table in which a combination of an announcement effect capable of occupying the area A and an announcement effect capable of occupying the area B is provided. In other words, the notice effect at the time of executing the monochrome notice effect is only required to be able to occupy the area determined as the area occupation pattern, and is a notice effect that appears over a plurality of areas or a combination of a plurality of notice effects. There may be.

  Here, at the time of execution of the monochrome announcement effect, the announcement effect that can appear in a part or the whole of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is the same as that of the main liquid crystal display other than at the time of execution of the monochrome announcement effect. It can be made to appear in part or all of the display area of the device 1600. In this manner, other than when the monochrome preview effect is performed, it is determined whether to execute each of the plurality of types of the preview effects, based on the variation pattern of whether or not a big hit and whether or not the reach effect is performed. By doing so, depending on the type of the notice effect, there is a notice effect with a high expectation of a big hit and a notice effect with a low expectation of a big hit. Expectations can be raised.

  At the time of execution of the monochrome announcement effect, when determining the type of the announcement effect to appear in the area determined as the area occupation pattern in step S1311, the announcement with a low expectation of a big hit other than the execution of the monochrome announcement effect is made. The production is decided with a high probability. With this, even when a notice effect with a low expectation of a big hit appears except when the monochrome notice effect is executed, the expectation of the big hit cannot be increased, but a notice effect with a low expectation of the big hit appears. Later, when the appearing notice effect changes from color to monochrome (black and white), it can be determined that the notice effect is being executed as a part of the monochrome notice effect, not just the notice effect. Even if a low notice effect appears, the expectation that the monochrome notice effect is executed can be increased.

  When the type of the preview effect to appear in the area determined as the area occupation pattern in step S1311 is determined at the time of executing the monochrome preview effect, the variation pattern of the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome preview effect is Depending on whether the variation pattern is a “normal variation” or a “reach variation” variation pattern, the probability of determining a high-expected preview effect that is a big hit other than during the execution of the monochrome preview effect is different. I have to. More specifically, when the variation pattern of the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome preview effect is the variation pattern of “reach variation”, the execution of the monochrome announcement production is greater than that of the “normal variation” variation pattern. A highly anticipated announcement effect that is a big hit at times other than time is determined with a high probability. As described above, when the fluctuation pattern of the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome preview effect is the fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation”, the black-and-white mode is entered, so that the expected degree of big hit is expected. After the appearance of a high preview production, when the preview production that has been changed from color to monochrome (black and white), the probability of entering black and white mode as a result of the monochrome preview production increases, and the expectation of entering the black and white mode is high. Can be enhanced.

  When the type of the preview effect to appear in the area determined as the area occupation pattern in step S1311 is determined at the time of executing the monochrome preview effect, the variation pattern of the suspension that triggered the execution of the monochrome preview effect is “ Depending on whether the variation pattern of the `` reach variation '' is a variation pattern of performing a reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit or a variation pattern of performing a reach effect of a low expectation with a large hit, The probability of determining an announcement effect having a high expectation to be a big hit other than when the announcement effect is executed is made different. Specifically, when the variation pattern of the hold that has triggered the execution of the monochrome notice production is a variation pattern of executing a reach production with a high expectation of a big hit among the variation patterns of “reach variation” (for example, As the pre-judgment information, "big hit 3", "big hit 4", "big hit 7", "big hit 8", "big hit 11", "big hit 11" among "big hit 1"-"big hit 12", "reach 1"-"reach 4" When it is specified that any one of “big hit 12”, “reach 3”, and “reach 4” has been classified), and the fluctuation pattern is to execute a low-expected reach effect that is a big hit ( For example, as the pre-judgment information, “big hit 1” to “big hit 12”, “reach 1” to “reach 4”, “big hit 1”, “big hit 2”, “big hit 5”, “big hit 6”, “big hit 9” ","Big 10), “reach 1”, or “reach 2” is specified), and a higher-than-expected notice effect that will be a big hit except during the execution of the monochrome notice effect is specified. The decision is made with a high probability. For this reason, when the announcement effect with a high expectation of a big hit changes from color to monochrome (black and white) and enters the black and white mode, the announcement effect with a high expectation of a big hit changes from color to monochrome (black and white). As a result, the probability of executing a reach effect with a high expectation of being a big hit during execution of the black and white mode is higher than in the case of entering the black and white mode, thereby increasing the expectation of the big hit.

  At the time of executing the monochrome preview effect, when determining the type of the preview effect to appear in the area determined as the area occupation pattern in step S1311, the lottery result regarding the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome preview effect is determined to be a big hit. Or a loss, may be determined according to whether it is a big hit or a loss, depending on whether it is a big hit or a loss, a high-expected notice production that becomes a big hit other than when the monochrome notice production is executed May be different. Specifically, when the lottery result of the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome preview production is a big hit, the announcement production with a high expectation of becoming a big hit other than at the time of execution of the monochrome preview production is higher than when the lottery is lost. May be determined with a high probability. Even in such a case, when the high-expected notice effect of a big hit changes from color to monochrome (black and white) and the black-and-white mode is entered, the high-expected notice effect of the big hit is changed from color to monochrome. By changing to (black and white), the probability of a big hit during execution of the black and white mode is higher than when the black and white mode is entered, and the expectation of a big hit can be increased.

  Further, at the time of execution of the monochrome announcement effect, a step-up announcement effect can be used as an announcement effect to appear in the area determined as the area occupation pattern in step S1311. The step-up notice effect is to provide an effect image corresponding to each of a plurality of stages, and to determine whether a big hit or not, or to perform a reach effect, based on a variation pattern of the first stage of the plurality of stages. This is an effect in which effect images corresponding to a predetermined stage are sequentially made to appear. In the step-up notice effect, the higher the predetermined stage, the higher the expectation of a big hit is set. Then, of the effect image corresponding to the first stage, the effect image corresponding to the second stage, the effect image corresponding to the third stage, and the effect image corresponding to the fourth stage, among the plurality of stages, for example, a main liquid crystal display Appear in areas A, B, C, and D of the display area of the device 1600. As the stage of the step-up notice effect progresses, the notice effect is occupied in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The area is increased.

  In the case where the above-described step-up notice effect is used, an effect image corresponding to the first stage, an effect image corresponding to the second stage, an effect image corresponding to the third stage, and an effect image corresponding to the fourth stage among a plurality of stages. Each of the rendered images is caused to appear in the areas A, A, B, A, B, C, A, B, C, and D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, for example. When the stage of the notice effect has progressed, the effect image is displayed in an area that is larger than the region before the stage proceeds, so that the area occupied by the notice effect in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 increases. It may be. Further, when the first stage of the step-up notice effect is started, the effect image appears in the region A of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and when the process proceeds to the second stage, from the region A to the region B, The effect image is enlarged, and when the process proceeds to the third stage, the effect image is enlarged from the regions A and B to the region C. When the process proceeds to the fourth stage, the effect image is extended to the regions A, B, C and D. When the stage of the step announcement effect is advanced, the area where the effect image of the announcement effect is displayed is enlarged, so that the area occupied by the announcement effect in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 increases. You may make it. Further, when the area occupied by the notice effect in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 does not increase in spite of the progress of the step-up notice effect, the probability of a big hit is increased. It becomes possible to pay attention to whether or not the area occupied by the notice effect increases, as well as whether or not the stage of the notice effect proceeds.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1310 that the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome preview effect has been exhausted (YES), the main process ends before the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome preview effect has been exhausted. When the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome notice effect, an effect of entering a monochrome mode in which the background image in the display region of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is monochrome is executed. In the case where a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is not occupied by the monochrome preview effect (it is a fake of the monochrome preview effect), the main liquid crystal display device does not enter the monochrome mode. An effect is performed in which the background image in the display area 1600 is colored and the normal background image is maintained (step S1313). If it is determined that the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome announcement effect has been exhausted, the monochrome announcement execution flag is reset and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510 (step S1314).

  As described above, when the black and white mode is entered at the time of the suspension of the hold which is the trigger of the execution of the monochrome notice effect, the background image in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is set to monochrome, and the black and white mode is entered. If there is no background image, the background image in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is colored as in the case of the normal background image (other than the monochrome mode), so that the number of colors of the background image is different. In this manner, when the monochrome mode is entered by executing the monochrome announcement effect, the reach is always formed as the variation display of the decorative pattern in the monochrome mode, and the reach effect is executed, so that a big hit is achieved. Although it is possible to raise expectations, the background image becomes monochrome, and the number of colors of the background image is smaller than usual, so that a different impression from the normal time can be given to the player, and a big hit can be achieved. Expectations can be raised in conjunction with expectations. Also, when entering the monochrome mode, the background image will be monochrome, but on the front of the background image, as in the usual case, the display of the decorative pattern will be changed or appear after entering the monochrome mode. Is displayed in color, the images related to the lottery results can be distinguished from the background images. In other words, when entering the black and white mode, by making it easy for the player to recognize the images related to the lottery results, the display of the variation of the decorative pattern and the image of the notice effect are displayed when the image of the notice effect appears. On the other hand, the player can be noticed more than usual. On the other hand, if the user does not enter the black-and-white mode, no reach is formed as the display of the variation of the decorative symbol (no reach effect is performed), and the expectation of a big hit cannot be increased. For this reason, if the user does not enter the black and white mode, it is not possible to expect the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern, and since the probability of the appearance of the notice effect is low, it is not possible to expect the notice effect. It becomes color and the number of colors of the background image is greater than in the black and white mode, so even if the image of the announcement effect does not appear, it can give the player a lively impression, and the expectation that it will be a big hit Can be reduced.

  A specific example of the monochrome announcement effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 287 and 288. FIG. 287 and FIG. 288 show that the change pattern of the hold added based on the new winning when the number of holds is 2 (the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome preview effect) is “Reach change”. (Classification into any of “big hit 1” to “big hit 12” and “reach 1” to “reach 4” as the pre-judgment information). 5 shows a case where the area occupation pattern 15 is determined. In the area occupation pattern 15 of the area occupation pattern determination table at the time of the hold 2, a notice effect is given to the areas A and B in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 while the first hold already held is consumed. Is set to appear, and while the second hold already held is consumed, the notice effect is set to appear in the areas C and D in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. I have.

  First, as shown in FIG. 287 (A), when a hold is added based on a new winning when the number of holds is two, the first hold already held is exhausted. In the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. 287. During the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 287 (B), the area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is determined based on the area occupation pattern 15 of the area occupation pattern determination table at the time of suspension 2. A preview effect across A and B appears. Specifically, as a notice effect that extends over areas A and B, an effect is performed in which a person playing mahjong discards the mahjong tile and shouts, "How about this!" At this time, during the execution of the notice effect across the areas A and B, as shown in FIG. 287 (C), the effect (specific effect) of the Mahjong dot stick piercing the appearing notice effect is executed. By doing so, the appearing announcement effect is changed from color to monochrome (black and white). As a result, in the areas A and B of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the monochrome notice effect continues to be occupied, and as shown in FIG. 287 (D), the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped at the lost symbol (in this example, the symbol “153”). As for the variable display of the decorative pattern, by maintaining the color tone, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the decorative pattern from being difficult to visually recognize.

  Then, before the next variation display of the decorative pattern is started, as shown in FIG. 287 (E), at the substantially center of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the character “black and white chance!” The display is made in a small and light and light form, and mahjong dots appear on the upper, lower, left and right sides of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, so that the announcement effect across the areas A and B can be made simply. It is possible to recognize that the execution of the monochrome notice effect has been started, instead of the notice effect (notice effect other than the monochrome notice effect).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 287 (F), the next hold (the second hold already held when the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome announcement effect is added) is digested, In the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started again. At this time, the mahjong dots appearing on the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 scatter outside the display area. 287. During the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 287 (G), the area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is determined based on the area occupation pattern 15 of the area occupation pattern determination table at the time of suspension 2. A notice effect across C and D appears. More specifically, as a notice effect that extends over the areas C and D, an effect is performed in which a person playing mahjong shouts, "I can win!" While looking at the mahjong tiles. At this time, during the execution of the notice effect across the regions C and D, as shown in FIG. 287 (H), an effect (specific effect) that a mahjong dot stick pierces the appearing notice effect is executed. By doing so, the appearing notice effect is changed from color to monochrome (black and white). As described above, the monochrome notice effect occupies not only the areas A and B but also the areas C and D in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, so that all the display areas of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are displayed. The area will be occupied by the monochrome preview effect. Note that in the case of a monochrome preview effect gasse, a dot stick does not pierce the preview effect appearing over the areas C and D, and a part of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Is not occupied by the black-and-white announcement effect, so that it does not enter the black-and-white mode.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 288 (I), the character "black and white mode standby" is displayed substantially at the center of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, so that the monochrome mode is entered as a result of the monochrome announcement effect. Can be recognized that it has been announced. Then, as shown in FIG. 288 (J), in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the change display of the decorative symbol is stopped at the lost symbol (in this example, the symbol “153”). Thereafter, before the next variation display of the decorative pattern is started, as shown in FIG. 288 (K), the character “entering black-and-white mode” is displayed substantially at the center of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. By being displayed in a large and shaded manner, it is possible to clearly recognize that the monochrome display mode will be entered as a result of the monochrome notice effect in the next variation display of the decorative pattern.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 288 (L), the next hold (the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect) is consumed, so that the decorative pattern is fluctuated in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It starts again. At this time, by entering the monochrome mode in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the background image becomes monochrome, giving an impression different from the color which is the background image in the normal mode other than the monochrome mode. Fuels the expectations of the elderly. Then, in the case of entering the monochrome mode, as shown in FIG. 288 (M), based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern of the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome preview effect is the fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation”. Since the reach (in this example, the symbol “7”) is formed as a variable display of the decorative symbol, and the reach effect is executed thereafter, the expectation of a big hit can be increased. In addition, when the lottery result is a big hit, the change display of the decorative symbol is stopped at the big hit symbol (in this example, the middle symbol of “7”), and when the lottery result is a loss, the change of the decorative symbol is changed. The display is stopped at a lost symbol (in this example, a middle symbol other than “7”).

  In addition, before and after the mahjong dot sticks into the notice effect appearing in a part or the whole area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the appearing notice effect is changed from color to monochrome (black and white). ), And there is no change in the image itself of the character or the like depicted as the notice effect. Data for specifying the coordinate position of the depiction in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and data for specifying the color scheme of the depiction are stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, data specifying the coordinate position of the depiction in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be commonly used, and an increase in the amount of data stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

  Also, when a mahjong dot sticks into a preview effect appearing in a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, when the monochrome preview effect occupies the area, The ratio of the area occupied by the monochrome notice effect in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be indicated. For example, when the monochrome notice effect is occupied in the regions A and B in the display region of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the display region of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 (may be the display region of the main liquid crystal display region 1600). , "50%" is displayed as the ratio of the area occupied by the monochrome preview effect, so that the ratio of the area occupied by the monochrome preview effect and the remaining area that must be occupied by the monochrome preview effect Can be clearly recognized. In addition, when displaying the ratio of the area occupied by the monochrome notice effect in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, the monochrome notice effect occupies a part or the entire area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. May be displayed in advance of the display, and in such a case, the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 can be noticed. Can be viewed with confidence.

  Further, in the present embodiment, only the variation display of the decorative pattern that has entered the black and white mode as a result of the monochrome preview effect is the target of the monochrome mode, and at the time when the variation display of the decorative pattern that has entered the monochrome mode ends. The black-and-white mode is also ended, but not only the decorative display that has entered the black-and-white mode, but also the monochrome mode has been continued over multiple display of the decorative pattern after the black-and-white mode has been entered. May be. For example, even when the suspension is interrupted, the black and white mode may be continued until the decorative symbols are changed and displayed a plurality of times. As described above, when the monochrome mode is continued over the variable display of the decorative symbols a plurality of times after entering the black and white mode, even if a large hit is not obtained in the variable display of the decorative symbols entering the monochrome mode, The black-and-white mode is continued even after the next variation display of the decorative symbol, so that the expectation of a big hit can be maintained.

  In the above description, when the monochrome preview effect occupies the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the monochrome mode is entered from the start of the next variation display of the decorative pattern. Not limited. For example, a monochrome preview effect is executed in one or a plurality of display variations of the decorative pattern, and the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome preview effect, that is, the monochrome preview effect. By entering the black and white mode in the decorative pattern change display at the time of the occupation, and when entering the black and white mode, the reach is formed within the decorative pattern change display (reach effect is executed), It is possible to increase the expectation that a big hit will occur even when the decoration design is changed and displayed when the notice effect is occupied. In addition, for example, among the announcement effects that can appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the degree of expectation to be a big hit (big hit expectation degree) is high, and the entire area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 ( In the case where a specific high-expected notice effect displayed on the entire screen) appears, when a mahjong dot sticks into the specific high-expected notice effect, all the display areas of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are displayed. Is entered in the monochrome mode by being occupied by the monochrome announcement effect, so that even when the hold is not stored, the expectation of entering the monochrome mode can be increased.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It is.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol is not limited to be performed preferentially, and a maximum of eight variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be held are displayed in the order in which the hold occurred. The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine of a type in which the game is started in the (starting order in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 in the order of occurrence of the winning) (the reservation is exhausted).

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main frame 4 Gaming board 5 Door frame 1100 Gaming area 1180 Function display unit 1200 Gaming panel 1900 Liquid crystal display device 2100 Attacker device 2101 First starting port 2101a Always winning port 2101b Special winning port 2102 Second starting port 2111 Movable piece 2301 General-purpose gate 4000 Main board 4010 Peripheral control board 4100 Main control board

Claims (1)

After the start condition is satisfied, a lottery means for performing a lottery based on the start condition being satisfied,
Display control means for starting variation control of the display means based on establishment of the start condition and deriving and displaying a display result according to the lottery result;
Advantageous giving means which can give a special advantageous state advantageous to a player in response to the start of the fluctuation control executed when the start condition is satisfied and the special result is won in the lottery by the lottery means. And
The advantage giving means for giving the special advantageous state advantageous to the player in response to the start of the fluctuation control, the lottery means for executing the lottery, a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and Of the sub-control means for controlling the effect based on the command transmitted from the main control means, is controlled by the main control means,
The game value that can be enjoyed by the player during the period in which the special advantage state can be provided by the advantage providing means is greater than the game value that can be enjoyed when a big hit occurs. A gaming machine characterized by the following.